University of California • Berkeley
Gift of
MRS. GRIFFITH C. EVANS
^1-^^ l^i cLu^o^ !'^'
HISTORY OF
THE THEORY OF PROBABILITY.
A HISTOEY
OF THE
MATHEMATICAL THEORY OF PROBABILITY
T
FROM THE TIME OF PASCAL TO TEAT
OF LAPLACE.
BY
I. TODHUNTEH, M.A., F.RS.
1
.O
\XYr O' C P . UlMOAy^^ ^
(Q^aml)til5ge nnti Hoution:
MACMILLAN AND CO.
I86^
CambritJcjc:
PRINTED BY C. J. CLAY. M.A.
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS.
PREFACE.
The favourable reception which has been granted to my History
of the Calculus of Variations daring the Xineteenth Century has
encouraged me to undertake another work of the same kind.
The subject to which I now invite attention has high claims to
consideration on account of the subtle problems which it involves,
the valuable contributions to analysis which it has produced, its
important practical applications, and the eminence of those who
have cultivated it.
The nature of the problems which the Tlieory of Probability
contemplates, and the influence which this Theory has exercised
on the progress of mathematical science and also on the concerns
of practical life, cannot be discussed within the limits of a Preface ;
we may however claim for our subject all the interest wdiicli illus-
trious names can confer, by the simple statement that nearly
every gi-eat mathematician within the range of a century and a
half will come before us in the course of the history. To mention
only the most distinguished in this distinguished roll — we sliall
find here — Pascal and Format, worthy to be associated by kindred
genius and character— De Moivre with his rare powers of analysis,
which seem to belong only to a later epoch, and which justify the
honour in which he was held by Newton — Leibnitz and the emi-
nent school of which he may be considered the founder, a school
including the Bernoullis and Euler — D'Alembert, one of the most
conspicuous of those who brought on the French revolution, and
Condorcet, one of the most illustrious of its victims — Lagrange
and Laplace who survived until the present century, and may be
regarded as rivals at that time for the suj^remacy of the mathe-
matical world.
I will now give an outline of the contents of the book.
The first Chapter contains an account of some anticipations
of the subject which are contained in the writings of Cardan,
Kepler and Galileo.
The second Chapter introduces the Chevalier de Mere' who
having puzzled himself in vain over a problem in chances,
fortunately turned for help to Pascal : the Problem of Points is
discussed in the correspondence between Pascal and Format, and
thus the Theory of Probability begins its career.
Vi PREFACE.
The third Chapter analyses the treatise in which Huygens in
1659 exhibited what was then known of the subject. Works such
as this, which present to students the opportunity of becoming
acquainted with the speculations of the foremost men of the
time, cannot be too highly commended ; in this respect our sub-
ject has been fortunate, for the example which was afforded by
Huygens has been imitated by James Bernoulli, De Moivre and
Laplace — and the same course might with great advantage be
pursued in connexion with other subjects by mathematicians in
the present day.
The fourth Chapter contains a sketch of the early history of
the theory of Permutations and Combinations ; and the fifth Chap-
ter a sketch of the early history of the researches on Mortality
and Life Insurance. Neither of these Chapters claims to be ex-
haustive ; but they contain so much as may suffice to trace the
connexion of the branches to which they relate with the main sub-
ject of our history.
The sixth Chapter gives an account of some miscellaneous in-
vestigations between the years 1670 and 1700. Our attention is
directed in succession to Caramuel, Sauveur, James Bernoulli,
Leibnitz, a translator of Huygens's treatise whom I take to be
Arbuthnot, Roberts, and Craig — the last of whom is notorious for
an absurd abuse of mathematics in connexion with the probability
of testimony.
The seventh Chapter analyses the Ars Conjectandi of James
Bernoulli. This is an elaborate treatise by one of the greatest
mathematicians of the age, and although it was unfortunately
left incomplete, it affords abundant evidence of its author's ability
and of his interest in the subject. Especially we may notice the
famous theorem which justly bears the name of James Bernoulli,
and which places the Theory of Probability in a more commanding
position than it had hitherto occupied.
The eighth Chapter is devoted to Montmort. He is not to be
compared for mathematical power with James Bernoulli or De
Moivre; nor does he seem to have formed a very exalted idea of
the true dignity and importance of the subject. But he was en-
thusiastically devoted to it; he spai^ed no labour himself, and his
influence direct or indirect stimulated the exertions of Nicolas
Bernoulli and of De Moivre.
The ninth Chapter relates to De Moivre, containing a full
analysis of his Doctrine of Chances, De Moivre brought to bear
on the subject mathematical powers of the highest order ; these
powers are especially manifested in the results which he enun-
ciated respecting the great problem of the Duration of Play.
Unfortunately he did not publish demonstrations, and Lagrange
PREFACE. Vii
himself more than fifty years later found a good exercise for his
analytical skill in supplying the investigations ; this circumstance
compels us to admire De Moivre's powers, and to regret the loss
which his concealment of his methods has occasioned to mathe-
matics, or at least to mathematical history.
De Moivre's Doctrine of Chances formed a treatise on the
subject, full, clear and accurate ; and it maintained its place as a
standard work, at least in England, almost down to our own day.
The tenth Chapter gives an account of some miscellaneous
investigations between the years 1700 and 17-30. These inves-
tio-ations are due to Nicolas Bernoulli, Arbuthnot, Browne, Mairan,
Nicole, Buffon, Ham, Thomas Simpson and John Bernoulli.
The eleventh Chapter relates to Daniel Bernoulli, containing
an account of a series of memoirs published chiefly in the volumes
of the Academy of Petersburg ; the memoirs are remarkable for
boldness and originality, the first of them contains the celebrated
theory of Moral Expectation.
The twelfth Chapter relates to Euler ; it gives an account of
his memoirs, which relate j^rincipally to certain games of chance.
The thirteenth Chapter relates to D'Alembert ; it gives a full
account of the objections which he urged against some of the
fundamental principles of the subject, and of his controversy with
Daniel Bernoulli on the mathematical investisj-ation of the ^ain to
human life which would arise from the extirpation of one of the
most fatal diseases to which the human race is liable.
The fourteenth Chapter relates to Bayes ; it explains the me-
thod by which he demonstrated his famous theorem, which may
be said to have been the origin of that part of the subject which
relates to the probabilities of causes as inferred from observed
effects.
The fifteenth Chapter is devoted to Lagrange ; he contributed
to the subject a valuable memoir on the theory of the errors of
observations, and demonstrations of the results enunciated by De
Moivre respecting the Duration of Play.
The sixteenth Chapter contains notices of miscellaneous inves-
tigations between the years 1750 and 17^0. This Chapter brings
before us Kaestner, Clark, Mallet, John Bernoulli, Beguelin,
Michell, Lambert, Buffon, Fuss, and some others. The memoir
of Michell is remarkable ; it contains the famous argument for the
existence of design drawn from the fact of the closeness of certain
stars, like the Pleiades.
The seventeenth Chapter relates to Cordorcet, who published a
large book and a long memoir upon the Theory of Probability.
He chiefly discussed the probability of the correctness of judg-
ments determined by a majority of votes ; he has the merit of first
vlii PREFACE.
submitting this question to mathematical investigation, but his
own results are not of great practical importance.
The eighteenth Chapter relates to Trembley. He wrote several
memoirs with the main design of establishing by elementary
methods results which had been originally obtained by the aid of
the higher branches of mathematics ; but he does not seem to
have been very successful in carrying out his design.
The nineteenth Chapter contains an account of miscellaneous
investigations between the years 1780 and 1800. It includes- the
following names ; Borda, Malfatti, Bicquilley, the writers in the
mathematical portion of the Encydopedie Methodique, D'Anieres,
Waring, Prevost and Lhuilier, and Young.
The twentieth Chapter is devoted to Laplace ; this contains a
full account of all his writings on the subject of Probability. First
his memoirs in chronological order, are analysed, and then the great
work in which he embodied all his own investigations and much
derived from other writers. 1 hope it will be found that all the
parts of Laplace's memoirs and work have been carefully and
clearly expounded ; I would venture to refer for examples to
Laplace's method of approximation to integrals, to the Problem of
Points, to James Bernoulli's theorem, to the problem taken from
Buffon, and above all to the famous method of Least Squares.
With respect to the last subject I have availed myself of the
guidance of Poisson's luminous analysis, and have given a general
investigation, applying to the case of more than one unknown
element. I hope I have thus accomplished something towards ren-
dering the theory of this important method accessible to students.
In an Appendix I have noticed some writings which came
under my attention during the printing of the work too late to be
referred to their proper places.
I have endeavoured to be quite accurate in my statements,
and to reproduce the essential elements of the original works
which I have analysed. I have however not thought it indispen-
sable to preserve the exact notation in which any investigation
w^as first presented. It did not appear to me of any importance
to retain the specific letters for denoting the known and unknown
quantities of an algebraical problem which any writer may have
chosen to use. Very often the same problem has been dis-
cussed by various writers, and in order to compare their methods
with any facility it is necessary to use one set of symbols through-
out, although each writer may have preferred his peculiar set.
In fact by exercising care in the choice of notation I believe that
my exposition of contrasted methods has gained much in brevity
and clearness without any sacrifice of real fidelity.
I have used no symbols which are not common to all mathc-
PREFACE. IX
matical literature, except \n wliicli is an abbreviation for the pro-
duct 1 . 2, ...'?i, frequently but not universally employed : some such
symbol is much required, and I do not know of any which is pre-
ferable to this, and I have accordingly introduced it in all my
publications.
There are three important authors whom I have frequently
cited whose works on Probability have passed through more than
one edition, Montmort, De Moivre, and Laplace : it may save trouble
to a person who may happen to consult the present volume if I
here refer to pages 79, 13G, and 495 where I have stated which
editions I have cited.
Perhaps it may appear that I have allotted too much space to
some of the authors whose works I examine, especially the more
ancient ; but it is difficult to be accurate or interesting if the nar-
rative is confined to a mere catalogue of titles : and as experience
shews that mathematical histories are but rarely undertaken, it
seems desirable that they should not be executed on a meagre
and inadequate scale.
I will here advert to some of my predecessors in this depart-
ment of mathematical history ; and thus it will appear that I have
not obtained much assistance from them.
In the third volume of Montucla's Histoire des Mathematiqiies
pages 380—426 are devoted to the Theory of Probability and the
kindred subjects. I have always cited this volume simply by the
name Montucla, but it is of course well known that the third and
fourth volumes were edited from the author's manuscripts after his
death by La Landc. I should be sorry to apj^ear ungrateful to
Montucla; his work is indispensable to the student of mathema-
tical history, for whatever may be its defects it remains without
any rival. But I have been much disappointed in what he says
respecting the Theory of Probability ; he is not copious, nor accu-
rate, nor critical. Hallaui has characterised him with some severity,
by saying in reference to a point of mathematical history, " Mon-
tucla is as superficial as usual :" see a note in the second Chapter
of the first volume of the History of the Literature of Europe.
There are brief outlines of the history involved or formally
incorporated in some of the elementary treatises on the Theory
of Probability : I need notice only the best, which occurs in the
Treatise on Probability published in the Library of L^seful Know-
ledge. This little work is anonymous, but is known to have been
written by Lubbock and Drinkwater ; the former is now Sir John
Lubbock, aud the latter changed his name to Drinkwater-Bethune :
see Professor De Morgan's Arithmetical Books... page 106, a letter
by him in the Assurance Magazine, Yol. TX. page 238, and another
letter by him in the Times, Dec. 16, 1862. The treatise is inter-
X PREFACE.
esting and valuable, but I have not been able to agree uniformly
with the historical statements which it makes or implies.
A more ambitious work bears the title Histoire dii Calcul
des Prohabilites depuis ses origines jusqud nos jours par Charles
Gouraud... Paris, 184^8. This consists of 148 widely printed octavo
pages ; it is a popular narrative entirely free from mathematical
symbols, containing however some important specific references.
Exact truth occasionally suffers for the sake of a rhetorical style
unsuitable alike to history and to science; nevertheless the general
reader will be gratified by a lively and vigorous exhibition of the
whole course of the subject. M. Gouraud recognises the value of
the purely mathematical part of the Theory of Probability, but
will not allow the soundness of the applications which have been
made of these mathematical formulse to questions involving moral
or political considerations. His history seems to be a portion of a
very extensive essay in three folio volumes containing 1929 pages
written when he was very young in competition for a prize pro-
posed by the French Academy on a subject entitled Theorie de la
Certitude; see the Rapport by M. Franck in the Seances et Tra-
vaux de V Academie des Sciences morales et politiques, Vol. x.
pages 372, 382, and Vol. XI. page 139. It is scarcely necessary
to remark that M. Gouraud has gained distinction in other branches
of literature since the publication of his work which we have here
noticed.
There is one history of our subject which is indeed only a
sketch but traced in lines of light by the hand of the great
master himself: Laplace devoted a few pages of the introduction
to his celebrated work to recording the names of his predecessors
and their contributions to the Theory of Probability. It is much
to be regretted that he did not supply specific references through-
out his treatise, in order to distinguish carefully between that
which he merely transmitted from preceding mathematicians and
that which he originated himself.
It is necessary to observe that in cases where I point out a
similarity between the investigations of two or more writers I do
not mean to imply that these investigations could not have been
made independently. Such coincidences may occur easily and
naturally without any reason for imputing unworthy conduct to
those who succeed the author who had the priority in publication.
I draw attention to this circumstance because I find with regret
that from a passage in my former historical work an inference has
been drawn of the kind which I here disclaim. In the case of a
writer Uke Laplace who agrees with his predecessors, not in one or
two points but in very many, it is of course obvious that he must
have borrowed largely, and we conclude that he supposed the
PREFACE. XI
erudition of his contemporaries would be sufficient to prevent
them from ascribing to himself more than was justly due.
It will be seen that I have ventured to survey a very extensive
field of mathematical research. It has been mv aim to estimate
carefully and impartially the character and the merit of tlie
numerous memoirs and works which I have examined; my criti-
cism has been intentionally close and searching, but I trust never
irreverent nor unjust. I have sometimes explained fully the
errors which I detected; sometimes, when the detailed exposition
of the error would have recpiired more space than the matter
deserved, I have given only a brief indication which may be
serviceable to a student of the original production itself I have
not hesitated to introduce remarks and developments of my
own whenever the subject seemed to require them. In an
elaborate German review of my former puljlication on mathe-
matical history it was suggested that my own contributions were
too prominent, and that the purely historical character of the
work was thereby impaired; but I have not been induced to
change my plan, for I continue to think that such additions as I
have been able to make tend to render the subject more in-
telligible and more complete, without disturbing in any serious
degree the continuity of the history. I cannot venture to expect
that in such a difficult subject I shall be quite free from error
either in my exposition of the labours of others, or in my own
contributions; but I hope that such failures will not be numerous
nor important. I shall receive most gratefully intimations of any
errors or omissions whicli may be detected in the work.
I have been careful to corroborate mv statements bv exact
quotations from the originals, and these I have given in the lan-
guages in which they were published, instead of translating them ;
the course which I have here adopted is I understand more agree-
able to foreign students into whose hands the book may fall. I
have been careful to preserve the historical notices and references
which occurred in the works I studied ; and by the aid of the
Table of Contents, the Chronological List, and the Index, which
accompany the present volume, it will be easy to ascertain with
regard to any proposed mathematician down to the close of the
eighteenth century, whether he has written au}'thing upon the
Theory of Probability.
I have carried the history down to the close of the eighteenth
century ; in the case of Laplace, however, I have passed beyond this
limit: but by far the larger part of his labours on the Theory of
Probability were accomplished during tlie eighteenth century,
though collected and republished by him in his celebrated work in
the early part of the present century, and it was therefore conve-
Xll PREFACE.
nient to include a full account of all his researches in the present
volume. There is ample scope for a continuation of the work
which should conduct the history through the period which has
elapsed since the close of the eighteenth century ; and I have
already made some progress in the analysis of the rich materials.
But when I consider the time and labour expended on the present
volume, although reluctant to abandon a long cherished design,
I feel far less sanguine than once I did that I shall have the
leisure to arrive at the termination I originally ventured to pro-
pose to myself
Although I wish the present work to be regarded princijDally as
a history, yet there are two other aspects under which it may
solicit the attention of students. It may claim the title of a com-
prehensive treatise on the Theory of Probability, for it assumes
in the reader only so much knowledge as can be gained from
an elementary book on Algebra, and introduces him to almost
every process and every species of problem which the literature of
the subject can furnish; or the work may be considered more spe-
cially as a commentary on the celebrated treatise of Laplace, —
and perhaps no mathematical treatise ever more required or more
deserved such an accompaniment.
My sincere thanks are due to Professor De Morgan, himself
conspicuous among cultivators of the Theory of Probability, for
the kind interest which he has taken in my work, for the loan of
scarce books, and for the suggestion of valuable references. A
similar interest was manifested by one prematurely lost to science,
whose mathematical and metaphysical genius, attested by his
marvellous work on the Laws of Thought, led him naturally and
rightfully in that direction which Pascal and Leibnitz had marked
with the unfading lustre of their approbation; and who by his
rare ability, his wide attainments, and his attractive character,
gained the affection and the reverence of all who knew him.
I. TODHUNTER.
Cambridge,
May, 1865.
CONTENTS.
PAGE
Chapter I. Cardan. Kepler. Galileo . . l
Commentary on Dante, i. Cardan, Be Ludo Alece, i, Kepler, De Stella
Nova, 4. Galileo, Considerazione sopra il Giuco del Dadi, 4 ; Lettcre, 5.
Chapter II. Pascal and Fermat .... 7
Quotations from Laplace, Poisson, and Boole, 7. De Mare's Problems, 7,
Problem of Points, 9. De Merc's dissatisfaction, 11. Opinion of Leib-
nitz, 12. Fermat's solution of the Problem of Points, 13. Roberval, 13.
Pascal's error, 14. The Arithmetical Triangle, 17. Pascal's design, 20.
Contemporary mathematicians, 21.
Chapter III. Huygens 22
De liatiodniis in Ludo Alece, 22. English translations, 23. Huygens's solu-
tion of a problem, 24 ; Problems proposed for solution, 25.
Chapter IV. On Combinations . . . .20
"William Buckley, 26. Bernardus Bauhusius and Erycius Puteanus, 27. Quo-
tation from James Bernoulli, 28. Pascal, 29. Schooten, 30. Leibnitz,
Dissertaiio de Arte Comhinatoria, 31 ; his fruitless attempts, 33. Wallis'3
Algebra, 34; his errors, 35.
Chapter V. Mortality and Life Insurance . 37
John Graunt, 37. Van Hudden and John de Witt, 38, Sir William Petty, 39.
Correspondence between Leibnitz and James Bernoulli, 40. Halley, 4 1 ;
his table, 42 ; geometrical illustration, 43.
Chapter YI. Miscellaneous Investigations between
THE YEARS 1670 AND 1700 -ii
Caramuel's Matliesis Biceps, 44 ; his errors, 45, 46. Sauveur on Bassette, 46.
James Bernoulli's two problems, 47. Leibnitz, 47; his error, 48. Of
the Laws of Chance, ascribed to Motte, 48 ; really by Arbuthnot, 49 ;
quotation from the preface, 50 ; error, 52 ; problem proposed, 53.
Francis Roberts, An Arithmetical Paradox, 53, Craig's Theologies Chris-
tiance Principia Maihematica, 54. Credihility of Human Testimony, 55.
Chapter YII. Jaihes Bernoulli . . . .56
Correspondence with Leibnitz, 56 ; Ars Conjectandi, 57. Error of Montucia, ^S.
Contents of the Ars Conjectandi, 58. Problem of Points, 59. James
Bernoulli's own method for problems on chances, 60; his solution of a
XIV CONTENTS.
PAGE
problem on Duration of Play, 6i ; he points out a plausible mistake, 63;
treats of Permutations and Combinations, 64 ; his Numbers, 65 ; Pro-
blem of Points, 66 ; his problem with a false but plausible solution, 67 ;
his famous Theorem, 71 ; memoir on infinite series, 73; letter on the game
of Tennis, 75. Gouraud's opinion, 77.
Chapter VIII. Montmoet 78
Fontenelle's Eloge, 78. Two editions of Montmort's book, 79 ; contents of the
book, 80; De Moivre's reference to Montmort, 81; Montmort treats
of Combinations and the Binomial Theorem, 82 ; demonstrates a formula
given by De Moivre, 84 ; sums certain Series, 86 ; his researches on Pha-
raon, 87; Treize, 91; Bassette, 93. Problem sob ed by a lady, 95. Pro-
blem of Points, 96; Bowls, 100; Duration of 1 lay, loi ; Her, 106;
Tas, no. Letter from John Bernoulli, 113. Nicolas Bernoulli's game of
chance, 116. Treize, 120. Summation of Series, 121. Waldegrave's
problem, 122, Summation of Series, 125. Malebranche, 126. Pascal, 128.
Sum of a series, 129. Argument by Arbuthnot and 's Gravesande on
Divine Providence, 130. James Bernoulli's Theorem, 131. Montmort's
views on a History of Mathematics, 132. Problems by Nicolas Ber-
noulli, 133. Petersburg Problem, 134.
Chapter IX. De Moivre 135
Testimony of John Bernoulli and of Newton, 135. Editions of the Doc-
trine of Chances, 136. De Mensura Sortis, 137. De Moivre's approximate
formula, 138; his Lemma, 138; Waldegrave's problem, 139; Duration
of Play, 140; Doctrine of Chances, 141; Litroduction to it, 142; con-
tinued fractions, 143; De Moivre's approximate formula, 144; Duration
of Play, 147; Woodcock's problem, 147; Bassette and Pharaon, 150;
Numbers of Bernoulli, 151; Pharaon, 152; Treize or Rencontre, 153;
Bowls, 159; Problem on Dice, 160; Waldegrave's problem, 162;
Hazard, 163; Whist, 164; Piquet, 166; Dirration of Play, 167; Recur-
ring Series, 178; Cuming's problem, 182 ; James Bernoulli's Theorem, 183 ;
problem on a Run of Events, 184; Miscellanea Analytica, 187; contro-
versy with Montmort, 188; Stirling's theorem, 189; Arbuthnot's argu-
ment, 193.
Chapter X. Miscellaneous Investigations BET^yEEN
THE YEARS 1700 AND 1750 191?
Nicolas Bernoulli, 194. Barbeyrac, 196. Arbuthnot's argument on Divine
Providence, 197. Waldegrave's problem, 199. Browne's translation of
Huygens's treatise, 199. Mairan on Odd and Even, 200. Nicole, 201.
BufFon, 203. Ham, 203. Trente-et-quarante, 205. Simpson's Nature and
Laws of Chance, 206; he adds something to De Moivre's results, 207;
sums certain Series, 210; his Miscellaneous Tracts, ■21 1. Problem by John
Bernoulli, 212.
CONTENTS. XV
PAGB
Chapter XL Daniel Bernoulli . . . .213
Theory of Moral Expectation, 213; Petersburg Problem, 220; Inclination of
planes of Planetary Orbits, 122 ; Small-pox, 224; mean dm-ation of mar-
riages, 229; Daniel Bernoulli's problem, 231 ; Births of boys and girls, 235;
Errors of observations, 236,
Chapter XIL Euler 239
Treize, 239; Mortality, 240; Annuities, 242; Pharaon, 243; Lottery, 2^5;
Lottery, 247; notes on Lagrange, 249; Lottery, 250; Life Assurance, 256.
Chapter XIII. D'Alembert 258
Croix ou Pile, 258; Petersburg Problem, 259; Small-pox, 265; Petersburg
Problem, 275; Mathematical Expectation, 276; Inoculation, 277; Croix
ou Pile, 279; Petersburg Problem, 280; Inoculation, 282; refers to
Laplace, 287; Petersburg Problem, 288; error in a problem, 290.
Chapter XI Y. Bates 2.94
Bayes's theorem, 295; his mode of investigation, 296; area of a curve, 298.
Price's example, 299. Approximations to an area, 300,
Chapter XV. Lagrange 301
Theory of errors, 301; Recurring Series, 313; Problem of Points, 315; Dura-
tion of Play, 316; Annuities, 320.
Chapter XVI. Miscellaneous Investigations be-
tween the years iToO AND 1780 . . .321
Kaestner, 321. Dodson, 322. Hoyle, 322. Clark's Laics of CJiauce, 323.
Mallet, 325, John Bernoulli, 325. Beguelin, on a Lottery problem, 3 28 ;
on the Petersburg Problem, 332. Michell, 332. John Bernoulli, 335.
Lambert, 335. Mallet, 337. Emerson, 343. Buffon, on gambling, 344 ;
ou the Petersburg Problem, 345 ; his own problem, 347. Fuss, 349.
Chapter XVIL Condorcet 351
Dlscours Preliminaire, 351; Essai, 353; first Hj-pothesis, 353; second Hypo-
thesis, 357; problem on a Run of Events, 361 ; election of candidates for
an ofl&ce, 370; problems on inverse probability, 37S; Risk which may be
neglected, 3S6 ; Trial by Jury, 388; advantageous Tribunals, 391; ex-
pectation, 392 ; Petersburg Problem, 393 ; evaluation of feudal rights, 395 ;
probability of future events, 398; extraordinary facts, 400; credibility
of Roman History, 406. Opinions on Condorcet's merits, 409.
XVI CONTENTS.
PAGR
Chapter XVIII, Teembley . . . . • . 411
Problem of Points, 412; probability of causes, 413; problem of births, 415;
lottery problem, 421; small-pox, 423; duration of marriages, 426; theory
of errorS; 428 ; Her, 429.
Chapter XIX. Miscellaneous Investigations be-
tween the years 1780 AND 1800 . . . 432
Prevost, 432. BorJa, 432. Malfatti, 434. Bicquilley, 438. Encyclopedie Me-
tkodique, 441. D'Anieres, 445, Waring, 446. Ancillon, 453. Prevost and
Lhuilier, 45 3. Young, 463.
Chapter XX. Laplace 464
Memoirs of 1774, 464; recurring series, 464; Duration of Play, 465; Odd
and Even, 465; probability of causes, 465 ; theory of errors, 468; Peters-
burg Problem, 470; Memoir of 1773, 473; Odd and Even, 473; Problem
of Points, 474 ; Duration of Play, 474 ; Inclination of Orbits of Comets, 475 ;
Memoir of 1781, 476 ; Duration of Play, 476; approximation to integrals,
478; problem of births, 482; theory of errors, 484; Memoir of 1779, 484 ;.
Generating Functions, 484; Memoir of 1782, 485; Memoirs of 1783, 485;
Memoir of 1809, 487; Memoir of 18 10, 489; Connaissance des Terns, 490;
Problem on Comets, 491; Theorie...des Probalilites, 495; editions of
it, 495; dedication to Napoleon, 496; Laplace's researches in Physical
Astronomy, 499^ Pascal's argument, 500; illusions, 501; Bacon, 503;
Livre I. 505 ; Generating Functions, 505 ; Method of approximation, 512 ;
examples, 516; Livre II. first Chapter, 527; second Chapter 527; Odd
and Even, 527; Problem of Points, 528; Fourth Supplement, 532; Walde-
grave's Problem, 535; Run of Events, 539; Inclination of the Orbits of
Planets, 542; election of candidates, 547; third Chapter, 548; James
Bernoulli's Theorem, 548; Daniel Bernoulli's problem, 558; fourth Chap-
ter, 560; Poisson's problem, 561; Least Squares, 571; history of this
subject, 588; fifth Chapter, 589. BufFon's problem, 590; sixth Chapter, 592;
a Definite Integral, 594; seventh Chapter, 598; eighth Chapter, 601 ;
Small-pox, 60 r; duration of marriages, 602; ninth Chapter, 605 ; exten-
sion of James Bernoulli's Theorem, 607 ; tenth Chapter, 609 ; inequal-
ity, 609; eleventh Chapter, 609; first Supplement, 610; second Supple-
ment, 611; third Supplement, 612; quotation fi-om Poisson, 613.
Appendix . 614
John de Witt, 614. Rizzetti, 614. Kahle, 615. 's Gravesande, 616. Quotation
from John Bernoulli, 616. Mendelsohn, 616. Lhuiher, 618. Waring, 618.
r
CHAPTER I.
CARDAN. KEPLER. GALILEO.
1. The practice of games of chance must at all times have
directed attention to some of the elementary considerations of the
Theory of Probability. Libri finds in a commentary on the Divina
Commedia of Dante the earliest indication of the different proba-
bility of the various throws which can be made with three dice.
The passage from the commentary is quoted by Libri ; it relates to
the first line of the sixth canto of the Purgatorio. The com-
mentary was published at Venice in 1477. See Libri, Histoire
des Sciences Mathematiques en Italie, Vol. ii. p. 188.
2. Some other intimations of traces of our subject in older
writers are given by Gouraud in the following passage, unfor-
tunately without any precise reference.
Les anciens paraissent avoir eutierement ignore cette sorte de calcul.
L'eruditioii moderne en a, il est vrai, trouve quelques traces dans un
poeme en latin barbare intitule : De Vetidq, oeuvre d'un nioine du Bas-
Empire, dans un commentaire de Dante de la fin du XY^ siecle, et
dans les ecrits de plusieurs matliematiciens italiens du moyeu age et
de la renaissance, Pacioli, Tartaglia, Peverone ; Go\irsi\\d,IIisto{re
du Calcul des Frohahilites, page 3.
3. A treatise by Cardan entitled De Ludo Alece next claims
our attention. This treatise was published in 1663, in the first
volume of the edition of Cardan's collected works, long after
Cardan's death, which took -place in 1576.
1
2 CARDAN.
Montmort says, " Jerome Cardan a donne un Traits De Ludo
Alese ; mais on n'y trouve que de I'erudition et des reflexions
morales." Essai d'Analyse.-.ip. XL. Libri says, "Cardan a ecrit
un traite special de Ludo Alece, ou se trouvent resolues plusieurs
questions d'analyse combinatoire." Histoire, Vol. ill. p. 176. The
former notice ascribes too little and the latter too much to
Cardan.
4. Cardan's treatise occupies fifteen folio pages, each containing
two columns; it is so badly printed as to be scarcely intelligible.
Cardan himself was an inveterate gambler ; and his treatise may
be best described as a gambler's manual. It contains much mis-
cellaneous matter connected with gambling, such as descriptions of
games and an account of the precautions necessary to be employed
in order to guard against adversaries disposed to cheat : the
discussions relating to chances form but a small portion of the
treatise.
5, As a specimen of Cardan's treatise we will indicate the
contents of his thirteenth Chapter. He shews the number of
cases which are favourable for each throw that can be made with
two dice. Thus two and twelve can each be thrown in only one
way. Eleven can be thrown in two ways, namely, by six appear-
ing on either of the two dice and five on the other. Ten can be
thrown in three ways, namely, by five a23pearing on each of the
dice, or by six appearing on either and four on the other. And
so on.
Cardan proceeds, *'Sed in Ludo fritilli undecim puncta adjicere
decet, quia una Alea potest ostendi."...The meaning apparently is,
that the person who throws the two dice is to be considered to
have thrown a given number when one of the dice alone exhibits
that number, as well as when the number is made up by the sum
of the numbers on the two dice. Hence, for six or any smaller
number eleven more ftivourablc cases arise besides those already
considered.
Cardan next exhibits correctly the number of cases which are
favourable for each throw that can be made with three dice. Thus
three and eighteen can each be thrown in only one way ; four and
CARDAN, 3
seventeen can each be thrown in three ways ; and so on. Cardan
also gives the following list of the number of cases in Fritillo :
12 34 5 6789 10 11 12
108 111 115 120 12G 133 33 36 37 36 33 26
Here we have corrected two misprints by the aid of Cardan's
verbal statements. It is not obvious what the table means. It
might be supposed, in analogy with what has already been said,
that if a person throws three dice he is to be considered to have
thrown a given number when one of the dice alone exhibits that
number, or when two dice together exhibit it as their sum, as
well as when all the three dice exhibit it as their sum : and this
would agree wdth Cardans remark, that for numbers higher than
twelve the favourable cases are the same as those already given by
him for three dice. But this meaning does not agree with Cardan's
table ; for with this meaning we should proceed thus to find the
cases favourable for an ace : there are 5^ cases in which no ace
appears, and there are 6' cases in all, hence there are 6^ — 5^ cases
in which we have an ace or aces, that is 91 cases, and not 108 as
Cardan gives.
The connexion between the numbers in the ordinary mode of
using dice and the numbers which Cardan gives appears to
be the following. Let n be the number of cases which are favour-
able to a given throw in the ordinary mode of using three dice,
and N the number of cases favourable to the same throw in
Cardan's mode ; let m be the number of cases favourable to the
given throw in the ordinary mode of using two dice. Then for any
throw not less than thirteen, N=n ; for any throw between seven and
twelve, both inclusive, N = Sni + n ; for any throw not greater than
six, i\^= 108 + 3?/i + n. There is only one deviation from this law ;
Cardan gives 26 favourable cases for the throw twelve, and our
proposed law would give 3 + 25, that is 28.
We do not, however, see what simple mode of playing with
three dice can be suo'o-ested which shall oive favourable cases
agreeing in number with those determined by the above law.
6. Some further account of Cardan's treatise will be found
1—2
^ KEPLER.
in the Life of Cardan, by Henry Moiiey, Vol. I. pages 92 — 95.
Mr Morley seems to misunderstand the words of Cardan which he
quotes on his page 92, in consequence of which he says that
Cardan " lays it down coolly and philosophically, as one of his first
axioms, that dice and cards ought to be played for money." In
the passage quoted by Mr Morley, Cardan seems rather to admit
the propriety of moderation in the stake, than to assert that there
must be a stake; this moderation Cardan recommends elsewhere,
as for example in his second Chapter. Cardan's treatise is briefly
noticed in the article Prohability of the English Cyclopcedia.
7. Some remarks on the subject of chance were made by
Kepler in his work De Stella Kova in pede Serjjentarii, which was
published in 1606. Kepler examines the different opinions on the
cause of the appearance of a new star which shone with great
splendour in 1604, and among these opinions the Epicurean notion
that the star had been produced by the fortuitous concurrence
of atoms. The whole passage is curious, but we need not repro-
duce it, for it is easily accessible in the reprint of Kepler's works
now in the course of publication ; see Joannis Kepleri Astronomi
Opera Omnia edidit Dr Ch. Frisch, Vol. ii. pp. 714 — 716. See
also the Life of Kepler in the Library of Useful Knoiuledge, p. 13.
The passage attracted the attention of Dugald Stewart ; see his
Works edited by Hamilton, Vol. I. p. 617.
A few words of Kepler may be quoted as evidence of the
soundness of his opinions ; he shows that even such events as
throws of dice do not happen without a cause. He says,
Quare hoc jactu Venus cecidit, illo canis 1 Nimh'um lusor liac vice
tessellam alio latere arripuit, aliter marm condidit, aliter intus agitavit,
alio impetii animi maniisve projecit, aliter interflavit aura, alio loco
alvei imj)egit. JSTihil hie est, quod sua causa sic caruerit, si quis ista
subtilia posset coiisectavi.
8. The next investigation which we have to notice is that by
Galileo, entitled Consider azione sopyu il Giuco dei Dadi. The date
of this piece is unknown; Galileo died in 1642. It appears that
a friend had consulted Galileo on the following dilBculty : with
three dice the number 9 and the number 10 can each be produced
by six different combinations, and yet experience shows that the
GALILEO. b
number 10 is oftener thrown than the number 9. Galileo makes
a careful and accurate analysis of all the cases which can occur,
and he shows that out of 216 possible cases 27 are favourable
to the appearance of the number 10, and 25 are favourable to the
appearance of the number 9.
The piece will be found in Vol. xiv. pages 293 — 290, of Le
Opere cU Galileo Galilei, Firenze, 1855. From the Biblio-
grafia Galileiana given in Vol. XV. of this edition of Galileo's
works we learn that the piece first aj^peared in the edition of the
works published at Florence in 1718 : here it occurs in Vol. III.
pages 119 — 121.
9. Libri in his Histoire des Sciences Mathematiques en Italie,
Vol. IV. page 288, has the following remark relating to Galileo :
..."Ton voit, par ses lettres, qu'il s'etait longtemps occupe d'une
question delicate et non encore resolue, relative h, la maniere de
compter les erreurs en raison geometrique ou en proportion
arithm^tique, question qui touche ^galement au calcul des pro-
babilites et a Tarithmetique politique." Libri refers to Vol. ii.
page 00, of the edition of Galileo's works published at Florence
in 1718 ; there can, however, be no doubt, that he means Vol. iii.
The letters will be found in Vol. xiv. pages 231 — 284' of Le
Opere... di Galileo Galilei, Firenze, 1855 ; they are entitled Lettere
intorno la stwia di un cavallo. We are informed that in those
days the Florentine gentlemen, instead of wasting their time
in attention to ladies, or in the stables, or in excessive eraminfr.
were accustomed to improve themselves by learned conversation
in cultivated society. In one of their meetings the following
question was proposed ; a horse is really worth a hundred crowns,
one person estimated it at ten crowns and another at a thousand ;
which of the two made the more extra vagrant estimate ? Amoncr
the persons who were consulted was Galileo ; he pronounced the
two estimates to be equally extravagant, because the ratio of a
thousand to a hundred is the same as the ratio of a hundred to
ten. On the other hand, a priest named Nozzolini, who was also
consulted, pronounced the higher estimate to be more extravagant
than the other, because the excess of a thousand above a hundred
is gi'eater than that of a hundred above ten. Various letters of
6 GALILEO.
Galileo and Nozzolini are printed, and also a letter of Benedetto
Castelli, who took the same side as Galileo ; it appears that Galileo
had the same notion as Nozzolini when the question was first
23roposed to him, but afterwards changed his mind. The matter
is discussed by the disputants in a very lively manner, and some
amusing illustrations are introduced. It does not appear, however,
that the discussion is of any scientific interest or value, and the
terms in which Libri refers to it attribute much more importance
to Galileo's letters than they deserve. The Florentine gentlemen
when they renounced the frivolities already mentioned might have
investigated questions of greater moment than that which is here
brought under our notice.
CHAPTER II.
PASCAL AND FERMAT.
10. The indications which we have given in tlie preceding
Chapter of the subsequent Theory of Probability are extremely
slight; and we find that \vriters on the subject have shewn a jus-
tifiable pride in connecting the true origin of their science with
the great name of Pascal. Thus,
EUe doit la naissance h deux Georaetres frangais du dix-septieme
si^cle, si fecond en grands hommes et en grandes decouvertes, et peut-
^tre de tons les siecles celiii qui fait le plus d'honneur a I'esprit
humain. Pascal et Fermat se proposerent et resolurent quelqucs pro-
blemes sur les probabilites... Laplace, Tlieorie . . .des Prob. 1st edition,
page 3.
XJn probleme relatif aux jeux de liasard, propose a un austere jan-
seniste par un homme du monde a ete I'origine du calcul des probabilites.
Poisson, Recherches sur la Prob. page 1.
The problem which the Chevalier de Mere (a reputed gamester)
proposed to the recluse of Port Royal (not yet witlidi-awn from the in-
terests of science by the more distracting contemplation of the "great-
ness and the misery of man''), was the first of a long series of problems,
destined to call into existence new methods in matliematical analvsis,
and to render valuable service in the practical concerns of life." Boole,
Laws of Thought, page 243.
11. It appears then that the Chevalier de Mere proposed
certain questions to Pascal ; and Pascal con^esponded with Fer-
mat on the subject of these questions. Unfortunately only a
portion of the correspondence is now accessible. Three letters
8 PASCAL AND FERMAT.
of Pascal to Format on this subject, which were all written in
165-i, were published in the Varia Opera Mathematica D. Petri
de Fer7nat... Tolosse, 1679, pages 179 — 188. These letters are
reprinted in Pascal's works ; in the edition of Paris, 1819, they
occur in Yol. iv. pages 360 — 888. This volume of Pascal's works
also contains some letters written by Format to Pascal, which are
not given in Format's works ; two of these relate to Probabilities,
one of them is in reply to the second of Pascal's three letters, and
the other apparently is in reply to a letter from Pascal which
has not been preserved ; see pages 385 — 388 of the volume.
We will quote from the edition of Pascal's works just named.
Pascal's first letter indicates that some previous correspondence
had occurred which we do not possess ; the letter is dated July 29,
1654. He begins.
Monsieur, L'impatience me prend aussi-bieii qu a vous ; et quoique
je sois encore au lit, je ne puis m'empeclier de vous dire que je re9us
hier au soir, de la part de M. de Carcavi, votre lettre sur les partis,
que j'admire si fort, que je ne puis vous le dire. Je n'ai pas le loisir de
m'etendre ; mais en un mot vous avez trouve les deux partis des des et
des parties dans la parfaite justesse : j'en suis tout satisfait ; car je ne
doute plus maintenant que je ne sois dans la verite, apres la rencontre
admirable oil je me trouve avec vous. J'admire bien da vantage la
metliode des parties que celle des des ; j'avois vu plusieurs personnes
trouver celle des des, comme M. le chevalier de Mere, qui est celui qui
m'a propose ces questions, et aussi M. de Roberval ; mais M. de Mere
n'avoit jamais pu trouver la juste valeur des parties, ni de biais pour
y arriver : de sorte que je me trouvois seul qui eusse connu cette
proportion.
Pascal's letter then proceeds to discuss the problem to which it
appears from the above extract he attached the greatest importance.
It is called in English the Problem of Points, and is thus enun-
ciated : two players want each a given number of points in order
to win ; if they separate without playing out the game, how
should the stakes be divided between them ?
The question amounts to asking what is the probability which
each player has, at any given stage of the game, of winning the
game. In the discussion between Pascal and Fermat it is sup-
PASCAL AND FERMAT. 9
posed that the players have equal chances of whining a single
point.
12. We will now give an account of Pascal's investigations
on the Problem of Points ; in substance we translate his words.
The following is my method for determining the share of each
player, when, for example, two players play a game of three points
and each player has staked 32 pistoles.
Suppose that the first player has gained two points and the
second player one point ; they have now to play for a point on
this condition, that if the first player gains he takes all the money
which is at stake, namely 6^ pistoles, and if the second player
gains each player has two points, so that they are on terms of
equality, and if they leave off playing each ought to take 32
pistoles. Thus, if the first player gains, 64 pistoles belong to
him, and if he loses, 32 pistoles belong to him. If, then, the
players do not wish to play this game, but to separate without
playing it, the first player w^ould say to the second " I am certain of
32 pistoles even if I lose this game, and as for the other 32 pistoles
perhaps I shall have them and perhaps you will have them ; the
chances are equal. Let us then divide these 32 pistoles equally
and give me also the 32 pistoles of which I am certain." Thus
the first player wdll have 48 pistoles and the second 16 pistoles.
Next, suppose that the first player has gained two points and
the second player none, and that they are about to play for a
point ; the condition then is that if the first player gains this
point he secures the game and takes the 64 pistoles, and if the
second player gains this point the players will then be in the
situation already examined, in which the first player is entitled
to 48 pistoles, and the second to 16 pistoles. Thus if they do not
wish to play, the first player would say to the second " If I gain
the point I gain 64 pistoles ; if I lose it I am entitled to 48
pistoles. Give me then the 48 pistoles of which I am certain,
and divide the other 16 equally, since our chances of gaining the
point are equal." Thus the first player will have 56 pistoles and
the second player 8 pistoles.
Finally, suppose that the first player has gained one point and
10 PASCAL AND FERMAT.
the second player none. If they proceed to play for a point the
condition is that if the first player gains it the players will be in
the situation first examined, in which the first player is entitled to
5Q pistoles ; if the first player loses the point each player has then
a point, and each is entitled to 32 pistoles. Thus if they do not
wish to play, the first player would say to the second " Give me
the 82 pistoles of which I am certain and divide the remainder of
the 56 pistoles equally, that is, divide 24 pistoles equally." Thus
the first player will have the sum of 32 and 12 pistoles, that is
44 pistoles, and consequently the second will have 20 pistoles.
13. Pascal then proceeds to enunciate two general results
without demonstrations. We will give them in modern notation.
(1) Suppose each player to have staked a sum of money
denoted by A ; let the number of points in the game be n+ 1, and
suppose the first player to have gained n points and the second
player none. If the players agree to separate without playing
A
any more the first player is entitled to 2 A — ~ .
(2) Suppose the stakes and the number of points in the game
as before, and suppose that the first player has gained one point
and the second player none. If the players agree to separate
without playing any more, the first player is entitled to
, 1 . 3 . 5 . . . (2n - 1)
■^2.4.6... 2/1 •
Pascal intimates that the second theorem is difficult to prove.
He says it depends on two propositions, the first of which is purely
arithmetical and the second of which relates to chances. The
first amounts in fact to the proposition in modern works on
Algebra which gives the sum of the co-efficients of the terms in
the Binomial Theorem. The second consists of a statement of
the value of the first player's chance by means of combinations,
from which by the aid of the arithmetical proposition the value
above given is deduced. The demonstrations of these two results
may be obtained from a general theorem which will be given later
in the present Chapter ; see Art. 23. Pascal adds a table which
PASCAL AND FERMAT. 11
exhibits a complete statement of all the cases which can occur in
a game of six points.
14. Pascal then proceeds to another topic. He says
Je n'a pas le temps de vous envoyer la demonstration d'une difficulte
qui etonnoit fort M. de Mere : car il a tres-bon esprit, mais il n'est pas
geometre ; c'est, comme vous savez, un grand defaut; etmeme ilne com-
prend pas qu'une ligne mathematique soit divisible a I'infini, et croit
fort bien entendre qu'elle est composee de points en nombre fini, et
jamais je n*ai pu Ten tirer ; si vous pouviez le faire, on le rendroit
parfait. II me disoit done qu'il avoit trouve faussete dans les nombres
par cette raison.
The difficulty is the following. If we undertake to throw a
six with one die the odds are in favour of doing it in four throws,
being as 671 to 625 ; if we undertake to throw two sixes with two
dice the odds are not in favour of doing it in twenty-four throws.
Nevertheless 24 is to 86, which is the number of cases with two
dice, as 4 is to 6, which is the number of cases with one die.
Pascal proceeds
"Voilk quel etoit son grand scandale, qui lui faisoit dire hautement
que les propositions n'etoient pas constantes, et que I'arithmetique se
d^mentoit. Mais vous en verrez bien aisement la raison, par les prin-
cipes o^ vous etes.
15. In Pascal's letter, as it is printed in Fermat's works, the
name de Mere is not given in the passage we have quoted in the
preceding article ; a blank occurs after the 21. It seems, however,
to be generally allowed that the blank has been filled up correctly
by the publishers of Pascal's works : Montmort has no doubt on
the matter ; see his p. XXXII. See also Gouraud, p. 1 ; Lubbock
and Drinkwater, p. 41. But there is certainly some difficulty. For
in the extract which we have given in Art. 11, Pascal states that
M. de Mere could solve one problem, celle des des, and seems to
imply that he failed only in the Problem of Points. Montucla
says that the Problem of Points w^as proposed to Pascal by the
Chevalier de Mer^, " qui lui en proposa aussi quelques autres sur le
jeu de des, comme de detemiiner en combien de coups on pent
parier d'amener une rafle, &c. Ce chevalier, plus bel esprit que
12 PASCAL AND FERMAT.
geom^tre ou analyste, rdsolut a la verite ces derni^res, qui ne sont
pas bien difficiles ; mais il echoua pour le precedent, ainsi que
Roberval, a qui Pascal le proposa." p. 384. These words would
seem to imply that, in Montucla's opinion, M. de Mere was not the
person alluded to by Pascal in the passage we have quoted in
Article 14. We may remark that Montucla was not justified in
suofsrestinof that M. de Mere must have been an indifferent mathe-
matician, because he could not solve the Problem of Points ; for
the case of Roberval shews that an eminent mathematician at that
time might find the problem too difficult.
Leibnitz says of M. de Mere, " II est vrai cependant que le Che-
valier avoit quelque genie extraordinaire, meme pour les Mathe-
matiques ;" and these words seem intended seriously, although in
the context of this passage Leibnitz is depreciating M. de Merd.
Leibnitii, Opera Omnia, ed. Dutens, Vol. ii. part 1. p. 92.
In the Nouveaiix Essais, Li v. IV. Chap. 16, Leibnitz says,
*' Le Chevalier de Mere dont les Agrements et les autres ouvrages
ont ete imprimes, homme d'un esprit jDenetrant et qui etoit joueur
et philosophe."
It must be confessed that Leibnitz speaks far less favourably of
M. de Mere in another place. Opera, Vol. V. p. 203. From this pas-
sage, and from a note in the article on Zeno in Bayle's Dictionary,
to which Leibnitz refers, it appears that M. de Mere maintained
that a magnitude was not infinitely divisible : this assists in identi-
fying him with Pascal's friend who would have been jDerfect had it
not been for this single error.
On the whole, in spite of the difficulty which we have pointed
out, we conclude that M. de Mer^ really was the person who so
strenuously asserted that the propositions of Arithmetic were in-
consistent with themselves ; and although it may be unfortunate
for him that he is now known principally for his error, it is some
compensation that his name is indissolubly associated with those of
Pascal and Fermat in the history of the Theory of Probability.
16. The remainder of Pascal's letter relates to other mathe-
matical topics. Fermat's reply is not extant ; but the nature of it
may be inferred from Pascal's next letter. It appears that Fermat
PASCAL AND FERMAT. 13
sent to Pascal a solution of the Problem of Points depending on
combinations.
Pascal's second letter is dated August 24th, 1654. He says that
Fermat's method is satisfactory when there are only two players,
but unsatisfactory when there are more than two. Here Pascal
was wrong as we shall see. Pascal then gives an example of
Fermat's method, as follows. Suppose there are two players, and
that the first wants two points to win and the second three points.
The game will then certainly be decided in the course of four
trials. Take the letters a and h and write down all the combina-
tions that can be formed of four letters. These combinations are
the following, 16 in number :
a
a
a
a
a
h
a
a
h
a
a
a
h
h
a
a
a
a
a
h
a
h
a
h
h
a
a
h
h
h
a
b
a
a
h
a
a
h
h
a
h
a
h'
a
h
h
h
a
a
a
h
h
a
h
h
h
h
a
h
h
h
h
h
h
Now let A denote the player who wants two points, and B the
player who wants three points. Then in these 16 combinations
every combination in which a occurs twice or oftener represents a
case favourable to A, and every combination in which h occurs
three times or oftener represents a case favourable to B. Thus on
counting them it will be found that there are 11 cases favourable to
A, and 5 cases favourable to B ; and as these cases are all equally
likely, -4's chance of winning the game is to -S's chance as
11 is to 5.
17. Pascal says that he communicated Fermat's method to
Roberval, who objected to it on the following ground. In the
example just considered it is supposed that four trials will be
made ; but this is not necessarily the case ; for it is quite possible
that the first player may win in the next two trials, and so the
game be finished in two trials. Pascal answers this objection by
stating, that although it is quite possible that the game may be
finished in two trials or in three trials, yet we are at liberty to
conceive that the players agree to have four trials, because, even if
the game be decided in fewer than four trials, no difference will be
14j pascal and fermat.
made in the decision by the superfluous trial or trials. Pascal
j)uts this point very clearly.
In the context of the first passage quoted from Leibnitz in
Art. 15, he refers to " les belles pensees de Alea, de Messieurs
Fermat, Pascal et Huygens, oil Mr. Roberval ne pouvoit ou ne
vouloit rien comprendre."
The difficulty raised by Roberval was in effect reproduced by
D'Alembert, as we shall see hereafter.
18. Pascal then proceeds to apply Format's method to an
example in which there are three players. Suppose that the first
player wants one point, and each of the other players two points.
The game will then be certainly decided in the course of three
trials. Take the letters a, h, c and write down all the combinations
which can be formed of three letters. These combinations are the
following, 27 in number:
a
a
a
h
a
a
C
a
a
a
a
h
h
a
b
c
a
b
a
a
c
h
a
c
c
a
c
a
h
a
b
b
a
c
b
a
a
h
h
b
b
b
c
b
b
a
h
c
b
b
c
c
b
c
a
c
a
b
c
a
c
c
a
a
c
b
b
c
b
c
c
b
a
c
c
b
c
G
c
c
c
Let A denote the player who wants one point, and B and C the
other two players. By examining the 27 cases, Pascal finds 13
Avhich are exclusively favourable to A, namely, those in which a
occurs twice or oftener, and those in which a, b, and c each occur
once. He finds 3 cases which he considers equally favourable to
A and B, namely, those in which a occurs once and b twice ; and
similarly he finds 3 cases equally favourable to A and C. On the
whole then the number of cases favourable to A may be considered
to be 13 + f + f, that is 16. Then Pascal finds 4 cases which
are exclusively favourable to B, namely those represented by bbb,
ebb, bcb, and bbc ; and thus on the whole the number of cases
PASCAL AND FERMAT. 15
favourable to B may be considered to be 4 + |, that is 5^. Simi-
larly the number of cases favourable to C may be considered to
be 5^. Thus it would appear that the chances oi A, B, and C are
respectively as 16, 5i, and 51
Pascal, however, says that by his own method he had found
that the chances are as 17, 5, and 5. He infers that the differ-
ence arises from the circumstance that in Fermat's method it is
assumed that three trials will necessarily be made, which is not
assumed in his own method. Pascal was wrong in supposing that
the true result could be affected by assuming that three trials
w^ould necessarily be made ; and indeed, as we have seen, in the
case of two players, Pascal himself had correctly maintained
against Roberval that a similar assumption was legitimate.
19. A letter from Pascal to Format is dated August 29th, 1654.
Format refers to the Problem of Points for the case of three
players; he says that the proportions 17, 5, and 5 are correct for
the example which we have just considered. This letter, how-
ever, does not seem to be the reply to Pascal's of August 24th, but
to an earlier letter which has not been preserved.
On the 25th of September Format writes a letter to Pascal,
in which Pascal's error is pointed out. Pascal had supposed
that such a combination as ace represented a case equally favour-
able to A and C\ but, as Format says, this case is exclusively
favourable to A, because here A gains one point before C gains
one ; and as A only wanted one point the game is thus decided
in his favour. When the necessary correction is made, the result
is, that the chances of A, B, and C are as 17, 5, and 5, as Pascal
had found by his own method.
Fermat then gives another solution, for the sake of Roberval,
in which he does not assume that three trials will necessarilv be
made; and he arrives at the same result as before.
In the remainder of his letter Fermat enunciates some of his
memorable propositions relating to the Theory of Numbers.
Pascal replied on October 27th, 1654, to Fermat's letter, and
said that he was entirelv satisfied.
16 PASCAL AND FERMAT.
20. There is another letter £i'oni Fermat to Pascal which is
not dated. It relates to a simple question which Pascal had pro-
posed to Fermat. A person undertakes to throw a six with a die
in eight throws ; supposing him to have made three throws with-
out success, what portion of the stake should he be allowed to take
on condition of giving up his fourth throw ? The chance of success
is J, so that he should be allowed to take J of the stake on con-
dition of giving up his throw. But suppose that we wish to esti-
mate the value of the fourth throw before any throw is made. The
first throw is worth J of the stake ; the second is worth J of what
remains, that is -^ of the stake ; the third throw is worth i of w^hat
now remains, that is -ff^ of the stake ; the fourth throw is worth
J of what now remains, that is -^-ff-Q of the stake.
It seems possible from Format's letter that Pascal had not dis-
tinguished between the two cases ; but Pascal's letter, to which
Format's is a reply, has not been preserved, so that we cannot
be certain on the point.
21. We see then that the Problem of Points was the prin-
cipal question discussed by Pascal and Fermat, and it was certainly
not exhausted by them. For they confined themselves to the case
in which the players are supposed to possess equal skill; and their
methods would have been extremely laborious if applied to any
examples except those of the most simple kind. Pascal's method
seems the more refined ; the student will perceive that it depends
on the same principles as the modern solution of the problem
by the aid of the Calculus of Finite Differences ; see Laplace,
Theorie...cles Proh. page 210.
Gouraud awards to Format's treatment of the problem an
amount of praise which seems excessive, whether we consider that
treatment absolutely or relatively in comparison with Pascal's ; see
his page 9,
22. We have next to consider Pascal's Traite du triangle
arithmetique. This treatise was printed about 1G5-4, but not
pubhshed until 1665 ; see Montucla, p. 387. The treatise will be
found in the fifth volume of the edition of Pascal's works to which
we have already referred.
PASCAL AND FERMAT. 17
The Arithmetical Triangle in its simplest form consists of the
following
table :
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 3
4
6
7
8
9
3 G
10
15
21
28
30 ...
4 10
20
35
dQ
8-i..
t
5 15
35
70
120..
•
6 21
50
120.
■ •
7 28
81^.
• •
8 3G..
•
%J a • •
J. •
• •
In the successive horizontal rows we have what are now called
the figurate numbers. Pascal distinguishes them into orders. He
calls the simple units 1, 1, 1, 1,... which form the first row, num-
bers of the first order; he calls the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4,... which
form the second row, numbers of the second order; and so on.
The numbers of the third order 1, 3, 0, 10,... had already received
the name oi triangular numbers; and the numbers of the fourth
order 1, 4, 10, 20,... the name oi pyr^amidal numbers. Pascal says
that the numbers of the fifth order 1, 5, 15, 35,... had not yet
received an express name, and he proposes to call them triangulo-
triangulaires.
In modern notation the if^ term of the r*^ order is
n(ii + l) ... {n + r - 2)
r-1
Pascal constructs the Arithmetical Triangle by the foUowdng
definition ; each number is the sum of that immediately above it
and that immediately to the left of it. Thus
10 = 4 + 0, 35 = 20 + 15, 126 = 70 + 50,...
The properties of the numbers are developed by Pascal with
great skill and distinctness. For example, suppose we require the
sum of the first n terms of the r^^ order : the sum is equal to the
number of the combinations of n + r — 1 things taken r at a
time, and Pascal establishes this by an inductive proof
2
18 PASCAL AND FERMAT.
23. Pascal applies liis Arithmetical Triangle to various subjects ;
among tliese we have the Problem of Points, the Theory of Com-
binations, and the Powers of Binomial Quantities. We are here
only concerned with the application to the first subject.
In the Arithmetical T^^iangle a line drawn so as to cut off
an equal number of units from the top horizontal row and the
extreme left-hand vertical column is called a base.
The bases are numbered, beginning from the top left-hand
corner. Thus the tenth base is a line drawn through the num-
bers 1, 9, 36, 84, 12G, 12G, 84, 36, 9, 1. It will be perceived that
the r*^ base contains r numbers.
Suppose then that A wants m points and that B wants n
points. Take the {m + ii)^^ base; the chance oi A is to the chance
of B as the sum of the first n numbers of the base, beginning at
the highest row, is to the sum of the last m numbers. Pascal
establishes this by induction.
Pascal's result may be easily she^vn to coincide with that
obtained by other methods. For the terms in the (m + ti)"^ base
are the coefficients in the expansion of (1 -f xY'^''~^ by the Binomial
Theorem. Let m + n — l=r\ then Pascal's result amounts to
saying that the chance of A is proportional to
- r (r — 1) r (r — l) ... (r — n-\-2)
I . z n — 1
and the chance of B proportional to
Ij^yj^ r (r-1) ^ ^^^^ ^ r{r-l)...{r- m + 2)
1.2 ^^1-1
This agrees with the result now usually given in elementary
treatises; see Algebra, Chapter Liii.
24. Pascal then notices some particular examples. (1) Sup-
pose that A wants one point and B wants n points. (2) Suppose
that A wants n — 1 points and B wants n points. (3) Suppose
that A wants n— 2 points and B wants n points. An interesting
relation holds between the second and third examples, which we
will exhibit.
PASCAL AXD FERMAT. 19
Let M denote the number of cases which are favourable to A ,
and N the number of cases which are favourable to B, Let
r = 2/1 - 2.
In the second example we have
M — N.= . -^ = X say.
\n— 1 I ;2 — 1 "^
Then if 2 aS' denote the whole sum at stake, A is entitled to
-^ . — ^— , that is to — (2*' +X)\ so that he may be considered
to have recovered his own stake and to have won the fraction
^7 of his adversary's stake.
In the third example we have
il/ + lY = T-\
2 r - 1 2 (?2 - 1) 1 r - 1 1\{n-\\
n — \ ?i— 2 \n — 1 In — 1
Thus we shall find that A may be considered to have recovered
his own stake, and to have won the fraction ■— j of his adversary's
stake.
Hence, comparing the second and third examples, we see that if
the player who wins the first point also wins the second point,
his advantage when he has gained the second point is double what
it was when he had gained the first point, whatever may be the
number of points in the game,
25. We have now analysed all that has been preser\'ed of
Pascal's researches on our subject. It seems however that he had
intended to collect these researches into a complete treatise. A
letter is extant addressed by him Celeberrimce Matheseos Academice
Parisiensi ; this Academy was one of those voluntary associations
which preceded the formation of formal scientific societies : see
Pascal's Works, Vol. iv. p. 356. In the letter Pascal enumerates
various treatises which he had prepared and which he hoped to
20 PASCAL AND FERMAT.
publish, among wliicli was to be one on chances. His language
shews that he had a high opinion of the novelty and importance
of the matter he proposed to discuss ; he says,
Novissima autem ac penitus intentatse materise tractatio, scilicet de
compositione alece in hid is ijysi subjeclis, qnod gallico nostro idiomate
dicitur (/aire les ^;ar^is cles jeux) : ubi ancej)s fortuna sequitate rationis
ita reprimitur ut utrique lusorum quod jure competit exacte semper
assignetur. Quod quidem eo fortius ratiocinando quserendnm, quo
minus tentando investigari possit : ambigiii enim sortis eventus fortiiitse
contingentise potius quam nattirali necessitati meritb tribuuntur. Ideo
res hactenus erravit incerta ; nunc autem qu?e experimento rebellis
fuerat, rationis dominium effugere non potuit : eam quippe tanta se-
curitate in artem per geometriam reduximus, ut certitudinis ejus
j^articeps facta, jam audacter prodeat ; et sic matheseos demonstrationes
cum alese incertitudine jungendo, et qu?e contraria videntur conciliando,
ab utraque nominationem suam accipiens stupendum hunc titulum jure
sibi arrogat : alece geometria.
But the design was probably never accomplished. The letter
is dated 1651; Pascal died in 1662, at the early age of 39.
26. Neglecting the trifling hints which may be found in pre-
ceding writers we may say that the Theory of Probability really
commenced with Pascal and Format ; and it would be difficult to
find two names which could confer higher honour on the subject.
The fame of Pascal rests on an extensive basis, of which
mathematical and physical science form only a part ; and the
regret which we may feel at his renunciation of the studies in
which he gained his earliest renown may be diminished by reflect-
ing on his memorable Letters, or may be lost in deeper sorrow
wdien we contemplate the fragments which alone remain of the
great work on the evidences of religion that was to have engaged
the efforts of his maturest powers.
The fame of Format is confined to a narrower range ; but it is
of a special kind which is without a parallel in the history of
science. Format enunciated various remarkable propositions in
the theory of numbers. Two of these are more important than
the rest; one of them after bafiling the powers of Euler and La-
grange finally yielded to Cauchy, and tlie other remains still un-
PASCAL AND FEEMAT. 21
conquered. The interest which attaches to the propositions is
increased by the uncertainty which subsists as to whether Fermat
himself had succeeded in demonstrating them.
The French government in the time of Louis Philippe assigned
a grant of money for publishing a new edition of Format's works ;
but unfortunately the design has never been accomplished. The
edition which we have quoted in Art. 11 has been reprinted in
facsimile by Friedlander at Berlin in 1861.
27. At the time when the Theory of Probability started from
the hands of Pascal and Fermat, they were the most distinguished
mathematicians of Europe. Descartes died in 1650, and Newton
and Leibnitz were as yet unknown ; Newton was born in 1642,
and Leibnitz in 1646. Huygens was born in 1629, and had
already given specimens of his powers and tokens of his future
eminence; but at this epoch he could not have been placed on the
level of Pascal and Fermat. In England Wall is, born in 1616,
and appointed Savilian j^rofessor of geometry at Oxford in 1649,
was steadily rising in reputation, while Barrow, born in 1630, was
not appointed Lucasian professor of mathematics at Cambridge
until 1663.
It might have been anticipated that a subject interesting in.
itself and discussed by the two most distinguished mathematicians
of the time would have attracted rapid and general attention ; but
such does not appear to have been the case. The two great men
themselves seem to have been indifferent to any extensive publi-
cation of their investigations; it was sufficient for each to gain
the approbation of the other. Pascal finally withdrew from science
and the world ; Fermat devoted to mathematics only the leisure of
a laborious life, and died in 1665.
The invention of the Differential Calculus by Newton and
Leibnitz soon offered to mathematicians a subject of absorbing
interest ; and we shall find that the Theory of Probability advanced
but little during the half century which followed the date of the
correspondence between Pascal and Fermat.
CHAPTER III.
HUYGENS.
28. We have now to speak of a treatise by Hu3^gens entitled
Be Ratiociniis in Ludo Alece. This treatise was first printed by
Schooten at the end of his work entitled Francisci a Bcliooten
Exercitationum Mathematicarum Lihri quinque ; it occupies pages
519... 534 of the volume. The date 1658 is assigned to Schooten's
work by Montucla, but the only copy which I have seen is dated
1657.
Schooten had been the instructor of Huygens in mathematics ;
and the treatise which we have to examine was communicated by
Huygens to Schooten w^ritten in their vernacular tongue, and
Schooten translated it into Latin.
It appears from a letter written by Schooten to Wallis, that
Wallis had seen and commended Huygens's treatise ; see Wallis's
Algebra, 1693, p. 833.
Leibnitz commends it. Leibnitii Opera Omnia, ed. Dutens,
Vol. VI. part 1, p. 318.
29. In his letter to Schooten which is printed at the beginning
of the treatise Huygens refers to his predecessors in these words :
Sciendum verb, quod jam pridem inter prsestantissimos totd
Gallia Geometras calculus hie agitatus fuerit, ne quis indebitam
mihi primse inventionis gloriam hac in re tribuat. Huygens ex-
presses a very high opinion of the importance and interest of the
subject he was bringing under the notice of mathematicians.
30. The treatise is reprinted with a commentary in James
Bernoulli's Ars Conjectandi, and forms the first of the four parts
huvgp:ns. 2.3
of which that work is composed. Two English translations of the
treatise have been published ; one which has been attributed to
Motte, but which was probably by Arbuthnot, and the other by
W. Browne.
31. The treatise contains fourteen propositions. The first pro-
position asserts that if a player has equal chances of gaining a sum
represented by a or a sum represented by b, his expectation is
^ (a + b). The second proposition asserts that if a player has equal
chances of gaining a or 6 or c, his expectation is J (a + 6 + c). The
third proposition asserts that if a player has 2^ chances of gaining a
and q chances of gaining b, his expectation is — .
i^ + 2'
It has been stated with reference to the last proposition :
*' Elementary as this truth may now appear, it was not received
altogether without opposition." Lubbock and Drinhwater, p. 42.
It is not obvious to what these words refer; for there does not
appear to have been any opposition to the elementary principle,
except at a much later period by D'Alembert.
82. The fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh propositions discuss
simple cases of the Problem of Points, when there are two players ;
the method is similar to Pascal's, see Art. 12. The eiirhth and
ninth propositions discuss simple cases of the Problem of Points
when there are ^/i?'e^ players ; the method is similar to that for two
players.
83. Huygens now proceeds to some questions relating to dice.
In his tenth proposition he investigates in how many throws a
player may undertake to throw a six with a single die. In his
eleventh proposition he investigates in how many throws a player
may undertake to throw twelve with a pair of dice. In his
twelfth proposition he investigates how many dice a player must
have in order to undertake that in one throw two sixes at least
may appear. The thirteenth proposition consists of the following
problem. A and B play with two dice ; if a seven is thrown,
^1 wins; if a ten is thrown, B Avins; if any other number is
thrown, the stakes are divided : compare the chances of A and B.
They are shewn to be as 13 is to 11.
24 ^ HUYGENS.
84. The fourteenth proposition consists of the following
problem. A and B play with two dice on the condition that A
is to have the stake if he throws six before B throws seven, and
that B is to have the stake if he throws seven before A throws
six ; ^ is to begin, and they are to throw alternately ; compare
the chances of A and B.
We will give the solution of Huygens. Let B's chance be
worth X, and the stake a, so that a — a? is the worth of ^'s chance ;
then whenever it is ^.'s turn to throw x will express the value
of B's chance, but when it is i>'s own turn to throw his chance
will have a different value, say ?/. Suppose then A is about to
throw ; there are 36 equally likely cases ; in 5 cases A wins and B
takes nothing, in the other 81 cases A loses and B's turn comes
on, which is worth y by supposition. So that by the third propo-
sition of the treatise the expectation of B is ^ — - , that is,
^2l, Thus
So 81?/
Now suppose B about to throw, and let us estimate ^'s chance.
There are S6 equally likely cases ; in 6 cases B wins and A takes
nothing ; in the other 80 cases B loses and ^'s turn comes on
again, in which case B's chance is worth x by supposition. So
that the expectation of B is — ^j^ — . Thus
(ja-^SOx
81«
From these equations it will be found that x = -^ , and thus
80cj
a — x=^
61
, so that ^'s chance is to ^'s chance as 80 is to 81.
85. At the end of his treatise Huygens gives five problems
without analysis or demonstration, which he leaves to the reader.
Solutions are given by Bernoulli in the Ars Conjectandi. The
following are the problems.
(1) A and B play with two dice on this condition, that A gains
if he throws six, and B gains if he throws seven. A first has one
HUYGENS. 25
throw, then B has two throAvs, then A two throws, and so on until
one or the other gains. Shew that ^'s chance is to J5's as 10355 to
12276.
(2) Three players A, B, C take twelve balls, eight of which
are black and four white. They play on the following condition ;
they are to draw blindfold, and the first who draws a white ball
wins. A is to have the first turn, B the next, G the next, then
A again, and so on. Determine the chances of the players.
Bernoulli solves this on three suppositions as to the meaning ;
first he supposes that each ball is replaced after it is drawn ;
secondly he supposes that there is only one set of twelve balls,
and that the balls are not replaced after being drawn ; thirdly he
supposes that each player has his own set of twelve balls, and that
the balls are not replaced after being drawn.
(3) There are forty cards forming four sets each of ten cards ;
A plays with B and undertakes in drawing four cards to obtain
one of each set. Shew that ^'s chance is to -S's as 1000 is to 8139.
(4) Twelve balls are taken, eight of which are black and four
are white. A pla3^s with B and undertakes in drawing seven balls
blindfold to obtain three white balls. Compare the chances of
A and B.
(5) A and B take each twelve counters and play with three
dice on this condition, that if eleven is throAA-n A gives a counter
to B, and if fourteen is thrown B gives a counter to A ; and he
wins the game who first obtains all the counters. Shew that A 's
chance is to ^'s as 244140625 is to 282429536481.
oQ>. The treatise by Huygens continued to form the best
account of the subject until it was superseded by the more elabo-
rate works of James Bernoulli, Montmort, and De Moivre. Before
we speak of these we shall give some account of the history of the
theory of combinations, and of the inquiries into the laws of
mortality and the principles of life insurance, and notices of
various miscellaneous investigations.
CHAPTER IV.
ON COMBIjSTATIONS.
87. The theory of combinations is closely connected witli the
theory of probability ; so that we shall find it convenient to imi-
tate Montucla in giving some account of the writings on the
former subject up to the close of the seventeenth century.
88. The earliest notice we have found respecting combinations
is contained in Wallis's Algebra as quoted by him from a work by
William Buckley; see Wallis's Algebra 1693, page 489. Buckley
was a member of King's College, Cambridge, and lived in the time
of Edward the Sixth. He wrote a small tract in Latin verse con-
taining the rules of Arithmetic. In . Sir John Leslie's Pliilosophj
of Arithmetic full citations are given from Buckley's work; in
Dr. Peacock's History of A rithmetic a citation is given ; see also
De Morgan's Arithmetical Books from the invention of Printing .. .
Wallis quotes twelve lines which form a Regula Comhinationis,
and then explains them. We may say briefly that the rule
amounts to assigning the whole number of combinations which can
be formed of a given number of things, when taken one at a time,
or two at a time, or three at a time,. . . and so on until they are taken
all together. The rule shews that the mode of proceeding was
the same as that which we shall indicate hereafter in speaking
of Schooten ; thus for four things Buckley's rule gives, like Schoo-
ten's, 1 + 2 + 4 + 8, that is 15 combinations in all.
By some mistake or misprint Wallis apparently overestimates
the age of Buckley's work, when he says *' . . . in Arithmetica sua,
lUUHUsius. 27
versibus scripta ante annos plus minus 190;" in the ninth Chapter
of the Algebra the date of about 1550 is assigned to Buckley's
death.
89. We must now notice an example of combinations which
is of historical notoriety although it is very slightly connected
with the theory.
A book was published at Antwerp in 1617 by Erycius Pu-
teanus under the title, Erycii Puteani Fietatis TJiaumata in
Bernardi Bauhusii ^ Societate Jesu Proteum Parthenium. The
book consists of IIG quarto pages, exclusive of seven pages, not
numbered, which contain an Index, Censura, Summa Privilegii,
and a typographical ornament.
It appears that Bernardus Bauhusius composed the following
line in honour of the Virgin Mary :
Tot tibi sunt dotes, Virgo, quot sidera copIo.
This verse is arranged in 1022 different ways, occupying 48 pages
of the work. First we have 54 arrangements commencing Tot tibi;
then 25 arrangements commencing Tot sunt; and so on. Although
these arrangements are sometimes ascribed to Puteanus, they ajD-
pear from the dedication of the book to be the work of Bauhusius
himself; Puteanus supplies verses of his own and a series of chap-
ters in prose which he calls Thaumata, and which are distinguished
by the Greek letters from A to O inclusive. The number 1022 is
the same as the number of the stars accordino- to Ptolemy's Cata-
logue, wdiich coincidence Puteanus seems to consider the great
merit of the labours of Bauhusius ; see his page 82.
It is to be observed that Bauhusius did not profess to include
all the possible arrangements of his line; he expressly rejected those
which would have conveyed a sense inconsistent with the glory of
the Virgin Mary. As Puteanus sa3\s, page 103,
Dicere horruit Vates :
Sidera tot ca?lo, Virgo, quot sunt tibi Dotes,
imb in hunc sensum producere Proteum recusavit, ne laudem immi-
nueret. Sic igitur contraxit versuum numerum ; ut Dotium augeret.
40. The line due to Bauhusius on account of its numerous
an-angements seems to have attracted gi'eat attention during the
following century ; the discussion on the subject was finally settled
28 PASCAL.
by James Bernoulli in his Ars Coiijectandi, where he thus details
the history of the problem.
. , . Quemadmodum cernere est in hexametro a Bernli. Bauhusio Jesuita
Lovaniensi in laudem Virginis Deiparse constructo :
Tot tihi sunt Dotes, Virgo, quot sidera ccdo ;
qiiem dignnm peculiari opera duxerunt plures Viri celebres. Erycius
Puteanus in libello, quern. Tliaumata Pietatis inscripsit, variationes ejus
utiles integris 48 paginis enumerat, easque numero stellarum, quarum
vulgb 1022 recensentur, accommodat, omissis scrupulosius illis, quse di-
cere videntur, tot sidera cselo esse, quot Marine dotes; nam Mariae
dotes esse multo plures. Eundem numerum 1022 ex Puteano repetifc
Gerh. Yossius, cap. 7, de Scient. Matliemat. Prestetus Gallus in prima
editione Element. Matliemat. pag. 358. Proteo huic 2196 variationes
attribuit, sed facta revisione in altera edit. torn. pr. pag. 133. numerum
earum dimidio fere auctum ad 3276 extendit. Industrii Actorum Lips.
Collectores m. Jun. 1686, in recensione Tractatus Wallisiani de Algebra,
numerum in qusestione (quem Auctor ipse definire non fuit ausus) ad
2580 determinant. Et ipse postmodum Wallisius in edit, latina operis
sui Oxon. anno 1693. impressa, pagin. 494. eundem ad 3096 profert.
Sed omnes adliuc a vero deficientes, ut delusam tot Yirorum post
adhibitas quoque secundas curas in re levi perspicaciam meritb mireris.
Ars Conjectandi, page 78.
James Bernoulli seems to imply that the two editions of
Wallis's Algebra differ in their enumeration of the arrangements
of the line due to Bauhusius ; but this is not the case : the two
editions agree in investigation and in result.
James Bernoulli proceeds to say that he had found that there
could be 3312 arrangements without breaking the law of metre;
this excludes spondaic lines but includes those which have no
caesura. The analysis which produces this number is given.
41. The earliest treatise on combinations which we have ob-
served is due to Pascal. It is contained in the work on the
Arithmetical Triangle which we have noticed in Art. 22; it will
also be found in the fifth volume of Pascal's works, Paris 1819,
pages 86—107.
The investigations of Pascal on combinations depend on his
Arithmetical Triangle. The following is his principal result; we
express it in modern notation.
PASCAL. 29
Take an Arithmetical Triangle with r numbers in its base;
then the sum of the numbers in the _29"' horizontal row is equal to
the multitude of the combinations of r things taken p at a time.
For example, in Art 22 we have a triangle with 10 numbers in
its base ; now take the numbers in the 8th horizontal column ;
their sum is 1 4-8 + 36, that is 45; and there are 45 combinations
of 10 things taken 8 at a time. Pascal's proof is inductive. It
may be observed that multitudo is Pascal's word in tlie Latin of
his treatise, and multitude in the French version of a part of the
treatise which is given in pages 22 — 30 of the volume.
From this he deduces various inferences such as the followino-.
Let there be n things ; the sum of the multitude of the combinations
which can be formed, one at a time, two at a time,... , up to n at
a time, is 2''— 1.
At the end Pascal considers this problem. Datis duobus numeris
inaequalibus, invenire quot modis minor in majore combinetur.
And from his Arithmetical THangle he deduces in effect the follow-
ing result ; the number of combinations of r things taken p at
a time is
(^+1) (p + 2) (;; + 3)...r
■P
After this problem Pascal adds.
Hoc problemate tractatum liiiuc absolvere constitiieram, non tamen
omniiio sine molestia, cum niulta alia parata liabeam ; sed ubi tanta
ubertas, vi moderanda eat fames : his ergo pauca hsec subjiciam.
Eruditissimus ac milii charisimus, D.D. de Ganieres, circa combina-
tiones, assiduo ac peiiitili labore, more suo, incumbens, ac indigens
facili constructione ad inveniendum quoties numerus datus in alio dato
combinetur, hanc ipse sibi praxim instituit.
Pascal then gives the rule ; it amounts to this ; the num-
ber of combinations of r things taken |) at a time is
r (>'- 1)... {r-p+ 1)
■ {p ■
This is the form with which we are now most familiar. It
may be immediately shewn to agree with the form given before
by Pascal, by cancelling or introducing factors into both numerator
and denominator. Pascal however savs, Excellentem hanc solu-
.so SniOOTEN.
tionem ipse mihi ostendit, ac etiam demonstranJam proposiiit, ipsam
ego san^ miratus sum, sed difficultate territus vix opus suscepi,
et ipsi authori relinquendum existimavi; attamen trianguli arith-
metici auxilio, sic proclivis facta est via. Pascal then establishes
the correctness of the rule by the aid of his Arithmetical Triangle;
after which he concludes thus, Hac demonstratione assecuta, jam
reliqua quae invitus supprimebam libenter omitto, adeo dulce est
amicorum memorari.
42. In the work of Schooten to which w^e have already re-
ferred in Art. 28 we find some very slight remarks on combinations
and their applications; see pages 873 — 403. Schooten's first sec-
tion is entitled, Ratio inveniendi electiones omnes, qu^ fieri pos-
sunt, data multitudine rerum. He takes four letters a, h, c, d,
and arranges them thus,
a.
h. ah.
c. ac. he. ahc.
d. ad. hd. abd. cd. acd. bed. abed.
Thus he finds that 15 elections can be made out of these four
letters. So he adds, Hinc si per a designatur unum malum, jDer b
unum pirum, per c unum prunum, et per d unum cerasum, et ipsa
alitor atque alitor, ut supra, eligantur, electio eorum fieri poterit 15
diversis modis, ut sequitur
Schooten next takes five letters ; and thus he infers the result
which we should now express by saying that, if there are n letters
the whole number of elections is 2"— 1.
Hence if a, b, c, d are prime factors of a number, and all dif-
ferent, Schooten infers that the number has 15 divisors excludinsf
unity but including the number itself, or 1 6 including also unity.
Next suppose some of the letters are repeated; as for example
suppose we have a, a, b, and c ; it is required to determine how
many elections can be made. Schooten arranges the letters thus,
a.
a. aa.
h. ah. aab.
c. ac. aac. be. ahc. aabc.
We have thus 2 + 3 + 6 elections.
LEIBNITZ. 3 1
Similarly if the proposed letters are a, a, a, b, h, it is found
that 11 elections can be made.
In his following sections Schooten proceeds to apply these
results to questions relating to the number of divisors in a number.
Thus, for example, supposing a, h, c, d, to be different prime
factors, numbers of the following forms all have 16 divisors,
ahcd, a^hc, a^b^, a^b, a)^. Hence the question may be asked, what is
the least number which has 10 divisors? This question must
be answered by trial ; we must take the smallest prime numbers
2, 8,. . . and substitute them in the above forms and pick out the least
number. It will be found on trial that the least number is 2^. 3. 5,
that is 120. Similarly, suppose we require the least number which
has 24 divisors. The suitable forms of numbers for 24 divisors
are ci^bcd, a^¥c, oJ'bc, a^¥, a'b'^, o}^h and a^^. It will be found on
trial that the least number is 2^ 3^. 5, that is 360.
Schooten has given two tables connected with this kind of
question. (1) A table of the algebraical forms of numbers which
have any given number of divisors not exceeding a hundred ; and
in this table, when more than one form is given in any case, the
first form is that which he has found by trial will give the least
number with the corresponding number of divisors. (2) A table
of the least numbers which have any assigned number of divisors
not exceeding a hundred. Schooten devotes ten pages to a list of
all the prime numbers under 10,000.
43. A dissertation was pubHshed by Leibnitz in 1666, entitled
Dissertatio de Arte Combinatoma; part of it had been previously
published in the same year under the title of Disputatio arith-
metica de comjilexionihus. The dissertation is interesting as the
earliest work of Leibnitz connected with mathematics ; the con-
nexion however is very slight. The dissertation is contained in
the second volume of the edition of the works of Leibnitz by
Dutens ; and in the first volume of the second section of the
mathematical works of Leibnitz edited by Gerhardt, Halle, 1858.
The dissertation is also included in the collection of the philoso-
phical writings of Leibnitz edited by Erdmann, Berlin, 1840.
44. Leibnitz constructs a table at the beginning of his dis-
32 LEIBNITZ.
sertation similar to Pascal's Arithmetical Triangle, and applies it
to find the number of the combinations of an assigned set of things
taken two, three, four,... together. In the latter part of his disser-
tation Leibnitz shews how to obtain the number of permutations
of a set of things taken all together ; and he forms the product of
the first 24* natural numbers. He brings forward several Latin
lines, including that which we have already quoted in Art. 39,
and notices the great number of arrangements which can be
formed of them.
The greater part of the dissertation however is of such a
character as to confirm the correctness of Erdmann's judgment in
including it among the philosophical works of Leibnitz. Thus,
for example, there is a long discussion as to the number of moods
in a syllogism. There is also a demonstration of the existence of
the Deity, which is founded on three definitions, one postulate,
four axioms, and one result of observation, namely, aliquod corpus
movetur.
4iD. We will notice some points of interest in the dissertation.
(1) Leibnitz proposes a curious mode of expression. When
a set of things is to be taken two at a time he uses the S3rmbol
com2natio (combinatio) ; when three at a time he uses conSnatio
(conternatio) ; when four at a time, con4natio, and so on.
(2) The mathematical treatment of the subject of combina-
tions is far inferior to that given by Pascal ; probably Leibnitz
had not seen the work of Pascal. Leibnitz seems to intimate
that his predecessors had confined themselves to the combina-
tions of things two at a time, and that he had himself extended
the subject so far as to shew how to obtain from his table the
combinations of things taken together more than two at a time ;
generaliorem modum nos deteximus, specialis est vidgatus. He
gives the rule for the combination of things two at a time, namely,
that which we now express by the formula ^ — -^ ; but he does
not give the similar rule for combinations three, four,... at a time,
which is contained in Pascal's work.
(3) After giving his table, which is analogous to the Arith-
LEIBNITZ. S3
metical Triangle, he adds, "Adjiciemus hie Theoremata quorum
TO on ex ipsa tabula manifestum est, to Slotl ex tabulae funda-
niento." The only theorem here that is of any importance is that
which we should now express thus : if n be prime the number of
combinations of n things taken r at a time is divisible by n.
(4) A passage in which Leibnitz names his predecessors may
be quoted. After saying that he had partly furnished the matter
himself and partly obtained it from others, he adds,
Quis ilia primus detexerit ignoramus. Scliwentenis Belie. 1. 1, Sect. 1,
prop. 32, apud Hieronymum Cardanum, Johannem Buteonem et
Nicolaum Tartaleam, extare dicit. In Cardani tameu Practica Arith-
metica quae prodiit Mediolani anno 1539, nihil reperimus. Inprimis
dilucide, quicquid dudum habetur, proposuit Christoph. Clavius in Com.
supra Joh. de Sacro Bosco Spliaer. edit. Bomte forma 4ta anno 1785.
p. 33. seqq.
With respect to Schwenter it has been observ^ed,
Schwenter probably alluded to Cardan s book, " De Proportionibus,"
in which the figurate numbers are mentioned, and their use shown in
the extraction of roots, as employed by Stifel, a German algebraist,
who wrote in the early part of the sixteenth century. Lubbock and
Drinkwater, page 45.
(5) Leibnitz uses the symbols -1 = in their present sense ;
he uses -— ^ for multiplication and --^ for division. He uses the
word productiun in the sense of a sum : thus he calls 4 the pro-
ductum of 3 + 1.
46. The dissertation shews that at the age of twenty years
the distinguishing characteristics of Leibnitz were strongly de-
veloped. The extent of his reading is indicated by the numerous
references to authors on various subjects. We see evidence too
that he had already indulged in those dreams of impossible achieve-
ments in which his vast powers were uselessly squandered. He
vainly hoped to produce substantial realities by combining the
precarious definitions of metaphysics with the elementary tniisms
of logic, and to these fruitless attempts he gave the aspiring titles
of universal science, general science, and philosophical calculus.
See Erdmann, pages 82 — 91, especially page 84.
3
34 ^yALLIS.
47. A discourse of coinhinations, alternations, and aliquot
parts is attached to the English edition of Wallis's Algebra pub-
lished in 1685. In the Latin edition of the Algebra, published in
1693, this j^art of the work occupies pages 485 — 529.
In referring to Wallis's Algebra we shall give the pages of the
Latin edition ; but in quoting from him we shall adopt his own
English version. The English version was reprinted by Maseres in
a volume of reprints which was published at London in 1795 under
the title of The Doctrine of Permutations and Gomhinations, being
an essential and fundamental part of the Doctrine of Chances.
48. "Wallis's first Chapter is Of the variety of Elections, or
Choise, in taking or leaving One or more, out of a certain Num-
her of things proposed. He draws up a Table which agrees
with Pascal's Arithmetical Triangle, and shews how it may be
used in finding the number of combinations of an assigned set
of things taken two, three, four, five,... at a time. Wallis does
not add any thing to what Pascal had given, to whom however
he does not refer ; and Wallis's clumsy parenthetical style con-
trasts very unfavourably with the clear bright stream of thought
and language which flowed from the genius of Pascal. The
chapter closes with an extract from the Arithmetic of Buckley
and an explanation of it ; to this we have aU'eady referred in
Art. 38.
49. Wallis's second Chapter is Of Alternations, or the different
change of Order, in any Number of things ptroposed. Here he
gives some examples of what are now usually called permutations ;
thus if there are four letters a, h, c, d, the number of permutations
when they are taken all together is 4 x 3 x 2 x 1. Wallis accord-
ingly exhibits the 24 permutations of these four letters. He forms
the product of the first twenty-four natural numbers, which is the
number of the permutations of twenty-four things taken all toge-
ther.
Wallis exhibits the 24 permutations of the letters in the word
Roma taken all together ; and then he subjoins, *' Of which (in
Latin) these seven are only useful; Roma, ramo,oram,mora, maro,
armo, amor. The other forms are useless ; as affording no (Latin)
word of known signification."
WALLIS. 35
Wallis then considers the case in which there is some repetition
among the quantities of which we require the permutations. He
takes the letters which compose the word Messes. Here if there
were no repetition of letters the number of permutations of the
letters taken all together would^ be 1x2x3x4x5x0, that is
720 ; but as Wallis explains, owing to the occurrence of the letter
e twice, and of the letter s thrice, the number 720 must be divided
by 2 X 2 X 3, that is by 12. Thus the number of permutations is
reduced to 60. Wallis exhibits these permutations and then sub-
joins, " Of all which varieties, there is none beside messes itself,
that affords an useful AnagTam." The chapter closes with Wallis's
attempt at determining the number of arrangements of the verse
Tot tibi sunt dotes, virgo, quot sidera caelo.
The attempt is followed by these w^ords, " I will not be posi-
tive, that there may not be some other Changes : (and then, those
may be added to these :) Or, that most of these be twice repeated,
(and if so, those are to be abated out of the Number :) But I do
not, at present, discern either the one and other."
Wallis's attempt is a very bad specimen of analysis ; it involves
both the errors he himself anticipates, for some cases are omitted
and some counted more than once. It seems strange that he
should have failed in such a problem considering the extraordinary
powers of abstraction and memory which he possessed ; so that
as he states, he extracted the square root of a number taken at
random wdth 53 figures, in tenebris decumbens, sola fretus
memoria. See his Algebra, page 150.
50. Wallis's third Chapter is Of the Divisors and Aliquot
paints, of a Number i^roposed. This Chapter treats of the resolu-
tion of a number into its prime factors, and of the number of
divisors Avhich a given number has, and of the least numbers
which have an assigned number of divisors.
51. Wallis's fourth Chapter is Monsieur Fermafs Problems con-
cerning Divisors and Aliquot Parts. It contains solutions of two
problems which Fermat had proposed as a challenge to Wallis and
the English mathematicians. The problems relate to what is now
called the Theory of Numbers.
o
o-
8G PRESTET.
52. Thus the theory of combinations is not applied by Wallis
in any manner that materially bears upon our subject. In fact
the influence of Format seems to have been more powerful than
that of Pascal ; and the Theory of Numbers more cultivated than
the Theory of Probability.
The judgment of Montmort seems correct that nothing of any
importance in the Theory of Combinations previous to his own
Avork had been added to the results of Pascal. Montmort, on his
page XXXV, names as writers on the subject Prestet, Tacquet, and
Wallis. I have not seen the works of Prestet and Tacquet ;
Gouraud refers to Prestet's Nouveaux elements de mathematiqiies,
2® ed., in the following terms, Le pere Prestet, enfin, fort habile
geom^tre, avait explique avec infiniment de clart^, en 1689, les
principaux artifices de cet art ingenieux de composer et de varier
les grandeurs. Gouraud, page 23.
CHAPTER V,
MORTALITY AND LIFE INSURANCE.
53. The history of the investigations on the laws of mortality
and of the calculations of life insurances is sufficiently important
and extensive to demand a separate work ; these subjects were
originally connected with the Theory of Probability but may now
be considered to form an independent kingdom in mathematical
science : we shall therefore confine ourselves to tracing their
origin.
54. According to Gouraud the use of tables of mortality was
not quite unknown to the ancients: after speaking of such a
table as unkno'svn until the time of John de Witt he subjoins
in a note,
Inconnue du moins des modernes. Car il paraitrait par un passage
du Digeste, ad legem Falcidlam, xxxv. 2, 68, que les Romains n'en
ignoraieut pas absolument I'usage. Voyez "k ce sujet M. Y. Leclerc,
Des Journaux chez les Romains, p. 198, et une curieuse dissertation:
De prohabilitate vitce ejusqite usu forensi, etc., d'un certain Schmelzer
(Goettingue, 1787, in-8). Gouraud, page 14.
55. The first name which is usually mentioned in connexion
with our present subject is that of John Graunt : I borrow a
notice of him from Lubbock and Drinkwater, page 4-i. After
referrino: to the reoisters of the annual numbers of deaths in
London which began to be kept in 159:^, and which with some
38 GRAUNT.
intermissions between 1d94< and 1603 have since been regularly
continued, they proceed thus.
They were first intended to make known the progress of the plague ;
and it was not till 1662 that Captain Graunt, a most acute and intel-
ligent man, conceived the idea of rendering them subservient to the
ulterior objects of determining the population and growth of the me-
tropolis ; as before his time, to use his own words, " most of them who
constantly took in the weekly bills of mortality, made little or no use
of them than so as they might take the same as a text to talk upon in
the next company; and withal, in the plague time, how the sickness
increased or decreased, that so the rich might guess of the necessity of
their removal, and tradesmen might conjecture what doings they were
like to have in their respective dealings." Graunt was careful to pub-
lish with his deductions the actual returns from which they were
obtained, comparing himself, when so doing, to "a silly schoolboy,
coming to say his lesson to the world (that peevish and tetchie master,)
who brings a bundle of rods, wherewith to be whipped for every mistake
he has committed." Many subsequent writers have betrayed more fear
of the punishment they might be liable to on making similar disclosures,
and have kept entirely out of sight the sources of their conclusions.
The immunity they have thus purchased from contradiction could not
be obtained but at the expense of confidence in their results.
These researches procured for Graunt the honour of being chosen a
fellow of the Koyal Society, . . .
Gouraud says in a note on his page 16,
...John Graunt, homme sans geometric, mais qui ne manquait ni
de sagacite ni de bon sens, avait, dans une sorte de traite d'Arithme-
tique politique intitule: Natural and 'political observations .. .made itpon
the hills of mortality^ etc., rassemble ces difierentes listes, et donne meme
i^ihid. chap, xi.) un calcul, a la verite fort grossier, mais du moins fort
original, de la mortalite probable \ chaque age d'un certain nombre
d'individus supposes n6s viables tons au meme instant.
See also the AtJienceum for October 31st, 1863, page 537.
56. The names of two Dutchmen next present themselves,
Van Hudden and John de Witt. Montucla says, page 407,
Le probleme des rentes viageres fut traite par Van Hudden, qui
quoique geometre, ne laissa pas que d'etre bourguemestre d' Amsterdam,
JOHN DE WITT. 30
et par le c61ebre pensionnaire d'Hollande, Jean de Witfc, iin dea pre^
miers promoteurs de la geometrie de Descartes. Jlgnore le titre de
I'ecrit de Hudden, mais celui de Jean de Witt etoit intitule : De vardye
van de lif-renten na j^^oportie van de los-renten, ou la Valeur des rentes
viageres en raison des ventes lihres ou remboursahles (La Haye, 1C71).
lis etoient I'un et I'autre plus a portee que personne d'en sentir I'impor-
tance et de se procurer les depouillemens necessaires de registres de inor-
talitc; aussi Leibnitz, passant en Hollande quelques annees apres, fit
tout son possible pour se procurer I'ecrit de Jean de Witt, mais il ne
pent y parvenir; il n'etoit cependant pas absolument perdu, car M. Ni-
colas Struyck {Inleiding tot het algemeine geography, &c. Amst. 1740,
in 4o. p. 345) nous apprend qu'il en a eu un exemj)laire entre les mains;
il nous en donne un precis, par lequel on voit combien Jean de Witt
raisonnoit juste sur cette matiere.
Le chevalier Petty, Anglois, qui s'occupa beaucoup de calculs poli-
tiques, entrevit le probleme, mais il n'etoit pas assez geometre pour le
traiter fructueusement, en sorte que, jusqu'a Halley, I'Angleterre et la
France qui emprunterent tant et ont tant empruntc de2:)uis, le firent
comme des aveugles ou comme de jeunes debauclics.
57. Witli respect to Sir William Petty, to whom Montucla
refers, we may remark that his writings do not seem to Iiave been
very important in connexion with our present subject. Some
account of them is given in the article A rithmetique Politique of
the original French Encyclopedie ; the article is reproduced in
the Encyclopedie Methodique. Gouraud speaks of Petty thus in a
note on his page 1 6,
Apres Graunt, le chevalier W. Petty, dans differents essais d'eco-
nomie politique, oi\ il y avait, il est vrai, plus d 'imagination que de
jugement, s'etait, de 1682 a 1687, occupe de semblables recherclies.
58. W^ith respect to Van Hudden to whom Montucla also
refers we can only add that his name is mentioned with appro-
bation by Leibnitz, in conjunction with that of John de Witt,
for his researches on annuities. See Leihnitii Opera Omnia, ed.
Dutens, Vol. II. part 1, page 93 ; Vol. Yl. part 1, page 217.
69. With respect to the work of John de Witt we have
some notices in the correspondence between Leibnitz and James
Bernoulli; but these notices do not literallv confirm Montucla's
40 JOHN DE WITT.
statement respecting Leibnitz : see Leihnizens Matliematische
Schriften herausgegehen von C. I. Gerhardt, Erste Abtheilung.
Band ill. Halle 1855. James Bernoulli says, page 78,
Nuper in Menstruis Excerptis Hanoverae imjoressis citatum, inveni
Tractatum quendam mihi ignotum Pensionarii de Wit von Subtiler
Ausreclinung des valoris der Leib-Renten. Fortasse is quaedam hue
facientia liabet; quod si sit, copiam ejus mihi alieunde fieri percuperem.
In liis reply Leibnitz says, page 84,
Pensionarii de Wit libellus exiguus est, ubi aestimatione ilia nota
utitur a possibilitate casuum aequalium aequali et liinc ostendit re-
ditus ad vitam sufiicientes pro sorte a Batavis solvi. Ideo Belgice
scripserat, ut aequitas in vulgus apjDareret.
In his next letter, page 89, James Bernoulli says that De
Witt's book will be useful to him; and as he had in vain tried
to obtain it from Amsterdam he asks for the loan of the copy
which Leibnitz possessed. Leibnitz replies, page 93,
Pensionarii Wittii dissertatio, vel potius Scheda impressa de re-
ditibus ad vitam, sane brevis, extat quidem inter chartas meas, sed cum
ad Te mittere vellem, reperire nondum potui. Dabo tamen operam ut
nanciscare, ubi primum domi eruere licebit alicubi latitantem.
James Bernoulli again asked for the book, page 95. Leibnitz
replies, page 99,
Pensionarii Wittii scriptum nondum satis quaerere licuit inter char-
tas; non dubito tamen, quin sim tandem reperturus, ubi vacaverit.
Sed vix aliquid in eo novum Tibi occurret, cum fundamentis iisdem
ubique insistat, quibus cum alii viri docti jam erant usi, tum Paschalius
in Triangulo Aritlimetico, et Hugenius in diss, de Alea, nempe ut
medium Arithmeticum inter aeque incerta sumatur; quo fundamento
etiam rustic! utuntur, cum praediorum pretia aestimant, et rerum fis-
calium curatores, cum reditus praefecturarum Principis medios consti-
tuunt, quando se offert conductor.
In the last of his letters to James Bernoulli which is given, Leib-
nitz implies that he has not yet found the book ; see page 103.
We find from pages 767, 769 of the volume that Leibnitz
attempted to procure a copy of De Witt's dissertation by the aid
of John Bernoulli, but without success.
These letters were written in the years 1703, 1704, 1705.
HALLEY. 41
60. The political fame of John de Witt has overpowered
that which he might have gained from science, and thus his mathe-
matical attainments are rarely noticed. We may therefore add
that he is said to have published a work entitled Elementa linea-
rum curvarum, Leyden 1650, which is commended by Condorcet ;
see Condorcet's Essai...d'Analyse... i>age CLXXXiv.
CI. We have now to notice a memoir by Halley, entitled An
estimate of the Degrees of the Mortality of Mankind, dravm from
carious Tables of the Births and Funerals at the City of Breslaiv;
with an Attempt to ascertain the Price of Annuities upon Lives.
This memoir is published in Vol. xvil. of the Philosophical
Transactions, 1693 ; it occupies pages 596 — 610.
This memoir is justly celebrated as having laid the foundations
of a correct theory of the value of life annuities.
62. Halley refers to the bills of mortality which had been
published for London and Dublin ; but these bills were not suit-
able for drawing accurate deductions.
First, In that the Number of the People was wanting. Secondly,
That the Ages of the People d}dng was not to be had. And Lastly,
That both London and Dublin by reason of the great and casual
Accession of Strangers who die therein, (as appeared in both, by the
great Excess of the Funerals above the Births) rendered them incapable
of being Standards for this purpose; which requires, if it were possible,
that the People we treat of should not at all be changed, but die where
they were born, without any Adventitious Increase from Abroad, or
Decay by Migration elsewhere.
63. Halley then intimates that he had found satisfactory data
in the Bills of Mortality for the city of Breslau for the years
1687, 88, 89, 90, 91 ; which *'had then been recently communi-
cated by Neumann (probably at Halley's request) through Justell,
to the Royal Society, in whose archives it is supposed that copies
of the original registers are still preserved." Lubbock and Drink-
luater, page 45.
64. The Breslau registers do not appear to have been pub-
lished themselves, and Halley gives only a very brief introduction
42 HALLEY.
to the table which he deduced from them. Halley's table is in the
following form:
1
2
3
4
1000
855
798
760
The left-hand number indicates ages and the right-hand num-
ber the corresponding number of persons alive. We do not feel
confident of the meaning of the table. Montucla, page 408, under-
stood that out of 1000 persons born, 855 attain to the age of one
year, then 798 out of these attain to the age of two years, and
so on.
Daniel Bernoulli understood that the number of infants born
is not named, but that 1000 are supposed to reach one year, then
855 out of these reach two years, and so on. Hist de VAcad. ...
Paris, 1760.
^D. Halley proceeds to shew the use of his table in the calcu-
lation of annuities. To find the value of an annuity on the life of
a given person we must take from the table the chance that he
will be alive after the lapse of n years, and multiply this chance
by the present value of the annual payment due at the end of
n years ; we must then sum the results thus obtained for all values
of n from 1 to the extreme possible age for the life of the given
person. Halley says that " This will without doubt appear to
be a most laborious Calculation." He gives a table of the value
of an annuity for every fifth year of age up to the seventieth.
^Q. He considers also the case of annuities on joint lives, or
on one of two or more lives. Suppose that we have two persons,
an elder and a younger, and we wish to know the probability
of one or both being alive at the end of a given number of years.
Let N be the number in the table opposite to the present age of
the younger person, and R the number opposite to that age in-
creased by the given number of years ; and let N=R-\- Y, so that
Y represents the number who have died out of N in the given
number of years. Let n, r, y denote similar quantities for the
elder age. Then the chance that both will be dead at the end
HALLEY
43
of the given number of years is —■ ; the chance that the younger
Till
will be alive and the elder dead is -r^ ; and so on.
Halley gives according to the fashion of the time a geometri-
cal illustration.
D
1
B
E _C
G
H
Let AB or CD represent N, and DE or BH represent R,
so that EC or HA represents F. Similarly AC, AF, CF may
represent n, r, y. Then of course the rectangle ECFG represents
Ty, and so on.
In like manner, Halley first gives the proposition relating to
three lives in an algebraical form, and then a geometrical illus-
tration by means of a parallelepiped. We find it difficult in
the present day to understand how such simple algebraical pro-
positions could be rendered more intelligible by the aid of areas
and solids.
67. On pages 654^ — 6oQ of the same volume of the Pliiloso-
pMcal Transactions we have Some further Considerations on the
Breslaiu Bills of Mortality. By the same Hand, d'C.
68. De Moivre refers to Halley's memoir, and republishes
the table; see Be Moivre's Doctrine of Chances, pages 261, ^^o.
CHAPTER VI.
MISCELLANEOUS INVESTIGATIONS
Between the yeaes 1670 and 1700.
69. The present chapter will contain notices of various con-
tributions to our subject, which were made between the publi-
cation of the treatise by Huygens and of the more elaborate
works by James Bernoulli, Montmort, and De Moivre.
70. A Jesuit named John Caramuel published in 1670, under
the title of Mathesis Bicej^s, two folio volumes of a course of
Mathematics ; it appears from the list of the author's works at the
beginning of the first volume that the entire course was to have
comprised four volumes.
There is a section called Gomhinatoria which occupies pages
921 — 1036, and part of this is devoted to our subject.
Caramuel gives first an account of combinations in the modern
sense of the word; there is nothing requiring special attention
here : the work contains the ordinary results, not proved by general
symbols but exhibited by means of examples. Caramuel refers
often to Clavius and Izquierdus as his guides.
After this account of combinations in the modern sense Cara-
muel proceeds to explain the Ars Lidliana, that is the method of
affording assistance in reasoning, or rather in disputation, proposed
by Raymond Lully.
71. Afterwards we have a treatise on chances under the title
of Kyheia, quce Combinatorioe genus est, de Alea, et Ludis FortuncB
CARAMUEL. 45
serio disputans. This treatise includes a reprint of tlie treatise of
Huygens, which however is attributed to another person. Cara-
muel says, page 984,
Dum hoc Syntagma Perilhistri Domino N. Viro eruditissimo com-
municarem, ostendit etiam mihi ingeniosam quamdam de eodem argu-
ment© Diatribam, quam ^ Christiano Severino Longomontano fuisse
scriptam putabat, et, quia est curiosa, et brevis, debuit huic Qusestioni
subjungi...
In the table of contents to his work, page xxviii, Caramuel
speaks of the tract of Huygens as
Diatribe ingeniose a Longomontano, ut putatur, de hoc eodem argu-
mento scripta : nescio an evulgata.
Longomontanus was a Danish astronomer who lived from 15G2
to 1647.
72. Nicolas Bernoulli speaks very severely of Caramuel. He
says XJn Jesuite nomme Caramuel, que j'ai citd dans ma These...
mais comme tout ce qu'il donne n'est qu'un amas de paralogismes,
je ne le compte pour rien. Montmort, p. 387.
By his T}ie$e Nicolas Bernoulli probably means his Specimina
Artis conjectandi..., which will be noticed in a subsequent Chapter,
but Caramuel's name is not mentioned in that essay as reprinted
in the A da Erud. . . . Suppl.
John Bernoulli in a letter to Leibnitz speaks more favourably
of Caramuel ; see page 715 of the volume cited in Art. 59.
73. Nicolas Bernoulli has exaggerated the Jesuit's blunders.
Caramuel touches on the following points, and correctly : the
chances of the throws with two dice ; simple cases of the Problem
of Points for two players ; the chance of throwing an ace once at
least in two throws, or in three throws ; the game of Passe-dix.
He goes Avrong in trying the Problem of Points for three
players, which he does for two simple cases ; and also in two other
problems, one of which is the fourteenth of Huygens's treatise, and
the otlier is of exactly the same kind.
Caramuel's method with the fourteenth problem of Huygens's
treatise is as follows. Suppose the stake to be 36 ; then A's chance
46 SAUVEUR.
5 5
at his first throw is ^ , and ^ x 86 = 5 ; thus taking 5 from 86 we
may consider 81 as left for B. Now B's chance of success in a single
throw is ^ ; thus — x 81, that is 5 J, may be considered the value
oO oO
of his first throw.
Thus Caramuel assigns 5 to J. and 5 J to B, as the value of
their first throws respectively ; then the remaining 25f he proposes
to divide equally between A and B. This is wrong : he ought to
have continued his process, and have assigned to A for his second
5 6
throw ^ of the 25f , and then to B for his second throw -^ of the
remainder ; and so on. Thus he Avould have had for the shares of
each player an infinite geometrical progression, and the result
would have been correct.
It is strange that Caramuel went wrong when he had the
treatise of Huygens to guide him ; it seems clear that he followed
this oruidance in the discussion of the Problem of Points for Uvo
players, and then deserted it.
74. In the Journal des Scavans for Feb. 1679, Sauveur gave
some formulae without demonstration relating to the advantage of
the Banker at the game of Bassette. Demonstrations of the for-
mulae will be found in the Ars Conjectandi of James Bernoulli,
pages 191 — 199. I have examined Sauveur's formulae as given
in the Amsterdam edition of the Journal. There are six series
of formulae ; in the first five, which alone involve any difficulty,
Sauveur and Bernoulli agree : the last series is obtained by simply
subtracting the second from the fifth, and in this case by mistake
or misprint Sauveur is wrong. Bernoulli seems to exaggerate the
discrepancy when he says, Qu5d si quis D.ni Salvatoris Tabellas
cum hisce nostris contulerit, deprehendet illas in quibusdam locis,
praesertim ultimis, nonnihil emendationis indigere. Montucla,
page 390, and Gouraud, page 17, seem also to think Sauveur more
inaccurate than he really is.
An eloge of Sauveur by Fontenelle is given in the volume
for 1716 of the Hist, de F Acad.... Paris. Fontenelle says that
Bassette was more beneficial to Sauveur than to most of those who
LEIBXITZ. 47
played at it with so much fury ; it was at the request of the Marquis
of Dangeau that Sauveur undertook the investigation of the
chances of the game. Sauveur was in consequence introduced at
court, and had the honour of explaining his calculations to the
King and Queen. See also Montmor^t, page xxxix.
75. James Bernoulli proposed for solution two problems in
chances in the Journal des Sgavans for 1685. They are as
follows :
1. A and B play with a die, on condition that he who first
throws an ace wins. First A throws once, then B throws once,
then A throws twice, then B throws twice, then A throws three
times, then B throws three times, and so on until ace is thrown.
2. Or first A throws once, then B twice, then A three times,
then B four times, and so on.
The problems remained unsolved until James Bernoulli himself
gave the results in the Acta Eruditorum for 1690. Afterwards in
the same volume Leibnitz gave the rcsidts. The chances involve
infinite series which are not summed.
James Bernoulli's solutions are reprinted in the collected
edition of his works, Geneva, 17^4 ; see pages 207 and 430. The
problems are also solved in the Ars Conjectandi, pages 52 — oG.
76. Leibnitz took great interest in the Theory of Probability
and shewed that he was fully alive to its importance, although he
cannot be said himself to have contributed to its advance. There
was one subject which especially attracted his attention, namely
that of games of all kinds ; he himself here found an exercise for
his inventive powers. He believed that men had noAvhere shewn
more ingenuity than in their amusements, and that even those of
children might usefully engage the attention of the greatest mathe-
maticians. He wished to have a systematic treatise on games,
comprising first those which depended on numbers alone, secondly
those which depended on position, like chess, and lastly those
which depended on motion, like billiards. This he considered
would be useful in bringing to perfection the art of invention, or
48 ARBUTHXOT.
as he expresses it in another place, in bringing to perfection the
art of arts, which is the art of thinking.
See Leihnitii Opera Omnia, ed. Dutens, Vol. v. pages 17, 22, 28,
29, 203, 206. Vol. Vi. part 1, 271, 304. Erdmann, page 175.
See also Opera Omnia, ed. Dutens, Vol. vi. part 1, page 36,
for the design which Leibnitz entertained of writing a work on
estimating the probability of conclusions obtained by arguments.
77. Leibnitz however furnishes an example of the liability to
error which seems peculiarly characteristic of our subject. He
says. Opera Omnia, ed. Dutens, Vol. vi. part 1, page 217,
...par exemple, avec deux des, il est aussi faisable de jetter douze
points, que d'en jetter onze ; car Tun et I'autre no se peut faire que
d'une seule manierej mais il est trois fois plus faisable d'en jetter
sept; car cela se peut faire en jettant six et un, cinq et deux, quatre
et trois; et une combinaison ici est aussi faisable que I'autre.
It is true that eleven can only be made up of six and five ; but
the six may be on either of the dice and the five on the other, so
that the chance of throwing eleven with two dice is twice as great
as the chance of throwing twelve : and similarly the chance of
throwing seven is six times as great as the chance of throwing
twelve.
78. A work entitled Of the Laws of Chance is said by Montu-
cla to have appeared at London in 1692; he adds mais n'ayant
jamais rencontr^ ce livre, je ne puis en dire davantage. Je le
soupconne n^anmoins de Benjamin Motte, depuis secretaire de
la society royale. Montucla, page 391.
Lubbock and Drink water say respecting it, page 43,
This essay, which was edited, and is generally supposed to have
been written by Motte, the secretary of the Koyal Society, contains
a translation of Huyghens's treatise, and an ajDplication of his princi-
ples to the determination of the advantage of the banker at pharaon,
hazard, and other games, and to some questions relating to lotteries.
A similar statement is made by Galloway in his Treatise on
Prohahility, page 5.
79. It does not appear however that there was any fellow
of the Royal Society named Motte; for the name does not occur
ARBUTHNOT. 49
in the list of fellows given in Thomson's History of the Royal
Society.
I have no doubt that the work is due to Arbuthnot. For
there is an English translation of Huygens's treatise by W.
Browne, published in 1714 ; in his Advertisement to the Reader
Browne says, speaking of Huygens's treatise,
Besides the Latin Editions it has pass'd thro', the learned Dr
Arbuthnott publish'd an English one, together with an Application
of the General Doctrine to some pai-ticular Games then most in use;
which is so intirely dispers'd Abroad, that an Account of it is all we
can now meet with.
This seems to imply that there had been no other transla-
tion except Arbuthnot's; and the words ''an Application of the
General Doctrine to some particular Games then most in use"
agree very well with some which occur in the work itself: ''It
is easy to apply this method to the Games that are in use amongst
us." See page 28 of the fourth edition.
Watt's Bihliotheca Britannica, under the head Arbuthnot, places
the work with the date 1G92.
80. I have seen only one copy of this book, which was lent
to me by Professor De Morgan. The title page is as follows:
Of the laws of chance, or, a method of calculation of the hazards
of game, plainly demonstrated, and applied to games at present most
in use; which may be easily extended to the most intricate cases of
chance imaginable. The fourth edition, ro^is'd by John Ham. By
whom is added, a demonstration of the gain of the banker in any
circumstance of the game call'd Pharaon; and how to determine the
odds at the Ace of Hearts or Fair Chance; with the arithmetical
solution of some questions relating to lotteries; and a few remarks
upon Hazard and Backgammon. London. Printed for B. Motte and
C. Bathurst, at the Middle-Temple Gate in Fleet-street, jt.dcc.xxxviii.
81. I proceed to describe the work as it appears in the
fourth edition.
The book is of small octavo size; it may be said to consist of
two parts. The first part extends to page 49 ; it contains a trans-
lation of Huygens's treatise with some additional matter. Page 50
is blank ; page 51 is in fact a title page containing a reprint
4.
50 ARBUTHNOT.
of part of the title we have already given, namely from "a de-
monstration" down to "Backgammon."
The words which have been quoted from Lubbock and Drink-
water in Art. 78, seem not to distinguish between these two
parts. There is nothing about the " advantage of the banker
at Pharaon" in the first part; and the investigations which are
given in the second part could not, I believe, have appeared so
early as 1692: they seem evidently taken from De Moivre. De
Moivre says in the second paragraph of his preface,
I had not at that time read anything concerning this Subject, hut
Mr. Huygens's Book, de Eatiociniis in Ludo Alese, and a little Eng-
lish Piece (which was properly a Translation of it) done by a very in-
genious Gentleman, who, tho' capable of carrying the matter a great
deal farther, was contented to follow his Original; adding only to it
the computation of the Advantage of the Setter in the Play called
Hazard, and some few things more.
82. The work is preceded by a Preface written with vigour
but not free from coarseness. We will give some extracts, which
show that the writer was sound in his views and sagacious in
his expectations.
It is thought as necessary to write a Preface before a Book, as
it is judg'd civil, when you invite a Friend to Dinner to proffer him
a Glass of Hock beforehand for a Whet: And this being maim'd
enough for want of a Dedication, I am resolv'd it shall not want an'
Epistle to the Beader too. I shall not take upon me to determine,
whether it is lawful to play at Dice or not, leaving that to be disputed
betwixt the Fanatick Parsons and the Sharpers ; I am sure it is lawful
to deal with Dice as with other Epidemic Distempers;
A great part of this Discourse is a Translation from Mons. Huy-
gens's Treatise, De ratiociniis in ludo Alese; one, who in his Improve-
ments of Philosophy, has but one Superior, and I think few or no
equals. The whole I undertook for my own Divertisement, next to
the Satisfaction of some Friends, who would now and then be wran-
gling about the Proportions of Hazards in some Cases that are here
decided. All it requir'd was a few spare Hours, and but little Work
for the Brain; my Design in publishing it, was to make it of more
general Dse, and perhaps persuade a raw Squire, by it, to keep his
Money in his Pocket; and if, upon this account, I should incur the
ARBUTHNOT. 51
Clamours of the Sharpers, I do not m^^ch regard it, since they are
a sort of People the World is not bound to provide for
...It is impossible for a Die, with snch determin'd force and di-
rection, not to fall on such a determin'd side, and therefore I call that
Chance which is nothing but want of Art ;
The Reader may here observe the Force of Numbers, which can
be successfully applied, even to those things, which one would imagine
are subject to no Rules. There are very few things which we know,
which are not capable of Ijeing reduc'd to a Mathematical Reasoning;
and when they cannot, it's a sign our Knowledge of them is very small
and confus'd; and where a mathematical reasoning can be had, it's as
great folly to make use of any other, as to grope for a thing in the
dark, when you have a Candle standing by you. I believe the Cal-
culation of the Quantity of Probability might be improved to a very
useful and pleasant Speculation, and applied to a great many Events
which are accidental, besides those of Games ;
...There is likewise a Calculation of the Quantity of Probability
founded on Experience, to be made use of in Wagers about any thing;
it is odds, if a Woman is with Child, but it shall be a Boy; and if
you would know the just odds, you must consider the Proportion in
the Bills that the Males bear to the Females: The Yearlv Bills of
Mortality are observed to bear such Proportion to the live People as
1 to 30, or 2Q; therefore it is an even Wager, that one out of thir-
teen dies within a Year (which may be a good reason, tho' not the
true, of that foolish piece of Superstition), because, at this rate, if 1
out of 26 dies, you are no loser. It is but 1 to 18 if you meet a
Parson in the Street, that he proves to be a Non-Juror, because there
is but 1 of 36 that are such.
83. Pages 1 to 25 contain a translation of Huygens's treatise
including the five problems which he left unsolved. Respecting
these our author says
The Calculus of the preceding Problems is left out by Mons. Huy-
gens, on purpose that the ingenious Reader may have the satisfiiction of
applying the former method himself; it is in most of them more labo-
rious than difficult : for Example, I have pitch'd upon the second and
third, because the rest can be solv'd after the same Method.
Our author solves the second problem in the first of the
three senses which it may bear according to the Ars Conjectandi,
4—2
52 ARBUTHNOT.
and he arrives at the same result as James Bernoulli on page 58
of the Ars Conjectandi. Our author adds,
I have suppos'd here the Sense of the Problem to be, that when any-
one chus'd a Counter, he did not diminish their number; but if he
miss'd of a white one, put it in again, and left an equal hazard to him
who had the following choice; for if it be otherwise suppos'd, ^'s share
55 9
will be Y9^ » which is less than Yq •
55
This result ^-^ however is wrong in either of the other two
senses which James Bernoulli ascribes to the problem, for which he
77 101
obtains j^ and z-^ respectively as the results ; see Art. 35.
84. Then follow some other calculations about games. We
have some remarks about the Boyal-Oak Lottery which are analo-
gous to those made on the Play of the Royal Oak by De Moivre
in the Preface to his Doctrine of Chances.
A table is g^iven of the number of various throws which can be
made with three dice. Pages 84 — 39 are taken from Pascal ; they
seem introduced abruptly, and they give very little that had not
already occurred in the translation of Huygens's treatise.
85. Our author touches on Whist ; and he solves two problems
about the situation of honours. These solutions are only approxi-
mate, as he does not distinguish between the dealers and their
adversaries. And he also solves the problem of comparing the
chances of two sides, one of which is at eight and the other at
nine; the same remark applies to this solution. He makes the
chances as 9 to 7; De Moivre by a stricter investigation makes
them nearly as 25 to 18. See Doctrine of Chances, page 176.
86. Our author says on page 43,
All the former Cases can be calculated by the Theorems laid down
by Monsieur Huygens; but Cases more compos'd require other Prin-
ciples; for the easy and ready Computation of which, I shall add one
Theorem more, demonstrated after Monsieur Huygens's method.
The theorem is : " if I have p Cliances for a, q Chances for h,
ROBERTS. 53
and r Chances for c, then my hazard is worth ^J- — — " Our
]_)^- q + r
author demonstrates this, and intimates that it may be extended
to the case when there are also s Chances for d, &c.
Our author then considers the game of Hazard. He gives an
investigation similar to that in De Moivre, and leading to the
same results; see Doctrine of Chances, page IGO.
87. The first part of the book concludes thus :
All those Problems suppose Chances, which are in an equal proba-
bility to happen; if it should be suppos'd otherwise, there will arise
variety of Cases of a quite different nature, which, perhaps, 'twere not
unpleasant to consider : I sliall add one Problem of that kind, leaving
the Solution to those who think it merits their pains.
In Parallel ipipedo cujus latera sunt ad iuvicem in ratione a,b,c:
Invenire quota vice quivis suscipere potest, ut datum quodvis planum,
v.g. aSjaciat.
The problem was aftersvards discussed by Thomas Simpson ; it
is Problem xxvil, of his Nature and Laius of CJiance.
88. It will be convenient to postpone an account of the second
part of the book until after we have examined the works of De
Moivre.
89. We next notice An Arithmetical Paradox, concerning the
Chances of Lotteries, by the Honourable Francis Roberts, Esq. ;
Fellow of the R S.
This is published in Vol. xvii. of the Philosophical Trans-
actions, 1693 ; it occupies pages 677 — 681.
Suppose in one lottery that there are three blanks, and three
prizes each of 16 pence ; suppose in another lottery that there are
four blanks, and two prizes each of 2 shilliugs. Now for one
drawing, in the first lottery the expectation is ^ of 16 pence, and in
the second it is J of 2 shillings ; so that it is 8 pence in each case.
The paradox which Roberts finds is this ; suppose that a gamester
pays a shilling for the chance in one of these lotteries ; then
although, as we have just seen, the expectations are equal, yet the
odds against him are 3 to 1 in the first lottery, and only 2 to 1 in
the second.
Oi CRAIG.
The paradox is made by Roberts himself, by his own arbitrary
definition of odds.
Supposing a lottery has a blanks and h prizes, and let each
prize be r shillings ; and suppose a gamester gives a shilling for
one drawing in the lottery; then Roberts says the odds against
a 1
him are formed by the product of j ^^^ T > ^^^^ '^^) "tl^® ^^^^
are as a to Z> (r — 1). This is entirely arbitrary.
The mere algebra of the paper is quite correct, and is a curious
specimen of the mode of work of the day.
The author is doubtless the same whose name is spelt Robartes
in De Moivre's Preface.
90. I borrow from Lubbock and Drinkwater an account of a
work which I have not seen ; it is given on their page 45.
It is not necessary to do more than mention an essay, by Craig, on
the probability of testimony, which appeared in 1699, under the title
of "Theologi£e Cliristianse Principia Mathematica." This attempt to
introduce mathematical language and reasoning into moral subjects can
scarcely be read with seriousness ; it has the appearance of an insane
parody of Newton's Principia, which then engrossed the attention of the
mathematical world. The author begins by stating that he considers
the mind as a movable, and arguments as so many moving forces, by
which a certain velocity of suspicion is produced, &c. He proves
gravely, that suspicions of any history, transmitted through the given
time (cceteris ^9aH62^s), vary in the duplicate ratio of the times taken
from the beginning of the history, with much more of the same kind
with respect to the estimation of equable pleasure, uniformly accele-
rated pleasure, pleasure varying as any power of the time, &c. &c.
It is stated in biographical dictionaries that Craig's work was
reprinted at Leipsic in 1755, with a refutation by J. Daniel Titius ;
and that some Anwiadversiones on it were published by Peterson
in 1701.
Prevost and Lhuilier notice Craig's work in a memoir published
in the Memoires de VAcad... .Beiiin, 1797. It seems that Craig con-
cluded that faith in the Gospel so far as it depended on oral tra-
dition expired about the year 800, and that so far as it depended
on written tradition it would expire in the year 3150. Peterson
CEAIG. 55
by adopting a different law of diminution concluded that faith
would expire in 1789.
See Montmort, page XXXVIII. ; also the Athenceum for Nov, 7th,
1863, page Gil.
91. A Calctdation of the C^'edihility of Human Testimony is
contained in Vol. xxi. of the Philosophical Transactions; it is the
volume for 1699 : the essay occupies pages 359 — 365. The essay
is anonymous ; Lubbock and Drinkwater suggest that it may be
by Craig.
The views do not agree with those now received.
First suppose we have successive witnesses. Let a report be
transmitted through a series of n witnesses, whose credibilities are
Pi' P^y-'Pn' the essay takes the jDroduct j^^j^g '"Pn ^s representing
the resulting probability.
Next, suppose we have concurrent witnesses. Let there be two
witnesses ; the first witness is supposed to leave an amount of un-
certainty represented by 1 —p{, of this the second witness removes
the fraction p^, and therefore leaves the fraction (1 —p^ (1 — p^ :
thus the resulting probability is ^ — 0- — 2\) 0- ~2^2)- Sii^^iiarly
if tliere are three concurrent testimonies the resulting probability
is 1 — (1 —2\) (1 — i^a). 0- —P^) '} ^^^^ s^ 0^ ^^^' '^ greater number.
The theory of this essay is adopted in the article Prohahilite
of the original French Encyclopedie, which is reproduced in the
Encyclopedie Methodique: the article is unsigned, so that we must
apparently ascribe it to Diderot. The same theory is adopted by
Bicquillcy in his work Bu Calcul des Frohahilites.
CHAPTER VII.
JAMES BERNOULLI.
92. We now propose to give an account of the Ars Conjec-
tandi of James Bernoulli.
James Bernoulli is the first member of the celebrated family
of this name who is associated with the history of Mathematics.
He was born 27th December, 1654, and died 16th August, 1705.
For a most interesting and valuable account of the whole family
we may refer to the essay entitled Die Mathematiker Bernoulli. . .
von Frof. Dr. Peter Merian, Basel, 1860.
93. Leibnitz states that at his request James Bernoulli studied
the subject. Feu Mr. Bernoulli a cultive cette mati^re sur mes
exhortations; Leibnitii Opera Omnia, ed. Dutens, Vol. Vl. part 1,
page 217. But this statement is not confirmed by the correspond-
ence between Leibnitz and James Bernoulli, to which we have
already referred in Art. 59. It appears from this correspondence
that James Bernoulli had nearly completed his work before he
was aware that Leibnitz had heard any thing about it. Leibnitz
says, page 71,
Audio a Te doctrinam de aestimandis probabilitatibus (quam ego
magni facio) non parum esse excultam. Vellem aliqiiis varia ludendi
genera (in quibus pulchra hujus doctrinae specimina) mathematice trac-
taret. Id simul amoenum et utile foret nee Te aut quocunque gra-
^issimo Mathematico indignum.
James Bernoulli in reply says, page 77,
Scire libenter velim, Amplissime Vir, a quo habeas, quod Doctrina
de probabilitatibus aestimandis a me excolatur. Yerum est me a plu-
JAMES BERNOULLI. 57
ribus retro annis hujusmodi speciilatlonibus magnopere delectari, ut vix
piitem, quemquani plura super his meclitatum esse. Animus etiam
erat, Tractatum quendam conscribendi de hac materia ; sed saepe per
integros annos seposui, quia naturalis meus torjoor, quem accessoria vale-
tiidinis meae infirmitas immane quantum auxit, facit ut aegerrime ad
Bcribendum accedam ; et saepe mihi optarem amanuensem, qui cogitata
mea leviter sibi indicata plene divinare, scriptisque consignare posset.
Absolvi tamen jam maximam Libri partem, sed deest adliuc praecipua,
qua artis conjee tandi principia etiam ad civilia, moralia et oeconomia
applicare doceo...
James Bernoulli then proceeds to speak of the celebrated
theorem which is now called by his name.
Leibnitz in his next letter brings some objections against the
theorem ; see page 83 : and Bernoulli replies ; see page 87. Leib-
nitz returns to the subject; see page 9-i: and Bernoulli briefly
replies, page 97,
Quod Yerisimilitudines spectat, et earum augmentum pro aucto soil,
observationum numero, res omnino se habet ut scripsi, et certus sum
Tibi placituram demonstration em, cum publicavero.
94. The last letter from James Bernoulli to Leibnitz is dated
3rd June, 1705. It closes in a most painful manner. We here see
him, who was perhaps the most famous of all who have borne
his famous name, suffering under the combined sorrow arising from
illness, from the ingratitude of his brother John who had been
his pupil, and from the unjust suspicions of Leibnitz who may
be considered to have been his master :
Si inimor vere narrat, redibit cei'te frater meus Basileam, non tamen
Graecam (cum ipse sit dva\<jidf3-r]Tos) sed meam potius stationem (quara
brevi cum vita me derelicturum, forte non vane, existimat) occupatunis.
De iniquis suspicionibus, quibus me immerentem onerasti in Tuis pe-
nultimis, alias, ubi plus otii nactus fuero. Nimc vale et fave etc.
95. Tlie Ars Conjectandi was not published until eight years
after the death of its author. The volume of the Hist, de
r A cad.... Pains for 1705, published in 1706, contains Fontenelle's
Eloge of James Bernoulli. Fontenelle here gave a brief notice,
derived from Hermann, of the contents of the Ars Conjectandi
then unpublished. A brief notice is also give in another Eloge of
58 JAMES BERNOULLI.
James Bernoulli wliicli appeared in the Journal des Bgavans
for 1706: this notice is attributed to Saurin by Montmort; see his
page IV.
References to the work of James Bernoulli frequently occur in
the correspondence between Leibnitz and John Bernoulli ; see the
work cited in Art. 59, pages 367, 377, 836, 8i5, 847, 922, 923,
925, 931.
96. The A^^s Conjectandi was published in 1713. A preface
of two pages was supplied by Nicolas Bernoulli, the son of a
brother of James and John. It appears from the preface that
the fourth part of the work was left unfinished by its author ; the
publishers had desired that the work should be finished by John
Bernoulli, but the numerous engagements of this mathematician
had been an obstacle. It was then proposed to devolve the task
on Nicolas Bernoulli, who had already turned his attention to
the Theory of Probability. But Nicolas Bernoulli did not con-
sider himself adequate to the task; and by his advice the work
was finally published in the state in which its author had left it;
the words of Nicolas Bernoulli are, Suasor itaque fui, ut Tractatus
iste qui maxima ex parte jam impressus erat, in eodem quo eum
Auctor reliquit statu cum publico communicaretur.
The Ars Conjectandi is not contained in the collected edition
of James Bernoulli's works.
97. TYvqAvs Conjectandi, including a treatise on infinite series,
consists of 306 small quarto pages besides the title leaf and the
preface. At the end there is a dissertation in French, entitled
Lettre d un Amy, sur les Parties du Jeu de Paume which occu-
pies 35 additional pages. Montucla speaks of this letter as the
work of an anonymous author ; see his page 391 : but there can
be no doubt that it is due to James Bernoulli, for to him Nicolas
Bernoulli assigns it in the preface to the J.rs Conjectandi, and
in his correspondence with Montmort. See Montmort, page 333.
98. The Ars Conjectandi is divided into four parts. The
first part consists of a reprint of the treatise of Huygens De Ra-
tiociniis in Ludo Alece, accompanied with a commentary by James
Bernoulli. The second part is devoted to the theory of permu-
tations and combinations. The third part consists of the solution
JAMES BEENOULLT. 59
of various problems relating to games of chance. The fourth part
proposed to apply the Theory of Probability to questions of interest
in morals and economical science.
We may observe that instead of the ordinary symbol of
equality, = James Bernoulli uses x, which Wallis ascribes to Des
Cartes; see Walliss Algebra, 1693, page 138.
99. A French translation of the first part of the Ars Con-
jectandi was published in 1801, under the title of LArt de
Conjecturer, Tradidt du Latin de Jacques Bernoulli; Avec des
Observations, Eclair cissemens et Additions. Far L. G. F. Vastel,...
Caen. 1801.
The second part of the Ars Conjectandi is included in the
volume of reprints which we have cited in Art. 47; Maseres in
the same volume gave an English translation of this part.
100. The first part of the Ars Conjectandi occupies pages
1 — 71 ; with respect to this part we may observe that the com-
mentary by James Bernoulli is of more value than the original
treatise by Huygens. The commentary supplies other proofs of
the fundamental propositions and other investigations of the pro-
blems; also in some cases it extends them. We will notice the
most important additions made by James Bernoulli.
101. In the Problem of Points with two players, James
Bernoulli gives a table which furnishes the chances of the two
players when one of them wants any number of points not
exceeding nine, and the other wants any number of points not
exceeding seven ; and, as he remarks, this table may be j^rolonged
to any extent; see his page 16.
102. James Bernoulli gives a long note on the subject of
the various throws which can be made with two or more dice,
and the number of cases favourable to each throw. And we may
especially remark that he constructs a large table which is equi-
valent to the theorem we now express thus : the number of ways
in which ni can be obtained by throwing n dice is equal to the
co-efficient of ^'" in the development of {x + x^ -{- x^ -\- x^ ^ x° -\- x^
in a series of powers of x. See his page 21;.
60 JAMES BERNOULLI.
103. The tenth problem is to find in how many trials one
may undertake to throw a six with a common die. James Bernoulli
gives a note in reply to an objection which he suggests might
be urged against the result; the reply is perhaps only intended
as a popular illustration : it has been criticized by Prevost in the
NoiLveaux Memoir es de FA cad.... Berlin for 1781.
104. James Bernoulli gives the general expression for the
chance of succeeding m times at least in n trials, when the chance
of success in a single trial is known. Let the chances of success
b c
and failure in a single trial be - and - respectively: then the
required chance consists of the terms of the expansion of - + — )
from ( - j to the term which involves - j [ - J , both inclusive.
This formula involves a solution of the Problem of Points for
two players of unequal skill; but James Bernoulli does not ex-
plicitly make the application.
105. James Bernoulli solves four of the five problems which
Huygens had placed at the end of his treatise ; the solution of the
fourth problem he postpones to the third part of his book as it
depends on combinations.
106. Perhaps however the most valuable contribution to the
subject which this part of the work contains is a method of solving
problems in chances which James Bernoulli speaks of as his own,
and which he frequently uses. We will give his solution of the
problem which forms the fourteenth proposition of the treatise
of Huygens : we have already given the solution of Huygens him-
self; see Art. 34.
Instead of two players conceive an infinite number of players
each of whom is to have one throw in turn. The game is to
end as soon as a player whose turn is denoted by an odd number
throws a six, or a player whose turn is denoted by an even number
throws a seven, and such player is to receive the whole sum at
stake. Let h denote the number of ways in which six can be
thrown, c the number of ways in which six can fail; so that 6 = 5,
JAMES BERNOULLI. 61
and c = 31 ; let e denote the number of ways in which seven can
be thrown, and /the number of ways in which seven can fail, so
that e = 6, and /= 30 ; and let a = 6 4- c = e +/
Now consider the expectations of the different players ; they
are as follows:
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
YI.
YIL
YIIL...
h
a'
ce
2 >
a
hcf
a''
e'er
For it is obvious that - expresses the expectation of the first
player. In order that the second player may win, the first throw
must fail and the second throw must succeed ; that is there are ce
ce
favourable cases out of o^ cases, so the expectation is -2 . In
order that the third player may win, the first throw must fail,
the second throw must fail, and the third throw must succeed;
that is there are cfh favourable cases out of a^ cases, so the ex-
Icf
pectation is — . And so on for the other players. Now let a
a
single player. A, be substituted in our mind in the place of the
first, third, fifth,...; and a single player, B, in the place of the
second, fourth, sixth.... We thus arrive at the problem proposed
by Huygens, and the expectations of A and B are given by two
infinite geometrical progressions. By summing these progressions
we find that ^'s expectation is -3 — -, and 5's expectation is
CB
; the proportion is that of 30 to 81, which agrees with
the result in Art. 31.
107. The last of the five problems which Huygens left to be
solved is the most remarkable of all ; see Art. 35. It is the first
example on the Duration of Play, a subject which afterwards
exercised the highest powers of De Moi\Te, Lagrange, and Laplace.
James Bernoulli solved the problem, and added, without a demon-
stration, the result for a more general problem of which that of
Huygens was a particular case; see Ars Conjectandi page 71.
62 JAMES BERNOULLI.
Suppose A to have m counters, and B to have n counters ; let their
chances of winning in a single game be as a to 6 ; the loser in each
game is to give a counter to his adversary : required the chance of
each player for winning all the counters of his adversary. In the
case taken by Huygens m and n were equal.
It will be convenient to give the modern form of solution of
the problem.
Let u^ denote J.'s chance of winning all his adversary's count-
ers when he has himself w counters. In the next game A must
either win or lose a counter; his chances for these two contin-
gencies are r and t- respectively: and then his chances
of winning all his adversary's counters are u^_^_^ and u^_^ respectively.
Hence
_ a h
This equation is thus obtained in the manner exemplified by
Huygens in his fourteenth proposition; see Art. 34.
The equation in Finite Differences may be solved in the or-
dinary way; thus we shall obtain
where C^ and C^ are arbitrary constants. To determine these
constants we observe " that ^'s chance is zero when he has no
counters, and that it is unity when he has all the counters. Thus
u^ is equal to when x is 0, and is equal to 1 when x is m + n.
Hence we have
0=0.+ a„ 1 = 0.+ c,g)
«x
«!+n
therefore ^i — ~ ^2~
m+n 1 m+n '
Hence u^ =
^m+n _ ^m+n-:c J^,
X rn-^n J vi+n
To determine ^'s chance at the beginning of the game we
must put x = m; thus we obtain
7/ =
JAMES BERXOULLI. 63
In precisely tlie same manner we may find jS's chance at any
stage of the game ; and his chance at the beginning of the game
will be
h"" (g^ - If)
It will be observed that the sum of the chances of A and B at
the beginning of the game is unitif. The interpretation of this
result is that one or other of the players must eventually win
all the counters; that is, the play must terminate. This might
have been expected, but was not assumed in the investigation.
The formula which James Bernoulli here gives will next come
before us in the correspondence between Nicolas Bernoulli and
Montmort; it was however first published by De Moi\Te in his
De Mensiira Soiiis, Problem ix., where it is also demonstrated.
108. We may observe that Bernoulli seems to have found,
as most who have studied the subject of chances have also found,
that it was extremely easy to fall into mistakes, especially by
attempting to reason without strict calculation. Thus, on his
page 15, he points out a mistake into which it would have been
easy to fall, nisi nos calculus aliud clocuisset He adds,
Qao ipso proin monemiir, ut cauti siraiis in jiidicando, 'nee ratio-
cinia nostra super qiiacunque statim aiialogia in rebus deprehensji fun-
dare suescamus; quod ipsum tamen etiam ab iis, qui vel maxinie sapere
videntur, nimis frequenter fieri solet.
Again, on his page 27,
Quae quideiu eum in finem hie adduce, ut palam fiat, quam parum
fideudum sit ejusmodi ratiociniis, qu?e corticem tantuiu attingunt, nee
in ipsam rei naturam altius penetrant; tametsi in toto vitse usu etiam.
apud sapientissimos quosque nihil sit frequentius.
Again, on his page 29, he refers to the difficulty which Pascal
says had been felt by M. de * * * *, whom James Bernoulli calls
Anonymus quidam coetera subacti judicii Yir, sed Geometriae
expers. . James Bernoulli adds,
Hac enim qui imbuti sunt, ejusmodi erai'Tto^avetai minime moran-
tur, probe conscii dari innumera, qua3 admoto calculo aliter se habere
comperiuntur, quam initio apparebaut; ideoque sedulb cavent, juxta id
quod semel iterumque monui, ne quicquam analogiis temere tribuant.
64 JA^IES BERNOULLI.
109. The second part of the Ars Conjectandi occupies pages
72 — ] 87 : it contains the doctrine of Permutations and Combina-
tions. James Bernoulli says that others have treated this subject
before him, and especially Schooten, Leibnitz, Wallis and Prestet ;
and so he intimates that his matter is not entirely new. He con-
tinues thus, page 73,
...tametsi qusedam non contemnenda de nostro adjecimus, inprimis
demonstrationem generalem et facilem proprietatis numerorum figura-
torum, cui csetera pleraque innituntur, et quam nemo quod sciam ante
nos dedit eruitve.
110. James Bernoulli begins by treating on permutations;
he proves the ordinary rule for finding the number of permuta-
tions of a set of things taken all together, when there are no
repetitions among the set of things and also when there are. He
gives a full analysis of the number of arrangements of the verse
Tot tibi sunt dotes, Virgo, quot sidera coeli ; see Art. 40. He then
considers combinations ; and first he finds the total number of ways
in which a set of things can be taken, by taking them one at a
time, two at a time, three at a time, ...He then proceeds to find
what we should call the number of combinations of n things taken
r at a time ; and here is the part of the subject in which he
added most to the results obtained by his predecessors. He
gives a figure which is substantially the same as Pascal's Arith-
metical Triangle; and he arrives at two results, one of which
is the well-known form for the nth. term of the rth order of
figurate numbers, and the other is the formula for the sum of
a given number of terms of the series of figurate numbers of a
given order ; these results are expressed definitely in the modern
notation as we now have them in works on Algebra. The mode of
proof is more laborious, as might be expected. Pascal as we have
seen in Arts. 22 and 41, employed without any scruple, and indeed
rather with approbation, the method of induction : James Bernoulli
however says, page 95,... modus demonstrandi per inductionem
parum scientificus est.
James Bernoulli names his predecessors in investigations on
figurate numbers in the following terms on his page 95 :
Multi, ut hoc in transitu notemus, numerorum figuratorum contem-
JAMES BERNOULLI. 65
plafcionibua vacarunt (quos inter Faulliaberus et Remmelini TJlmenEes,
Wallisius, Mercator in Logarithmotechnia, Prestetus, aliique)...
111. We may notice that James Bernoulli gives incidentally
on his page 89 a demonstration of the Binomial Theorem for the
case of a positive integral exponent. Maseres considers this to
be the first demonstration that appeared ; see page 283 of the
work cited in Ai't. 47.
112. From the summation of a series of figurate numbers
James Bernoulli proceeds to derive the summation of the powers
of the natural numbers. He exhibits definitely 2?i, Sn^ 2n^...
up to Xw^" ; he uses the sj^mbol / where we in modern books use S.
He then extends his results by induction without demonstration,
and introduces for the first time into Analysis the coefficients since
so famous as the numbers of Bernoulli. His general formula is that
^ , n'"-' n' c . ^_, c(c-l)(c-2) J, ,_^
c(c-l)(c-2)(c-3)(o-4) _,
^ 2.3.4.5.6
c(c-.l)(o-2)(c-3)(c-4)(c-5)(c~6)
"^ 2.3.4.5.6.7.8 '^'"
where ^ = 6 ' ^ = " SO ' ^ = A' ^ = - i' -
He gives the numerical value of the sum of the tenth powers
of the first thousand natural numbers ; the result is a number
with thirty-two figures. He adds, on his page 98,
E quibus apparet, quam inutilis censenda sit opera Jsmaelis Bul-
lialdi, quam conscribendo tarn spisso volumini Arithmeticae sufe Infijii-
torum impendit, ubi niliil prgestitit aliud, quam ut primarum tantum
sex potestatum summas (partem ejus quod unica nos consecuti sumus
pagina) immense labore demonstratas exhiberet.
For some account of Bulliald's sjnssum volumen, see Wallis's
Algebra, Chap. LXXX.
113. James Bernoulli gives in his fourth Chapter the rule
now well known for the number of the combinations of ti thiners
66 JAMES BERNOULLI.
taken c at a time. He also draws various simple inferences from
the rule. He digresses from the subject of this part of his book to
resume the discussion of the Problem of Points ; see his page 107.
He gives two methods of treating the problem by the aid of
the theory of combinations. The first method shews how the
table which he had exhibited in the first part of the A7'S Con-
jectandi might be continued and the law of its terms expressed;
the table is a statement of the chances of A and B for winning
the game when each of them wants an assigned number of points.
Pascal had himself given such a table for a game of six points ;
an extension of the table is given on page 16 of the Ars Con-
jectandi, and now James Bernoulli investigates general expressions
for the component numbers of the table. From his investigation
he derives the result which Pascal gave for the case in which one
player wants one point more than the other player. James Ber-
noulli concludes this investigation thus ; Ipsa solutio Pascaliana,
quae Auctori suo tantopere arrisit.
James Bernoulli's other solution of the Problem of Points is
much more simple and direct, for here he does make the application
to which we alluded in Art. 101^ Suppose that A wants m points
and B wants 7i points ; then the game will certainly be decided in
m + n — 1 trials. As in each trial A and B have equal chances
of success the whole number of possible cases is 2"'"^""\ And
A wins the game if B gains no point, or if B gains just one point,
or just two points,... or any number up to w — 1 inclusive. Thus
the number of cases favourable to A is
! + ;. + _-_ + ^ + ... + ^^^ ^
where //< = m -f w — 1 .
Pascal had in effect advanced as far as this; see Art. 23: but
the formula is more convenient than the Arithmetical Triangle.
114. In his fifth Chapter James Bernoulli considers another
question of combinations, namely that which in modern treatises is
enunciated thus : to find the number of homogeneous products of
the r^^ degree which can be formed of n symbols. In his sixth
Chapter he continues this subject, and makes a slight reference to
JAMES BERNOULLI. 67
the doctrine of the number of divisors of a given number; for
more information he refers to the works of Schooten and WaUis,
which we have already examined ; see Arts. 42, 47.
115. In his seventh Chapter James Bernoulli gives the for-
mula for what we now call the number of permutations of n things
taken c at a time. In the remainder of this part of his book he
discusses some other questions relating to permutations and com-
binations, and illustrates his theory by examples.
116. The third part of the Ars Conjectandi occupies pages
138 — 209; it consists of twenty-four problems which are to illus-
trate the theory that has gone before in the book. James Ber-
noulli gives only a few lines of introduction, and then proceeds to
the problems, which he says,
...nullo fere habito selectu, prout in adversariis reperi, proponam, prre-
niissis etiam vel intersj)ersis nonnuUis facilioribus, et in quibua nidlus
combiiiationum usus apparet.
117. The fourteenth problem deserves some notice. There
are two cases in it, but it will be sufficient to consider one of
them. A is to throw a die, and then to repeat his throw as many
times as the number thrown the first time. A is to have the
whole stake if the sum of the numbers given by the latter set of
throws exceeds 12; he is to have half the stake if the sum is
equal to 12; and he is to have nothing if the sum is less than
12. Required the value of his expectation. It is found to be
^Y^^rr , Avliich is rather less than ^ . After giving the connect
solution James Bernoulli gives another which is plausible but
false, in order, as he says, to impress on his readers the necessity
of caution in these discussions. The following is the false solution.
A has a chance equal to -x of throwing an ace at his first trial;
in this case he has only one throw for the stake, and that throw
may give him with equal probabihty any number between 1 and 6
inclusive, so that we may take ^ (1 + 2 + 34-44-5+6), that is
31, for his mean throw. We may observe that 3^ is the Arith-
5—2
68 JAiyiES BERNOULLI.
metical mean between 1 and 6. Again A has a chance equal to -
of throwing a two at his first trial ; in this case he has two throws
for the stake, and these two throws may give him any number
between 2 and 12 inclusive; and the probability of the number
2 is the same as that of 12, the probability of 3 is the same as
that of 11, and so on; hence as before we may take ^ (2 + 12),
that is 7, for his mean throw. In a similar way if three, four,
five, or six be thrown at the first trial, the corresponding means
of the numbers in the throws for the stake will be respectively
lOi, 14i, 17^, and 21. Hence the mean of all the numbers is
^ m + 7 + lOi + 1-i + I7i + 21], that is 121;
and as this number is greater than 12 it might appear that the
odds are in favour of A.
A false solution of a problem will generally appear more plau-
sible to a person who has originally been deceived by it than to
another person who has not seen it until after he has studied the
accurate solution. To some persons James Bernoulli's false solu-
tion 'would appear simply false and not plausible; it leaves the
problem proposed and substitutes another which is entirely differ-
ent. This may be easily seen by taking a simple example.
Suppose that A instead of an equal chance for any number of
throws between one and six inclusive, is restricted to one or six
throws, and that each of these two cases is equally" likely. Then,
as before, we may take -^ (8 J + 21], that is 12J as the mean
throw. But it is obvious that the odds are against him; for if
he has only one throw he cannot obtain 12, and if he has six
throws he will not necessarily obtain 12. The question is not
what is the mean number he will obtain, but how many throws
will give him 12 or more, and how many will give him less than 12.
James Bernoulli seems not to have been able to make out
more than that the second solution must be false because the first
is unassailable; for after saying that from the second solution we
might suppose the odds to be in fiiv^our of A, he adds, Hujus
JAMES BERNOULLI. G9
aiitem contrarium ex priore solutione, quae sua luce radiat, ap-
paret; ...
The problem has been since considered by Mallet and by Fuss,
who agree with James Bernoulli in admitting the plausibility of
the false solution.
118. James Bernoulli examines in detail some of the games of
chance which were popular in his day. Thus on pages 167 and 168
he takes the game called Cinq et neuf. He takes on pages 16.0 — 174*
a game which had been brought to his notice by a stroller at
fairs. According to James Bernoulli the chances were against the
stroller, and so as he says, istumque proin hoc alese genere, ni
praemia minuat, non multum lucrari posse. We might desire to
know more of the stroller who thus supplied the occasion of an
elaborate discussion to James Bernoulli, and who offered to the
public the amusement of gambling on terms unfavourable to
himself.
James Bernoulli then proceeds to a game called Trijaques.
He considers that, it is of great importance for a placer to main-
tain a serene composure even if the cards are unfavourable, and
that a previous calculation of the chances of the game will assist
in securing the requisite command of countenance and temper.
As James Bernoulli speaks immediately afterwards of what he
had himself formerl}^ often observed in the game, we may perhaps
infer that Trijaques had once been a favourite amusement with
him.
119. The nineteenth problem is thus enunciated,
In quolibet Alese genere, si ludi Oeconomus sen Dispensator {le
Banquier du Jeu) nonnihil habeat praerogativse in eo consistentis, ut paulo
major sit casuiim nnmeriis quibus vincit quam quibus perdit; et major
simul casuum numerus, quibus in officio Oeconomi ])ro ludo sequenti
confirmutur, quam quibus ceconomia in collusorem transfertur. Quanitur,
quanti privilegium hoc Oeconomi sit lestimandum ?
The problem is chiefly remarkable from the fact that James
Bernoulli candidly records two false solutions which occuiTed to
him before he obtained the true solution.
120. The twenty-first problem relates to the game of Bassette;
70 JAMES BERNOULLI.
James Bernoulli devotes eiglit pages to it, his object being to
estimate the advantage of the banker at the game. See Art. 74>.
The last three problems which James Bernoulli discusses
arose from his observing that a certain stroller, in order to entice
persons to play with him, offered them among the conditions of
the game one which was apparently to their advantage, but
which on investigation was shewn to be really pernicious ; see his
pages 208, 209.
121. The fourth part of the Ay^s Conjectandi occupies pages
210 — 239 ; it is entitled Pars Quai'ta, tradens usum et apj^licatio-
nem prwcedentis Doctrince in Civilibus, Moralihus et Oeconomicis. It
was unfortunately left incomplete by the author; but nevertheless
it may be considered the most important part of the whole work.
It is divided into five Chapters, of which we will give the titles.
I. Prceliminaria qucedam de Certitudine, Prohahilitate, Neces-
sitate, et Contingentia Rerum.
II. De Scieniia et Conjectura. De Arte Conjectandi. De
Argumentis Conjecturanmi, Axiomata quwdam generalia hue
pertinentia.
III. De variis argiimentorum generihus, et quomodo eorum
pondera wstimentur ad supputandas rerum prohahilitates.
lY. De duplici Modo investigandi mimeros casiium. Quid
sentiendum de illo, qui instituitur per experimenta. Prohlenia
singulare eani in rem propositum, &c.
V. Solutio Prohlematis prcecedentis.
122. We will briefly notice the results of James Bernoulli
as to the probability of arguments. He distinguishes arguments
into two kinds, pure and mixed. He says, Pura voco, quoe in qui-
busdam casibus ita rem probant, ut in aliis nihil positive probent :
Mixta, quae ita rem probant in casibus nonnullis, ut in cieteris
probent contrarium rei.
Suppose now we have three arguments of the pure kind lead-
ing to the same conclusion; let their respective probabilities be
JAMES BERNOULLI. 71
c f %
1 — , 1 — ^, 1 — • Then the resulting probability of the con-
elusion is 1 — ~- . This is obvious from the consideration that
adg
any one of the arguments would establish the conclusion, so that
the conclusion fails only when all the arguments fail.
Supj)ose now that we have in addition two arguments of the
mixed kind : let their respective probabilities be — ^^ , .
Then James Bernoulli gives for the resulting probability
, cfiru
1 — -^
adg (ru + qt) '
But this formula is inaccurate. For the supposition q = amounts
to having one argument absolutehj decisive against the conclusion,
while yet the formula leaves still a certain probability for the
conclusion. The error was pointed out by Lambert; see Pre vest
and Lhuilier, Memoir es de F Acad.... Berliii iov 1797.
123. The most remarkable subject contained in the fourth
part of the Ars Conjectandi is the enunciation and investigation
of what we now call Bernoulli s Theorem. It is introduced in
terms which shew a high opinion of its importance :
Hoc igitur est illud Problema, quod evulgauduni hoc loco proposui,
postquam jam per vicenniiini pressi, et cujus turn novitas, turn summa
utilitas cum pari conjuucta difficultate omnibus reliquis hujus doc-
triiiae capitibus pondus et pretium superaddere potest. Ars Conjectandij
page 227. See also De Moivre's Doctrine of Chances , page 2d^.
We will now state the purely algebraical part of the theorem.
Suppose that (r + s)**' is exj)anded by the Binomial Theorem, the
letters all denoting integral numbers and t being equal to r + s.
Let u denote the sum of the greatest term and the n preceding
terms and the n following terms. Then by taking n large enough
the ratio of u to the sum of all the remaining terms of the expan-
sion may be made as gi-eat as we please.
If we wish that this ratio should not be less than c it will be
sufficient to take n equal to the greater of the two following ex-
pressions,
72 JAMES BERNOULLI.
log c + log {s - 1) /^ ^ s \ s__
log (r + 1) - log r V r + 1/ r + 1'
and logc + log(r-l) A^
loor(s+ l)-log5 V
(S + 1) - log 5 V 5 + 1/ 5+1
James Bernoulli's demonstration of this result is long but
perfectly satisfactory ; it rests mainly on the fact that the terms
in the Binomial series increase continuously up to the greatest
term, and then decrease continuously. We shall see as we proceed
with the history of our subject that James Bernoulli's demonstra-
tion is now superseded by the use of Stirling's Theorem.
124. Let us now take the application of the algebraical result
to the Theory of Probability. The greatest term of (r + 5)"', where
t=r-\-s is the term involving r"''^"'. Let r and s be proportional to
the probability of the happening and failing of an event in a single
trial. Then the sum of the 2?i + 1 terms of (r + s)"^ which have the
greatest term for their middle term corresponds to the probability
that in nt trials the number of times the event happens will lie
between n{r—l) and n (r+ 1), both inclusive ; so that the ratio
of the number of times the event happens to the whole number of
7* + 1 T ~— 1.
trials lies between and . Then, by taking for n the
t f
greater of the two expressions in the preceding article, we have
the odds of c to 1, that the ratio of the number of times the event
7* + 1
happens to the whole number of trials lies between and
r-1
t '
As an example James Bernoulli takes
r = 30, 5=20, t=50.
He finds for the odds to be 1000 to 1 that the ratio of the
number of times the event happens to the whole number of trials
31 29 . .
shall lie between —r and ~r, it will be sufficient to make 25550
t)0 50
trials ; for the odds to be 10000 to 1, it will be sufficient to make
31258 trials ; for the odds to be 100000 to 1, it will be sufficient
to make 36966 trials; and so on.
JA3IES BERNOULLI. 73
125. Suppose then that we have an urn containing white balls
and black balls, and that the ratio of the number of the former
to the latter is known to he that of 3 to 2. We learn from the
preceding result that if we make 25550 drawings of a single ball,
replacing each ball after it is drawn, the odds are 1000 to 1 that
31 29
the white balls drawn lie between —- and — : of the whole num-
50 oO
ber drawn. This is the direct use of James Bernoulli's theorem.
But he himself proposed to employ it inversely in a far more
important way. Suppose that in the preceding illustration we
do not know anything beforehand of the ratio of the white balls
to the black ; but that we have made a larg-e number of drawings,
and have obtained a white ball B times, and a black ball S times :
then according to James Bernoulli we are to infer that the
ratio of the white balls to the black balls in the urn is approxi-
r)
mately — . To determine the precise numerical estimate of the
probability of this inference requires further investigation : we
shall find as we proceed that this has been done in two ways,
by an inversion of James Bernoulli's theorem, or by the aid of
another theorem called Bayes's theorem ; the results apj^roximately
agree. See Laplace, Theorie.,.des Proh.... pages 282 and 3CG.
126. We have spoken of the inverse use of James Bernoulli's
theorem as the most important; and it is clear that he himself
was fully aware of this. This use of the theorem was that which
Leibnitz found it difficult to admit, and which James Bernoulli
maintained against him; seethe correspondence quoted in Art. 59,
pages 77, 83, 87, 94, 97.
127. A memoir on infinite series follows the Ars Conjectandi,
and occupies pages 24)1 — 306 of the volume ; this is contained in
the collected edition of James Bernoulli's works, Geneva, 1744 : it
is there broken up into parts and distributed through the two
volumes of which the edition consists.
This memoir is unconnected with our subject, and we will
therefore only briefly notice some points of interest which it
presents.
74 JAJVIES BERNOULLI.
128, James Bernoulli enforces tlie importance of the subject
in the following terms, page 243,
Cseterum quantse sit necessitatis pariter et utilitatis hasc serierum
contemplatio, ei sane ignotum esse non poterit, qui perspectum habuerit,
ejusmodi series sacram quasi esse anchoram, ad quam in maxime arduis
et desperatse solutionis Problematibus, ubi omnes alias humani ingenii
vires naufragium passae, velut ultimi remedii loco confugiendum est.
129. The principal artifice employed by James Bernoulli in
this memoir is that of subtracting one series from another, thus
obtaining a third series. For example,
let /S'=l + R+iT+ ... +
2 ' 3 n + l '
a ..11 11
then b= l + -^ + o+"- + ~-^ TT 5
z 3 n 71 + 1
1 r ^ -, 111 11
therefore = — 1 + ^ — ^ + ^ — ^ + - — - + . . . + -7 — — rr +
1 . 2 ' 2 . 3 ' 3 . 4 ' •" ' 7i(?i + l) n + 1 '
, . Ill 1,1
therelore -z — ^ + - — ^ + ^ — r + • • . H — 7 — — ty = 1 —
1.2' 2. 33. 4' ' n{n+l) n+1'
Thus the sum of n terms of the series, of which the r^^ term is
1 . n
IS
r (r + 1) ' n + 1 '
ISO. James Bernoulli says that his brother first observed
1111
that the sum of the infinite series -+ — +- + y + ...is infinite ;
i. jLi O ^
and he gives his brother's demonstration and his own ; see his
page 250.
131. James Bernoulli shews that the sum of the infinite series
_ _|_ — ^ + -j- . . . is finite, but confesses himself unable to give
the sum. He says, page 254, Si quis inveniat nobisque commu-
nicet, quod industriam nostram elusit hactenus, magnas de nobis
crratias feret. The sum is now known to be 7r ; this result is due
to Euler : it is given in his Introductio in Analysin Infinitorum,
1748, Vol. L page 130.
JAMES BERNOULLI. 75
132. James Bernoulli seems to be on more familiar terms
with infinity than mathematicians of the present day. On his
page 262 we find him stating, correctly, that the sum of the infinite
series —-r + —p^+ -77, + -77 + . . . is infinite, for the series is greater
\/i v^ V^ V"*
1111
than 7 + Q + Q + 7 + ... He adds that the sum of all the odd
terms of the first series is to the sum of all the even terms as
\/2 — 1 is to 1 ; so that the sum of the odd terms would appear to
be less than the sum of the even terms, which is impossible. But
the paradox does not disturb James Bernoulli, for he adds,
...cujus evavTLO(fiaveLas rationem, etsi ex infiniti natiira finito intel-
lectui comprehendi non posse videatur, nos tamen satis perspectam
habemus.
183. At the end of the volume containing the Ars Conjectandi
we have the Lettre a un Amy, sur les Parties da Jen de Faume,
to which we have alluded in Art. 97.
The nature of the problem discussed may be thus stated.
Suppose A and B two players ; let them play a set of games, say
five, that is to say, the player gains the set who first wins five
games. Then a certain number of sets, say four, make a match.
It is required to estimate the chances of A and B in various states
of the contest. Suppose for example that A has won two sets,
and B has won one set ; and that in the set now current A has
won two games and B has won one game. The problem is thus
somewhat similar in character to the Problem of Points, but more
complicated. James Bernoulli discusses it very fully, and presents
his result in the form of tables. He considers the case in which the
players are of unequal skill ; and he solves various problems arising
from particular circumstances connected with the game of tennis
to which the letter is specially devoted.
On the second page of the letter is a very distinct statement
of the use of the celebrated theorem known by the name of Ber-
noulli ; see Art. 123.
134. One problem occurs in ihi^ Lettre a un Amy... which
it may be interesting to notice.
Suppose that A and B engage in play, and that each in turn
76 JAMES BERNOULLI.
by the laws of tlie game has an advantage over his antagonist. Thus
suppose that ^'s chance of winning in the 1st, 3rd, 5th... games is
always p, and his chance of losing q) and in the 2nd, 4th, 6th...
games suppose that ^'s chance of winning is q and his chance of
losing/?. The chance of B is found by taking that of A from
unity ; so that B's chance is p or 5' according as ^'s is q or p.
Now let A and B play, and suppose that the stake is to be
assigned to the player who first wins n games. There is however to
be this peculiarity in their contest : If each of them obtains n — 1
games it will be necessary for one of them to win two games in
succession to decide the contest in his favour; if each of them
wins one of the next two games, so that each has scored n games,
the same law is to hold, namely, that one must win two games in
succession to decide the contest in his favour ; and so on.
Let us now suppose that n = 2, and estimate the advantage of
A. Let X denote this advantage, >S^ the whole sum to be gained.
Now A may win the first and second games ; his chance for
this \^ pq, and then he receives S. He may win the first game,
and lose the second ; his chance for this is p^. He may lose the
first game and win the second; his chance for this is ^. In the
last two cases his position is neither better nor worse than at first ;
that is he may be said to receive x.
Thus X = pq S -{■ {p"^ -{- q^) X \
r pq S pq S S
therefore a?= ., ^ ., 2= ^ =7T •
1 —p — q zpq A
Hence of course J5's advantage is also - . Thus the players
are on an equal footing.
James Bernoulli in his way obtains this result. He says that
whatever may be the value of n, the players are on an equal foot-
ing ; he verifies the statement by calculating numerically the
chances for n = 2, 8, 4 or 5, taking^ = 2q. See his pages 18, 19.
Perhaps the following remarks may be sufficient to shew that
whatever n may be, the players must be on an equal footing. By
the peculiar law of the game which we have explained, it follows
that the contest is not decided until one player has gained at least
n games, and is at least two games in advance of his adversary.
JAMES BERNOULLI. 77
Thus the contest is either decided in an even number of games,
or else in an odd number of games in which the victor is at least
three games in advance of his adversary : in the last case no ad-
vantage or disadvantage will accrue to either player if they play
one more game and count it in. Thus the contest may be con-
ducted without any change of probabilities under the following
laws: the number of games shall be even, and the victor gain not
less than n and be at least two in advance of his adversary. But
since the number of games is to be even we see that the two
players are on an equal footing.
135. Gouraud has given the following summary of the merits
of the A7^s Conjectandi ; see his page 28 :
Tel est ce livre de YArs conjectandi, livre qui, si Ton considere le
temps ou il fut compose, I'origiualite, Fetendue et la penetration
d'esprit qu'y montra son autenr, la fecondite etonnante de la constitution
scientifique qu'il donna au Calcul des probabilites, I'influence enfin qu'il
devait exercer sur deux siecles d'analyse, pourra sans exageration etre
regarde comme un des monuments les plus importants de I'histoire des
matliematiques. II a place a jamais le nom de Jacques Bernoulli parmi
les noms de ces inventeurs, a qui la posterite reconnaissante rejiorte tou-
jours et a bon droit, le plus pur merite des decouvertes, que sans leur
premier effort, elle n'aurait jamais su faire.
Tliis 2^aneg}Tic, however, seems to neglect the simple fact r.f
the date of inihlication of the Ars Conjectandi, which was really
subsequent to the first appearance of Montmort and De Moivre in
this field of mathematical investigation. The researches of James
Bernoulli were doubtless the earlier in existence, but they were
the later in appearance before the world ; and thus the influence
which they might have exercised had been already produced. The
problems in the first three parts of the Ars Conjectandi cannot be
considered equal in importance or difliculty to those which we
find investigated by Montmort and De Moivre ; but the memorable
theorem in the fourth part, which justly bears its author's name,
will ensure him a permanent \)\'d.cQ in the history of the Theory of
Probability.
CHAPTER VIII.
MONTMORT.
186. The work which next claims attention is that of Mont-
mort; it is entitled Essai d! Analyse stir les Jeux de Hazards.
Fontenelle's Hloge de M. de Montmort is contained in the
volume for 1719 of the Hist, de V Acad... Paris, which was pub-
lished in 1721 ; from this we take a few particulars.
Pierre Eemond de Montmort was born in 1678. Under the
influence of his guide, master, and friend, Malebranche, he devoted
himself to religion, philosophy, and mathematics. He accepted
with reluctance a canonry of Notre-Dame at Paris, which he re-
linquished in order to marry. He continued his simple and
retired life, and we are told that, j^ar un honheur assez singidier
le mariage lui rendit sa maison plus agreahle. In 1708 he pub-
lished his work on Chances, where with the courage of Columbus
he revealed a new world to mathematicians.
After Montmort's work appeared De Moivre published his essay
De Mensura Sortis. Fontenelle says,
Je ne dissimulerai point qui M. de Montmort fut vivement pique
de cet ouvrage, qui lui parut avoir ete entierement fait sur le sien, et
d'apres le sien. II est vrai, qu'il y 6toit loue, et n'etoit-ce pas assez,
dira-t-on 1 mais un Seigneur de fief n'en quittera pas pour des louanges
celui qu'il pretend lui devoir foi et liommage des terres qu'il tient de
lui. Je parle selon sa pretention, et ne decide nulloinent s'il etoit en
efi'et le Seigneur.
Montmort died of small pox at Paris in 1719. He had been
engaged on a work entitled Histoire de la Geometrie, but -had not
MONTMORT. 79
proceeded far with it; on this subject Fontenelle has some inter-
esting remarks. See also Montucla's Histoire des Mathematiques,
first edition, Preface, page vii.
137. There are two editions of Montmort's work; the first
appeared in 1708; the second is sometimes said to have appeared
in 1713, but the date 1714 is on the title page of my copy, which
appears to have been a present to 'sGravesande from the author.
Both editions are in quarto; the first contains 189 pages with
a preface of xxiv pages, and the second contains 414 pages with
a preface and advertisement of XLII pages. The increased bulk
of the second edition arises, partly from the introduction of a
treatise on combinations which occupies pages 1 — 72, and partly
from the addition of a series of letters which passed between
Montmort and Nicholas Bernoulli with one letter from John
Bernoulli. The name of Montmort does not appear on the title
page or in the work, except once on page 338, where it is used
with respect to a place.
Any reference which we make to Montmort's work must be
taken to apply to the second edition unless the contrary is stated.
Montucla says, page 394, speaking of the second edition of
Montmort's work, Cette edition, independamment de ses aug-
mentations et corrections faites a la premiere, est remarquable par
de belles gravures a la tete de chaque partie. These engravings
are four in number, and they occur also in the first edition, and of
course the impressions will naturally be finer in the earlier edition.
It is desirable to correct the eiTor implied in Montucla's state-
ment, because the work is scarce, and thus those who merely wish
for the engravings may direct their attention to the first edition,
leaving the second for mathematicians,
138. Leibnitz corresponded with Montmort and his brother;
and he records a very favourable opinion of the work we are now
about to examine. He says, however, J'aurois souhaite les loix
des Jeux un peu mieux decrites, et les termes expliques en favour
des dtrangers et de la posterite. Leibnitii Opera Omnia, ed.
Dutens, Vol. v. pages 17 and 28.
Reference is also made to Montmort and his book in the cor-
respondence between Leibnitz and John and Nicholas Bernoulli ;
80 MONTMORT.
see the work cited in Art. 59, pages 827, 836, 837, 8-i2, 846, 903,
985, 987, 989.
139. We will now give a detailed account of Montmort's
work ; we will take the second edition as our standard, and point
out as occasion may require when our remarks do not apply to
the first edition also.
140. The preface occupies XXIV pages. Montmort refers to
the fact that James Bernoulli had been engaged on a work entitled
De arte conjectandi, which his premature death had prevented him
from completing. Montmort's introduction to these studies had
arisen from the request of some friends that he would determine
the advantage of the banker at the game of Pharaon; and he had
been led on to compose a work which might compensate for the
loss of Bernoulli's.
Montmort makes some judicious observations on the foolish
and superstitious notions which were prevalent among persons
devoted to games of chance, and proposes to check these by shew-
ing, not only to such persons but to men in general, that there
are rules in chance, and that for want of knowing these rules
mistakes are made which entail adverse results; and these results
men impute to destiny instead of to their own ignorance. Per-
haps however he speaks rather as a philosopher than as a gambler
when he says positively on his page vili,
On joueroit sans donte avec plus d'agrement si Ton pouvoit sgavoir
a chaqne coup I'esperance qu'on a de gagner, ou le risque que I'on court
de perdre. On seroit plus tranquile sur les evenemens du jeu, et on
sentiroit mieux le ridicule de ces plaintes continuelles ausquelles se
laissent aller la plupart des Joueurs dans les rencontres les plus com-
munes, lorsqu'elles leur sout conti'aires.
141. Montmort divides his work into four parts. The first
part contains the theory of combinations ; the second part discusses
certain games of chance depending on cards ; the third part dis-
cusses certain games of chance depending on dice; the fourth
part contains the solution of various problems in chances, including
the five problems proposed by Huygens. To these four parts
must be added the letters to which we have alluded in Art. 137.
MONTMORT. 81
Montmort gives his reasons for not devoting a part to the appli-
cation of his subject to political, economical, and moral questions,
in conformity with the known design of James Bernoulli; see his
pages XIII — XX. His reasons contain a good appreciation of the
difficulty that must attend all such applications, and he thus states
the conditions under which we may attempt them with advantage:
1^. borner la question que Ton se propose h un petit nombre de
suppositions, etablies sur des faits certains; 2". faire abstraction do
toutes les circonstances ausquelles la liberte de I'homme, cet
ocueil perpetuel de nos connoissances, pourroit avoir quelque part.
Montmort praises highly the memoir by Halley, which we have
already noticed ; and also commends Petty's Political A rithmetic ;
see Arts. 57, 01.
Montmort refers briefly to his predecessors, Huygens, Pascal,
and Format. He says that his work is intended principally for
mathematicians, and that he has fully explained the various games
which he discusses because, pour I'ordinaire les S^avans ne sont
pas Joueurs; see his page xxiii.
142. After the preface follows an Avertissement which was not
in the first edition. Montmort sa3^s that two small treatises on
the subject had appeared since his first edition; namely a thesis
by Nicolas Bernoulli De arte conjectandi in Jure, and a memoir
by De Moivre, De meiisura sortis.
Montmort seems to have been much displeased with the terms
in which reference was made to him by De Moivre. De Moivre
had said,
Ilugenius, primus quod sciani regulas tradidit ad istius generis Pro-
blematum Solutionem, quas nuperrimus autor Gallus variis exemplis
pulclire illustravit ; sed non videntur viri clarissimi ea simplicitate ac
generalitate usi fuisse quam natura rei postulabat : etenirn dum p] ures
quantitates incognitas usurpant, ut varias Collusorum conditiones re-
praesentent, calculum siumi nimis perplexum redduut ; diimque Colhi-
sorum dexteritatem semper aequalem pomint, doctriuam hanc ludorum
intra limites nimis arctos continent.
Montmort seems to have taken needless offence at these words ;
he thought his own performances were undervalued, and accord-
ingly he defends his own claims : this leads him to give a sketch
6
82 MOXTMORT.
of the history of the Theory of Probability from its origin. He
attributes to himself the merit of having explored a subject which
had been only slightly noticed and then entirely forgotten for
sixty years ; see his page xxx.
143. The first part of Montmort's work is entitled TraiU des
Combinaisons ; it occupies pages 1 — 72. Montmort says, on his
page XXV, that he has here collected the theorems on Combina-
tions which were scattered over the work in the first edition, and
that he has added some theorems.
Montmort begins by explaining the properties of Pascal's Arith-
metical Triangle. He gives the general expression for the term
which occupies an assigned place in the Arithmetical Tiiangle. He
shews how to find the sum of the squares, cubes, fourth powers, . . .
of the first n natural numbers. He refers, on his page 20, to a
book called the New introduction to the Mathematics written by
M. Johnes, scavant Geometre Anglois. The author here meant is
one who is usually described as the father of Sir William Jones.
Montmort then investigates the number of permutations of an
assigned set of things taken in an assigned number together.
14-i. Much of this part of Montmort's work would however
be now considered to belong rather to the chapter on Chances
than to the chapter on Combinations in a treatise on Algebra.
We have in fact numerous examples about drawing cards and
throwing dice.
We will notice some of the more interesting points in this
part. We may remark that in order to denote the number of
combinations of n things taken r at a time, Montmort uses the
symbol of a small rectangle with n above it and r below it.
145. Montmort proposes to establish the Binomial Theorem;
see his page 32. He says that this theorem may be demonstrated
in various ways. His own method will be seen from an example.
Suppose we require (a + 6)^ Conceive that we have four counters
each having two faces, one black and one white. Then Montmort
has already shewn by the aid of the Arithmetical Triangle that
if the four counters are thrown promiscuously there is one way
ia which all the faces presented will be black, four ways in which
MONTMORT. 83
three faces will be black and one white, six ways in which two
faces will be black and two white; and so on. Then he reasons
thus: we know by the rules for multiplication that in order to
raise a + h to the fourth power (1) we must take the fourth power
of a and the fourth power of h, which is the same thing as taking
the four black faces and the four white faces, (2) we must take
the cube of a with b, and the cube of b with a in as many ways as
possible, which is the same thing as taking the three black faces
with one white face, and the three white faces with one black
face, (3) we must take the square of a with the square of b in
as many ways as possible, which is the same thing as taking the
two black faces with the two white faces. Hence the coefficients
in the Binomial Theorem must be the numbers 1, 4, 6, which we
have already obtained in considering the cases which can arise
with the four counters.
l-iG. Thus in fact Montmort argues a priori that the coeffi-
cients in the expansion of {a + hy must be equal to the numbers of
cases corresponding to the different ways in which the white and
black faces may appear if n counters are thrown 2)romiscuously,
each counter having one black face and one white face.
Montmort gives on his page 3i a similar interpretation to
the coefficients of the multinomial theorem. Hence we see that
he in some cases passed from theorems in Chances to theorems in
pure Algebra, while we now pass more readily from theorems in
pure Algebra to their application to the doctrine of Chances.
147. On his page 42 Montmort has the following problem:
There are jj dice each having the same number of faces; find the
number of ways in which when they are thrown at random we can
have a aces, b twos, c threes, . . .
The result will be in modern notation
\a \b[G...
He then proceeds to a case a little more complex, namely
where we are to have a of one sort of faces, h of another sort, c
of a third sort, and so on, without specifying whether the a faces
G— 2
8^ MONTMOET.
are to be aces, or twos, or threes, ,.., and similarly without specify-
ing for the h faces, or the c faces, . . .
He had given the result for this problem in his first edition,
page 137, where the factors B, C, JD, E, F,... must however be
omitted from his denominator ; he suppressed the demonstration
in his first edition because he said it would be long and abstruse,
and only intelligible to such persons as were capable of discovering
it for themselves.
148. On his page 46 Montmort gives the following problem,
which is new in the second edition : There are n dice each having
/faces, marked with the numbers from 1 to/; they are thrown at
random : determine the number of ways in which the sum of the
numbers exhibited by the dice will be equal to a given number p.
"We should now solve the problem by finding the coefficient
of x^ in the expansion of
(a; + 03^ + 03'+ ...+x^Y,
/I — x^y^
that is the coefficient of x^'"' in the expansion of I = J , that is
in the expansion of (1 — x)'"" (1 — x^y. Let p — n = s; then the
required number is
n (ii+l) ... (n-h s —1) 71 (72 + 1) ... (n+s —f— 1)
«-/
n(n-l) n(n + V) ... (n+ s —2f- 1)
1.2 l.s-2/
The series is to be continued so long as all the factors which
occur are positive. Montmort demonstrates the formula, but in a
much more laborious way than the above.
149. The preceding formula is one of the standard results of
the subject, and we must now trace its history. The formula was
first published by De Moivre without demonstration in the Be
Mensura Sortis. Montmort says, on his page 364, that it was derived
from page 141 of his first edition; but this assertion is quite un-
founded, for all that we have in Montmort's first edition, at the
place cited, is a table of the various throws which can be made
with any number of dice up to nine in number. Montmort how-
MONTMORT. 85
ever shews by tlie evidence of a letter addressed to John Bernoulli,
dated 15th November, 1710, that he was himself acquainted with
the formula before it was published by De Moivi-e ; see Montmort,
page 307. De Moivre first published his demonstration in his
Miscellanea Analytica, 1730, where he ably replied to the asser-
tion that the formula had been derived from the first edition of
Montmort's work ; see Miscellama Analytica, pages 191 — 197.
De Moivre's demonstration is the same as that which we have
given.
150. Montmort then proceeds to a more difficult question.
Suppose we have three sets of cards, each set containing ten cards
marked with the numbers 1, 2, . . . 10. If three cards are taken
out of the thirty, it is required to find in how many ways the
sum of the numbers on the cards will amount to an assigned
number.
In this problem the assigned number may arise (1) from three
cards no two of which are of the same set, (2) from three cards
two of which are of one set and the third of another set, (3) from
three cards all of the same set. The first case is treated in the
problem, Article 148; the other two cases are new.
Montmort here gives no general solution; he only shews how a
table may be made registering all the required results.
He sums up thus, page 62 : Cette methode est un peu longue,
mais j'ai de la peine a croire qu'on puisse en trouver une plus
courte.
The problem discussed here by Montmort may be stated thus :
We require the number of solutions of the equation x -\- y + z = p,
under the restriction that x, y, z shall be positive integers lying
between 1 and 10 inclusive, and p a positive integer wdiich has an
assigned value lying between 3 and 30 inclusive.
151. In his pages 63 — 72 Montmort discusses a problem in
the summation of series. We should now enunciate it as a general
question of Finite Differences : to find the sum of any assigned
number of terms of a series in which the Finite Differences of a
certain order are zero.
In modern notation, let iin denote the n^^ term and suppose
that the {in + 1)*^ Finite Difference is zero.
86 MONTMOET.
Then it is shewn in works on Finite Differences, that
i(n = % + 'i^^Uo 4- -J — 2~ -^'^^^ + • • •
, yi(?i--l) ...(??-m+l) .,„
i -» j 11 Uq .
[m
This formula Montmort gives, using A, B, C,... for Aw^j AV^,
By the aid of this formula the summation of an assigned
number of terms of the proposed series is reduced to depend on the
,. ^ . ^ ,., n (n—1) ... (n — r+1) .
summation of series of which — ^ — j — ^ ^ may be
taken as the type of the general term ; and such summations have
been already effected by means of the Arithmetical Triangle and
its properties.
152. Montmort naturally attaches great importance to this
general investigation, which is new in the second edition. He
says, page ^5^
Ce Problerae a, comme Ton voit, toute I'etendue et toute I'universa-
lite possible, et semble ne rien laisser a desirer sur cette matiere, qui n'a
encore et6 traitee par personne, que je s^ache : j'en avois obmis la de-
monstration dans le Journal des Sgavans du mois de Mars 1711.
De Moivi'e in his Doctrine of Chances uses the rule which
Montmort here demonstrates. In the first edition of the Doctrine
of Chances, page 29, we are told that the "Demonstration may
be had from the Methodus Differentialis of Sir Isaac Xewton,
printed in his Analysis!' In the second edition of the Doctrine
of Chances, page 52, and in the third edition, page 59, the origin
of the rule is carried further back, namely, to the fifth Lemma of
the Princijna, Book iii. See also Miscellanea Analytica, page 152.
De Moivre seems here hardly to do full justice to Montmort ;
for the latter is fairly entitled to the credit of the first explicit
enunciation of the rule, even though it may be implicitl}^ contained
in Newton's Princijna and Methodus Differentialis.
153. Montmort's second part occupies pages 73 — 172 ; it re-
MONTMORT. 87
lates to games of chance involving cards. The first game is that
called Pharaon.
This game is described by De Moivre, and some investigations
given by him relating to it. De Moivre restricts himself to the
case of a common pack of cards with four suits ; Montmort sup-
poses the number of suits to be any number whatever. On the
other hand De Moivre calculates the percentage of gain of the
banker, which he justly considers the most important and difficult
part of the problem ; see DoctHne of Chances, pages ix, 77, 105,
Montmort's second edition gives the general results more
compactly than the first.
15i. We shall make some remarks in connection with Mont-
mort's investigations on Pharaon, for the sake of the summation of
certain series which present themselves.
155. Suppose that there are p cards in the pack, which the
Banker has, and that his adversary's card occurs q times in the
pack. Let ii^ denote the Banker's advantage, A the sum of money
which his adversary stakes. Montmort shews that
,. _ g (y - 1) \ A. (p-q){p-q-^) ,,
;'^-^.0;-l) 2^+ p[p-l) ^'-^
supposing that j9 — 2 is greater than q. That is Montmort should
3
have this; but he puts {pq — q^) 2 A + {(f — q)-^A, on his page 89,
1
by mistake for q^q — l) - A) he gets right on his page 90. Mont-
mort is not quite full enough in the details of the treatment of
this equation. The following results will however be found on
examination.
If q is even we can by successive use of the formula make ?/^
depend on u^ ; and then it follows from the laws of the game that
Wj is equal io A \i q is equal to 2, and to ^ ^ if ^ is greater
than 2. Thus we shall have, if q is an even number greater
than 2,
'88 MONTMORT.
, (;>-g)(p-<7-i)-'-i I
If ^ = 2 the last term within the brackets should be doubled.
Again if q is odd we can by successive use of the fundamental
formula make u^ depend on w^^^, and if q is greater than unity it
can be shewn that u.^, = ^-^^ -77 . Thus we shall have, if a is an
^^^ q+1 Z
odd number greater than unity,
,, _ g(^-^) 1 J f 1 4. (p-^)(p-g-l)
^^-^(^-1)2^|'+ (^-2)(p-3)
(p-g)(j9-g-l)(j9-g-2)(;.-g-3)
(^_2)(^-3)(;.-4)(2.-5)
(i>-g)(;>-g-i)...2
"^ (i5-2)(i>-3) ^
If ^ = 1 we have by a special investigation Up = — .
If we suppose q even and p — q not less than q — 1, or q odd
and p —q not less than q, some of the terms within the brackets
may be simplified. Montmort makes these suppositions, and con-
sequently he finds that the series within the brackets may be
expressed as a fraction, of which the common denominator is
{p-2)(p-S)...{p-q + l);
the numerator consists of a series, the first term of which is the
same as the denominator, and the last term is
fe-2)(^-3)...2.1, or (^-l)(^-2)...3.2,
according as q is even or odd.
The matter contained in the present article was not given
by Montmort in his first edition ; it is due to John Bernoulli :
see Montmort's, page 287.
MONTMORT. 89
156. We are thus naturally led to consider the summation of
certain series.
Let (71, r) = -^ ^
so that (j) {n, r) is the n^^ number of the (r + 1)"' order of figurate
numbers.
Let 8<f) (n, r) stand for <j) {n, r) + <^ (w — 2, ?•) + </> (^ — 4, r) + . . . ,
so that S(j> (n, r) is the sum of the alternate terms of the series of
figurate numbers of the (r + 1)**" order, beginning with the w"' and
going backwards. It is required to find an expression for /S'</) {n, r).
It is known that
(n, r) + (l)(n-l,r) +(f) {n - 2, r) + </> (71 - 3, r) +... = (/> (ji, r + 1) ;
and by taking the terms in pairs it is easy to see that
<j) (n, 7') — (j) (n — l,r) -{-(f) [n — 2, 7^) —(f>{n — 3, ?•) + ... = S(j) {n, r — 1) ;
therefore, by addition,
S(l> {n, r) = - (/) {71, r-\-l)+^S(i> (w, r- 1).
Hence, continuing the process, we shall have
1 11
^^ (w, ?•) = 2 ^ ^^' ** + ^) + 3 ^ (^^' ^') + ^ <^ {^h r - 1) + ...
and we must consider 8<\> (n, ^—-n, if 71 be even, and = - (n+1),
if n be odd.
We may also obtain another expression for 8<^ {n, r). For
change w into n + 1 in the two fundamental relations, and subtract,
instead of adding as before ; thus
>^(/) (71, r) = i <^ (n + 1 , r + 1) - ^ ^0 ( ; . + 1 , r - 1 ) .
Hence, continuing the process, we shall have
^(/)(7i,r)=-(/>(7i + l, r + 1)- ^ </,(« + 2,7')+^ <3«>(n + 3, r-1)
{- ly {- \Y
- -^ ^(u + r, 2) + 4^ Sct>(n + r, 0).
90 MONTMORT.
157. Montmort's own solution of the problem respecting
Pharaon depends on the first mode of summation explained in Art.
156, which coincides with Montmort's own process. The fact that
in Montmort's result when q is odd, ^^ — 1 terms are to be taken,
and when q^ is even, q terms are to be taken and the last doubled,
depends on the different values we have to ascribe to 8^ (n, 0) ac-
cording as n is even or odd ; see Montmort's page 98.
Montmort gives another form to his result on his page 99 ;
this he obtained, after the publication of his first edition, from
Nicolas Bernoulli. It appears however that a wrong date is here
assigned to the communication of Nicolas Bernoulli ; see Mont-
mort's page 299. This form depends on the second mode of sum-
mation explained in Art. 156. It happens that in applying this
second mode of summation to the problem of Pharaon ?i + r is
always odd ; so that in Nicolas Bernoulli's form for the result
we have only one case, and not two cases according as q is even
or odd.
There is a memoir by Euler on the game of Pharaon in the
Hist de VAcad Berlin ioY 1764, in which he expresses the ad-
vantage of the Banker in the same manner as Nicolas Bernoulli.
158. Montmort gives two tables of numerical results respect-
ing Pharaon. One of these tables purports to be an exact exhibi-
tion of the Banker's advantage at any stage of the game, supposing
it played with an ordinary pack of 52 cards ; the other table is an
approximate exhibition of the Banker's advantage. A remark may
be made with respect to the former table. The table consists of
four columns ; the first and third are correct. The second column
w + 2
should be calculated from the formula -r — -, -. , by puttino^ for n
2n (n — 1) -^ ^ ^
in succession 50, 48, 46, ... 4. But in the two copies of the second
edition of Montmort's book which I have seen the column is given
3117 26
incorrectly ; it begins with ' ^ instead of ^ , and of the re-
maining entries some are correct, but not in their simplest forms,
and others are incorrect. The fourth column should be calculated
2n — 5
from the formula ^w tv-/ i^ ? ^Y putting for n in succession
z{n—l){n — 3) ,
50, 48, 46 ... 4 ; but there are errors and unreduced results in it;
MONTMORT. 91
it begins with a fraction having twelve figures in its denominator,
which in its simplest form would only have four figures.
In the only copy of the first edition which I have seen these
columns are given correctly ; in both editions the description given
in the text corresponds not to the incorrect forms but to the cor-
rect forms.
159. Montmort next discusses the game of Lansquenet; this
discussion occupies pages 105 — 129. It does not appear to present
any point of interest, and it would be useless labour to verify the
complex arithmetical calculations which it involves. A few lines
which occurred on pages 40 and 41 of Montmort's first edition are
omitted in the second ; while the Articles 84 and 95 of the second
edition are new. Ai'ticle 84 seems to have been suggested to
Montmort by John Bernoulli ; see Montmort's page 288 : it relates
to a point which James Bernoulli had found difficult, as we have
already stated in Art. 119.
160. Montmort next discusses the game of Treize ; this dis-
cussion occupies pages 130 — 143. The problem involved is one of
considerable interest, which has maintained a permanent place in
works on the Theory of Probability.
The following is the problem considered by Montmort.
Suppose that we have thirteen cards numbered 1, 2, 3 ... up to
13 ; and that these cards are thrown promiscuousl}^ into a bag.
The cards are then drawn out singly ; required the chance that,
once at least, the number on a card shall coincide with the number
expressing the order in which it is drawn.
161. In his first edition Montmort did not give any demon-
strations of his results ; but in his second edition he gives two
demonstrations which he had received from Nicolas Bernoulli ;
see his pages 301, 302. We will take the first of these demon-
strations.
Let a, h, c, d,e, ... denote the cards, n in number. Then the num-
ber of possible cases is [n. The number of cases in which a is first
is I yi — 1. The number of cases in which h is second, but a not first,
n — 1 — 1 7i — 2. The number of cases in which c is third, but a
IS
not first nor b second, is | w — 1 — | ^^ — 2 — | |?i — 2 — | n — 3 1
92 MONTMORT.
that is \n-l -2\n-2+\n-S. The number of cases in
which d is fourth, but neither a, b, nor c in its proper place is
\n-l -2\n-2 + \n-S -hn-2-2 \n-S + | n - 4 1, that is
1/1 — 1 — 3 \n — 2 + 3 \n — S — \n — 4*. And generally the number
of cases in which the m^^ card is in its proper place, while none
of its predecessors is in its proper place, is
\n-l - (m - 1) 1 71-2 + ^ -^ ^ \n-S
{m -1) (m- 2) (m-3)
wt-l
w — m.
^ ,71-4 + + (-1)
"We may supply a step here in the process of Nicolas Bernoulli,
by shewing the truth of this result by induction. Let -v/r (771, n)
denote the number of cases in which the m"' card is the first that
occurs in its right place ; we have to trace the connexion between
^jr (m, n) and yjr {m + 1, n). The number of cases in which the
{m + l)**^ card is in its right place while none of the cards between
h and the W2*'^ card, both inclusive, is in its right place, is '^^ (m, n).
From this number we must reject all those cases in which a is in its
right place, and thus we shall obtain yjr {in + 1, n). The cases to
be rejected are in number '^ {m, n — 1). Thus
y^ (in + 1, w) = i/r {in, n) — yfr {in, n — 1).
Hence we can shew that the form assigned by Nicolas Bernoulli
to -^/r (m, n) is universally true.
Thus if a person undertakes that the m*^ card shall be the first
that is in its right place, the number of cases favourable to him is
'^ (m, n), and therefore his chance is . ' — - ,
\n
If he undertakes that at least one card shall be in its right
place, we obtain the number of favourable cases by summing
^jr (m, n) for all values of m from 1 to n both inclusive : the chance
is found by dividing this sum by [n.
Hence we shall obtain for the chance that at least one card is
in its right place,
i_l+i_l, , (- 1)-
2 [3 li^'"^ \n '
MONTilORT. 93
"We may observe that if we subtract the last expression from
unity we obtain the chance that no card is in its right place. Hence
if (f> (n) denote the number of cases in which no card is in its right
place, we obtain
162. The game which Montmort calls Treize has sometimes
been called Rencontre. The problem which is here introduced for
the first time has been generalised and discussed by the following
writers : De Moivre, Doctrine of Chances, pages 109 — 117. Euler,
Hist, de T Acad.... Berlin, for 1751. Lambert, Kouveaux Memoires
de T Acad. ... Berlin, for 1771. Laplace, TJieorie . . . des Proh.
pages 217 — 225. Michaelis, Memoire sur la prohahilite du jeu de
rencontre, Berlin, 1846.
163. Pages 148 — 156 of Montmort relate to the game of Bas-
sette. This is one of the most celebrated of the old games : it
bears a great resemblance to Pharaon.
As we have already stated, this game was discussed by James
Bernoulli, who summed up his results in the form of six tables ;
see Art. 119. The most imi^ortant of these tables is in the fourth,
which is in effect also reproduced in De Moivre's investigations.
The reader who wishes to obtain a notion of the game may con-
sult De Moivre's Doctrine of Chances, pages 69 — 77.
164. James Bernoulli and De Moivre confine themselves to
the case of a common pack of cards, so that a particular card, an
ace for example, cannot occur more than four times. Montmort
however, considers the subject more generally, and gives formulae
for a pack of cards consisting of any number of suits. Montmort
gives a general formula on his page 153 which is new in his second
edition. The quantity which De Moivre denotes by y and puts
equal to ^ is taken to be | by Montmort.
Montmort gives a numerical table of the advantage of the
Banker at Bassette. In the second edition some fractions are
left unreduced which were reduced to their lowest terms in the
first edition, the object of the change being jDrobably to allow
94 MONTMORT.
the law of formation to be more readily perceived. The last
fraction, given in the table was wrong in the first edition ; see
Montmort's page 803. It would be advisable to multiply both
numerator and denominator of this fraction by 12 to maintain
uniformity in the table.
165. Montmort devotes his pages 157 — 172 to some pro-
blems respecting games which are not entirely games of chance.
He gives some preliminary remarks to shew that the complete
discussion of such games is too laborious and complex for our
powers of analysis ; he therefore restricts himself to some special
problems relating to the games.
The games are not described, so that it would be difficult to
undertake an examination of Montmort's investigations. Two of
the problems, namely, those relating to the game of Piquet, are
given by De Moivre with more detail than by Montmort ; see
Doctrine of Chances, page 179. These problems are simple exer-
cises in combinations ; and it would appear that all Montmort's
other problems in this part of his book are of a similar kind, pre-
senting no difficulty except that arising from a want of familiarity
with the undescribed games to which they belong.
166. Montmort's third part occupies pages 173 — 215 ; it
relates to games of chance involving dice. This part is almost
identically repeated from the first edition.
The first game is called Qicinqiienove ; it is described, and a
calculation given of the disadvantage of a player. The second
game is called Hazard; this is also described, and a calculation
given of the disadvantage of the player who holds the dice. This
game is discussed by De Moivre; see his pages 160 — 166. The
third game is cslled Fs2:>erance ; it is described and a particular
case of it with three players is calculated. The calculation is
extremely laborious, and the chances of the three players are
represented by three fractions, the common denominator being a
number of twenty figures. Then follow games called Trois Dez,
Passe-dix, Rafle ; these are described somewhat obscurely, and
problems respecting them are solved ; Raffling is discussed by De
Moivre; see pages 166 — 172 of the Doctrine of Chances.
MONTMORT. 95
167. The last game is called Le Jeu des Koyaux, which
Montmort says the Baron de la Hontan had found to be in use
among the savages of Canada ; see Montmort's pages xii and 213.
The game is thus described,
On y joue avec huit noyaux noirs d'un cote et blancs de I'autre : on
jette les noyaux en Fair : alors si les noirs se trouvent impairs, celui qui
a jette les noyaux gagne ce que I'autre Joueur a uiis au jeu : S'ils se
trouvent ou tous noirs ou tous blancs, il en gagne le double ; et hors de
ces deux cas il perd sa mise.
Suppose eight dice each having only two faces, one face black
and one white ; let them be thrown up at random. There are
then T, that is 256, equally possible cases. It will be found that
there are 8 cases for one black and seven white, 5Q cases for three
black and five white, 28 cases for two black and six white, and
70 cases for four black and four white ; and there is only one case
for all black. Thus if the whole stake be denoted by A, the chance
of the player who throws the dice is
_L j (8 + 8 + 56 + 50) .4 + 2 (.1 + I A) | ,
and the chance of the other player is
2^^1(28 + 28 + 70)^ + 2(0-1.1)1.
131 125
The former is equal to tt^. A, and the latter to 77^ A,
2ob loij
Montmort says that the problem was proposed to him by a
lady who gave him almost instantly a correct solution of it ; but
he proceeds very rudely to depreciate the lady's solution by in-
sinuating that it was only correct by accident, for her method was
restricted to the case in which there were only two faces on each
of the dice : Montmort then proposes a similar problem in which
each of the dice has ybi^r faces.
Montmort should have recorded the name of the only lady who
has contributed to the Theory of Probability.
96 MONTMORT.
168. The fourth part of Montmort's book occupies pages
216 — 282 ; it contains the solution of various problems respecting
chances, and in particular of the five proposed by Huygens in
1657 ; see Art. 35. This part of the work extends to about double
the length of the corresponding part in the first edition.
169. Montmort's solution of Hujgens's first problem is similar
to that given by James Bernoulli. The first few lines of Mont-
mort's Remarque on his page 217 are not in his first edition ; they
strongly resemble some lines in the Ars Coiijectandi, page 51.
But Montmort does not refer to the latter work, either in his
preface or elsewhere, although it appeared before his own second
edition; the interval however between the two publications may
have been very small, and so perhaps Montmort had not seen the
Ars Conjectandi until after his own work had been completely
printed.
The solution of Huygens's fifth problem is very laborious, and
inferior to that given by James Bernoulli ; and Montmort him-
self admits that he had not adopted the best method ; see his
page 223.
The solutions of Huygens's problems which Montmort gave
in his first edition received the benefit of some observations by
John Bernoulli ; these are printed in Montmort's fifth part,
pages 292 — 294, and by the aid of them the solutions in the second
edition were improved : but Montmort's discussions of the pro-
blems remain still far less elaborate than those of James Bernoulli.
170. Montmort next takes two problems which amount to
finding the value of an annuity, allowing compound interest.
Then he proceeds to the problem of which a particular example
is to find in how many throws with a single die it will be an
even chance to throw a six.
171. Montmort now devotes his pages 232 — 248 to the Pro-
blem of Points. He reprints Pascal's letter of August 14th, 1654,
to which we have alluded in Art. 16, and then he adds, page 241,
Le respect que nous avons pour la reputation et pour la memoire de
M. Pascal, ne nous permet pas de faire remarquer ici en detiiil toutes
MONTMORT. 97
les fautes de raisonnement qui sont dans cette Lettre ; il nous suffira
d'avertir que la cause de son erreur est de n'avoir point d'egard aux
divers arrangemens des lettres.
Montmort's words seem to imply that Pascal's letter contains
a large amount of error ; we have, however, only the single fun-
damental inaccuracy which Fermat corrected, as we have shewTi in
Art. 19, and the inference that it was not allowaVjle to suppose
that a certain number of trials will necessarily be made; see Art. 18.
172. Montmort gives for the first time two formulae either of
which is a complete solution of the Problem of Points when there
are two players, taking into account difference of skill. We will
exhibit these formulae in modern notation. Suppose that A wants
711 points and B wants n points ; so that the game will be neces-
sarily decided in m-\-n—l trials ; \etm + n—l = r. Let p denote
A's skill, that is his chance of winning in a single trial, and let
q denote J5's skill ; so that p + q = l.
Then ^'s chance of winning the game is
pr^ r-i _^ r(r-l) ,_^ + ,— ,^^— fi^V";
^"^^ 1.2^ [m I ?? — 1
and Bs chance of winning the game is
q'+rr'p+^^-^Y^ 2-p=+ + ^^zi^ ?>"'- ■
This is the first formula. According to the second formula J's
chance of winning the game is
m f 1 . m (m + 1) « , , 1/ "" i_ ^K-i 1 .
and B's chance of winning the game is
„ f- , 7^ (n + 1) „ , l^~^ ,,--' I
^ r-^^'^"^ 172 ^+ ^\m-i.n-ij r
Montmort demonstrates the truth of these formulae, but we
need not crive the demonstrations here as they will be found in
elementary works; see Algebra, Chapter Llli.
173. In Montmort's first edition he had confined himself
to the case of equal skill and had given only the first formula,
93 MONTMORT.
SO that he had not really advanced beyond Pascal, although the
formula would be more convenient than the use of the Arith-
metical Triangle ; see Art. 23. The first formula for the case
of unequal skill was communicated to Montmort by John Ber-
noulli in a letter dated March 17th, 1710 ; see Montmort's page 295.
As we have already stated the formula was known to James
BernouUi; see Art. 113. The second formula for the Problem of
Points must be assigned to Montmort himself, for it now appears
before us for the first time.
174. It will be interesting to make some comparison between
the two formulae given in Art. 172.
It may be shewn that we have identically
p' + rp''q-h \ ,^ ' J) <i +... + -—:::: rV 9.
r^V^ if-^ + m (2> + ^)--^ + !!^!i±i) (^ + g)'-'-/ +
r — 1
m — 1 n
This may be shewn by picking out the coefficients of the
various powers of ^ in the expression on the right-hand side,
making use of the relations presented by the identity
(1 - j)-"-»'(l- 2)-= (1 -?)"'.
Thus we see that \i 'p-\- c[ be equal to unity the two expres-
sions given in Art. 172 for ^'s chance are numerically equal.
175. If however ^ + ^^ be not equal to unity the two expres-
sions given in Art. 172 for ^'s chance are not numerically equal.
If we suppose jy-^- q less than unity, we can give the following in-
terpretation to the formulae. Suppose that A 's chance of winning
in a single trial is jp, and i?'s chance is q, and that there is the
chance ^—jp — q that it is a drawn contest.
Then the formula
mi, w (??z + 1) „ \r —\
^ 1.2 -^ m— 1^1 — 1^
MONTMORT. 09
expresses the chance that A shall win m points before either a
single drawn contest occurs, or B wins n points.
This is easily seen by examining the reasoning by which the
formula is established in the case when p -{- q is equal to unity.
But the formula
expresses the chance that A shall win m points out of r, on the
condition that r trials are to be made, and that A is not to be con-
sidered to have won if a drawn contest should occur even after he
has won his m points.
This follows from the fact that if we expand (2^ + q + 1 —p — qY
in powers of j^, q, 1 — ^ — 5', a term such as Cj^^q^il —2^ — qy ex-
presses the chance that A wins p points, B wins a points, and r
contests are drawn.
Or we may treat this second case by using the transformation
in Art. 174. Then we see that {p + qy"^ expresses the chance
that there shall be no dra^\Ti contest after the m points which A is
supposed to have won ; {p-{- ^)'""'"^ expresses the chance that there
shall be no drawn contest after the m points which A is supposed
to have won, and the single point which B is supposed to have
won ; and so on.
176. Montmort thinks it might be easily imagined that the
chances of A and B, if they respectivel}' want km and Jen points,
would be the same as if they respectively wanted m and 71 points ;
but this he says is not the case ; see his page 24? 7. He seems to
assert that as k increases the chance of the player of greater skill
necessarily increases with it. He does not however demonstrate this.
We know by Bernoulli's theorem that if the number of trials
be made large enough, there is a very high probability that the
number of points won by each player respectively will be nearly in
the ratio of his skill ; so that if the ratio ofm to n be less than that
of the skill of A to the skill of B, we can, by increasing k, obtain as
great a probability as we please that A will win km points before
B wins hi points.
Montmort probably implies, though he does not state, the con-
dition which we have put in Italics.
7—2
1 00 MONTMORT.
177. Montmort devotes his pages 248 — 257 to the discussion
of a game of Bowls, which leads to a problem resembling the Pro-
blem of Points. The problem was started by De Moivre in his
Be Mensura Sortis ; see Montmort, page 866, and the Doctrine of
Chances, page 121. De Moivre had supposed the players to be of
equal skill, and each to have the same number of balls ; Montmort
generalised the problem by supposing players of unequal skill and
having unequal numbers of balls. Thus the problem was not in
Montmort's first edition.
Montmort gives on his page 256 a simple example of a solution
of a problem which appears very plausible, but which is incorrect.
Suppose A plays with one bowl and B with two bowls ; required
their respective chances in one trial, assuming equal skill.
Considering that any one of the three bowls is as likely as the
.2 .1
others to be first, the chance of ^ is ^r and that of ^ is - . But by
3 3 -^
the incorrect solution Montmort arrives at a different result. For
suppose A to have delivered his bowl. Then B has the chance
^ with his first bowl of beating A ; and the chance - x ^ of failing
with his first bowl and being successful with his second. Thus ^'s
chance appears to be - • Montmort considers the error of this so-
lution to lie in the assumption that when B has failed to beat A
with his first bowl it is still an even chance that he will beat A with
his second bowl : for the fact that B failed with his first bowl
suggests that ^'s bowl has a position better than the average, so
that jB's chance of success with his second bowl becomes less than
an even chance.
178. Montmort then takes four problems in succession of
trifling importance. The first relates to a lottery which was started
in Paris in 1710, in which the projector had offered to the public
terms which were very disadvantageous to himself The second is
an easy exercise in combinations. The third relates to a game
called Le Jeu des Oublieux. The fourth is an extension of
Huygens's eleventh problem, and is also given in the Ars Conjee-
tandi, page 34. These four problems are new in the second edition.
MOXTMORT. 101
179. Montmort now passes to a problem of a more important
character which occupies his pages 268 — 277, and which is also
new in the second edition; it relates to the Duration of Play;
see Art. 107.
Suppose A. to have m counters and i? to have n counters ; let
their chances of winning a single game be as a to ^ ; the loser in
each game is to give a counter to his adversary : required the chance
that A will have won all 5's counters on or before the x^^ game.
This is the most difficult problem which had as yet been solved
in the sulyect. Montmort's formula is given on his pages 268, 269.
180. The history of this problem up to the current date will
be found by comparing the following pages of Montmort's book,
275, 309, 315, 324, 344, 368, 375, 380.
It appears that Montmort worked at the problem and also
asked Nicolas Bernoulli to try it. Nicolas Bernoulli sent a
solution to Montmort, which Montmort said he admired but
could not understand, and he thought his o^^TL method of investi-
gation and that of Nicolas Bernoulli must be very different : but
after explanations received from Nicolas Bernoulli, Montmort
came to the conclusion that the methods were the same. Before
however the publication of Montmort's second edition, De Moi\Te
had solved the problem in a different manner in the De Mensura
Sortis.
181. The general problem of the Duration of Play was studied
by De Moivre with great acuteness and success ; indeed his inves-
tigation forms one of his chief contributions to the subject.
He refers in the following words to Nicolas Bernoulli and
Montmort :
Monsieur de Monniort^ in the Second Edition of his Book of Chances,
having given a very handsom Solution of the Problem relating to the
duration of Play, (which Solution is coincident with that of Monsieur
Nicolas Bemoully, to be seen in that Book) and the demonstration of it
being very naturally deduced from our first Solution of the foregoing
Problem, I thought the Reader would be well pleased to see it trans-
ferred to this place.
Doctrine of Chances; first edition, page 122.
J 02 MONTMORT.
...the Solution of Mr Nicolas Bernoulli beiog very much crouded
with Symbols, and the verbal Explication of them too scanty, I own
I did not understand it thoroughly, which obliged me to consider Mr.
de Monimort^s Solution with very great attention : I found indeed that
he was very plain, but to my great surpriza I found him very erroneous;
still in my Doctrine of Chances I printed that Solution, but rectified
and ascribed it to Mr. de Monmort, without the least intimation of any
alterations made by me ; but as I had no thanks for so doing, I resume
my right, and now print it as my own —
Doctrine of Chances; second edition page 181, third edition, page 211.
The language of De Moivre in his second and third editions
would seem to imply that the solutions of Nicolas Bernoulli and
Montmort are different ; but they are really coincident, as De
Moivre had himself stated in his first edition. The statement that
Montmort's solution is very erroneous, is unjustly severe ; Mont-
mort has given his formula without proper precaution, but his
example which immediately follows shews that he was right him-
self and would serve to guide his readers. The second edition of
the Doctrine of Chances appeared nearly twenty years after the
death of Montmort ; and the change in De Moivre's language
respecting him seems therefore especially ungenerous.
182. We shall not here give Montmort's general solution of
the Problem of the Duration of Play ; we shall have a better
opportunity of noticing it in connexion with De Moivre's investiga-
tions. We will make three remarks which may be of service to
any student who examines Montmort's own work.
Montmort's general ^statement on his pages 2G8, 269, might
easily mislead ; the example at the end of page 269 is a safer
guide. If the statement were literally followed, the second line in
the example would consist of as many terms as the first line, the
fourth of as many terms as the third, and the sixth of as many
terms as the fifth; but this would be wrong, shewing that the
general statement is not literally accurate.
Montmort's explanation at the end of his page 270, and the be-
ginning of his page 271, is not satisfactory. It is not true as he
intimates, that the four letters a and the eleven letters h must be
MONTMORT. IQ:
SO arranged that only a single h is to come among the four letters
a : we might have such an arrangement as aaahhhhhhhhhhha. We
shall return to this point in our account of De Moivi'e's in-
vestigations.
On his page 272 Montmort gives a rule deduced from his
formula ; he ought to state that the rule assumes that the players
are of equal skill : his rule also assumes that p — m is an even
number.
183. On his pages 275, 276 Montmort gives without demon-
stration results for two special cases.
(1) Suppose that there are two players of equal skill, and that
each starts with two counters ; then 1 — ^- is the chance that the
match will be ended in 2x games at most. The result may be de-
duced from Montmort's general expression. A property of the
Binomial Coefficients is involved which we may briefly indicate.
Let Wj, u^, u^, ... denote the successive terms in the expansion
of (I + l)'"^. Let >S' denote the sum of the following series
w. + ^ii.-i+ Ux-i+ + u,_,+ 2it,_,+ u,_,+ + w^_3+ ...
Then shall S=r'-'-2'-\
For let V, denote the r^^ term in the expansion of (1 + 1)"''"S and
lOy the ?'"' term in the expansion of (1 + 1)"''"^ Then
t'y t/j. "t" I- r—Xf
Employ the former transformation in the odd terms of our pro-
posed series, and the latter in the even terms ; thus we find that
the proposed series becomes
'^x + ^.r-1 + ^'x-2 + ^.r-3 + ^x--4 + ' ' '
+ 2 [W^_^ -h 2W^_^ + IC,_^ + + 10, _, + ...}.
The first of these two series is equal to ^ (1 + I)'''"' ; and the
second is a series of the same kind as that which we wish to sum
with X chanced into x-1. Thus we can finish the demonstration
hy induction ; for obviously
101 MONTMORT.
(2) Next suppose that each player starts with three counters ;
ox
then 1 — — is the chance that the match will be ended in 2ic + 1
games at most. This result had in fact been given by Montmort in
his first edition, page 184. It may be deduced from Montmort's
general expression, and involves a property of the Binomial Coeffi-
cients which we will briefly indicate.
Let w^, u^, u^, ... denote the successive term-; in the expansion
of (1 + iy'^\ Let S denote the sum of the following series
Then shall 8=2'"'- 3^.
If w^ denote the r**^ term in the expansion of (1 + 1)'^''"^ we can
shew that
w^ + 2m^_i + 2w^_2 + u^_s
+ S (2^,_i + 2w;^_2 + 2w;^_3 + 2(7^ J.
By performing a similar transformation on every successive
four significant terms of the original series we transform it into
2 (1 + 1)'''"^ + 3S, where 2 is a series like S with x changed into
x-1. Thus
8 = 2^^-2 + 32.
Hence by induction we find that /S^= 2^"" - S''.
184. Suppose the players of equal skill, and that each starts
with the same odd number of counters, say m ; let /= '^'^^ ,
Then Montmort says, on his page 276, that we may wager with
adva.ntage that the match will be concluded in 3/' - 3/+ 1 trials.
Montmort does not shew how he arrived at this approximation.
The expression may be put in the form \m'^\, De Moivre
4 4
spoke favourably of this approximation on page 148 of his first edi-
tion; he says, "Now Mr de Montmort having with great Sagacity
discovered that Analogy, in the case of an equal and Odd number
of Stakes, on supposition of an equality of Skill between the
MONTMORT. 105
Gamesters..." In his second and third editions De Moivre with-
drew this commendation, and says respecting the rule " Which tho'
near the Truth in small numbers, yet is very defective in large
ones, for it may be proved that the number of Games found by his
Expression, far from being above what is requisite is really below
it." Doctrine of Chances, third edition, page 218.
De Moivre takes for an example m = 45 ; and calculates by his
own mode of approximation that about 1531 games are requisite
in order that it may be an even chance that the match will be
concluded ; Montmort's rule would assign 1519 games. We should
differ here with De Moivre, and consider that the results are
rather remarkable for their near agreement than for their dis-
crepancy.
The problem of the Duration of Play is fully discussed by
Laplace, Theorie...des Proh. pages 225 — 238.
185. Montmort gives some numerical results for a simple
problem on his page 277. Suppose in the problem of Art. 107 that
the two players are of equal skill, each having originally n counters.
Proceeding as in that Article, we have
Hence we find u^= Cx+ C^, where C and (7^ are arbitraiy con-
stants. To determine them we have
^0=0, %„ = !;
hence finally, w« = ^ •
Montmort's example is for ?i = 6 ; he gave it in his first edition,
page 178. He did not however appear to have observed the gene-
ral law, at which John Bernoulli expressed his sm-prise ; see Mont-
mort's page 295.
186. Montmort now proposes on pages 278 — 282 four pro-
blems for solution ; they were originally given at the end of the
first edition.
The first problem is sur le Jeu dii Treize. It is not obvious
why this problem is repeated, for Montmort stated the results on
his pages 130 — 143, and demonstrations by Nicolas Bernoulli are
given on pages 301, 302.
lOG MONTMORT.
The second problem is sur le Jen appelle le Her; a discussion
respecting this problem runs through the correspondence between
Montmort and Nicolas Bernoulli. See Montmort's pages 321, 334,
338, 348, 361, 376, 400, 402, 403, 409, 413. We will return to
this problem in Art. 187.
The third problem is sur le Jeu de la Ferme ; it is not referred
to again in the book.
The fourth Problem is sur le Jeu des Tas. We will return to
this problem in Art. 191.
Montmort's language in his Avertisseynent, page xxv, leads to the
expectation that solutions of all the four problems will be found
in the book, whereas only the first is solved, and indeed Montmort
himself seems not to have solved the others ; see his page 321.
187. It may be advisable to give some account of the discus-
sion respecting the game called Her. The game is described by
Montmort as played by several persons ; but the discussion was
confined to the case of two players, and we will adopt this
limitation.
Peter holds a common pack of cards ; he gives a card at random
to Paul and takes one himself; the main object is for each to
obtain a higher card than his adversary. The order of value is
ace, tiuo, three, ... ten. Knave, Queen, Kmg.
Now if Paul is not content with his card he may compel Peter
to change with him ; but if Peter has a King he is allowed to
retain it. If Peter is not content with the card which he at first
obtained, or which he has been compelled to receive from Paul, he
is allowed to change it for another taken out of the pack at
random ; but if the card he then draws is a King he is not allowed
to have it, but must retain the card with which he was dissatisfied.
If Paul and Peter finally have cards of the same value Paul is
considered to lose.
188. The problem involved amounts to a determination of the
relative chances of Peter and Paul ; and this depends on their
using or declining their rights of changing their cards. Montmort
communicated the problem to two of his friends, namely Walde-
grave, of whom we hear again, and a person who is called some-
MONTMORT. 107
times M. I'Abbe de Monsoury and sometimes M. TAbbe d'Orbais.
These two persons differed with Nicolas Bernoulli respecting a
point in the problem ; Nicolas Bernoulli asserted that in a certain
contingency of the game each player ought to take a certain course
out of two which were open to him ; the other two persons con-
tended that it was not certain that one of the courses ought to be
preferred to the other.
Montmort himself scarcely interfered until the end of the cor-
respondence, when he intimated that his opinion was contrary to
that of Nicolas Bernoulli ; it would seem that the latter intended
to produce a fuller explanation of his views, but the corresj)ondence
closes without it.
189. We will give some details in order to shew the nature of
the dispute.
It will naturally occur to the reader that one general principle
must hold, namely, that if a player has obtained a high card it will
be prudent for him to rest content with it and not to run the
risk involved in changing .that card for another. For example, it
appears to be tacitly allowed by the disputants that if Paid has
obtained an ei(jht, or a higher card, he will remain content with it,
and not compel Peter to change with him ; and, on the other
hand, if Paul has obtained a six, or a lower card, he will compel
Peter to change. The dispute turns on what Paul should do if
he has obtained a seven. The numerical data for discussino- this
case v/ill be found on Montmort's page 339 ; we will reproduce
them with some explanation of the process by which thev are
obtained.
I. Paul has a seven ; required his chance if he compels Peter
to change.
Supposing Paul to change, Peter will know what Paul has and
will know that he himself now has a seven ; so he remains content
if Paul has a seven, or a lower card, and takes another card if Paul
has an eight or a higher card. Thus Paul's chance arises from the
hypotheses that Peter originally had Queen, Knave, ten, nine, or
eight Take one of these cases, for example, that of the ten. The
chance that Peter had a ten is — - ; then Paul takes it, and Peter
lOS MONTMORT.
gets the seven. There are 50 cards left and Peter takes one of
these instead of his seven ; 39 cards out of the 50 are favour-
able to Paul, namely 3 sevens, 4< Kings, 4 nines, 4i eights, 4 sixes,
... 4 aces.
Proceeding in this way we find for Paul's chance
4 47 + 43 + 39 + 35 + 31 ,, , . 780
that IS
51" 50 ' 51.50'
In this case Paul's chance can be estimated without speculating
upon the conduct of Peter, because there can be no doubt as to
what that conduct will be.
II. Paul has a seven; required his chance if he retains the
seven.
The chance in this case depends upon the conduct of Peter.
Now it appears to be tacitly allowed by the disputants that if
Peter has a nine or a higher card he will retain it, and if he has a
seve7i or a lower card he will take another instead. The dispute
turns on what he will do if he has an eight.
(1) Suppose that Peter's rule is to retain an eight
Paul's chance arises from the hypotheses that Peter has a seven,
six, five, four, three, two, or ace, for which he proceeds to take
another card.
We shall find now, by the same method as before, that Paul's
chance is
3^ 24 ^ 27 j^ 27 _£ 27 4 27 ^ 27 ^ 27
51 * 50 "^ 51 ' 50 "^ 51 * 50 "^ 51 • 50 "^ 51 • 50 "^ 51 ' 50 "^ 51 • 50'
that is
51.50*
(2) Suppose that Peter's rule is to change an eight
4 24
We have then to add -pr • ^t: to the preceding result ; and thus
51 oU
we obtain for Paul's chance -
51.50'
780
Thus we find that in Case I. Paul's chance is , and that
51 . 50
in Case II. it is either -,- ^ or .^ —.7: . If it be an even chance
51 .50 51 . oU
MOXTMOET. 109
1 / *720 SIP) ^
■which rule Peter adopts we should take ^ f --^ — p^ + --.-^j > that
is, 1^ — ^t; as Paul's chance in Case 11. Thus in Case II. Paul's
51 . oO
chance is less than in Case I. ; and therefore he should adopt the
rule of changing when he has a seven. This is one of the argu-
ments on which Nicolas Bernoulli relies.
On the other hand his opponents, in effect, deny the correctness
of estimating it as an even chance that Peter will adopt either
of the two rules which have been stated.
We have now to estimate the following chance. Peter has an
eight and Paul has not compelled him to change ; what is Peter's
chance ? Peter must argue thus :
I. Suppose Paul's rule is to change a seven; then he now
has an eight or a higher card. That is, he must have one out of a
certain 23 cards.
(1) If I retain my eight my chance of beating him arises only
from the hypothesis that his card is one of the 3 eights; that is, my
chance is ^ .
(2) If I change my eight my chance arises from the five h}^o-
theses that Paul has Queen, Knave, ten, nine, or eight; so that my
chance is
23 ■ 50 "^ 23 ■ 50 "^ 23 ■ 50 "^ 23 ' 50 "^ 23 ' 50 '
210
that is
23 . 50
II. Suppose Paul's rule is to retain a seven. Then, as before,
7
(1) If I retain my eight my chance is ^ .
(2) If I change my eight my chance is
4 3 4 7 4 11 4 15 3 22 4 26
314
27 ' 50 "^ 27 * 50 "^ 27 ■ 50 "^ 27 ' 50 "^ 27 ' 50 "^ 27 ■ 50 '
that is
, 27 . 50
1 I MONTMORT.
190. These numerical results were accepted by the disjDutants.
We may sum them up thus. The question is whether Paul should
retain a certain card, and whether Peter should retain a certain
card. If Paul knows his adversary's rule, he should adopt the con-
trary, namely retaining when his adversary changes, and changing
when his adversary retains. If Peter knows his adversary's rule he
should adopt the same, namely, retaining when his adversary re-
tains and changing when his adversary changes.
Now Nicolas Bernoulli asserted that Paul should change, and
therefore of course that Peter should. The objection to this is
briefly put thus by Montmort, page 405,
En un mot, Monsieur, si je SQai que vous etes le conseil de Pierre,
il est evident que je dois moi Paul me tenir au sept ; et de meme
si je suis Pierre, et qui je SQache que vous etes le conseil de Paul,
je dois changer au liuit, auquel cas vous aures donne un mauvais con-
seil a Paul.
The reader will be reminded of the old puzzle respecting the
veracity of the Cretans, since Epimenides the Cretan said they
were liars.
The opponents of Nicolas Bernoulli at first contended that it
was indifferent for Paul to retain a seven or to change it, and also
for Peter to retain an eight or to change it ; and in this Montmort
considered they were wrong. But in conversation they explained
themselves to assert that no absolute rule could be laid down for
the players, and in this Montmort considered that they were right ;
see his page 403.
The problem is considered by Trembley in the Memoires de
V Acad.... Berlin, for 1802.
191. The fourth problem which Montmort proposed for solu^
tion is sur le Jen des Tas. The game is thus described, page 281,
Pour comprendre de quoi il s'agit, il faut s9avoir qu'apres les reprises
d'hombre un des Joueurs s'amuse sou vent a partager le jeu en dix tas
composes chacun de quatre cartes couvertes, et qu'ensuite retournant la
premiere de chaque tas, il ote et met a part deux ^ deux toutes celles
qui se trouvent semblables, par exemple, deux Pois, deux valets, deux
six, &c. alors il retourne les cartes qui suivent immediatement celles
qui viennent de lui donner des doublets, et il continue d'oter et de
mettre a part celles qui viennent par doublet jusqu'a ce qu'il en soit
MONTMORT. Ill
venu a la derniere de chaque tas, apres les avoir enleve toutes deux a
deux, auquel cas seulement il a gagne.
The game is not entirely a game of pure chance, because the
l^layer may often have a choice of various methods of pjairing and
removing cards. In the description of the game forty cards are
supposed to be used, but Montmort proposes the problem for solu-
tion generally without limiting the cards to forty. He requires
the chance the player has of winning and also the most ad-
vantageous method of i^roceeding. He says the game was rarely
played for money, but intimates that it was in use aniong ladies.
192. On his page 821 Montmort gives, without demonstration,
the result in a particular case of this problem, namely when the
cards consist of ?2 pairs, the two cards in each pair being numbered
alike ; the cards are supposed placed at random in n lots, each of
two cards. He says that the chance the player has of winning is
92 — 1
^ — -. On page 334^ Nicolas Bernoulli says that this formula is
correct, but he wishes to know how it was found, because he him-
self can only find it by induction, by jDutting for n in succession
2, 3, ^,o, ...We may suppose this means that Nicolas Bernoulli veri-
fied by trial that the formula was correct in certain cases, but could
not give a general demonstration. Montmort seems to have
overlooked Nicolas Bernoulli's inquiry, for the problem is never
mentioned again in the course of the correspondence. As the result
is remarkable for its simplicity, and as Nicolas Bernoulli found the
problem difficult, it may be interesting to give a solution. It will
be observed that in this case the game is one of pure chance, as the
player never has any choice of courses open to him.
193. The solution of the problem depends on our observing
the state of the cards at the epoch at which the player loses, that
is at the epoch at which he can make no more pairs among the
cards exj^osed to view ; the player may be thus arrested at the
very beginning of the game, or after he has already taken som^j
steps : at this epoch the player is left icitk some number of lots,
which are all unbroken, and the cards exposed to vieiu present no
pairs. This will be obvious on reflection.
1 1 2 MONTMORT.
We must now determine (1) the whole number of possible
cases, and (2) the whole number of cases in which the player is
arrested at the very beginning.
(1) We may suppose that 2n cards are to be put in 2n
places, and thus [ 27i will be the whole number of possible cases.
(2) Here we may find the number of cases by supposing that
the n upper places are first filled and then the n lower places.
We may put m the first place any card oat of the 2/2, then in the
second place any card of the 2n — 2 which remain by rejecting the
companion card to that we put in the first place, then in the third
place any card of the 2n — 4< which remain by rejecting the two
companion cards, and so on. Thus the n upper places can be
filled in 2" [n ways. Then the n lower places can be filled in [n
ways. Hence we get 2*" 1^2 [ji cases in which the player is arrested
at the very beginning.
We may divide each of these expressions by \n if we please
to disregard the different order in which the n lots may be sup-
\2n
posed to be arranged. Thus the results become M^ and 2" [n
respectively ; we shall use these forms.
Let u^ denote the whole number of unfavourable cases, and let
/,. denote the whole number of favourable cases when the cards
consist of r pairs. Then
u^=^r[n + t -—^ £ \n-r 2""'',
the summation extending from r = 2 to r = w — 1, both inclusive.
For, as we have stated, the player loses by being left with some
number of lots, all unbroken, in which the exposed cards contain
no pairs. Suppose he is left with n — r lots, so that he has got rid
\ 71
of r lots of the original n lots. The factor != g-ives the num-
\r n — r
ber of ways in which r pairs can be selected from n pairs ; the
factor fi gives the number of ways in which these pairs can be so
arranged as to enable the player to get rid of them ; the fiictor
\n — r 2""'" gives the number of ways in which the remaining n — r
pairs can be distributed into n — r lots without a single pair occur-
ring among the exposed cards.
MONTMORT. 113
It is to be observed that the case in which r = l does not
occur, from the nature of the game ; for the player, if not arrested
at the very beginning, will certainly be able to remove tivo pairs.
We may how^ever if we please consider the summation to extend
from r = lio r = n-l, since/. = when r = 1.
We have then
u„=.T\n[l + 2J^.
The summation for w„_, extends to one term less ; thus we
shall find that
But «„., +/„_, =
71-1
therefore
2/2 I 2;i - 2
n — l
\1n 2\2?i-2 I 2/1 ,j_i
Hence /„ = i= - z/„ =-==-- ; and /„ -^
[w " 1 71 -2 ' ^" • |_^ 2/4 -l'
, This is Montmort's result.
19^. We noAv arrive at what Montmort calls the fifth part
of his work, which occupies pages 288 — 41-i. It consists of the
coiTcspondence between Montmort and Nicolas Bernoulli, together
with one letter from John Bernoulli to Montmort and a reply
from Montmort. The whole of this part is new in the second
edition.
John Bernoulli, the friend of Leibnitz and the master of Euler,
was the third brother in the family of brothers of whom James
Bernoulli was the eldest. John was born in 1667, and died in
IT-iS. The second brother of the family was named Nicolas ; his
son of the same name, the friend and corres^oondent of Montmort,
was born in 16S7, and died in 1759.
195. Some of the letters relate to Montmort's first edition,
and it is necessary to have access to this edition to study the
letters with advantage ; because although Montmort gives re-
ferences to the corresponding passages in the second edition, yet
8
114? MONTMORT.
as these passages have been modified or corrected in accordance
with the criticisms contained in the letters, it is not always ob-
vious what the original reading was.
196. The first letter is from John Bernoulli ; it occupies
pages 283 — 298 ; the letter is also reprinted in the collected
edition of John Bernoulli's works, in four volumes, Lausanne and
Geneva, 1742 ; see Vol. I. page 453.
John Bernoulli gives a series of remarks on Montmort's first
edition, correcting some errors and suggesting some improvements.
He shews that Montmort did not present his discussion relating
to Pharaon in the simplest form ; Montmort however did not
modify this part of his work. John Bernoulli gave a general
formula for the advantage of the Banker, and this Montmort did
adopt, as we have seen in Art. 155.
197. John Bernoulli points out a curious mistake made
by Montmort twice in his first edition ; see his pages 288, 296.
Montmort had considered it practically impossible to find the
numerical value of a certain number of terms of a geometrical
progression ; it would seem that he had forgotten or never known
the common Algebraical formula which gives the sum. The
passages cited by John Bernoulli are from pages 35 and 181 of
the first edition ; but in the only copy which I have seen of the
first edition the text does not correspond with John Bernoulli's
quotations : it appears however that in each place the original page
has been cancelled and replaced by another in order to correct
the mistake.
After noticing the mistake, John Bernoulli proceeds thus in
his letter :
...mais pour le reste, vous faites bien d'employer les logarithm es,
je m'en suis servi utilement dans une parcille occasion il y a bien
douze ans, ou il s'agissoit de determiner combien il restoit de vin et
d'eau mele ensemble dans un tonneau, lequel etant an commencement
tout plein de vin, on en tireroit tons les jours pendant une amice
une certaine mesure, en le remplissant incontinent apres cliaque ex-
traction avec de I'eau pure. Vous trouveres la solution de cette ques-
tion qui est asses curieuse dans ma dissertation De Nutritlone, que Mr
Varignon vous pourra communiquer. Jc fis cette question pour faire
MONTMORT. 115
comprendre comment on pent determiner la quantite de vieille ma-
tiere qui reste dans nos corps melee avec de la nouvelle qui nous
vient tous les jours par la nourriture, pour reparer la perte que nos
corps font insensiblement par la transpiration continuelle.
The dissertation De Nutritione will be found in the collected
edition of John Bernoulli's works ; see Vol. I. page 275.
198. John Bernoulli passes on to a remark on Montmort's
discussion of the game of Treize. The remark enunciates the
following theorem.
Let <^(.) = l--^+^-^+...+-^
and let
n
t(«)=^(«) + J^("-l) + U(n-2)+...+ ^^<^(1);
111 1
then shall i/r {n) = --[-+_++. ..+_.
^ [^ [I [± \JL
We may prove this by induction. For we may write yjr (n) in
the following form,
T fl 1 1 1 1 1
^11
2 ] ^ ' 1 ' 12 ' [3_
1 r, 1 1 1 1 1
-o^ l + T + n5 + rT. + + ^^3^ J
n
Hence we can shew that
y}r (n + 1) = i/r {n) +
;i + 1 *
199. John Bernoulli next adverts to the solutions which
Montmort had given of the five problems proposed by Huygens ;
see Art. 35.
According to John Bernoulli's opinion, Montmort had not
understood the second and third problems in the sense which
Huygens had intended ; in the fifth problem Montmort had
8-^2
116 MONTMORT.
changed the enunciation into another quite different, and yet had
really solved the problem according to Huygens's enunciation. By
the corrections which he made in his second edition, Montmort
shewed that he admitted the justice of the objections urged against
his solutions of the second and fifth problems; in the case of
the third problem he retained his original opinion; see his
pages 292, 805.
John Bernoulli next notices the solution of the Problem of
Points, and gives a general formula, to which we have referred in
Art. 173. Then he adverts to a problem which Montmort had
not fully considered; see Art. 185.
200. John Bernoulli gives high praise to Montmort's work,
but urges him to extend and enrich it. He refers to the four
problems which Montmort had proposed for investigation ; the
first he considers too long to be finished in human life, and the
fourth he cannot understand : the other two he thinks might be
solved by great labour. This opinion seems singularly incorrect.
The first problem is the easiest of all, and has been solved without
difficulty; see Article 161 : perhaps however John Bernoulli took
it in some more general sense; see Montmort's page 308. The
fourth problem is quite intelligible, and a particular case of it is
simple ; see Art. 193. The third and fourth problems seem to be
far more intractable.
201. A letter to Montmort from Nicolas Bernoulli occupies
pages 299 — 303. This letter contains corrections of two mistakes
which occurred in Montmort's first edition. It gives without de-
monstration a formula for the advantage of the Banker at Pharaon,
and also a formula for the advantage of the Banker at Bassette ;
Montmort quoted the former in the text of his second edition ;
see Art. 157. Nicolas Bernoulli gives a good investigation of the
formulae which occur in analysing the game of Treize ; see Art. 161.
He also discusses briefly a game of chance which we will now
explain.
202. Suppose that a set of players A, B, C, D, ... undertake
to play a set of I games with cards. A is at first the dealer, there
are m chances out of on + n that he retains the deal at the next
game, and n chances out of m + 7i that he loses it ; if he loses the
MONTMORT. 117
deal the player on Lis right hand takes it ; and so on in order.
B is on the left of A, C is on the left of B, and so on. Let the
advantages of the players when A deals .be a, h, c, d, ... respec-
tively; these advantages are supposed to depend entirely on
the situation of the players, the game being a game of pure
chance.
Let the chances of A, B, C, D, ... bo denoted by z, y, x, u, ... ;
and let s = 7n + 7l
Then Nicolas Bernoulli gives the following values :
z = a + —^ + ~, + -, +...,
, 7nh + nc m^h 4- 2mnc-\-n^d m%-^Snfnc + 2mn^d+ n^e
2/ = i + -^- + p + p +...,
. mc + 7id 7n'^G-\-27n7id-{-7i^e 7ifc-h2m^7id+Sm7i^e + 72^f
^ = + ^— + 7 + — ? - + ■■■'
_ , md + 7ie m^d-\-2miie+ri^f 7n^d-\-Sm^ne + Sm7}^f+7i'g
and so on.
Each of these series is to continue for I terms. If there are
not so many as I players, the letters in the set a, h, c, d, e,f,(/,...
will recur. For example, if there are only four players, then
e = a, f=h, g = c,....
It is easy to see the meaning of the separate terms. Take, for
example, the value of z. A deals ; the advantage directly arising
from this is a. Then there are m chances out of 5 that A will hav
the second deal, and 7i chances out of s that the deal will pass o.
to the next player, and thus put A in the position originally hek
by B. Hence we have the term . Again, for the third
deal ; there are (rti + 7iy, that is, s^ possible cases ; out of these
there are 711^ cases in which A will have the third deal, 2mn cases
in which the player on the right of A will have it, and n"^ cases in
which the player next on the right w^ill have it. Hence we
, ,1 , iii^a -\- Imnh -\- 7i^c . ,
nave the term z . And so on.
118
MONTMOET.
Nicolas Bernoulli then gives another form for these expressions ;
we will exhibit that for z from which the others can be deduced.
Let
^^i, ,= K ,= !i. Then
^ n \sj m
z = aq(l-r)-\-hq\l-r{l-\-tl]\-\-C(i\l-r
r _ fia-r)~\]
-{■dq \l — r
-^ ^ ^^ ^ tH{i-i) ^ fi{i-i)(i-2y
1.2
1.2.3
I • • • J
this series is to be continued for I terms.
The way in which this transformation is effected is the follow-
ing : suppose for example we pick out the coefficient of c in the
value of z, we shall find it to be
1 .Zs [ s s s'^ )
where the series in brackets is to consist of Z — 2 terms.
We have then to shew that this expression is equal to
«{'-'h"*'^']}-
We will take the general theorem of which this is a particular
case. Let
where
Let
P.=
p + X-1
u
1 + - + -T +
then S=T— -y-^ .
[Xdmr'
Now
- fmr
u —
1-
la
say;
MOXTMORT. 119
1.2 s^ (l-At/"'
1.2.3 6'^ (l-/x)
\-2
-^^!i rli I til ^^^-^ tn{i-i)(i-2) ■
- ,,,U » i + ^^+ ^^2 + 1.2.3 "^•••
71^-^^
where the series between square brackets is to extend to X + 1
terms.
We may observe that by the nature of the problem we have
a + Z> + c + ...=0, and also z+y + x+... = 0.
The problem simplifies very much if we may regard I as infinite
or very great. For then let z denote the advantage of -4 ; if ^ ob-
tains the next deal we may consider that his advantage is still z ; if
A loses the next deal his advantage is the same as that of B
originally. Thus
mz + n2/
s
MultijDly by s and transpose ; therefore
z = 7/-{- aq.
Similarly we have
y = x + hq, x = ii + cq,
Hence we shall obtain
^ = 2L(^-l) + &(p-2) + c(i?-3) + ...j,
where p denotes the number of players ; and the values of y, ^, . . .
may be obtained by symmetrical changes in the letters.
We may also express the result thus,
z
= _£|a+2^>+3c+...|.
120 MONTMORT.
203. The next letter is from Montmort to John Bernoulli ; it
occupies pages 803 — 307. Montmort makes brief observations on
the points to which John Bernouilli had drawn his attention ; he
suggests a problem on the Duration of Play for the consideration
of Nicolas Bernoulli.
204. The next letter is from Nicolas Bernoulli to Montmort ;
it occupies pages 808 — 814.
Nicolas Bernoulli first speaks of the game of Treize, and gives
a general formula for it ; but by accident he gave the formula in-
correctly, and afterwards corrected it w^hen Montmort drew his
attention to it ; see Montmort's pages 815, 328.
We will here investigate the formula after the manner given by
Nicolas BernoulH for the simple case already considered in Art. 161.
Suppose there are n cards divided into p sets. Denote the
cards of a set by a,h,c,... in order.
The whole number of cases is \n.
The number of ways in which a can stand first is p \n — \ .
The number of ways in which h can stand second without a
standing first is p \n — l — p\ n
The number of ways in which c can stand third without a
standing first or h second is p \n — \ — 2p^ |^ — 2 + p^ | n — 3 .
And so on.
Hence the chance of winning by the first card is - ; the chance
n
of winning: by the second card is -, ^ ,. ; the chance of Avin-
° -^ n 7i{n— 1)
ning by the third card is — , ^ .,. H 7 =^-7 -^ ; and so on.
° '' n n{n—l) n{n— 1) [ii — z)
Hence the chance of winning by one or other of the first m
cards is
mjj m (m — 1) p^ m (m — 1) {m — 2) p^
"^"' O n {n - 1) "^ 1.2.3 7i (n - 1) (w -2) "" *'*
And the entire chance of winning is found by putting
m = - , so that it is
P
MONTMORT. 121
1 n —J) {n —p) (n — 2p)
i " 1 . 2 (7i - 1) "^ 1 . 2 . 3 (?i - 1) (n - 2)
(n —p) (n — 2p) (n — 8/;)
""1.2. 3. 4(7-^-1) (w-2) (/i^Ts) +•••
205. Nicolas Bernoulli then passes on to another game in
which he objects to Montmort's conclusion. Montmort had found
a certain advantage for the first player, on the assumption that the
game was to conclude at a certain stage ; Nicolas Bernoulli thought
that at this stage the game ought not to terminate, but that the
players should change their positions. He says that the advantage
for the first player should be only half what Montmort stated.
The point is of little interest, as it does not belong to the theory of
chances but to the conventions of the players ; Montmort, however,
did not admit the justice of the remarks of Nicolas Bernoulli ; see
Montmort's pages 309, 317, 327.
206. Nicolas Bernoulli then considers the problem on the
Duration of Play which had been suggested for him by Mont-
mort. Nicolas Bernoulli here gives the formulaa to which we have
already alluded in Art. ISO; but the meaning of the formuloB was
very obscure, as Montmort stated in his reply. Nicolas Bernoulli
gives the result which expresses the chances of each player when
the number of games is unlimited ; he says this may be deduced
from the general formulae, and that he had also obtained it pre-
viously by another method. See Art. 107.
207. Nicolas Bernoulli then makes some remarks on the
summation of series. He exemplifies the method which is now
common in elementary works on Algebra. Sujipose we require
the sum of the squares of the first n triangular numbers, that is, the
sum of n terms of the series of which the r^^ term is \---^ — —^
Assume that the sum is equal to
an^ + hn^ + cn^ + dn^ + en + /*;
and then determine a, h, c, d, e, f by changing n into n-\-\ in
the assumed identity, subtracting, and equating coefficients. This
method is ascribed by Nicolas Bernoulli to his uncle John,
122 MONTMOET.
Nicolas Bernoulli also indicates another method ; he resolves
^(f + l)finto
r (r+l)(r + 2) (r + 3) _ r (r + 1) (r+2) 7- (r + 1)
1.2.3.4 1.2.3 "^ 1.2 '
and thus finds that the required sum is
??0^4-l) 02+2) (M+3)(n + 4) __ ^ (72 + 1) (w + 2) (?z + 3)
1.2.3.4.5 1.2.3.4
w (^ 4- 1) (w + 2)
4-
1.2.3
208. It seems probable that a letter from Montmort to
Nicolas Bernoulli, which has not been preserved, preceded this
letter from Nicolas Bernoulli. For Nicolas Bernoulli refers to the
problem about a lottery, as if Montmort had drawn his attention
to it ; see Art. 180 : and he intimates that Montmort had offered
to undertake the printing of James Bernoulli's unpublished Ars
Conjectandi. Neither of these points had been mentioned in
Montmort's preceding letters as we have them in the book.
209. The next letter is from Montmort to Nicolas Bernoulli ;
it occupies pages 315 — 323. The most interesting matter in this
letter is the introduction for the first time of a problem which has
since been much discussed. The problem was proposed to Mont-
mort, and also solved, by an English gentleman named Waldegrave ;
see Montmort's pages 318 and 328. In the problem as originally
proposed only three players are considered, but we will enunciate
it more generally. Suppose there are n-{-l players ; two of them
play a game ; the loser deposits a shilling, and the winner then
plays with the third player ; the loser deposits a shilling, and
the winner then plays with the fourth player ; and so on. The
player who lost the first game does not enter again until after the
{n -\-iy^ player has had his turn. The process continues until
one player has beaten in continued succession all the other players,
and then he receives all the money which has been deposited.
It is required to determine the expectation of each of the players,
and also the chance that the money will be won when, or before,
a certain number of games has been played. The game is sup-
MONTMORT. 123
posed a game of pure chance, or wliicli is the same thing, the
jjlayers are all supposed of equal skill.
Montmort himself in the case of three players states all the
required results, but does not give demonstrations. In the case
of four players he states the numerical probability that the money
■will be won in any assigned number of games between 3 and 13
inclusive, but he says that the law of the numbers which he
assigns is not easy to perceive. He attempted to proceed further
with the j^roblem, and to determine the advantage of each player
when there are four players, and also to determine the pro-
bability of the money being won in an assigned number of games
when there are five or six players. He says however, page 320,
mais cela m'a paru trop difficile, ou pltitot j'ai manque de courage,
car je serois stir d'en venir a bout.
210. There are references to this problem several times in
the correspondence of Montmort and Nicolas Bernoulli ; see Mont-
mort's pages 328, 34^5, 350, 3G6, 875, 380, 400. Nicolas Bernoulli
succeeded in solving the problem generally for any number of
players ; his solution is given in Montmort's pages 381 — 387, and
is perhaps the most striking investigation in the work. The
following remarks may be of service to a student of this solution.
(1) On page 386 Nicolas Bernoulli ought to have stated
how many terms should be taken of the two series which he gives,
namely, a number expressed by the greatest integer contained
in — . On page 330 where he does advert to this point
he puts by mistake — instead of .
(2) The expressions given for a, h, c, ... on j^age 386 are
2
correct, excej)t that given for a ; the value of « is ^ , and not
■^ , as the language of Nicolas Bernoulli seems to imply.
(3) The chief results obtained by Nicolas Bernoulli are stated
at the top of page 329 ; these results agree with tliose afterwards
given by Laplace.
124 MONTMORT.
211. Althougli the earliest iiotice of the problem occurs in
the letter of Montmort's which we are now examining, yet the
earliest piiblicatioyi of it is due to De Moivre ; it is Problem XV.
of the De Mensura Sortis. We shall however speak of it as
Waldegraves Problem, from the person whose name we have found
first associated with it.
The problem is discussed by Laplace, Theorie . . . des Froh.
page 238, and we shall therefore have to recur to it.
212. Montmort refers on page 320 to a book entitled Traite
dii Jeu, which he says he had lately received from Paris. He says
it is un Livre de morale. He praises the author, but considers
him to be wrong sometimes in his calculation of chances, and
gives an example. Nicolas Bernoulli in reply says that the
author of the book is Mr Barbeyrac. Nicolas Bernoulli agrees
with Montmort in his general opinion respecting the book, but
in the example in question he thinks Barbeyrac right and Mont-
mort wrong. The difference in result arises from a difference in
the way of understanding the rules of the game. Montmort
briefly replied ; see pages 332, 3-i6.
Montmort complains of a dearth of mathematical memoirs ; he
says, page 322,
Je suis etonne de voir les Journeaux de Lei23sic si degarnis de
morceaux de Matliematiques : ils doivent en partie leur reputation aux
excellens Memoires que Messieurs vos Oiicles y envoyoient souveiit : les
Geometres n'y trouvent plus depuis cinq ou six ans les memes ricliesses
qu' autrefois, faites-en des reproches a M. votre Oncle, et permettcs-nioi
de vous en faire aussi, Luceat lux vestra coram hominihus.
213. The next letter is from Nicolas Bernoulli to Montmort ;
it occupies pages 323 — 337. It chiefly relates to matters which
we have already sufficiently noticed, namely, the games of Treize,
Her, and Tas, and Waldcgrave's Problem. Nicolas Bernoulli ad-
verts to the letter by his uncle James on the game of Tennis,
which was afterwards published at the end of the Ars Conjectandi,
and he proposes for solution four of the problems which are con-
sidered in the letter in order to see if Montmort's results will
agree with those of James Bernoulli.
MONTMORT. 125
Nicolas Bernoulli gives at the end of his letter an example
)f summation of series. He proposes to sum p terms of the
jeries 1, 3, 6, 10, 15, 21, ... He considers the series
1 + 3:c + 6aj' + lOa;^ + lox" + 21^' + ...
which he decomposes into a set of series, thus :
1 + 2a; + 3x' + ^x^ + 5;c* + ...
+ a; + 2a;' + 3^' + 4ic*+ ...
+ ir' + 2a;' + 3^'+...
+ 33^+2^'+...
+ 0;*+...
+ ...
The series in each horizontal row is easily summed to p terms ;
he expression obtained takes the form - when x = l, and Nicolas
Bernoulli evaluates the indeterminate form, as he says, ...en me
servant de la regie de mon Oncle, que feu Monsieur le Marquis
de I'Hojoital a insere dans son Analyse des infiniment petits, ...
The investigation is very inaccurately printed.
21 -i. The next letter is from Montmort to Nicolas Bernoulli ;
it occupies pages 337 — 317. Besides remarks on the game of Her
and on Waldegrave's Problem, it contains some attempts at the
problems which Nicolas Bernoulli had proposed out of his uncle's
letter on the game of Tennis. But Montmort found the problems
difficult to understand, and asked several questions as to their
meaning.
215. Montmort gives on his page 312 the following equation
as the result of one of the problems,
4m'-8m'+llM + 6 = 3'"-'\
and he says that this is satisfied approximately by m = of-J^ ; but
there is some mistake, for the equation has no root between
5 and 6. The correct equation should apparently be
which has a root between 51 and 5 •2.
126 MONTMORT.
216. One of the problems is the following. The skill of ^,
that is his chance of success in a single trial, is ^, the skill of B
is q. A and B are to play for victory in two games out of three,
each game being for two points. In the first game B is to have
a point given to him, in the second the players are to be on an
equality, and in the third also B is to have a point given to
him. Required the skill of each player so that on the whole
the chances may be equal, ^'s chance of success in the first
game or in the third game is p^, and i?'s chance is ^ + '^qp.
u4's chance of success in the second game is p^ + ^p^q, and ^'s
chance is <f + 3^^. Hence ^'s chance of success in two games
out of three is
/ (/ + 3/2) +/ (2' + ^P) (p' + 3/2) +/ (q" + 32» ;
and this by supposition must equal ^ .
This agrees with Montmort's result by putting , for ^
and 7 for g, allowinc^ for a mistake which was afterwards
corrected ; see Montmort's pages 34^3, 350, 352.
217. The letter closes with the following interesting piece of
literary history.
Je ne sgai si vous slaves qu'on reimprime la Recherche de la verite.
Le R. P. Malbranche m'a dit que cet Ouvi-age paroitroit au commence-
ment d'Avril. II y aura un grand nonibre d'additions sur des sujets
tres importans. Yous y verres entr'autres nouveautes une Disserta-
tion sur la cause de la pesanteur, qui apparemment fixera les doutes
de tant de Sgavans hommes qui ne sgavent a quoi s'en tenir sur
cette matiere. II prouve d'une maniere invincible la necessite de ses
petits tourbillons pour rendre raison de la cause de la pesanteur, de la
durete et fluidite des corps et des principaux plienomenes toucliant la
lumiere et les couleursj sa theorie s'accorde le niieux du monde avec
les belles experiences que M. Newton a rapporte dans son beau Traite
Be Natura Lucis et Colorum. Je peux me glorifier auprcs du Pub-
lic que mes prieres ardentes et reiterees depuis j)lusieurs annces, ont
contribue a determiner cet incomparable Philosoplie a ecrire sur cette
MONTMORT. 127
matiere qiii renfcrme toute la Physique generale. Vous verres avec
admiration que ce grand hiomme a porte dans ces matieres obscures
cette nettete d'idces, cette sublimite de genie et d'invention qui bril-
lent avec tant d'eclat dans ses Traites de Metaphysique.
Posterity has not adopted the high opinion which Montmort
here expresses respecting the physical speculations of his friend
and master ; Malebranche is now remembered and honoured for
his metaphysical works alone, Avhich have gained the following
testimony from one of the gi'eatest critics :
As a thinker, he is perhaps the most profound that France has
ever produced, and as a writer on i)liilosopliical subjects, there is not
another European author who can be placed before him.
Sir William Hamilton's Lectures on Metaphysics, Vol. i. page 262 ;
see also his edition of Reid's Works, page 266.
218. The next letter is from Montmort to Nicolas Bernoulli ;
it occupies pages 3-52 — 360. We may notice that Montmort here
claims to be the first person who called attention to the theorem
which is now given in elementary treatises on Algebra under the
following enunciation : To find the number of terms in the expan-
sion of any multinomial, the exponent being a positive integer.
See Montmort's page 355.
219. Montmort gives in this letter some examples of the recti-
fication of curves ; see his pages 35G, 357, 359, 360. In particular
he notices" one which he had himself discussed in the earty days
of the Integral Calculus, when, as he says, the subject was well
known only by five or six mathematicians. This example is the
rectification of the curve called after the name of its inventor De
Beaune ; see John Bernoulli's works. Vol. I. pages 62, 63. AMiat
Montmort gives in this letter is not intelligible by itself, but it can
be understood by the aid of the original memoii*, which is in the
Journal des Scavans, Vol. xxxi.
These remarks by Montmort on the rectification of curves are
of no great interest except to a student of the history of the Inte-
gral Calculus, and they are not free from errors or misprints.
128 MONTMORT.
220. Montmort quotes the following sentence from a letter
written by Pascal to Format.
Pour vous parler francliement de la Geometrie, je la trouve le plus
haut exercice de I'espritj mais en meme temps je la connois pour si
invitile, que je fais peu de difference entre un homme qui n'est que
Geometre et un habile Artisan; aussi je I'appelle le plus beau metier
du monde; mais enfin ce n'est qu'un metier: et j'ai souvent dit qu'elle
est bonne pour faire I'essai, mais non pas I'emploi de notre force.
Montmort naturally objects to this decision as severe and humi-
liating, and probably not that which Pascal himself would have
pronounced in his earlier days.
221. The next letter is also from Montmort to Nicolas Ber-
noulli; it occupies pages 361 — 370. Montmort says he has just
received Do Moivre's book, by which he means the memoir De
Mensura Sortis, published by De Moivre in the Philosophical
Transactions ; and he proceeds to analyse this memoir. Montmort
certainly does not do justice to De Moivre. Montmort in fact
considers that the first edition of his own work contained im-
plicitly all that had been given in the De Mensura Sortis; and he
seems almost to fancy that the circumstance that a problem had
been discussed in the correspondence between himself and the
Bernoullis was sufficient ground to deprive De Moivre of the credit
of originality. The opinion of Nicolas Bernoulli was far more favour-
able to De Moivre ; see Montmort's pages 862, 375, 378, 386.
De Moivre in his Miscellanea Analytica replied to Montmort,
as we shall see hereafter.
222. On his page 365 Montmort gives some remarks on the
second of the five problems which Huygens proposed for solution ;
see Art. 35.
Suppose there are three players ; lot a be the number of
white balls, and h of black balls ; let c = a-\- h. The balls are
supposed not to be replaced after being drawn ; then the chance of
the first player is
a h{h-V) (h-2)a b(h-l) .,.(h-5)a
,c+c(c-l)(c-2)(c-3) c(c-l) ... (c-6) '^ '"
MONTMORT. 129
Montmort takes credit to himself for summing this series, so as
to find its value when a and h are large numbers ; but, without
saying so, he assumes that a = 4. Thus the series becomes
4l&f|c-l \g- ^ |c — *7
c
\h_ ' |5-3 ' \h-Q
Let p = h + ^, then c=p+l] thus the series within brackets
becomes
+ (p-(i)(p->7)(p-8) + ...
Suppose we require the sum of n terms of the series. The
r^^ term is
(p-Sr + S) (^-'3r + 2) (^^-3r + l) ;
assume that it is equal to
where A, B, C, D are to be independent of r.
We shall find that
A=j>{p- 1) {p - 2),
B=-(9/-4.5;>+()0),
(7=54p-216,
i>=-162.
Hence the required sum of n terms is
np (p - 1) {p - 2) - '^^^ (V- ^op 4- 60)
n{n-l){n-^) __ n {n - 1) {n - 2 ) (7^ - S)
^ 1.2.3 K'^W--^^) 1.2.3.4 ^'"
This result is sufficiently near Montmort's to shew that he must
have adopted nearly the same method ; he has fallen into some
mistake, for he gives a different expression for the terms inde-
pendent oip.
In the problem on chances to which this is subser\dent we
should have to put for ?i the greatest integer in -^ .
9
130 MONTMORT.
Montmort refers on his page 364 to a letter dated June 8*^
1710, which does not appear to have been preserved.
223. The next letter is from Nicolas Bernoulli to Montmort ;
it occupies pages 871 — 375. Nicolas Bernoulli demonstrates a
property of De Beaune's curve ; he also gives a geometrical recti-
fication of the logarithmic curve ; but his results are very in-
correct. He then remarks on a subject which he says had been
brought to his notice in Holland, and on which a memoir had been
inserted in the Philosophical Transactions. The subject is the
argument for Divine Providence taken from the constant regu-
larity observed in the births of both sexes. The memoir to which
Bernoulli refers is by Dr John Arbuthnot ; it is in Vol. XXVII. of
the Philosophical Transactions, and was published in 1710. Nicolas
Bernoulli had discussed the subject in Holland with 's Gravesande.
Nicolas Bernoulli says that he was obliged to refute the argu-
ment. What he supposes to be a refutation amounts to this ; he
examined the registers of births in London for the years from 1629
to 1710 inclusive; he found that on the average 18 males were
born for 17 females. The greatest variations from this ratio were
in 1661, when 4748 males and 4100 females were born, and in
1703, when 7765 males and 7683 females were born. He says
then that we may bet 800 to 1 that out of 14,000 infants the ratio
of the males to the females will fall within these limits ; we shall
see in Art. 225 the method by which he obtained this result.
224. The next letter is also from Nicolas Bernoulli to Mont-
mort ; it occupies pages 875 — 887. It contains some remarks on
the game of Her, and some remarks in reply to those made by
Montmort on De Moivre's memoir De Mensura Soi'tis. The most
impoj'tant part of the letter is an elaborate discussion of Walde-
grave's problem ; we have already said enough on this problem,
and so need only add that Nicolas Bernoulli speaks of this discus-
sion as that which he preferred to every thing else which he had
produced on the subject; see page 881. The approbation which
he thus bestows on his own work seems well deserved.
225. Thie next letter is also from Nicolas Bernoulli to Mont-
mort ; it occupies pages 388 — 893. It is entirely occupied with
MONTMORT. 131
the question of the ratio of male infants to female infants. We
have already stated that Nicolas Bernoulli had refused to see any
argument for Divine Providence in the fact of the nearly constant
ratio. He assumes that the ])rohahility of the hiHh of a male is to
the probability of the birth of a female as IS to 17 ; he then shews
that the chances are 43 to 1 that out of 14,000 infants the males
will lie between 7037 and 7363. His investigation involves a
general demonstration of the theorem of his uncle James called
Bernoulli's Theorem. The investigation requires the summation
of terms of a binomial series ; this is effected approximately by a
process which is commenced in these words : Or comme ces termes
sont furieusement grands, il faut un artifice singulier pour trouver
ce rapport : voici comment je m'y suis pris.
The whole investigation bears some resemblance to that of
James Bernoulli and may have been suggested by it, for Nicolas
Bernoulli says at the end of it, Je me souviens que feu mon Oncle
a demontre une sembla])le chose dans son Traits De Arte Con-
jectandi, qui s'imprime a present a Bale, . . .
226. TJie next letter is from Montmort to Nicolas Bernoulli ;
it occupies pages 395 — 400. Montmort records the death of the
Duchesse d'Angouleme, which caused him both grief and trouble ;
he says he cannot discuss geometrical matters, but will confine
himself to literary intelligence.
He mentions a work entitled Pr emotion Physique ^ ou Action
de Dieu sur les Creatures demontree par raisonnement The
anonymous author pretended to follow the method of mathe-
maticians, and on every page were to be found such great words
as Definition, Axiom, Theorem, Demonstration, Corollary, &c.
Montmort asks for the opinion of Nicolas Bernoulli and his
uncle respecting the famous Commerciiim Epistolicum which he
says M™ de la Societe Royale ont fait imprimer pour assurer a
M. Newton la gloire d'avoir invente le premier et seul les nou-
velles methodes.
Montmort speaks with approbation of a little treatise which
had just appeared under the title of Mechanique du Feu.
Montmort expresses his strong admiration of two investigations
which he had received from Nicolas Bernoulli ; one of these was
9—2
132 MONTMORT.
the solution of Waldegrave's problem, and the other apparently
the demonstration of James Bernoulli's theorem : see Arts. 224, 225.
Montmort says, page 400,
Tout cela etoit en verite bien difficile et d'un grand travail.
Yous etes ini terrible homme; je croyois que pour avoir pris les de-
vants je ne serois pas si-tot ratrappe, mais je vois bien que je me suis
trompe: je suis a present bien derriere vous; et force de mettre toute
mon ambition a vous suivre de loin.
227. This letter from Montmort is interesting, as it records
the perplexity in which the writer found himself between the
claims of the rival systems of natural philosophy, the Cartesian
and the Newtonian. He says, page 397,
Derange comme je le suis par I'autorite de M. Newton, et d'un
si grand nombre de sgavans Geometres Anglois, je serois presque tente
de renoncer pour jamais a I'etude de la Physique, et de remettre a
sgavoir tout cela dans le Ciel; mais non, I'autorite des plus grands
esprits ne doit Y>oijit nous faire de loi dans les clioses oil la raison
doit decider.
228. Montmort gives in this letter his views respecting a
History of Mathematics ; he says, page 399,
II seroit a soidiaiter que quelqu'un voulut prendre la peine de
nous apprendre comment et en quel ordre les decouvertes en Mathe-
matiqucs se sont succedees les unes aux autres, et h qui nous en avons
r obligation. On a fait I'Histoire de la Peinture, de la Musique, de
la Medecine, &c. line bonne Histoire des Matliematiques, et en par-
ticulier de la Geometrie, seroit un Ouvrage beaucoup plus curieux et
plus utile : Quel plaisir n'auroit-on pas de voir la liaison, la connexion
des raetliodes, 1' enchain em ent des difFerentes theories, a commencer
depuis les premiers temps jusqu'au notre ou cette science se trouve
portee a. un si haut degre de perfection. II me semble qu'un tel
Ouvrage bien fait pourroit etre en quelque sorte regarde comme I'his-
toire de I'esprit humaiiij puisque c'est dans cette science plus qu'eu
toute autre chose, que I'homme fait connoitre I'excellence de ce don
d'intelligence que Dieu lui a accorde pour I'clever au dessus de toutcs
les autres Creatures.
MONTMORT. 1.33
Montmort himself had made some progi'ess in the work which
he here recommends; see Art. 137. It seems however that his
manuscripts were destroyed or totally dispersed ; see Montucla,
Ilistoire des Mathematiques first edition, preface, page IX.
229. The next letter is from Nicolas Bernoulli to Montmort ;
it occupies pages 401, 402. Nicolas Bernoulli announces that the
Ars Conjectandi has just been published, and says, II n'y aura
gueres rien de nouveau pour vous. He proposes five problems to
Montmort in return for those which Montmort had proposed to
him. He says that he had already proposed the first problem in
his last letter ; but as the problem does not occur before in the
correspondence, a letter must have been suppressed, or a portion
of it omitted.
The third problem is as follows. A and B play with a com-
mon die, A deposits a crown, and B begins to play ; if B throws
an even number he takes the crown, if he throws an odd number
he deposits a crown. Then A throws, and takes a crown if he
throws an even number, but does not deposit a crown if he
throws an odd number. Then B throws again, and so on. Thus
each takes a crown if he throws an even number, but B alone
deposits a crown if he throws an odd number. The play is to
continue as long as there is any sum deposited. Determine the
advantage of A or B.
The fourth problem is as follows. A promises to give to B
a crown if B with a common die throws six at the first throw,
two crowns if B throws six at the second throw, three crowns
if B throws six at the third throw ; and so on.
The fifth problem generalises the fourth, A promises to give
B crowns in the progression 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, ... or 1, 3, 9, 27, ... or
1, 4, 9, 16, 25, ... or 1, 8, 27, 64, ... instead of in the progression
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, as in the fourth problem.
230. The next letter is the last; it is from Montmort to
Nicolas Bernoulli, and it occupies pages 403—412. It enters
largely on the game of Her, With respect to the five problems
proposed to him, Montmort says that he has not tried the first
and second, that the foTU'th and fifth present no difticulty, but
that the third is much more difficult. He says that it took him
134? MONTMORT.
a long time to convince himself that there would be neither
advantage nor disadvantage for B, but that he had come to this
conclusion, and so had Waldegrave, who had worked with him
at the problem. It would seem however, that this result is
obvious, for B has at every trial an equal chance of winning or
losing a crown.
Montmort proposes on his page 408 a problem to Nicolas
Bernoulli, but the game to which it relates is not described.
231. In the fourth problem given in Art. 229, the advantage
of B is expressed by the series
77 + ^2 + 7^ + pi + • • • '^^^ infinitum.
This series may be summed by the ordinary methods.
We shall see that a problem of the same kind as the fourth
and fifth of those communicated by Nicolas Bernoulli to Mont-
mort, was afterwards discussed by Daniel Bernoulli and others, and
that it has become famous under the title of the Petersburg
Problem.
232. Montmort's work on the whole must be considered
highly creditable to his acuteness, perseverance, and energy. The
courage is to be commended which led him to labour in a field
hitherto so little cultivated, and his example served to stimulate
his more distinguished successor. De Moivre was certainly far
superior in mathematical power to Montmort, and enjoyed the
great advantage of a long life, extending to more than twice the
duration of that of his predecessor ; on the other hand, the
fortunate circumstances of Montmort's position gave him that
abundant leisure, which De Moivre in exile and poverty must
have found it imj^jossible to secure.
CHAPTER IX.
DE MOIVRE.
233. Abraham De Moivre was bom at Vitri, in Cliampagne,
in 1667. On account of the revocation of the edict of Nantes,
in 1685, he took shelter in England, where he supported himself
by giving instruction in mathematics and answers to questions
relatiuGf to chances and annuities. He died at London in 1754.
John Bernoulli speaks thus of De Moi^Te in a letter to
Leibnitz, dated 26 Apr. 1710; see page 847 of the volume cited
in Art. 59 :
...Dominus Moy^Taeus, insignis certe Geometra, qui liaud dubie
adluic haeret Loudini, luctans, ut audio, cum fome et miseria, quas ut
depellat, victum quotidianum ex informationibus adolescentum petere
cogitur. O duram sortein hominis! et parum aptam ad excitanda
ingenia nobilia; quis non tandem succumberet sub tam iniquae foi-tunae
vexationibus ? vel quodnam ingenium etiam fervidissimum non algeat
tandem ? Miror certe MoyvTaeum tantis angustiis pressum ea tamen
adhuc praestare, quae praestat.
De Moivre was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society in 1697 ;
his portrait, strikingly conspicuous among those of the great
chiefs of science, may be seen in the collection which adorns the
walls of the apartment used for the meetings of the Society. It
is recorded that Newton himself, in the later years of his life,
used to reply to inquirers respecting mathematics in these words :
" Go to Mr De Moivre, he knows these things better than I do."
In the long list of men ennobled by genius, virtue, and mis-
fortune, who have found an asvlum in England, it would be
18G DE MOIYRE.
difficult to name one who has conferred more honour on his
adopted country than De Moivre.
234?. Number 329 of the Philosophical Transactions consists
entirely of a memoir entitled De Mensura Soi^tis, sen, de Probabili-
tate Eventuum in Ludis a Casu Fortuito Pendentihus. Autore
Abr. De Moivre, RS.S.
The number is stated to be for the months of January,
February, and March 1711 ; it occupies pages 213 — 261? of Vo-
lume XXVII. of the Philosophical Transactions.
The memoir was afterwards expanded by De Moivre into his
work entitled The Doctrine of Chances: or, a Method of Calculating
the Pi'ohabilities of Events in Play. The first edition of this work
appeared in 1718 ; it is in quarto and contains xiv + 175 pages,
besides the title-leaf and a dedication. The second edition appeared
in 1738 ; it is in large quarto, and contains xiv + 258 pages,
besides the title-leaf and a dedication and a page of corrections.
The third edition appeared in 1756, after the author's death ; it is
in large quarto, and contains xii + 348 pages, besides the title-leaf
and a dedication.
235. I propose to give an account of the memoir De Mensura
Sortis, and of the third edition of the Doctrine of Chances. In my
account of the memoir I shall indicate the corresponding parts of
the Doctrine of Chances ; and in my account of the Doctrine of
Chances I shall give such remarks as may be suggested by compar-
ing the third edition of the work with those which preceded it ;
any reference to the Doctrine of Chances must be taken to apply to
the third edition, unless the contrary is stated.
236. It may be observed that the memoir De Mensura, Sortis
is not reprinted in the abridgement of the Philosophical Transac-
tions up to the year 1800, which was edited by Hutton, Shaw, and
Pearson.
The memoir is dedicated to Francis Robartes, at whose recom-
mendation it had been drawn up. The only works of any import-
ance at this epoch, which had appeared on the subject, were the
treatise by Huygens, and the first edition of Montmort's book.
De Moivre refers to these in words which we have already quoted
in Art. 142.
DE MOIVRE. 137
De Moivre says that Problems 16, 17, 18 in his memoir were
proposed to him by Robartes. In the Preface to the Doctrine of
Chances, which is said to have been written in 1717, the origin of
the memoir is explained in the following words :
' Tis now about Seven Years, since I gave a Specimen in the Philo-
sojyJiical Transactions^ of what I now more largely treat of in this Book.
The occasion of my then undertaking this Subject was chiefly owing to
the Desire and Encouragement of the Honourable Francis Robartes Esq.
(now Earl of Kaclnor); who, upon occasion of a French Tract, called
L Analyse des Jeux de Hazard, which had lately been published, was
i)leased to propose to me some Problems of much greater difficulty than
any he had found in that Book ; which having solved to his Satisfaction,
he engaged me to methodize those Problems, and to lay down the Pules
which had led me to their Solution. After I had proceeded thus far, it
was enjoined me by the Poyal Society, to communicate to them what I
had discovered on this Subject : and thereupon it was ordered to be i)ub-
lished in the Transactions, not so much as a matter relating to Play, but
as containing some general Speculations not unworthy to be considered
by the Lovers of Truth.
237. The memoir consists of twenty-six Problems, besides
a few introductory remarks which exj^laiu how probability is
measured.
238. The first problem is to find the chance of throwing an
ace twice or oftener in eight throws with a single die ; see Doctrine
of Chances, page 13.
239. The second problem is a case of the Problem of Points.
A is supposed to want 4 points, and B to want G points ; and ^-I's
chance of winning a single point is to ^'s as 3 is to 2 ; see Doctrine
of Chances, page 18. It is to be remembered that up to this date,
in all that had been published on tlie subject, the chances of the
players for winning a single point had always been assumed equal ;
see Art. 173.
240. The third problem is to determine the chances of A and B
for Avinning a single game, supposing that A can give B two games
out of three ; the fourth problem is of a similar kind, supjDosing
138 BE MOIVRE.
that A can give B one game out of three : see Problems I. and ii.
of the Doctrine of Chances.
24^1. The fifth problem is to find how many trials must be
made to have an even chance that an event shall happen once at
least. Montmort had already solved the problem ; see Art. 170.
De Moivre adds a useful approximate formula which is now one
of the permanent results in the subject; we shall recur to it in
noticing Problem III. of the Doctrine of Chances, where it is repro-
duced.
242. De Moivre then gives a Lemma : To find how many
Chances there are upon any number of Dice, each of them of the
same number of Faces, to throw any given number of points ; see
Doctrine of Chances, page 89. We have already given the history
of this Lemma in Art. 149.
243. The sixth problem is to find how many trials must be
made to have an even chance that an event shall happen twice at
least. The seventh problem is to find how many trials must be
made to have an even chance that an event shall happen three
times at least, or four times at least, and so on. See Problems III.
and IV. of the Doctrine of Chances.
244. The eighth problem is an example of the Problem of
Points with three players ; it is Problem VI. of the Doctrine of
Chances.
245. The ninth problem is the fifth of those proposed for
solution by Huygens, which Montmort had enunciated wrongly in
his first edition ; see Art. 199. Here we have the first publication
of the general formula for the chance which each of two players
has of ruining the other in an unlimited number of games ; see
Art. 107. The problem is Problem vil. of the Doctrine of
Chances.
246. The tenth problem is Problem viii. of the Doctrine of
Chances, where it is thus enunciated :
Two Gamesters ^ and -5 lay by 24 Counters, and play with three
Dice, on this condition ; that if 1 1 Points come np, A shall take one
DE MOIVRE. 139
Counter out of tlie heap; if 14, ^ shall take out one; and he shall be
reputed the winner who shall soonest get 1 2 Counters.
This is a very simple problem. De Moivre seems quite un-
necessarily to have imagined that it could be confounded with that
which immediately preceded it ; for at the end of the ninth pro-
blem he says,
Maxime cavendum est ne Prohlemata propter speciem aliquam
affinitatis inter se confundantur. Problema sequens videtur affine
superiori.
After enunciating his ninth problem he says,
Problema istud a superiore in hoc diifert, quod 23 ad pluriraum
tesserarum jactibus, ludus necessano finietur ; cum Indus ex lege supe-
rioris problematis, posset in aeternum continuari, propter reciproca-
tionem lucri et jacturse se invicem perpetuo destruentium.
247. The eleventh and twelfth problems consist of the second
of those proposed for solution by Huygens, taken in two mean-
ings ; they form Problems X. and XI. of the Doctrine of Chances.
The meanings given by De Moivre to the enunciation coincide
with the first and second of the three considered by James Ber-
noulli ; see Arts. 35 and 199.
248. The thirteenth problem is the first of those proposed fur
solution by Huygens ; the fourteenth problem is the fourth of the
same set : see Art. 35. These problems are very simple and are
not repeated in the Doctrine of Chances. In solving the fourth of
the set De Moivre took the meaning to be that A is to draw three
white balls at least. Montmort had taken the meaning to be that
A is to draw exactly three white balls. John Bernoulli in his
letter to Montmort took the meaning to be that A is to draw three
white balls at least. James Bernoulli had considered both mean-
ings. See Art. 199.
249. The fifteenth problem is that which we have called
Waldegrave's problem; see Art. 211. De Moivre here discusses
the problem for the case of three players : this discussion is re-
peated, and extended to the case of four players, in the Doctrine of
Chances, pages 132 — 159. De Moivre was the first in publishing a
solution of the problem.
140 DE MOIVRE.
250. The sixteenth and seventeenth problems relate to the
game of bowls ; see Art. 177. These problems are reproduced in
a more general form in the Doctrine of Chances, pages 117 — 123.
Respecting these two problems Montmort says, on his page 366,
Les Problemes 16 et 17 ne sont que deux cas tres simples d'un
meme Probleme, c'est presque le seul qui m'ait echape de tous ceux que
je trouve dans ce Livre.
251. The eighteenth and nineteenth problems are Problems
XXXIX. and XL. of the Doctrine of Chances, where we shall find
it more convenient to notice them.
252. The remaining seven problems of the memoir form
a distinct section on the Duration of Play. They occur as
Problems LViii, LX, LXi, LXii, LXiii, Lxv, LXVI, of the Doctrine
of Chances; and we shall recur to them.
253. It will be obvious from what we have here given that the
memoir De Mensura Sortis deserves especial notice in the history
of our subject. Many important results were here first published
by De Moivre, although it is true that these results already existed
in manuscript in the Ars Conjectandi and the correspondence
between Montmort and the Bernoullis.
We proceed to the Doctrine of Chances.
254. The second edition of the Doctrine of Chances contains
an Advertisement relating to the additions and improvements
effected in the work ; this is not reprinted in the third edition.
The second edition has at the end a Table of Contents which
neither of the others has. The third edition has the following
Advertisement :
The Author of this Work, by the failure of his Eye-sight in extreme
old age, was obUged to entrust the Care of a new Edition of it to one of
his Eriends ; to whom he gave a Copy of the former, with some marginal
Corrections and Additions, in his own hand writing. To these the
Editor has added a few more, where they were thought necessary : and
has disposed the whole in better Order; by restoring to their proper
places some things that had been accidentally misplaced, and by putting
all the Problems concerning Aymuities together; as they stand in the
late imj-yroved edition of the Treatise on that Subject. An A'ppendix
DE MOIVRE. 14:1
of several useful Articles is likewise subjoined : the whole according
to a Plan concerted with the Author, above a year before his death.
255. The following list will indicate the parts which are new
in the third edition. The Remark, pages 30 — 33 ; the Remark,
pages 48, 49 ; the greater part of the second Corollary, pages 64 — 66;
the Examples, page 88 ; the Scholium, page 95 ; the Remark,
page 116; the third Corollary, page 138; the second Corollary,
page 149 ; the Remark, pages 151 — 159 ; the fourth Corollary,
page 162; the second Corollary, pages 176 — 179; the Note
at the foot of page 187 ; the Remark, pages 251 — 254.
The part on life annuities is very much changed, according to
the plan laid down in the Advertisement.
In the second and third editions the numbers of the Problems
agree up to Problem xi ; Problem xii. of the third edition had
been Problem Lxxxix. of the second ; from Problem xii. to
Problem LXix. of the third edition inclusive, the number of each
Problem exceeds by unity its number in the second edition ; Pro-
blem LXIX. of the second edition is incorporated in the third
edition with Problem VI ; Problems LXX. and LXXI. are the
same in the two editions, allowing for a misprint of LXXI. for LXX.
in the second edition. After this the numbering differs consider-
ably because in the second edition Problems respecting life annui-
ties are not separated from the other Problems as they are in the
third edition.
The first edition of the work was dedicated to Newton : the
second was dedicated to Lord Carpenter, and the dedication of the
second edition is reprinted at the beginning of the third ; the
dedication to Newton is reprinted on page 329 of the third edition.
256. The first edition of the Doctrine of Chances has a good
preface explaining the design and utility of the book and giving an
account of its contents ; the preface is reproduced in the other
editions with a few omissions. It is to be regretted that the fol-
lowing paragraphs were not retained, which relate respectively to
the first and second editions of Montmort's work :
However, had I allowed my self a little more time to consider it,
I had certainly done the Justice to its Author, to have owned that he
had not only illustrated Buy gens' s Method by a gi'cat variety of well
142 DE MOIVRE.
chosen Examples, but tliat be bad added to it several curious things of
bis own Invention.
Since the printing of my Specimen, Mr. de Monmort, Author of the
Analyse des jeux de Hazard^ Published a Second Edition of that Book,
in which he has particularly given many proofs of his singular Genius,
and extraordinary Capacity; which Testimony I give both to Truth,
and to the Friendship with which he is pleased to Honour me.
The concluding paragraph of the preface to the first edition
refers to the Ars Conjectandi, and invites Nicolas and John Ber-
noulli to prosecute the subject begun in its fourth part ; this
paragraph is omitted in the other editions.
We repeat that we are about to analyse the third edition of the
Doctrine of Chances, only noticing the previous editions in cases of
changes or additions in matters of importance.
257. The Doctrine of Chances begins with an Introduction of
S3 pages, which explains the chief rules of the subject and illus-
trates them by examples ; this part of the work is very much fuller
than the corresponding part of the first edition, so that our remarks
on the Introduction do not apply to the first edition. De Moivre
considers carefully the following fundamental theorem : suppose
that the odds for the happening of an event at a single trial are as
a to h, then the chance that the event will happen r times at least
in n trials is found by taking the first n — r-i-1 terms of the expan-
sion of (a + hy and dividing by (a + by. We know that the result
can also be expressed in another manner corresponding to the
second formula in Art. 172 ; it is curious that De Moivre gives
this without demonstration, though it seems less obvious than
that which he has demonstrated.
To find the chance that an event may happen just r times, De
Moivre directs us to subtract the chance that it will happen at least
r—1 times from the chance that it will happen at least r times.
He notices, but less distinctly than we might expect, the modern
method which seems more simple and more direct, by which we
begin with finding the chance that an event shall happen jvst r
times and deduce the chance that it shall happen at least r
times.
DE MOIVRE. 113
258. De Moivre notices the advantage arising from employing
a single letter instead of two or three to denote the probaljility of
the happening of one event. Thus if x denote the probability of
the happening of an event, \ —x will denote the probability of its
failing. So also y and z may denote the probabilities of the hap-
pening of two other events respectively. Then, for example,
x{\-y){\-z)
will represent the probability of the first to the exclusion of the
other two. De Moivre says in conclusion, '^ and innumerable cases
of the same nature, belonging to any number of Events, may be
solved without any manner of trouble to the imagination, by the
mere force of a proper notation."
259. In his third edition De Moivre draws attention to the
convenience of approximating to a fraction with a large numerator
and denominator by continued fractions, which he calls "the
Method proposed by Dr Wallis, Hiiygens, and others." He gives
the rule for the formation of the successive convergents which is
now to be found in elementary treatises on Algebra ; this rule he
ascribes to Cotes.
2G0. The Doctrine of Clicuices contains 7-i problems exclusive
of those relating to life annuities ; in the first edition there were
53 problems.
261. We have enunciated Problems I. and ii. in Art. 240.
Suppose p and q to represent the chances of A and ^ in a single
game. Problem I. means that it is an even chance that A "wall win
1 1
three o^ames before B wins one : thus p^ = cv- Hence x> = -^^^ , and
7 = 1 — 7777 . Problem li. means that it is an even chance that A
will win three games before B wins two. Thus p^ + Aip^q = ^ ; which
must be solved by trial.
These problems are simple examples of the general formula in
Art. 172.
262. Problems ill, IV, and V. are included in the followin
144 DE MOIVRE.
general enunciation. Suppose a the number of chances for the
happening of an event in a single trial, and h the number of
chances for its failing : find how many trials must be made to have
an even chance that the event will happen r times at least. .
For example, let r = 1.
Suppose X the number of trials. Then the chance that
If
the event fails x times in succession is -. tt^ . And by suppo-
sition this is equal to the chance of its happening once at least
in X trials. Therefore each of these chances must be equal
to -X . Thus
2
}f 1
{a + hy 2 '
from this equation x may be found by logarithms.
De Moivre proceeds to an approximation. Put - = q. Thus
X log [ 1 4- - ) = log 2.
If ^ = 1, we have x=l. If 5' be gi'eater than 1, we have by
expanding log ( 1 + - J ,
where log 2 will mean the logarithm to the Napierian base. Then
if q be large we have approximately
7
x= q log 2 = zTTzq nearly.
De Moivre says, page 87,
Thus we have assigned the very narrow limits within which the ratio
of £c to q is comprehended ; for it begins with unity, and terminates at
last in the ratio of 7 to 10 very near.
But X soon converges to the limit 0.7^', so that this value of x may
be assumed in all cases, let the value of q be what it will.
The fact that this result is true when q is moderately large is the
DE MOIVRE. 145
element of truth in the mistake made by M. de Mdre ; he assumed
that such a result should hold for all values of q : see Art. 14.
263. As another example of the general enunciation of
Art. 262, let r = S.
The chance that the event will happen at least 3 times in x
trials is equal to the first x — 2 terms of the expansion of
a h
X
+
\a + b a + bj *
and this chance by hypothesis is - . Hence the last three terms
of the expansion will also be equal to ^ , that is,
W + xV-' a + ^^^ I'-'' «' = I (« + W'
If ^ = 1 we find x = o.
X
If q be supposed indefinitely great, and we put - = z, we get
where e is the base of the Napierian logarithms.
By trial it is found that 2 =2675 nearly. Hence De Moivre
concludes that x always lies between oq and 2675(;^.
264. De Moivre exhibits the following table of results ob-
tained in the manner shewn in the two preceding Ai'ticles.
A Table of the Limits.
The Value of x will always be
For a single Event, between \q and O'GOSg'.
For a double Event, between 2)q and l-GTS^-.
For a triple Event, between 5q and 2 675^.
For a quadruple Event, between ^q aud 2>(dl2q.
For a quintuple Event, between 9^' and i-GTO^-.
For a sextuple Event, between \\q and b-ij^Sq.
ka.
10
146 DE MOIVRE.
And if the number of Events contended for, as well as the number
q be pretty large in respect to Unity; the number of Trials requisite for
.... ^n—\ . ,
those Events to happen n times will be — ^ q^ or barely nq.
De Moivre seems to have inferred the general result enun-
ciated in the last sentence, from observing the numerical values
obtained in the six cases which he had calculated, for he gives no
further investigation.
265. In Art. 263 we have seen that De Moivre concludes
that - always lies between 5 and 2"675. This may appear very
probable, but it is certainly not demonstrated. It is quite con-
ceivable, in the absence of any demonstration to the contrary, that
- should at first increase with q, and so be greater than 5, and
then decrease and become less than 2 675, and then increase
again to its limit 2-675. The remark applies to the general pro-
position, whatever be the value of r, as well as to the particular
example in which r =- 3.
It would not be very easy perhaps to shew from such an
equation as that in Art. 263, that x increases continually with q ;
and yet from the nature of the question we may conclude that
this must be the case. For if the chance of success in a single
trial is diminished, it appears obvious that the number of trials
must be increased, in order to secure an even chance for the event
to happen once at least.
266. On pages 39 — 43 of the Doctrine of Chances, we have
the Lemma of which we have already given an account ; see
Art. 242.
267. Problem VI. of the Doctrine of Chances is an example
of the Problem of Points with three players. De Moivre gives
the same kind of solution as Fermat : see Arts. 16 and 18. In
the third edition there is also a discussion of some simple cases
according to the method which Pascal used for two players ; see
Art. 12. De Moivre also gives here a good rule for solving the
problem for any number of players ; the rule is founded on
DE MOIVRE. 147
Fermat's metliod, and is intended to lighten as mucli as possible
the labour which must be incurred in applying the method to
complex cases. The rule was first published in the Miscellanea
Analytica, in 1730; it is given in the second edition of the
Doctrine of Chances on pages 191, 192.
2G8. Problem vii. is the fifth of those proposed by Huygens
for solution ; see Art. 35. We have already stated that De Moivre
generalises the problem in the same way as James Bernoulli,
and the result, with a demonstration, was first published in the
De Mensura Sortis ; see Arts. 107, 245. De Moivre's demon-
stration is very ingenious, but not quite complete. For he finds
the ratio of the chance that A will ruin B to the chance that
B will ruin A ; then he assumes in effect that in the lonof nm
one or other of the players must be ruined : thus he deduces
the absolute values of the two chances.
See the first Appendix to Professor De Morgan's Essay on
Prohahilities in the Cabinet Cyclopcedia.
We have spoken of Problem viii. in Art. 246.
269. Problem ix. is as follows.
Supposing A and B, whose proportion of skill is as a to 6, to play
together, till A either wins the number q of Stakes, or loses the number
;; of them ; and that B sets at every Game the sum G to the sum L ; it
is required to find the Advantage or Disadvantage of ^.
This was Problem XLIII. of the first edition of the Doctrine
of Chances, in the preface to which it is thus noticed :
The 43d Problem having been proposed to me by Mr. Thomas Wood-
cock, a Gentleman whom I infinitely respect, I attempted its Solution
with a very great desire of obtaining it; and having had the good
Fortune to succeed in it, I returned him the Solution a few Days after
he was pleased to jn-opose it. This Problem is in my Opinion one of
the most curious that can be propos'd on this Subject ; its Solution
containing the Method of determining, not only that Advantage which
results from a Superiority of Chance, in a Play confined to a certain
number of Stakes to be won or lost by either Party, but also that which
may result from an unequality of Stakes ; and even compares those two
Advantages together, when the Odds of Chance being on one side, the
Odds of Money are on the other.
10—2
148 DE MOIVRE.
In the Miscellanea Analytica, page 204, the problem is again
said to have been proposed by Thomas Woodcock, sjyectatissimo
viro, but he is not mentioned in the second or third edition of
the Doctrine of Chances ; so that De Moivre's infinite respect for
him seems to have decayed and disappeared in a finite time.
The solution of the problem is as follows :
Let R and S respectively represent the Probabilities which A and B
have of winning all the Stakes of their Adversary ; which Probabilities
have been determined in the vii*^ Problem. Let us first suppose that
the Sums deposited by A and B are equal, viz. G, and G : now since A
is either to win ihe sum qG, or lose the sum pG, it is plain that the Gain
of A ought to be estimated by EqG — SpG; moreover since the Sums
deposited are G and G, and that the proportion of the Chances to win
one Game is as a to h, it follows that the Gain of A for each individual
aQ _ hQ
Game is ^ — j and for the same reason the Gain of each individual
a +
aG — hL
Game would be j- , if the Suras deposited bv A and B were re-
spectively L and G. Let us therefore now suppose that they are L
and Gj then in order to find the whole Gain of A in this second cir-
cumstance, we may consider that whether A and B lay down equal
Stakes or unequal Stakes, the Probabilities which either of them has
of winning all the Stakes of the other, sufier not thereby any alter-
ation, and that the Play will continue of the same length in both cir-
cumstances before it is determined in favour of either; wherefore the
Gain of each individual Game in the first case, is to the Gain of each
individual Game in the second, as the whole Gain of the first case, to
the whole Gain of the second; and consequently the whole Gain of the
/-7 7 7-
second case will be Rq -^px or restoring the values of H and >S',
a — b ° '
qa^xa^-b^-pb^xa'^-b^ i.. -,. -, , aG-bL
^^^,_f^^, multiplied by ^_^ .
270. In the first edition of the Doctrine of Chances,
pages 136 — 142, De Moivre gave a very laborious solution of the
preceding Problem. To this was added a much shorter solution,
communicated by Nicolas Bernoulli from his uncle. This solution
was founded on an artifice which De Moivre had himself used in
DE MOIVRE. 14y
the ninth problem of the De Mensura Sortis. De Moivre how-
ever renounces for himself the claim to the merit of the solu-
tion. This renunciation he repeats in the Miscellanea Analytica,
page 206, where he names the author of the simple solution
which we have already given. He says,
Ego vere illucl ante libenter fassus sum, idque ipsum etiamnum
libenter fateor, quamvis solutio Problematis mei noni causam fortasse
dederit hiijus solutionis, me tamen nihil juris in eam habere, eamque
CI. ilhus Autori ascribi lequum esse.
Septem aut octo abliinc annis D. Stevens Int. Tempi. Socius, Yir
ingenuus, singulari sagacitate prseditus, id sibi propositum habens ut
Problema superius allatum solveret, hac ratione solutionem facile asse-
cutus est, quam mihi his verbis exhibuit.
Then follows the solution, after which De Moivre adds,
Doctissimus adolescens D. Cranmei', apud Genevenses MatliematicaB
Professor dignissiraus, cujus recordatio seque ac Collegae ejus i)eritissimi
D. Calandrin mihi est perjucunda, cum superiore anno Londini com-
moraretur, narravit milii se ex Uteris D. Nic. Bernoulli ad se datis acce-
pisse CI. Yirum novam solutionem hujus Problematis adeptum esse,
quani prioribus autor anteponebat ; cum vcro nihil de via solutionis
dixerit, si mihi conjicere liceat qualis ea sit, banc opinor eandem esse
atque illam quam raodo attuli.
271. We have already spoken of Problems x. and xi. in
Art. 247. In his solution of Problem x. De Moivre uses the
theorem for the summation of series to which we have refen^ed
in Art. 152. A corollary was added in the second edition and
was expanded in the third edition, on which we Avill make a
remark.
Suppose that A, B, and C throw in order a die of n faces,
and that a faces are favourable to A, and h to B, and c to (7,
where a ■\- h + c = n. Required the chances wdiich A, B, and G
have respectively of being the first to throw a corresponding face.
It may be easily shewn that the chances are proportional to
air, (h + c) hn, and (h + c) {a + c) c, respectively. De Moivre, in
his third edition, page Qo, seems to imply tliat before the order
was fixed, the chances would be proportional to ^, h, c. This
must of course mean that such would be the case if there were
150 DE MOIVRE.
no order at all; that is if the die were to be thrown and the
stake awarded to A, B, or C, according as the face which appeared
was one of the a, h, c respectively. If there is to be an order,
but the order is as Hkely to be one as another, the result will be
different. The chance of A for example will be one sixth of the
sum arising from six possible and equally likely cases. It will be
found that A's chance is
a
{6a' + 9a(h-i-c) + S (h' + c') + She}
Q{n'-{b + c) (c + a) (a + h)}
272. Problem xii. appeared for the first time in the second
edition, page 24^8, with this preliminary notice. ''A particular
Friend having desired of me that to the preceding Problems I
would add one more, I have thought fit to comply with his desire ;
the Problem was this." The problem is of no great importance ;
it is solved by the method often used in the Ai^s Co7vjectandi,
which we have explained in Art. 106.
273. Problem xiii. relates to the game of Bassette, and
Problem XIV. to the game of Pharaon; these problems occupy
pages 69 — 82 of the work. We have already sufficiently noticed
these games ; see Arts. 154, 168. De Moivre's discussion is the
same in all his three editions, except that a paragraph on page 37
of the first edition, extending from the words "Those who are ..."
to the end of the page, is omitted in the following editions.
The paragraph is in fact an easy example of the formulae for the
game of Bassette.
274. Problems XV. to XX. form a connected series. De Moivre
solves simple examples in chances and applies his results to esta-
blish a Theory of Permutations and Combinations ; in modern
times we usually adopt the reverse order, establish the Theory of
Permutations and Combinations first, and afterwards apply the
theory in the discussion of chances. We will take an example of
De Moivre's method from his Problem XV. Suppose there are
six things a, h, c, d, e, f, and let two of them be taken at random ;
required the chance that a shall stand first, and h second. The
DE MOIVRE. 151
1
chance of taking a first is ^ ; and tliere are then five things left,
and the chance of now taking 5 is ^ . Therefore the required
chance is -^ . Then De Moivre says,
Since the taking a in the first i)lace, and h in the second, is hut one
single Case of those by which six Things may change their order, being
taken two and two ; it follows that the number of Changes or Permu-
tations of six Things, taken two and two, must be 30.
275. In his Preface De Moivre says,
Having explained the common Rules of Combinations, and given a
Theorem which may be of use for the Solution of some Problems re-
lating to that Subject, I lay down a new Theorem, which is properly a
contraction of the former, whereby several Questions of Chance are
resolved with wonderful ease, tho' the Solution might seem at first sight
to be of insuperable difiiculty.
The mil} Theorem amounts to nothing more than the simplifi-
cation of an expression by cancelling factors, which occur in its
numerator and denominator ; see Doctrine of Chances, pages ix. 89.
27C. Problems xxi. to XXV. consist of easy applications to
questions concerning Lotteries of the principles established in the
Problems xv. to XX. ; only the first two of these questions con-
cerning Lotteries appeared in the first edition.
A Scholium is given on page 95 of the third edition which
deserves notice. De Moivre quotes the following formula : Sup-
pose a and n to be positive integers ; then
1111 1
- + — r-T + — -^ + — 7-i. + ...+
n n-\-l 71 + 2 ?i + 3 a — 1
_ a 1 1 A (l^ 1\ B (1 r
~ ^""^7^ + 2;^ "" 2^ "^ 2 \n' " ^; "^ I W a\
where A=\. ^^'W ^=A' -
152 DE MOIVRE.
As De Moivre says A, B, (7, ... are "the numbers of Mr. James
Bernoulli in his excellent Theorem for the Summing of Powers."
See Art. 112. De Moivre refers for the demonstration of the
formula to the Supplement to the Miscellanea Analytica, where
the formula first appeared. We shall recur to this in speaking of
the Miscellanea Analytica.
277. Problems xxvii. to xxxil. relate to the game of Quad-
rille ; although the game is not described there is no difficulty in
understanding the problems which are simple examples of the
Theory of Combinations : these problems are not in the first
edition.
278. Problem xxxiil. is To find at Pharaon how much it iiT
that the Banker gets per Cent of all the Money that is adventured.
De Moivre in his Preface seems to attach great importance to this
solution ; but it scarcely satisfies the expectations which are thus
raised. The player who stakes against the bank is in fact sup-
posed to play merely by chance without regard to what would be
his best course at any stage of the game, although the previous
investigations of Montmort and De Moivre shewed distinctly that
some courses were far less pernicious than others.
The Banker's adversary in De Moivre's solution is therefore
rather a machine than a gambler with liberty of choice.
279. Problem xxxiv. is as follows :
Supposing A and £ to play together, that the Chances they have
respectively to win are as a to 6, and that B obliges himself to set to A
so long as A wins without interruption : what is the advantage that A gets
by his hand?
The result is, supposing each to stake one,
Itj 1 ^ + ^ + FTi)^ + ^TTif + • • • '" *"-^'"'^"™ } '
that is, — = — .
280. Problems xxxv. and xxxvi. relate to the game dis-
cussed by Nicolas Bernoulli and Montmort, which is called Treize
or Rencontre; see Art. 162.
DE MOIVRK. 153
De Moivre treats the subject with great ingenuity and with
more generality than his predecessors, as we shall now shew.
281. Problem xxxv. is thus enunciated :
Any number of Letters a, h, c, d, e,/, &c., all of them different,
being taken promiscuously as it happens : to find the Probability that
some of them shall be found in their places according to the rank they
obtain in the Alphabet; and that others of them shall at the same time
be displaced.
Let n be the number of the letters ; suppose that j) specified
letters are to be in their places, q specified letters out of their
places, and the remaining n —p — q letters free from any restric-
tion. The chance that this result will happen is
n{n—l)...(n—j)+l)\ 1 n—p 1.2 (n— p)(?i— ^ — 1)
This supposes that p is greater than ; if ^ = 0, the result is
Iw"^ 1.2 n{n-l) '"
If we suppose in this formula q=^m — 1, we have a result akeady
implicitly given in Art. IGl.
In demonstrating these formulae De Moivre is content to ex-
amine a few simple cases and assume that the law which presents
itself will hold universally. We will indicate his method.
The chance that a is in the first place is - ; the chance that a is
in the first place, and h in the second place is — , — -:r^ : hence the
^ ^ n{n—i)
chance that a is in the first place and h not in the second place is
1 1
n n (ii — 1) *
Similarly the chance that a, h, c are all in their proper places is
1
/ IN / — K^ ; subtract this from the chance that a and h are in
n [71 — 1) (n — 2) '
their proper places, and we have the chance that a and h are in
their proper places, and c not in its proper place : thus this chance is
1 1
n
(n - 1) n («. - 1) {n - 2)
15^ DE MOIVRE.
De Moivre uses a peculiar notation for facilitating this process.
Let + a denote the chance that a is in its proper place and — a the
chance that it is out of it ; let + J denote the chance that h is in
its proper place and — h the chance that it is out of it ; and so on.
And in general let such a symbol as -\- a-\-h -\- c — d — e denote that
a, h, c are in their proper places, and d, e out of theirs.
n ' n(n -1) ' n{n — l)(n — 2)
1 ^
n(n-l){n-2){n-B)~'^'"'
Then we have the following results :
+ h =r
+ h + a = s
+ h — a = r—s (1)
+c+h =s
+ c-\-h + a = t
+ c + h-a = s-t •. (2)
+ c - a =r-s by (1)
+ c - a + J = s-t by (2)
+ c-a-b= r-2s + t (3)
+d+c+h =t
■Yd+G^-h-{-a = v
+ d + c-\-h-a = t-v (4)
+ J+c-a ^s-t by (2)
+ c?+c — a + &= t — v by (4)
■\-d-\-c-a-h= s-2t^v (5)
■\-d-h-a =r-2s-\-t by (3)
-\-d—h — a-\-c= s-2t-\-v by (5)
d — h — a — c— r— 35 + 8^—1? (6)
It is easy to translate into words any of these S3rmbolical pro-
cesses. Take for example that which leads to the result (2) :
DE MOIYRE. 155
this means that the chance that c and h are in their proper places
is s ; and this we know to be true ;
-\- c-\-'b-\- a = t,
this means that the chance that c, h, a are all in their proper
places is t ; and this we know to be true.
From these two results we deduce that the chance that c and h
are in their proper places, and a out of its place is 5 — ^ ; and this
is expressed symbolically thus,
-{-c-\-h — a = s — t
Similarly, to obtain the result (8) ; we know from the result (1)
that r — 5 is the chance that c is in its proper place, and a out of
its proper place ; and we know from the result (2) that 5 — /5 is the
chance that c and h are in their proper places, and a out of its pro-
per place ; hence we infer that the chance that c is in its proper
place, and a and h out of their proper places is r — 2s + ^ ; and this
result is expressed symbolically thus,
282. De Moivre refers in his Preface to this process in the fol-
lowing terms :
111 the 3oth and 36th Problems, I explain a new sort of Algebra,
whereby some Questions relating to Combinations are solved by so easy
a Process, that their Solution is made in some measure an immediate
consequence of the Method of Notation. I will not pretend to say that
this new Algebra is absolutely necessary to the Solving of those Ques-
tions which I make to depend on it, since it appears that Mr. Montmort,
Author of the Analyse cles Jeux de Hazard, and Mr. Nicholas Bernoulli
have solved, by another Method, many of the cases therein proposed :
But I hope I shall not be thought guilty of too much Confidence, if
I assure the Reader, that the Method I have followed has a degree of
Simplicity, not to say of Generality, which will hardly be attained by
any other Steps than by those I have taken.
283. De Moi^Te himself enunciates his result verbally ; it is of
course equivalent to the formula which we have given in Art. 281,
but it will be convenient to reproduce it. The notation being that
already explained, he says,
loG DE MOIVRE.
...tlien let all the quantities I, r, s, f,v, &c. be written down with
Signs alternately positive and negative, beginning at 1, if]) be = 0; at r,
if^9 be = 1; at 5, if p be = 2; &c. Prefix to these Quantities the Co-
efficients of a Binomial Power, whose index is = q; this being done,
those Quantities taken all together will express the Probability re-
quired.
284. The enunciation and solution of Problem xxxvi. are as
follows :
Any given number of Letters a, h, c, d, e, /, &c., being each repeated
a certain number of times, and taken promiscuously as it happens : To
find the Probability that of some of those sorts, some one Letter of each
may be found in its place, and at the same time, that of some other
sorts, no one Letter be found in its place.
Suppose n be the number of all the Letters, I the number of times
that each Letter is repeated, and consequently j the whole number of
Sorts : supj)ose also that p be the number of Sorts of which some one
Letter is to be found in its place, and q the number of Sorts of which
no one Letter is to be found in its place. Let now the prescriptions
given in the preceding Problem be followed in all respects, saving that
r must here be made = — , s = —, =^- , t — — ; 7T-7 777 , &c., and
n n {ii — 1) n {n —1) [71 — 2)
the Solution of any particular case of the Problem will be obtained.
Thus if it were required to find the Probability that no Letter of any
sort shall be in its place, the Probability thereof would be expressed by
the Series
^ ^"^^ 1.2 ^ 1.2.3 ^ 1.2.3.4 '^'^''•
of which the number of Terms is equal to q+ 1.
But in this particular case q would be equal to -j , and therefore, the
foregoing Series might be changed into this, viz.
1 n-l I {n-l){n-2l) 1 {71-I) {n-2l) (n-Sl)
2 n-l 6 {n - 1) {n - 2) '^ 24: (n-l) {n - 2) (n - 3) '^*
of which the number of Terms is equal to — j— .
DE MOIVRE. loT
285. De Moivre then adds some Corollaries. The follo^\ing
is the first of them :
From, hence it follows, that the Probability of one or more Letters,
indeterminately taken, being in their places, will be expressed as fol-
lows :
_ 1 iij-l 1 i ll - I) {n - 21) _ j_ {n -l)(n- 21) {n - 3 Q
2 n-1^ ^\r-1){ji-2) 24< (n- 1) {n-2) (n-S)
This agrees with what we have already given from Nicolas
Bernoulli ; see Art. 204.
In the next three Corollaries De Moivre exhibits the pro-
bability that two or more letters should be in their places, that
three or more should be, and that four or more should be.
286. The four Corollaries, which we have just noticed, are
examples of the most important part of the Problem; this is
treated by Laplace, who gives a general formula for the proba-
bility that any assigned number of letters or some greater number
shall be in their proper places. Theorie. . .des Proh. pages 217 — 222.
The part of Problems xxxv. and xxxvi. which' De Moivi-e puts
most prominently forward in his enunciations and solutions is
the condition that p letters are to be in their places, q out of
their places, and n — ij — q free from any restriction ; this part
seems peculiar to De MoIato, for we do not find it before his time,
nor does it seem to have attracted attention since.
287. A Remark is given on page 116 which was not in the
preceding editions of the Doctrine of Chances. De Moivre shews
that the sum of the series
111
1 — o + ^ " oT + • • • wi infinitum,
is equal to unity diminished by the reciprocal of the base of the
Napierian logarithms.
288. The fifth Corollary to Problem xxxvi. is as follows :
If A and B each holding a Pack of Cards, pull them out at the same
time one after another, on condition tliat every time two like Cards are
158 DE MOIVRE.
pulled out, A shall give B a Guinea; and it were required to find what
consideration £ ought to give A to play on those Terms : the Answer
will be one Guinea, let the number of Cards be what it will.
Altho' this be a Corollary from the preceding Solutions, yet it may
more easily be made out thus ; one of the Packs being the Rule where-
by to estimate the order of the Cards in the second, the Probability
that the two first Cards are alike is — , the Probability that the two
1^
52
second are alike is also -^ , and therefore there being 52 such alike com-
52
binations, it follows that the value of the whole is r-:: == 1.
52
It may be interesting to deduce this result from the formulae
already given. The chance that out of ti cards, 2^ specified cards
will be in their places, and all the rest out of their places will
be obtained by making q= n —p in the first formula of Art. 281.
The chance that cmy p cards will be in their places, and all the
rest out of their places will be obtained by multiplying the pre-
ceding result by - — ^= . And since in this case B receives
\n — p I p
p guineas, we must multiply by p to obtain 5's advantage. Thus
we obtain
p-l \ '2 [3 ' [^
n — p
Denote this by <^ {p) ; then we are to shew that the sum of
the values of <^ {p) obtained by giving to p all values between
1 and n inclusive is unity.
Let y^r (ti) denote the sum ; then it may be easily shewn that
'f(n + l)-'f {71) = 0.
Thus -yjr (n) is constant for all values of n ; and it = 1 when
71 = 1, so that -^ {71) is always = 1.
289. The sixth Corollary to Problem xxxvi. is as follows :
If the number of Packs be given, the Probability that any given
number of Circumstances may happen iu any number of Packs, will
DE MOIVRE. 159
easily be found by our Metliod : thus if tbe number of Packs be ^, the
Probability that one Card or more of the same Suit and Name in every
one of the Packs may be in the same position, will be expressed as fol-
lows,
1 1 1
n'-" 2[n(n- l)]''' ' [3 {w (ji - 1) (w - 2)]^-^
1
[4 [n (71-1) {n-2) (n-S)\
—, &c.
k-2.
Laplace demonstrates this result; see Theorie . . . des Prob.
page 224.
290. Problems xxxvii. and xxxviii. relate to the game of
Bowls; see Arts. 177, 250.
De Moivre says, page 120,
Having given formerly the Solution of this Problem, proposed to me
by the Honourable Francis Rohartes, Esq;, in the FhilosopTiical Trans-
actions Number 329; I there said, by way of Corollary, that if the
proportion of Skill in the Gamesters were given, the Problem might
also be solved : since w^hich time M. de Monmort^ in the second Edition
of a Book by him published upon the Subject of Chance, has solved
this Problem as it is extended to the consideration of the Skill, and
to carry his Solution to a great number of Cases, giving also a Me-
thod whereby it might be carried farther: But altlio' his Solution is
good, as he has made a right use of the Doctrine of Combinations,
yet I think mine has a greater degree of Simplicity, it being deduced
from the original Principle whereby I have demonstrated the Doctrine
of Permutations and Combinations:...
291. Problems xxxix. to XLil. form a connected set. Pro-
blem XXXIX. is as follows :
To find the Expectation of A, when with a Die of any given num-
ber of Paces, he undertakes to fling any number of them in any given
number of Casts.
Let j9 -f 1 be the number of faces on the die, n the number
of casts, /the number of faces which A undertakes to fling. Then
-4's expectation is
ICO DE MOIVKE.
{p + 1)"
(_p+l)"_/^« + /01^(^_l)»
_ /(/-lK/-2) (^_,)„^..
Be Moivre infers this general result from the examination
of the simple cases in which f is equal to 1, % 8, 4 respec-
tively.
He says in his Preface respecting this problem,
When I began for the first time to attempt its Solution, I had
nothing else to guide me but the common Kules of Combinations, such
as they had been delivered by Dr. Wallis and others; which when I
endeavoured to apply, I was surprized to find that my Calculation
swelled by degrees to an intolerable Bulk : For this reason I was forced
to turn my Views another way, and to try whether the Solution I
was seeking for might not be deduced from some easier considerations;
whereupon I happily fell upon the Method I have been mentioning,
which as it led me to a very great Simplicity in the Solution, so I
look upon it to be an Improvement made to the Method of Com-
binations.
The problem has attracted much attention; we shall find it
discussed by the following writers : Mallet, Acta Helvetica, 1772 ;
Euler, Opuscula Analytica, Vol. ii. 1785; Laplace, Memoir es..,
2Mr clivers Savans', 1774, Theorie... cles Proh. page 191 ; Trembley,
Memoires de V Acad... Berlin, 1794, 1795.
We shall recur to the problem when we are giving an account
of Euler's writings on our subject.
292. Problem XL. is as follows :
To find in how many Trials it will be probable that A with a Die
of any given number of Faces shall throw any proposed number of
them.
1
Take the formula given in Art. 291, suppose it equal to ^ ,
and seek for the value of n. There is no method for solving
this equation exactly, so De Moivre adopts an approximation.
He supposes that ^ + 1, ^, ^ — 1, j9 — 2, are in Geometrical
DE MOIYRE. 161
Progression, which supposition he says "will very little err from
the truth, especially if the proportion of ^ to 1, be not very small."
Put r for ; thus the equation becomes
P
1 / 1 /(/- 1) 1 /(/- 1 ) (/- 2) 2_ . ^1.
1?^""^ 1.2 r''' \S r''''^'" 2'
that is ^1__)=2.
Hence -■ = 1 _ f _ ] ,
and then n may be found by logarithms.
De Moivre says in his Preface respecting this problem,
The 40th Problem is the reverse of the preceding; It contains a
very remarkable Method of Solution, the Artifice of which consists
in changing an Arithmetic Progression of Numbers into a Geometric
one; this being always to be done when the Numbers are large, and
their Intervals small. I freely acknowledge that I have been indebted
long ago for this useful Idea, to my much respected Friend, That Ex-
cellent Mathematician Dr. Halley, Secretary to the Royal Society,
whom I have seen practise the thing on another occasion: For this
and other Instructive Notions readily imparted to me, during an un-
interrupted Friendship of five and Twenty years, I return him my
very hearty Thanks.
Laplace also notices this method of approximation in solving
the problem, and he compares its result with that furnished by his
own method ; see Theorie ... des Proh. pages 198 — 200.
293. Problem XLI. is as follows :
Supposing a regular Prism having a Faces marked i, h Faces
marked ii, c Faces marked iii,* d Faces marked iv, kc. what is the
Probability that in a certain number of throws n, some of the Faces
marked i will be thrown, as also some of the Faces marked ii ?
This is an extension of Problem xxxix ; it was not in the first
edition of the Doctrine of Chances.
Let a + h ■{- c -{■ d + ...=s\ then the Probability required
will be
1 [," _ {(, _ „). + (, _ j)«j + {s-a- in
11
162: BE MOIVRE.
If it be required that some of the Faces marked I, some of
the Faces marked ii, and some of the Faces marked ill be
thrown, the ProbabiUty required will be
-f (s-a-hy+ {s-h-cy+{s-c-ay
— {s — a — h — cy
And so on if other Faces are required to be thrown.
De Moivre intimates that these results follow easily from the
method adopted in Problem xxxix.
294. Problem XLII. first appeared in the second edition ;
it is not important.
Problem XLiil. is as follows :
Any number of Chances being given, to find the Probability of their
being produced in a given order, without any limitation of the number
of times in which they are to be produced.
It may be remarked that, for an approximation, De Moivre
proposes to replace several numbers representing chances by a
common mean value ; it is however not easy to believe that the
result would be very trustworthy. This problem was not in the
first edition.
295. Problems XLiv. and XLV. relate to what we have called
Waldegrave's Problem ; see Art. 211.
In De Moivre's first edition, the problem occupies pages 77 — 102.
De Moivre says in his preface that he had received the solution
by Nicolas Bernoulli before his own was published ; and that both
solutions were printed in the PhilosojyJiical Transactions, No. 341.
De Moivre's solution consists of a very full and clear discussion
of the problem when there are three players, and also when there
are four players ; and he gives a little aid to the solution of the
general problem. The last page is devoted to an explanation of a
method of solving the problem which Brook Taylor communicated
to De Moivre.
In De Moivre's third edition the problem occupies pages 132 — 159.
The matter given in the first edition is here reproduced, omitting,
DE MOIVRE. 163
however, some details which the reader might be expected to fill
up for himself, and also the method of Brook Taylor. On the
other hand, the last nine pages of the discussion in the third
edition were not in the first edition ; these consist of explanations
and investigations with the view of enabling a reader to determine
numerical results for any number of players, supposing that at
any stage it is required to stop the play and divide the money
deposited equitably. This part of the problem is peculiar to
De Moivre.
The discussions which De Moivre gives of the particular
cases of three players and four players are very easy and satis-
factory ; but as a general solution his method seems inferior to
that of Nicolas Bernoulli. We may remark that the investigation
for three players given by De Moivre will enable the student to
discover how Montmort obtained the results which he gives with-
out demonstration for three players ; see Art. 209. De Moivre
determines a pla^^er's expectation by finding first the advantage
resulting from his chance of winning the whole sum deposited, and
then his disadvantage arising from the contributions which he
may have had to make himself to the whole sum deposited ; the
expectation is obtained by subtracting the second result from the
first. Montmort determined the expectation by finding, first the
advantage of the player arising from his chance of winning the
deposits of the other two players, and then the disadvantage
arising from the chance which the other two players have of
winning his deposits ; the expectation is obtained by subtracting
the second result from the first.
The problem will come before us again as solved by Laplace.
296. Problem XLVI. is on the game of Hajzard; there is no
description of the game here, but there is one given by Montmort
on his page 177 ; and from this description, De Moivre's solution
can be understood : his results agree with Montmort's. Pro-
blem XLVII. is also on Hazard ; it relates to a point in the game
which is not noticed by Montmort, and it is only from De Moivre's
investigation itself that we can discover wliat the problem is,
which he is considering. With respect to this problem, De Moivre
says, page 165,
11—2
164< DE MOIVRE.
After I had solved the foregoing Problem, which is about 12 years
ago, I spoke of my Solution to Mr. Henry Stuart Stevens^ but with-
out communicating to him the manner of it: As he is a Gentleman
who, besides other uncommon Qualifications, has a particular Sagacity
in reducing intricate Questions to simple ones, he brought me, a few
days after, his Investigation of the Conclusion set down in my third
Corollary; and as I have had occasion to cite him before, in another
Work, so I here renew with pleasure the Expression of the Esteem
which I have for his extraordinary Talents :
Then follows the investigation due to Stevens. The above
passage occurs for the first time in the second edition, page 140 ;
the name however is there spelt Stephens : see also Art. 270.
Problem XLVII. is not in the first edition ; on the other hand,
a table of numerical values of chances at Hazard, without ac-
companying explanations, is given on pages V7% 175 of the first
edition, which is not reproduced in the other editions.
297. Problems XLVIII. and XLix. relate to the game of Raffling.
If three dice are thrown, some throws will present triplets, some
doublets, and some neither triplets nor doublets; in the game
of Raffles only those throws count which present triplets or
doublets. The game was discussed by Montmort in his
pages 207 — 212 ; but he is not so elaborate as De Moivre. Both
writers give a numerical table of chances, which De Moivre says was
drawn up by Francis Eobartes, twenty years before the publica-
tion of Montmort's work ; see Miscellanea Analytica, page 224.
Problem XLIX. was not in De Moivre's first edition, and
Problem XLVIII. was not so fully treated as in the other edi-
tions.
298. Problem L. is entitled Of Whisk; it occupies pages 172 — 179.
This is the game now called Whist. De Moivre determines the
chances of various distributions of the Honouy^s in the game. Thus,
for example, he says that the ^probability that there are no Honours
on either ride is ^c ' ^^^ of course means that the Honours
are equally divided. The result would be obtained by considering
two cases, namely, 1st, that in which the card turned up is an
DE MOIVRE. 165
Honour, and 2nd, that in which the card turned up is not an
Honour. Thus we should have for the required probability
_4 8 25 . 26 . 25 9^ 4^ 25 . 24 . 26 . 25 ^
13 ■ T * 51750 . 49 "*" 13 * 1 . 2 ' 51 . 50 . 49 . 48 ^
and this will be found equal to -^^ .
loob
De Moivi'e has two Corollaries, which form the chief part of
his investigation respecting Whist.
The first begins thus :
From what we have said, it will not be difficult to solve this Case
at Whisk; viz. which side has the best, of those who have viii of
the Game, or of those who at the same time have ix?
In order to which it will be necessary to premise the following
Principle.
1° That there is but 1 Chance in 8192 to get vii. by Triks.
2° That there are 13 Chances in 8192 to get vi.
3" That there are 78 Chances in 8192 to get v.
4" That there are 286 Chances in 8192 to get iv.
5° That there are 715 Chances in 8192 to get iii.
6° That there are 1287 Chances in 8192 to get n.
7" That there are 1716 Chances in 8192 to get i.
All this will appear evident to those who can raise the Binomial
a + b to its thirteenth power.
But it must carefully be observed that the foregoing Chances ex-
press the Probability of getting so many Points by Triks, and neither
more nor less.
De Moivre states his conclusion thus :
From whence it follows that without considering whether the viii
are Dealers or Eldest, there is one time with another the Odds of
somewhat less than 7 to 5; and very nearly that of 25 to 18.
The second Corollary contains tables of the number of chances
for any assigned number of Trumps in any hand. De Moivre says,
By the help of these Tables several useful Questions may be re-
solved; as 1°. If it is asked, what is the Probability that the Dealer
has precisely iii Trumps, besides the Trump Card ] The Answer,
. rp . . 4662
by Tab. i. is .^^^^ ; ...
158y5
166 DE MOIVRE.
In tlie first edition there was only a brief notice of Whist,
occupying scarcely more than a page.
299. Problems LI. to LV. are on Piquet. The game is not
described, but there is no difficulty in understanding the problems,
which are easy examples of combinations. The following Remark
occurs on page 186 ; it was not in the first edition :
It may easily be perceived from tlie Solution of the preceding
Problem, that the number of variations which there are in twelve
Cards make it next to impossible to calculate some of the Probabili-
ties relating to Piquet, such as that which results from the priority
of Hand, or the Probabilities of a Pic, Kepic or Lurch j however not-
withstanding that difficulty, one may from observations often repeated,
nearly estimate what those Probabilities are in themselves, as will be
proved in its place when we come to treat of the reasonable conjec-
tures which may be deduced from Experiments; for which reason I
shall set down some Observations of a Gentleman who has a very great
degree of Skill and Experience in that Game, after which I shall make
an application of them.
The discussion of Piquet was briefer in the first than in the
followinof editions. .
"O
•300. We will give the enunciation of Problem LVI. and the
beginning of the solution.
Problem LVI. Of Saving Clauses.
A has 2 Chances to beat B^ and B has 1 chance to beat A ; but
there is one Chance which intitlcs them both to withdraw their own
Stake, which we suppose equal to s j to find the Gain of A.
Solution.
This Question tho' easy in itself, yet is brought in to caution Be-
ginners against a Mistake which they might commit by imagining
that the Case, which intitles each Man to recover his own Stake, needs
not be regarded, and that it is the same thing as if it did not exist.
This I mention so much more readily, that some people who have
pretended gi-eat skill in these Speculations of Chance have themselves
fallen into that error.
DE MOIVRE. 1G7
This problem was not in the first edition. The gain of A
. 1
IS 75.
301. Problem LVir, which was not in the first edition, is as
follows :
A and B playing together deposit £s apiece ; A lias 2 Chances to
win s, and B 1 Chance to win 5, whereupon A tells B that he will
play with him. upon an equality of Chance, if he B will set him 2s to I5,
to which B assents : to find whether A has any advantage or disad-
vantage by that Bargain.
In the first case ^'s expectation is - s, and in the second,
o
it is ^ 5 ; so that he gains ^ s by the bargain.
802. We now arrive at one of the most important parts of
De Moivre's work, namely, that which relates to the Duration of
Play ; we will first give a full account of what is contained in the
third edition of the Doctrine of Chances, and afterwards state how
much of this was added to the investigations originally published
in the De Mensura Sortis.
De Moivre himself regarded his labours on this subject with
the satisfaction which they justly merited ; he says in his
Preface,
When I first began to attempt the general Solution of the Problem
concerning the Duration of Play, there was nothing extant that could
give me any light into that Subject; for altho' Mr de Monmort^ in the
first Edition of his Book, gives the Solution of this Problem, as limited
to three Stakes to be won or lost, and farther limited by the Suppo-
sition of an Equality of Skill between the Adventurers; yet he having
given no Demonstration of his Solution, and the Demonstration when
discovered being of very little use towards obtaining the general Solu-
tion of the Problem, I was forced to try what my own Enquiry would
lead me to, which having been attended with Success, the result of
what I found was afterwards published in my Specimen before men-
tioned.
The Specimen is the Essay De Mensura Sortis.
168 DE MOIVRE.
803. The general problem relating to the Duration of Play
may be thus enunciated : suppose A to have m counters, and B
to have n counters ; let their chances of winning in a single game
be as a to Z> ; the loser in each game is to give a counter to his
adversary : required the probability tliat when or before a certain
number of games has been played, one of the players will have won
all the counters of his adversary. It will be seen that the words
in italics constitute the advance whi'ch this problem makes beyond
the more simple one discussed in Art. 107.
De Moivre's Problems LVIII. and Lix. amount to solving the
problem of the Duration of Play for the case in which m and n
are equal.
After discussing some cases in which n = 2 or 3, De Moivi*e
lays down a General Rule, thus :
A General Rule for determining what Probability there is that
the Play shall not be determined in a given number of Games.
Let 71 be the number of Pieces of each Gamester. Let also n-hd
be the number of Games given; raise a + h to the Power n, then cut off
the two extream Terms, and multiply the remainder by aa + 2ab + hb :
then cut off again the two Extreams, and multiply again the remaiiM^er
by aa + 2ab + hb, still rejecting the two Extreams; and so on, makiog
as many Multiplications as there are Units in ^d ; make the last Pro-
duct the Numerator of a Fraction whose Denominator let be (a + b)"'^'\
and that Fraction will express tlie Probalnlity required, ; still ob-
serving that if d be an odd number, you wj-ite d—1 in its room.
For an example, De Moivre supposes n = 4<, d= 6.
Raise a+h to the fourth power, and reject the extremes ; thus
we have 4<a^b + MV + ^a¥.
Multiply by a^ + 2ab + V^, and reject the extremes ; thus we
have l^a'h' + 2^a%' + Ua^h\
Multiply by <^ + 2ah + W, and reject the extremes ; thus we
have 48a'Z>' + Q%a%' + ^Mh\
Multiply by a^+2«& + Z>^ and reject the extremes; thus we
have lUa%' + 232a'Z>'^ + l(j^a'h\
Thus the probability that the Play will not be ended in
10 games is
DE MOIVRE. 169
,10
(a + by
De Moivre leaves his readers to convince themselves of the
accuracy of his rule ; and this is not difficult.
De Moivre suggests that the work of multiplication may be
abbreviated by omitting the a and h, and restoring them at the
end ; this is what we now call the method of detached coefficients.
304. The terms which are rejected in the process of the
preceding Article will furnish an expression for the probability
that the play ivill be ended in an assigned number of games.
Thus if ?i = 4 and d = ^, this probability will be found to be
a' + b' ^a'b + ^ab' l^a%'' -\-\^a%' 48a^6^ + 48a^^>^
{a-^by^ {a + bf "^ {a + hf "^ . {a-\-bf' *
Now here we arrive at one of De Moi\T:e's important results ;
he gives, luithout demonstj^ation, general formulae for determining
those numerical coefficients which in the above example have the
values 4, 14, 48. De Moivre's formulae amount to two laws, one
connecting each coefficient with its predecessors, and one giving
the value of each coefficient separately. We can make the laws
most intelligible by demonstrating them. We start from a result
given by Laplace. He shews, Theorie . . . des Prob., page 229,
that the chance of A for winning precisely at the (n + 2x)*'* game
is the coefficient of T"^^ in the expansion of
( i + ^{i--^abf) r M - V(l - -^abt') r '
I 2 l^-j 2 J
where it is supposed that a + b = 1.
Now the denominator of the above expression is known to be
equal to
^ 1.2 [3 -t ...
where c = abt^ ; see Differential Calculus, Chapter ix.
170 . DE MOIVRE.
We can tlius obtain by the ordinary doctrine of Series, a linear
relation between the coefficient of f^^"" and the coefficients of the
preceding powers of t, namely, r'^^^ ^""^^"^ ... This is De
Moivre's first law; see his page 198.
Again ; we may wiite the above fraction in the form
JV" (1 + c"iY"^") '
, 1 + ^(1 _ 4^ahe)
where N = --^ ;
2
and then by expanding, we obtain
The coefficient of f'' in N'" is known to be
^j^n {n-{-.x-\-l) {n -{-x + 2) ... {n ■\- 2x — 1) ^
' X '
see Differential Calculus, Chapter ix.
Similarly we get the coefficient of f^'' in N-'\ of i'^'*" in
iV"^**, and so on.
Thus we obtain the coefficient of f'"^^ in the expansion of the
original expression.
This is De Moivre's second law ; see his page 199.
805. De Moivre's Problems LX. LXi. LXii. are simple ex-
amples formed on Problems LVIII. and Lix. They are thus
enunciated :
LX. Supposing A and B to play together till such time as four
Stakes are won or lost on either side ; what must be their proportion
of Skill, otherwise what must be their proportion of Chances for win-
ning any one Game assigned, to make it as probable that the Play will
be ended in four Games as not?
LXI. Supposing that A and B play till such time as four Stakes
are won or lost : What must be their proportion of Skill to make it a
Wager of three to one, that the Play will be ended in four Games %
LXII. Su2:>posing that A and B play till such time as four Stakes
are won or lost ; What must be their proportion of Skill to make it an
equal Wager that the Play will be ended in six Games ?
DE MOIVRE. 171
806. Problems LXiii. and LXiv. amount to the general enun-
ciation we have given in Art. 303 ; so that the restriction that
m and n are equal which was imposed in Problems LVIII. and
Lix. is now removed. As before De Moivre states, tuithout de-
monstration, two general laws, which we will now give.
Laplace shews, T]ieorie...des Prob. page 228, that the chance
of A for winning precisely at the {n + 2u?)*'^ game is the coefficient
of f^'^'^ in the expansion of
f 1 + V(l - 4c) ) " f 1 - V(l - 4c) 1 "^
r-{
m
1 9 9
j 1 + ^(1 _ 4c) r"^'^ ( 1 - v(i - 4c) I '"^'* •
Let s) — ^^ denoted by h \ then the fractional expression
which multiplies a"^*" becomes by expansion, and striking out 2h
from numerator and denominator,
ay^-' m{m-V){m-2) /1\'""%2 w(772-l)(w-2)(m-3)(m-4) [ly^,
. ^lY"--^"-^ , (m+^2)(m+^^-l)(m+?i-2) /l^""^"-",, ,
(^+^)(2J + g %) ^^+-
We have to arrange the denominator according to powers of
t, and to shew that it is equal to
where 7 = m + n — 2.
Now, as in Art. 30-A, we have
{
1 + V(l - 4c) I" ^ 1 1 - V (l - 4c) r
= l_,e + '-(p^8) ^,_ r(,-4)(r-o) ^3_^ __.
and the left-hand member is equivalent to
172 DE MOIVRE.
Differentiate both sides with respect to t observing that
Mh
——-=:^aot. inns,
dt
^ 2 { r - '-^^ aU + ' ^' -f ^^ - ^^ (abtr -...
Now put r = Z + 3 ; and we obtain the required result.
Thus a linear relation can be obtained between the coefficients
of successive powers of t.
This is De Moivre's first law ; see his page 205.
1 _l_ a/(1 — 4c)
Again ; let iV= ^ ~ ; then the original expression
becomes
'\Jni+n /-| m+n 7vr-2wt-2n\
= d'fN-'' (1 - c'"iV^"'"0 (1 - c"*^"^-'"^-'")"'-
We may now proceed as in the latter part of Art. 304, to de-
termine the coefficient of r"*"^"".
The result will coincide with De Moivre's second law ; see his
page 207.
307. Problem LXV. is a particular case of the problem of
Duration of Play ; m is now supposed infinite : in other words
A has unlimited cajntal and we require his chance of ruining B in
an assigned number of games.
De Moivre solves this problem in two ways. We will here
give his first solution with the first of the two examples which ac-
company it.
Solution.
Supposing n to be the number of Stakes which A is to win of B^
and n + d the number of Games ; let on- 6 be raised to the Power whose
Index is 7i + d; then if d be an odd number, take so many Terms of
that Power as there are Units in — ^ — j take also so many of the
Terms next following as have been taken already, but prefix to them
in an inverted oi^der, the Coefficients of the preceding Terms. But if
d be an even number, take so many Terms of the said Power as there
DE MOIVRE. 173
are Units in-d+l; then take as many of tlie Terms next following
as there are Units in ^ d, and prefix to them in an inverted order the
Coefiicients of the preceding Terms, omitting the last of them; and
those Terms taken all together will compose the Numerator of a Frac-
tion expressing the Probability required, the Denominator of which
Fraction ought to be {a + S)"^**.
Example I.
Supposing the number of Stakes, which A is to win, to be Three,
and the given number of Games to be Ten; let a+h be raised to the
tenth power, viz. a'' + lOa'h + ioa'bh + UOa' b' + 210a'b' + 252a'b'
+ 210a'' 6' + 120a' 6' + 45aa&' + lOab' + b'". Then, by reason that n^3,
and w + 6^=10, it follows that d is =7, and — ^r— = 4. Wherefore let
Z
the Four first Terms of the said Power be taken, viz. a^° + lOa^b
+ 4:5a^bb + 120a''b^, and let the four Terms next following be taken
likewise without regard to their Coefficients, then prefix to them in an
inverted order, the Coefficients of the preceding Terms : thus the four
Terms following with their new Coefficients will be 120a^b^ + 4:5a^b^
+ 10a^b^+la^b^. Then the Probability which ^ has of winning three
Stakes of £ in ten Games or sooner, will be expressed by the following
Fraction
a'o ^ iQ^,9 J ^ 45^8^5 ^ UOa'b^ + UOa'b' + iSa'b' + lOa'b' + a'b'
' {a + by '
which in the Case of an Equality of Skill between A and B will be
A w 352 11
reducea to r— --r- or ^r^ .
1024 32
808. In De Moivre's solution there is no difficulty in seeing
the origin of his fii'st set of terms, but that of the second set of
terms is not so immediately obvious. We will take his example,
and account for the last four terms.
The last term is a^b\ There is only one way in which ^'s
capital may be exhausted while A wins only three games ; namely,
A must win the first three games.
The next term is 10a'b\ There are ten ways in which B's
capital may be exhausted while A wins only four games. For let
there be ten places ; put h in any one of the first three places,
17-i BE MOIVKE.
and fill up the remaining places with the letters aaaahlhhh in this
order ;- or put a in any one of the last seven places, and fill up the
remaining places with the letters aaahbhhhh in this order ; we thus
obtain the ten admissible cases.
The next term is 4t5a%^. There are forty -five ways in which
i?'s capital may be exhausted while A wins only five games.
For let there be ten places. Take any two of the first three
places and put h in each, and fill up the remaining places with
the letters aaaaabhh in this order. Or take any two of the
last seven places and put a in each, and fill up the remaining
places with the letters aaahhhhh in this order. Or put h in any
one of the first three places and a in any one of the last seven ;
and fill up the remaining places with the letters aaaabhhh in this
order. On the whole we shall obtain a number equal to the num-
ber of combinations of 10 things taken 2 at a time. The following
is the general result : suppose we have to arrange r letters a and
s letters h, so that in each arrangement there shall be n more
of the letters a than of the letters h before we have gone through
the arrangement ; then if r is less than s + n the number of
different arrangements is the same as the number of combina-
tions of T -\-s things taken r — w at a time. For example, let
r = 6, s = 4, w = 3 ; then the number of different arrangements is
10 X 9 X 8 ,, , . ^^_
— — rr . that IS 120.
1x2x3
The result which we have here noticed was obtained by Mont-
mort, but in a very unsatisfactory manner : see Art. 182.
De Moivre's first solution of his Problem LXV. is based on the
same principles as Montmort's solution of the general problem
of the Duration of Play.
809. De Moivre's second solution of his Problem LXV. con-
sists of a formula which he gives without demonstration. Let us
return to the expression in Ai't. 306, and suppose m infinite. Then
the chance of A for winning precisely at the (n + 2ic)*'' game is
the coefficient of f^^"" in the expansion of
(l + V(i-4c)
n >
DE MOIVRE, 175
that IS a -^ — \ — ^^ a^ ;
[x '
see Art.. 804.
The chance of A for winning at or he/ore the (n -f 2^)*^' game
is therefore
a- I l+nah + '-^^-^^^ a'lf -\- ...
niii^-x + 1) (?i + a? + 2) ... {7i^2x-l) ,-,,
+ — ^ ^^ ^ ^^ -' ah
\x
Laplace, T]ieorie...des Proh., page 235.
310. De Moivre says with respect to his Problem LXV,
In the first attempt that I had ever made towards solving tlie
general Problem of the Duration of Play, which was in the year 1708,
I began with the Solution of this lxv^^ Problem, well knowing that
it might be a Foundation for what I farther wanted, since which time,
by a due repetition of it, I solved the main Problem : but as I found
afterwards a nearer way to it, I barely published in my first Essay on
those mattei'S, what seemed to me most simple and elegant, still pre-
serving this Problem by me in order to be published when I should
think it proper.
De Moivre goes on to speak of the investigations of Montmort
and Nicolas Bernoulli, in words which we have akeady quoted ; see
Art. 181.
311. Dr L. Oettinger on pages 187, 188 of his work entitled
Die Wahrscheinlichkeits-Rechnung, Berlin, 1852, objects to some
of the results which are obtained by De Moivre and Laplace.
Dr Oettinger seems to intimate that in the formula, which we
have given at the end of Art. 309, Laplace has omitted to lay
down the condition that A has an unlimited capital ; but Laplace
has distinctly introduced this condition on his page 234.
Again, speaking of De Moivre's solution of his Problem LXiv.
Dr Oettinger says, Er erhiilt das namliche unhaltbare Resultat,
welches Laplace nach ihm aufstellte.
But there is no foundation for this remark ; De Moivre and
176 DE MOIVRE.
Laplace are correct. The misapprehension may have arisen from
reading only a part of De Moivre's page 205, and so assuming a
law of a series to hold universally, which he distinctly says breaks
off after a certain number of terms.
The just reputation of Dr Oettinger renders it necessary for me
to notice his criticisms, and to record my dissent from them.
812. De Moivre's Problems Lxvi. and LXVii. are easy deduc-
tions from his preceding results ; they are thus enunciated :
LXVI. To find what Probability there is that in a given number
of Games A may be a winner of a certain number q of Stakes, and at
some other time B may likewise be winner of the number p of Stakes,
so that both circumstances may happen.
LXVII. To find what Probability there is, that in a given number
of Games A may win the number q of Stakes ; with this farther con-
dition, that £ during that whole number of Games may never have
been winner of the number j^ of Stakes.
813. De Moivre now proceeds to express his results relating
to the Duration of Play in another form. He says, page 215,
The Pules hitherto given for the Solution of Problems relating to
the Duration of Play are easily practicable, if the number of Games
given is but small ; but if that number is large, the work will be very
tedious, and sometimes swell to that degree as to be in some manner
impracticable : to remedy which inconveniency, I shall here give an
Extract of a paper by me produced before the Poyal Society, wherein
was contained a Method of solving very expeditiously the chief Pro-
blems relating to that matter, by the help of a Table of Sines, of which
I had before given a hint in the first Edition of my Doctrine of Chances,
pag. 149, and 150.
The paper produced before the Poyal Society does not appear
to have been published in the Philosophical Transactions; pro-
bably we have the substance of it in the Docty^ine of Chances.
De Moivre proceeds according to the announcement in the
above extract, to express his results relating to the Duration of
Play by the help of Trigonometrical Tables; in Problem LXVIII. he
supposes the players to have equal skill, and in Problem LXix. he
supposes them to have unequal skill.
DE MOIYRE. 177
The demonstrations of the formulae are to be found in the Mis-
cellanea Analytica, pages 76 — 83, and in the Doctrine of Chances,
pages 230 — 234. De Moivre supposes the players to start with the
same number of counters ; but he says on page 83 of the Miscel-
lanea Analytica, that solutions similar but somewhat more complex
could be given for the case in which the original numbers of
counters were different. This has been effected by Laplace in his
discussion of the whole problem.
314. De Moivre's own demonstrations depend on his doctrine
of Recurring Series ; by this doctrine De Moivre could effect what
we should now call the integration of a linear equation in Finite
Differences : the equation in this case is that furnished by the first
of the two laws which we have explained in Arts. 304, 306. Cer-
tain trigonometrical formulae are also required ; see Miscellanea
Analytica, page 78. One of these, De Moivre says, constat ex
-^quationibus ad circulum vulgo notis ; the following is the pro-
perty : in elementary works on Trigonometry we have an expan-
sion of cos 7x6 in descending powers of cos 6 ; now cos nO vanishes
when nO is any odd multiple of -^ , and therefore the equivalent ex-
pansion must also vanish. The other formulae which De Moivre
uses are in fact deductions from the general theorem which is
called De Moivre's property of the Circle; they are as follows ;
TT
let a = ^7- , then we have
2?i
1 = 2""^ sin a sin 3a sin 5a ... sin (2/ia — a) ;
also if n be even we have
cos n(^ = 2""^ [sin^ a — sin^ </>} {sin^ 3a — sin^ 0} . . .
. . . { sin^ {n — 3) a — sin^ <^} { sin^ (ti — 1) a — sin^ 0} :
see Plane Trigonometry, Chap, xxiii.
De Moivre uses the first of these formulae ; and also a formula
which may be deduced from the second by differentiating with
respect to (f), and after differentiation putting </> equal to a, or
3a, or 5a, ...
315. De Moivre applies his results respecting the Duration
12
178 DE MOIVRE.
of Play to test the value of an approximation proposed by Mont-
mort ; we have already referred to this point in Art. 184.
316. It remains to trace the history of De Moivre's investi-
gations on this subject.
The memoir De Mensura Sortis contains the following Pro-
blems out of those which appear in the Doctrine of Chances,
LVIII, LX, LXII, LXIII, the first solution of LXV, LXVI. The first
edition of the Doctrine of Chances contains all that the third does,
except the Problems LXVIII. and LXix ; these were added in the
second edition. As we proceed with our history we shall find
that the subject engaged the attention of Lagrange and Laplace,
the latter of whom has embodied the researches of his prede-
cessors in the Theorie...des Proh. pages 225 — 238.
317. With one slight exception noticed in Art. 322, the re-
mainder of the Doctrine of Chances was not in the first edition but
was added in the second edition.
318. The pages 220 — 229 of the Doctrine of Chances, form
a digression on a subject, which is one of De Moivre's most
valuable contributions to mathematics, namely that of Recurring
Series. He says, page 220,
The E-eader may have perceived that the Sohition of several Pro-
blems relating to Chance depends upon the Summation of Series; I
have, as occasion has offered, given the Method of summing them up;
but as there are others that may occur, I think it necessary to give
a summary Yiew of what is most requisite to be known in this matter;
desiring the Reader to excuse me, if I do not give the Demonstrations,
which would swell this Tract too much; especially considering that I
have already given them in my Miscellanea Analytica.
319. These pages of the Doctrine of Chances will not present
any difficulty to a student who is acquainted with the subject of
Recurring Series, as it is now explained in works on Algebra ;
De Moivre however gives some propositions which are not usually
reproduced in the present day.
320. One theorem may be noticed which is enunciated by
De Moivre, on his page 224, and also on page 167 of the Miscellanea
Analytica.
DE MOIYUE. 179
The general term of the expansion of (1 — r)~^ in powers of
r is ^-^ '" r^ ; the sum of the first n terms of
the expansion is equivalent to the following expression
^ ^ 1.2 ^ ^ n—\ i^J— 1
(l-r)"
This may be easily shewn to be true when n= 1, and then,
by induction, it may be shewn to be generally true. For
r«+i = r"|l-(l-r)},
so that
r-^^ + (^ + 1) r"^^ (1 - r) + ^'' "^ ^ ^l "^ ^^ r""^^ (1 _ r)^ + . . .
= r« |l _ (1 _,.)} +(«+!) r» (1 - r) |l - (1 - r)}
n{n-\-V\ \n + p— 2
= ^" + ^^" (1 -r) + ""^V ^'" (1 -0'+ • • • + ^ Ti 1 ''" (1 - ^')'
^ ^ l.z ^ ^ ?i — Iw — 1 ^
P
^ ,.« (1 _ ^)p.
\n\j) — 1
Thus the additional term obtained by changing oi into n + 1
\n -\-p— 1
is I — , r- r" as it should be ; so that if De Moivre's theorem is
\np—\. '
true for any value of ?2, it is true when n is changed into ii-\-l.
321. Another theorem may be noticed ; it is enunciated by
De Moivre on his page 229. Having given the scales of relation
of two Recurring Series, it is required to find the scale of relation
of the Series arising from the product of corresponding terms.
For example, let w^^r" be the general term in the expansion
according to powers of r of a proper Algebraical fraction of which
the denominator is 1 —fr 4- gr'^ ; and let t'„a" be the general term
in the expansion according to powers of a of a proper Algebraical
12—2
180 I>E MOIVRE.
fraction of which the denominator is 1 - ma + pa^. We have
to find the scale of relation of the Series of which the general
term is u^Vn {ro)'\
We know by the ordinary theory of decomposing Recurring
Series into Geometrical Progressions that
where p^ and p^ are the reciprocals of the roots of the equation
and a^ and a^ are the reciprocals of the roots of the equation
1 —ina -\-pa^ = ;
and R^, R^, A^, A^ are certain constants.
Thus u^v^ = R^A^ (p/^X + ^1^2 {pi^:T
this shews that the required scale of relation will involve four
terms besides unity. The four quantities p^a^, p^a^, p^a^, p^7^ will
be the reciprocals of the roots of the equation in z which is found
by eliminating r and a from
1 —fr + gr"^ = 0, 1 — ma + pa^ = 0, ra — z\
this equation therefore is
1 -fmz + {pP + gm^ — 2^p) z^ —fgmjpz^ -^-g^fz^ — 0.
Thus we have determined the required scale of relation ; for
the denominator of the fraction which by expansion produces
w„t;„ (ra)" as its general term will be
1 —fmra + {pf^+gm^ — ^gjp) ^V — fgmj^r^d ■\- g^j^r^a^.
De Moivre adds, page 229,
But it is very observable, that if one of the differential Scales be the
Binomial \ — a raised to any Power, it will be sufficient to raise the other
differential Scale to that Power, only substituting ar for ?•, or leaving
the Powers of r as they are, if a be restrained to Unity; and that
Power of the other differential Scale will constitute the differential
Scale required.
DE MOIVEE. 181
This is very easily demonstrated. For suppose that one scale
of relation is (1 — of ; then by forming the ]3roduct of the cor-
responding terms of the two Recurring Series, we obtain for the
general term
=== a" {Rj>: + E,p: + B,p: +...]
\n
Tliis shews that the general term will be the coefficient of
r" in the expansion of
(l-rapy {1-rap;)' (1 - rap^y '" '
and by bringing these fractions to a common denominator, we
obtain De Moivre's result.
822. De Moivre applies his theory of Recurring Series to
demonstrate his results relating to the Duration of Play, as we
have already intimated in Art. 313 ; and to illustrate still further
the use of the theory he takes two other problems respecting j)lay.
These problems are thus enunciated :
Lxx. M and N, whose proportion of Chances to win one Game
are respectively as a to h, resolve to play together till one or the other
has lost 4 Stakes: two Standers by, j5 and S, concern themselves in the
Play, R takes the side of M, and S of N, and agree betwixt them, that R
shall set to S, the sum L to the sum G on the first Game, 2L to '2G on
the second, 3Z to ?>G on the third, 4Z to AG on the fourth, and in case
the Play be not then concluded, 5L to 5G on the fifth, and so increasing
perpetually in Arithmetic Progression the Sums which they are to set
to one another, as long as M and iV play; yet with this farther con-
dition, that the Sums, set down by them R and aS', shall at the end of
each Game be taken up by the Winner, and not left upon the Table to
be taken up at once upon the Conclusion of the Play: it is demanded
how the Gain of R is to be estimated before the Play begins.
Lxxi. If M and iV, whose number of Chances to win one Game
are respectively as a to h, play together till four Stakes are won or lost
on either side ; and that at the same time, R and S whose number of
Chances to win one Game are respectively as c to d, play also together
till five Stakes are won or lost on either side ; what is the Probability
that the Play between M and iV will be ended in fewer Games, than the
Play between R and S.
182 DE MOIVKE.
The particular case of Problem LXXI, in which a = h, and
c = d, was given in the first edition of the Doctrine of Chances,
13age 152.
823. Problems LXXII. and LXXIII. are important ; it will be
sufficient to enunciate the latter.
A and B playing together, and having a different number of Chances
to win one Game, which number of Chances I suppose to be respectively
as a to h, engage themselves to a Sj)ectator S, that after a certain, number
of Games is over, A shall give him as many Pieces as he wins Games,
over and above ^ n, and B as many as he wins Games, over and above
the number n ; to find the Expectation of S.
Problem LXXII. is a particular case of Problem LXXIII. obtained
by supposing a and h to be equal
These two problems first appeared in the Miscellanea Ana-
lytica, pages 99 — 101. We there find the following notice respect-
ing Problem LXXII :
Cum aliquando labente Anno 1721, Yir Clarissimus Alex. Cuming
Eq. Au. Pegi?e Societatis Socius, quaestionem infra subjectam mihi
proposuisset, solutionem problematis ei postero die tradideram.
After giving the solution De Moivre proceeds to Problem LXXIII.
which he thus introduces :
Eodem procedendi modo, solutum fuerat Problema sequens ab eodem
CI. viro etiam propositum, ejusdem generis ac superius sed multo latins
patens.
We will give a solution of Problem LXXIII ; De Moivre in the
Doctrine of Chances merely states the result.
Let n = c {a-\-h) ', consider the expectation of 8 so far as it
depends on A. The chance that A will win all the games is
a"
ia + hy
- , and in this case he gives ch to S. The chance that A will
.n-lj
win n—1 games is 7 r-r , and in this case he gives cl — l to S.
And so on.
DE MOIVRE. 18.3
Thus we have to sum the series
a%c + ndr-'l {he - 1) + !?L^LdO ^-252 (^c - 2) + . . . ,
the series extending so long as the terms in brackets are positive.
"We have
a%c - noT-'h = a''~'h (ac -n)=- aJ'-'b he ;
thus the first two terms amount to
{n-l)d;'''hhc.
f2, (fi 1^
Now combine this with ^- — -~ a''~%^2 ; we ^et
1.2 > &
(n - 1) a'^-'h' (ac - 7i), that is - (?i - 1) a'^-'h'hc ;
thus the first tJu^ee terms amount to
1.2
This process may be carried on for any number of terms ; and
we shall thus obtain for the sum of he terms
(n-l)(n-2) (n-ic + l) ^,.-^,,...j^_
\oc — l
This may be expressed thus
[n
n I he I ae
a'^'h^'aehc,
which is equivalent to De Moivre's result. The expectation of S
from B will be found to be the same as it is from A.
82-i. When the chances of A and B for winning a single game
are in the proportion of a to & we know, from Bernoulli's theorem,
that there is a high probability that in a large number of trials the
number of games won by A and B respectively will be nearly in
the ratio of a to h. Accordingly De Moivre passes naturally from
his Problem Lxxiii. to investigations which in fact amount to what
we have called the inverse use of Bernoulli's theorem ; see
Art. 125. De Moivre says,
184 I>E MOIVRE.
...I'll take the liberty to say, tliat tliis is tlie hardest Problem that
can be projDosed on the Subject of Chance, for which reason I have re-
served it for the last, but I hope to be forgiven if my Solution is not
fitted to the capacity of all Headers; however I shall derive from it
some Conclusions that may be of use to every body : in order thereto,
I shall here translate a Paper of mine which was printed November 12,
1733, and communicated to some Friends, but never yet made public,
reserving to myself the right of enlarging my own Thoughts, as occasion
shall require.
Then follows a section entitled A Method of a2yproximating the
Sum of the Terms of the Bmomial (a -1- b)" expanded into a Series,
from lohence are deduced some practical Rules to estimate the
Degree of Assent which is to he given to Experiments. This section
occupies pages 243 — 254 of the Doctrine of Chances; we shall find
it convenient to postpone our notice of it until we examine the
Miscellanea Analytica.
325. De Moivre's Problem LXXIV. is thus enunciated :
To find the Probability of throwing a Chance assigned a given
' number of times without intermission, in any given number of Trials.
It was introduced in the second edition, page 243, in the fol-
lowing terms :
When I was just concluding this Work, the following Problem was
mentioned to me as very difficult, for which reason I have considered it
with a particular attention.
De Moivre does not demonstrate his results for this problem ;
we will solve the problem in the modern way.
Let a denote the chance for the event in a single trial, h the
chance against it ; let n be the number of trials, p the nvimber of
times without intermission for which the event is required to hap-
pen. We shall speak of this as a run of p.
Let Un denote the probability of having the required run of ^?
in n trials ; then
«^,i+i = y-n + (1 - '^fn-j^ 'bdF :
for in n + 1 trials we have all the favourable cases which we have
in n trials, and some more, namely those in which after having
failed in n—p trials, we fail in the (n— ^? + l)"' trial, and then
have a run of p.
DE MOIVRE. 185
Let Un=l —Vn, and substitute in the equation ; thus
The Generating Function of v^ will therefore be
where (f) is an arbitrary function of t which involves no powers
of t higher than f.
The Generating Function of w„ is therefore
1 </>© .
1-^ i-t + hd'r''
we may denote this by
t(0
{1-t) {\-t + ha''r')'
where -y^r (t) is an arbitrary function of t which involves no powers
of t higher than f^^. Now it is obvious that w„ = if n be less
than J), also u^ = a^, and Up^_^ = a^ + ha^.
Hence we find that
so that the Generating Function of u„ is
(1 - t) {1 - t -{- haH'"-') '
The coefficient of f in the expansion of this function will
therefore be obtained by expanding
a^ (1 - at)
i-t + loFr^ '
and taking the coefficients of all the powers of t up to that of
f~^ inclusive.
It may be shewn that De Moivre's result agi'ees with this after
allowing for a slight mistake. He says we must divide unity by
\—x — ax^ — a^x^ — ... — a^~'^x^, take n—jp + 1 terms of the series,
multiply by ^^ , and finally put x = j . The mistake here
we ou^lit to read 7- . De Moivre is correct in an example which
18G I)E MOIVRE.
is that in the series 1 - a?- aa?^-aV - ... -a^~V instead of a
a
I
he gives on his page 255. Let j =Cy then according to De Moivre's
rule corrected we have to expand
1 a^ , . 1 — ex c?
a
\ — X
\ — cx
This will be seen to agree with our result remembering that we
took a^h = \.
De Moivre himself on his page 256 practically gives this form
to his result by putting
\ — c^ d^
1 — X — i for 1 —x^cx"^ — c^ x^ — . . . — (f ^x^.
I — ex
De Moivre gives without demonstration on his page 259 an
approximate rule for determining the number of trials which must
be made in order to render the chance of a run of _p equal to
one half.
De Moivre's Problem LXXiv. has been extended by Condorcet,
Essai...de V Analyse... pages 73 — 86, and by Laplace, Theorie...des
Frob. pages 247 — 253.
326. De Moivre's pages 261 — 328 are devoted to Annuities on
Lives; an Appendix finishes the book, occupying pages 329 — 348 :
this also relates principally to annuities, but it contains a few notes
on the subject of Probability. As we have already stated in
Art. 53, we do not profess to give an account of the investigations
relating to mortality and life insurance.
We may remark that there is an Italian translation of De
Moivre's treatise on Annuities, with notes and additions ; the title
is La Dottrina degli Azzardi...de Ahramo Moivre: Trasportata
dalV Idionia Inglese,...dal Padre Don Roberto Gaeta...sotto Vassis-
tenza del Padre Don Gregorio Fontana...In Milano 1776. This
translation does not discuss the general Theory of Probability, but
only annuities on lives and similar subjects.
DE MOIVKE. 187
In the Advertisement to the second edition of the Doctrine of
Chances, page xiii, De Moiwe says,
There is in the World a Gentleman of an older Date, who in the year
1726 did assure the Public that he could calculate the Values of Lives if
he would, but that he would not, . . .
De Moivre proceeds to make some sarcastic remarks ; a manu-
script note in my copy says that the person here meant was
"John Smart of Guildhall, who in that year published Tables
of Interest, Discount, Annuities, &c. 4to."
327. "We have now to notice De Moivre's work entitled Mis-
cellanea Analytica de Seriehus et Quadratmns...Ijondoii, 1730.
This is a quarto volume containing 250 pages, a page of Errata,
a Supplement of 22 pages, and two additional pages of Errata;
besides the title page, dedication, preface, index, and list of sub-
scribers to the work.
We have already had occasion to refer to the Miscellanea
Analytica as supplying matter bearing on our subject; we now
however proceed to examine a section of the work which is entirely
devoted to controversy between Montmort and De Moivre. This
section is entitled Responsio ad quasdam Criminationes ; it occu-
pies pages 146 — 229, and is divided into seven Chaj)ters.
328. In the first Chapter the design of the section is ex-
plained. De Moivre relates the history of the ]3^iblication of
Montmort's first edition, of the memoir De Mensura Sor^tis, and
of Montmort's second edition. De Moi\Te sent a copy of the De
Mensura Sortis to Montmort, who gave his opinion of the memoir
in a letter to Nicolas Bernoulli, which was published in the second
edition of Montmort's book; see Art. 221. De Moivre states briefly
the animadversions of Montmort, distributing them under nine
heads.
The publication of Montmort's second edition however does
not seem to have produced any quarrel between him and De
Moivre; the latter returned his thanks for the present of a copy
of the work, and after this a frequent interchange of letters
took place between the two mathematicians. In 1715 Montmort
visited England, and was introduced to Newton and other dis-
188 DE MOIVRE.
tingiilshed men ; he was also admitted as a member of the Koyal
Society. De Moivre sent to Montmort a copy of the Doctrine of
Chances when it was pubKshed, and about two years afterwards
Montmort died.
De Moivre quotes the words of Fontenelle which we have
already given in Art. 136, and intimates that these words
induced him to undertake a comparison between his own labours
and those of Montmort, in order to vindicate his own claims. As
the Doctrine of Chances was written in English it was not readily
accessible to all who would take an interest in the dispute; and
this led De Moivre to devote a section to the subject in his Mis-
cellanea Analytica.
329. The second Chapter of the Responsio... is entitled De
Methodo Diferentiarum, in qua exhihetur Solutio Stirlingiana de
media Coefficiente Binomii. The general object is to shew that
in the summation of series De Moivre had no need for any of
Montmort's investigations. De Moivre begins by referring to a
certain theorem which we have noticed in Art. 152; he gives some
examples of the use of this theorem. He also adverts to other
methods of summation.
Montmort had arrived at a very general result in the summa-
tion of series. Suppose u\'^ to denote the n^^ term of a series,
where u^ is such that A'^w^ is zero, ni being any positive integer ;
then Montmort had succeeded in summing any assigned number
of terms of the series. De Moivre shews that the result can be
easily obtained by the method of Differences, that is by the method
which we have explained in Art. 151.
The investigations by Montmort on the summation of series to
which De Moivre refers were published in Vol. xxx. of the Philo-
sophical Transactions, 171 7.
This Chapter of the Responsio,.. gives some interesting details
respecting Stirling's Theorem including a letter from Stirling
himself.
330. The third Chapter of the Responsio... is entitled De Me-
thodo Comhinatio7ium ; the fourth De Permutationibus ; the fifth
Combinationes et Permutationes idterius consideratce : these Chap-
DE MOIVRE. 189
ters consist substantially of translations of portions of the DoctHne
of Chances, and so do not call for any remark. The sixth Chapter
is entitled De Kumero PiDictorum in Tesseris; it relates entirely
to the formula of which we have given the history in Art. 149.
331. The seventh Chapter of the Responsio... is entitled Solu-
tiones variorum Prohlematum ad Sortem spectantium. This Chapter
gives the solutions of nine problems in Chances. The first eight
of these are in the Doctrine of Chances ; nothing of importance is
added in the Miscellanea Analytica, except in two cases. The first
of these additions is of some historical interest. Suppose we take
an example of the Binomial Theorem, as {p + qY', one term w^ill
be 28p^q^: then De Moivre says, page 218,
...at fortasse nesciveram hujus termini coefficientem, nimiruni 28,
designaturam numerum permutationuni quas literse ^9, p, p, p, p, p, q, q,
productum /)^ q' constituentes subire possint ; immb vero, hoc jam din
mihi erat exploratum, etenim ego fortasse primus omnium detexi co-
efficientes annexas productis Binomii, vel Multinomii cujuscunque, id
denotare quotenis variationibus literse producti positiones suas inter se
permuteut: sed utrum illud facile fuerit ad inveniendum, j)ostquani
lex coefficientium ex productis continuis :r- x — ^r— x —= — x (tc.
1 z o 4
jam perspecta esset, aut quisquam ante me hoc ipsum detexerit, ad rem
prassentem non magni interest, cum id monere suffecerit banc proprie-
tatem Coefficientium a me assertam fuisse et demonstratam in Actis FJd-
losophicis Anno 1697 impressis.
The second addition relates to Problem XLix. of the Doctrine
of Chances; some easy details relating to a maximum value are
not given there which may be found in the Miscellanea Analytica,
pages 223, 224.
332. The ninth problem in the seventh Chapter of the Re-
sponsio ... is to find the ratio of the sum of the largest p terms
in the expansion of (1 + 1)" to the sum of all the terms ; p being
an odd number and 7i an even number. De Moivre expresses
this ratio in terms of the chances of certain events, for which
chances he had already obtained formulae. This mode of ex-
pressing the ratio is not given in the Doctrine of Chances, being
rendered unnecessary by the application of Stirling's Theorem ;
190 DE moivrp:.
but it involves an interesting fact in approximation, and we will
therefore explain it.
Suppose two players A and B of equal skill ; let A have an
infinite number of counters, and B have the number j^- Let
(j) [n,p) denote the chance that B will be ruined in n games. Then
the required ratio is 1 — (/) (ii, p) ; this follows from the first form
of solution of Problem LXV; see Art. 307. Again, suppose that
each of the players starts with p counters ; and let -v/r [n, p) then
denote the chance that B will be ruined in 7i games ; similarly if
each starts with Zp counters let -v/r {71, Sp) denote the chance that
B will be ruined in n games ; and so on. Then De Moivre says
that approximately
^ (??, p) = 'f (n, p)+'^ (n, Sp),
and still more approximately
The closeness of the approximation will depend on n being
large, and p being only a moderate fraction of n.
These results follow from the formulse given on pages 199
and 210 of the Doctrine of Chances... The second term of
T^r {n, p) is negative, and is numerically equal to the first term
of A|r {n, Sj)), and so is cancelled ; similarly the third term of
'ylr[n,p) is cancelled by the first of — 'sfr [n, 5p), and the fourth
term of ^fr (n, p) by the first of -v/r (/z, 7p). The terms which do
not mutually cancel, and which we therefore neglect, involve
fewer factors than that which we retain, and are thus com-
paratively small.
333. We now proceed to notice the Supplement to the Mis-
cellanea Analytica. The investigations of problems in Chances
had led mathematicians to consider the approximate calculation
of the coefficients in the Binomial Theorem ; and as we shall now
see, the consequence was the discovery of one of the most striking
results in mathematics. The Supplement commences thus :
Aliquot post diebus qiiam Liber qui inscribitur, Miscellanea Analy-
tica, in lucem prodiisset, Doctissimus Stlrlingius me liteiis admonuit
Tabulam ibi a me exhibitam de summis Logarithmorum, non satis aii-
toritatis habere ad ea firmanda quse in speculatione nitercntur, utpote
DE MO IV RE. 191
cui Tabulae subesset error perpetuus in quinta quaque figura decimali
sum mar um : quae cum pro bumauitate sua monuisset, bis subjunxit
seriem celerrime convergentem, cujus ope summse logaritbmorum tot
numerorum naturalium quot quis sumere voluerit obtineri possent ;
res autem. sic exposita fuerat.
Then follows a Theorem which is not quite coincident in
form with what we now usually call Stirling's Theorem, but is
practically equivalent to it. De Moivre gives his own investiga-
tion of the subject, and arrives at the following result :
log 2 + log 3 + log 4 + ... + log (m — 1)
= (m-2)logm-m + ^^-3g^3+j260;^.-l^
, 1111
12 ' 360 1260 ' 1680
With respect to the series in the last line, De Moivre says
on page 9, of the Supplement to the Miscellanea A nalytica . . . quae
satis commode convergit in principle, post terminos quinque pri-
mes convergentiam amittit, quam tamen postea recuperat... The
last four words involve an error, for the series is divergent,
as we know from the nature of Bernoulli's Numbers. But De
Moivre by using a result which Stirling had already obtained,
111
arrived at the. conclusion that the series 1 — :r^ + -rr^ — =-^— r + ...
12 360 1260
is equal to - log 27r ; and thus the theorem is deduced which
we now call Stirling's Theorem. See Miscellanea Analytica,
page 170, Supplement, page 10.
334. De Moivre proceeds in the Siqyplement to the Miscellanea
Analytica to obtain an approximate value of the middle coefficient
of a Binomial expansion, that is of the expression
(W2+1) (m+2)... 2m
m [m — 1) ... 1
He expends nearly two pages in arriving at the result, which
192 BE MOIVRE.
he might have obtained immediately by putting the proposed ex-
I 2)n
pression in the equivalent form — - .
De Moivre then gives the general theorem for the approximate
summation of the series
1 1 , 1 , 1 ,
We have already noticed his use of a particular case of this
summation in Art. 276.
De Moivre does not demonstrate the theorem ; it is of course
included in the wellknown result to which Euler's name is usually
attached,
^ _ r , 1 11 du^ 1 1 d^u^
See Novi Coram.... Petrop. Vol. xiv. part 1, page 137 ; 1770.
The theorem however is also to be found in Maclaurin's
Treatise of Fluxions, 1742, page 673.
335. We return to the Doctrine of Chances, to notice what is
given in its pages 243 — 254 ; see Art. 324.
In these pages De Moivre begins by adverting to the theorem
obtained by Stirling and himself He deduces from this the
following result : suppose 7i to be a very large number, then the
/I 1\"
logarithm of the ratio which a term of I ^ + ^ ) , distant from
the middle term by the interval I, bears to the middle term,
2P
is approximately .
This enables him to obtain an approximate value of the sum of
the I terms which immediately precede or follow the middle term.
Hence he can estimate the numerical values of certain chances.
For example, let n = 3600 : then, supposing that it is an even
chance for the happening or failing of an event in a single trial,
De Moivre finds that the chance is '682688 that in 3600 trials,
the number of times in which the event happens, will lie between
1800 + 30 and 1800-30.
DE MOIVEE. 193
Thus by the aid of Stirling's Theorem the value of Bernoulli's
Theorem is largely increased.
De Moivre adverts to the controversy between Nicolas Ber-
noulli and Dr Arbuthnot, respecting the inferences to be drawn
from the observed fact of the nearly constant ratio of the number
of births of boys to the number of births of girls ; see Art. 223.
De Moivre shews that Nicolas Bernoulli's remarks were not re-
levant to the argument really advanced by Dr Arbuthnot.
886. Thus we have seen that the principal contributions to
our subject from De Moivre are his investigations respecting the
Duration of Play, his Theory of Recurring Series, and his extension
of the value of Bernoulli's Theorem by the aid of Stirling's Theorem.
Our obligations to De Moivre would have been still gi-eater if he
had not concealed the demonstrations of the important results
which we have noticed in Art. 306 ; but it will not be doubted
that the Theory of Probability owes more to him than to any
other mathematician, with the sole exception of Laplace.
13
CHAPTER X.
MISCELLANEOUS INVESTIGATIONS
Between the years 1700 and 1750.
837. The present Chapter will contain notices of various con-
tributions to our subject which were made between the years 1700
and 1750.
338. The first work which claims our attention is the essay by
Nicolas Bernoulli, to which we have already alluded in Art. 72 ; it
is entitled Specimina Artis conjectandi, ad quwstiones Juris ap-
plicatce. This is stated to have been published at Basle in 1709;
see Gouraud, page STG.
It is reprinted in the fourth volume of the Act. Eruditorum..,
Supplementa, 1711, where it occupies pages 159 — 170. Allusion
is made to the essay in the volume which we have cited in Art. 59,
pages 842, 844, 846.
839. In this essay Nicolas Bernoulli professes to apply mathe-
matical calculations to various questions, principally relating to the
probability of human life. He takes for a foundation some facts
which his uncle James had deduced from the comparison of bills
of mortality, namely that out of 100 infants born at the same time
64 are alive at the end of the sixth year, 40 at the end of the
sixteenth year, and so on, Nicolas Bernoulli considers the following
questions : the time at the end of which an absent man of whom
no tidings had been received might be considered as dead ; the
NICOLAS BERNOULLI. 195
value of an annuity on a life ; the sum to be paid to assure to a
child just born an assigned sum on his attaining a certain age ;
marine assurances ; and a lottery problem. He also touches on the
probability of testimony ; and on the probability of the innocence
of an accused person.
The essay does not give occasion for the display of that mathe-
matical power which its author possessed, and which we have seen
was called forth in his correspondence with Montmort ; but it indi-
cates boldness, originality, and strong faith in the value and extent
of the applications which might be made of the Theory of Pro-
bability.
We will take two examples from the Essay.
34:0. Suppose there are h men who will all die within a years,
and are equally likely to die at any instant ^\dthin this time : re-
quired the probable duration of the life of the last survivor.
Nicolas Bernoulli really views the problem as equivalent to the
following : A line of length a is measured from a fixed origin ; on
this line h points are taken at random : determine the mean dis-
tance from the origin of the most distant point.
Let the line a be supposed divided into an indefinitely large
number n of equal parts ; let each part be equal to c, so that
nc = a.
Suppose that each of the h points may be at the distance
c, or 2c, or Sc, ...up to nc\ but no two or more at exactly the
same distance.
Then the whole number of cases will be the number of combi-
nations of n things taken 5 at a time, say </> {n, h).
Suppose that the most distant point is at the distance xc ; then
the number of ways in which this can happen is the number of
ways in which the remaining ^ — 1 points can be put nearer to the
origin ; that is, the number of combinations of a; — 1 things, taken
J — 1 at a time, say </> (a? — 1, h — 1).
Hence the required mean distance is
^ xc (j) {x — \, h — V)
where the summation extends from x = h to x = n.
13—2
196 BAPvBEYRAC. ARBUTHNOT.
TlCu
It is easily seen that the limit, when n is infinite, is j— ^ , that
IS
ah
The above is substantially the method of Nicolas Bernoulli.
341. Nicolas BernouUi has a very curious mode of estimating
the probability of innocence of an accused person. He assumes
that any single evidence against the accused person is twice as
likely to be false as true. Suppose we denote by ii^ the probability
of innocence when there are n different evidences against him ;
there are two chances out of three that the n*^' evidence is false,
and then the accused prisoner is reduced to the state in which there
are n — 1 evidences against him ; and there is one chance out of
three that the evidence is true and his innocence therefore impos-
sible. Thus
_ 2w„_,jf0 _ 2
. n
Hence ^"~ (sj *
This is not the notation of Nicolas ; but it is his method and
result.
842. In the correspondence between Montmort and Nicolas
Bernoulli allusion was made to a work by Barbeyrac, entitled
Traits dii Jeu; see Art. 212. I have not seen the book myself.
It appears to be a dissertation to shew that religion and morality
do not prohibit the use of games in general, or of games of chance
in particular. It is stated that there are two editions of the work,
published respectively in 1709 and 1744.
Barbeyrac is also said to have published a discourse Sur la
nature du Sort
See the English Cyclopoidia, and the Biographie Universelle,
under the head Barbeyrac.
343. We have next to notice a memoir by Arbuthnot to whom
we have already assigned an elementary work on our subject ;
see Art. 79.
The memoir is entitled A7i Argument for Divine Providence,
ARBUTHNOT, 1Q7
taken from the constant Regularity ohservd in the Births of both
Sexes. By Br John Arbuthnott, Physitian in Ordinary to Her
Majesty, and Felloiu of the College of Physitians and the Royal
Society.
This memoir is published in Vol. xxvii. of the Philosophical
Transactions; it is the volume for 1710, 1711 and 1712 : the
memoir occupies pages 186 — 190.
844. The memoir begins thus :
Among innumerable Footsteps of Divine Providence to be found in
the Works of Nature, there is a very remarkable one to be observed in
the exact Ballance that is maintained, between the Numbers of Men and
Women; for by this means it is provided, that the Species may never fail,
nor perish, since every Male may have its Female, and of a proportion-
able Age. This Equality of Males and Females is not the Effect of
Chance but Divine Providence, working for a good End, which J thus
demonstrate :
845. The registers of births in London for 82 years are given ;
these shew that in every year more males were born than females-
There is very little relating to the theory of probability in the
memoir. The principal point is the following. Assume that
it is an even chance whether a male or female be born ; then
the chance that in a given year there will be more males than
females is ^ ; and the chance that this will happen for 82 years in
succession is ^ . This chance is so small that we may conclude
that it is not an even chance whether a male or female be born.
846. The memoir attracted the attention of Nicolas Bernoulli,
who in his correspondence with Montmort expressed his dissent
from Ai'buthnot's argument ; see Art. 223. There is also a letter
from Nicolas Bernoulli to Leibnitz on the subject ; see page 989 of
the work cited in Art. 59. De Moivre replied to Nicolas Bernoulli,
as we have already intimated in Art. 835.
847. The subject is also discussed in the Oemres Philo-
sophiques et Mathematiques of 's Gravesande, published at Amster-
dam, 1774, 2 vols. 4to. The discussion occupies pages 221—248
of the second volume.
198 'SGKAVESANDE.
It appears from page 237; that when Nicolas Bernoulli travelled
in Holland he met 'sGravesande.
In this discussion we have first a memoir by 'sGravesande.
This memoir contains a brief statement of some of the elements
of the theory of probability. The following result is then obtained.
Assume that the chance is even for a male or female birth, and
find the chance that out of 11429 births the males shall lie
between 5745 and 6128. By a laborious arithmetical calculation
1
this is found to be about -r . Then the chance that this should
4
happen for 82 years in succession will be j^ .
4
But in fact the event for which the chance is so small had
happened in London. Hence it is inferred that it is not an even
chance that a male or female should be born.
It appears that 'sGravesande wrote to Nicolas Bernoulli on
the subject; the reply of Nicolas Bernoulli is given. This reply
contains a jDroof of the famous theorem of James Bernoulli ;
the proof is substantially the same as that given by Nicolas Ber-
noulli to Montmort, and published by the latter in pages 389 — 393
of his book.
Then 'sGravesande wrote a letter giving a very clear account
of his views, and, as his editor remarks, the letter seems to have
impressed Nicolas Bernoulli, judging from the reply which the
latter made.
Nicolas Bernoulli thus sums up the controversy :
Mr. Arhutlmot fait consister son argument en deux cliosesj 1°. en
ce que, supposee une egalite de naissance entre les filles et les gargons,
il y a peu de probahilite que le n ombre des garyons et des filles se trouve
dans des limites fort proches de I'egalite: S''. qu'il y a peu de proba-
hilite que le nombre des gargous surpassera un grand nombre de fois de
suite le nombre des filles. C'est la premiere partie que je refute, et non
pas la seconde.
But this does not fairly represent Arbuthnot's argument.
Nicolas Bernoulli seems to have imagined, without any adequate
reason, that the theorem known by his uncle's name was in some
way contradicted by Arbuthnot.
348. Two memoirs on our subject are published in Vol.
BROWNE. 199
XXIX. of the Philosopliical Transactions, which is the volume for
Vjl^, 1715, 1716 the memoirs occupy pages 133 — 158. They are
entitled Solutio Generalis Prohlematis XV. 2)ro2:)ositi a D. de Moivre,
in tractatii de Mensura Sortie... Solutio generalis altera prcece-
dentis Prohlematis, ope Comhinationum et Serierum infinitarum....
These memoirs relate to the problem which we have called
Waldegraves ; see Art. 211.
The first memoir is by Nicolas Bernoulli ; it gives substantially
the same solution as he sent to Montmort, and which was printed
in pages 381 — 387 of Montmort's work.
The second memoir is by De Moivre ; it gives the solution
which was reproduced in the Doctrine of Chances.
349. We have next to notice a work which appeared under
the following title ;
Christiani Hugeuii Libellus de Ratiociniis in Liido Alese. Or, the
value of all chances in games of fortune; cards, dice, wagers, lotteries, &c,
mathematically demonstrated. London : Printed by S. Keimer, for
T. Woodward, near the Inner Temple-Gate in Fleet-street. 1714.
This is a translation of Huygens's treatise, by W. Browne. It
is in small octavo size ; it contains a Dedication to Dr Eichard
Mead, an Advertisement to the Header, and then 24 pages, which
comprise the translation. The dedication commences thus :
Honour'd Sir, When I consider the Subject of the following Papers,
I can no more forbear dedicating them to Your Name, than I can
refuse giving my assent to any one Proposition in these Sciences, which
I have already seen clearly demonstrated. The Reason is plain, for as
You have contributed the greatest Lustre and Glory to a very consider-
able part of the Mathematicks, by introducing them into their noblest
Province, the Theory of Physick ; the Publisher of any Truths of that
Nature, who is desirous of seeing them come to their utmost Perfection,
must of course beg Your Patronage and Application of them. By so
prudent a Course as this, he may perhaps see those Propositions which
ib was his utmost Ambition to make capable only of directing Men in
the Management of their Purses, and instructing them to what Chances
and Hazards they might safely commit their Money ; turn'd some time
or other to a much more glorious End, and made instrumental likewise
towards the securing their Bodies from the Tricks of that too successful
200 MAIRAN.
Sharper, Death, and counterminmg the underhand Dealings of secret and
overreaching Distempers.
In his Advertisement to the Reader, Browne refers to a trans-
lation of Huygens's treatise which had been made by Arbuthnot ;
he also notices the labours of Montmort and De Moivre. He
says further.
My Design in publishing this Edition, was to have made it as useful
as possible, by an addition of a very large Appendix to it, containing a
Solution of some of the most serviceable and intricate Problems I cou'd
think of, and such as have not as yet, that I know of, met with a par-
ticular Consideration: But an Information I have within these few
Days receiv'd, that M. Montmort's French Piece is just newly reprinted
at Paris, with very considerable Additions, has made me put a Stop
to the Appendix, till I can procure a Sight of what has been added
anew, for fear some part of it may possibly have been honour'd with the
Notice and Consideration of that ingenious Author.
I do not know whether this proposed Appendix ever ap-
peared.
850. In the Hist de V Acad.... Paris for 1728, which was
published in 1730, there is a notice respecting some results ob-
tained by Mairan, Siir le Jeu de Fair ou Non. The notice
occupies pages 53 — 57 of the volume; it is not by Mairan
himself
Suppose a heap of counters ; a person takes a number of them
at random, and asks another person to guess whether the number
is odd or even. Mairan says that the number is more likely
to be odd than even ; and he argues in the following way. Sup-
pose the number in the heap to be an odd number, for example 7;
then a person who takes from the heap may take 1, or 2, or 3, ...
or 7 counters ; thus there are 7 cases, namely 4 in which he takes
an odd number, and 3 in which he takes an even number. The
advantage then is in favour of his having taken an odd number.
If the number in the heap be an even number, then the person
who takes from it is as likely to take an even number as an
odd number. Thus on the whole Mairan concludes that the guess
should be given for an odd number.
The modern view of this problem is different from Mairan's.
NICOLE. 201
If the original heap contains n counters we should say that there
are n ways of drawing one counter, -— ^ — ^-^ ways of drawing
two counters, and so on. Mairan notices this view but con-
demns it.
Laplace treated this problem in the Memoires . . . par divers
Savans...TomeYl., Paris, 1774, and he arrives at the ordinary result,
though not by the method of combinations ; he refers to Mairan s
result, and briefly records his dissent. The problem is solved by
the method of combinations in the Theori'e...des Proh. page 201.
In the article Pair ou Non of the original French Encyclo-
pedie, which was published in 1765, Mairan's view is given ; this
article was repeated in the Encyclopedie Methodique, in 1785,
without any notice of Laplace's dissent.
351. On page 68 of the volume of the Hist de VAcad....
Paris, which contains Mairan's results, is the following paragraph :
M. L'Abb6 Sauvenr, fils de feu M. Sauveur Academicien, a fait voir
une Metliode qu'il a trouvee pour determiner au Jeu de Quadrille quelle
est la probabilite de gagner sans prendre plusieurs Jeux differents, dont
il a calcule une Table. On a trouve que la matiere ej^ineuse et delicate
des Combinaisons etoit tres-bien entendlie dans cet ouvrage.
352. We have next to notice a memoir by Nicole, entitled
Examen et Resolution de quelques questions sur les Jeux.
This memoir is published in the volume for 1730 of the Hist,
de T Acad.... Paris; the date of publication is 1732 : the memoir
occupies pages 45 — oQ of the part devoted to memoirs.
The problem discussed is really the Problem of Points ; the
method is very laborious, and the memoir seems quite superfluous
since the results had already been given in a simpler manner by
Montmort and De Moivre.
One point may be noticed. Let a and h be proportional to
the respective chances of A and B to win a single game ; let them
play for an even number of games, say for example 8, and let
S be the sum which each stakes. Then ^'s advantage is
^ ft8 + 8 a^6 + 'iMh'' + 56a^^^ - b^a'lf - 28a'h' - 8ah' - b'
^ {a-^hy : •
202 NICOLE.
This supposes tliat if each wins four games, neither receives
nor loses any thing. Now it is obvious that the numerator of the
expression is divisible by a + h ; thus we may simplify the ex-
pression to
This is precisely the expression we should have if the players
had agreed to play seven games instead of eight. Nicole notices
this circumstance, and is content with indicating that it is not
unreasonable ; we may shew without difficulty that the result is
universally true. Suppose that when A and B agree to play
2n — l games, p^ is the chance that A beats B by just one game,
^2 the chance that A beats B by two or more games ; and let
^j, q^ be similar quantities with respect to B, then ^'s advantage
is S {p^-\- p^ — q^ — q^. Now consider 2n games : ^'s chance of
beating B by two or more games, is j?2 + ? ; -S's chance of
beating A by two or more games is q^ + ^^ . Hence A's ad-
vantage is
S(p.+
^2-
a + b ^2 a+ bj '
Now we know that ^ = ^ = fj, say; therefore
a
p^a-qj) ^{a ~b) .
a + b a + b ^^ i Lx i\
Hence the advantage of A for 2/^ games is the same as for
2/1 — 1 games.
853. In the same volume of the Hist, de TAcad....Pa7^is, on
pages 331 — 344, there is another memoir by Nicole, entitled
Methode jwur determiner le sort de taut de Joueurs que Von
voudra, et Vavantage que les iins out sur les autres, lorsqitils
joilent h qui gagnera le plus de parties dans un nomhre de parties
determine.
This is the Problem of Points in the case of any number of
players, supposing that each player wants the same number of
BUFFON. 203
points. Nicole begins in a laborious way; but he sees tliat the
chances of the players are represented by the terms in the ex-
pansion of a certain multinomial, and thus he is enabled to give
a general rule. Suppose for example that there are three players,
whose chances for a single game are a, h, c. Let them play a
set of three games. Then the chance that A has of winning
the whole stake is a + 3a^ (^ + c) ; and similar expressions give
the chances of B and (7; there is also the chance ^ahc that the
three players should each win one game, and thus no one prevail
over the others.
Similarly, if they play four games, ^'s chance of winning the
whole stake is a^ -\-^a {h + c) + 12a^hc\ there is also the chance
Wlf that A and B should share the stake between them to the
exclusion of G\ and so on.
But all that Nicole gives was already well known ; see
Montmort's page 353, and De Moivi'e's Miscellanea Analytica,
page 210.
854^. In the year 1733 Bufifon communicated to the Academy
of Sciences at Paris the solution of some problems in chances.
See Hist, de V Acad.... Pains for 1733, pages 43 — 45, for a brief
account of them. The solutions are given in Buffon's Essai
dArithm^tique Morale, and we shall notice them in speaking
of that work.
So 5. We now return to the work entitled Of the Laws of
Chance, the second part of which we left for examination until
after an account had been given of De Moivre's works ; see
Arts. 78, 88.
According to the title page this second part is to be attributed
to John Ham.
Although De Moivre is never named, I think the greater part
of Ham's additions are taken from De Moivre.
Ham considers the game of Pharaon in his pages 53 — 73. This
I think is all taken from De Moivre, Ham gives the same in-
troductory problem as De Moivi^e ; namely the problem which
is XI. in De Moivre's first edition, and x. in his third edition.
In pages 74 — 94 we have some examples relating to the game
of Ace of Hearts, or Fair Chance, and to Lotteries. Here we
201 HAM.
have frequent use made of De Moivre's results as to the number
of trials in which it is an even chance that an event will happen
once, or happen twice ; see Art. 264.
856. There is however an addition given without demon-
stration, to De Moivre's results, which deserves notice.
De Moivre made the problem of finding the number of trials
in which it is an even chance that an event will occur twice
depend on the following equation :
(l + ^)' = 2 (1 + z).
If we suppose q infinite this reduces to
^ = log 2 + log (1 + ^) ;
from which De Moivre obtained z = 1-678 approximately. But let
us not suppose q infinite ; put ( 1 + -j =6"; so that our equation
becomes
6*'^= 2(1+^).
Assume z=2 —y, thus
Assume 2c = 7 + s where e*^ = 6.
1
Thus, e*-^ = 1 - g y.
Take the logarithms of both sides, then
1 1 , 1 3
that is ''i/ - Yg .V' - gj 3/' - ••• = ^ ;
where r = c — ^.
Hence by reversion of series we obtain
HAM. 205
This is Ham's formula, given as we have said without de-
monstration. Since we assumed
we have 7 = Napierian log of 6 = 1-791759 ; thus
5 = 2c -7= 2c- 1-791759.
Ham says that this series will determine the value of z in
all cases when ^ is greater than 4-1473. This limit is doubtless
obtained by making 2c - 7 = 0, which leads to (l + - j = V6 ;
and this can be solved by trial. But Ham seems to be un-
necessarily scrupulous here ; for if 2c be less than 7 we shall still
have - numerically less than unity, so long as 7 — 2c is less than
r
c - -^ , that is so long as c is greater than k + q .
357. The work finishes with some statements of the nu-
merical value of certain chances at Hazard and Backgammon.
358. We have next to notice a work entitled Calcul du Jeu
appellS par les Frangois le trente-et-quarante, et que Von nomme
d Florence le trente-et-un.,,. Par Mr D. M. Florence, 1739.
This is a volume in quarto. The title, notice to the reader,
and preface occupy eight pages, and then the text follows on
pages 1 — 90.
The game considered is the following : Take a common pack
of cards, and reject the eights, the nines, and the tens, so that
forty cards remain. Each of the picture cards counts for ten, and
each of the other cards counts for its usual number.
The cards are turned up singly until the number formed by
the sum of the values of the cards falls between 31 and 40, both
inclusive. The problem is to determine the chances in favour of
each of the numbers between 31 and 40 inclusive.
The problem is solved by examining all the cases which can
occur, and counting up the number of ways. The operation is
most laborious, and the work is perhaps^ the most conspicuous
206 SIMPSON.
#
example of misdirected industry which the literature of Games
of Chance can furnish.
The author seems to refer on page 80 to another work which
I have not seen. He says, ...j'en ai deja fait la demonstration
dans mon Calcul de la Loterie de E-ome,...
It will be observed from our description of the game that
it does not coincide with that which has been called in more
recent times by the same name. See Poisson's memoir in Ger-
gonne's Annales de Mathe7natiques, Vol. 16.
859. A treatise on the subject of Chances was published by
the eminent Thomas Simpson, Professor of Mathematics at the
Royal Military Academy, Woolwich. Simpson was born in 1710,
and died in 1761 ; an account of his life and writings is prefixed
to an edition of his Select Exercises for Young Proficients in the
Mathematicks, by Charles Hutton.
Simpson's work is entitled The Kature and Laws of Chance. . .
The whole after a new, general, and conspicuous Manner, and
illustrated luith a great variety of Exam^jles ... 1740.
Simpson implies in his preface that his design was to produce
an introduction to the subject less expensive and less abstruse
than De Moivre's work ; and in fact Simpson's work may be con-
sidered as an abridgement of De Moivre's. Simpson's problems
are nearly all taken from De Moivre, and the mode of treatment
is substantially the same. The very small amount of new matter
which is contributed by a writer of such high power as Simpson
shews how closely De Moivre had examined the subject so far
as it was accessible to the mathematical resources of the period.
We will point out what we find new in Simpson. He divides
his work into thirty Problems.
SCO. Simpson's Problem VI. is as follows :
There is a given Number of each of several sorts of Things, (of the
s£i,me Shape and Size); as {a) of the first Sort, (h) of the second, &c.
put promiscuously together; out of which a given Number (m) is to
be taken, as it happens: To find the Probability that there shall come
out precisely a given Number of each sort, as (p) of the first, {<j) of
the second, (r) of the third, &c.
SIMPSON. 207
The result in modern notation is a fraction of which the nume-
rator is
\a \h [c
X "; ; :; X X . • . j
\p \<^-p \q \'b-q
r
c — r
and the denominator is : — —•-
\m\n — m
where ?z = a + & + c+...
This is apparently the problem which Simpson describes in his
title page as '^A new and comprehensive Problem of great Use in
discovering the Advantage or Loss in Lotteries, Raffles, &c."
861. Simpson's Problem x. relates to the game of Bowls ; see
Art. 177. Simpson gives a Table containing results for the case of
an indefinitely large number of players on each side, but he does
not fully explain his Table ; a better account of it will be found in
Samuel Clark's Laws of Chance, pages 63 — 65.
S62. Simpson's Problem XV. is to find in how many trials one
may undertake to have an equal chance for an event to occur r
times, its chance at a single trial being known. Simpson claims
to have solved this problem "in a more general manner than
hitherto ;" but it does not seem to me that what he has added to
De Moivre's result is of any importance. We will however give
Simpson's addition. Suppose we require the event to happen
r times, the chance for it in a single trial being j. Let
2' = - ; and suppose that q^ is large. Then De Moivre shews that
in order to have an even chance that the event shall occur r times
we must make about q ( ^ ~ tt; ) trials ; see Ai't. 262. But if ^ = 1
the required number of trials is exactly 2r — 1. Simpson then
proposes to take as a universal formula 2'(^'~t7v)+^~t^j this
is accurate when g[ = l, and extremely near the truth when q is
large.
208 SIMPSON.
363. Simpson's Problem XX. is the same as De Moivre's Pro-
blem VII ; it is an example of the Duration of Play : see Art. 107 ;
Simpson's method is less artificial than that which De Moivre used,
and in fact much resembles the modern method.
364. Simpson's Problem xxil. is that which we have explained
in Art. 148 ; Simpson's method is very laborious compared with
De Moivre's. Simpson however adds a useful Corollary.
By introducing or cancelling common factors we may put the
result of Art. 148 in the following form :
(p'-l){p-2) ... (p-n-\-l) _n fe-1) fa- 2). ..(^-72+1)
\n — l 1 1^ — 1
n{n — l) (r— 1) (r — 2) ... (r — n + 1)
where g^—'p-f, r — 'p—^f, ...; and the series is to continue so
long as no negative factors appear.
Simpson's Corollary then assigns the chance that the sum of the
numbers exhibited by the dice shall not exceed p. We must put
successively 1, 2, 3, ... up to p for p in the preceding expression,
and sum the results. This gives, by an elementary proposition
respecting the summation of series, the following expression for the
required chance :
p{p-l) ,..{p — n-\-l) n q{q-V) ... (q-n + l)
[n 1 [n
n(n—l) r (r—1) ... (r — n + 1)
where, as before, the series is to continue so long as no negative
factor appears.
365. Simpson's Problem xxiv. is the same as De Moivre's
LXXiv., namely respecting the chance of a run of p successes in
n trials ; see Art. 325. De Moivre gave the solution without a
demonstration ; Simpson gives an imperfect demonstration, for
having proceeded some way he says that the '' Law of Continuation
is manifest."
SIMPSON. 203
We have shewn in effect that the solution is obtained by taking
the coefficient of f~^^ in the expansion of
a^ (1 — at)
(1-0 [I - t -^^ baH^'-'Y
that is in the expansion of
a^ (1 - at)
{1-ty
,T 1-at 1 (l-a)t 1 ht
Now y, ^=- -+Vt— Tv.=^^ : +
(i-ty i-t' (1-ty i-t ' (1-0''
We can thus express the result as the sum of two series, which
will be found to agree with the form given by Simpson,
366. Simpson's Problem XXV. is on the Duration of Play.
Simpson says in his Preface respecting his Problems xxii. and xxv,
that they "are two of the most intricate and remarkable in the
Subject, and both solv'd by Methods entirely new." This seems
quite incorrect so far as relates to Problem xxv. Simpson gives
results without any demonstration ; his Case I. and Case ii. are
taken from De Moivre, his Case ill, is a particular example of his
general statement which follows, and this general statement coin-
cides with Montmort's solution ; see Montmort, page 268, Doctrine
of Chances, pages 193 and 211.
367. We will give the enunciation of Simpson's Problem XX VI I,
together with a remark which he makes relating to it in his
Preface.
In a Parallelopipedon, whose Sides are to one another in the Ratio
of a, 6, cj To find at how many Throws any one may undertake that
any given Plane, viz, ah, may arise.
The 27th is a Problem that was proposed to the Public some time
ago in Latin, as a very difficult one, and has not (that I know of)
been answered before.
We have seen the origin of this problem in Ai't. 87. Simpson
supposes that a sphere is described round the paralleleiDiped, and
that a radius of the sphere passes round the boundary of the given
plane; he considers that the chance of the given plane being
li
210 SIMPSON.
uppermost in a single throw is equal to the ratio which the spheri-
cal surface bounded by the moving radius bears to the whole
surface of the sphere. Thus the problem is reduced to finding the
area of a certain portion of the surface of a sphere.
868. Simpson gives two examples of the Summation of Series
on his pages 70 — 73, which he claims as new in method.
(1) Let {a + xy be denoted hj A-\-Bx-\- Cx^ + Dx"" + . . . ;
required the sum of
A Bx Cx'
1.2...r"^2.3... (r + l)"^S.4...(r + 2)"^**'*
' Integrate both sides of the identity, and determine the con-
stant so that both sides may vanish when a? = ; thus
{a + x Y^' g"-^^ _ . Bx^ Cx^ Bx"^
71 + 1 n-\-\ 2 3 4
Repeat the operation ; thus
(?i + l)(n+2) n + 1 (n+l)(7^ + 2)
_A^ B^ C'^ Dx^
~'1.2"^2.3"^3T4"^4.5"^""
Proceed thus for r operations, then divide both sides by a?*", and
the required sum is obtained.
(2) Required the sum of 1" + 2« + 8" + . . . + ic".
Simpson's method is the same as had been already used by
Nicolas Bernoulli, who ascribed it to his uncle John ; see Art. 207.
869. Simpson's Problem xxix. is as follows :
A and B, whose Chances for winning any assigned Game are in
the proportion of a to 6, agree to play until 7i stakes are won and
lost, on Condition that A, at the Beginning of every Game shall set
the Sum p to the Sum ^x-, so that tliey may play without Disad-
ct
vantage on either Side; it is required to find the present Value of all
the Winnings that may be betwixt them when the Play is ended.
The investigation presents no difficulty.
SIMPSON. 211
870. Simpson's Problem xxx. is as follows :
Two Gamesters, A and £, equally skilful, enter into Play together,
and agree to continue the same till (n) Games are won and lost. 'Tis
required to find the Probability that neither comes off a Winner of
Q'Jn Stakes, and also the Probability that B is never a Winner of
that Number of Stakes during the whole Time of the Play; r being
a given, and n any very great, Number,
Simpson says in bis Preface relating to bis Problems XXIV. and
XXX. tbat tbey
" are the same with the two new ones, added in the End of Mr
Be Moivre's last Edition, whose Demonstrations that learned Author
was pleased to reserve to himself, and are here fully and clearly in-
vestigated...."
The same two problems are thus referred to in Simpson's
title page :
Full and clear Investigations of two Problems, added at the end of
Mr. De Moivre's last Edition ; one of them allowed by that great Man
to be the most useful on the Subject, but their Demonstrations there
omitted.
Simpson is quite wrong in claiming tbe solution of Pro-
blem XXX, and saying that De Moivre had reserved his demon-
stration to himself. The investigation is that for determining the
approximate value of terms near the largest in the expansion of
{a + hy ; it is given in the Doctrine of Chances, second edition,
pages 233 — 243, third edition pages 241 — 2ol : the method of
Simpson is in fact identical with De Moivre's.
871. We may remark that Simpson published a work in l7o7
under the title of Miscellaneous Tracts on some curious, and
very interesting Subjects in Mechanics, Physical- Astronomy, and
Speculative Mathematics ; ...
In this work on pages 64 — 75 we have a section entitled An
Attempt to shew the Advantage arising by Taking the Mean of a
Number of Observations, in Practical Astronomy.
This is a very interesting section ; the problems solved by
Simpson were reproduced by Lagrange in a memoir in the fifth
volume of the Miscellanea Taurinensia, without any allusion how-
ever to Simpson.
14—2
212 JOHN BERNOULLI.
It will be more convenient to defer any account of the section
in Simpson until we examine Lagrange's memoir, and then we will
state what Simpson gave in 17 o7.
372. The fourth volume of the collected edition of John Ber-
noulli's works, which was published in 1742 has a section entitled
De Alea, sive Arte Conjectandi, Prohlemata qucedam; this section
occupies pages 28 — 33 : it contains seven problems.
373. The first and second problems are simple and well-
known ; they are solved completely. The third problem relates to
the game of Bowls ; John Bernoulli gives, without demonstration,
the result which had already been published ; see Montmort,
page 248, and the Doctrine of Chances, page 117.
374. The fourth problem contains an error. John Bernoulli
sa3"s that if 2n common dice are thrown, the number of ways in
which the sum of the marks is 7n is
(7n-l) (7^-2)(7n-3)...(5yz + l) .
1.2.3.4 ... (2?z-l) *
this amounts to asserting that the expression here given is the co-
efficient of x"" in the expansion of
. (ic + a?' -I- a;' + a;' + x\+ x^ :
in fact however the coefficient is a series of which the above ex-
pression is only the first term.
375. The fifth and sixth problems involve nothing new in
principle ; John Bernoulli gives merely the numerical results which
would require long calculation to verify. The seventh problem
does not seem intelligible.
CHAPTER XL
DANIEL BERNOULLI.
376. Daxiel Beexoulli was the son of the John Bernoulli
to whom we have often referred ; Daniel was born in 1700, and
died in 1782 : he is the author of some important memoirs on
our subject, remarkable for their boldness and originality, which
we shall now proceed to examine.
377. Tlie first memoir which we have to notice is entitled
Specimen TJieornce Xovcb de Mensura Sortis. This memoir is
contained in the Commentarii Acad. ...Petrop. Vol. v., which is
the volume for the years 1730 and 1731 ; the date of publication
of the volume is 1738 : the memoir occupies pages 175 — 192.
378. This memoir contains the theory of Moral expectation
proposed by Daniel Bernoulli, which he considered would give
results more in accordance with our ordinary notions than the
theory of Mathematical expectation. Laplace has devoted to this
subject pages 432 — 415 of his Theorie...des Proh., in which he
reproduces and developes the hypothesis of Daniel Bernoulli.
379. Mathematical expectation is estimated by the product
of the chance of obtaining a sum of money into that sum. But
we cannot in practice suppose that a given sum of money is of
equal importance to every man ; a shilling is a matter of small
moment to a person who possesses a thousand pounds, but it is
of great moment to a person who only possesses a few shillings.
Various hj^otheses may be proposed for taking into account the
214 DANIEL BERNOULLI.
relative value of money ; of these Daniel Bernoulli's has attracted
most notice.
Suppose a person to possess a sum of money x, then if it re-
ceive an increment dx, Daniel Bernoulli estimates the relative
value of the increment as proportional to dx directly and x in-
ndx
versely ; that is, he takes it equal to where Jc is some con-
stant. Put this equal to Jt/ ; so that
■J ruCtX
dy = ;
therefore y — T^ log ^ + constant
= Ti log - say.
Laplace calls x the fortune physique and y the fortune morale.
"We must suppose a some positive quantity, for as Daniel Bernoulli
remarks, no man is absolutely destitute unless he is dying of
hunger.
Daniel Bernoulli calls y the emolumentum, a he calls summa
honorum, and x — a he calls lucrum.
880. Suppose then that a person, starting with a for his fortune
physique, has the chance p^^ of gaining a?^, the chance p^ of gaining
x^, the chance p^ of gaining x^, and so on ; and suppose the sum
of these chances to be unity. Let
Y= hp^ log {a + x^ + hp^ log {a-\-x,^ -\- hp^ log (a + i^Cg) + . . . — ^ log a.
Then Bernoulli calls Y the emolumentum medium, and Laplace
still calls Y the fortune morale. Let X denote the fortune
physique which corresponds to this fortune morale ; then
Y=h log X—h log a.
Thus X = (a + cc/^ (« + xf^ {a + x^""' . . .
And X—a will be according to Laplace V accroissement de la
fortune physique qui procurerait a Tindividu le menie avantage
moral qui r4sidte pour lui, de son expectative. Daniel Bernoulli
calls X—a the liicru7n legitime expectandum seu so7^s quwsita.
DANIEL BERNOULLI. 215
381. Daniel Bernoulli in his memoir illustrates his hy-
pothesis by drawing a curve. He does not confine himself to the
case in which ^ = 7c log - , but supposes generally 2/ = </> (x).
Thus the ordinary theory of mathematical expectation amounts to
supposing that the curve becomes a straight line, or (p (x) a
linear function of x.
382. After obtaining the value of X which we have given
in Art. 380, the remainder of Daniel Bernoulli's memoir consists
of inferences drawn from this value.
383. The first inference is that even a fair game of chance
is disadvantageous. Suppose a man to start with a as his fortune
physique, and have the chance p^ of gaining x^, and the chance
p^ of losing x^. Then by Art. 380, the fortune physique which he
may expect is
{a + a?/' (a - x^^^ ;
we have to shew that this is less than a, supposing the game to be
mathematically fair, so that
Daniel Bernoulli is content with giving an arithmetical ex-
ample, supposing i>i =/>2 = 2 • I^aplace establishes the proposition
generally by the aid of the Integral Calculus. It may be proved
more simply. We have
x^ x^
■^^ ~ iCj + a?/ ^^"aj^ + iCg'
and we have to shew that
[[a-^x^'^'ia-x^"''^^' is less than a.
Now we may regard x^ and x^ as integers. Thus the result
we require is true by virtue of the general theorem in inequalities
that the geometrical mean is less than tlie arithmetical mean. For
216 DANIEL BERNOULLI.
here we may suppose that there are x^ quantities, each equal to
a + iCj, and x^ quantities each equal to a — iCg. The arithmetical
mean is
'^2 (^ + ^l) + ^1 (<^ - ^2)
— J
^1 + ^2
that is a. The geometrical mean is the quantity which we had
to shew to be less than a.
884. Daniel Bernoulli proposes to determine what a man
should stake at a wager, in order that the wager may not be
disadvantageous to him. He takes the case in which 'p^—]p^ — -^ .
Then we require that
(a + icj^ {a — x^^ — a.
This leads to x^ — — .
Thus x^ is less than x^ and less than a.
885. Daniel Bernoulli now makes an application to in-
surances. But this application will be more readily understood if
we give first a proposition from Laplace which is not in Daniel
Bernoulli's memoir. Suppose that a merchant has a fortune
physique equal to a, and that he expects the sum x to arrive
by a ship. Also let p be the chance that the ship will arrive
safely, and lei q = l —p.
Suppose that he insures his ship on the ordinary terms of
mathematical equity ; then he pays qx to the insurance company,
so that he has on the whole a + x — qx, that is a -\-px.
Suppose however that he does not insure ; then his fortune
physique is (a + xfa'^. We shall shew that a-\-px is greater
than {a + xYa^.
Laplace establishes this by the aid of the Integral Calculus,
with which however we may dispense. We have to shew that
(a + xYa^ is less than a +px,
that is that (1 + - ) is less than 1 + -^ .
\ a/ a
DANIEL BERNOULLI. 2l7
Let » = where m and n are integers.
Then we know that [{l + ^)" l'^ 1^^ is less than
m +n
by the theorem respecting the geometrical mean and the arith-
metrical mean which we quoted in Art. 383 ; and this is what we
had to establish.
It follows that the merchant can afford without disadvantage
to increase his payment to the insurance company beyond the
sum qx. If we suppose f to represent the extreme additional
sum, we have
f = a +jyx — (a + ic) V.
886. We now return to Daniel Bernoulli. We have seen
that a merchant can afford to pay more than the sum qx for
insuring ; but it may happen that the insurance company demand
more than the merchant can afford to pay. Daniel Bernoulli
proposes this question : for a given charge by the insurance com-
pany required to find the merchant's fortune, so that it may
be indifferent to him whether he insures or not.
Retaining the notation of the last Article, let e be the charge
of the insurance company ; then we have to find a from the
equation
a-\-x — e = {a + xYa^
19
Daniel Bernoulli takes for an example a?= 10000, e=800,^= ^ ;
whence by approximation a— 5043. Hence he infers that if the
merchant's fortune is less than 5043 he ought to insure, if greater
than 5043 he ought not to insure. This amounts to assuming
that the equation from which a is to be found has only one
positive root. It may be interesting to demonstrate this. We
have to compare
a-\-x — e with {a + ic)^a^
where a is the variable, and x is greater than e.
218 DANIEL BERNOULLI.
Let p = — ; — SLiid q= — ; — , where m and n are inteofers :
then we have to compare
{a + x- eY^*" with {a + xY a\
Wlien a = the right-hand member is the less ; when a is
infinite the right-hand member is the greater, provided mx is
greater than (m -^ n) [x — e) : we will assume that this is the case.
Thus the equation
{a-^x- e)'""-" = (a + xY oT
has one positive root. We must examine if it has another.
Let log {a + x- ef'^'' = y, log (a + xY dr = z\
. dy m-\-n dz m n
then - -f = — , , -7- = — , h - .
da a + X — e da x + a a
d z d II
Thus when a is zero -j- is greater than j- , so that z begins
by increasing more rapidly tlian y does. If we suppose
dy dz
da da
*
, , . nx (x — e)
we obtam a = - — — ^r '■— .
(??i -\-n) e — nx
Now begin with a = 0, and let a gradually increase until we
have y = z\ then it is obvious that we have not yet reached the
value of a just given. And if by increasing a we could arrive
at a second value at which y = z, we should have passed beyond
the value of a just given. Then after that value z would increase
more slowly than y, and the final value of z would be less than
the final value of y, which is impossible. Thus there is only one
value of a which makes y = z, and this value is less than
nx {x — e)
{m ■\- n) e — nx'
If mx is less than (m -\-n) {x — e) the original equation has
no positive root; for then we have z always increasing more
rapidly than y, and yet the final value of z less than that of y ;
so that it is impossible that any value of a can make y = z.
DANIEL BERNOULLI. 219
387. Daniel Bernoulli also inquires what capital the in-
surance company must have so that they may safely undertake
the insurance. Let y denote the least value of the capital ; then
y must be found from
This is merely the former equation with y in place of a + ic — e.
Thus, taking the same example as before, we have^ = ltt2^3.
888. Daniel Bernoulli now lays down the important principle
that it is more advantageous for a person to expose his fortune
to different independent risks than to expose it all to one risk.
He gives this example : suppose a merchant to start with a
9
capital of 4000, and that he expects 8000 by a ship ; let —
be the chance of the safe arrival of the ship. The merchant's
fortune 'physiqiie is thus
(4000 + 8000)T^ (4000)^=10751 approximately.
But suppose him to put half of his merchandize in one ship
and half in another. The chance that both ships will arrive safely
81
is r7^\ the chance that one of the two will amve safely is
100 ''
9 1 18
2 X Y^ X — r , that is —— ; the chance that both will be lost is
1
r— X . Hence the merchant's fortune 'physique is
(4000 + 8000)tV(7 (4000 + 4000)^^ (4000)^^= 11033
approximately.
Subtract the original capital 4000, and we find the expectation
in the former case to be 6751, and in the latter to be 7033.
Daniel Bernoulli says that the merchant's expectation con-
tinually increases by diminishing the part of the merchandize
which is intrusted to a single ship, but can never exceed 7200.
9
This number is — of 8000 ; so that it expresses the Mathematical
expectation. The result which Daniel Bernoulli thus enunciates.
220 DANIEL BERNOULLI.
without demonstration is demonstrated by Laplace, Theorie . . . des
Froh., pages 435 — 437 ; the proposition is certainly by no means
easy, and it is to be wished that Daniel Bernoulli had explained
how he obtained it.
389. Daniel Bernoulli now applies his theory to the problem
which is known as the Petershurg Problem, probably from its first
appearing here in the Coiiimentarii of the Petersburg Academy.
The problem is similar to two which Nicolas Bernoulli proposed to
Montmort; see Art. 231.
A throws a coin in the air ; if head appears at the first throw
he is to receive a shilling from B, if head does not appear until the
second throw he is to receive 2 shillings, if head does not appear
until the third throw he is to receive 4 shillings, and so on : re-
quired the expectation of A.
The expectation is
1 2 4 8, ... V
2 + 22 + 2^ + 2^ + • • • ^^^ 'infinitum,
that is ^ + ^ + 2 + 9 + • • . ^'^^ infinitum.
Thus ^'s expectation is infinite, so that he ought to give an
infinite sum to B to induce B to play with him in the manner
proposed. Still no prudent man in the position of A would be
willing to pay even a small number of shillings for the advantage
to be gained.
The paradox then is that the mathematical theory is apparently
directly opposed to the dictates of common sense.
390. We will now give Daniel Bernoulli's application of his
theory of Moral expectation to the Petersburg Problem.
Suppose that A starts with the sum a, and is to receive 1 if
head appears at the first throw, 2 if head does not appear until the
second throw, and so on. ^'s fortune physique is
{a + 1)^ {a + 2)^ {a + 4)^ (a + 8)^^ ... - a.
This expression is finite if a be finite. The value of it when
a = is easily seen to be 2. Daniel Bernoulli says that it is about
8 when a = 10, about 4 J when a = 100, and about 6 when a = 1000.
DANIEL BEKNOULLI. 221
Let X represent the sum which a person with the capital a
might give without disadvantage for the expectation of A \ then x is
to be found from
(a + 1 — a?)^ (a + 2 — a?)^ (a + 4 — x)^ (a + 8 — x)^ . .. = a.
Put a — X — a \ thus
{a + 1)^ [a + 2)^ (a' + 4)^ {a + 8)tV ... - a' = a;.
Then if a is to have any large value, from what we have
already seen, x is small compared with a, so that we may put a for
a \ and we have approximately
a; = (a + 1)^ (a + 2)^ (a + 4)^ (a + 8)^... -a.
Laplace reproduces this part of Daniel Bernoulli's memoir with
developments in pages 439 — 442 of the Theorie...des Proh.
391. Daniel Bernoulli's memoir contains a letter addressed to
Nicolas Bernoulli by Cramer, in which two methods are suggested
of explaining the paradox of the Petersburg Problem.
(1) Cramer considers that the value of a sum of money is not
to be taken uniformly proportional to the sum ; he proposes to
consider all sums greater than 2^"^ as practically equal. Thus he
obtains for the expectation of B
1 2 4 2^^
2*^2^
"■" 02 "■" 03 "•"••• • '^"•5
924 924 924
' 926 "^ 927 "' 928 "1" ••••
The first twenty-five terms give 12 J; the remainder constitute
a geometrical progression of which the sum is ^ . Thus the total
is 13.
(2) Cramer suggests that the pleasure derivable from a sum
of money may be taken to vary as the square root of the sum.
Thus he makes the moral expectation to be
2 a/I + J V2 + g v/4 + ^ V8 +■ . . . ,
that is j^ . This moral expectation corresponds to the sum
222 DANIEL BERNOULLI.
1
rg-, that is to 2 "9 approximately; and Cramer considers
(2 — V2)
this to be nearer the comm.on notion on the subject than his former
value 13.
892. It is obvious that Cramer's suppositions are entirely
arbitrary, and that such suppositions might be multiplied to any
extent. Montucla alludes on his page 403 to an attempt made by
M. Fontaine to explain the paradox. This attempt seems to con-
sist in limiting the game to 20 throws at most, instead of allowing
it theoretically to extend to infinity. But the opponents of the
mathematical theory would assert that for the game as thus under-
stood the value of the expectation assigned by the theory is still
far larger than common sense can admit.
393. The Petersburg Problem will come under our notice
again as we advance with the subject. We may remark that
Laplace adopts Daniel Bernoulli's view ; Theorie . . . des Proh.
page 439. Poisson prefers to reconcile mathematical theory with
common sense by the consideration that the fortune of the person
whom we represent by B is necessarily finite so that he cannot pay
more than a certain sum ; this in result practically coincides with
the first of Cramer's two suppositions ; see Poisson, RechercJies
sur la Proh... page 73; Cournot, Exposition de la Theorie des
Chances... page 108.
894. We pass to another memoir by Daniel Bernoulli. The
Academy of Sciences of Paris proposed the following question as a
prize subject for 1732,
Quelle est la cause physique de rinclinaison des Plans des Orbites
des Planetes par rapport au plan de I'Equateur de la revolution du
Soleil autour de son axe; Et d'oii vient que les inclinaisons de ces
Orbites sont differentes entre elles.
None of the memoirs sent in appeared to the judges to be
worthy of the prize. The Academy then proposed the subject
again for 1734, with a double prize. The prize was divided be-
tween Daniel Bernoulli and his father John BernoulH. The
memoirs of both are contained in the Recueil des pieces qui ont
remporte le prix de VAcademie Roy ale des Sciences, Tom. 3, 1734.
DANIEL BERNOULLI. 223
A French translation of Daniel Bernoulli's memoir occupies
pages 95 — 122 of the volume ; the original memoir in Latin occu-
pies pages 125 — 144
395. The portion of the memoir with which we are concerned
occurs at the beginning. Daniel Bernoulli wishes to shew that we
cannot attribute to hazard the small mutual inclinations of the
planetary orbits. He puts the calculation in three forms.
(1) He finds that the greatest mutual inclination of any two
planetary orbits is that of Mercury to the Ecliptic, which is 6° 54'.
He imagines a zone of the breadth of 6" 54' on the surface of a
sphere, which would therefore contain about —z of the whole sur-
face of the sphere. There being six planets altogether he takes
|i^ for the chance that the inclinations of five of the planes to one
plane shall all be less than 6*^ 54'.
(2) Suppose however that all the planes intersected in a
common line. The ratio of 6° 54' to 90° is equal to ^q iiearly ;
1
and he takes -r—n for the chance that each of the five inclinations
13^
would be less than 6" 54'.
(3) Again ; take the Sun s equator as the plane of reference.
The greatest inclination of the plane of any orbit to this is 7° 30',
which is about r=-^ of 90" ; and he takes — r^ as the chance that each
12 12*^
of the six inclinations would be less than 7" 30'.
896. It is difficult to see why in the first of the three pre-
1 . 2
ceding calculations Daniel Bernoulli took ^^ instead of — ; that is
why he compared his zone with the surface of a sphere instead of
with the surface of a hemisphere. It would seem too that he
should rather have considered the poles of the orbits than the
planes of the orbits, and have found the chance that all the
other poles should lie within a given distance from one of them.
224 DANIEL BERNOULLI.
397. We shall find hereafter that D' Alembert did not admit
that there was any value in Daniel Bernoulli's calculations.
Laplace proposes to find the probability that the sum of all the
inclinations should not exceed an assigned quantity ; see Theorie...
des Prob. page 257. The principle of Daniel Bernoulli's attempt
seems more natural, because it takes more explicit account of the
fact that each inclination is small.
398. The next memoir by Daniel Bernoulli is entitled Essai
dune nouvelle analyse de la mortalite causee par la petite Verole,
et des avantages de V Inocidation pour la prevenir.
This memoir is contained in the Hist de FA cad. ... Paris, for
1760 ; the date of publication of the volume is 1766 : the memoir
occupies pages 1 — 45 of the part devoted to memoirs.
399. The reading of the memoir commenced on April 30th,
1760, as we learn from its seventh page. Before the memoir
was printed, a criticism on it appeared, which Daniel Bernoulli
ascribes to a grand mathematicien ; see his pages 4 and 18.
In consequence of this, an introduction apologetique was written
on April 16th, 1765, and now forms the first six pages of the
whole.
The critic was D'Alembert; see Montucla, page 426, and
our Chapter xiii.
400. Daniel Bernoulli's main object is to determine the mor-
tality caused by the small-pox at various stages of age. This of
course could have been determined if a long series of observations
had been made ; but at that time such observations had not been
made. Tables of mortality had been formed, but they gave the
total number of deaths at various ages without distinguishing
the causes of death. Thus it required calculation to determine
the result which Daniel Bernoulli was seeking.
401. Daniel Bernoulli made two assumptions : that in a year
on an average 1 person out of 8 of all those who had not pre-
viously taken the disease, would be attacked by small-pox, and
that 1 out of every 8 attacked would die. These assumptions he
supported by appeal to observation ; but they might not be uni-
DANIEL BERNOULLI. 225
versally admitted. Since the introduction of vaccination, the
memoir of Bernoulli will have no practical value ; but the mathe-
matical theory which he based on his hypotheses is of sufficient
interest to be reproduced here.
402. Let X denote the age expressed in years ; let f denote
the number who survive at that age out of a given number
who were born ; let s denote the number of these survivors who
have not had the small-pox. Assume that in a year the small-
pox attacks 1 out of every n who have not had the disease,
and that 1 out of every m who are attacked dies.
The number of survivors who have not had the small-pox
continually diminishes ; partly because the small-pox continually
attacks some whom it had previously left unattacked, and partly
because some persons die of other diseases without ever being
attacked by the small-pox.
The number of those attacked by the small-pox during the
sdx
element dx of time is by hypothesis — - : because we suppose
o sdx
- to be attacked in one year, and therefore in the element
n n
dx of a year. The number of those who die of the small-pox is
sdx
by hypothesis ; and therefore the number of those who die
^dx
of other diseases is — d^— - — . But this last number must be
mn
diminished in the ratio of s to f, because we only want the
diminution of those who have not yet had the small-pox, of whom
the number is s.
Thus „ds = —-i(d^-^--).
n g V 7)inJ
This equation is to be integrated. We have
s^dx
•
, _ O..C ..^^ ^..^ dx
therefore
mn
15
- ds ■•
sdx
n
sd^-
^ds
^dx
s'
ns
226
DANIEL BERNOULLI.
Put q for - ; thus, da = — ^ dx ;
^ s nin
therefore
therefore
and
n log {mq — l)—x-\- constant ;
^m^
s
-1 =e^^^.
m^
e " + 1
To determine the constant C, we observe that when x
we have s = f ; thus, finally,
= 0,
s =
m^
(m - 1) ^' + 1
403. By this formula Daniel Bernoulli calculates a table on
the basis of Halley's table, derived from the Breslau Observations,
assuming that m and n each equal 8 ; Halley's table gives the
values of f corresponding to successive integer values of x, and
Daniel Bernoulli's formula then gives the values of s. The fol-
lowing is an extract from the table :
X
^
s
1300
1300
1
1000
896
2
855
685
3
798
571
4
760
485
5
732
416
6
710
359
7
692
311
8
680
272
9
670
237
10
661
208
11
653
182
12
646
160
13
640
140
14
634
123
15
628
108
16
622
94
DANIEL BERNOULLI. 227
Halley's table begins with 1000 at the end of the first year,
and does not say to what number of births this corresponds.
Daniel Bernoulli gives reasons for assuming this to be 1300,
which accordingly he takes ; see Art. 64?.
404. On page 21 of the memoir, Daniel Bernoulli says that
the following question had been asked: Of all persons alive
at a given epoch what fractional part had not been attacked
by the small-pox ? The inquirer himself, who was D'Alembert,
estimated the number at one-fourth at most. Daniel Bernoulli
himself makes it about two-thirteenths. He intimates that it
would be desirable to test this by observation. He adds,
Voici un autre theoreme qui pourroit servir h la verification de
nos principes. Si de tous les vivans on ne prend que Tenfance et la
jeunesse, jusqu'a I'age de seize ans et demi, on trouvera le nombre
de ceux qui auront eu la petite verole a pea-pres egal au nombre de
ceux qui ne I'auront pas eue.
405. Daniel Bernoulli gives another interesting investigation.
Bequired to find the number of survivors at a given age from
a given number of births, supposing the small-pox altogether
extinguished. Retain the notation of Article 402 ; and let z be
the number who would have been alive at the age x if there had
been no small-pox, the original number of births being supposed
the same.
The whole mortality during the element dx of time being
9 fix
— d^, and the mortality caused by the small-pox being , we
II tit
sd'Oc
have for the mortality in the absence of small-pox — d^ .
But this mortality arises from a population f ; and we must mul-
tiply it by g to obtain the mortality which would arise from a
population z. Hence, finally,
mn,>
dz d^ s dx
therefore — = -p -\r -z. — •
z ^ g tnn
15—2
228 DANIEL BERNOULLI.
Substitute for s from the result in Art. 402 ; then integrate,
and determine the arbitrary constant by the condition that 2=^
when x = 0. Hence we shall obtain
z me^
^ (m - 1) e" + 1
Thus as X increases, the right-hand member approaches the
limit
m — 1
406. After discussing the subject of the mortality caused by
the small-pox, Daniel Bernoulli proceeds to the subject of In-
oculation. He admits that there is some danger in Inoculation,
but finds on the whole that it is attended with large advantages.
He concluded that it would lengthen the average dur^ation of life
by about three years. This was the part of the memoir which
at the time of publication would be of the greatest practical
importance ; but that importance happily no longer exists.
407. We shall find hereafter that DAlembert strongly ob-
jected to the justness of Daniel Bernoulli's investigations. La-
place speaks very highly of Daniel Bernoulli ; Laplace also briefly
indicates the method of treating the problem respecting Inocula-
tion, but as he does not assume ?/^ and w to be constant, he rather
follows DAlembert than Daniel Bernoulli; see Theoiie...des Proh.,
pages cxxxvii. and 413.
408. The next memoir by Daniel Bernoulli is entitled De usu
algoritlimi infinitesimaUs in arte conjectandl specimen.
This memoir is contained in the Novi Comm...Petrop. Vol. xil,
which is the volume for the years 17C6 and 1767 ; the date
of publication of the volume is 1768 ; the memoir occupies
pages 87 — 98.
409. The object of the memoir is twofold. A certain problem
in chances is to be solved, which is wanted in the next memoir to
which we shall come ; and the introduction of the Differential
Calculus into the Theory of Probability is to be illustrated. The
reader will see in Art. 402 that Daniel Bernoulli had already really
DANIEL BERXOULLI. 229
employed the Differential Calculus, and the present memoir con-
tains remarks which would serve to explain the process of Art. 402 ;
but the remarks are such as any student could easily supply
for himself We shall see the point illustrated in another memoir.
See Art. 417.
410. The problem which Daniel Bernoulli solves is in its
simplest form as follows : In a bag are 2n cards ; two of them are
marked 1, two of them are marked 2, two of them are marked 3, ...
and so on. We draw out m cards ; required the probable number
oi pairs which remain in the bag.
We give the solution of Daniel Bernoulli with some changes of
notation. Suppose that a?,,, pairs remain after m cards have been
drawn out ; let a new drawing be made. The card thus drawn out
is either one of the cards of a pair, or it is not ; the probabilities
for these two cases are proportional to 20?,,^, and 2n — 2x,,^ — m re-
spectively : in the former case there remain x^^ — 1 pairs in the bag,
and in the latter case there remain x,^ pairs. Thus by ordinary
principles
^ ^^m G^., - 1) + (2>i - 2^,^ - m) x^
"^1 2/1 - m
2n — m— 2
Zn — m
iC„j
We can thus form in succession x^, x^, ^3> ••• As x^=n we
find that
(2)1 — on) (2n - m — 1)
•^ni "~
2 {2n - 1)
411. The problem is extended by Daniel Bernoulli afterwards
to a greater generality ; but we have given sufficient to enable the
reader to understand the nature of the present memoir, and of that
to which we now proceed.
412. The next memoir is entitled De duratione media matri-
moniorum, pro qitacunque conjugum aetate, aliisque quaestionihus
affinibus.
This memoir is closely connected with the preceding ; it fol-
lows in the same volume of the JS'ovi Comm...Petrop., and occupies
pages 99—126.
230 DANIEL BERNOULLI.
413. Suppose 500 men of a given age, as for example 20 years,
to marry 500 women of the same age. The tables of mortality
will shew at what rate these 1000 individuals gradually diminish
annually until all are dead. But these tables do not distinguish
the married from the unmarried, so that we cannot learn from them
the number of unbroken couples after the lapse of a given number
of years. Daniel Bernoulli applies the result of Art. 410 ; the pairs
of cards correspond to the married couples. From that article
knowing- the number of cards which remain undrawn we infer the
probable number of pairs. The number of cards remaining un-
drawn corresponds to the number of persons remaining alive at a
given age ; this is taken from the tables of mortality, and by the
formula the probable number of unbroken couples is calculated.
Daniel Bernoulli calculates such a table for the numbers we have
supposed above.
414. Daniel Bernoulli then proceeds to the case in which the
husband and wife are supposed of different ages ; this requires the
extended problem to which we have referred in Art. 411. Daniel
Bernoulli calculates a table for the case in which 500 men aged
40 years marry 500 women aged 20 years.
Daniel Bernoulli allows that his results must not claim im-
plicit confidence. He has taken the same laws of mortality for
both men and women, though of course he was aware that on an
average women live longer than men. With respect to this fact he
says, page 100, ...neque id diversse vivendi rationi tribui potest,
quia ista sequioris sexus praerogativa a primis incunabilis constan-
tissime manifestatur atque per totam vitam in illo manet.
Daniel Bernoulli's process is criticised by Trembley in the
M^moires de V Acad.... Berlin, 1799, 1800.
The problem respecting the mean duration of marriages is con-
sidered by Laplace, Theorie...des Proh. page 415.
415. The memoir which we have noticed in Arts. 412 — 414
bears a close analogy to the memoir which we have noticed in
Arts. 398 — 406. In both cases theory is employed to supply the
lack of observations, in both cases the questions discussed are of the
same kind, and in both cases the use of the Differential Calculus is
illustrated.
DANIEL BERNOULLI. 231
416. The next memoir by Daniel Bernoulli is entitled Dis-
quisitiones Analyticce de novo prohlemate conjectwrali.
This memoir is contained in the Novi Comm...Petrop...Yo\. 14,
1769, pars prior. The date 1759 occurs by mistake in the title-
page. The date of publication of the volume is 1770. The
memoir occupies pages 1 — 25 of the part devoted to memoirs.
417. The object of the memoir is to illustrate the use of the
Differential Calculus, and it is thus analogous to memoirs which we
have already noticed by Daniel Bernoulli.
Suppose three urns ; in the first are n white balls, in the second
n black balls, in the third n red balls. A ball is taken at random
from each urn ; the ball taken from the first urn is put into the
second, the ball taken from the second is put into the third, and
the ball taken from the third is put into the first ; this operation
is repeated for any assigned number of times : required the proba-
ble distribution of the balls at the end of these operations.
Suppose that after x operations the probable numbers of white
balls in the three urns are denoted by u^., v^y w^ respectively. Then
1t/~.,t — U,f ~~ ~1 •
"'■^^ "^ n n
For — is the probability of drawing one white ball out of the
n
10
first urn, and -^ is the probability that a white ball will be drawn
n
from the third urn and so put into the first. Similarly
By eliminating, using the condition u^-\-v^-\-w^= n, we may
obtain an equation in Finite Differences of the second order for
Ujc, namely,
/^ 3\ /^ 3 3\ 1
'^x^'i = "^^ar+l (2. ] —f^'x 1 H— )+-•
x+2 x+i \^ ^J X \^ ^^ ^^y ^
But the following process is more symmetrical. Put w^^^ = Eu^,
and separate the symbols in the usual way ;
232 DANIEL BERNOULLI.
thus •i^-(^-D^'^"^''^'
E-(l--] [ v^ = - u^,
n I n
{
^_(1__) [^^= ^;^,
n n
therefore \ E- ( 1 - - ) \ u^^iAux-
nj I ^ \nj
Therefore w, = ^ f 1 - - + -)\ ^ f 1 - - + -)V (7 fl - - + '^V,
\ n nJ \ n nJ \ n nj
where A, B, C are constants, and a, A 7 ^^^ the three cube roots
of unity.
Then from the above equations we obtain
therefore
\ n nJ \ 71 7iJ \ n nJ
Similarly
\ n nJ \ n nJ \ n nJ
The three constants A, B, C are not all arbitrary, for we
require that
with this condition and the facts that
Uo = n, ^0 = 0, Wq=0,
we shall obtain A = B= G=-^.
418. The above process will be seen to be applicable if the
number of urns be any whatever, instead of being limited to three.
We need not investigate the distribution of the balls of the
other colours ; for it is evident from symmetry that at the end of x
DANIEL BERNOULLI. 233
Operations the black balls will be probably distributed thus, ii^ in
the second urn, v^ in the third, and ic^ in the first ; similarly the
red balls will be probably distributed thus, ii^ in the third urn, v^ in
the first, and w^ in the second.
It should be observed that the equations in Finite Differences
and the solution will be the same whatever be the original distri-
bution of the balls, supposing that there were originally n in each
urn ; the only difference will be in the values to be assigned to the
arbitrary constants. Nor does the process require n white balls
originally. Thus in fact we solve the following problem : Suppose
a given number of urns, each containing n balls, m of the Avhole
number of balls are white and the rest not white ; the original
distribution of the white balls is given : required their probable
distribution after x operations.
419. Daniel Bernoulli does not give the investigation which
we have given in Art. 417. He simply indicates the following
result, which he probably obtained by induction :
3
together with similar expressions for v^ and w^. These can be
obtained by expanding by the Binomial Theorem the expressions
we have given, using the known values of the sums of the powers
of a, P, y.
420. Now a problem involving the Differential Calculus can
be framed, exactly similar to this problem of the urns. Suppose
three equal vessels, the first filled with a white fluid, the second
with a black fluid, and the third with a red fluid. Let there be
very small tubes of equal bore, which allow fluid to pass from the
first vessel into the second, from the second into the third, and from
the third into the first. Suppose that the fluids have the property
of mixing instantaneously and completely. Required at the end
of the time t the distribution of the fluids in the vessels.
23 i DANIEL BERNOULLI.
Suppose at the end of the time t the quantities of the white
fluid in the three vessels to be u, v, w respectively. We obtain the
following equations,
du = kdt (w — y),
dv = kdt (u — v),
dw — kdt {v — w)y
where Zj is a constant.
Daniel Bernoulli integrates these equations, by an unsym-
metrical and difficult process. They may be easily integrated by
the modern method of separating the symbols. Put i) for -7- ; thus
at
{D + ^) w = kw, (J) ■\-k) v= kuj (I)-\-k)w = kv,
therefore (D -\-Tcf u = Hu.
Hence u = e"^* [Ad"^ + Be""^' + Ce^*^'},
where A, B, G are arbitrary constants, and a, /3, 7 are the three cube
roots of unity. The values of v and w can be deduced from that of
u. Let us suppose that initially u — h, v = 0, i^ = ; we shall find
that A =B= C=^, so that
o
Laplace has given the result for any number of vessels in the
Theorie...des Proh. page 303.
421. Now it is Daniel Bernoulli's object to shew, that when x
and n are supposed indefinitely large in the former problem its
results correspond with those of the present problem. Here indeed
we do not gain any thing by this fact, because we can solve the
former problem ; but if the former problem had been too difficult
to solve we might have substituted the latter problem for it. And
thus generally Daniel Bernoulli's notion is that we may often ad-
vantageously change a problem of the former kind into one of the
latter kind.
If we suppose n and x very large we can obtain by the Bino-
mial Theorem, or by the Logarithmic Theorem,
DANIEL BERNOULLI. 235
(
1 - - = e '*
n
Hence when n and x are very large, we find that the value of u^
ofiven in Art. 419 reduces to
«e-"U + ,4-f-T+7^l'-U...^
6
13 \nj ' 16 V**>
Daniel Bernoulli sums the series in the brackets by the aid of
the Integral Calculus. We know however by the aid of the
theorem relating to the value of the sums of the powers of
a, A 7, that this series is equal to
Hence the analogy of the value of u^, when x and n are in-
definitely large, with the value of u in Art. 420 is sufficiently
obvious.
Daniel Bernoulli gives some numerical applications of his
general results.
Daniel Bernoulli's memoir has been criticised by Malfatti, in
the Meniorie ... della Societa Italiana, Vol. I. 1782.
422. The next memoir by Daniel Bernoulli is entitled, 2Ien-
sura Sortis ad fortuitam successionem rerum naturaliter contin-
gentium applicata. This memoir is in the same volume of the
I^ovi Comm Petrop. as the preceding; it occupies pages 26 — 45.
423. The memoir begins by noticing the near equality in the
numbers of boys and girls who are born ; and proposes to consider
whether this is due to chance. In the present memoir only thus
much is discussed : assuming that the births of a boy and of a girl
are equally likely, find the probability that out of a given
number of births, the boys shall not deviate from the half by
more or less than a given number. The memoir gives some calcu-
lations and some numerical examples.
Daniel Bernoulli seems very strangely to be unaware that
all which he effects had been done better by Stirling and Do
Moivre long before ; see De Moivre's Doctrine of Chances^
pages 243—254.
236 DANIEL BERNOULLI.
The following is all that Daniel BeiTioulli contributes to the
theory. Let m and n be lai-ge numbers ; let
|2n 1
u =
V =
2m 1
in f
He shews that approximately
II /^m-\- 1
V V 4w + 1 *
/I IN""
He also states the following : in the expansion of f ^ + „ I
the jj}'^ term from the middle is approximately equal to —2 .
These results are included in those of Stirling and De Moivre,
so that Daniel Bernoulli's memoir was useless when it appeared;
see Art. 837.
424. The next memoir by Daniel Bernoulli is entitled Di-
judicatio maxime prohabilis plurium ohservationum discrepantitwi
Clique verisimillima inductio inde formanda. This memoir is con-
tained in the Acta Acad. ...Petrop. for 1777, pay^s piHor ; the
date of publication of the volume is 1778 : the memoir occupies
pages 8 — 23 of the part devoted to memoirs.
425. The memoir is not the first which treated of the errors
of observations as a branch of the Theory of Probability, for
Thomas Simpson and Lagrange had already considered the sub-
ject ; see Art. 371.
Daniel Bernoulli however does not seem to have been ac-
quainted with the researches of his predecessors.
Daniel Bernoulli says that the common method of obtaining
a result from discordant observations, is to take the arithmetical
mean of the result. This amounts to supposing all the observa-
tions of equal weight. Daniel Bernoulli objects to this supposition,
and considers that small errors are more probable than large
errors. Let e denote an error ; he proposes to measure the pro-
bability of the error by ^(j-'^ — e^), where 7- is a constant. Then
DANIEL BERNOULLI. 237
the best result from a number of observations will be that
which makes the product of the probabilities of all the errors
a maximum. Thus, suppose that observations have given the
values a,h, c, ... for an element ; denote the true value bv x ;
then we have to find x so that the following product may be a
maximum :
^y- _ (^ _ ay] sjy -{x- hy] s/y -{x- cy] . . .
Daniel Bernoulli gives directions as to the value to be assigned
to the constant ?\
426. Thus Daniel Bernoulli agrees in some respects with
modern theory. The chief difference is that modern theory takes
for the curve of probability that defined by the equation
while Daniel Bernoulli takes a circle.
Daniel Bernoulli gives some good remarks on the subject ;
and he illustrates his memoir by various numerical examples,
which however are of little interest, because they are not derived
from real observations. It is a fatal objection to his method, even
if no other existed, that as soon as the number of observations
surpasses two, the equation from which the unknown quantity is
to be found rises to an unmanageable degree. This objection he
himself recognises.
427. Daniel Bernoulli's memoir is followed by some remarks
by Euler, entitled Ohservationes in pj'aecedeiitem dissertationem ;
these occupy pages 24 — 33 of the volume.
Euler considers that Daniel Bernoulli was quite arbitrary in
proposing to make the product of the probabilities of the errors
a maximum. Euler proposes another method, which amounts to
making the sum of the fourth powers of the probabilities a
maximum, that is, with the notation of Art. 425,
y _ (a: - ayY + [r' - {x - ly]' 4- 17-^ -{x- c)^ + . . .
is to be a maximum. Euler sa3^s it is to be a maximum, but
288 DANIEL BERNOULLI.
he does not discriminate between a maximum and a minimum.
The equation which is obtained for determining iK is a cubic,
and thus it is conceivable that there may be two minima values
and one maximum, or only one minimum and no maximum.
Euler seems to have objected to the wrong part of Daniel
Bernoulli's method ; the particular law of probability is really the
arbitrary part, the principle of making the product of the pro-
babilities a maximum is suggested by the Theory of Probability.
Euler illustrates his method by an example derived from real
observations.
CHAPTER XII.
EULER,
428. EULER was bora in 1707, and died in 1783. His
industry and genius have left permanent impressions in every
field of mathematics ; and although his contributions to the
Theory of Probability relate to subjects of comparatively small
importance, yet they will be found not unworthy of his own great
powers and fame.
429. Euler's first memoir is entitled Calcul de la Prohahilite
dans le Jeu de Rencontre. This memoir is published in the volume
for 1751 of the Histoire de V Acad ... Berlin ; the date of pub-
lication is 1753 : the memoir occupies pages 255 — 270 of the
volume.
430. The problem discussed is that which is called the game
of Treize, by Montmort and Nicolas Bernoulli-; see Art. 162.
Euler proceeds in a way which is very common with him ; he
supposes first one card, then two cards, then three, then four, and
exhibits definitely the various cases which may occur. After-
wards, by an undemonstrated inductive process, he arrives at the
general law.
The results obtained by Euler had been given more briefly
and simply by Nicolas Bernoulli, and published by Montmort in
his page 301 ; so we must conclude that Euler had not read
Montmort's book.
When n is infinite, the expression given in Art. 161 for the
240 EULER.
chance that at least one card is in its right place becomes equal
to 1 — e~\ where e is the base of the Napierian logarithms ; this is
noticed by Euler : see also Art. 287.
431. The next memoir by Euler is entitled Recherches g^ne-
rales sur la mortalite et la multiplication du genre humain. This
memoir is published in the volume for 1760 of the Histoire de
V Acad. ... Berlin ; the date of publication is 1767: the memoir
occupies pages 144 — 164.
432. The memoir contains some simple theorems concerning
the mortality and the increase of mankind. Suppose N infants
born at the same time ; then Euler denotes by (1) N the number
of them alive at the end of one year, by (2) N the number of
them alive at the end of two years, and so on.
Then he considers some ordinary questions. For example,
a certain number of men are alive, all aged m years, how many
of them will probably be alive at the end of n years ?
According to Euler's notation, (m) N represents the number
alive aged m years out of an original number N\ and {m + n) N
represents the number of those who are alive at the end of n
more years ; so that — , . is the fraction of the number
aged m years who will probably be alive at the end of n years.
Thus, if we have a number M at present aged m years, there will
probably be — -. — —- M of them alive at the end of n years.
433. Then Euler gives formulae for annuities on a life. Sup-
pose M persons, at present each aged m years, and that each
of them pays down the sum a, for which he is to receive x
1
annually as long as he lives. Let - be the present worth of the
unit of money due at the end of one year.
(m -f 1)
Then at the end of a year there will be M ' . ^ of the
(in)
persons alive, each of whom is to receive x : therefore the present
worth of the whole sum to be received is - M —- -r — .
X {m)
EULEE. 241
Similarly, at the end of the second year there will be
(?/i + 2)
M —7 — -^ of the persons alive, each of whom is to receive x :
(w)
therefore the present worth of the whole sum to be received is
-5 M ^ , . . And so on.
The present worth of all the sums to be received ought to be
equal to Ma ; hence dividing by M we get
_ X ((m + 1) (m + 2) (m + 3)
Euler gives a numerical table of the values of (1), (2), ... (95),
which he says is deduced from the observations of Kerseboom.
434. Let iV denote the number of infants born in one year,
and r'i\^ the number born in the next year ; then we may suppose
that the same causes which have changed N" into riV will change
rN into rW, so that r^N will be the number born in the year
succeeding that in which rN were born. Similarly, r^N will be
born in the next succeeding year, and so on. Let us now express
the number of the population at the end of 100 years.
Out of the N infants born in the present year, there will
be (100) N alive ; out of the rN born in the next year, there will
be (99) rN alive ; and so on. Thus the whole number of persons
alive at the end of 100 years will be
[ ^. ^. ^
Therefore the ratio of the population in the 100*'' year to the
number of infants born in that year will be
If we assume that the ratio of the population in any year to the
number of infants born in that year is constant, and we know this
ratio for any year, we may equate it to the expression just given :
then since (1), (2), (3), ... are known by observation, we have
an equation for finding r.
16
212 EULEn.
435. A memoir by Euler, entitled Stir les Rentes Viageres,
immediately follows tlie preceding, occupying pages 1G5 — 175 of
the volume.
Its principal point is a formula for facilitating tlie calculation
of a life annuity.
Let A.,^^ denote the value of an annuity of one pound on the
life of a person aged 7n years, A,^_^^ the value of an annuity of
one pound on the life of a person aged m + 1 years. Then by
the preceding memoir, Art. 433,
1 { {m-^l) 0)^ + 2) U+3) I
. _ _1 {{m^ (m + 3) (»z + 4) ]
"'^^ (m+1) 1 \ ^ X' "^ \' "^ ""J '
therefore (m) X A,,, = [m + 1) + {m + 1) J,
Wi+l"
Thus when A.^^ has been calculated, Ave can calculate A„^^^
easily.
Euler gives a table exhibiting the value of an annuity on
any age from to 94. But with respect to the ages 90, 91, 92,
93, 94, he says,
Mais je ne voudrois pas consei'der a un entrepreneur de se mekr
avec de tels vieillards, a nioins que leur nombre ne fut assez consider-
able; ce qui est une regie generale pour tons les etablissemens fondes
sur les probabilites.
Euler is of opinion that the temptations do not appear suf-
ficient to induce many persons to buy annuities on terms which
would be advantageous to the sellers. He suggests that defended
annuities might perhaps be more successful ; for it follows from
his calculations, that 350 crowns should purchase for a new born
infant an annuity of 100 crowns to commence at the age of
20 years, and continue for life. He adds,
...et si I'on y vouloit employer la somme de 3500 ecus, ce seroit
toujours un bel etablissement, que de jouir cles I'age de 20 ans d'une
pension fixe de 1000 ecus. Ce^^endant il est encore douteux, s'il se
trouveroit plusieurs parens qui voiuh"oicnt bien faiie uu tel sacrifice
pour le lien de leurs enfans.
EULER. 2i3
436. The next memoir by Euler is entitled Sur Vavantage du
Banqiiier cm jeu de Fharaon. This memoir was published in the
volume for 1764 of the Histoire de V Acad.... Berlin; the date of
publication is 1766 : the memoir occupies pages 144 — 164.
437. Euler merely solves the same problem as had been
solved by Montmort and Nicolas Bernoulli, but he makes no refer-
ence to them or any other writer. He gives a new form hoAvever
to the result which we will notice.
Consider the equation in Finite Differences,
m {in — 1) (;? — m) (n — ??2 — 1 )
^'" " 2n (ii - 1) ^ 71 (n - 1) ""-' •
By successive substitution we obtain
m (m — 1)S
u„ =
" 2n{?i-l){n-2) ... (n-m + 1)'
where S denotes the sum (f) (u) + </> (?i — 2) + (^ (/i — 4) + . . . ,
(f> (>i) being (ii — 2) (n — S) ... (n — m + 1).
This coincides with what we have given in Art. 155, supposing
that for A we put unity.
AYe shall first find a convenient expression for S. We see that
^= coefficient of x"'~^ in the expansion of (1 +£c)"~^
m
Hence S is equal to | m — 2 times the coefficient of cc'" " in the
expansion of
(1 + xy-' + (1 + xy-' +(14- xy-" + .,.
Now in the game of Pharaon we have n always even ; thus we
may suppose the series to be continued down to 1, and then its
sum is
(i+^)"-i ^, . . (1+^r-i
(1 -\-'xy^l ^^'""^ '' 2x + x' '
Thus we require the coefficient of x"'"^ in the expansion of
(1 + xy - 1
2-^x '
16— 2
2H EULER.
This coefficient is
n{n-l) ... {n-m-\- 2) n {n - 1) ... (n-m + 3)
2 1 on - 1 ~ 4 I ?/z - 2
n (n — 1) ... {n — m-\- 4)
■^ 8 ! m - 3
Then 8 — \m — 2 times this coefficient.
Hence with this expression for S we find that
1 772 1 771 {m — 1)
^i'n = T
'" 4 7i - «i + 1 8 (n - ??i + 1) {n - ??z + 2)
1 m {in — 1) (w — 2)
IG (?i - wi + 1) {n - m + 2) (« - m + 3)
+
. (_ 1 V^ -1 m(m-l)...2
■^^ ^ 2"^ (yi-m + 1) ...(vi-1)' •
This is the expression for the advantage of the Banker which
was given by Nicolas Bernoulli, and to which we have referred in
Art. 157.
Now the form which Euler gives for w„ is
m { m — 1 {m — l){m — 2){m — 2)
2'" \ l{n-l) 1.2.3(/i-3)
• • • ( •
{m — 1) {m — 2) {m — 3) (m — 4) {m — 5)
+ ^^ — ^ o A — ^7 ^^ i-
1.2. 3. 4. 5(;z-5)
Euler obtained this formula by trial from the cases in which
w = 2, 3, 4, . . . 8 ; but he gives no general demonstration. We will
deduce it from Nicolas Bernoulli's formula.
By the theory of partial fractions we can decompose the
terms in Nicolas Bernoulli's formula, and thus obtain a series of
fractions having for denominators w — 1, w — 2, n — 3, . . . ?z — ?7i + 1 ;
and the numerators will be independent of n.
We will find the numerator of the fraction whose denominator
is w — r.
From the last term in Nicolas Bernoulli's formula we obtain
{-ly^^ w(m-l)...2
m — ^ — r ?' — 1 '
EULER. 245
from the last term but one we obtain
2"'"' \m-l-r\r-2'
and proceeding in this way we find for the sum
_1 m-l-r |^~TT2 "^^ 17273 ''+-"j
a^ir
2»'+i 1^
(- 1)''"" I m
-^ 1 - (1 - 2)' .
n — 1 — r I )
This vanishes if r be an et;e?i number ; and is equal to
'2r\r \m-l-r '
if r be odd.
Thus Euler's formula follows from Nicolas Bernoulli's.
438. The next memoir by Euler is entitled Sur la prohabilite
des sequences dans la Lotterie Genoise. This memoir was published
in the volume for 1765 of the Histoire de V Acad.... Berlin; the
date of publication is 1767; the memoir occupies pages 191 — 230.
439. In the lottery here considered 90 tickets are numbered
consecutively from 1 to 90, and 5 tickets are drawn at random.
The question may be asked, what is the chance that two or
more consecutive numbers should occur in the drawings? Such
a result is called a sequence ; thus, for example, if the numbers
drawn are 4, 5, 6, 27, 28, there is a sequence of three and also a
sequence of two. Euler considers the question generally. He
supposes that there are n tickets numbered consecutively from 1 to
n, and he determines the chance of a sequence, if two tickets are
drawn, or if three tickets are drawn, and so on, up to the case in
which six tickets are drawn. And having successively investigated
all these cases he is able to perceive the general laws w^hich would
hold in any case. He does not formally demonstrate these laws,
but their truth can be inferred from what he has previously given,
by the method of induction.
24 G EULEE.
440. As an example of Euler's method we will give his inves-
tigation of the case in which three tickets are drawn.
There are three events which may happen which may be repre-
sented as follows :
I. a, a-\-l, a-\-2, that is a sequence of three.
II. a, a + 1; h, that is a sequence of two, the number h
being neither a + 2 nor a — 1.
III. a, h, c, where the numbers a, Jj, c involve no sequence.
I. The form a, a-\-l, a + 2. The number of such events is
n — 2. For the sequence may be (1, 2, 3), or (2, S, 4), or (3, 4, 5),
up to (71 —2,n—l, n).
II. The form a, a + 1, h. In the same way as we have just
shewn that the number of sequences of three, like a, a + 1, « + 2,
is 71 — 2, it follows that the number of sequences of two, like
<2, a + 1, is 7z — 1. Now in general h may be any number between
1 and n inclusive, except a—1, a, a + 1, a + 2; that is, h may be
any number out of ?? — 4 numbers. But in the case of the first
sequence of two, namely 1, 2, and also of the last sequence n — 1, 71,
the number of admissible values of J is n — 3. Hence the whole
number of events of the form a, « + 1, I, is (w — 1) (71 — 4) + 2, that
is 71^ — 5n + Q), that is {n — 2) {ii — 3).
III. The form a, h, c. Suppose a to be any number, then h
and c must be taken out of the numbers from 1 to a — 2 inclusive,
or out of the numbers from a + 2 to n inclusive ; and b and c must
not be consecutive. Euler investiofates the number of events
which can arise. It will however be sufficient for us here to take
another method which he has also given. The total number of
events is the number of combinations of 7i things taken 3 at a time,
that is — ^^ — — . The number of events of the third kind
can be obtained by subtracting from the whole number the num-
ber of those of the first and second kind ; it is therefore
71 (n — 1) Cii — 2) , J,. , ,,. .
17273 — ~ ^'' ~ ^ ^" ~ ) ~ ^'' " ^-
EULER. 94.7
It will be found tliat tliis is
(n - 2) (n - 3 ) {n - 4 )
1.2^3 •
The chances of the three events will be found by dividing
the number of ways in which they can respectively occur by the
whole number.
Thus we obtain for I, ii, iii, respectively
2-3 2.3(^-3) {n - 3) {n - 4)
71 (a -1)' n{a-l) ' n (n ~ 1) '
441. Euler's next memoir also relates to a lottery. This
memoir is entitled Solution d'lme question tres difficile dans le
Calcid des Prohahilites. It w^as published in the volume for
1769 of the Histoire de VAcad. ... Berlin; the date of publication
is 1771 : the memoir occupies pages 285 — 302 of the volume.
442. The first sentences give a notion of the nature of the
problem.
C'est le plan d'une lotterie qni ni'a fourni cette question, que je
me propose de developper. Cette lotterie etoit de cinq classes, chacuue
de 10000 billets, parmi lesquels il y avoit 1000 prix dans chaque
classe, et par consequent 9000 bJancs. Chaque billet devoit passer
par toutes les cinq classes; et cette lotterie avoit cela de particulier
qu'outre les prix de chaque classe on s'engagooit de payer un ducat
a cliacun de ceux dont les billets auroient passe par toutes les cinq classes
sans rien gagner.
443. We may put it perhaps more clearly thus. A man
takes the same ticket in 5 different lotteries, each having 1000
prizes to 9000 blanks. Besides his chance of the prizes, he is to
have £1 returned to him if he gains no prize.
The question which Euler discusses is to determine the pro-
bable sum which will thus have to be paid to those who fail
in obtaining jmzes.
444. Euler's solution is very ingenious. Suppose h the num-
ber of classes in the lottery ; let n be the number of prizes in each
class, and m the number of blanks.
24iS EULER.
Suppose tlie tickets of the first class to have been drawn, and
that the prizes have fallen on certain n tickets A, B, G ...
Let the tickets of the second class be now drawn. Required
the chance that the prizes will fall on the same n tickets as
before. The chance is
1.2 71
(m + 1) (m+ 2) {m + n) '
And in like manner the chance that the prizes in all the
classes will fall on the same tickets as in the first class, is obtained
by raising the fraction just given to the power k — 1.
Let {(m + 1) (m + 2) {m + n)Y~'=M,
and {1.2 nY'' = a.
Then -^ is the chance that all the prizes will fall on the same
n tickets. In this case there are m persons who obtain no prize,
and so the managers of the lottery have to pay m ducats.
445. Now consider the case in which there are m — 1 persons
who obtain no prize at all. Here besides the n tickets A, B, G, ...
which gained in the first class, one of the other tickets, of which
the number is m, gains in some one or more of the remaining
classes. Denote the number of ways in which this can happen by
^m. Now If denotes the whole number of cases which can
happen after the first class has been drawn. Moreover /3 is in-
dependent of m. This statement involves the essence of Euler's
solution. The reason of the statement is, that all the cases
which can occur will be produced by distributing in various
ways the fresh ticket among A, B, G, ... excluding one of these
to make way for it.
In like manner, in the case in which there are m — 2 persons
who obtain no prize at all, there are two tickets out of the m
which failed at first that gain prizes once or oftener in the remain-
ing classes. The number of ways in which this can occur may
be denoted by <ym {in — 1), where 7 is indejjendent of m.
Proceeding in this way we have from the consideration that
the sum of all possible cases is M
M= a + jSin + ym (in - 1) + 3m [m — 1) {in - 2) -f . . ..
EULER. 249
Now % 13, 'y, ... are all independent of m. Hence we may put
in succession for on the values 1, 2, 3, ... ; and we shall thus be
able to determine /S, y —
446. Euler enters into some detail as to the values of /3, 7 . . . ;
but he then shews that it is not necessary to find their values for
his object.
For he proposed to find the probable expense which will fall
on the managers of the lottery. Now on the first hypothesis
it is m ducats, on the second it is m — 1 ducats, on the third it
is m — 2 ducats, and so on. Thus the probable expense is
-r> \am + /3m (m - 1) + jm {m - 1) (m — 2) + . . . L
= -^ ja + /3(w-l)+7 (771-1) (m-2) + ...L
The expression in brackets is what we shall get if we change
m into m — 1 in the right-hand member of the value of M in
Art. 445 ; the expression therefore is what M becomes when Ave
change m into m — 1. Thus
a + y5(m-l) +7(7??- 1) {m-2) + ...
= [m (771 + 1) . . . (m + n - 1) }'"\
Thus finally the probable expense is
m Y ^
m
/)n + Uj
Euler then confirms the truth of this simple result by general
reasoning.
447. We have next to notice a memoir entitled Eclaircisse-
mens sur le memoire de Mr. De La Gra^ige) inserS dans le V'^
volume de Melanges de Turin, concernant la methode de prendre le
milieu entre les residtats de plusieurs observations, <^c. Presente
a VAcademie le 27 Nov. 1777. This memoir was published in the
Nova Acta Acad. ... Petrop. Tom. 3, which contains the history
of the Academy for the year 1785 ; the date of publication
of the volume is 1788 : the memoir occupies pages 289 — 297.
250 EULEPu
The memoir consists of explanations of psn't of that memoir
by Lagrange to which we have aUuded in Art. 371 ; nothing new
is given. The explanations seem to have been written for the
benefit of some beginner in Algebra, and would be quite un-
necessary for any student unless he were very indolent or very
dull.
4i8. The next contribution of Euler to our subject relates to
a lottery ; the problem is one that has successively attracted the
attention of De Moivre, Mallet, Laplace, Euler and Trembley.
We shall find it convenient before we give an account of Euler's
solution to advert to what had been previously published by
De Moivre and Laplace.
In De Moivre's Doctrine of Chances, Problem xxxix. of the
third edition is thus enunciated: To find the Expectation of J.,
when with a Die of any given number of Faces, he undertakes
to fling any numxber of them in any given number of Casts. The
problem, as we have already stated, first appeared in the De Men-
sura Sortis. See Arts. 251 and 291.
Let 71 be the number of faces on the die ; x the number of
throws, and suppose that m specified faces are to come up. Then
the number of favourable cases is
,f _ ,„ u -Vf-\- ^^'^lH (,, _ 2)-^ - . . .
^ ^ 1.2^ ^
where the series consists of m + 1 terms. The whole number of
possible cases is if, and the required chance is obtained by di-
viding the number of favourable cases by the whole number of
possible cases.
44^9. The following is De Moivre's method of investigation.
First, suppose we ask in how many ways the ace can come up.
The whole number of cases is 7f ; the whole number of cases
if the ace were expunged would be {n — iy ; thus the whole number
of cases in which the ace can come up is ;?/*"— (n — ly.
Next, suppose we ask in how many ways the ace and deux
can come up. If the deux were expunged, the number of ways
in which tlie ace could come up would l)e [n — ly — {n — 2y, by
EULER. 251
what we have just seen ; this therefore is the niunber of ways
in which with the given die the ace can come up without the deux.
Subtract this number from the number of ways in which the ace
can come up with or without the deux, and we have left the
number of ways in which the ace can come up luith the deux.
Thus the result is
n^-{n-ir-\{n-\r-{n-^.rr,
that is, if -2{n- Vf -f {n - 2f.
De Moivre in like manner briefly considers the case in wdiich
the ace, the deux, and the tray are to come up ; he then states
what the result will be when the ace, the deux, the tray, and
the quatre are to come up ; and finally, he enunciates verbally
the general result.
De Moivre then proceeds to shew how approximate numerical
values may be obtained from the formula ; see Art. 292.
450. The result may be conveniently expressed in the nota-
tion of Finite Differences.
The number of ways in which m specified faces can come up
is A'" (71 — mY ; where m is of course not greater than n.
It is also obvious that if m be greater than x, the event
required is impossible ; and in fact we knoAv that the expression
A"' (?z — my vanishes when ?n is greater than x.
Suppose 71 = m ; then the number of ways may be denoted by
A^O"^ ; the expression written at full is
,f _ ,, (,, _. 1)- a. ^^j-^-^ {^ri-Tf-...
451. One particular case of the general result at the end
of the preceding Article is deserving of notice. If we jDut x = n,
we obtain the number of ways in which all the 71 faces come up
in n throws. The sum of the series wdien x = 7i is known to be
equal to the product 1.2.3...??, as may be shewn in various
ways. But we may remark that this result can also be obtained
by the Theory of Probability itself; for if all the 7i faces are
to appear in ii throws, there must be no repetition ; and thus the
'252 EULER.
number of ways is the number of permutations of n things taken
all together.
Thus we see that the sum of a certain series might be inferred
indirectly by the aid of the Theory of Probability ; we shall
hereafter have a similar example.
452. In the Memoires ... par divers Savans, Vol. VI., 1775,
page 363, Laplace solves the following problem : A lottery con-
sists of n tickets, of which r are drawn at each time ; find the
probability that after x drawings, all the numbers will have been
drawn.
The numbers are supposed to be replaced after each drawing.
Laplace's method is substantially the same as is given in his
Theorie . . . des Prob., page 192; but the approximate numerical
calculations which occupy pages 193 — 201 of the latter work do
not occur in the memoir.
Laplace solves the problem more generally than he enunciates
it ; for he finds the probability that after x drawings m specified
tickets will all have been drawn, and then by putting n for m,
the result for the particular case which is enunciated is obtained.
453. The most interesting point to observe is that the pro-
blem treated by Laplace is really coincident with that treated by
De Moivre, and the methods of the two mathematicians are sub-
stantially the same.
In De Moivre's problem 7i^ is the whole number of cases ; the
corresponding number in Laplace's problem is [^ (n, r)}'', where
by (/) (71, r) we denote the number of combinations of n things
taken r at a time. In De Moivre's problem (n — ly is the whole
number of cases that would exist if one face of the die were
expunged ; the corresponding number in Laplace's problem is
j^(7i-l, r)]^ Similarly to (n — 2y in De Moivre's problem
corresponds [(f) (n — 2, r)]"^ in Laplace's. And so on. Hence, in
Laplace's problem, the number of cases in which m specified
tickets will be drawn is
{<P (n, r)Y-m {4, («- 1, r)}' + "^"~^^ (<^ (»- 2, r)}' - ... ;
and the probability will be found by dividing this number by the
whole number of cases, that is by {</> (?i, r)}^
EULER. 253
454. With the notation of Finite Differences we may denote
the number of cases favourable to the drawing of m specified
tickets by A'" {(/> (n — 7?^, r)}^; and the number of cases favourable
to the drawing of all the tickets by A" {(/> (0, r)Y.
455. In the Histoire de VAcad. ... Paris, 1783, Laplace gives
an approximate numerical calculation, which also occurs in
page 195 of the Theorie ... des Proh. He finds that in a lottery
of 10000 tickets, in which a single ticket is drawn each time, it
is an even chance that all will have been drawn in about 957()7
drawings.
456. After this notice of what had been published by De
Moivre and Laplace, we proceed to examine Euler's solution.
The problem appears in Euler's Opuscida Analytica, Vol. Ii.,
1785. In this volume pages 331 — 346 are occupied with a memoir
entitled Solutio quarundam quaestionum dijjiciliorum in calculo
prohabilium. Euler begins thus :
His quaestionibus occasionem dedit ludus passim publice institutus,
quo ex nonaginta scliedulis, numeris 1, 2, 3, 4,... 90 signatis, statis tem-
poribus quinae schedulae sorte extrahi sclent. Hinc ergo hujusmodi
quaestiones oriuntur: quanta scilicet sit probabilitas ut, postquam datus
extractionum numerus fuerit peractus, vel omnes nonaginta numeri
exierint, vel saltern 89, vel 88, vel pauciores. Has igitur quaestiones,
utpote difficillimas, hie ex principiis calculi Probabilium jam pridem usu
receptis, resolvere constitui. Neque me deterrent objectiones Illustris
lyAlembert, qui huuc calculum suspectum reddere est conatiis. Post-
quam enim summus Geometra studiis mathematicis valedixit, lis etiam
helium indixisse videtur, dum pleraque fundamenta solidissinie stabilita
evertere est aggressus. Quamvis enim hae objectiones apud ignaros
maximi ponderis esse debeant, hand tamen metuendum est, inde ipsi
scientiae ullum detrimentum allatum iri.
457. Euler says that he finds a certain symbol very useful in
these calculations ; namely, he uses
_q] 1.2 q
458. Euler makes no reference to his predecessors De Moivre
and Laplace. He gives the formula for the chance that all the
254 EULEE.
tickets shall be drawn. This formula corresponds with Laplace's.
We have only to put 771 = w in Art. 453.
Euler then considers the question in which n — 1, or ?i — 2, ...
tickets at least are to be drawn. He discusses successively the
first case and the second case briefly, and he enunciates his
general result. This is tlie following ; suppose we require that
71 — V tickets at least shall be drawn, then the number of favour-
able cases is
+ {i> + l)<j> {», v+2){,j>{n-v- 2, r)}'
- i^^H^-±^ ^ („, ^ + 3){ct,in-v- 3, r) }'- . . .
This result constitutes the addition which Euler contributes to
what had been known before.
459. Euler's method requires close attention in order to gain
confidence in its accuracy ; it resembles that which is employed
in treatises on Algebra, to shew how many integers there are
which are less than a given number and prime to it. We will give
another demonstration of the result which will be found easier
to follow.
The number of ways in which exactly m tickets are drawn
is (^ (n, m) A'" {</) (0, r)Y. For the factor A"^ [(\> (0, r)Y is, by
Art. 454, the number of ways in which in a lottery of m tickets,
all the tickets will appear in the course of x drawings ; and
(n, 77i) is the number of combinations of ii things taken m at
a time.
The number of ways in which n — v tickets at least will appear,
will therefore be given by the formula S </> {ii, m) A"* {^ (0, r)Y,
where S refers to m, and m is to have all values between n and
n — v, both inclusive.
Thus we get
A" [^ (0, r)Y + « A'- [</> (0, r)r + ^^^-^ A»-[<^ (0, ryf
the series extending^ to i^ + 1 terms.
EULER. 255
We may write this for shortness thus,
{a-+ n A-- + 4;^ A- + " ^"^^;'- '' A-. ...} j^ (0, ,.;}:
Now put E—1 for A, expand, and reariange in powers of E;
we shall thus obtain
1^" - (/> {n, V + 1) E''-'-' -\-{v + l)^ {n, V + 2) E"-'"'
- (^^±1)^^ ^ (., . + .3) E-^ + ...} {^ (0, .^ ;
and this coincides with Euler's result.
We shall find in fact that when we put E—1 for A, the
coefficient of E''~^ is
(- '^y \J1 U n ^ P^P-^') p{r-V){p-^-.^ I
\p \n-p \ ^ "^ 1.2 1.2.3 ■^•••j'
where the series in brackets is continued to z^ + 1 terms, unless
p be less than z^ + 1 and then it is continued to jj + 1 terms
only. In the former case the sum of the series can be obtained by
taking the coefficient of x" in the expansion of (1 — xY (1 - xy\
that is in the expansion of (1 — xY~^. In the latter case the sum
would be the coefficient of x^ in the same expansion, and is there-
fore zero, except when ^9 is zero and then it is unity.
460. Since r tickets are drawn each time, the greatest number
of tickets which can be drawn in x drawings is xr. Thus, as
Euler remarks, the expression
[<^ («. r)Y - n [4> [n - 1, r)Y + ^^^ {<i> (u - 2. r)]' - ...
must be zero if n be greater than xr ; for the expression gives the
number of ways in which 71 tickets can be drawn in r drawings.
Euler also says that the case in which n is equal to xr is re-
markable, for then the expression just given can be reduced to
a product of factors, namely to
256 EULER
Euler does not demonstrate this result; perhaps he deduced
it from the Theory of ProbabiHty itself. For if xr = n, it is
obvious that no ticket can be repeated, when all the tickets are
drawn in r drawings. Thus the whole number of favourable cases
which can occur at the first drawing must be the number of
combinations of n things taken r at a time ; the whole number
of favourable cases which can occur at the second drawing is the
number of combinations of ?2 — r things taken r at a time ; and
so on. Then the product of all these numbers gives the whole
number of favourable cases.
This example of the summation of a series indirectly by the aid
of the Theory of Probability is very curious ; see also Art. 451.
461. Euler gives the following paragraph after stating his
formulae,
In his probabilitatibiis aestimandis utique assiimitur omnes litteras
ad extrahendum aeque esse proclives, quod autem 111. D^Alemhert negat
assumi posse. Arbitratur enim, simul ad omnes tractus jam ante per-
actos respici oportere; si enim quaepiam litterae nimis crebro fuerint
extractae, turn eas in sequentibus tractibus rarius exituras; contrarium
vero eveniie si quaepiam litterae nimis raro exierint. Haec ratio, si
valeret, etiam valitura esset si sequentes tractus demum post annum,
vel adeo integrum speculum, quin etiam si in alio quocunque loco
instituerentur ; atque ob eandem rationem etiam ratio haberi deberet
omnium tractuum, qui jam olim in quibuscunque terrae locis fuerint
peracti, quo certe vix quicquam absurdius excogitari potest.
462. In Euler's Opuscula Analytica, Yol. ii., 1785, there is
a memoir connected with Life Assurance. The title is Solutio
quaestionis ad calculum j)7vhahilitatis pertinentis. Quantum duo
conjuges per^solvere deheant, ut suis haeredihus post utriusque
mortem certa argenti summa persolvatiir. The memoir occupies
pages 315 — 330 of the volume.
Euler repeats a table which he had inserted in the Berlin
Memoirs for 1760 ; see Art. 433. The table shews out of 1000
infants, how many will be alive at the end of any given year.
Euler supposes that in order to ensure a certain sum when
both a husband and wife are dead, x is paid down and z paid
EULEE. 257
annually besides, until both are dead. He investigates the re-
lation which must then hold between x, z and the sum to be
ensured. Thus a calculator may assign an arbitrary value to two
of the three quantities and determine the third. He may sup-
pose, for example, that the sum to be ensured is 1000 Rubles,
and that x = 0, and find z.
Euler does not himself calculate numerical results, but he
leaves the formulae quite ready for application, so that tables
might be easily constructed.
17
CHAPTER XIII.
D'ALEMBERT.
463. D'Alembert was born in 1717 and died in 1788. This
great mathematician is known in the history of the Theory of Pro-
bability for his opposition to the opinions generally received ; his
high reputation in science, philosophy, and literature have secured
an amount of attention for his paradoxes and errors which they
would not have gained if they had proceeded from a less distin-
guished writer. The earliest publication of his peculiar opinions
seems to be in the article Croix ou Pile of the Fncyclopedie ou
Dictionnaire Raisonne We will speak of this work simply as
the Encyclopedie, and thus distinguish it from its successor the
Encyclopedie M^thodique. The latter work is based on the former ;
the article Croiw ou Pile is reproduced unchanged in the latter.
464. The date of the volume of the Encyclopedie containing
the article Croix ou Pile, is 1754. The question proposed in the
article is to find the chance of throwing head in the course of two
throws with a coin. Let H stand for head, and T for taiL Then
the common theory asserts that there are four cases equally likely,
namely, HH, TH, II2\ TT\ the only unfavourable case is the
3
last ; therefore the required chance is - . D'Alembert however
4
doubts whether this can be correct. He says that if head appears
at the first throw the game is finished and therefore there is no
d'alembert. 259
need of the second throw. Thus he makes only three cases,
2
namely, H, TH, TT\ therefore the chance is ^.
o
Similarly in the case of three throws he makes only four cases,
namely, H, TH, TTE, TTT: therefore the chance is |. The
common theory would make eight equally likely cases, and obtain
- for the chance.
465. In the same article D'Alembert notices the Petersburg
Problem. He refers to the attempts at a solution in the Com-
mentarii Acad Petrop. Vol. v, which w^e have noticed in
Arts. 889 — 393 ; he adds : mais nous ne savons si on en sera satis-
fait ; et il y a ici quelque scandale qui merite bien d'occuper les
Algebristes. D'Alembert says we have only to see if the expecta-
tion of one player and the corresponding risk of the other really
is infinite, that is to say greater than any assignable finite number.
He says that a little reflexion will shew that it is, for the risk
augments wdth the number of throws, and this number may by the
conditions of the game proceed to any extent. He concludes that
the fact that the game may continue for ever is one of the reasons
wdiich produce an infinite expectation.
D'Alembert proceeds to make some further remarks w^hich are
repeated in the second volume of his Ojniscides, and which will
come under our notice hereafter. We shall also see that in the
fourth volume of his Opuscules D'Alembert in fact contradicts the
conclusion which w^e have just noticed.
466. We have next to notice the article Gageure, of the
Encyclopedie; the volume is dated 1757. D'Alembert says he wall
take this occasion to insert some ver}^ good objections to what he
had given in the article Croix ou Pile. He says, Elles sont de
M. Necker le fils, citoyen de Geneve, professeur de Mathematiques
en cette ville, ... nous les avons extraits d'une de ses lettres. The
objections are three in number. First Necker denies that D'Alem-
bert's three cases are equally likely, and justifies this denial.
Secondly Necker gives a good statement of the solution on the
17—2
2(j0 d'alembert.
ordinary theory. Thirdly, he shews that D'Alembert's view is
inadmissible as leading to a result which is obviously untrue : this
objection is given by D'Alembert in the second volume of his
Opuscules, and will come before us hereafter. D'Alembert after
giving the objections says, Ces objections, sur-tout la derniere,
meritent sans doute beaucoup d'attention. But still he does not
admit that he is convinced of the soundness of the common theory.
The article Gageure is not reproduced in the Encyclopklie
M<itliodique.
467. D'Alembert wrote various other articles on our subject
in the E ncy dope die ; but they are unimportant. We will briefly
notice them.
Als3nt. In this article D'Alembert alludes to the essay by
Nicolas Bernoulli ; see Art. 338.
Avantage. This article contains nothing remarkable.
Bassette. This article contains a calculation of the advantage
of the Banker in one case, namely that given by Montmort on his
page 145.
Carreau. This article gives an account of the sorts de jeu dont
M. de Buff on a donne le calcid in 1733, avant que d'etre de
V Academie des Sciences ; see Art. 354.
De. This article shews all the throws which can be made with
two dice, and also with three dice.
Loterie. This is a simple article containing ordinary remarks
and examples.
Pari. This article consists of a few lines giving the ordinary
rules. At the end we read : Au reste, ces regies doivent ^tre modi-
fiees dans certains cas, ou la probabilite de gagner est fort petite,
et celle de perdre fort grande. Voyez Jeu. There is however
nothing in the article Jeu to which this remark can apply, which
is the more curious because of course Jeu precedes Pari in alpha-
betical order; the absurdity is reproduced in the Encyclopedic
M4thodi€[ue.
The article Prohahilite in the Encyclopedie is apparently by
Diderot. It gives the ordinary view of the subject with the excep-
tion of the point which we have noticed in Art. 91.
d'alembert. 261
468. In various places in his Ojyuscules Mathematiques D'Alem-
bert gives remarks on the Theory of ProbabiUties. These remarks
are mainly directed against the first principles of the subject which
D'Alembert professes to regard as unsound. We will now examine
all the places in which these remarks occur.
469. In the second volume of the Opuscules the first memoir
is entitled Reflexions silt le calcul des Prohabilites ; it occupies
pages 1 — 25. The date of the volume is 1761. D'Alembert
begins by quoting the common rule for expectation in the Theory
of Probability, namely that it is found by taking the product of the
loss or gain which an event will produce, by the probability that
this event will happen. D'Alembert says that this rule had been
adopted by all analysts, but that cases exist in which the rule
seems to fail.
470. The first case wdiich D'Alembert brings forward is that
of the Petersburg Problem; see Art. 389. By the ordinary theory
A ought to give B an infinite sum for the privilege of playing
with him. D'Alembert says.
Or, independamment de ce qu'une somme infinie est line cliimere,
11 n'y a personne qui vouliit douner pour jouer a ce jeu, je ne dis pas
une somme infinie, mais meme une somme assez modique.
471. D'Alembert notices a solution of the Petersburg Problem
which had been communicated to him by un Geometre celebre
de I'Academie des Sciences, plein de savoir et de sagacite. He
means Fontaine I presume, as the solution is that which Fontaine
is known to have given ; see Montucla, page 403 : in this solution
the fact is considered that B cannot pay more than a certain sum,
and this limits what A ought to give to induce B to play. D'Alem-
bert says that this is unsatisfactory ; for suppose it is agreed that
the game shall only extend to a finite number of trials, say 100 ;
then the theory indicates that A should give 50 crowns. D'Alem-
bert asserts that this is too much.
The answer to D'Alembert is simple ; and it is very well put in
fact by Condorcet, as we shall see hereafter. The ordinary rule is
entitled to be adopted, because in the long run it is equally fair to
262 d'alembeet.
both parties A and B, and any other rule would be unfah^ to one
or the other.
472. D'Alembert concludes from his remarks that when the
probability of an event is very small it ought to be regarded and
treated as zero. For example he says, suppose Peter plays with
James on this condition ; a coin is to be tossed one hundred times,
and if head appear at the last trial and not before, James shall give
2^^^ crowns to Peter. By the ordinary theory Peter ought to give
to James one crown at the beginning of the game.
D'Alembert says that Peter ought not to give this crown
because he will certainly lose, for head will appear before the
hundredth trial, certainly though not necessarily.
D'Alembert's doctrine about a small probability being equi-
valent to zero was also maintained by Buffon.
473. D'Alembert says that we must distinguish between what
is metaphysically possible, and what is physically possible. In the
first class are included all those things of which the existence is not
absurd ; in the second class are included only those things of which
the existence is not too extraordinary to occur in the ordinary
course of events. It is metaphysically possible to throw two sixes
with two dice a hundred times running ; but it is physically impos-
sible, because it never has happened and never will happen.
This is of course only saying in another way that a very small
chance is to be regarded and treated as zero. DAlembert shews
however, that when we come to ask at what stage in the diminu-
tion of chance we shall consider the chance as zero, we are in-
volved in difficulty ; and he uses this as an additional argument
against the common theory.
See also Mill's Logic, 1862, Vol. ii. page 170.
474. D'Alembert says he will propose an idea which has
occurred to him, by which the ratio of probabilities may be
estimated. The idea is simply to make experiments. He ex-
emplifies it by supposing a coin to be tossed a large number of
times, and the results to be observed. We shall find that this
has been done at the instance of Buffon and others. It is need-
less to say that the advocates of the common Theory of Proba-
d'alembeht. 263
bility would be quite willing to accept D'Alembert's reference to
experiment ; for relying on the theorem of James Bernoulli, they
would have no doubt that experiment would confirm their calcula-
tions. It is however curious that D'Alembert proceeds in his
very next paragraph to make a remark which is quite inconsistent
with his appeal to experiment. For he says that if head has
arrived three times in succession, it is more likely that the next
arrival will be tail than head. He says that the oftener head
has arrived in succession the more likely it is that tail will
arrive at the next throw. He considers that this is obvious, and
that it furnishes another example of the defects of the ordinary
theory. In the Opuscules, Vol. iv. pages 90 — 92, D'Alembert
notices the charge of inconsistency which may be urged against
him, and attempts to reply to it.
475. D'Alembert then proceeds to another example, which,
as he intimates, he had already given in the Encyclopedie, under
the titles Croix ou Pile and Gageure ; see Art. 463. The question
is this : required the probability of throwing a head with a coin
in two trials.
D'Alembert came to the conclusion in the Encyclopedie that
2 3
the chance ought to be ^ instead of -r . In the Opuscides how-
ever he does not insist very strongly on the correctness of the
2
result ^ , but seems to be content with saying that the reasoning
o
3
which jDroduces j is unsound.
D'Alembert urges his objections against the ordinary theory
with great pertinacity ; and any person who wishes to see all that
a gi'eat mathematician could produce on the wrong side of a
question should consult the original memoir. But we agree with
every other ^^Titer on the subject in thinking that there is no
real force in D'Alembert's objections.
476. The folloAving extract will shew that D'Alembert no
2
longer insisted on the absolute accuracy of the result ^ :
264^ d'alembekt.
Je ne voudrois pas cependant regarder en toute rigueur les trois coups
dont il s'agit, comme egalement possibles. Car 1°, il povirroit se faire
en effet (et je suis meme porte a le croire), que le cas pile croix ne fut
pas exactement aussi possible que le cas croix seiil; mais le rapport des
possibilites me paroit inappretiable. 2". II poiirroit se faire encore que
le coup 2)il& croix fiit un peu plus possible que pile pile, par cette seule
raison que dans le dernier le meme effet arrive deux fois de suite; mais
le rapport des possibilites (suppose qu'elles soient inegales), n'est pas
plus facile a etablir dans ce second cas, que dans le premier. Ainsi
il pourroit tres-bien se faire que dans le cas propose, le rapport des
probabilites ne fut ni de 3 a 1, ni de 2 a 1 (comme nous I'avons sup-
pose dans VUncyclopeclie) mais un incommensurable ou inappretiable,
moyen entre ces deux nombres. Je crois cependant que cet incommen-
surable approcliera plus de 2 que de 3, parce qu' encore une fois il n'y
a que trois cas possibles, et non pas quatre. Je crois de meme et par
les memes raisons, que dans le cas ou Ton joueroit en trois coups, le
rapport de 3 a 1, que donne ma methode, est plus pres du vrai, que
le rapport de 7 h 1, donne par la methode ordinaire, et qui me paroit
exorbitant.
477. D'Alembert returns to the objection which had been
urged against his method, and which he noticed under the title
Gageure in the EncyclopMie ; see Art. 466. Let there be a
die with three faces, A, B, C ; then according to DAlembert's
original method in the Encydopedie, the chances would always
be rather against the appearance of a specified face A, however
great the number of trials. Suppose n trials, then by DAlembert's
method the chance for the appearance of A is to the chance
against it as 2" — 1 is to 2".
For example, suppose ti = 8 : then the favourable cases are
A, BA, CA, BBA, BOA, CCA, CBA ; the unfavourable cases are
BBB, BBC, BOB, BCG, CBB, GBG, GGG, GGB: thus the ratio
is that of 7 to 8. D'Alembert now admits that these cases are
not equally likely to happen ; though he believes it difficult to
assign their ratio to one another.
Thus we may say that D'Alembert started with decided but
erroneous opinions, and afterwards passed into a stage of general
doubt and uncertainty; and the dubious honour of effecting the
transformation may be attributed to Necker.
d'alembert. 265
478. D'Alembert thus sums up his results, on his page 24 :
Concluons de toutes ces reflexions j 1". que si la regie que j'ai donnee
dans Y Encyclopedie (faute d'en connoitre une meilleure) pour deter-
miner le rapport des probabilites au jeu de croix et pile, n'est point
exacte a la rigueur, la regie ordinaire pour determiner ce rapport, Test
encore moins; 2". que pour parvenh a une tlieorie satisfaisante du cal-
cul des probabilites, il faudroit resoudre plusieurs Problemes qui sont
peut-etre insolubles; savoir, d'assigner le vrai rapport des probabilites
dans les cas qui ne sont pas egalement possibles, ou qui peuvent
n'etre pas regardes conime tels; de determiner quand la j)robabilite
doit etre regardee comme nulle ; de fixer enfin comment on doit estimer
I'esperance ou I'enjeu, selon que la probabilite est 2)lus ou moins grande.
479. The next memoir by D'Alembert which we have to
notice is entitled Sur^ Vwpplication du Calcid des Prohahilites a
Vinocidation de la petite Verole ; it is published in the second
volume of the Opuscules. The memoir and the accompanying
notes occupy pages 26 — 95 of the volume.
480. "We have seen that Daniel Bernoulli had written a
memoir in which he had declared himself very strongly in favour
of Inoculation ; see Art. 398. The present memoir is to a certain
extent a criticism on that of Daniel Bernoulli. D'Alembert does
not deny the advantages of Inoculation ; on the contrary, he is
rather in favour of it : but he thinks that the advantages and
disadvantages had not been properly compared by Daniel Ber-
noulli, and that in consequence the former had been overestimated.
The subject is happily no longer of the practical importance it
was a century ago, so that we need not give a very full account
of D'Alembert's memoir ; we shall be content with stating some
of its chief points.
481. Daniel Bernoulli had considered the subject as it related
to the state, and had shewn that Inoculation was to be recom-
mended, because it augmented the mean duration of life for
the citizens. D'Alembert considers the subject as it relates to
a private individual : suppose a person who has not yet been
attacked by small-pox ; the question for him is, whether he will
be inoculated, and thus run the risk, small though it may be,
of dying in the course of a few days, or whether he will take his
2GG d'aleivibert.
cliauc3 of escaping entirely from an attack of small-pox during
his life, or at least of recovering if attacked.
D'Alembert thinks that the prosj^ect held out to an individual
of a gain of three or four years in the probable duration of his
hfe, may perhaps not be considered by him to balance the im-
mediate danger of submitting to Inoculation. The relative value
of the alternatives at least may be too indefinite to be estimated ;
so that a person may hesitate, even if he does not altogether
reject Inoculation.
482. D'Alembert lays great stress on the consideration that
the additional years of life to be gained form a remote and not
a present benefit ; and moreover, on account of the infirmities of
age, the later years of a life must be considered of far less value
than the years of early manhood.
D'Alembert distinguishes between the physical life and the
real life of an individual. By the former, he means life in the
ordinary sense, estimated by total duration in years ; by the latter,
he means that portion of existence during which the individual is
free from suffering, so that he may be said to enjoy life.
Again, with respect to utility to his country, D'Alembert dis-
tinguishes between the p)liysical life and the civil life. During
infancy and old age an individual is of no use to the state ; he
is a burden to it, for he must be supported and attended by
others. During this period D'Alembert considers that the indi-
vidual is a charge to the state ; his value is negative, and becomes
positive for the intermediate periods of his existence. The civil
life then is measured by the excess of the productive period of
existence over that which is burdensome.
Relying on considerations such as these, D'Alembert does not
admit the great advantage which the advocates for Inoculation found
in the fact of the prolongation of the mean duration of human
life effected by the operation. He looks on the problem as far
more difficult than those who had discussed it appeared to have
supposed.
483. We have seen that Daniel Bernoulli assumed that the
small-pox attacked every year 1 in ii of those not previously
d'alembeht. 2G7
attacked, and that 1 died out of every m attacked ; on these
hypotheses he solved definitely the problem which he undertook.
D'Alembert also gives a mathematical theory of inoculation ; but he
does not admit that Daniel Bernoulli's assumptions are established
by observations, and as he does not replace them by others, he
cannot bring out definite results like Daniel Bernoulli does.
There is nothing of special interest in D'Alembert's mathematical
investigation; it is rendered tedious by several figures of curves
which add nothing to the clearness of the process they are sup-
posed to illustrate.
The follomng is a specimen of the investigations, rejecting the
encumbrance of a figure which D'Alembert gives.
Suppose a large number of infants born nearly at the same
epoch ; let y represent the number alive at the end of a certain
time ; let ti represent the number who have died during this
period of small-pox : let z represent the number who would have
been alive if small-pox did not exist : required z in terms of y
and u.
Let dz denote the decrement of ^ in a small time, dy the
decrement of y in the same time. If we supposed the z individuals
subject to small-pox, we should have
dz = - dii.
y ^
But we must subtract from this value of dz the decrement
arising from small-pox, to which the z individuals are by hypo-
z
thesis not liable : this is - du.
y
Thus, dz = - dy + - du ;
y y
z z
we put -^ - du and not du, because z and y diminish while
/ y y
u increases. Then
dz dif du
^ y y
therefore log z = \ogy + \ —
/du
268 d'alembert.
The result is not of practical use because the value of the
C Ciu
integral 1— is not known. D'Alembert gives several formulie
which involve this or similar unfinished integrations.
484. D'Alembert draws attention on his page 74 to the two
distinct methods by which we may propose to estimate the espe-
7'ance de vivre for a person of given age. The mean duration of
life is the average duration in the ordinary sense of the word
average ; the j^^^^ohahle duration is such a duration that it is an
even chance whether the individual exceeds it or falls short of it.
Thus, according to Halley's tables, for an infant the 7nea)i life is
26 years, that is to say if we take a large number N of infants
the sum of the years of their lives will be 2QN; the probable
N
life is 8 years, that is to say ^ of the infants die under 8 years
N
old and - die over 8 years old.
Li
The terms mea/i life and probable life which we here use have
not always been appropriated in the sense we here explain ; on the
contrary, what we call the mean life has sometimes been called
the probable life. D'Alembert does not propose to distinguish the
two notions by such names as we have used. His idea is rather
that each of them might fairly be called the duration of life to be
expected, and that it is an objection against the Theory of Proba-
bility that it should apparently give two different results for the
same problem.
485. We will illustrate the point as D'Alembert does, by means
of what he calls the curve of mortaliti/.
Let X denote the number of years measured from an epoch ; let
yjr (x) denote the number of persons alive at the end of x years
from birth, out of a large number born at the same time. Let
'yjr (x) be the ordinate of a curve ; then yjr (x) diminishes from
X = to X = c, say, where c is the greatest age that persons can
attain, namely about 100 years.
This curve is called the curve of mortality by D'Alembert.
d'alembert. 2G9
The mean duration of life for persons of the age a years is
I -v/r (x) dx
a
The probable duration is a quantity h such that
This is D'Alembert's mode. We might however use another
curve or function. Let cf) (x) be such that <^ (x) dx represents the
number who die in an element of time dx. Then the mean dura-
tion of life for j)ersons aged a years is
I (a? — a) (f) (x) dx
a
I </) (x) dx
J a
The probable duration is a quantity h such that
I (f) (x) dx = I cj) (x) dx,
that is I (f> (x) dx = - j (f) (x) dx.
Thus the mean duration is represented by the abscissa of the
centre of gi'avity of a certain area ; and the probable duration is
represented by the abscissa corresponding to the ordinate which
bisects that area.
This is the modern method of illustrating the point ; see
Art. 101 of the Theory of Probability in the Encyclopcedia Metro-
politana.
486. We may easily shew that the two methods of the pre-
ceding Article agree.
For we have <f)(x) —— h -^fr' (x), where Jc is some constant.
Therefore
I {x — a)<f> (x) dx j (x — ^) ^' (^) <^'^
. ' a J_a .
I <^ (x) dx I -v/r' (x) dx
J a -'a
270 d'alemfsErt.
iind I (x — «) -v/r' (x) dx = (x — a) ^jr {x) — I yfr (x) dx,
therefore I (x — a) yjr' (x) dx = — j yjr (x) dx;
and \//' (x) dx=: — yjr (a).
a
Thus
I (a? — a) (p (x) dx I yjr (x) dx
a .' a
V (.X) dx ^ ^"^
a
This shews that ihe two methods give the same mean duration.
In the same way it may be shewn that they give the same pyvhahle
duration.
487. D'Alembert draws attention to an erroneous solution of
the problem respecting the advantages of Inoculation, which he
says was communicated to him by un savant Geotnetre. D'Alem-
bert shews that the solution must be erroneous because it leads to
untenable results in two cases to which he applies it. But he does
not shew the nature of the error, or explain the principle on which
the pretended solution rests ; and as it is rather curious we will
now consider it.
Suppose that N infants are born at the same
epoch, and let a table of mortality be formed by
recording how many die in each year of all dis-
eases excluding small-pox, and also how many die
of small-pox. Let the table be denoted as here ;
so that u^ denotes the number who die in the r*'^ year excluding
those who die of small-pox, and v,. denotes the number who die of
small-pox. Then we can use the table in the following way : sup-
pose M any other number, then if u^ die in the r*'' year out of N
M
from all diseases except small-pox, -^^ w,. would die out of M; and
so for any other proportion.
Now suppose small-pox eradicated from the list of human dis-
eases ; required to construct a new table of mortality from the
above data. The savant Geometre proceeds thus. He takes the
1
^1
^'l
2
^'■2
^'2
3
«'3
%
4
^^4
^'4
d'alembert. 271
preceding table and destroys the colmnn v^, v^, ^3> ••• Then he
assumes that the remaining column will shew the correct mortality
for the number N—n at starting, where n is the total number who
died of small-pox, that is n — v^-\- v^-\-v^+ ...
M
Thus if we start w4th the number M of infants ^r^ ?<,. would
N-n '
die on this assumption in the r^^ year.
There is a certain superficial plausibility in the method, but it
is easy to see that it is unsound, for it takes too unfavourable a view
of human life after the eradication of small-pox. For let
u^ + ^^2 + • • • ^^r = ^r >
then we know from the observations that at the end of r years
there are N —U^— V^ survivors of the original N \ of these w.^^ die
in the next year from all diseases excluding small-pox. Thus
excluding small-pox
^r+i
N-U,- V/
is the ratio of those who die in the year to those who are aged
r years at the beginning of the year. And this ratio will be the
ratio which ought to hold in the new tables of mortality. The
method of the savant Geometre gives instead of this ratio the
greater ratio
'•+1
N- U.-
n
488. Thus we see where the savant Geometre was wrong, and
the nature of the error. The pages in D'Alembert are 88 — 92 ;
but it will require some attention to extricate the false principle
really used from the account which D'Alembert gives, which is also
obscured by a figure of a curve. In D'Alembert's account regard
is paid to the circumstance that Inoculation is fatal to some on
whom it is performed ; but this is only a matter of detail : the
essential principle involved is that which we have here exhibited.
489. The next publication of D'Alembert on the subject of
Probabilities appears to consist of some remarks in his Melanges
272 d'alembert.
de Philosophie, Vol. v. I have never seen the original edition of
this work ; but I have no doubt that the remarks in the Melanges
de Philosopliie were those which are reprinted in the first volume
of the collected edition of the literary and philosophical works of
D'Alembert, in 5 Vols. 8vo, Paris, 1821. According to the cita-
tions of some writers on the subject I conclude that these remarks
also occur in the fourth volume of the edition of the literary and
philosophical works in 18 Vols. 8vo, Paris, 1805.
490. In the first volume of the edition of 1821 there are two
essays, one on the general subject of Probabilities, and the other on
Inoculation.
The first essay is entitled Doutes et questions sur le Calcul des
Prohahilites. These occupy pages 451 — 466 ; the pages being
closely printed.
D'Alembert commences thus :
On se plaint assez communement que les formules des matli^ma-
ticiens, appliquees aux objets de la nature, ne se trouvent que trop
en defaut. Personne neanmoins n'avait encore apergu ou cru aper-
cevoir cet inconvenient dans le calcul des prohahilites. J'ai os6 le
premier proposer des doutes sur quelques principes qui servent de base
ii ce calcul. De grands geometres ont juge ces doutes dignes d' attention;
d'autres grands geometres les ont trouves ahsurdes; car pourquoi adou-
cirais-je les termes dont ils se sont servis ? La question est de savoir
s'ils ont eu tort de les employer, et en ce cas ils auraient doublement
tort. Leur decision, qu'ils n'ont pas juge a propos de motiver, a en-
courage des mathematiciens mediocres, qui se sont hates d'ecrire sur ce
sujet, et de m'attaquer sans m'entendre. Je vais tacher de m'expliquer
si clairement, que presque tous mes lecteurs seront a portee de me
jager.
491. The essay which we are now considering may be described
in general as consisting of the matter in the second volume
of the Opuscides divested of mathematical formulae and so adapted
to readers less versed in mathematics. The objections against
the ordinary theory are urged perhaps with somewhat less con-
2
fidence ; and the particular case in which - was proposed in-
3 .
stead of 7 ^s the result in an elementary question does not appear.
But the other errors are all retained.
d'alembert. 273
492. There is some additional matter in the essay. D'Alem-
bert notices the calculation of Daniel Bernoulli relative to the
small inclination to the ecliptic of the orbits of the planets ;
see Art. 394. D'Alembert considers Daniel Bernoulli's result
as worthless.
DAlembert says with respect to Daniel Bernoulli,
Ce qu'il y a de singulier, c'est que ce grand geometre dont je parle,
a trouve ridicules, du moins ^ ce qu'on m'assure, mes raisonnemens
sur le calcul des 2^Tobahilites.
493. D'Alembert introduces an illustration which Laplace
afterwards adopted. D'Alembert supposes that we see on a table
the letters which form the word Constantinojyolitanensibus, ar-
ranged in this order, or arranged in alphabetical order ; and he
says that although mathematically these distributions and a third
case in which the letters follow at hazard are equally possible,
yet a man of sense would scarcely doubt that the first or second
distribution had not been produced by chance. See Laplace,
Theorie . . . des Proh. page xi.
494. D'Alembert quotes the article Fatalite in the Ency do-
pe die, as supporting him at least partially in one of the opinions
which he maintained ; namely that which we have noticed in the
latter part of our Art. 474. The name of the writer of the article
Fatalite is not given in the Encyclopedia.
495. The other essay Avhich we find in the first volume
of the edition of D'Alembert's literary and philosophical works
of 1821, is entitled Reflexions sur T Inoculation ; it occupies
pages 463 — 514.
In the course of the preface D'Alembert refers to the fourth
volume of his Opuscules. The fourth volume of the Opuscules is
dated 1768 ; in the preface to it D'Alembert refers to his Me-
langes de Philosophie, Vol. V.
We may perhaps infer that the fifth volume of the Melanges.,,
and the fourth volume of the Opuscules appeared at about the
same date.
496. The essay may be said to consist of the same matter
18
27^ d'alembert.
as appeared on the subject in the second volume of the Opuscules,
omitting the mathematical investigations, but expanding and
illustrating all the rest.
D'Alembert's general position is that the arguments which
have hitherto been brought forward for Inoculation or against it
are almost all unsound. His own reflexions however lead to the
conclusion that Inoculation is advantageous, and that conclusion
seems more confidently maintained in the essay than in the
Opuscules. Some additional facts concerning the subject are re-
ferred to in the essay ; they had probably been published since
the second volume of the Opuscules.
497. D'Alembert retains the opinion he had formerly held as
to the difficulty of an exact mathematical solution of the problem
respecting the advantages of Inoculation. He says in summing
up his remarks on this point : S'il est quelqu'un a qui la solution
de ce probl^me soit reservee, ce ne sera st\rement pas a ceux qui
la croiront facile.
498. D'Alembert insists strongly on the want of ample col-
lections of observations on the subject. He wishes that medical
men would keep lists of all the cases of small-pox which come
under their notice. He sa3"s,
...ces registres, donnes an public par les Facultes de medecine ou
par les particuliers, seraient certainement d'une utilite plus palpable
et plus prochaine, que les recueils d'observations meteorologiques pub-
lies avec tant de soin par nos Academies depuis 70 ans, et qui pour-
tant, ^ certains egards, ne sont pas eux-memes sans utilite.
Combien ne serait-il pas a souhaiter que les medecins, au lieu de
se quereller, de s'injurier, de se dechirer mutuellement au sujet de
I'inoculation avec un aeharnement tlieologique, au lieu de supposer
ou de degniser les faits, voulussent bien se reunir, pour faire de bonne
foi toutes les experiences necessaires sur une matiere si interessante
pour la vie des homrnes ]
499. We next proceed to the fourth volume of D'Alemherfs
Opuscules, in which the pages 73 — 105 and 283—341 are de-
voted to our subject. The remarks contained in these pages are
presented as extracts from letters.
U^ALEMBERT. 275
500, We will now take the first of the two portions, which
occupies pages 73 — 105,
D'Alembert begins with a section Siir le calcul des Prohahilites.
This section is chiefly devoted to the Petersburg Problem. The
chance that head wdll not appear before the n^^' throw is ^
on the ordinary theory. D'Alembert proposes quite arbitrarily to
change this expression into some other which will bring out a
finite result for ^'s expectation. He suggests , ^-^ where
/8 is a constant. In this case the summation wdiich the problem re-
1
quires can only be effected approximately. He also suggests ^^^^^
id
^^^d „^^.a(»-i) where a is a constant.
He gives of course no reason for these suggestions, except
that they lead to a finite result instead of the infinite result of
the ordinary theory. But his most curious suggestion is that of
1 ^ 1 , where B and K are constants
and 17 an odd integer. He says,
Nous mettons le nombre pair 2 au denominateur de Texposant, afiu
que quand on est arrive au nombre n qui donne la probabilite ^gale
a zero, on ne trouve pas la probabilite negative, en faisant n plus
grand que ee nombre, ce qui seroit clioquant ; car la probabilite ne
sauroit jamais ^tre au-dessous de zero, II est vrai qu'en faisant n
plus grand que le nombre dont il s'agit, elle devient imaginaire; mais
cet inconvenient me paroit moindre que celui de devenir negative;...
501. D'Alembert's next section is entitled Bur Tanalyse des
Jeux.
D'Alembert first proposes une consideration tr^s-simple et
tr^s-naturelle a faire dans le calcul des jeux, et dont M. de Buffon
m'a donne la premiere idee, . . . This consideration we will explain
when noticing a w^ork by Buffon. D'Alembert gives it in the
form which Buffon ought to have given it in order to do justice
to his own argument. But soon after in a numerical example
18—2
X
276 d'alembert.
D'Alembert falls back on Biiffon's own statement ; for he supposes
that a man has 100000 crowns, and that he stakes 50000 at an
equal game, and he says that this man's damage if he loses is
greater than his advantage if he gains ; jDuisque dans le premier
cas, il s'appauvrira de la moitie ; et que dans le second, il ne
s'enrichira que du tiers.
502. If a person has the chance ■ of gaining x and the
chance — - — of losing y, his expectation on the ordinary theory
is ~ ^ . D'Alembert obtains this result himself on the ordi-
nary principles ; but then he thinks another result, namely
— , miofht also be obtained and defended. Let jz denote the
sum which a man should give for the privilege of being placed
in the position stated. If he gains he receives x, so that as he
paid z his balance is x — z. Thus — is the correspondincj
expectation. If he loses, as he has already paid z he will have
to pay y — ^ additional, so that his total loss is y, and his con-
sequent expectation - — ^'^- . Then ^— — — is his total ex-
p -^ q p + q
pectation, which ought to be zero if z is the fair sum for him
to pay. Thus z = ^ ^^ . It is almost superfluous to observe
that the words which we have printed in Italics amount to as-
signing a new meaning to the problem. Thus D'Alembert gives
us not two discordant solutions of the sa77ie problem, but solu-
tions of two different problems. See his further remarks on his
page 283.
503. D'Alembert objects to the common rule of multiplying
the value to be obtained by the probability of obtaining it in
order to determine the expectation. He thinks that the pro-
bability is the principal element, and the value to be obtained
is subordinate. He brings the following example as an objection
against the ordinary theory; but his meaning is scarcely intel-
ligible :
N
d'alembert. 277
Qu'on propose de choisir entre 100 combinaisons, dont 99 feroiit
gagner mille ecus, et la 100® 99 mille ecus; quel sera I'liomme assez
iusense pour preferer celle qui donnera 99 mille ecus. Uesperance dans
les deux cas n'est done pas reellement la meme; quoiqu'elle soit la
meme suivant les regies des probabilites.
504^. D'Alembert appeals to the authority of Pascal, in the
following words :
Un homme, dit Pascal, passeroit pour fou, s'il hesitoit a so laisser
donner la mort en cas qu'avec trois dez on fit vingt fois de suite trois
six, ou d'etre Empereur si on y manquoit ? Je pense absolument comme
lui j mais pourquoi cet homme passeroit-il pour fou, si le cas dont il
s'agit, est 'pliysiquement j)ossible %
See too the edition of D'Alembert's literary and philosophical
works, Paris, 1821, Vol. I. page 553, note.
505. The next section is entitled 8ur la duree de la vie.
D'Alembert draws attentioD to the distinction between the mean
duration of life and the probable duration of life ; see Art. 484.
D'Alembert seems to think it is a great objection to the Theory
of Probabihty that there is this distinction.
D'Alembert's objection to the Theory of Probability is as
reasonable as an objection to the Theory of Mechanics would be
on the ground that the centre of gi'avity of an area does not
necessarily fall on an assigned line which bisects the area.
D'Alembert asserts that a numerical statement of Buffon's,
which Daniel Bernoulli had suspected of inaccuracy, was not really
inaccurate, but that the difference between Buffon and Daniel
Bernoulli arose from the distinction between what we call meaii
duration and probable duration of life.
506. The last section is entitled Sur un Memoire de M. Ber-
noulli concernant F Inoculation.
Daniel Bernoulli in the commencement of his memoir had
said, il seroit a souhaiter que les critiques fussent plus reserves
et plus circonspects, et sur-tout qu'ils se donnassent la peine de se
mettre au fait des choses qu'ils se proposent d'avance de critiquer.
The words se mettre au fait seem to have given great offence to
»'=7C' -tn'
27S D ALEMBEllT.
D'Alembert as he supposed they were meant for him. He refers
to them in the Opuscules, Vol. IV. pages IX, 99, 100 ; and he
seems with ostentatious deference to speak of Daniel Bernoulli
as ce grand Geometre; see pages 99, 101, 315, 821, 323 of the
volume,
507. D'Alembert objects to the hypotheses on which Daniel
Bernoulli had based his calculation ; see Art. 401. D'Alembert
brings forward another objection which is quite fallacious, and
which seems to shew that his vexation had disturbed his judg-
ment. Daniel Bernoulli had found that the average life of all
who die of small-pox is 6^^ years ; and that if small-pox were
extinguished the average human life would be 29^^ years. More-
over the average human life subject to small-pox is 26^^ years.
Also Daniel Bernoulli admitted that the deaths by small-pox
were — ^^ ^^^ ^^® deaths,
J-O
Hence D'Alembert affirms that the folloAving relation ought
to hold;
1 12
but the relation does not hold; for the terms on the left hand side
will give 27{^ nearly instead of 263^. D'Alembert here makes the
mistake which 1 have pointed out in Art. 487 ; when that Article
was written, I had not read the remarks by D'Alembert which
are now under discussion, but it appeared to me that D'Alembert
was not clear on the point, and the mistake which he now makes
confirms my suspicion.
To make the above equation correct we must remove 29^,
and j)ut in its place the average duration of those who die of
other diseases while small-pox still prevails ; this number will be
smaller than 29j^2'
508. We pass on to the pages 283—341 of the fourth volume
of the Opuscules. Here we have two sections, one Sur le Calcul
des probahilites, the other Sur les Calculs relatifs a I' Inoculation,
609. The first section consists of little more than a repetition
D ALEMBEllT. 279
of the remarks which have akeady been noticed. D'Alembei-t
records the origin of his doubts in these words :
II y a pres de trente ans que j'avois forme ces doutes en Hsaiit
Texcellent livre de M. BernoulU de Arte conjectandi ; . . .
He seems to have returned to his old error respecting Croix
ou Pile with fresh ardour : he says,
...si les trois cas, croix, pile et croix, pile et 2^ile, les seuls qui
puissent arriver dans le jeu propose, ne sont pas egalement possibles,
ce n'est point, ce me semble, par la raison qu'on en apporte commu-
nement, que la probabilite du premier est - , et celle des deux autres
Q X - ou - . Plus j'y pense, et plus il me paroit que Tiiathematique-
nient parlaut, ces trois coups sont egalement possibles...
510. D'Alembert introduces another point in which he ob-
jects to a principle commonly received. He will not admit that
it is the same thing to toss one coin m times in succession, or
to toss m coins simultaneously. He says it is perhaps physically
speaking more possible to have the same face occurring simul-
taneously an assigned number of times with m coins tossed at
once, than to have the same face repeated the same assigned
number of times when one coin is tossed ')n times. But no person
will allow what D'Alembert states. We can indeed suppose circum-
stances in which the two cases are not quite the same ; for example
if the coins used are not perfectly symmetrical, so that they
have a tendency to fall on one face rather than on the other.
But we should in such a case expect a run of resemblances rather
in using one coin for m throws, than in using m coins at once.
Take for a simple example m — 2. We should have rather more
than -r as the chance for the former result, and only - lor tlie
latter; see Laplace, Theorie...des Proh. page 402.
511. D'Alembert says on his page 290, II y a quelque temps
qu'un Joueur me demanda en combien de coups consecutifs on
pouvoit parier avec avantage d'amener une face donnee d'un de —
This is the old question proposed to Pascal by the Chevalier de
280 d'alembert.
Mere. D'Alembert answered that according to the common theory
in n trials, the odds would be as &" — 5" to 5". Thus there would
be advantage in undertaking to do it in four throws. Then
D'Alembert adds, Ce Joueur me repondit que Texperience lui avoit
para contraire a ce resultat, et qu'en jouant quatre coups de
suite pour amener une face donnee, il lui etoit arrive beaucoup
plus souvent de gagner que de perdre. D'Alembert says that
if this be true, the disagreement between theory and observation
may arise from the fact that the former rests on a supposition
which he has before stated to be false. Accordingly D'Alembert
points out that on his principles the number of favourable cases
in n throws instead of being 6" — 5^ as by the ordinary theory,
would be 1 + 5 + 5^4-... + 5'^~\ This is precisely analogous to what
we have given for a die with three faces in Art. 477. D'Alembert
however admits that we must not regard all these cases as equally
likely.
512. D'Alembert quotes testimonies in his own favour from the
letters of three mathematicians to himself; see his pages 296, 297.
One of these correspondents he calls, un tr^s-profond et trt^s-habile
Analyste ; another he calls, un autre Mathematicien de la plus
grande reputation et la mieux meritee ; and the third, un autre
Ecrivain tres-eclaire, qui a cultive les Mathematiques avec succ^s,
et qui est connu par un excellent Ouvrage de Philosophie. But
this Ecrivain tres-dclaire is a proselyte whose zeal is more con-
spicuous than his judgment. He says "ce que vous dites sur la
probabilite est excellent et trer-evident ; I'ancien calcul des pro-
babilitcs est ruine . . . D'Alembert is obliged to add in a note,
Je n'en demande pas tant, a beaucoup pres ; je ne pretends point
ruiner le calcul des probabilites, je desire seulement qu'il soit
eclairci et modifie.
513. D'Alembert returns to the Petersburg Problem. He
says,
Yous dites, Monsieur, que la raison pour laqiielle on trouve I'enjeu
infini, c'est la supposition tacite qu'on fait que le jeu peut avoir
une duree infinie, ce que n'est pas admissible, attendu que la vie des
hommes ne dure qu'un temps.
d'alembert. 281
D'Alembert brings forward four remarks which shew that thi^
mode of explaining the difficulty is unsatisfactory. One of theoi
is the following : instead of supposing that one crown is to be
received for head at the first throw, two for head at the second
throw, four for head at the third throw, and so on, suppose that in
each case only one crown is to be received. Then, although theo-
retically the game may endure to infinity, yet the value of the
expectation is finite. This remark may be said to contradict a
conclusion at which D'Alembert arrived in his article Croix oil
Pile, which we noticed in Ai"t. ^^d.
51-i. The case just brought forward is interesting because
D'Alembert admits that it might supply an objection to his prin-
ciples. He tries to repel the objection by saying that it only leads
him to suspect another principle of the ordinary theory, namely
that in virtue of which the total expectation is taken to be equal
to the sum of the partial expectations ; see his pages 299 — 301.
*
515. D'Alembert thus sums up his objections against the
ordinary theory :
Pour resumer en un mot tons ines doutes sur le calcul des pro-
babilites, et les mettre sous les yeux des vrais Juges; voici ce que
j'accorde et ce que je nie dans les raisonnemens explicites ou implicites
sur lesquels ce calcul me paroit fonde.
Premier raisonnement. Le u ombre des combinaisons qui amenent
tel cas, est au nombre des combinaisons qui amenent tel autre cas,
comme p est ^ q. Je conviens de cette verite qui est purement ma-
thematique; done, conclut-on, la probabilite du premier cas est a celle
du second comme j^ est a q. Yoila ce que je nie, ou du moins de
quoi je doute fort; et je crois que si, par exemple, ^^ = 5', et que dans
le second cas Je meme evenement se trouve un tres-grand nombre de
fois de suite, il sera moins probable physiquement que le premier,
quoique les probabilites mathematiques soient egales.
Second raisonnement. LaprobabiUte - est a la probabilite — comme
^ m n
np ecus est a mp ecus. J'en conviens; done— x mp ecus = - x np ecus;
j'en conviens encore; done Vesperance, ou ce qui est la meme chose,
282 d'alembert.
le sort d'un Joueur qui aura la probabilite — de gagner mp ecus,
sera egale a I'esperance, au sort d'un Joueur qui aura la probabilite
1
- de gagner np ecus. Yoila ce que je nie; je dis que Vesperaiice est
it
plus grande pour celui qui a la plus grande probabilite, quoique la
somme esperee soit moindre, et qu'on ne doit pas balancer de preferer
le sort d'un Joueur qui a la probabilite - de gagner 1000 ecus, au
sort d'un Joueur qui a la probabilite ^ttftt. d'en gagner 1000000.
Trolsieme raisonnement qui nest qiiimplicite. Soit p + q le nombre
total des cas, 2^ 1^ j^robabilite d'un certain nombre de cas, q la proba-
bilite des autres; la probabilite de cliacun sera a la certitude totale,
comme p et q sont k p + q. Viola ce que je nie encore; je conviens,
ou plutot j'accorde, que les probabilites de cliaque cas sont comme p
et q ; je conviens qu'il arrivera certainement et infailliblement un
des cas dont le nombre est jy + q', mais je nie que du rapport des pro-
babilites entr'elies, on puisse en conclure leur rapport a la certitude
absolue, parce que la certitude absolue est infinie par ra^iport a la plus
grande probabilite.
Vous me demanderez peut-etre quels sont les principes qu'il faut,
selon moi, substituer a ceux dont je revoque en doute I'exactitude ? Ma
reponse sera celle que j'ai deja faite; je n'en sais rien, et je suis meme
tres-porte a croii'e que la matiere dont il s'agit, ne peut etre soumise,
au moins a plusieurs egards, a un calcul exact et precis, egalement net
dans ses principes et dans ses resultats.
516. D'Alembert now returns to the calculations relating to
Inoculation. He criticises very minutely the mathematical in-
vestigations of Daniel Bernoulli.
The objection which D'Alembert first urges is as follows. • Let
s be the number of persons alive at the commencement of the
SOi'JC
time X ; then Daniel Bernoulli assumes that — -r- die from small-
pox during the time dx. Therefore the whole number who die
from small-pox during the (n -f- 1)*^ year is
f
""^^ sdx
d'alembeht. 2bo
S
But this is not the same thing as 7,-7 , where S denotes the
number aUve at the beginning of the year ; for s is a variable
gradually diminishing during the year from the value S with
which it began. But ^7 ^^ ^^^ result which Daniel Bernoulli
professed to take from observation ; therefore Daniel Bernoulli is
inconsistent with himself. D'Alembert's objection is sound ; Daniel
Bernoulli would no doubt have admitted it, and have given the
just reply, namely that his calculations only professed to be
approximately correct, and that they were approximately correct.
Moreover the error arising in taking sdx and S to be equal in
value becomes very small if we suppose S to be, not the value of
s when x = 7i ov n + 1 but, the intermediate value when x = n -\- -^ ;
and nothing in Daniel Bernoulli's investigation forbids this sup-
position.
517. We have put the objection in the preceding Article as
D'Alembert ought to have put it in fairness. He himself however
really assumes n = 0, so that his attack does not strictly fall on the
whole of Daniel Bernoulli's table but on its first line ; see Art. 403.
This does not affect the principle on which DAlembert's objection
rests, but taken in conjunction with the remarks in the preceding
Article, it will be found to diminish the practical value of the ob-
jection considerably. See D'Alembert's pages 312 — 314.
618. Another objection which D'Alembert takes is also sound ;
see his page 315. It amounts to saying that instead of using the
Differential Calculus Daniel Bernoulli ought to have used the
Calculus of Finite Differences. We have seen in Art. 417 that
Daniel Bernoulli proposed to solve various problems in the Theory
of Probability by the use of the Differential Calculus. The reply
to be made to D'Alembert's objection is that Daniel Bernoulli's
investigation accomplishes what was proposed, namely an approxi-
mate solution of the problem ; we shall however see hereafter in
examining a memoir by Trembley that, assuming the In^otheses of
Daniel Bernoulli, a solution by common algebra might be effected.
28 i d'alembert. -
519. D'Alembert thinks that Daniel Bernoulli might have
solved the problem more simply and not less accurately. For
Daniel Bernoulli made two assumptions ; see Art. 401. D'Alembert
says that only one is required ; namely to assume some function
of y for u in Art. 483. Accordingly D'Alembert suggests arbi-
trarily some functions, which have apparently far less to recom-
mend them as corresponding to facts, than the assumptions of
Daniel Bernoulli.
520. D'Alembert solves what he calls un prohleme assez cu-
rieux ; see his page 325. He solves it on the assumptions of Daniel
Bernoulli, and also on his own. We wdll give the former solution.
Return to Art. 402 and suppose it required to determine out of
the number s the number of those who will die by the small-pox.
Let ft) denote the number of those who do not die of small-pox.
Hence out of this number w during the time dx none will die
of small-pox, and the number of those who die of other diseases
/ sdx\ ft)
will be, on the assumptions of Daniel Bernoulli, [ — d^ —
Hence, — dco = (— d^ —
mnj ^ *
sdx\ ft)
mnJ f '
,1 r dco dP sdx
thereiore — = —34. - — . .
Substitute the value of s in terms of x and | from Art. 402,
and integrate. Thus we obtain
X
ft) Ce"
^ e" (/>^ - 1) + 1
where C is an arbitrary constant. The constant may be deter-
mined by taking a result which has been deduced from observa-
tion, namely that ^ = 97 when a? = 0.
521. D'Alembert proposes on his pages 326 — 328 the method
which according to his view should be used to find the value of
s at the time x, instead of the method of Daniel Bernoulli which
d'alembeet. 285
we gave in Art. 402. D'Alembert's method is too arbitrary in
its hypotheses to be of any value.
522. D'Alembert proposes to develop his refutation of the
Savant Geometre whom we introduced in Art. 487. He shews
decisively that this person was wrong ; but it does not seem to
me that he shews distinctly Jiow he was wrong.
523. D'Alembert devotes the last ten pages of the memoir
to the development of his own theory of the mode of comparing
the risk of an individual if he undergoes Inoculation with his
risk if he declines it. We have already given in Art. 482, a hint
of DAlembert's views ; his remarks in the present memoir are
ingenious and interesting, but as may be supposed, his h}^otheses
are too arbitrary to allow any practical value to his investiga-
tions.
524. Two remarks which he makes on the curve of mortality
may be reproduced ; see his page 840. It appears from Buffon''s
tables that the mean duration of life for persons aged n years
1
is always less than ^ (100 — n). Hence, taking 100 years as the
extreme duration of human life, it will follow that the curve of
mortality cannot be always concave to the axis of abscissse. Also
from the tables of Buffon it follows that the pivhahle duration
of life is almost always greater than the mean duration. D'Alem-
bert applies this to shew that the curve of mortality cannot be
always convex to the axis of abscissae.
525. The fifth volume of the Opuscules was published in
1768. It contains two brief articles with which we are con-
cerned.
Pages 228 — 231 are Bur les Tables de mortalite. The numeri-
cal results are given which served for the foundation of the two
remarks noticed in Art. 524.
Pages 508 — 510 are Sur les calculs relatifs d V inoculation.,.
These remarks form an addition to the memoir in pages 283 — 341
of the fourth volume of the Opuscules. D'Alembert notices a reply
which had been offered to one of his objections, and enforces the
28(> d'alembeut,
justness of his objections. Nevertheless he gives his reasons for
regarding Inoculation as a useful practice.
526. The seventh and eighth volume of the Opuscules were
published in 1780. D'Alembert says in an Advertisement pre-
fixed to the seventh volume, ''... Ce seront vraisemblablement, ^
peu de chose pr^s, mes derniers Ouvrages Mathematiques, ma tete,
fatiguee par quarante-cinq annees de travail en ce genre, n'etant
plus gu^re capable des profondes recherches qu'il exige." D'Alem-
bert died in 1788. It would seem according to his biographers
that he suffered more from a broken heart than an exhausted
brain during the last few years of his life.
527. The seventh volume of the Opuscules contains a memoir
Sur le calcul des Prohahilites, which occupies pages 39 — 60. We
shall see that D'Alembert still retained his objections to the
ordinary theory. He begins thus :
Je demande pardon aux Geometres de revenir encore sur ce sujet.
Mais j'avoue que j)lus j'y ai pense, plus je me suis confirme dans mes
<k>utes sur les principes de la theorie ordinaire; je desire qu' on eclaircisse
ces doutes, et que cette tlieorie, soit qu'on y change quelques principes,
soit qu'on la conserve telle qu'elle est, soit du moins exposee desormais
de maniere a ne plus laisser aucuii nnage.
528. We will not delay on some repetition of the old remarks ;
but merely notice what is new. We find on page 42 an error which
D'Alembert has not exhibited elsewhere, except in the article
Cartes in the Encyclopedie Methodique, which we shall notice
hereafter. He says that taking two throws there is a chance ^ of
1 -^
head at the first throw, and a chance - of head at the second
2
throw ; and thus he infers that the chance that head will arrive at
least once is - +-^ or 1. He says then, Or je demande si cela est
vrai, ou du moins si un pareil r^sultat, fonde sur de pareils prin-
cipes, est bien propre a satisfaire I'esprit, The answer is that the
result is false, being erroneously deduced : the error is exposed in
elementary works on the subject.
529. The memoir is chiefly devoted to the Petersburg Problem.
D'Alembert refers to the memoir in Yol. vi. of the Memoires...par
d'alembeht. 287
divers Savans... in which Laplace had made the supposition that
the coin has a gTeater tendency to fall on one side than the other,
but it is not known on which side. Suppose that 2 crowns are to
be received for head at the first trial, 4 for head at the second,
8 for head at the third, . . . Then Laplace shews that if the game is
to last for X trials the player ought to give to his antagonist less
than X crowns if x be less than 5, and more than x crowns if x be
greater than 5, and just x crow^ns if x be equal to 5. On the com-
mon hj^pothesis he would always have to give x crowns. These
results of Laplace are only obtained by him as approximations ;
D'Alembert seems to present them as if they were exact.
530. Suppose the probability that head should fall at first to
be ft) and not ^ ; and let the game have to extend over n trial s
Then if 2 crowns are to be received for head at the first trial, 4
for head at the second, and so on ; the sum which the player
ouQ:ht to orive is
2(o ;i + 2 (1 - ft)) + 2^ (1 - ft>)^ + ... + 2"-^ (1 - ft))"-'},
which we will call H.
D'Alembert suggests, if I understand him rightly, that if we
know nothing about the value of co we may take as a solution of
the problem, for the sum which the player ought to give I fldo).
But this involves all the difficulty of the ordinary solution, for the
result is infinite wdien n is. D'Alembert is however very obscure
here ; see his pages 45, 46.
He seems to say that I Cldco will be greater than, equal to, or
•^
less than ??, according as n is greater than, equal to, or less than 5.
But this result is false ; and the argument unintelligible or incon-
elusive. We may easily see by calculation that I D-dw = n when
n = l\ and that for any value of n from 2 to 6 inclusive
I Hc^ft) is less than n ; and that when n is 7 or any greater number
1
I Q.du> is greater than n.
'
288 d'alembert.
531. D'Alembert then proposes a method of solving the Peters-
hiirg Prohlem which shall avoid the infinite result ; this method is
perfectly arbitrary. He says, if tail has arrived at the first throw,
let the chance that head arrives at the next be ^ , and not
2
- , where a is some small quantity ; if tail has arrived at the first
throw, and at the second, let the chance that head arrives at the
next throw be ^ , and not ^ ; if tail has arrived at the first
throw, at the second, and at the third, let the chance that head
arrives at the next throw be — , and not - ; and so on.
^ Ji
The quantities a, h, c, ... are supposed small positive quantities,
and subjected to the limitation that their sum is less than unity,
so that every chance may be less than unity.
On this supposition if the game be as it is described in Art. 389,
it may be shewn that A ought to give half of the following series :
1
+ (!+«)
-f (1 - a) (1 + a + ^)
+ (1 - «) (1 - a - Z>) (1 + a + Z> + c)
■^(l-a){l- a-h-c) {l + a-\-h + c-\-d)
+
It is easily shewn that this is finite. For
(1) Each of the factors 1+a, \ -\-a-\-h, l + a + Z>+c, ...is less
than 2.
(2) \ — a — h is less than 1 — a\
1 — a — 5 — c is less than 1 — a — h, and a fortiori less than
1 — a ;
and so on.
Thus the series excluding the first two terms is less than the
Geometrical Progression
2 {1 - a + (1 - a)^ -f (1 - ay + (1 _ a)\ . .),
and is therefore finite.
d'alembert. 289
This is D'Alembert's principle, only he uses it thus: he shews
that all the terms beginning with
are less than
2{l-a){l-a-'h){l-a'-h'-e){l-a-h-c-d)s,
where s denotes the geometrical progression
r being = l^a — b-c — d. *
532. Thus on his arbitrary hypotheses D'Alembert obtains a
finite result instead of an infinite result. Moreover he performs
what appears a work of supererogation ; for he shews that the suc-
cessive terms of the infinite series which he obtains form a con-
tinually diminishing series beginning from the second, if we suppose
that a, h,Cjd, ... are connected by a certain law which he gives,
namely,
where p is a small fraction, and m — 1 is the number of the quan-
tities a, h, c, d, e, ,.. Again he shews that the same result holds if
we merely assume that a,h,c,d,e... form a continually diminish-
ing series. We say that this appears to be a work of supereroga-
tion for D'Alembert, because we consider that the infinite result
Avas the only supposed difficulty in the Petersburg Problem, and
that it was sufficient to remove this without shewing that the
series substituted for the ordinary series consisted of terms con-
tinually decreasing. But D'Alembert apparently thought differ-
ently ; for after demonstrating this continual decrease he says,
En voila assez pour faire voir que les termes de Tenjeu vont en
diininuant des le troisieme coup, jusqu'au dernier. Nous avons prouve
d'ailleurs que I'enjeu total, somme de ces termes, est fini, en supposant
meme le nombre de coups infini. Ainsi le resultat de la solution que
nous donnons ici du probleme de Petersbourg, n'est pas sujet a la diffi-
culte insoluble des solutions ordinaires.
583. We have one more contrilnition of D'Alembert's to our
subject to notice; it contains errors which seem extraordinary,
19
290 d'alembert.
even for him. It is the article Cartes in the Encyclo^edie Metho-
dique. The following problem is given,
Pierre tient huit cartes dans ses mains qui sont : tin as, lin deux,
un trois, im quatre, un cinq, un six, un sept et un huit, qu'il a melees :
Paul parie que les tirant Tune apres I'autre, il les devinera k mesure
qu'il les tirera. L'on demande combien Pierre doit parier centre un
que Paul ne reussira pas dans son enterprise "?
It is correctly determined that Paul's chance is
1111111
Then follow three problems formed on this ; the whole is ab-
surdly false. We give the words :
Si Paul parioit d'amener ou de deviner juste a un des sept coups
.11 1
seulement, son esperance seroit -+=+...+ -^ , et par consequent
I'enjeu de Pierre a celui de Paul, comme
11 1 . - 1 1 1
— 1 — 4- -I — a, I
8 7 2 8 7 "* 2*
Si Paul parioit d'amener juste dans les deux premiers coups seule-
1 1
ment, son esperance seroit o + ^ > et le rapport des enjeux celui de
1111
g + ^ a i-g-7.
S'il parioit d'amener juste dans deux coups quelconques, son espe-
.^11 11 11
ranee seroit ——+—— + ... ^ — ^ — + ... ^ — ^ — ^+...
8x7 8x6 S xz 7x6 7x2 6x5
The first question means, I suppose, that Paul undertakes to be
right once in the seven cases, and wrong six times. His chance
then is
l/llllllN
8(,7"^6 + 5 + 4 + 3'^2 + V-
For his chance of being right in the first case and wrong in the
other six is
16 5 4 8 2 1.. 1
8^r6^.5^4^3^2-''^'^^^^^^^'
d'alembert. 291
his chance of being right in the second case and wrong in all the
others is
7154321,,,. 1
^X;iX^x-^XjX-Xx, that IS
8 76 5 432' 8x6'
and so on.
If the meaning be that Paul undertakes to be right once at
7
least in the seven cases, then his chance is - . For his chance of
o
being wrong every time is
76543211
8^7^6^5^4^3^2' ^^ 8 '
therefore his chance of being right once at least is 1 — - , that is ^ .
o 8
Tlie second question means, I suppose, that Paul undertakes
to be right in the first two cases, and wrong in the other five.
His chance then is
1154321,,,. ■»
^XsX-X-XtX^Xt;, that IS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2' 8x7x6*
Or it may mean that Paul undertakes to be right in the first
two cases, but undertakes nothing for the other cases. Then his
. 1 1
chance is ^ x =■ .
The third question means, I suppose, that Paul undertakes to
be right in two out of the seven cases and wrong in the other five
cases. The chance then will be the sum of 21 terms, as 21 combi-
nations of pairs of things can be made from 7 things. The chance
that he is right in the first two cases and wrong in all the others is
1154321,. 1
gX^x^x^x-x^x^, that IS 3 ^ ^ ^ g ;
similarly we may find the chance that he is right in any two
assigned cases and wrong in all the others. The total chance will
be found to be
8{7(6 + 5- + 4 + 3 + 2 + V + 6(5+4 + S + 2 + V
19—2
292 d'alembekt.
Or tlie third question may mean that Paul undertakes to be
right twice at least in the course of the seven cases, or in other
words he undertakes to be right twice and undertakes nothing
more. His chance is to be found by subtracting from unity his
chance of being never right, and also his chance of being right only
once. Thus his chance is
1_1/1 1 1
8 8 1 7 "^ 6 "^ 5
^ + 5+9 + ... + i).
53-i. Another problem is given unconnected with the one we
have noticed, and is solved correctly.
The article in the Encyclopedie Metliodique is signed with the
letter which denotes D'Alembert. The date of the volume is 1784,
which is subsequent to D'Alembert's death ; but as the work was
published in parts this article may have appeared during D'Alem-
bert's life, or the article may have been taken from his manu-
scripts even if published after his death. I have not found it in
the original EncycloiJedie : it is certainly not under the title Cartes,
nor under any other which a person would naturally consult. It
seems strange that such errors should have been admitted into the
Encyclopedie Methodique.
Some time after I read the article Cartes and noticed the
errors in it, I found that I had been anticipated by Binet in the
Comptes Rendus ... Vol. xix. 1844. Binet does not exhibit any
doubts as to the authorship of the article ; he says that the three
problems are wrong and gives the correct solution of the first.
535. We will in conclusion briefly notice some remarks which
have been made respecting D'Alembert by other writers.
536. Montucla after alluding to the article Croix ou Pile says
on his page 406,
D'Alembert ne s'est pas borne a cet exemple, il en a accumule plu-
sieurs autres, soit dans le qiiatrieme volume de ses Opuscules, 1768, page
73, et page 283 du cinquieme; il s'est aussi etaye dii suffrage de divers
geometres qu'il qiialifie de distingues. Condorcet a appuye ces objec-
tions dans plusieurs articles de rEiicyclopedie methodique ou par ordre
de matieres. D'un autre cote, divers autres geometres out entrepris
d'alembert. 293
de r^pondre aux raisonnemens de d'Alembert, et je crois qu en par-
ticulier Daniel Bernoulli a pris la defense de la theorie ordinaire.
In this passage tlie word cinquieme is wrong; it should be
quatrihne. It seems to me that there is no foundation for the
statement that Condorcet supports D'Alembert's objections. Nor
can I find that Daniel Bernoulli gave any defence of the ordinary
theory ; he seems to have confined himself to repelling the attack
made on his memoir respecting Inoculation.
537. Gouraud after referring to Daniel Bernoulli's controversy
with D'Alembert says, on his page 59,
...et quant au reste des mathematiciens, ce ne fut que par le silence
ou le dedain qu'il r^jDondit aux doutes que d'Alembert s'etait permis
d'emettre. Mepris injuste et malhabile ou tout le monde avait a perdre
et qu'une posterite moins prevenue ne devait point sanctionner.
The statement that D'Alembert's objections were received with
silence and disdain, is inconsistent with the last sentence of the
passage quoted from Montucla in the preceding Article. According
to D'Alembert's own words which we have given in Art. 490, he
was attacked by some indifferent mathematicians.
538. Laplace briefly replies to D'Alembert ; see Theorie... des
Proh. pages vii. and x.
It has been suggested that D'Alembert saw his error respecting
the game of Croix ou Pile before he died ; but this suggestion
does not seem to be confirmed by our examination of all his
■writings : see Cambridge Philosophical Transactions, Yol. ix.
page 117.
CHAPTER XIV.
BAYES.
589. The name of Bayes is associated with one of the most
important parts of our subject, namely, the method of estimating
the probabihties of the causes by which an observed event may
have been produced. As we shall see, Bayes commenced the in-
vestigation, and Laplace developed it and enunciated the general
principle in the form which it has since retained.
540. We have to notice two memoirs which bear the fol-
lowing titles :
An Essay towards solving a Prohlem in the Doctrine of Chances.
By the late Rev. Mr. Bayes^ F.R.S. communicated hy Mr Price in a
Letter to John Canton^ A.M. F.R.S. A Demonstration of the Second
Rule in the Essay towards the Solution of a Prohlem in the Doctrine of
Chances, published in the Philosoi')hical Transactions, Vol. liii. Com-
municated hy the Rev. Mr. Richard Price, in a Letter to Mr. John
Canton, M. A. F.R.S.
The first of these memoirs occupies pages 870 — 418 of Vol. Liii.
of the Philosophical Transactions ; it is the volume for 1763, and
the date of publication is 1764.
The second memoir occupies pages 296 — 825 of Vol. Liv. of the
Philosophical Transactions; it is the volume for 1764, and the
date of publication is 1765.
541. Bayes proposes to establish the following theorem : If
BAYES. 295
an event has happened p times and failed ^ times, the probability
that its chance at a single trial lies between a and h is
/■
x^ (1 - xy cix
i)(f{l-xydx
Bayes does not use this notation ; areas of curves, according to
the fashion of his time, occur instead of integrals. Moreover we
shall see that there is an important condition implied which we
have omitted in the above enunciation, for the sake of brevity:
we shall return to this point in Art. 552.
Bayes also gives rules for obtaining approximate values of the
areas which correspond to our integrals.
542. It will be seen from the title of the first memoir that it
was published after the death of Bayes. The Rev. Mr Richard
Price is the well known writer, whose name is famous in connexion
with politics, science and theology. He begins his letter to
Canton thus :
Dear Sir, I now send you an essay which I have found among the
papers of our deceased friend Mr Bayes, and which, in my opinion, has
gi-eat merit, and well deserves to be preserved.
543. The first memoir contains an introductory letter from
Price to Canton ; the essay by Bayes follows, in which he begins
with a brief demonstration of the general laws of the Theory
of Probability, and then establishes his theorem. The enuncia-
tions are given of two rules which Bayes proposed for finding
approximate values of the areas which to him represented our
integrals ; the demonstrations are not given. Price himself added
An Appendix containing an Application of the foregoing Rides
to some particular Cases.
The second memoir contains Bayes's demonstration of his prin-
cipal rule for approximation ; and some investigations by Price
which also relate to the subject of approximation.
544. Bayes begins, as we have said, with a brief demonstra-
tion of the general laws of the Theory of Probability ; this part of
his essay is excessively obscure, and contrasts most unfavourably
with the treatment of the same subject by De Moivre.
296 BATES.
Bayes gives the principle by which we must calculate the
probability of a compound event.
Suppose we denote the probability of the compound event by
p
-^y the probability of the first event by z, and the probability
of the second on the supposition of the happening of the first
7 P h
by -^ . Then our principle gives us ^^T = ^ '^Jf> ^^^ therefore
p
z = — . This result Bayes seems to present as something new
and remarkable ; he arrives at it by a strange process, and enun-
ciates it as his Proposition 5 in these obscure terms :
If there be two subsequent events, the probability of the 2nd -^
P . .
and the probability of both together -^, and it being 1st discovered
that the 2nd event has happened, from hence I guess that the 1st event
. . P
has also happened, the probability I am in the right is -r-.
Price himself gives a note which shews a clearer appreciation
of the proposition than Bayes had.
b^o. We pass on now to the remarkable part of the essay.
Imagine a rectangular billiard table ABCD. Let a ball be rolled on
it at random, and when the ball comes to rest let its perpendicular
distance from A She measured ; denote this by x. Let a denote the
distance between AB and CD. Then the probability that the
. c — h
value of X lies between two assio^ned values J and c is . This
a
we should assume as obvious ; Bayes, however, demonstrates it
very elaborately.
54<6. Suppose that a ball is rolled in the manner just ex-
plained ; through the point at which it comes to rest let a line EF
be drawn parallel to AB, so that the billiard table is divided into
the two portions AEFB and EDCF. A second ball is to be rolled
on the table ; required the probability that it will rest within the
BATES. 297
space AEFB. If x denote the distance between AB and ^i^tlie
X
required probability is - : this follows from the preceding Article.
547. Bayes now considers the following compound event :
The first ball is to be rolled once, and so EF determined ; then
p +q^ trials are to be made in succession with the second ball :
required the probability, before the first ball is rolled, that the
distance of EF from AB will lie between h and c, and that the
second ball will rest p times within the space AEFB, and q times
without that space.
We should proceed thus in the solution : The chance that EF
falls at a distance x from AB is — ; the chance that the second
a
event then happens p times and fails q^ times is
hence the chance of the occurrence of the two contino^encies is
a \p_\q_ \«/ \ «/ *
Therefore the whole probability required is
a\p[q
(i-I)''^-
Bayes's method of solution is of course very different from the
above. With him an area takes the place of the integral, and
he establishes the result by a rigorous demonstration of the ex
ahsurdo kind.
548. As a corollary Bayes gives the following: The proba-
bility, before the first ball is rolled, that EF will lie between AB
and CD, and that the second event will happen p times and fail q
times, is found by putting the limits and a instead of h and c.
But it is certain that EF will lie between AB and CD. Hence we
298 BATES.
have for the probability, before the first ball is thrown, that the
second event will happen^ times and fail ^ times
a
P <1
C©'('-3'
Cv«X/»
549. We now arrive at the most important point of the essay.
Suppose we only know that the second event has happened p times
and failed q times, and that we wish to infer from this fact the
probable position of the line ^i^" which is to us unknown. The
probability that the distance of EF from AB lies between h
and c is
I x'^ {a — xy dx
•h
ra
x^(a-xydx
J
This depends on Bayes's Proposition 5, which we have given
in our Art. 544. For let z denote the required probability ;
then
z X probability of second event = probability of compound event.
The probability of the compound event is given in Art. 547,
and the probability of the second event in Art. 548 j hence the
value of z follows.
550. Bayes then proceeds to find the area of a certain curve,
or as we should say to integrate a certain expression. We have
/
^i>+i ^ ^P^ q{q-l) x'^'
X I jL ^ X) CLX —~ — — ^ ~I~
p + 1 1 J9+ 2 ' 1.2 ^ + 3 "•
This series may be put in another form ; let u stand for 1 — x,
then the series is equivalent to
jj + l'^p+l p + 2 '^ (p + 1) {p-^2) p + S
q(q-l)(q-2) x^^r'
{p + l){p-\-'2){p + '6) iJ + 4 ■^•••
This may be verified by putting for u its value and rearranging
according to powers of x. Or if we differentiate the series with
BAYES. 299
respect to x^ we shall find that the terms cancel so as to leave
only ^u^,
551. The general theory of the estimation of the probabilities
of causes from observed events was first given by Laplace in the
Memoires ...par divers 8avans, Vol. vi. 1774. One of Laplace's
results is that if an event has happened p times and failed q
times, the probability that it will happen at the next trial is
J
x''^' (1 - xY dx
f
J
x'' (1 - xY dx
Lubbock and Drinkwater think that Bayes, or perhaps rather
Price, confounded the probability given by Bayes's theorem with
the probability given by the result just taken from Laplace ; see
Lubbock and Drinkwater, page 48. But it appears to me that
Price understood correctly what Bayes's theorem really expressed.
Price's first example is that in which p = 1, and ^ = 0. Price says
that "there would be odds of three to one for somewhat more
than an even chance that it would happen on a second trial."
His demonstration is then given ; it amounts to this :
/:
af{l-xYdx .^
I x^Q.- xy dx
J
i'
8
where p = l and q = 0. Thus there is a probability - that the
chance of the event lies between ^ and 1, that is a probability
3
7 that the event is more likely to happen than not.
552. It must be observed with respect to the result in Art. 549,
that in Bayes's own problem we hnonj that a priori any position
of ^jF between AB and CD is equally likely ; or at least we know
what amount of assumption is involved in this supposition. In
the applications which have been made of Bayes's theorem, and
of such results as that which we have taken from Laplace in
300 BAYES.
Art. 551, there has however often been no adequate ground for
such knowledge or assumption.
553. We have already stated that Bayes gave two rules for
approximating to the value of the area which corresponds to the
integral. In the first memoir, Price suppressed the demonstrations
to save room ; in the second memoir, Bayes's demonstration of the
principal rule is given : Price himself also continues the subject.
These investigations are very laborious, especially Price's.
The following are among the most definite results which Price
gives. Let n =p + q, and suppose that neither p nor q is small ;
let h = — //IN • Then if an event has happened p times and
failed q times, the odds are about 1 to 1 that its chance at
a single trial lies between - + -7^ and 7^ ; the odds are about
2 to 1 that its chance at a single trial lies between - ■\- h and
n
-^ — h'. the odds are about 5 to 1 that its chance at a sinsfle
n °
trial lies between ^ + A V2 and ^ — h J% These results may be
n n "^
verified by Laplace's method of approximating to the value of the
definite integrals on which they depend.
554. We may observe that the curve y — x^ (1— xy has two
points of inflexion, the ordinates of which are equidistant from the
maximum ordinate ; the distance is equal to the quantity h of the
preceding Article. These points of inflexion are of importance in
the methods of Bayes and Price.
CHAPTER XV.
LAGRANGE.
555. Lagrange was born at Turin in 1736, and died at
Paris in 1813. His contributions to our subject will be found to
satisfy the expectations which would be formed from his great
name in mathematics.
556. His first memoir, relating to the Theory of Probability,
is entitled Memoire sur VutiliU de la methode de prendr^e le milieic
entre les resultats de plusieurs observations ; dans lequel on examine
les avantages de cette methode par le calcul des prohahilites ; et ou
Von resoud differens prohlenies relatifs a cette matiere.
This memoir is published in the fifth volume of the Miscellanea
Taurinensia, which is for the years 1770 — 1773 : the date of
publication is not given. The memoir occupies pages 167 — 232
of the mathematical portion of the volume.
The memoir at the time of its appearance must have been
extremely valuable and interesting, as being devoted to a most
important subject ; and even now it may be read with ad-
vantasfe.
"O"
557. The memoir is divided into the discussion of ten pro-
blems ; by a mistake no problem is numbered 9, so that the last
two are 10 and 11.
The first problem is as follows : it is supposed that at every
observation there are a cases in which no error is made, h cases
in which an error equal to 1 is made, and h cases in which an
302 LAGEANGE.
error equal to — 1 is made ; it is required to find the probability
that in taking the mean of n observations, the result shall be
exact.
In the expansion of {« + 5 (ic + cc~^)}" according to powers of x,
find the coefficient of the term independent of x\ divide this
coefficient by {a + 2^)" which is the whole number of cases that
can occur ; we thus obtain the required probability.
Lagrange exhibits his usual skill in the management of the
algebraical expansions. It is found that the probability diminishes
as n increases.
558. We may notice two points of interest in the course of
Lagrange's discussion of this problem. Lagrange arrives indirectly
at the following relation
„ [n (n — 1)1 ^ {n(n — 1) (n —
2.3 J"^*"
^ 1.3.5... (2n~l) ,
1.2.3...71
and he says it is the more remarkable because it does not seem
easy to demonstrate it a i^riori.
The result is easily obtained by equating the coefficients of the
term independent of x in the equivalent expressions
(1 + ^rfl + iy, and^li^
^2n
XI ' X''
This simple method seems to have escaped Lagrange's notice.
Suppose we expand ■ in powers of z ; let the
V 1 — 2as — cz^
result be denoted by
1 + A^z + A/ + A/ -f ... ;
Lagrange gives as a known result a simple relation which exists
between every three consecutive coefficients ; namely
. _2n — l . n — 1 J
LAGEAXGE. 303
This may be established by differentiation. For thus
that is
(a+cz) {l-{-A^z + A,/ + .., +Ay+ ...}
= (l-2a2-cs') [Aj^ + 2A^z + .,, +nA^z''~'-^ ...};
then by equating coefficients the result follows.
559. In the second problem the same suppositions are made
as in the first, and it is required to find the probability that the
error of the mean of n observations shall not surpass + — .
Like the first problem this leads to interesting algebraical ex-
pansions.
We may notice here a result which is obtained. Suppose we
expand {a + 5 (ic + £c"^)}" in powers of x\ let the result be de-
noted by
A^ + A^ (x-^x-') +A^ {x'^x-') -{-A, {x'+x-^ + ... ;
Lagrange wishes to shew the law of connexion between the co-
efficients Aq, A^, A^, ... This he effects by taking the logarithms
of both sides of the identity and differentiating with respect to x.
It may be found more easily b}" putting 2 cos ^ for a? + x~^, and
therefore 2 cos rO for a?*" + x~'\ Thus we have
(a + 25 cos ey = ^0 + ^A cos 6 + 2A^ cos 26 + 2A^ cos 8^ + . . .
Hence, by taking logarithms and differentiating,
Tib sin 6 _ A^ sin 6 + 2A^ sin 26 + ^A^ sin 3^ +. . .
a-^2bco^6~ A^ + 2A^ cos 6 + 2A^ cos 2^ + . . .
Multiply up, and arrange each side according to sines of mul-
tiples of 6 \ then equate the coefficients of sin r6 : thus
rib [A,_^ - A,^,] = raA, + b [{r - 1) A,_^ -f (r + 1) A,^,] ;
therefore A^^, = b {n-r^rl) A -raA^
30i LAGEANGE.
560. In the third problem it is supposed that there are a
cases at each observation in which no error is made, h cases in
which an error equal to — 1 is made, and c cases in which an error
equal to r is made ; the probability is required that the error of
the mean of n observations shall be contained within given
limits.
In the fourth problem the suppositions are the same as in the
third problem ; and it is required to find the most probable error
in the mean of n observations ; this is a particular case of the
fifth problem.
561. In the fifth problem it is supposed that every observation
is subject to given errors which can each occur in a given number
of cases ; thus let the errors be p, q^ r, s, ... ^ and the numbers of
cases in which they can occur be a, h, Cyd, ... respectively. Then
we require to find the most probable error in the mean of n ob-
servations.
In the expansion of {ax^ + hx^ + cic** + ...)" let M be the coeffi-
cient of iC* ; then the probability that the sum of the errors is yit,
and therefore that the error in the mean is — is
n
M
Hence we have to find the value of //. for which M is greatest.
Suppose that the error p occurs a times, the error q occurs
/3 times, the error r occurs 7 times, and so on. Then
a + /3 + 7+ =n,
pOL + ql3 + ry -\- = fi.
It appears from common Algebra that the greatest value of fjL
is when
a_/3_7_ _ n
a h c a4-& + c+..''
^T , Lb pa-^- qh + rc-\- ...
so that - —^ S •
n a + 6 + c+ ...
This therefore is the most probable error in the mean result.
562. With the notation of Art. 561, suppose that a, h, c, ...
LAGRANGE. 305
are not known d priori; but that ct, /S, y, ... are known by ob-
servation. Then in the sixth problem it is taken as evident that
the most probable values of a, h, c, ... are to be determined from
the results of observation by the relations
a = ;8 = 7"--"
so that the value of - of the jjreceding Article may be written
fM _ pa. + ql3 +ry+ ...
n a + /3 + 7+...
Lagrange proposes further to estimate the probability that the
values of a, h, c, ... thus determined from observation do not differ
from the true values by more than assigned quantities. This is an
investigation of a different character from the others in the
memoir; it belongs to what is usually called the theory of in-
verse probability, and is a difficult problem.
Lagrange finds the analytical difficulties too great to be over-
come ; and he is obliged to be content with a rude approxi-
mation.
563. The seventh problem is as follows. In an observation it
is equally probable that the error should be any one of the
following quantities —a, - (a - 1), ... — 1, 0, 1, 2 ... 13 ; required
the probability that the error of the mean of n observations shall
have an assigned value, and also the probability that it shall lie
between assigned limits.
We need not delay on this problem ; it really is coincident
with that in De Moivre as continued by Thomas Simpson : see
Arts. 14^8 and S64<. It leads to algebraical work of the same kind
as the eighth problem which we will now notice.
oQ4^. Suppose that at each observation the error must be
one of the following quantities — &, - (a — 1), ... 0, 1, ... a ; and
that the chances of these errors are proportional respectively to
1, 2, ... a + 1, a, ... 2, 1 : required the probability that the error in
Lb
the mean of n observations shall be equal to - .
20
SOG LAGRANGE.
We must find the coefficient of x>^ in the expansion of
{^-« + 2a?-"+^ + ... + aa?-' + (a + 1) x° + ao; + .. . + 2a;"-' + a;"}",
and divide it by the vahie of this expression when aj = 1, which is
the whole number of cases ; thus we obtain the required pro-
babiHty.
Now 1+ 2x + 3a;'+ ... + (a+ 1) a;"+ ... + 2a;""-' + x^
Jia
a+i\ 2
= {iJ,x+x'-\-... + xy=(Kj^^ .
Hence finally the required probability is the coefficient of
a;'* in the expansion of
1 a;-"" (1 - a;"-^y" ^
that is the coefficient of a;'^"^"" in the expansion of
^,(i-.r(i-o-
Lagrange gives a general theorem for effecting expansions, of
which this becomes an example ; but it will be sufficient for our
purpose to employ the Binomial Theorem. We thus obtain for
the coefficient of a?'^"^"" the expression
+ \ ^ ^ </)(7ia+At + l-2«-2)
%i {271 - 1) {2n - 2) ^ , . o ON 1
12 3 " 0(wa+/^ + l-3a-S)4-...|;
where (r) stands for the product
r (r+1) (r + 2) . . . (r + 2w - 2) ;
the series within the brackets is to continue only so long as r is
positive in (j) (r).
565. We can see a priori that the coefficient of xf^ is equal
to the coefficient of x~'^, and therefore when we want the former
we may if we please find the latter instead. Thus in the result of
LAGRANGE. " 307
Art. 564>, we may if we please put — //, instead of /jl, without
changing the vakie obtained. It is obvious that this would be
a gain in practical examples as it would diminish the number
of terms to be calculated.
This remark is not given by Lagrange.
566. We can now find the probability that the error in the
mean result shall lie between assigned limits. Let us find the
probability that the error in the mean result shall lie between
and - , both inclusive. We have then to substitute in the
n n
expression of Article 56^ for //, in succes.sion the numbers
— ny, —(iia — l), ...7 — 1, 7,
and add the results. Thus we shall find that, usingf ^, as is
customary, to denote a summation, we have
S^ (7ia + /^ + 1) = — -^/r (7ia + 7 + 1),
where -^/r (?-) stands for
r (r + 1) (?' + 2) . . . (r + %i - 1).
When we proceed to sum <^ (?ia + //- — ct) we must remember
that we have only to include the terms for which noL + fi — a is
positive; thus we find
Xcj) (na + fJ' — OL) = ~ yjr {iiOL 4- 7 - a).
Proceeding in this way we find that the probability that the
710L "V
error- in the mean result will lie between and - , both in-
n n
elusive, is
r^r- J-v/r (nOL + 7 + 1) — 2/1 -v/r (nct. + 7 + 1— a— 1)
+ \ ^ — ' -^ (71a + 7 + 1 - 2a - 2)
2w i^n - 1) (2?i - 2) , , , , . „ ^s . \
^ ^ ./ ^^ ^ ^ {no, + 7 + 1 - 3a - 3) + . . .| ;
20—2
308 LAGRANGE.
the series tuithin the brackets is to continue only so long as r is
positive in yjr (r). We will denote this by F^y).
The probability that the mean error will lie between /3 and y,
where 7 is greater than /3, is F[y) — F {^) if we include 7 and
exclude ^ ; it is F{y — 1) — F{/3 — 1) if we exclude 7 and include
/9; it is F{y)—F[(3—1) if we include both 7 and yS ; it is
F{y — 1) —F{/3) if we exclude both 7 and /3.
It is the last of these four results which Lagrange gives.
We have deviated slightly from his method in this Article in
order to obtain the result with more clearness. Our result is
F {y — 1) — F {^) ; and the number of terms in F (y-l) is de-
termined by the law that r in ^fr (r) is always to be positive :
the number of terms in F ((3) is to be determined in a similar
manner, so that the number of terms in F (/3) is not necessarily
so great as the number of terms in F (y — l). Lagrange gives an
incorrect law on this point. He determines the number of terms
in F{y — 1) correctly; and then he j^'^ohngs F {,6) until it has
as many terms as F{y — 1) by adding fictitious terms.
567. Let us now modify the suppositions at the beginning
of Art. 564^. Suj^pose that instead of the errors — a, — (a — l), ...
we are liable to the errors — ka, — k {a — l), ... Then the investi-
gation in Art. 5Q4! gives the probability that the error in the mean
ak
result shall be equal to — ; and the investigation in Art. 5G6
gives the probability that the error in the mean result shall lie
between — and - . Let a increase indefinitely and k diminish
71 n
indefinitely, and let o.k remain finite and equal to h. Let 7 and /3
also increase indefinitely ; and let 7 = c« and I3 = h(x where c and h
are finite. We find in the limit that F [y] — F {/S) becomes
J- L + ny''-2n (c + n-ir^ + ^"^ ^^"^ ~ ^^ (c + n- 2^- ..
each series is to continue only so long as the quantities which
are raised to the power 2n are positive.
LAGRANGE. 309
This result expresses the probability that the error in the
mean result will lie between — and — on the followinof hy-
n n o J
pothesis ; at every trial the error may have any value between
— h and + h ; positive and negative errors are equally likely ;
the probability of a positive error z is proportional to h — z, and
in fact ~ — — - is the probability that the error will lie be-
tween z and z + Sz.
We have followed Lagrange's guidance, and our result agrees
with his, except that he takes 7i = l, and his formula involves
many misprints or errors.
568. The conclusion in the preceding Article is striking. We
have an exact expression for the probability that the error in
the mean result will lie between assigned limits, on a very 7^ea-
sonahle hypothesis as to the occiirrence of single errors.
Suppose that positive errors are denoted by abscissse measured
to the right of a fixed point, and negative errors by abscissae
measured to the left of that fixed point. Let ordinates be drawn
representing the probabilities of the errors denoted by the re-
spective abscissae. The curve which can thus be formed is called
the curve of errors by Lagrange ; and as he observes, the curve
becomes an isosceles triangle in the case which we have just
discussed.
569. The matter which we have noticed in Arts. 563, dQ>^,
566, 567, 568, had all been published by Thomas Simpson, in his
Miscellaneous Tracts, 1757 ; he gave als(3 some numerical illus-
trations : see Art. 371.
570. The remainder of Lagrange's memoir is very curious ;
it is devoted to the solution and exemplification of one general
problem. In Art. 567 we have obtained a result for a case in
which the error at a single trial may have any value between
fixed limits ; but this result was not obtained directly : we started
with the supposition that the error at a single trial must be one
of a certain specified number of errors. In other words we started
with the hypothesis of errors changing per saltum and passed on
o
10 LAGKANGE.
to the supposition of continuous errors. Lagrange wishes to solve
questions relative to continuous errors without starting with the
supposition of errors changing per saltum.
Suppose that at every observation the error must lie between h
and c; let ^ {x) dx denote the probabiUty that the error will lie
between x and x-\-dx\ required the probability that in n obser-
vations the sum of the errors will lie between assigned limits say
/3 and 7. Now what Lagrange effects is the following. He trans-
forms \\ ^{pc)a^dx\ into \f{z)(idz, where f{z) is a known
function of z which does not involve a, and the limits of the
integral are known. When we say that f {£) and the limits of
z are known we mean that they are determined from the known
function ^ and the known limits h and c. Lagrange then says
that the probability that the sum of the errors will lie between
/? and 7 is 1 f{z) dz. He apparently concludes that his readers
will admit this at once ; he certainly does not demonstrate it.
We will indicate presently the method in which it seems the de-
monstration must be put.
571. After this general statement we will give Lagrange's
first example.
Suppose that ^ {x) is constant = K say ; then
6 (x) «* dx = — i^ ,
J h loof a
b\n
therefore \j (b(x)a'dx[ = — —^ — r-f—
Vb^' j (log a)"
Now we may suppose that a is greater than unity, and then it
may be easily shewn that
J
n-l
(log ay'
thus \ (f){x) a^ dx\ = -^ {a' - a^ j if ''a'" dy.
LAGRANGE. 311
Let c-'h = t, and expand {a' — a^y by the Binomial Theorem ;
thus ' W (fi {x) a" dx\
b
^j— yja -na + 2. 2 ~***l/ ^ «^ «^-
Now decompose I ^" ^oP'dy into its elements; and multiply
them by the series within brackets. AVe obtain for the coefficient
of a^'^ the expression
where the series within brackets is to continue only so long as the
quantities raised to the power n — 1 are positive.
Let nc—y = z ; then dy — — dz\ when y—^ we have z = nc,
and when y = 00 we have = — 00 . Substitute nc — z for ?/, and
we obtain finally
where f{z) = \ [nc — zy ^ - n {nc - z -ty
+ \,2 ' {nc-z-2ty'-..
the series within brackets being continued only so long as the
quantities raised to the power n — 1 are positive.
Lagrange then says that the probability that the sum of the
errors in n observations will lie between /3 and 7 is
f V(.) dz.
J/3
572. The result is correct, for it can be obtained in another
way. We have only to carry on the investigation of the problem
enunciated in Art. 563 in the same way as the problem enunciated
in Art. 564 was treated in Art. 567; the result will be very similar
to those in Art. 567. Lagrange thus shews that his process is
verified in this example.
312 LAGRANGE.
573. In the problem of Art. 570 it is obvious that the sum
of the errors must lie between nb and nc. Hence f[z) ought
to vanish if z does not lie between these limits; and we can
easily shew that it does.
For if z be greater than 7ic there is no term at all in f{z),
for every quantity raised to the power n — 1 would be negative.
And if z be less than nh, then f{z)- vanishes by virtue of the
theorem in Finite Differences which shews that the n^^ difference
of an algebraical function of the degree n—1 is zero.
This remark is not given by Lagrange.
574. We will now supply what we presume would be the
demonstration that Lagrange must have had in view.
Take the general problem as enunciated in Art. 570. It is
not difficult to see that the following process v/ould be suitable
for our purpose. Let a be any quantity, which for convenience
we may suppose greater than unity. Find the value of the ex-
pression
\ i(f) {xj a^i dxjr \ Icj) {x^) a^2 dxA J j</) {x^) a^» dxA ,
where the integrations are to be taken under the following
limitations ; each variable is to lie between b and c, and the sum
of the variables between z and z + Bz. Put the result in the
form Pa^Sz ; then I Pdz is the required probability.
J/3
Now to find P we proceed in an indirect way. It follows from
our method that
'ne
(f> {x) d" dx\ =i Pddz.
J b ) J lib
But Lagrange by a suitable transformation shews that
' (f> {x) d'dxi = I ^f{z) a'dz,
h ) J Zo
where z^ and ^^ are known. Hence
rnc fz
Pa'dz= f[z)a'dz.
J nb J Xo '
It will be remembered that a may be ani/ quantity which
LAGRANGE. 813
is greater than unity. We shall shew that we must then have
Suppose that z^ is less than nh^ and z^ greater than nc. Then
we have
1 f{z)a'dz+ {f{z)-F} a'dz'-\- f{z)a'dz = ^,
J SSq J nb '1 nc
for all values of a. Decompose each integTal into elements ; put
a^^ = p. We have then idtimately a result of the following
form
a-
^0 jr, + T^p + V + ^3P'+ - ^^^ ^V- •••} = 0,
where T^, T^,... are independent of p. And p may have any
positive value we please. Hence by the ordinary method of in-
determinate coefficients we conclude that
Thus P=f{^)-
The demonstration will remain the same whatever supposition
be made as to the order of magnitude of the limits z^ and z^
compared with nh and 7ic.
57o. Lagrange takes for another example that which we have
akeady discussed in Art. 567, and he thus again verifies his
new method by its agreement with the former.
He then takes two new examples ; in one he supposes that
<f) {x) = K \/ c^ — x\ the errors lying between — c and c; in the
other he supposes that cj) (x) = Kcosoo, the errors lying between
- :=: and ^ .
2 2
576. We have now to notice another memoir by Lagrange
which is entitled Becherches sw les suites reciirrentes dont les
termes varient de plusieurs manieres di0rentes, qu sur Vintegra-
tion des equations lineaires aux differences jinies et partielles ; et
sur Tusage de ces equations dans la theorie des hazards.
This memoir is published in the Nouveaux Menioires de VAcad.
... Berlin. The volume is for the year 1775; the date of pub-
314 LAGRANGE.
lication is 1777. The memoir occupies pages 183 — 272 ; the ap-
l^lication to the Theory of Chances occupies pages 240 — 272.
577. The memoir begins thus ;
J'ai clonne dans le premier Volume des Memoires de la Societe des
Sciences de Turin une metliode nouvelle pour traiter la theorie des suites
recurrentes, en la faisant dependre de Tintegration des equations lineaires
aux differences finies. Je me proposois alors de pousser ces recherches
l>lus loin et de les appliquer principalement a la solution de plusieurs
problemes de la theorie des liasards; mais d'autres objets m'ayant depuis
fait perdre celui la de vue, M. de la Place m'a prevenu en grand partie
dans deux excellens Memoires sur les suites recurro-recurrentes, et sur
V integration des equations differentielles finies et leur iisage dans la
theorie des liasards^ imprimes dans les Volumes vi et vii des Memoires
pr^sentes a 1' Academic des Sciences de Paris. Je crois cependant qu'on
peut encore aj outer quelque chose au travail de cet illustre Geometre, et
traiter le meme sujet d'une maniere plus directe, plus simple et surtout
plus generale ; c'est I'objet des Recherches que je vais donner dans ce
Memoire; on y trouvera des methodes nou veil es pour I'integration des
equations lineaires aux differences finies et partielles, et I'application de
ces methodes a plusieurs problenies interessans du calcul des probabilites ;
mais il n'est question ici que des equations dont les coefficiens sont con-
stants, et je reserve pour un autre Memoire I'examen de celles qui ont
des coefficiens variables.
578. We shall not delay on the part which relates to the
Integration of Equations ; the methods are simple but not so good
as that of Generating Functions. We proceed to the part of the
memoir which relates to Chances.
579. The first problem is to find tlie chance of the happening
of an event h times at least in a trials.
Let j9 denote the chance of its happening in one trial ; let
?/^^^ denote the probability of its happening t times in x trials ;
then Lagrange puts down the equation
He integrates and determines the arbitrary quantities and thus
arrives at the usual result.
In a Corollary he applies the same method to determine the
LAGRANGE. 31o
chance that the event shall happen just h times ; he starts from
the same equation and by a different determination of the arbi-
trary quantities arrives at the result which is well known,
namely,
y (1 -pr' \a_
\b \a — h
Lagrange refers to De Moivre, page 15, for one solution, and
adds : mais celle que nous venons d'en donner est non seulement
plus simple, mais elle a de plus I'avantage d'etre d^duite de prin-
cipes directs.
But it should be observed that De Moivre solves the problem
again on his page 27; and here he indicates the modern method,
which is self-evident. See Art. 257.
It seems curious for Lagrange to speak of his method as more
simple than De Moivre's, seeing it involves an elaborate solution
of an equation in Finite Differences.
580. Lagrange's second problem is the following :
On sujDpose qu'a chaqiie coup il puisse arriver deux 6venemens dont
les probabilites respectives soient p et q; et on demande le sort d'un
joueur qui parieroit d'amener le premier de ces evenemens h fois au
moins et le second c fois au moins, en un nombre a de coups.
The enunciation does not state distinctly what the suppositions
really are, namely that at every trial either the first event happens,
or the second, or neither of them ; these three cases are mutually
exclusive, so that the probability of the last at a single trial
is 1 —p — q. It is a good problem, well solved ; the solution is
presented in a more elementary shape by Trembley in a memoir
which we shall hereafter notice.
581. The third problem is the following :
Les memes choses etant supposees que daus le Probleme li, on de-
mande le sort d'un joueur qui parieroit d'amener, dans un nombre de
coups indetermine, le second des deux Evenemens h fois avant que le
premier fut arrive a fois.
Let 7/^ J be the chance of the player when he has to obtain the
second event t times before the first event occurs x times. Then
316 LAGl^ANGE.
This leads to
yx,t - q |i + f/? + — 2 — P + 273 ' ^
+ ...
(5 + ic- 2
^ - 1 1 .-r - 1
This result agrees with the second formula in Art. 172.
582. The fourth problem is like the third, only three events
may now occur of which the probabilities are p, q, r respectively.
In a Corollary the method is extended to four events; and in
a second Corollary to any number.
To this problem Lagrange annexes the following remark :
Le Probleme dont nous venons de donner une solution tres generale
et tres simple renferme d'luie maniere generale celui qu'on nomme com-
munement dans I'analyse des liasards le probleme des partis, et qui
n'a encore ete resolu complettement que pour le cas de deux joueurs.
He then refers to Montmort, to De Moivre's second edition,
Problem VI, and to the memoir of Laplace.
It is very curious that Lagrange here refers to De Moivre's
second edition, while elsewhere in the memoir he always refers to
the third edition ; for at the end of Problem vi. in the third
edition De Moivre does give the general rule for any number of
players. This he first published in his Miscellanea Analytica,
page 210 ; and he reproduced it in his Doctrine of Chances. But
in the second edition of the Doctrine of Chances the rule was not
given in its natural place as part of Problem vi. but appeared as
Problem LXix.
There is however some difference between the solutions given
by De Moivre and by Lagrange ; the difference is the same as
that which we have noticed in Art. 175 for the case of two players.
De Moivre's solution resembles the first of those which are given
in Art. 172, and Lagrange's resembles the second.
It is stated by Montucla, page 397, that Lagrange intended
to translate De Moivre's third edition into French.
583. Lagrange's fifth problem relates to the Duration of Play,
in the case in which one player has unlimited capital ; this is De
Moivre's Problem LXV: see Art. 307. Lagrange gives three solu-
tions. Lagrange's first solution demonstrates the result given
LAGRANGE. 31
Ht
without demonstration in De Moivres second solution ; see
Art. 309. We will give Lagrange's solution as a specimen of his
methods. We may remark that Laplace had preceded Lagrange
in the discussion of the problem of the Duration of Play. La-
place's investigations had been published in the Memoires . . . par
Divers Savans, Vols. vi. and Yii.
Laplace did not formally make the supposition that one player
had unlimited capital, but we arrive at this case by supposing
that his symbol i denotes an infinite number ; and we shall thus
find that on page 158 of Laplace's memoir in Vol. vii. of the
Memoires... par Divers Savans, we have in effect a demonstration
of De Moivre's result.
We proceed to Lagrange's demonstration.
584. The probability of a certain event in a single trial is^ ;
a player bets that in a trials this event will happen at least
h times oftener than it fails : determine the player's chance.
Let y^i represent his chance when he has x more trials to
make, and when to ensure his success the event must happen at
least t times oftener than it fails. Then it is obvious that we re-
quire the value of 7/„^j^.
Suppose one more trial made ; it is easy to obtain the follow-
ing equation
The player gains when ^ = and x has any value, and he loses
when x=0 and t has any value greater than zero ; so that y^^^=\
for any value of x, and y^^t^ for any value of t gTeater
than 0.
Put ^ for 1 —p, then the equation becomes
To integrate this assume y = ^a'^/3* ; we thus obtain
p - a/B + q/3' = 0.
From this we may by Lagrange's Theorem expand /S' in powers
of a ; there will be two series because the quadratic equation
gives two values of /S for an assigned value of a. These two
series are
318 LAGRANGE.
^~a''^ 0.'^' ^ 1.2 a'^' '^ 1.2.3 ^^^^ +•••
0.^ fpo!-' t{t-Z) p'o!-' t{t-^) (t-5) for"
i i~^ 1.2 2'"' 1-2.3 2'"'
If then we put in succession these values of /3* in the ex-
pression Ao^ ^^ we obtain two series in powers of a, namely,
Af |a^- + ipq^^'-' + ^-^^ //a--^ + . . . J ,
and Aq-' \o^' - tjpqa''^'-' + *-^j^ fi^'^'" - . •
Either of these series then would be a solution of the equation
in Finite Differences, whatever may he the values of A and a ;
so that we should also obtain a solution by the sum of any number
of such series with various values of A and a.
Hence we infer that the general solution will be
y., = p' {/ {^-t) + tpqfix -t-2)+ ^^t^pYfix - < - 4)
+ ^^T4^i'W(— 6) + ...}
+ q-' U, ix + t)- tfq ,^ (a; + « - 2) + '-^^ pY <l>{x+t-i)
Here f [x) and <^ {x) represent functions, at present arbitrary,
which must be determined by aid of the known particular values
of Vx,^ and ?/„,,.
Lagrange says it is easy to convince ourselves, that the con-
dition 2/^^=0 when t has any value greater than leads to the
following results : all the functions with the characteristic must
be zero, and those with the characteristic / must be zero for all
negative values of the quantity involved. [Perhaps this will not
appear very satisfactory ; it may be observed that q~*' will become
indefinitely great with t, and this suggests that the series whicli
multiplies q~^ should be zero.]
Thus the value of y^^t becomes a series with a finite number
of terms, namely,
LAGRANGE. 819
y... =P' {/(^ -t) + tpqfix - < - 2) + '-^J^^Y/(^ - < - 4)
the series extends to ^ (a? — ^ + 2) terms, or to ^ (a? - ^ + 1) terms,
according as ic — ^ is even or odd.
The other condition is that j/a;,o— ^y ^''^^ ^^7 vakie of x. But if
we put ^ = we have yx,Q=f{p^)' Hence f{x) = l for every
positive value of x. Thus we obtain
the series is to extend to 3 (x — t + 2) terms, or to ^ (x — t-\-l)
terms. This coincides with the result in De Moivre's second form
of solution : see Art. 309.
585. Lagrange gives two other solutions of the problem just
considered, one of which presents the result in the same form as
De Moivre's first solution. These other two solutions by Lagi^ange
differ in the mode of integrating the equation of Finite Differences ;
but they need not be further examined.
586. Lagrange then proceeds to the general problem of the
Duration of Play, supposing the players to start with different
capitals. He gives two solutions, one similar to that in De
Moivre's Problem LXiii, and the other similar to that in De
Moivre's Problem Lxviii. The second solution is very remarkable ;
it demonstrates the results which De Moivre enunciated without
demonstration, and it puts them in a more general form, as De
Moivi'e limited himself to the case of equal capitals.
587. Lagrange's last problem coincides with that given by
Daniel Bernoulli which we have noticed in Art. 417. Lagrange
supposes that there are n urns ; and in a Corollary he gives some
modifications of the problem.
588. Lagrange's memoir would not now present any novelty
to a student, or any advantage to one who is in possession of the
method of Generating Functions. But nevertheless it may be read
820 LAGRANGE.
with ease and interest, and at the time of pubhcation its value
must have been great. The promise held out in the introduction
that something would be added to the labours of Laplace is
abundantly fulfilled. The solution of the general problem of the
Duration of Play is conspicuously superior to that which Laplace
had given, and in fact Laplace embodied some of it subsequently
in his own work. The important pages 231 — 233 of the Theorie
. . . des Proh. are substantially due to this memoir of Lagrange's.
589. We may notice a memoir by Lagrange entitled Me-
moire sur une question concernant les annuiies.
This memoir is published in the volume of the Memoires de
V Acad. ... Berlin for 1792 and 1793; the date of publication is
1798 ; the memoir occupies pages 235 — 246.
The memoir had been read to the Academy ten years before.
590. The question discussed is the following: A father wishes
to pay a certain sum annually during the joint continuance of his
own life and the minority of all his children, so as to ensure an
annuity to his children after his death to last until all have attained
their majority.
Lagrange denotes by A, B, G, ... the value of an annuity of
one crown for the minority of the children A, B, G ... respectively.
Then by AB he denotes the value of an annuity of one crown
for the joint minority of two children A and B ; and so on. Hence
he obtains for the value of an annuity payable as long as either
^ or ^ is a minor,
~A + B- AB.
Lagrange demonstrates this ; but the notation renders it almost
obviously self evident.
Similarly the value of an annuity payable as long as one of
three children A, B, G remains a minor is
A + B + C - AB - AG - BG + ABG.
De Moivre however had given this result in his Treatise of
Annuities on Lives, and had used the same notation for an annuity
on joint lives.
Lagrange adds two tables which he calculated from his
formulae, using the table of mortality given in the work of
Sussmilch.
CHAPTER XVI.
MISCELLANEOUS INVESTIGATIONS
Between the Years 1750 and 1780.
591. The present Chapter will contain notices of various con-
tributions to our subject which were made between the years 1750
and 1780.
592. We first advert to a work bearing the following title :
Piece qui a remport^ le prix sur le sujet des Evenemens Fortuits,
propose par VAcademie Roy ale des Sciences et Belles Lettres de
Berlhi pour Vann^e 1751. Avec les p)ieces qui ont concouru.
This work is a quarto volume of 238 pages ; we notice it
because the title might suggest a connexion with our subject,
which we shall find does not exist.
The Academy of Berlin proposed the following subject for dis-
cussion :
Les Evenemens heureux et malheurenx, ou ce que nous apj)elIons
Bonheur et Malheur dependant de la volonte ou de la permission de
Dieu, de sorte que le terme de fortune est un nom sans realite; on de-
mande si ces Evenemens nous obligent a de certains devoirs, quels sont
ces devoirs et quelle est leur etendue.
The prize was awarded to Kaestner professor of Mathematics at
Leipsic ; the volume contains his dissertation and those of his
competitors.
There are nine dissertations on the whole ; the prize disserta-
tion is given both in French and Latin, and the others in French
21
322 DODSON. HOYLE.
or German or Latin. The subject was perhaps unpromising ; the
dissertations are not remarkable for novelty or interest. One of
the best of the writers finishes with a modest avowal which might
have been used by all :
Ich maclie hier den Schluss, weil ich ohnehin mit gar zii guten
Griinden fiirchte, zu weitliiufig gewesen zu seyn, da ich so wenig neues
artiges und scharfsinniges gesagt habe. Ich finde auch in dieser Probe,
dass mein Wille noch einmahl so gut als meine iibrige Tahigkeit, ist.
593. A work entitled the Mathematical Repository, in three
volumes, was published by James Dodson, Accomptant and Teacher
of the Mathematics. The work consists of the solution of Mathe-
matical problems. The second volume is dated 1753 ; pages
82 — 136 are occupied with problems on chances : they present
nothing that is new or important. The remainder of this volume
is devoted to annuities and kindred subjects ; and so also is the
Avhole of the third volume, which is dated 1755.
594. Some works on Games of Chance are ascribed to Hoyle
in Watt's Bihliotheca Britannica. I have seen only one of them
which is entitled: An Essay towards making the Doctrine of
Chances easy to those who understand Vidgar Arithmetick only:
to which is added, some useful tables on annuities for lives (&c. &c. &c.
By Mr Hoyle... It is not dated; but the date 1754 is given in
"Watt's Bihliotheca Britannica.
The work is in small octavo size, with large tjrpe. The title,
preface, and dedication occupy viii pages, and the text itself occu-
pies 73 pages. Pages 1 — 62 contain rules, without demonstration,
for calculating chances in certain games ; and the remainder is de-
voted to tables of annuities, and to Halley's Breslau table of life,
with a brief explanation of the latter. I have not tested the rules.
595. We advert in the next place to a work which is en-
titled DelV Azione del Caso nelle Invenzioni, e deW influsso degli
Astri ne Corpi Terrestri Dissertazioni due.
This is a quarto volume of 220 pages, published anonymously
at Padua, 1757. It is not connected with the Theory of Pro-
bability ; we notice it because the title might perhaps suggest
SAMUEL CLARK. 323
such connexion, especiallysvLen abbreviated, as in the Catalogues
of Booksellers.
The first dissertation is on the influence of chance in inven-
tions, and the second on the influence of the celestial bodies on
men, animals, and plants. The first dissertation recognises the
influence of chance in inventions, and gives various examples ; the
second dissertation is intended to shew that there is no influence
produced by the celestial bodies on men, animals, or plants, in the
sense in which astrologers understood such influence.
The author seems to have been of a sanguine temperament ;
for he obviously had hopes that the squaring of the circle would
be eventually obtained ; see his pages 31, 40, 85.
On the other hand his confidence is not great in the Newtonian
theory of gravitation ; he thinks it may one day follow its prede-
cessor, the theory of vortices, into oblivion ; see his pages 45, 172.
The following is one of his arguments against Lunar influence.
If there be such influence we must conceive it to arise from exhala-
tions from the Moon, and if the matter of these exhalations be
supposed of appreciable density it will obstruct the motions of the
planets, so that it will be necessary from time to time to clean up
the celestial paths, just as the streets of London and Paris are
cleaned from dust and dirt. See his page 164.
The author is not very accurate in his statements. Take the
following specimen from his page 74 : Jacopo III. Re d'Inghilterra
alia vista d'una spada ignuda, come riferisce il Cavaliere d'Igby,
sempre era compreso d'un freddo, e ferale spavento. This of
course refers to James I. Again ; we have on his page 81 : ...ci5
che disse in lode d'Aristotile il Berni : II gran Maestro de color
die sanno. It is not often that an Italian ascribes to any inferior
name the honour due to Dante.
596. We have next to notice a work by Samuel Clark en-
titled TheLaius of Chance : or, a Mathematical Investigation of the
Prohabilities arising from amj proposed Circumstance of Play.
London, 1758.
This is in octavo ; there is a Preface of 2 pages, and 204
pages of text. The book may be described as a treatise based on
those of De Moivre and Simpson; the abstruse problems are
21—2
324 SAMUEL CLARK.
omitted, and many examples and illustrations are given in order
to render the subject accessible to persons not very far advanced
in mathematics.
The book presents nothing that is new and important. The
game of bowls seems to have been a favourite with Clark ; he
devotes his pages 44 — 68 to problems connected with this game.
He discusses at great length the problem of finding the chance of
throwing an assigned number of points with a given number of
similar dice; see his pages 113 — ISO. He follows Simpson, but
he also indicates De Moivre's Method ; see Art. 364. Clark
begins the discussion thus :
In order to facilitate the solution of this and the following problem,
I shall lay down a lemma which was communicated to me by my inge-
nious friend Mr William Fayne, teacher of mathematics.
The Le7tima.
The sum of 1, 3, 6, 10, 15, 21, 28, 36, &c. continued to (n) number
J, ^ . , ^ n + 2 n + 1 n
01 terms is equal to — ^ — x — ^— x - .
It was quite unnecessary to appeal to William Pa3riie for such
a well-known result ; and in fact Clark himself had given on his
page 84 Newton's general theorem for the summation of series ;
see Art. 152.
Clark discusses in his pages 139 — 153 the problem respecting
a run of events, which we have noticed in Art. 325. Clark detects
the slight mistake which occurs in De Moivre's solution ; and from
the elaborate manner in which he notices the mistake we may
conclude that it gave him great trouble.
Clark is not so fortunate in another case in which he ventures
to differ with De Moivre ; Clark discusses De Moivre's Problem ix.
and arrives at a different result ; see Art. 269. The error is
Clark's. Taking De Moivre's notation Clark assumes that A must
either receive q G from B, or pay jiL to B. This is wrong. Sup-
pose that on the whole A wins in 5' -F m trials and loses in m trials ;
then there is the required difference of q games in his favour. In
this case he receives from B the sum {(i + 111) G and pays to him
the sum m.L ; thus the balance is qG + m {G — L) and not qG SiS
Clark says.
IklALLET. JOHN BERNOULLI. 325
597. We have next to notice a memoir by Mallet, entitled
Recherches sur les avantages de trots Joueurs qui font entreux une
Poule au trictrac ou a un autre Jeu quelconque.
This memoir is published in the Acta Helvetica... Basilece,
Vol. V. 1762 ; the memoir occupies pages 230 — 248. The problem
is that of De Moivre and Waldegrave ; see Art. 211. Mallet's
solution resembles that given byDe Moivre in his pages 132 — 138.
Mallet however makes some additions. In the problem as treated
by De Moivre the fine exacted from each defeated player is con-
stant; Mallet considers the cases in which the fines increase in
arithmetical progression, or in geometrical progression. A student
of De Moivre will see that the extensions given by Mallet can be
treated without any difficulty by De Moivre's process, as the series
which are obtained may be summed by well-known methods.
598. The same volume which contains Euler's memoir which
we have noticed in Art. 438, contains also two memoirs by Beguelin
on the same problem. Before we notice them it will be convenient
to consider a memoir by John Bernoulli, which in fact precedes
Beguelin's in date of composition but not in date of publication.
This John Bernoulli was grandson of the John whom we named
in Art. 194. John Bernoulli's memoir is entitled Sur les suites ou
sequences dans la loterie de Genes. It was published in the volume
for 1769 of the Histoii^e de VAcad Berlin; the date of pub-
lication is 1771 : the memoir occupies pages 234 — 253. The fol-
lowing note is given at the beginning :
Ce Memoire a ete In en 1765, apres le Memoire de Mr. Euler sur
cette matiere insere dans les Memoires de I'Academie pour cette annee.
Comme les Memoires de Mr. Beguelin imprimes a la suite de celui de
Mr. Euler se rapportent au mien en plusieurs endroits, et que la Loterie
qui I'a occasione est phis en vogue que jamais, je ne le supprimerai pas
plus longtems. Si ma methode ne mene pas aussi loin que celle de
Mrs. Euler et Beguelin, elle a du moins, je crois, I'avantage d'etre plus
facile a saisir.
599. In the first paragraph of the memoir speaking of the
question respecting sequences, John Bernoulli says :
Je m'en occupai done de terns en tems jusqu'a ce que j'appris de
Mr. Euler qu'il traitoit le meme sujet; e'en fiit assez pour me faire
326 JOHN BERNOULLI.
abandonner mon dessein, et je me reservai seulement de voir par le
Memoire de cet illustre Geometre si j'avois raisonue juste; il a eu la
bonte de me le commuDiquer et j'ai vu que le peu que j'avois fait, etoit
fonde sur des raisonnemens qui, s'ils n'etoient pas sublimes, n'etoient du
moins pas faux.
600. Jobn Bernoulli does not give an Algebraical investiga-
tion ; lie confines himself to the arithmetical calculation of the
chances of the various kinds of sequences that can occur when
there are 90 tickets and 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 are drawn. His method
does not seem to possess the advantage of facility, as compared
with those of Euler and Beguelin, which he himself ascribes to it.
601. There is one point of difference between John Bernoulli
and Euler. John Bernoulli supposes the numbers from 1 to 90
ranged as it were in a circle ; and thus he counts 90, 1 as a
binary sequence ; Euler does not count it as a sequence. So also
John Bernoulli counts 89, 90, 1 as a ternary sequence ; with Euler
this would count as a binary sequence. And so on.
It might perhaps have been anticipated that from the greater
symmetry of John Bernoulli's conception of a sequence, the in-
vestigations respecting sequences would be more simple than on
Euler's conception ; but the reverse seems to be the case on ex-
amination.
In the example of Art. 440 corresponding to Euler's results
o / ON/ ON (n-2) (n-S) {n-4<)
n-2, {n - 2) (n - 3), -^^ ^ ^ ^ g ,
we shall find on John Bernoulli's conception the results
602. There is one Algebraical result given which we may
notice. Euler had obtained the following as the chances that there
would be no sequences at all in the case of n tickets ; if two
tickets be drawn the chance is , if three -^^ ^'-W^ — , if
n n{n — l)
four ( ^-4)(^-5)(n-6) (^,5)(.^ -6)(^-7) (/^-8) .
n{n-\){n-2) ' " "^^ n{n-l) {n-2) {n-^) '
and so the law can be easily seen. Now John Bernoulli states
JOHN BERNOULLI. 327
that on his conception of a sequence these formulae will hold if we
change n into n — 1. He does not demonstrate this statement,
so that we cannot say how he obtained it.
It may be established by induction in the following way. Let
^ (n, r) denote the number of ways in which we can take r tickets
out of n, free from any sequence, on Euler's conception of a se-
quence. Let B [n, r) denote the corresponding number on John
BernoulH's conception. Then we have given
^, . (n—r-{-l)(n — r)...(n — 2r-\-2)
E{n, r) = ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ,
and we have to shew that
^ , . n(n — T — 1) ... (71— 2r + 1)
B in, r) = — ^ '- ^ .
For these must be the values of E (w, r) and B [n, r) in order
that the appropriate chances may be obtained, by dividing by the
total number of cases. Now the following relation will hold :
E{n,r)=B{n,r) + B{7i-l, r -1) -E{n-2, r-l).
The truth of this relation will be seen by taking an example.
Suppose n is 10, and r is 3. Now every case which occurs in
the total B [n, r) will occur among the total E {n, r) ; but some
which do not occur in B{n,r) will occur in E{n,r), and these
must be added. These cases which are to be added are such as
(10, 1, 3) (10, 1, 4) (10, 1, 8). We must then examine by what
general law we can obtain these cases. We should form all the
binary combinations of the numbers 1 . 2, ... 9 which contain no
Bernoullian sequence, and which do contain 1.
And generally we should want all the combinations r — 1 at a
time which can be made from the first n—1 numbers, so as to con-
tain no Bernoullian sequence, and to contain 1 as one of the num-
bers. It might at first appear that B (n — 1, r — V)—B(7i—2, r — 1)
would be the number of such combinations ; but a little con-
sideration will shew that it is B {n — 1, r — 1) — E {n — 2, 7* — 1), as
we have given it above.
Thus having established the relation, and found the value of
B {ti, 1) independently we can infer in succession the values of
B (n, 2), B {n, 3), and so on.
328 BEGUELIN.
603. We now consider Beguelin's two memoirs. These as we
have stated are contained in the same volume as Euler's memoir
noticed in Art. 438. The memoirs are entitled Bur les suites ou
sequences dans la lotterie de Genes ; they occupy pages 231 — 280
of the volume.
604. Beguelin's memoirs contain general Algebraical formulae
coinciding with Euler's, and also similar formulae for the results on
John Bernoulli's conception; thus the latter formulae constitute
what is new in the memoirs.
605. We can easily give a notion of the method which
Beguelin uses. Take for example 13 letters a, h, c, ... i,j, h, l, m.
Arrange 5 files of such letters side by side, thus
a
a
a
a
a
I
h
h
h
h
c
c
c
c
c
• • ■
,m m m 771 m
Consider first only two such files ; take any letter in the first
file and' associate it with any letter in the second file ; we thus
get 13^^ such associations, namely aa, ah, ac ... ha, hh, he, ...
Here we have ah and ha both occurring, and so ac and ca, and
the like. But suppose we wish to prevent such repetitions, we can
attain our end in this way. Take any letter in the first file and
associate it with those letters only in the second file, which are in the
same rank or in a lower rank. Thus the a of the first file will be
associated with any one of the 13 letters of the second file ; the h of
the second file will be associated with any one of the 12 letters
in the second file beginning with h. Thus the whole number of
13 X 14
such associations will be 13 + 12 + . .. + 1; that is .. ^ .
' 1.2
Similarly if we take three files we shall have 13^ associations
if we allow repetitions ; but if we do not allow repetitions we
13 X 14 X 15
shall have — ^ — ^— , Proceeding in this way we find that if
JL X ^ X o
there are five files and we do not allow repetitions the number of
13x14x15x16x17
associations is
1x2x3x4x5
BEGUELIN. 829
All this is well known, as Beguelin says, but it is introduced
by him as leading the way for his further investigations.
606. Such cases as a, a, a, a, a cannot occur in the lottery
because no number is there repeated. Let the second file be
raised one letter, the third file two letters; and so on. Thus
we have
a h c d e
h c d e f
• • •
•
•
J
h
I m
•
7
h
I
m
h
I
m
I
m
m
We have thus 13 — 4 complete files, that is 9 complete files ;
and, proceeding as before, the number of associations is found to be
9 X 10 X 11 X 12 X 13 ,. , , .
— — ^ — -. z — ; that IS, the number is what we know to
1x2x3x4x0
be the number of the combinations of 13 things taken 5 at a time.
607. Suppose now that we wish to find the number of asso-
ciations in which there is no sequence at all. Raise each file two
letters instead of one, so that we now have
a
c
e
9
I
h
d
f
h
•
J
c
e
9
9
I
k
d
f
h
•
J
I
e
9
•
^
k
m
i
h
•
3
I
9
•
^
k
m
h
•
I
k
«
h
m
•
J
I
k
m
I
m
830 BEGUELIN.
Here there are only 13 — 8, that is, 5 complete files; and
proceeding as in Art. 605, we find that the whole number of asso-
5x6x7x8x9
ciations IS
1x2x3x4x5
In this way we arrive in fact at the value which we quoted
for E{7i, r) in Art. 602.
608. The method which we have here briefly exemplified is
used by Begnelin in discussing all the parts of the problem.
He does not however employ letters as we have done ; he supposes
a series of medals of the Roman emperors, and so instead of
a, h, c,...he uses Augustus^ Tiberius, Caligula, ...
609. It may be useful to state the results which are obtained
when there are n tickets of which 5 are drawn.
In the following table the first column indicates the form, the
second the number of cases of that form according to Euler's
conception, and the third the number according to John Ber-
noulli's conception.
Sequence of 5, n — 4, n.
Sequence of 4, {n — 5) {n — 4), n{n — Q).
Sequence of 3
combined with (n-5) {n — 4<), n{n-6).
a sequence of 2,
Sequence of 3,
and the other (n — 6) {n— o) [n — 4) n {n — 7) {n — 6)
numbers not 1.2 ' 1.2
in sequence,
Two sequences {n — 6) {n— 5) {n — 4) n{n — 7) (n — 6)
of 2, 1.2 ' 172 •
Single sequence {n-7) (w-6) (n-5) (m-4) n {n-8) {n-7) (w-6)
of 2, 1.2.3 ' 17273 •
No sequence, see Art. 602.
BEGUELIN. 331
The chance of any assigned event is found by dividing the
corresponding number by the whole number of cases, that is by the
number of combinations of n things taken 5 at a time.
610. We have now to notice another memoir by Beguehn.
It is entitled, Sur V usage du principe de la raison suffisante dans
le calcul des jprohabilites.
This memoir is published in the volume of the Histoire de
V Acad.... Berlin iox 1767; the date of publication is 1769: the
memoir occupies pages 382 — 412.
611. Beguelin begins by saying, J'ai montre dans un Memoire
precedent que la doctrine des probabilites etoit uniquement fondee
sur le principe de la raison suffisante : this refers apparently to
some remarks in the memoirs which we have just examined.
Beguelin refers to D'Alembert in these words. Un illustre Auteur,
Geometre et Philosophe a la fois, a public depuis peu sur le
Calcul des probabilites, des doutes et des questions bien dignes
d'etre approfondies ... Beguelin proposes to try how far meta-
physical principles can assist in the Theory of Probabilities.
612. Beguelin discusses two questions. The first he says is
the question :
... si les evenemens simmetriques et regnliers, attribues an hazard,
sont (toutes choses d'ailleurs egales) aiissi probables que les evenemens
qui n'ont ni ordre ni regularity, et au cas qu'ils aient le nieme degre de
probabilite, d'ou vient que leur regularite nous frappe, et qu'ils nous
paroissent si singuliers ?
His conclusions on this question do not seem to call for any
remark.
613. His next question he considers more difficult ; it is
. . . lorsqu'un meme evenement est deja arrive nne ou plusieurs fois
de suite, on demande si cet evenement conserve autant de probabilite
pour sa future existence, que Tevenement contraire qui avec une egale
probabilite primitive n'est point arrive encore.
BegTielin comes to the conclusion that the oftener an event
has happened the less likely it is to happen at the next trial;
332 BEGUELIN.
thus he adopts one of D'Alembert's errors. He considers that if
the chances would have been equal according to the ordinary
theory, then when an event has happened t times in succession
it is ^ + 1 to 1 that it will fail at the next trial.
(314. Beguelin applies his notions to the Petersburg Problem.
n
Suppose there are to be n trials ; then instead of 3 which the
common theory gives for the expectation Beguelin arrives at
112 2' 2' 2"-'
2"^2"^2 + l'^2.3 + l^[4 + l ••• l^-l + l'
The terms of this series rapidly diminish, and the sum to
infinity is about 2 J.
615. Besides the above result Beguelin gives five other
solutions of the Petersburg Problem. His six results are not
coincident, but they all give a small finite value for the expecta-
tion instead of the large or infinite value of the common theory.
616. The memoir does not appear of any value whatever;
Beguelin adds nothing to the objections urged by D'Alembert
against the common theory, and he is less clear and interesting.
It should be added that Montucla appears to have formed a
different estimate of the value of the memoir. He says, on his
page 403, speaking of the Petersburg Problem,
Ce probleme a 6te aussi le siijet de savantes considerations metapliy-
siques pour Beguelin... ce metaphysicien et analyste examine au flam-
beau d'une metapliysique profonde plusieurs questions sur la nature du
calcul des probabilites...
617. We have next to notice a memoir which has attracted
considerable attention. It is entitled An Inquiry into the pro-
bable Parallax, and Magnitude of the fixed Stars, from the Quantity
of Light which they afford us, and the particidar Circumstances of
their Situation, by the Rev. John Michell, B.D., F.RS.
This memoir was published in the Philosophical Transactions,
Vol. LVII. Part I., which is the volume for 1767 : the memoir
occupies pages 234 — 264.
MICHELL. 333
(il8. The part of the memoir with which we are concerned
is that in which Michell, from the fact that some stars are very
close together, infers the existence of design. His method ^vill be
seen from the following extract. He says, page 243,
Let us then examine what it is jDrobable would have been the least
apj)arent distance of any two or more stars, any where in the whole
heavens, ui^on the supposition that they had been scattered by mere
chance, as it might happen. Now it is manifest, upon this supposition,
that every star being as likely to be in any one situation as another,
the probability, that any one particular star should happen to be within
a certain distance (as for example one degree) of any other given star,
would be represented (according to the common way of computing
chances) by a fraction, whose numerator would be to it's denominator,
as a circle of one degree radius, to a circle, whose racUus is the diameter
of a great circle (this last quantity being equal to the whole surface of
the sphere) that is, by the fraction . ..[^, ^ j or, reducing it to a deci-
( Oo / D'O )
mal form, -000076154 (that is, about 1 in 13131) and the complement
13130
of this to unity, viz. -999923846, or the fraction y^Yqt will represent
1 1 Ox
the probability that it would not be so. But, because there is the same
chance for any one star to be within the distance of one degree from
any given star, as for every other, multiiDlying this fraction into itself
as many times as shall be equivalent to the whole number of stars, of
not less brightness than those in question, and jDutting oi for this number,
(-999923846)", or the fraction (^|^)" will represent the probability,
that no one of the whole number of stars n would be within one de-
gree from the proposed given star ; and the complement of this quan-
tity to unity will represent the probability, that there would be some
one star or more, out of the whole number oi, within the distance of
one degree from the given star. And farther, because the same event
is equally likely to ha^Dpen to any one star as to any other, and there-
fore any one of the whole number of stars 7i might as well have been
taken for the given star as any other, we must again repeat the last
found chance n times, and consequently the number {('999923846)"}",
r/13130\")"
or the fraction I ( ^kj^. ) [ will represent the probability, that no
where, in the whole heavens, any two stars, amongst those in question,
would be within the distance of one degi-ee from each other; and the
S34< MICHELL.
complement of this quantity to unity will represent tlie probability of
the contrary.
619. Michell obtains the following results on his page 246,
If now we compute, according to the principles above laid down,
what the probability is, that no two stars, in the whole heavens, should
have been within so small a distance from each other, as the two stars
P Capricorni, to which I shall suppose about 230 stars only to be equal
in brightness, we shall find it to be about 80 to 1.
For an example, where more than two stars are concerned, we may
take the six brightest of the Pleiades, and, supj)osing the whole number
of those stars, which are equal in splendor to the faintest of these, to
be about 1500, we shall find the odds to be near 500000 to 1, that no
six stars, out of that number, scattered at random, in the whole hea-
vens, would be within so small a distance from each other, as the Plei-
ades are.
Michell ofi ves the details of the calculation in a note.
620. Laplace alludes to Michell in the Theorie . . . des Proh.,
page LXiii., and in the Connaissa^ice des Terns for 1815, page 219.
621. The late Professor Forbes wrote a very interesting criti-
cism on Michell's memoir; see the London, Edinhui^gh and Buhlin
Philosophical Magazine, for August 181^9 and December 1850. He
objects with great justice to Michell's mathematical calculations,
and he also altogether distrusts the validity of the inferences
drawn from these calculations.
«
622. Struve has given some researches on this subject in his
Catalogus Kovus Stellarum Duplicium et Midtipliciiim . . . Dorpati,
1827, see the pages xxxvii. — XLVIII. Struve's method is very
different from Michell's. Let n be the number of stars in a given
area S of the celestial surface ; let (/> represent the area of a small
circle of x" radius. Then Struve takes ^ — - ^ as the chance
of having a pair of the n stars within the distance x", supposing
that the stars are distributed by chance. Let 8 represent the
surface beginning from —15'' of declination and extending to the
north pole; let n = 10229, and ic = 4 : then Struve finds the above
expression to become '007814.
JOHN BERNOULLI. 335
See also Struve's SteUarum Duplicium et Multiplicium Men-
surce Micrometricce ...Petrop. 1837, page xci., and his SteUarum
Fixarum ... Positiones Medice ... Petroj:^. 1852, page CLXXXViii.
Sir John Herschel in his Outlines of Astronomy , 1849, page 565,
ofives some numerical results which are attributed to Struve ; but
I conclude that there is some mistake, for the results do not
appear to agree with Struve's calculations in the works above cited.
628. For a notice of some of the other subjects discussed in
Michell's memoir, see Struve's Etudes d'Astronomie Stellaire,
St Peter shourg, 1847.
624. We have next to notice another memoir by John Ber-
noulli ; it is entitled Memoire sur un prohleme de la Doctrine du
Hazard.
This memoir is published in the volume of the Histoire de
V Acad. ... Berlin for 1768; the date of publication is 1770: the
memoir occupies pages 384 — 408.
The problem discussed may be thus generally enunciated.
Suppose n men to marry 7i women at the same time ; find the
chance that when half the 2n people are dead all the marriages
will be dissolved ; that is, find the chance that all the survivors
will be widows or widowers. John Bernoulli makes two cases ;
first, when there is no limitation as to those who die ; second, when
half of those who die are men and half women.
The memoir presents nothing of interest or importance ; the
formulas are obtained by induction from particular cases, but are
not really demonstrated.
625. We have next to notice a memoir by Lambert, en-
titled Exameri d'une espece de Superstition ramenee au calcul
des prohahilites.
This memoir is published in the volume for 1771 of the
Nouveaux Memoir es ... Berlin ; the date of publication is 1773:
the memoir occupies pages 411 — 420.
626. Lambert begins by adverting to the faith which many
people in Germany had in the predictions of the almanack makers
respecting the weather and other events. This suggests to him to
336 LAMBERT.
consider what is the chance that the predictions will be verified
supposing the predictions to be thrown out at random.
The problem which he is thus led to discuss is really the old
problem of the game of Treize, though Lambert does not give this
name to it, or cite any preceding writers except Euler's memoir of
1751 : see Arts. 162, 280, 430.
627. We may put the problem thus : suppose n letters to be
written and n corresponding envelopes to be directed ; the letters
are put at random into the envelopes : required the chance that
all, or any assigned number, of the letters are placed in the wrong
envelopes.
The total number of ways in which the letters can be put into
the envelopes is n. There is only one way in which all can be
placed in the right envelopes. There is no way in which just one
letter is in the wrong envelope. Let us consider the number of
ways in which just two letters are in the wrong envelopes : take
a pair of letters ; this can be done in — ^- — ^-^ ways j then find
in how many ways this pair can be put in the wrong envelopes
without disturbing the others : this can only be done in one way.
Next consider in how many ways just three letters can be put in
the wrong envelopes ; take a triad of letters ; this can be done
7X in 1 ) in 2 )
in -^ L \ ways, and the selected triad can be put in
wrong envelopes in 2 ways, as will be seen on trial.
Proceeding thus we obtain the following result,
A A ^ ^ (*^ — 1)
A ^ (^ - 1) (^ - ^) A \jl
1.2.3
where A^ expresses the number of ways in which r letters, for
which there are r appropriate envelopes, can all be placed in wrong
envelopes. And
Ao = ^, A^ = \), A^=l, A^ = 2, ..,
Now Aq, A^, A^, ... are independent of 7i ; thus we can deter-
mine them by putting for w in succession the values 1, 2, 3, ... in
LAMBERT. S37
the above identity. This last remark is in fact the novelty of
Lambert's memoir.
Lambert gives the general law which holds among the quan-
tities -4j, A^, ... , namely
A,= rA,_^+(-iy (2).
He does not however demonstrate that this law holds. "We
have demonstrated it implicitly in the value which we have found
for (f) {n) in Art. 161.
We get by this law
A, = 9, X=44, ^, = 265, ^7=1854, A= 14833, ...
We can however easily demonstrate the law independently of
Art. 161.
T \V — 1 )
Let A** I stand for \r — r r — \ -\ ^^^ — ^
r-2-
so that the notation is analogous to that which is commonly used
in Finite Differences. Then the fundamental relation (1) sug-
gests that
^. = A-[0; (3),
and we can shew that this is the case by an inductive proof For
we find by trial that
A"Lo = Lo = i = A>
A^ [0 = 1 -1=0 = ^,,
A^[0= 2 -2 + 1=^,;
and then from the fundamental relation (1) it follows that if
-4^ = A** [0 for all values of r up to w — 1 inclusive, then A^ = A" [0.
Thus (3) is established, and from (3) we can immediately shew
that (2) holds.
628. We now come to another memoir by the writer whom we
have noticed in Art. 597. The memoir is entitled Sur le Calcul
des Prohahilites, par Mr. Mallet, Prof. d'Astronomie a Geneve.
This memoir is published m the Acta Helvetica ... Basilece,
Vol. VII. ; the date of publication is 1772 : the memoir occupies
pages 133—163.
22
338 MALLET.
629. The memoir consists of the discussion of two problems r
the first is a problem given in the Ars Conjectandi of James Ber-
noulli ; the other relates to a lottery.
630. The problem from the Ars Conjectandi is that which
is given on page 161 of the work ; we have given it in Art. 117.
Mallet notices the fact that James Bernoulli in addition to
the correct solution gave another which led to a different result
and was therefore wrong, but which appeared plausible. Mallet
then says,
Mr. Bernoulli s'etant contente d'indiquer cette singularity apparente,
sans en donner Texplication, j'ai cru qu'il ne seroit pas inutile d'entrer
dans un plus grand detail ladessus, pour eclaircir parfaitement cette
petite difficulte, on verra qu'on peut imaginer une infinite de cas sem-
hlables a celui de Mr. Bernoulli, dans la solution desquels il seroit aussi
aise d'etre induit en erreur.
631. Mallet's remarks do not appear to offer any thing new or
important ; he is an obscure writer for want of sufficiently develop-
ing his ideas. The following illustration was suggested on reading
his memoir, and may be of service to a student. Suppose we
refer to the theory of duration of life. Let abscissae measured
from a fixed point denote years from a certain epoch, and the cor-
responding ordinates be proportional to the number of survivors
out of a large number born at the certain epoch. Now suppose we
wish to know whether it is more probable than not that a new
born infant will live more than n years. James Bernoulli's plausi-
ble but false solution amounts to saying that the event is more
probable than not, provided the abscissa of the centre of gravity of
the area is greater than n : the true solution takes instead of the
abscissa of the centre of gravity the abscissa which corresponds to
the ordinate bisecting the area of the curve. See Art. 485.
632. We pass to Mallet's second problem which relates to a
certain lottery.
The lottery is that which was called by Montmort la lotterie
de Loraine, and which he discussed in his work ; see his pages
257—260, 313, 317, 326, 346. The following is practically the
form of the lottery. The director of the lottery issues n tickets to
MALLET. 339
n persons, charging a certain sum for each ticket. He retains for
himself a portion of the money which he thus receives, say a ; the
remainder he distributes into n prizes which will be gained by
those who bought the tickets. He also offers a further inducement
to secure buyers of his tickets, for he engages to return a sum, say
5, to every ticket-holder who does not gain a prize. The jDrizes are
distributed in the following manner. In a box are placed n coun-
ters numbered respectively from 1 to n. A counter is drawn, and
a prize assigned to the ticket-holder whose number corresponds to
the number of the counter. The counter is then replaced in the box.
Another drawing is made and a prize assigned to the corresponding
ticket-holder. The counter is then replaced in the box. This pro-
cess is carried on until n drawings have been made ; and the prizes
are then exhausted.
Hence, owing to the peculiar mode of drawing the lottery, one
person might gain more than one prize, or even gain them all ; for
the counter which bears his number might be drawn any number
of times, or even every time.
The problem proposed is to find the advantage or disadvantage
of the director of the lottery.
633. Montmort solved the problem in the following manner.
Consider one of the ticket-holders. The chance that this per-
son's number is never drawn throughout the whole process is
) . If it is not drawn he is to receive h from the director ;
so that his corresponding expectation is h ( J • ^ similar ex-
pectation exists for each of the ticket-holders, and the sum of these
expectations is the amount by which the director's gain is di-
minished. Thus the director's advantage is
a — nh I j .
In the case which Montmort notices h was equal to a, and n
was 20000 ; thus the director's advantage was negative, that is, it
was really a disadvantage. Before Montmort made a complete
investigation he saw that the director's position was bad, and he
22—2
340 MALLET.
suspected that there was a design to cheat the public, which
actually happened.
634. Mallet makes no reference to any preceding writer on
the subject ; but solves the problem in a most laborious manner.
He finds the chances that the number of persons without prizes
should be 1, or 2, or 3, . . . up to n ; then he knows the advantage
of the banker corresponding to each case by multiplying the
chance by the gain in that case ; and by summing the results he
obtains the total advantage.
635. One part of Mallet's process amounts to investigating
the following problem. Suppose a die with r faces ; let it be
thrown s times in succession : required the chance that all the
faces have appeared. The number of ways in which the desired
event can happen is
and the chance is obtained by dividing this number by r'.
This is De Moivre's Problem xxxix ; it was afterwards dis-
cussed by Laplace and Euler ; see Art. 448.
Mallet would have saved himself and his readers great labour
if he had borrowed De Moivre's formula and demonstration. But
he proceeds in a different way, which amounts to what we should
now state thus : the number of ways in which the desired event
can happen is the product of [r by the sum of all the homogeneous
products of the degree s — r which can be formed of the numbers
1, 2, 3, ... 7\ He does not demonstrate the truth of this statement ;
he merely examines one very easy case, and says without offering
any evidence that the other cases will be obtained by following the
same method. See his page 144.
Mallet after giving the result in the manner we have just indi-
cated proceeds to transform it ; and thus he arrives at the same
formula as we have quoted from De Moivre. Mallet does not
demonstrate the truth of his transformation generally; he contents
himself with taking some simple cases.
636. The transformation to which we have just alluded,
IVIALLET. 341
involves some algebraical work which we will give, since as we
have intimated Mallet himself omits it.
Let there be r quantities a,h,c, ... h. Suppose x^ to be di-
vided by (x — a) (x — b) (x — c) ... {x — h). The quotient will be
x'-" + H^ x^-' + H^ x^-'^ + . . . in infinitum,
where E^ denotes the sum of all the homogeneous products of the
degree r which can be formed from the quantities a,h,c, ... Ic. This
can be easily shewn by first dividing a;^ by x — a] then dividing
the result by x — h, that is multiplying it by a?~M 1 J , and
so on.
Again, if ^ be not less than r the expression
x^
(x — a) (x—b) ... (x — k)
will consist of an integral part and a fractional part ; if ^ be less
than r there will be no integral part. In both cases the fractional
part will be
ABC K
X — a x — b x — c x — k'
where A =
a"
(a — b)(a — c),.. (a — k)^
and similar expressions hold for B, C, ... K. Now expand each of
A B
the fractions , 7 , . . . according to negative powers of x ;
X "~" a X ~~
and equate the coefficient of £c~*~^ to the coefficient in the first
form which we gave for x^ -^[(x — a) (x — b) ... (x — k)]. Thus
Aa'+BU+ Cc' + ... + Kk' = E,
?-*•+«+!•
Put m for ^ — r + ^ + 1 ; then p + ^ = m + r — 1; thus we may
express our result in the following words : the sum of the homoge-
neous products of the degree m, which can be formed of the r quan-
tities a, b, c, ... k, is equal to
m+r-l 7,m+r- 1
+ 77 TTI ^ 77 fT+ ...
(a — b) (a — c) ... (a — k) (b —a) (b — c) ... (b — k)
o
12 MALLET.
This is the general theorem which Mallet enunciates; but only
demonstrates in a few simple cases.
If we put 1, 2, 3, ... r respectively for a, h, c, .,,k we obtain
the theorem by which we pass from the formula of Mallet to that
of De Moivre, namely, the sum of the homogeneous products of
the degree s — r which can be formed of the numbers 1, 2, ... r is
equal to
ij._,,_.,,rfc3),..,_r(t^«fcS,_a,.,...),
The particular case in which s — r+l gives us the following
result,
l+2 + S-\- ...+r
, ^(r-l) r(r^l)(r- 2) ^^, ]
+ 1.2 ^"^ ^^ 1.2.3 ^"^ ^^ ^"V
which is a known result.
687. When Mallet has finished his laborious investigation he
says, very justly, il y a apparence que celui qui fit cette Lotterie ne
setoit pas donne la peine defaire tons les calculs pr^cedens.
638. Mallet's result coincides with that which Montmort gave,
and this result being so simple suggested that there might be an
easier method of arriving at it. Accordingly Mallet gives another
solution, in which like Montmort he investigates directly not the
advantage of the director of the lottery, but the expectation of each
ticket-holder. But even this solution is more laborious than Mont-
mort's, because Mallet takes separately the case in which a ticket-
holder has 1, or 2, or 3, . . . , or ?^ prizes ; while in Montmort's
solution there is no necessity for this.
639. Mallet gives the result of the following problem : Re-
quired the chance that in p throws with a die of n faces a specified
face shall appear just m times. The chance is
\m p —m n^
WILLIAM EMERSON. 34;3
The formula explains itself; for the chance of throwing the
specified face at each throw is -, and the chance of not throwing
71 — 1
it is . Hence by the fundamental principles of the subject
the chance of having the specified face just m times in p throws is
I m \p — m \nj
n
Since the whole number of cases in the p throws is if, it follows
that the number of cases in which the required event can happen is
P
I m I p — m
(n - 1)
p-m .
and the result had been previously given by Montmort in this
form : see his page 307.
640. On the whole we may say that Mallet's memoir shews
the laborious industry of the writer, and his small acquaintance
with preceding works on the subject.
641. William Emerson published in 1776 a volume entitled
Miscellanies, or a Miscellaneous Treatise ; containing several Mathe-
matical Subjects.
The pages 1 — 48 are devoted to the Laws of Chance. These
pages form an outline of the subject, illustrated by thirty-four
problems. There is nothing remarkable about the work except
the fact that in many cases instead of exact solutions of the
problems Emerson gives only rude general reasoning which he
considers may serve for approximate solution. This he himself
admits ; he says on his page 47,
It may be observed, that in many of these problems, to avoid more
intricate methods of calculation, I have contented myself with a more
lax method of calculating, by which I only approach near the truth.
See also the Scholium on his page 21.
Thus Emerson's work would be most dangerous for a beginner
and quite useless for a more advanced student.
We may remark that pages 49 — 138 of the volume are devoted
to Annuities and Insurances.
S4i4i BUFFON".
642. We have now to examine a contribution to our subject
from the illustrious naturalist Buffon whose name has already-
occurred in Art. 85 -i.
Buffon's Ussai d' Arithmetique Morale appeared in 1777 in the
fourth volume of the Supplement a VHistoire Naturelle, where it
occupies 103 quarto pages. Gouraud says on his page 54, that the
Essay was composed about 1760.
643. The essay is divided into 35 sections.
Buffon says that there are truths of different kinds ; thus there
are geometrical truths which we know by reasoning, and physical
truths which we know by experience ; and there are truths which
we believe on testimony.
He lays down without explanation a peculiar principle with
respect to physical truths. Suppose that for n days in succession
the Sun has risen, what is the probability that it will rise to-
morrow ?
Buffon says it is proportional to T~^. See his 6th section.
This is quite arbitrary ; see Laplace Theoine. . .des Prob. page XIII.
644. He considers that a probability measured by so small
a fraction as cannot be distinguished from a zero proba-
bility. He arrives at the result thus ; he finds from the tables
that this fraction represents the chance that a man 56 years
old will die in the course of a day, and he considers that such
a man does practically consider the chance as zero. The doctrine
that a very small chance is practically zero is due to D'Alembert ;
see Art. 472 : Buffon however is responsible for the value Yoooo '
see his 8th section.
645. Buffon speaks strongly against gambling. He says at
the end of his 11th section :
Mais nous aliens donner un puissant antidote centre le mal ^pi-
demique de la passion du jeu, et en meme-temps quelques priservatifs
centre rillusion de cet art dangereux.
He condemns all gambling, even such as is carried on under
conditions usually considered fair ; and of course still more
BUFFON. 345
gambling in which an advantage is ensured to one of the parties.
Thus for example at a game like Pharaon, he says :
... le banquier n'est qu'im fripon avoue, et le ponte une dupe, dont
on est convenu de ne se pas moquer.
See his 12th section. He finishes the section thus :
...je dis qu'en general le jeu est un pacte mal-entendu, un contrat
d^savantageux aux deux parties, dont I'effet est de rendre la perte tou-
jours plus grande que le gain; et d'oter au bien pour ajouter au mal.
La demonstration en est aussi aisee qu'evidente.
64iQ. The demonstration then follows in the ISth section.
Buffon supposes two players of equal fortune, and that each
stakes half of his fortune. He says that the player who wins
will increase his fortune by a third, and the .player who loses will
diminish his by a half ; and as a half is greater than a third
there is more to fear from loss than to hope from gain. Buffon
does not seem to do justice to his own argument such as it is.
Let a denote the fortune of each player, and h the sum staked.
Then the 2:ain is estimated by Buffon by the fraction , and
^ -^ -^ a+b
the loss by - ; but it would seem more natural to estimate the
loss by 7, which of course increases the excess of the loss
to be feared over the gain to be hoped for.
The demonstration may be said to rest on the principle that
the value of a sum of money to any person varies inversely as his
whole fortune.
647. Buffon discusses at length the Petersburg Problem which
he says was proposed to him for the first time by Cramer at
Geneva in 1730. This discussion occupies sections 15 to 20
inclusive. See Art. 389.
Buffon offers four considerations by which he reduces the ex-
pectation of A from an infinite number of crowns to about five
crowns only. These considerations are
(1) The fact that no more than a finite sum of money exists
to pay A. Buffon finds that if head did not fall until after the
24:6 BUFFON.
twenty-ninth throw, more money would be required to pay A than
the whole kingdom of France could furnish.
(2) The doctrine of the relative value of money which we
have stated at the end of the preceding Article.
(3) The fact that there would not be time during a life for
playing more than a certain number of games ; allowing only
two minutes for each game including the time necessary for
paying.
(4) The doctrine that any chance less than is to be
considered absolutely zero : see Art. 644.
Buffon cites Fontaine as having urged the first reason : see
Arts. 892, 393.
648. The 18th section contains the details of an experiment
made by Buffon respecting the Petersburg Problem. He says he
played the game 2084 times by getting a child to toss a coin in
the air. These 2084 games he says produced 10057 crowns. There
were 1061 games which produced one crown, 494 which produced
two crowns, and so on. The results are given in De Morgan's
Formal Logic, page 185, together with those obtained by a re-
petition of the experiment. See also Cambridge Philosophical
Transactions, Vol. ix. page 122.
649. The 23rd section contains some novelties.
Buffon begins by saying that up to the present time Arith-
metic had been the only instrument used in estimating probabilities,
but he proposes to shew that examples might be given which
would require the aid of Geometry. He accordingly gives some
simple problems with their results.
Suppose a large plane area divided into equal regular figures,
namely squares, equilateral triangles, or regular hexagons. Let
a round coin be thrown down at random; required the chance
that it shall fall clear of the bounding lines of the figure, or fall
on one of them, or on two of them ; and so on.
These examples only need simple mensuration, and we need
not delay on them ; we have not verified Bufifon's results.
Buffon had solved these problems at a much earlier date. We
find in the Hist de VAcad. ...Paris for 1733 a short account of
BUFFON. 3-i7
them ; they were communicated to the Academy in that year ;
see Art. 354.
650. Buffon then proceeds to a more difficult example which
requires the aid of the Integi'al Calculus. A large plane area is
ruled with equidistant parallel straight lines ; a slender rod is
thrown down : required the probability that the rod will fall across
a line. Bufifon solves this correctly. He then proceeds to con-
sider what he says might have appeared more difficult, namely to
determine the probability when the area is ruled with a second
set of equidistant parallel straight lines, at right angles to the
former and at the same distances. He merely gives the result,
but it is wrong.
Laplace, without any reference to Buffi^n, gives the problem in
the T]ieorie..,des Proh., pages 359 — 362.
The problem involves a compound probability ; for the centre
of the rod may be supposed to fall at any point within one of
the figures, and the rod to take all possible positions by turning
round its centre : it is sufficient to consider one figure. Bufifon and
Laplace take the two elements of the problem in the less simple
order ; we mil take the other order.
Suppose a the distance of two consecutive straight lines of one
system, h the distance of two consecutive straight lines of the
other system ; let 2r be the length of the rod and assume that
2r is less than a and also less than h.
Suppose the rod to have an inclination 6 to the line of length
a ; or rather suppose that the inclination Hes between 6 and
6 + dd. Then in order that the rod may cross a line its centre
must fall somewhere on the area
ah — {a — 2r cos 6) {h — 2r sin 6),
that is on the area
2r (a sin ^ + Z* cos 0) — h-^ sin 6 cos 0.
Hence the whole probability of crossing the lines is
1 2r {a sinO + b cos 0) - 4r^ sin 6 co&6\ dO
/I
/•
hde
3^8 BUFFON.
TT
The limits of 6 are and -^ . Hence the result is
4r {a-\-h) - ^^r^
t irah
li a = h this becomes
8ar — 4r^
2 •
ira
Buffon's result expressed in our notation is
2 (a — r) r
If we have only one set of parallel lines we may suppose
h infinite in our s^eneral result : thus we obtain — .
651. By the mode of solution which we have adopted we
may easily treat the case in which 2r is not less than a and
also less than h, which Buffon and Laplace do not notice.
Let h be less than a. First suppose 2r to be greater than
h but not greater than a. Then the limits of 6 instead of being
and 5- will be and sin"^ — . Next suppose 2r to be greater
than a. Then the limits of will be cos~^ x- and sin"^ ^r- : this
Zr Zr
?)
holds so long- as cos"^ ^r- is less than sin"^ — , that is so long as
° zr Zr
fJiAiT^—a^) is less than h, that is so long as 2r is less than ^^{a^ + h'^),
which is geometrically obvious.
652. Buffon gives a result for another problem of the same
kind. Suppose a cube thrown down on the area; required the
probability that it will fall across a line. With the same meaning
as before for a and h, let 2r denote the length of a diagonal of
a face of the cube. The required probability is
I Lh -(a- 2r cos 6) {h - 2r cos ^)l dO
ahdO
IT
the limits of 6 being and 7- . Thus we obtain
FUSS. 349
^ ^ 4 V2 / _ 4 («2+Z>)r V2 -r^ (27r4-4)
ao -r
4
BufFon gives an incorrect result.
653. The remainder of Buffon's essay is devoted to subjects
unconnected with the Theory of Probability. One of the sub-
jects is the 5ca^^5 0/ 7iotof ton; Buffon recommends the duodenary
scale. Another of the subjects is the unit of length : Buffon re-
commends the length of a pendulum which beats seconds at the
equator. Another of the subjects is the quadrature of the circle :
Buffon pretends to demonstrate that this is impossible. His de-
monstration however is worthless, for it would equally apply to
any curve, and shew that no curve could be rectified ; and this we
know would be a false conclusion.
654. After the Essay we have a large collection of results
connected with the duration of human life, which Buffon deduced
from tables he had formerly published.
Buffon's results amount to expressing in numbers the following
formula : For a person aged n years the odds are as a to 5 that
he will live x more years.
Buffon tabulates this formula for all integral values of n up
to 99, and for various values of x.
After these results follow other tables and observations con-
nected with them. The tables include the numbers of births,
marriages, and deaths, at Paris, from 1709 to 1766.
655. Some remarks on Buffon's views will be found in Con-
dorcet's JEJssai...de V Analyse... ^^digQ LXXI., and in Dugald Stewart's
Works edited by Hamilton, Vol. i. pages 369, 616.
656. We have next to notice some investigations by Fuss
under the following titles : Recherches sur tin j^^^oblhne du Calcul
des Frobahilites par Nicolas Fuss. Supplement au m^moire sur un
prohleme du Calcid des Prohabilites...
The Recherckes... occupy pages 81 — 92 of the Pars Postei^or
of the volume for 1779 of the Acta Acad. ...Petrop.; the date of
publication is 1783.
350 FUSS.
The Supplement... occupies pages 91 — 96 of the Pars Posterior
of the volume for 1780 of the Acta Acad. ... Petrop.; the date of
publication is 1784.
The problem is that considered by James Bernoulli on page 161
of the Ars Conjectandi ; see Art. 117.
In the Recherches . . . Fuss solves the problem ; he says he had
not seen James Bernoulli's own solution but obtained his know-
ledge of the problem from Mallet's memoir ; see Art. 628. Fuss
published his solution because his results differed from that
obtained by James Bernoulli as recorded by Mallet. In the Sup-
plement. . . Fuss says that he has since procured James Bernoulli's
work, and he finds that there are two cases in the problem ; his
former solution agreed with James Bernoulli's solution of one
of the cases, and he now adds a solution of the other case, which
agrees with James Bernoulli's solution for that case.
Thus in fact Fuss would have spared his two papers if he
had consulted James Bernoulli's own work at the outset. We may
observe that Fuss uses the Lemma given by De Moivre on his
page 39, but Fuss does not refer to any previous writer for it ;
see Art. 149.
CHAPTER XVIL
CONDOECET.
657. CoNDOKCET was born in 17-i3 and died in 1794. He
wrote a work connected with our subject, and also a memoir. It
will be convenient to examine the work first, although part of the
memoir really preceded it in order of time.
658. The work is entitled Essai siir Vapplication de Vanalyse
a la prohctbilite des decisions rendaes a la pluralite des voix. Par
M. Le Ma7^quis de Condor cet ... Paris 1785.
This work is in quarto ; it consists of a Discours Preliminaire
which occupies cxci. pages, and of the Essai itself which occupies
304 pages.
659. The object of the Preliminary Discourse is to give the
results of the mathematical investigations in a form which may be
intelligible to those who are not mathematicians. It commences
thus :
Un grand homme, dont je regretterai toujours les legons, les exem-
ples, et sur-tout I'amitie, etoit persuade que les verites des Sciences
morales et politiques, sent susceptibles de la meme certitude que celles
qui forment le systeme des Sciences physiques, et meme que les branches
de ces Sciences qui, comme rAstronomie, paroissent approcher de la
certitude mathematique.
Cette opinion lui etoit chere, parce qu'elle conduit a I'esperance con-
solante que I'espece humaine fera necessairement des progres vers le
bonheur et la perfection, comme elle en a fait dans la connoissance de la
verite.
C'etoit pour lui que j'avois entrepris cet ouvrage
852 CONDORCET.
The great man to whom Condorcet here refers is named in
a note : it is Turgot.
Condorcet himself perished a victim of the French Revolution,
and it is to be presumed that he must have renounced the faith
here expressed in the necessary progress of the human race to-
wards happiness and perfection.
660. Condorcet's Essai is divided into five parts.
The Discours Preliminaire, after briefly expounding the funda-
mental principles of the Theory of Probability, proceeds to give
in order an account of the results obtained in the five parts of
the Essai.
We must state at once that Condorcet's work is excessively
difficult ; the difficulty does not lie in the mathematical investi-
gations, but in the expressions which are employed to introduce
these investigations and to state their results : it is in many cases
almost impossible to discover what Condorcet means to say. The
obscurity and self contradiction are without any parallel, so far as
our experience of mathematical works extends ; some examples
will be given in the course of our analysis, but no amount of
examples can convey an adequate impression of the extent of
the evils. We believe that the work has been very little studied,
for we have not observed any recognition of the repulsive peculi-
arities by which it is so undesirably distinguished.
661. The Preliminary Discourse begins with a brief exposition
of the fundamental principles of the Theory of Probability, in
the course of which an interesting point is raised. After giving
the mathematical definition of probability, Condorcet proposes to
shew that it is consistent with ordinary notions ; or in other words,
that the mathematical measure of probability is an accurate
measure of our degree of belief See his page vil. Unfortunately
he is extremely obscure in his discussion of the point.
We shall not delay on the Preliminary Discourse, because it
is little more than a statement of the results obtained in the
Essay.
The Preliminary Discourse is in fact superfluous to any person
who is sufficiently acquainted with Mathematics to study the
Essay, and it would be scarcely intelligible to any other person.
CONDOKCET. 353
For in general when we have no mathematical symbols to guide
us in discovering Condorcet's meaning, the attempt is nearly
hopeless.
We proceed then to analyse the Essay.
662. Condorcet's first part is divided into eleven sections,
devoted to the examination of as many Hypotheses ; this part
occupies pages 1 — 136.
We will consider Condorcet's first Hypothesis.
Let there be 2^ + 1 voters who are supposed exactly alike as to
judgment ; let v be the probability that a voter decides correctly,
e the probability that he decides incorrectly, so that v-\-e — l ;
required the probability that there will be a majority in favour
of the correct decision of a question submitted to tiie voters. We
may observe, that the letters v and e are chosen from commencing
the words lerite and eiTeur.
The required probability is found by expanding (v + e)^^"^^ by
the Binomial Theorem, and taking the terms from v^^'^^ to that
which involves v^'^^ e^, both inclusive. Two peculiarities in Con-
dorcet's notation may here be noticed. He denotes the required
probability by V^; this is very inconvenient because this symbol
has universally another meaning, namely it denotes V raised to
the power q. He uses — to denote the coefficient of ^;""^'e'" in
m
the expansion of (v + e)"; this also is very inconvenient because
the symbol — has universally another meaning, namely it denotes
a fraction in which the numerator is w and the denominator is m.
It is not desirable to follow Condorcet in these two innovations. "
We will denote the probability required by </> (q) ; thus
^ (q) = v^^^ + (2q + 1) v'^ e + ^^^^^^^"1 v''-' e^ + . ..
I 2^ + 1
663. The expression for (/> {q) is transformed by Condorcet
into a shape more convenient for his purpose ; and this trans-
formation we will now give. Let </> (2' + 1) denote what ^ {q)
23
S54* CONDOECET.
becomes when q^ is changed into $' -H 1, that is let ^ (g + 1) denote
the probability that there will be a majority in favour of a correct
decision when the question is submitted to 2^' + 8 voters. There-
fore
<^ (^ + 1) = ^,^^- + (2^ + 3) v^-'^ e + (?i±|I|i±21 ^...i ,.
+ ...+
2^ + 3
(7 + 2 q + 1
v'"-' e'^\
' Since v-\-e = l we have
^ (2) = (« + «)" <!> fe).
Thus ^(j + l)_,/,(j) = ^(2 + l)_(„ + e)»^(j).
Now (f> (q + 1) consists of certain terms in the expansion of
(v + ey^^^, and cp (q) consists of certain terms in the expansion of
{v + ey^'^^ ; so we may anticipate that in the development of
(j> (q+l) — (v + ey (j) (q) very few terms will remain uncancelled.
In fact it will be easily found that
I 2^ + 1 \2q + l
g + 1 [I |g + l |g
2q + l
l+i [9
Hence we deduce
^ (^) = y + (v -e) jve + ji;V+ J^^'^'+ 7V3 ^*^*
... + r==f^v (2).
664<. The result given in equation (2) is the transformation
to which we alluded. We may observe that throughout the first
part of his Essay, Condorcet repeatedly uses the method of trans-
formation just exemplified, and it also appears elsewhere in the
Essay ; it is in fact the chief mathematical instrument which
he employs.
It will be observed that we assumed v + e = l in order to
obtain equation (2). We may however obtain a result analogous
COXDORCET. So 5
to (2) which shall be identically true, whatever v and e may be.
We have only to replace the left-hand member of (1) by
^(^ + l)-(v + ey<f>(q),
and we can then deduce
q_±l ^
=^v{v + ef" + (v - e) \ve {v + ey' + ? ^^e^ [v + e)^"*
5 4 1 2a - 1 1
1.2^^ [£ [£— 1
This is identically true ; if we suppose v-{-e=l, we have the
equation (2).
665. We resume the consideration of the equation (2).
Suppose V greater than e ; then we shall find that <j) (q) =1
when q is infinite. For it may be shewn that the series in powers
of ve which occurs in (2) arises from expanding
in powers of ve as far as the term which involves vV. Thus when
q is infinite, we have
^(^g^) = v + {v-e) 1-2 + 2 (1 -^^^)"4-
Now 1 — 4<ve= (v+ ef — ^ve= (v —ey. Therefore when q is
infinite
/ \ { V — e , V + 6 ]
— v+{v — e)<— 777 \ + o^ \C
^ ^ [ 2(v-e) 2{v- e)}
= V + e = 1.
The assumption that v is greater than e is introduced when
we put v — e for (1 — 4re)i
23—2
856 CONDORCET.
Thus we have the following result in the Theory of Probability :
if the probability of a correct decision is the same for every voter
and is greater than the probability of an incorrect decision, then
the probability that the decision of the majority will be correct
becomes indefinitely nearly equal to unity by sufficiently in-
creasinof the number of voters.
It need hardly be observed that practically the hypotheses on
which the preceding conclusion rests cannot be realised, so that
the result has very little value. Some important remarks on the
subject will be found in Mill's Logic, 1862, Vol. II. pages Qo, Q>Q,
where he speaks of '' misapplications of the calculus of probabilities
which have made it the real opprobrium of mathematics."
666. We again return to the equation (2) of Art. 663.
If we denote by -v/r (^q) the probability that there will be a
majority in favour of an incorrect decision, we can obtain the
value of yfr^q) from that of ^ (q) by interchanging e and v.
We have also ^ (^) + '*/^ fe) = 1.
Of course if v = e we have obviously ^(^q) ='\fr {q), for all
values of q ; the truth of this result when q is infinite is esta-
blished by Condorcet in a curious way ; see his page 10.
667. We have hitherto spoken of the probability that the
decision will be correct, that is we have supposed that the result
of the voting is not yet known.
But now suppose we know that a decision has been given and
that m voters voted for that decision and n against it, so that m
is greater than n. We ask, what is the probability that the de-
cision is correct ? Condorcet says briefly that the number of com-
binations in favour of the truth is expressed by
12^ + 1
v'^e^
and the number in favour of error by
12^ + 1
e'\'".
m n
Thus the probabilities of the correctness and incorrectness of the
decision are respectively
CONDORCET. 357
and
jiijn I jni^jn ^-^-^ ^.tnjn > jn^jn
See his page 10.
668. The student of Condorcet's work must carefully dis-
tinguish between the probability of the correctness of a decision
that has been given when we know the numbers for and against,
and the probability when we do not know these numbers. Con-
dorcet sometimes leaves it to be gathered from the context which
he is considering. For example, in his Preliminary Discourse
page XXIII. he begins his account of his first Hypothesis thus :
Je considere d'abord le cas le plus simple, celui ou le nombre des
Votans etant impair, on prononce simplemeBt a la plurality.
Dans ce cas, la probabilite de ne pas avoir uue decision fausse, celle
d'avoir une decision vraie, celle que la decision rendue est conforme a la
verite, sont les memes, puisqu'il ne peut y avoir de cas oii il n'y ait
pas de decision.
Here, although Condorcet does not say so, the words celle que
la decision rendue est conforme a la verite mean that we know
the decision has been given, but we do not know the numbers
for and against. For, as we have just seen, in the Essay Con-
dorcet takes the case in which we do know the numbers for and
against, and then the probability is not the same as that of the
correctness of a decision not yet given. Thus, in short, in the
Preliminary Discourse Condorcet does not say which case he takes,
and he really takes the case which he does not consider in the
Essay, excluding the case which he does consider in the Essay;
that is, he takes the case which he might most naturally have
been supposed not to have taken.
669. We will now proceed to Condorcet's second H3rpothesis
out of his eleven ; see his page 14.
Suppose, as before, that there are 2q -\-l voters, and that a
certain plurality of votes is required in order that the decision
should be valid ; let 2q + 1 denote this plurality.
Let </) (q) denote the terms obtained from the expansion of
(v + ey'"-', from v'^"-' to the term which involves t*^'-^^^ e^'^, both
inclusive. Let yfr (^) be formed from </> (q) by interchanging e
and V.
358 CONDORCET.
Then (f> (q) -^'^ (q) is the probability that there will be a valid
decision, <^ (q) is the probability that there will be a valid and
correct decision, and yjr (q) is the probability that there will be a
valid and incorrect decision. Moreover 1 — -yfr (q) is the probability
that there will not be an incorrect decision, and 1 — cj) {q) is the
probability that there will not be a correct decision.
It will be observed that here (q) + yjr (q) is not equal to unity.
In fact 1 — <f> {q) — yjr (q) consists of all the terms in the expansion
of (v + e)'^^^^ lying between those which involve v^'^'^'^^ e'^'^' and
^«-<z' g3+2'+i both exclusive. Thus 1 — cj) (q) — ylr (q) is the probability
that the decision will be invalid for want of the prescribed
plurality.
It is shewn by Condorcet that if v is greater than e the
limit of <p {q) when q increases indefinitely is unity. See his
pages 19 — 21.
670. Suppose we know that a valid decision has been given,
but do not know the numbers for and against. Then the pro-
bability that the decisian is correct is , , , . , ^ , and the pro-
bability that it is incorrect is r ^^
<l>iq)+'f{q)'
Suppose we know that a valid decision has been given, and
also know the numbers for and against. Then the probabilities
of the correctness and incorrectness of the decision are those which
have been stated in Art. 667.
671. We will now indicate what Condorcet appears to mean
by the principal conditions which ought to be secured in a de-
cision ; they are :
1. That an incorrect decision shall not be given ; that is
l — '^iq) must be large.
2. That a correct decision shall be given ; that is <p (q) must
be large.
3. That there shall be a valid decision, correct or incorrect ;
that is </) (2') + '^ (q) must be large.
4. That a valid decision which has been given is correct,
CONDORCET. 859
supposing the numbers for and against not to be known ; that is
. / N . / \ must be large.
5. That a vaHd decision which has been given is correct,
supposing the numbers for and against to be known ; that is
-jjp^^ :j^^-^ must be large, even when m and 7i are such as to
give it the least value of which it is susceptible.
These appear to be what Condorcet means by the principal
conditions, and which, in his usual fluctuating manner, he calls
in various places Jive conditions, four conditions, and tivo con-
ditions. See his pages xviii, xxxi, LXix.
672. Before leaving Condorcet's second Hypothesis we will
make one remark. On his page 17 he requires the following
result.
{l + ^(l_4^)p^(l_4^) ^' 1 -^ • 1.2
I w + 2r — 1
• • • T ', ; ; T ^ "!"•••
7' \7i + r— I
On his page 18 he gives two ingenious methods by which the
result may be obtained indirectly. It may however be obtained
directly in various ways. For example, take a formula which may
be established by the Differential Calculus for the expansion of
(1 + \/(l — 4^)}""^ ii^ powers of s, and differentiate with respect
to z, and put n — 2 for 771.
673. Condorcet's third Hjrpothesis is similar to his second ;
the only difference is that he here supposes 2q voters, and that
a plurahty of 2q is required for a valid decision.
674<. In his fourth, fifth, and sixth H^^otheses Condorcet
supposes that a plurality is required which is proportional, or
nearly so, to the whole number of voters. We will state the
results obtained in one case. Suppose we require that at least
two-thirds of the whole number of voters shall concur in order
that the decision may be valid. Let n represent the whole num-
ber of voters ; let ^ (n) represent the probability that there will
BOO CONDORCET.
be a valid and correct decision, and -^/r (n) the probability that
there will be a valid and incorrect decision ; let v and e have the
same meaning as in Art. 662. Then, when n is infinite, if v is
2 , , 2
greater than ^ we have ^ (n) =1, if v is less than ^ we have
2
(w) = ; and similarly if e is greater than ^ > that is if v is
o
1 . . 2 .
less than ^ , we have -^ (n) = 1, and if e is less than -^ , that is
o o
if t; is greater than ^ , we have ylr (n) ==0.
o
We shall not stop to give Condorcet's own demonstrations of
these results ; it will be sufficient to indicate how they may be
derived from Bernoulli s Theorem; see Art. 123. We know from
this theorem that when n is very large, the terms which are in
the neighbourhood of the greatest term of the expansion of
{v-\-eY overbalance the rest of the terms. Now </> {n) consists of
the first third of all the terms of (v + e)", and thus if v is greater
2
than - the greatest term is included within <j> (n), and therefore
(f> (n) =1 ultimately.
2
The same considerations shew that when v = -^, we have
1 . ^
^(n) = ^ ultimately.
675. Condorcet's seventh and eighth Hypotheses are thus
described by himself, on his page xxxiii :
La septieme hypothese est celle ou I'on renvoie la decision a un autre
temps, si la pluralite exigee n'a pas lieu.
Dans la huitieme hy]^)othese, on suppose que si I'assemblee n'a pas
rendu sa premiere decision a la pluralite exigee, on prend une seconde
fois les avis, et ainsi de suite, jusqu^a ce que Ton obtienne cette pluralite.
These two Hypotheses give rise to very brief discussions in the
Essay.
676. The ninth Hypothesis relates to the decisions formed
by various systems of combined tribunals. Condorcet commences
it thus on his page 57 :
CONDORCET. 861
Jusqu'ici nous avons suppose iin seul Tribunal ; dans plusieurs pays
cependant on fait juger la meme affaire par plusieurs Tribunaux, ou
plusieurs fois par le meme, mais d'apres une nouvelle instruction, jus-
qu'^ ce qu'on ait obtenu un certain nombre de decisions conformes.
Cette bypotbese se subdivise en plusieurs cas differens que nous aliens
examiner separement. En effet, on peut exiger, 1". I'unanimite de ces
decisions ; 2°. une certaine loi de pluralite, formee ou par un nombre
absolu, ou par un nombre proportionnel au nombre des decisions
prises ; 3^ un certain nombre consecutif de decisions conformes. Quand
la forme des Tribunaux est telle, que la decision peut etre nulle, comma
dans la septieme hypotbese, il faut avoir ^gard aux decisions nulles.
Enfin il faut examiner ces differens cas, en supposant le nombre de ces
decisions successives, ou comme determine, ou comme indefini.
677. The ninth Hypothesis extends over pages 57 — 86 ; it
appears to have been considered of gi'eat importance by Condorcet
himself We shall give some detail respecting one very in-
teresting case which is discussed. This case Condorcet gives on
pages 73 — 86. Condorcet is examining the probability of the
correctness of a decision which has been confirmed in succession
by an assigned number of tribunals out of a series to which the
question has been referred. The essential part of the discussion
consists in the solution of two problems which we will now enun-
ciate. Suppose that the probability of the happening of an event
in a single trial is v, and the probability of its failing is e, required,
1st the probability that in r trials the event will happen p times
in succession, 2nd the probability that in r trials the event will
happen p times in succession before it fails p times in succession.
It is the second of these problems which Condorcet wishes
to apply, but he finds it convenient to begin with the solution
of the first, which is much the simpler, and which, as we have
seen, in Art. 325, had engaged the attention of De Moivre.
678. We have already solved the first problem, in Art. 325,
but it will be convenient to give another solution.
Let (/) {r) denote the probability that in r trials the event will
happen^ times in succession. Then we shall have
^ (r) =ifJ^v^~' e<j)(r-p)+ if^e ^ (r -^ + 1) + ...
,..+ve(j){r-2)+e(j>{r-l) (1).
S62 CONDORCET.
To shew the truth of this equation we observe that in the
first p trials the following p cases may arise ; the event may-
happen 2^ times in succession, or it may happen p — 1 times in
succession and then fail, or it may happen /:> - 2 times in succes-
sion and then fail, , or it may fail at the first trial. The
aggregate of the probabilities arising from all these cases is </> (r).
The probability from the first case is v^. The probability from
the second case is v^"^ ecj) (r —p) : for v^"^ e is the probability that
the event will happen p— \ times in succession, and then fail ;
and <j>(r —p) is the probability that the event will happen p
times in succession in the course of the remaining r—p trials.
In a similar way the term ?;^~V </> (r — p + 1) is accounted for ; and
so on. Thus the truth of equation (1) is established.
679. The equation (1) is an equation in Finite Differences ;
its solution is
* (r) = (7.2/,-+ C,y:+ C^:+ ...+ C,y;+G (2).
Here (7^, C^, ,.. C^ are arbitrary constants ; y^ V^y "-y^ are the
roots of the following equation in y,
y^ = e{v'-' +v'-'y ^v'-'f + ,.. +y'-') (8);
and C is to be found from the equation
0=^^ + 6(t^^-' + v^"^+... + v + l) C,
that is (7=^^ + 6-1 G\
and as e = 1 — v we obtain (7= 1.
We proceed to examine equation (3). Put 1—v for e, and
assume y = - : thus
'" --^^ «.
We shall shew that the real roots of equation (3) are nu-
merically less than unity, and so also . arc the moduli of the im-
aginary roots ; that is, we shall shew that the real roots of
CONDORCET. S63
equation (4) are numerically greater than v, and so also are the
moduli of the imaginary roots.
"We know that v is less than unity. Hence from (4) if z be
real and positive it must be greater than v. For if z be less than
V, then _ is less than z , and a fortiori — ^ ~ is less
V
than -z . If s be negative in (4) we must have 1 — z^' nega-
tive, so that p must be even, and z numerically greater than unity,
and therefore numerically gi'eater than v. Thus the real roots of
(4) must be numerically greater than v.
Again, we may put (4) in the form
v + v' + v^+ ... = z + z^-\- ...+z^ (5).
Now suppose that z is an imaginary quantity, say
z =zJc (cos d 4- V— 1 sin 0) ;
then if k is not greater than v, we see by aid of the theorem
0" = k"" (cos nd + V^ sin nO),
that the real terms on the right-hand side of (5) will form an
aggregate less than the left-hand side. Thus k must be greater
than V.
After what we have demonstrated respecting the values of the
roots of (3), it follows from (2) that when r is infinite <f> (r) = 1.
680. We proceed to the second problem.
Let (f) (r) now denote the probability that in r trials the event
will happen p times in succession before it fails p times in suc-
cession.
Let ^jr (n) denote the probability that the event will happen
p times in succession before it fails p times in succession, supposing
that one trial has just been made in ivhich the event failed, and that
n trials remain to be made.
Then instead of equation (1) we shall now obtain
^(r)='yP + ?;^~'ei/r(r-;?) + v''"' eyjr (r - p + 1) -{- ...
. . . + ve^{r (r-2) +eylr(r-V) ... (6).
This equation is demonstrated in the same manner as (1) w^as.
364 CONDORCET.
We have now to shew the connexion between the functions
(j) and yjr; it is determined by the following relation ;
'>lr(n)==(l) (n) - e^"^ [cf> {n-p +l)-ef (n-p)} (7).
To shew the truth of this relation we observe that yjr (n) is
less than <f> (n) for the following reason, and for that alone. If the
one failure had not taken place there might be ^ — 1 failures in
succession, and there would still remain some chance of the
happening of the event p times in succession before its failing
p times in succession ; since the one failure has taken place this
chance is lost. The corresponding probability is
e^-' {(f> (n -p + 1)- ef {n -p)}.
The meaning of the factor e^~^ is obvious, so that we need only
explain the meaning of the other factor. And it will be seen
that (j) (n — p -h 1) — eyjr {n — p)) expresses the probability of the
desired result in the n—p + 1 trials which remain to be made;
for here the rejected part eyjr{n—p) is that part which would
coexist with failure in the first of these remaininof trials, which
part would of course not be available when p—1 failures had
already taken place.
Thus we may consider that (7) is established.
In (6) change r into r —p ; therefore
^ (r-p) = v^ + v'^'^ef {r-2p) + if-' e^^r [r-2p-\-V) + ...
. . . + ve-^ (r —p — 2) + ei/r (r —p — 1) (8).
Now multiply (8) by e^ and subtract the result from (6), ob-
serving that by (7) we have
i/r in) — e^'yjrin —p) = ^ (n) — e^"* <^ {n —p + 1) ;
thus we obtain
<f> ir) - e^ ^ (r -p) =v^ - eV
+ v""'' e {(p {r -p) - e^-' <^ (r - 2p + 1)}
+ v''-'e{<\>{r-p-\-l) -e^"'^ (r-2^+2)}
+ ... '
j^e[^(r-r)-e"<t>{^-p)] (9).
681. The equation in Finite Differences which we have just
CONDORCET. 365
obtained may be solved in the ordinary way ; we shall not how-
ever proceed with it.
One case of interest may be noticed. Suppose r infinite ; then
fj) (^r—p), (/> (r — 2/? + 1), ... will all be equal. Thus we can obtain
the probability that the event will happen p times in succession
before it fails p times in succession in an indefinite number of
trials. Let F denote this probability ; then we have from (9),
-e^F(t;^-'+^;^-'+... + v + l).
Hence after reduction we obtain
F= ^^-^g-o (10)
682. The problems which we have thus solved are solved by
Laplace, Theorie...des Proh. pages 2^7 — 251. In the solution
we have given we have followed Condorcet's guidance, with some
deviations however which we will now indicate ; our remarks will
serve as additional evidence of the obscurity which we attribute
to Condorcet.
Our original equation (1) is given by Condorcet ; his demon-
stration consists merely in pointing out the following identity ;
(v + ey = 'if{v +e)'^ + v'-'e {v + e)'^ + v'^e {v + e)"^^' + ...
...+v''e{v + ey-^ + ve {v + e)'""' + e (t; + e)^-\
He arrives at an equation which coincides with (4). He shews
that the real roots must be numerically greater than v ; but wdth
respect to the imaginary roots he infers that the moduli cannot
be greater than unity, because if they were </> (r) would be infinite
when T is infinite.
We may add that Condorcet shews that (4) has no root which
is a simple imaginary quantity, that is of the form a v — 1.
If in our equation (7) we substitute successively for ^/r in t^rms
of <^ we obtain
-i/r (r) = </) (r) - e^"' {0 [r -^ + 1) - ec/) [r - p)]
- i'-^ [^ (r - 2^ + 1) - ec/) (r - 2/?)}
- i^-^ {cf> (r -Sp + l)-e<l> {r - Sp)}
366 CONDOKCET.
On his page 75 Condorcet gives an equivalent result without
explicitly using (7) ; but he affords very little help in establish-
ing it.
Let X (^') tlenote what </> (r) becomes when v and e are inter-
changed ; that is let % (r) denote the probability that in r trials
the event will fail^ times in succession before it happens ^ times
in succession.
Let E denote the value of % (r) when r is infinite. Then we
can deduce the value of E from that of V by interchanging v and
e ; and we shall have V+ E= 1, as we might anticipate from the
result at the end of Art. 679.
Condorcet says that we shall have
where f is une fonction semhlable de v et de e.
Thus it would appear that he had some way of arriving at
these results less simple than that which we have employed ; for
in our way we assign V and E definitely.
It will be seen that
E ~ e-' l-v"'
and this is less than — if v be greater than e.
We have then two results, namely
^_(£)_^ V tf
the first of these results is obvious and the second has just been
demonstrated. From these two results Condorcet seems to draw
the inference that , ; continually diminishes as r increases ; see
his page 78. The statement thus made may be true but it is not
demonstrated.
Condorcet says on his page 78, La probabilite en general que
la decision sera en faveur de la vcrite, sera exprimee par
^^ (1 -v)[l- e")
e" (1 -e){l- v^) *
CONDORCET. 367
. V
This is not tnie. In fact Condorcet gives -p for the probability
when he ought to give -^ — ^ , that is V.
Condorcet says on the same page, Le cas le plus favorable est
celui oil Ton aura d'abord j^ decisions consecutives, sans aucun
melange. It would be difficult from the words used by Condorcet
to determine what he means ; but by the aid of some s^^mbolical
expressions which follow we can restore the meaning. Hitherto
he has been estimating the probability before the trial is made ;
but he now takes a different position altogether. Suppose we are
told that a question has been submitted to a series of tribunals, and
that at last p opinions in succession on the same side have been
obtained ; we are also told the opinion of every tribunal to which
the question was submitted, and we wish to estimate the pro-
bability that the decision is correct. Condorcet then means to
say that the highest probability will be when the first ^ tribunals
all concuiTed in opinion.
Condorcet continues, S'il y a quelque melange dans le cas de
jo = 2, il est clair que le cas le plus defavorable sera celui
de toutes les valeurs paires de r, oil le rapport des probabilites
. v^ e V ^ ^ • ^1 •
est -3- . - = - , Let us examine tnis.
eve
Suppose that p = 2. Suppose we are told that a decision has
been obtained after an odd number of trials ; then we estimate the
probability of the correctness of the decision at . For sup-
pose, for example, that there were five trials. The probabilities of the
correctness and of the incorrectness of the decision are proportional
respectively to evev^ and veve"^, that is to v and e. On the other
hand, suppose we are told that the decision has been obtained after
an even number of trials ; then in the same way we shall find that
the probabilities of the correctness and of the incorrectness of the
decision are proportional respectively to v^ and e^. Thus the
. . v" .
probability of the correctness of the decision is -^ ^ ; and this
V
is greater than , assuming that v is greater than e. Thus
368 CONDORCET.
we see the meaning which Condorcet should have expressed, and
although it is almost superfluous to attempt to correct what is
nearly unintelligible, it would seem that paires should be changed
to impaires.
683. Condorcet's problem may be generalised. We may ask
what is the probability that in r trials the event will happen
p times in succession before it fails q times in succession. In this
case instead of (7) we shall have
'^{7i) = <i> {n) — e^~^ [(f> {n — g -^ 1) — e^lr {n - q)] ;
instead of (9) we shall have
(l){r)-'e^(j>{r-q)=v''{l-e')
+ v""-' e {(/) (r -p) - e^"' <f> (r -p-q + l)\
+ V ^"' e {(^ (r -^ + 1 ) - e«-' (f> {r -^- q+ 2)]
+ ...
and instead of (10) we shall have
^^" (1 - e^
684. We will introduce here two remarks relating to that
part of Condorcet's Preliminary Discourse which bears on his
ninth Hypothesis.
On page xxxvi. he says,
...c'est qu'en supposant que I'on connoisse le nombre des decisions
et la pluralite de chacune, on pent avoir la somme des pluralites obte-
nues contre I'opinion qui I'emporte, plus graiide que celle des pluralites
conformes a cet avis.
This is a specimen of a kind of illogical expression which is
not uncommon in Condorcet. He seems to imply that the result
depends on our knoiving something, whereas the result might
happen quite independently of our knowledge. If he will begin
his sentence as he does, his conclusion ought to be that we may
have a certain result and know that lue have it.
On page xxxvii. he alludes to a case which is not discussed
in the Essay. Suppose that a question is submitted to a series
CONDORCET. 369
of tribunals until a certain number of opinions in succession on
the same side has been obtained, the opinions of those tribunals
being disregarded in which a sj^ecified plurality did not concur.
Let V be the probability of an opinion for one alternative of the
question, "svhich we will call the affirmative; let e be the proba-
bility of an opinion for the negative ; and let z be the j)robability
that the opinion will have to be disregarded for want of the re-
quisite plurality. Thus v + e + z = 1. Let r be the number of
ojDinions on the same side required, q the number of tribunals.
Suppose (v-}-zy to be expanded, and let all the terms be taken
between v^ and v*" both inclusive ; denote the aggTegate by (v).
Let (f> (e) be formed from (f> (v) by putting e for v. Then (/> {v) is
the i^i'obability that there will be a decision in the affirmative,
and (f> {e) is the jDrobability that there will be a decision in the
negative. But, as we have said, Condorcet does not discuss the
case.
685. Hitherto Condorcet has always supposed that each voter
had only two alternatives presented to him, that is the voter had
a proposition and its contradictory to choose between ; Condorcet
now proposes to consider cases in which more than two proj)o-
sitions are submitted to the voters. He saj^s on his page 86 that
there will be three Hy23otheses to examine ; but he really arranges
the rest of this j^art of his Essay under tiuo H}qDotheses, namely the
tenth on pages 86 — 94?, and the eleventh on pages 95 — 136.
686. Condorcet's tenth Hypothesis is thus given on his
page XLII :
...celle oil Ton suppose que les Yotans peuvent non-seulement voter
pour ou centre une proposition, mais aussi declarer qu'ils ne se croient
pas assez instruits pour prononcer.
The pages 89 — 94? seem even more than commonly obscure.
687. On his page 94< Condorcet begins his eleventh H}-]30-
thesis. Suppose that there are 6^ + 1 voters and that there are
three propositions, one or other of which each voter affirms. Let
V, e, i denote the probabilities that each voter will affirm these
three propositions respectively, so that ?; + e + /=l. Condorcet
indicates various problems for consideration. We may for example
suppose that three persons A, B, C are candidates for an office,
24
370 CONDORCET.
and that v, e, i are the probabiHties that a voter will vote for A, B, C
respectively. Since there are 6^+1 voters the three candidates
cannot be bracketed, but any two of them may be bracketed. We
may consider three problems.
I. Find the probability that neither B nor C stands singly at
the head.
II. Find the probability that neither B nor C is hefore A,
III. Find the probability that A stands singly at the head.
These three probabilities are in descending order of magnitude.
In III. we have all the cases in which A decisively beats his two
opponents. In II. we have, in addition to the cases in III., those
in which A is bracketed with one opponent and beats the other.
In I. we have, in addition to the cases in II., those in which A is
beaten by both his opponents, who are themselves bracketed, so
that neither of the two beats the other.
Suppose for example that q = l. We may expand {v + e + iy
and pick out the terms which will constitute the solution of each
of our problems.
For III. we shall have
v' + 7v' {e + i) + 21v' (e + if + 85y* (e + if + ^ov' ^ii\
For II. we shall have in addition to these
For I. we shaJl have in addition to the terms in II.
7v 1^eH\
These three problems Condorcet briefly considers. He denotes
the probabilities respectively by IF ^ TF/, and W"^. It will scarcely
be believed that he immediately proceeds to a fourth problem in
which he denotes the probability by TF/^, which is nothing hut the
second problem over again. Such however is the fact. His enun-
ciations appear to be so obscure as even to have misled himself
But it will be seen on examination that his second and fourth
problems are identical, and the final expressions which he gives
for the probabilities agree, after allowing for some misprints.
COXDORCET. 371
688. It may be interesting to give Cordorcet's own enun-
ciations.
I. ...soit TF^ la probabilite que ni e ni i n'obtiendront sur les deux
autres opinions la pluralite, . . . page 95.
II. ... W/ exprimant la probabilite que e et i n'ont pas sur v la
pluralite exigee, sans qu'il soit necessaire, pour rejeter un terme, que
I'un des deux ait cette pluralite sur I'autre,... page 100.
III. . . . TF'^, c'est-a-dire, la probabilite que v obtiendra sur i et e la
pluralite exigee, . . . page 1 02.
lY. ...TF/^, c'est-a-dire, la probabilite que v surpassera un des
deux i ou e, et pourra cependant etre egal a I'autre,... page 102.
Of these enunciations I., III., and TV. present no difficulty;
II. is obscure in itself and is rendered more so by the fact that
we naturally suppose at first that it ought not to mean the same
as IV. But, as we have said, the same meaning is to be given
to II. as to lY.
Before Condorcet takes these problems individually he thus
states them together on his page 95 :
...nous chercherons la probabilite joour un nombre donne de Yotans,
ou que ni e uii ne I'emportent sur v d'une i^luralite exigee, ou que e et i
I'emportent chacun sur v de cette pluralite sans I'emporter Tun sur
I'autre, ou enfin que v I'emporte a la fois sur e et sur i de cette pluralite.
Thus he seems to contemplate three problems. The last clause
ow enfin ... pluralite gives the enunciation of the third problem
distinctly. The clause ou que ni . . . exigee may perhaps be taken
as the enunciation of the second problem. The clause ou que ...
Vautre will then be the enunciation of the first problem.
In the Preliminary Discourse the problems are stated together
in the following words on page XLIV :
...qu'on cherche...ou la probabilite d'ayoir la pluralite d'un avis sur
les deux,..., ou la probabilite que, soit les deux autres, soit un seul des
deux, n' auront pas la pluralite ;...
In these words the problems are enunciated in the order
III., IL, I. ; and knowing what the problems are we can see that
the words are not inapplicable. But if we had no other way of
testing the meaning we might have felt uncertain as to what
problems II. and I. were to be.
24—2
872 CONDORCET.
689. Condorcet does not discuss these problems with much
detail. He gives some general considerations with the view of
shewing how what he denotes by W^^^ may be derived from TV^;
but he does not definitely work out his suggestions.
We will here establish some results w^hich hold when the
number of voters is infinite.
We wdll first shew that when q is infinite W/ is equal to unity,
provided that v is greater than either e or i Suppose {v + e+iY^'^^
expanded in the form
{v + 6)^^^ + {6q + l){v + er i + ^t^-^ (^ ^. ey
16^41
' 4^ + 1 zg' ^ '
\Gq-l '2
^^ +
Now take the last term which we have here explicitly given,
and pick out from it the part which it contributes to W^.
We have {v + e)*^"^^ = {v + eY'"-' -f- + -— ,
Expand \ 1 \ as far as the term which involves
f V \^^^^ f V e \
, and denote the sum by / , J . Then finally
the part which we have to pick out is
\6q±l
+ ey
(V 6 \
, ) is equal to
unity when q is infinite, as we have already shewn ; see Art. 660.
Hence we see that when q is infinite the value of W/ is the
limit of
{v + e)^^^ + {6q + l){v + 6)^ I + ^^^ ^ ^J ^^ {v + e)*^-^ i' +
16(7 + 1
Now we are at liberty to suppose that { is not greater than e,
and then i?4-6 is greater than 2i; so that v-\-e must be greater
CONDORCET. 373
2
than ^. Hence by Art. 67^ the value of W/ will be unity when
q is infinite.
Let </) (v, ei) stand for W^, where we mean by our notation to
draw attention to the fact that TF/ is a symmetrical function of e
and ^. We have then the following result strictly true,
(j> {v, ei) + (j) {e, vi) + <j> {i, ev) — 1.
Now suppose q infinite. Let v be greater than e or /; then as
we have just shewn {v, ei) = 1, and therefore each of the other
functions in the above equation is zero. Thus, in fact, </> {x, yz)
vanishes if x be less than y 07^ z, and is equal to unity if x be
greater than hotli y and z.
Next suppose v — e, and i less than v or e. By what we have
just seen (/, ev) vanishes ; and (/> (v, ei) = c^ {e, vi), so that each
of them is ^ .
Lastly, suppose that v — e — i. Then
<^ [Vy ei) = (e, vi) = <f> [i, ev) ;
hence each of them is ^ .
o
We may readily admit that wlien q is infinite W^ and W"^
are each equal to TF/ ; thus the results which we have obtained
with respect to Problem li. of Art. 687 will also apply to Problems
I. and III.
Condorcet gives these results, though not clearly. He estab-
lishes them for W^ without using the fundamental equation we
have used. He says the same values will be obtained by examining
the formula for TT/^. He proceeds thus on his page 10^ : Si
maintenant nous cherchons la valeur de TT^ nous trouverons que
TF* est ^gal a I'unite moins la somme des valours de TF'*, on Ton
auroit mis v pour e, et reciproquement v pour i, et reciproquement.
The words after TF'* are not intelligible; but it would seem that
Condorcet has in view such a fundamental equation as that we
have used, put in the form
(/) {v, ei) = 1 — <^ (e, vi) — (j> {i, ev).
But such an equation will not be true except on the assumption
374) CONDORCET.
that W'^ and W"^ are equal toTf/ ultimately; and on this assump-
tion we have the required results at once without the five lines
which Condorcet gives after the sentence we have just quoted.
690. In the course of his eleventh Hypothesis Condorcet
examines the propriety of the ordinary mode of electing a person
by votes out of three or more candidates. Take the^ following
example ; see his page LViil.
Suppose A, B, C are the candidates ; and that out of 60 votes
23 are given for A, 19 for B, and 18 for C. Then A is elected
according to ordinary method.
But Condorcet says that this is not necessarily satisfactory. For
suppose that the 23 who voted for A would all consider C better
than B ; and suppose that the 19 who voted for B would all con-
eider (7 better than A ; and suppose that of the 18 who voted for
C, 16 would prefer B to A, and 2 would prefer A to B. Then on
the whole Condorcet gets the following result.
The two propositions in favour of C are C is better than A,
C is better than B.
The first of these has a majority of 87 to 23, and the second
a majority of 41 to 19.
The two propositions in favour of B are B is better than A,
B is better than G.
The first of these has a majority of 35 to 25, the second is
in a minority of 19 to 41.
The two propositions in favour of A are A is better than B,
A is better than C.
The first of these is in a minority of 25 to 35, and the second
in a minority of 23 to 37.
Hence Condorcet concludes that G who was lowest on the
poll in the ordinary way, really has the greatest testimony in his
favour ; and that A who was highest on the poll in the ordinary
way, really has the least.
Condorcet himself shews that his own method, which has just
been illustrated, will lead to difficulties sometimes. Suppose, for
example, that there are 23 voters for A, 19 for B, and 18 for G.
Suppose moreover that ah the 23 who voted for A would have
preferred B to G; and that of the 19 who voted for By there
COXDORCET. 375
are 17 who prefer C to A, and 2 who prefer A to C; and lastly
that of the 18 who voted for C there are 10 who prefer A to B,
and 8 who jDrefer B to A. Then on the whole, the following three
projDositions are affirmed:
B is better than (7, by 42 votes to 18 ;
G is better than A, by 35 votes to 25 ;
A is better than B, by 38 votes to 27.
Unfortunately these propositions are not consistent with each
other.
Condorcet treats this subject of electing out of more than
two candidates at great length, both in the Essay and in the
Preliminary Discourse ; and it is resumed in the fifth part of
his Essay after the ample cUscussion which it had received in the
first part. His results however appear of too little value to detain
us any longer. See Laplace, Theorie . . . des Proh. page 27i.
691. The general conclusions which Condorcet draws from
the first part of his work do not seem to be of great importance ;
they amount to little more than the very obvious principle that
the voters must be enlightened men in order to ensure our con-
fidence in their decision. We will quote his own words :
On voit done ici que la forme la plus propre a remphr toutes les
conditions exigees, est en nieme temps la plus simple, celle ou une
assemblee unique, composee d'hommes eclaires, prononce seule un juge-
ment a une pluralite telle, qu'on ait une assui'ance suffisante de la
verite du jugement, meme lorsque la pluralite est la moindre, et il faut
de plus que le nombre des Yotans soit assez grand pour avok une grande
probabihte d'obtenir une decision.
Des Votans eclaires et une forme simple, sent les moyens de reunir
le plus d'avantages. Les formes compliquees ne remedient point au
defant de lumieres dans les Yotans, ou n'y remedient qu'imparfaitement,
ou meme entrainent des inconveniens plus grands que ceux qu'on a
vouhi eviter. Page XLii.
... 11 faut, 1° dans le cas des decisions sur des questions compliquees,
faire en sorte qne le systeme des propositions simples qui les forment
soit rigoureusement developpe, que chaque avis possible soit bien expose,
que la voix de chaque Yotant soit prise sur chacune des propositions qui
forment cet avis, et non sur le resultat seul
37G CONDORCET.
2°. II faiit de plus que les Yotans soient eclaires, et d'autant plus
eclaires, que les questions qu'ils decident sont plus compliquees ; sans
cela on trouvera bien ime forme de decision qui preservera de la crainte
d'une decision fausse, mais qui en meme temps rendant toute decision
presque impossible, ne sera qu'un moyen de perpetuer les abus et les
mauvaises loix. Page lxix.
692. We now come to Condorcet's second part, which occupies
his pcages 137 — 175. In the first part the following three elements
were always supposed known, the number of voters, the hypothesis
of plurality, and the probability of the correctness of each voter's
vote. From these three elements various results were deduced,
the i^rincipal results being the probability that the decision will
be correct, and the probability that it will not be incorrect ; these
probabilities were denoted by (j> {q) and 1— 'v/r(^) in Art. 669.
Now in his second part Condorcet supposes that we know only huo
of the three elements, and that we know one of the two results ;
from these known quantities he deduces the remaining element
and the other result; this statement applies to all the cases
discussed in the second part, except to two. In those two cases
we are supposed to know the probability of the correctness of a
decision which we know has been given with the least admissible
plurality ; and in one of these cases we know also the probability
of the correctness of each voter s vote, and in the other case the
hypothesis of plurality.
Condorcet himself has given three statements as to the con-
tents of his second part ; namely on pages xxil, 2, and 187; of
these only the first is accurate.
693. Before proceeding to the main design of his second part
Condorcet adverts to two subjects.
First he notices and condemns Buffon's doctrine of moral cer-
tainty ; see Condorcet's pages LXXi and 138. One of his objections
is thus stated on page 138 :
Cette opinion est inexacte en elle-meme, en ce qu'elle tend a con-
fondre deux clioses de nature essentiellement differente, la probabilite et
la certitude : c'est precisement comme si on confondoit I'asymptote
d'une courbe avec ime tangente menee a un point fort eloigne ; de telles
suppositions ne pourroient etre admises dans les Sciences exactes sans en
detruire toute la precision.
CONDORCET. 377
Without undertaking the defence of BufFon we may remark
that the illustration given by Condorcet is not fortunate ; for the
student of Geometry knows that it is highly important and useful
in many cases to regard an asymptote as a tangent at a very re-
mote point.
Secondly, Condorcet adverts to the subject of Mathematical
Expectation; see his pages LXXV and 142. He intimates that
Daniel Bernoulli had first pointed out the inconveniences of the
ordinary rule and had tried to remedy them, and that D'Alembert
had afterwards attacked the rule itself; see Arts. 378, 4G9, 471.
694. The second part of Condorcet's Essay presents nothing
remarkable; the formuloe of the first part are now employed again,
with an interchange of given and sought quantities. Methods of
approximating to the values of certain series occupy pages 155 — 171.
Condorcet quotes from Euler what we now call Stirling's theorem
for the ajDproximate calculation of \x ; Condorcet also uses the
formula, due to Lagrange, which we now usually express symboli-
cally thus
AX=(e'^-l)X-
See also Lacroix, Traite du Cole. Diff. ... Vol. iii. jDage 92.
Condorcet's investigations in these approximations are dis-
figured and obscured by numerous misprints. The method which
he gives on his pages 168, 169 for successive approximation to a
required numerical result seems unintelligible.
695. We now arrive at Condorcet's third part which occupies
his pages 176 — 241. Condorcet says on his page 176,
Nous avons suffisammeiit expose Tobjet ole cette troisieme Partie : on
a vu qu'elle devoit renfermer I'examen de deux questions differentes.
Dans la premiere, il s'agit de conuoitre, d'apres I'observatiou, la proba-
bilite des jugemens d'uii Tribunal ou de la voix de chaque Votant ; dans
la seconde, il s'agit de determiner le degre de probabilite necessaire ])0\\v
qu'on puisse agir dans differentes circonstances, soit avec prudence, soit
avec justice.
Mais il est aise de voir que I'examen de ces deux questions demaude
d'abord qu'on ait etabli en general les j^rincipes d'apres lesquels on peut
determiner la probabilite d'un ^venement futur ou inconnu, nou par la
378 CONDORCET.
connoissance dii nombre des combinaisons possibles que donnent cet
eveuement, ou revenement oppose, mais seulement par la connoissance
de I'ordre des evenemens connus ou passes de la meme espece. C'est
I'objet des problemes suivans.
696. Condorcet devotes his pages 176 — 212 to thirteen pre-
liminary problems, and then his pages 213 — 241 to the application
of the problems to the main purposes of his Essay.
With respect to these preliminary problems Condorcet makes
the following historical remark on his page LXXXIII,
L'idee de cherclier la probabilite des evenemens futurs d'apres la loi
des evenemens passes, paroit s'etre presentee a Jacques Bernoulli et a
Moivre, mais ils n'ont donne dans leurs ouvrages aucune metliode pour
y parvenir.
M". Bayes et Price en ont donne una dans les Transactions philo-
sophiques, annees 1764 et 1765, et M. de la Place est le premier qui ait
traite cette question d'une maniere analytique.
697. Condorcet's first problem is thus enunciated :
Soient deux evenemens seuls possibles A et N, dont on ignore la
probabilite, et qu'on sache seulement que A est arrive m fois, et N^
n fois. On suppose I'un des deux Evenemens arrives, et on demande la
probabiUte que c'est I'evenement A, ou que c'est I'evenement N, dans
riiy]^)othese que la probabilite de chacun des deux evenemens est con-
stamment la meme.
We have already spoken of this problem in connexion with
Bayes, see Art. 551.
Condorcet solves the problem briefly. He obtains the ordinary
result that the probability in favour of A is,
f x"^-"' (1 - xy dx
[ a:'" (1 - xY dx
J ft
Wl -|- 1
and this is equal to ^r . Similarly the probability in favour
^ m + ?i -h 2 J 1 J
^j . n-\-\
of N IS
m + ?i+ 2*
It will of course be observed that it is only by w\ay of abbrevia-
tion that we can speak of these results as deduced from the hypo-
thesis that the probability of the two events is constantly the
CONDORCET. 879
same ; the real hypothesis involves much more, namely, that the
probability is of unknown value, any value between zero and unity
being equally likely a priori.
Similarly we have the following result. Suppose the event A
has occurred m times and the event N has occurred n times ; sup-
pose that the probability of the two events is constantly the same,
but of unknown value, any value between a and h being equally
likely a priori ; required the probability that the probability of A
lies between certain limits a and ^ which are themselves com-
prised between a and h.
The required probability is
i
' x'^il-xYdx
f
J a
x"^ (1 - xy dx
a
Laplace sometimes speaks of such a result as the jyrohahilitii
that the p)Ossihilitij oi A lies between a and /3 ; see Theorie...des
Proh. Livre ii. Chapitre vi. See also De Morgan, Theory of Proba-
bilities, in the Encyclopcedia Metropolitana, Art. 77, and Essay on
Probahilities in the Cabinet Cyclopedia, page 87.
698. Condorcet's second problem is thus enunciated :
On suj^pose dans ce Problem e, que la probabilite de A et de N n'est
pas la meine dans tous les evenemens, mais qu'elle pent avoir pour
chacun une valeur quelconque depuis zero jusqu'a I'unite.
Condorcet's solution depends essentially on this statement. The
probability of m occurrences of A, and n occurrences of N is
\m-\-n ( r^ ) "' f f ^ ] " \m-\-n \
. I \ xdx \ \\ {1-x) dx\ , that is '. , -^^^i^Tn •
\]]}[^ [Jo ) Ih J lull!}. ^
The probability of having A again, after A has occurred m times
and N has occurred n times, is found by changing the exponent m
into m + 1, so that it is
\m + n 1
Proceeding in this way Condorcet finally arrives at the conclu-
sion that the probability of having A is ^ and the probability of
380 CONDOHCET.
Laving iV is ^ . In fact the hypothesis leads to the same conclu-
sion as we should obtain from the hypothesis that A and N are
always equally likely to occur.
In his first problem Condorcet assumes that the probability of
each event remains constant during the observations ; in his second
problem he says that he does not assume this. But we must
observe that to abstain from assuming that an element is constant
is different from distinctly assuming that it is not constant. Con-
dorcet, as we shall see, seems to confound these two things. His
second problem does not exclude the case of a constant probability,
for as we have remarked it is coincident with the case in which
there is a constant probability equal to ^ .
The introduction of this second problem, and of others similar
to it is peculiar to Condorcet. We shall immediately see an appli-
cation which he makes of the novelty in his third problem ; and we
shall not be able to commend it.
699. Condorcet's third problem is thus enunciated :
On suppose dans ce probleme que Ton ignore si a chaque fois la pro-
bahilite d' avoir A qvl N reste la meme, on si elle varie a chaque fois, de
nianiere quelle puisse avoir une valeur quelconque depuis zero jusqu'a
r unite, et Ton demande, sacliant que Ton a eu m evenemens -4, et n
evenemens N^ quelle est la probabilite d'amener A ou -^V.
The following is Condorcet's solution. If the probability is
constant, then the probability of obtaining m occurrences of A
I m -\- n r^
and 71 occurrences of N is ', , - x"' (1 — xY dx, that is
If the probability is not constant, then, as in
\m \n \m-\-7i + l
the second problem, the probability of obtaining 7n occurrences of ^
I !ii -\-n \
and n occurrences of N is ^r^^rr^ . Hence he infers that the
P Q
probabilities of the hypothesis are respectively and ^ ,
\m\n 1
where P= — — — ^ and Q =
m-]-n + l 2
m+n
CONDORCET. 381
He continues in the usual way. If the first hypothesis be true
tn -j- 1
the probability of another A is ; if the second hypo-
^ "^ 771 + W + 2 ^^
thesis be true the probability of another ^ is ^ . Thus finally the
probability in favour of A is
P+ (3 V^ + ^ + 2 ^2 ^J-
Similarly the probability in favour of N is
1 f ?2 + 1
-^p^\q\
It should be noticed that in this solution it is assumed that
the two hypotheses were equally probable d yrioriy which is a very
important assumption.
700. Suppose that m + n is indefinitely large ; if m = n it may
be shewn that the ratio of P to Q is indefinitely small ; this ratio
obviously increases as the difference of m and n increases, and is
indefinitely large when m or n vanishes. Condorcet enunciates
a more general result, namely this ; if we suppose m = an and
n infinite, the ratio of P to Q is zero if a is unity, and infinite
if a is greater or less than unity. Condorcet then proceeds,
Ainsi supposons m et n donnes et inegaiix ; si on continue d' observer
les evenemens, et que m et n conservent la meme proportion, on parvi-
endra a une valeur de m et de n, telle qu'on aura une probabilite anssi
grande qu'on voudra, que la probabilite des evenemens A et J^ est con-
stante.
Par la meme raison, lorsque m et n sont fort grands, leur difference,
quoique tres-grande en elle-meme, pent etre assez petite par rapport au
nornbre total, pour que Ton ait une tres-grande probabilite que la pro-
babilite d'avoir A ou iV^n'est pas constante.
The second paragi^aph seems quite untenable. If in a very
large number of trials A and N had occurred very nearly the same
number of times we should infer that there is a constant proba-
bility namely ^ for A and ^ for N. It is the more necessary to
382 CONDORCET.
record dissent because Condorcet seems to attach great importance
to his third problem, and the inferences he draws from it ; see his
pages Lxxxiv, xcii, 221.
701. Condorcet's fourth problem is thus enunciated :
On suppose ici un evenement A arrive m fois, et tin evenement N
arrive oi fois ; que Ton sache que la probabilite inconnue d'un des eve-
nemens soit depuis 1 jusqu'a ^, et celle de 1' autre depuis ;;r jusqu'a zero,
et Ton demande, dans les trois hypotheses des trois problemes precedens,
P. la probabilite que c'est A ou iVdont la probabilite est depuis 1 jusqu'a ^;
2°. la probabilite d'avoir A ou iV dans le cas d'un nouvel evenement ;
3". la probabilite d'avoir un evenement dont la probabilite soit depuis
1 jusqu'a ^ .
Condorcet uses a very repulsive notation, namely,
The chief point in the solution of this problem is the fact to
which we have drawn attention in the latter part of Art. G97.
We may remark that Condorcet begins his solution of the
second part of his problem thus : Soit supposee maintenant la pro-
babilite changeante a chaque evenement. He ought to say, let the
probability not be assumed constant. See Art. 698.
702. Condorcet's fifth problem is thus enunciated :
Conservant les memes hypotheses, on demande quelle est, dans le cas
du probleme premier, la probabilite, 1°. que celle de I'evenement A n'est
pas au-dessous d'une quantite donnee j 2°. qu'elle ne dilBfere de la valeur
moyenne que d'une quantite a ; 3°. que la probabilite d'amener A,
n'est point au-dessous d'une limite a ; 4". qu'elle ne differe de la pro-
babilite moyenne ^ que d'une quantite moindre que a. On
demande aussi, ces probabilites etant donnces, quelle est la limite a
pour laquelle elles ont lieu.
The whole solution depends on the fact to which we have
drawn attention in the latter part of Art. 697.
CONDOBCET. 383
As is very common with Condorcet, it would be uncertain from
his language what questions he proposed to consider. On examin-
ing his solution it appears that his 1 and 3 are absolutely identical,
and that his 2 and 4 differ only in notation.
703. In his sixth problem Condorcet says that he proposes the
same questions as in his fifth problem, taking now the hypothesis
that the probability is not constant.
Here his 1 and 3 are really different, and his 2 and 4 are really
different.
It seems to me that no value can be attributed to the discus-
sions which constitute the problems from the second to the sixth
inclusive of this part of Condorcet's work. See also Cournot's
Exposition de la Theorie cles Chances... -psige 166.
704. The seventh problem is an extension of the first. Sup-
pose there are two events A and N, which are mutually exclusive,
and that in m + n trials A has happened m times, and N has hap-
pened n times : required the probability that in the next p +q
trials A will happen j; times and N happen q times.
Suppose that x and 1 — x were the chances of A and JSf s.t a
single trial ; then the probability that in m + n trials A would
happen m times and iV^ happen n times would be proportional to
x"' (1 — xy. Hence, by the rule for estimating the probabilities of
causes from effects, the probability that the chance of A lies be-
tween X and x + dx at a single trial is
x'^Q.-xydx
{ r»'" (1 - xf dx y
J
And if the chance of ^ at a single trial is x the probability
that mp-\-q trials A will occur j) times and N occur q times is
^===-x'{\-xy.
^^ , .
Hence finally the probability required in the problem is
, , ^ \ x"^-"' il - xY^'' dx
\P±± K
\e[i fx^'{i-xydx
384^ CONDORCET.
This important result had been given in effect by Laplace in
the memoir which we have cited in Art. 551 ; but in Laplace's me-
moir we must suppose the ^-? + </ events to be required to happen
\P -^ ^ .
in an assiqned order, as the factor , — :' is omitted.
We shall see hereafter in examining a memoir by Prevost
and Lhuilier that an equivalent result may also be obtained by an
elementary algebraical process.
705. The remaining problems consist chiefly of deductions
from the seventh, the deductions being themselves similar to the
problems treated in Condorcet's first part. We will briefly illus-
trate this by one example. Suppose tliat A has occurred m times
and B has occurred n times ; required the probability that in the
next 2q + l trials there will be a majority in favour of A. Let
F{q) denote this probability ; then
[ x''' (1 - xY cj, (q) dx
ic'" (1 - xY dx
^
where <^ (q) stands for
x'^-"' + {2q + 1) x'' {l-x) + ^^^ + 1^^^^ x'^-' (1 - xy+
\2q+l
~==r X'^' (1 - xy.
...+
Hence if we use, as in Art. 663, a similar notation for the case
in which q is changed into q + 1, we have
[ x'''{l-xy^(q + l)dx
x'"" (1 - xy dx
•^
Therefore, as in Art. 663,
Cx'^l-xyU{q+l)~cl>{q)\dx
F(q+1)-F(q)=i^ ^.r-^ ^ ,
x'''{i-xydx
J n
CONDORCET. 385
where i> (g + 1) - 4> iq) ^ I^TT^ I""'" ^^ ~ "''^'" ~ '"'*' ^^ -^)'' j •
In this manner Condorcet deduces various formulae similar to
equation (2) of Art. 663.
We may remark that at first Condorcet does not seem to deduce
his formulae in the simplest way, namely by applying the results
which he has already obtained in his first part ; but he does
eventually adopt this plan. Compare his pages 191 and 208.
706. Condorcet now proceeds to the ai^plication of the problems
to the main purposes of his Essay. As he says in the passage we
have quoted in Art. 695, there are two questions to be considered.
The first question is considered in pages 213 — 223, and the second
question in pages 223 — 241.
707. The first question asks for two results ; Condorcet barely
notices the first, but gives all his attention to the second.
Condorcet proposes two methods of treatment for the first ques-
tion ; the premier moyen is in pages 213 — 220, and the seconde
methode in pages 220 — 223. Neither method is carried out to a
practical application.
708. We will give a simple illustration of what Condorcet pro-
poses in his first method. Suppose we have a tribunal composed
of a large number of truly enlightened men, and that this tribunal
examines a large number of decisions of an inferior tribunal. Sup-
pose too that we have confidence that these truly enlightened men
will be absolutely correct in their estimate of the decisions of the
inferior tribunal. Then we may accept from their examination
the result that on the whole the inferior tribunal has recorded m
votes for truth and n votes for error. We are now ready to apjDly
the problem in Art. 704, and thus determine the probability that
out of the next 2q + l votes given by members of the inferior tri-
bunal there will be a majority in favour of the truth.
This must be taken however only as a very simple case of the
method proposed by Condorcet ; he himself introduces circum-
stances which render the method much more complex. For in-
stance he has not complete confidence even in his truly enlightened
25
386 CONDORCET.
men, but takes into account the probability that they will err in
their estimate of the decisions of the inferior tribunal. But there
would be no advantage gained in giving a fuller investigation of
Condorcet's method, especially as Condorcet seems to intimate on
his page 216 that the following is the chief result :
...ce qui conduit en general a cette conclusion tres-importante, que
tout Tribunal dont les jugemens sont rendus a une petite pluralite,
relativement au nombre total des Yotans, doit inspirer peu de confiance,
et que ses decisions n'ont qu'une tres-petite probabilite.
Such an obvious result requires no elaborate calculation to
support it.
709. In the second method of treating the first question Con-
dorcet does not suppose any tribunal composed of truly enlightened
men to review the decisions of those who are less enlightened.
But he assumes that the probability of the correctness of each vote
1
lies between ^ and 1 ; and then he proposes to apply some of the
formulse which he obtained in the solutions of the preliminary
problems. Nothing of any practical value can be extracted from
this part of the book. Condorcet himself says on his page c,
II auroit 6te curieux de faire a la suite des decisions de quelque
Tribunal existant, I'application de ce dernier principe, mais il ne nous
a ete possible de nous procurer les donnees necessaires pour cette appli-
cation. D'ailleurs les calculs auroient et6 tres-longs, et la necessite
d'en supprimer les resultats, s'ils avoient et6 trop defavorables, n'etoit
pas propre a donner le courage de s'y livrer.
710. Condorcet now proceeds to the second question which we
have seen in Art. 695 that he proposed to consider, namely the
numerical value of the probability which ought to be obtained
in various cases. This occupies pages 223 — 21^1 of the Essay ;
the corresponding part of the Preliminary Discourse occupies
pages cii — c XXVIII. This discussion is interesting, but not of
much practical value. Condorcet notices an opinion enunciated
by Buffon. Buffon says that out of 10,000 persons one will die in
the course of a day ; but practically the chance of dying in the
CONDORCET. 387
course of a day is disregarded by mankind ; so that may
be considered tbe numerical estimate of a risk which any person is
willing to neglect. Condorcet objects to this on various grounds ;
and himself proposes a different numerical estimate. He finds
from tables of mortality that the risk for a person aged 37 of a
sudden death in the course of a week is -r-^ — zttt^ , and that the
o2 X o80
risk for a person aged 47 is — — j^ . He assumes that prac-
tically no person distinguishes between these risks, so that their
difference is in fact disregarded. The difference between these
fractions is TTi>fw^, and this Condorcet proposes to take as a risk
which a man would practically consider equivalent to zero in the
case of his own life. See Art. 644.
711. Condorcet considers however that the risk which we
may with propriety neglect will vary with the subject to which it
relates. He specially considers three subjects, the establishment
of a new law, the decision between claimants as to the right to a
property, and the condemnation of an accused person to capital
punishment. We may observe that he records the opinion that
capital punishments ought to be abolished, on the ground that,
however large may be the probability of the correctness of a
single decision, we cannot escape having a large probability that in
the course of many decisions some innocent person will be con-
demned. See his pages cxxvi, 241.
712. We now arrive at Condorcet's fourth part, which occupies
pages 242 — 278. He says on his page 242,
Jusqu'ici nous n'avons considere notre sujet que d'une maniere ab-
straite, et les suppositions generales que nous avons faites s'eloignent
trop de la rialite. Cette Partie est destinee h developper la methode de
faire entrer dans le calcul les principales donnees auxquelles on doit
avoir egard pour que les resultats oil Ton est conduit, soient applicables
a la pratique.
Condorcet divides this part into six questions. In these ques-
25—2
388 CONDORCET.
tions he proposes to examine the modifications which the results of
the preceding parts of his book require, before they can be applied
to practice. For instance we cannot in practice suppose it true
that all the voters are of equal skill and honesty ; and accordingly
one of the six questions relates to this circumstance.
But the subjects proposed for investigation are too vague to be
reduced with advantage to mathematical calculation ; and ac-
cordingly we find that Condorcet's researches fall far below what
his enunciations appear to promise. For example, on page 264,
he says,
Nous examinerons ici I'influence qui peut resulter de la passion ou
de la mauvaise foi des Yotans.
These words may stimulate our curiosity and excite our atten-
tion ; but we are quite disappointed when we read the paragraph
which immediately follows :
Comme la probahilite n'a pu etre determinee que par I'experience,
si I'on suit la premiere methode de la troisieme Fartie, ou qu'en sui-
vant la seconde, ou suppose que rinfluence de ]a corruption ou de la
passion sur les jugemens ne fait pas tomber la probahilite au-dessous de
- , alors il est evident que cet element est entre dans le calcul, et qu'il
n'y a par consequent rien a corriger.
Condorcet himself admits that he has here effected very little ;
he says on his page CLiv,
Ainsi Ton doit regarder sur-tout cette quatrieme Partie comme un
simple essai, dans lequel on ne trouvera ni les developpemens ni les
details que rimportance du sujet pouri-oit exiger.
713. Condorcet himself seems to attach great importance to
his fifth question which relates to that system of forced unanimity
which is established for English juries. This question he dis-
cusses in his pages 267 — 276 and CXL — CLi. He believes that he
shews that the system is bad. He introduces the subject thus on
page CXL :
Les jugemens criminels en Angleterre se rendent sous cette forme :
on oblige les Jures de rester dans le lieu d'assemblee jusqu'a ce qu'ils
soient d'accord, et on les oblige de se reunir par cette espece de torture ;
car non-seulement la faim seroit un tourment reel, mais I'ennui, la
CONDORCET. 389
contrainte, le mal-aise, portes a un certain point, peuvent devenir un
veritable siipplice.
Aiissi poun'oit-on faire a cette forme de decision un reproclie sem-
blable a celui qii'on faisoit, avec tant de justice, a I'usage barbare et
inutile de la torture, et dire qu'elle donne de I'avantage a un Jure
robuste et fripon, sur le Jure integre, mais foible.
He says that there is a class of questions to which this method
of forced unanimity cannot he applied ; for example, the truths of
Physical Science, or such as depend on reasoning. He says on
page CXLI,
Aussi, du moins dans des pays ou des siecles eclaires, n'a-t-on jamais
exige cette unanimite pour les questions dont la solution depend du
raisonnement. Personne n'hesite k recevoir comme une verite 1' opinion
unanime des gens instruits, lorsque cette unanimite a ete le produit
lent des reflexions, du temps et des recherches : mais si Ton enfermoit
les vingt plus habiles Pliysiciens de 1' Europe jusqu'a ce qu'ils fussent
convenus d'un point de doctrine, personne ne seroit tente d'avoir la
moindre confiance en cette espece d'unanimite.
714'. We shall not reproduce Condorcet's investigations on the
English jury S3^stem, as they do not seem to us of any practical
value. They can be easily read by a student who is interested in
the subject, for they form an independent piece of reasoning, and
thus do not enforce a perusal of the rest of the book.
We will make a few remarks for the use of a student who con-
sults this part of Condorcet's book; these will occupy our next
Article.
715. On page CXLI Condorcet says that we ought to dis-
tinguish three sorts of questions, and he at once states the first ;
as usual with him he is not careful in the subsequent pages to indi-
cate the second and third of these questions. The second is that
beginning on page CXLII, II y a un autre genre cT opinions.... The
third is that beginning on page CLi, On pent considerer encore....
On his page 267 Condorcet says.
Si Ton prend rhy]3othese huitieme de la premiere Partie, et qu'en
consequence Ton suppose que Ton prendra les voix jusqu'a ce que
r unanimite se soit reuuie pour un des deux avis, nous avons vu que le
390 CONDOECET.
calcul donnoit la meme probabilite, soit que cette unanimite ait lieu
immediatement, soit qu'elle ne se forme qu'apres plusieurs changemens
d'avis, soit que Ton se remiisse a la majoritej soit que Tavis de la
minorite finisse, par avoir tous les suj0frages.
We quote this passage in order to draw attention to a practice of
which Condorcet is very fond, and which causes much obscurity in
his writings ; the practice is that of needlessly varying the lan-
guage. If we compare the words soit que Ton se reimisse a la
viajoy^ite with those which immediately follow, we discover such a
great diversity in the language that we have to ascertain whether
there is a corresponding diversity in the meaning which is to be
conveyed. We shall conclude on examination that there is no
such diversity of meaning, and we consequently pronounce the
diversity of language to be very mischievous, as it only serves to
arrest and perplex the student.
It would be well in this paragraph to omit all the words soit
que Von... suffrages; for without these everything is fully expressed
which Condorcet had obtained in his first part.
We would indicate the first eleven lines of Condorcet's page 270
as involving so much that is arbitrary as to render all the conclu-
sions depending on them valueless. We are not prepared to offer
more reasonable suppositions than those of Condorcet, but we
think that if these are the best which can be found it will be
prudent to give up the attempt to apply mathematics to the
question.
We may remark that what is called Trial hy Jury would more
accurately be styled Trial hy Judge and Jury. Accordingly a most
important element in such an investigation as Condorcet under-
takes would be the influence which the Judge exercises over the
Jury ; and in considering this element we must remember that
the probability is very high that the opinion of the Judge will be
correct, on account of his ability and experience.
716. We now arrive at Condorcet's fifth part; which occupies
the remainder of his book, that is, pages 279 — 304. Condorcet
says on page CLVii,
L'objet de cette derniere Partie, est d'appliquer a quelques exemples
les principes que nous avons developpcs. II auroit 6t^ I. desirer que
CONDORCET. 891
cette application eut pu etre faite d'apres des donnees reelles, mais la
difficulte de se procurer ces donnees, difficultes qu'un particulier ne
pouvoit esperer de vaincre, a force de se contenter d'appliquer les prin-
cipes de la theorie a de simples liyjootlieses, afin de montrer du moins
la marclie que pourroient suivre pour cette application reelle ceux a qui
on auroit j)rocure les donnees qui doivent en etre la base.
But it would be rather more correct to describe this part as
furnishing some additions to the preceding investigations than as
giving examples of them.
Four so-called examples are discussed.
717. In the first example Condorcet proposes what he thinks
would be a good form of tribunal for the trial of civil cases. He
suggests a court of 25 judges, to decide by majority. He adds,
however, this condition ; suppose the case tried is the right to a
certain property, then if the majority is less than 3 the court
should award compensation to the claimant against whom de-
cision is given.
718. In the second example Condorcet proposes what he
thinks would be a good form of tribunal for the trial of criminal
cases. He suggests a court of 80 judges, in which a majority of at
least 8 is to be required to condemn an accused person.
719. The third example relates to the mode of electing from
a number of candidates to an ofiice. This example is really a
supplement to the investigation given in the first part of the Essay.
Condorcet refers to the memoir on the subject by a celebrated
geometer, and records his own dissent from that geometer's sug-
gestions ; the geometer alluded to is Borda. See Art. 690.
720. The fourth example relates to the probability of the
accuracy of the decision of a large assembly in which the voters
are not all alike. Condorcet considers the case in which the num-
ber of voters whose probability of accuracy is x, is proportional to
\—x\ and he supposes that cc lies between ^ and 1. In such a
case the mean probability is
2 CONDORCET.
I (1 — x) xdx
^ ^
I {1 — x) dx
2
which is ^ . If the value of x lies between a and 1 the mean pro-
o
bability is found in the same way to be • — ^ — .
This example is interesting, but some parts of the investiga-
tions connected with it are very obscure.
As in other parts of his book Condorcet draws a very in-
significant inference from his difficult investigations. He says,
page 303,
On voit done combien il est important, non-seulement que les
hommes soient eclaires, mais qu'en meme temps tous ceux qui, dans
I'opinion publique, passent pour instruits ou liabiles, soient exempts de
prejuges. Cette deriiiere condition est meme la plus essentielle, puisqu'il
paroit que rien ne peut remedier aux inconveniens qu'elle entraine.
721. Besides the Essai Condorcet wrote a long memoir on the
Theory of Probability, which consists of six parts, and is published
in the volumes of the Hist de V A cad.... Paris, for the years 1781,
1782, 1783, and 1784.
The first and second parts appear in the volume for 1781 ;
they occupy pages 707 — 728. The dates of publication of the
volumes are as usual later than the dates to which the volumes
belong ; the portion of the memoir which appears in the volume
for 1781 is said to have been read on August 4th, 1784.
722. The first part of the memoir is entitled Reflexions sur la
regie generate qui prescrit de prendre pour valeur d'lm evenement
incertain, la prohahilite de cet evenement, multipliee par la valeur de
Vevenement en lui-meme.
Suppose that p represents the probability that an event will
happen, and that if the event happens a person is to receive a sum
of money denoted by a ; then the general rule to which Condorcet
refers is the rule which estimates the person's advantage at the
sum pa. On this rule Condorcet makes some remarks ; and these
remarks arc also given in substance in the Essai, in pages
CONDORCET. 393
142 — 147. The sum of the remarks is this ; Condorcet justifies the
rule on the ground that it will lead to satisfactory results if a very
large number of trials be made. Suppose for example that A and
B are playing together, and that -4's chance of winning a single
game is p, and 5's chance is q : then the rule prescribes that if -4's
stake be denoted by hp, then ^'s stake must be hq. Now we
know, by Bernoulli's Theorem, that if A and B play a very large
number of games, there is a very high probability that the number
which A wins will bear to the number which B wins a ratio ex-
tremely near to the ratio oi p to q. Thus if the stakes are adjusted
according to the general rule there is a very high probability that
A and B are on terms of equality as to their prospects ; if any
other ratio of the stakes be adopted a proportional advantage is
given to one of the players.
There can be no doubt that this view of the ground on which
the rule is to be justified is correct.
723. Condorcet adverts to the Petersburg Problem. The
nature of his remarks may be anticipated. Suppose that p in
the preceding Article is extremely small and q very nearly equal to
unity. Then ^'s stake is very large indeed compared with ^'s.
Hence it may be very imprudent for B to play with A on such
terms, because B may be ruined in a few games. Still it remains
true that if A and B agree to continue playing through a very
long series of games no proportion of stakes can be fair except that
which the general rule assigns.
724. The second part of Condorcet's memoir is entitled Ap-
plication de r analyse a cette question: Determiner la probabilite
quun arrangement regulier est Veffet d'une intention de le pro-
duire.
This question is analogous to one discussed by Daniel Ber-
noulli, and to one discussed by Michell ; see Arts. 395 and 618.
Condorcet's investigations rest on such arbitrary hypotheses
that little value can be attached to them. We will give one
specimen.
Consider the following two series :
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10.
1, 3, 2, 1, 7, 13, 23, 44, 87, 167.
39^ CONDORCET.
In the first series each term is equal to twice the preceding
term diminished by the term which precedes that ; and in the
second series each term is the sum of the four which precede it.
Condorcet says,
II est clair que ces deux suites sent reguheres, que tout Mathe-
maticien qui les examinera, verra qu'elles sent toutes deux assujetties
a une loi ; mais il est sensible en meme temps que, si Ton arrete une de
ces suites au sixieme terme, par exemple, on sera plutot porte a regarder
la premiere, comme etant reguliere, que la seconde, puisque dans la
premiere il y aura quatre termes assujettis a une loi, tandis qu'il n'y en
a que deux dans la seconde.
Pour evaluer le rapport de ces deux probabilites, nous supposerons
que ces deux suites soient continuees a I'infini. Comme alors il y aura
dans toutes les deux un nombre infini de termes assujettis a la loi, nous
supposerons que la probabilite seroit egale; mais nous ne connoissons
qu'un certam nombre de termes' assujettis a cette loi ; nous aurons
done les probabilites que I'une de ces suites sera reguliere plutot que
I'autre, egales aux probabilites que ces suites etant continuees ^ I'infini,
• resteront assujetties a la m^me loi.
Soit done pour une de ces suites e le nombre des termes assujettis
a une loi, et e le nombre correspondant pour une autre suite, et qu'on
cberche la probabihte que pour un nombre q de termes suivans, la meme
loi continuera d'etre observee. La premiere probabilite sera exprimee
par =-, la seconde par -. -, et le rapport de la seconde a la
^ e+^+1 ^ e+q+\ ^
{e'^\)(e + q+\)
premiere par 7 —^, — - — -f .
^ ^ (e+ 1) (e +2'+ 1)
1 . e' + 1
Soit g = 7j > et e, q' des nombres finis, ce rapport devient r- .
Ainsi dans Texemple precedent, si Ton s'arrcte au sixieme terme, on aura
3
e = 4, e' = 2, et le rapport sera - : si on s'arrcte au dixieme, on aura
7
e = 8, e' = 6, et le rapport sera ^ .
Si Ton suppose que e et d sent du meme ordre que g, le memo
rapport devient ^^ , ^^ , et si on suppose e = g- = 1, il sera -
ee +eq 1 + e
We will make some remarks on this investigation.
CONDORCET. 395
e + 1 '
The result, that the first probability is — ■ -^ and the second
6 + ^+1
' _i_ 1
is -7 =- , is we presume obtained by Bayes's Theorem.
After supposing that q is infinite it is perplexing to be told
that e = q = l. Condorcet should have proceeded thus. Sup-
pose e = q, then
ee + eq 2e' 2x , e'
—. = -. = Y>^here x= - .
ee + eq e -\- e 1 + x e
The followinsf then is the result which Condorcet considers
himself to have obtained. Let us suppose we have observed in
a certain series that a certain law holds during so many terms
as form the fraction x of the whole series, then the comparative
2x
probability that the whole series is subject to this law is ^j .
JL ^p JO
It is however obvious that this result has been obtained by
means of several most arbitrary hypotheses.
725. The remainder of this part of Condorcet's memoir is dif-
ficult, but the meaning can be discovered by patience. There is
nothing that appears self-contradictory excej^t perhaps on page 727.
In the last line Condorcet takes for the limits of a certain integra-
tion b and 1 — a + Z> ; it would seem that the latter limit should -be
1 — a, for otherwise his Article vil. is only a repetition of his
Article VI.
726. The third part of Condorcet's memoir is entitled Svr
devaluation des Droits eventuels. It is published in the Hist, cle
V Acad.... Paris, for 1782 ; it occupies pages 674 — 691.
This part commences thus :
La destruction du Goiivernement feodal a laiss'e snbsister en Europe
un grand nomhre de droits eventuels, mais on pent les reduire a deux
classes principales j les uns se payeut lorsque les proprietes viennent a
changer par vente, les autres se payent aux mutations par succession,
soit directe ou collaterale, soit collaterale seulement.
Condorcet then proposes to determine the sum of money which
should be paid down in order to free any proj)erty from such feudal
rights over it.
396 CONDORCET.
727. The following paragraph appears very remarkable when
we reflect how soon the expectations it contains were falsified by
the French Kevolution.
Premier Principe. Nous supposerons d'ahord que I'ordre sui^ant
lequel les dernieres mutations se sont succedees, sera indefiniment con-
tinue.
Le motif qui nous a fait adopter ce principe, est la grande proba-
bility que nous avons moins de grands changemens, nioins de grandes
revolutions a attendre pour I'avenir, qu'il n'y en a eu dans le pass6 : le
progres des lumieres en tout genre et dans toutes les parties de I'Europe,
I'esprit de moderation et de paix qui y regno, I'espece de m6pris ou le
Machiavelisnie commence a tomber, semblent nous assurer que les guerres
et les revolutions deviendront a I'avenir moins frequentes j ainsi le
principe que nous adoptons, en memo temps qu'il rend les calculs et les
observations plus faciles, a de plus I'avantage d'etre plus exact.
728. The memoir is neither important nor interesting, and it
is disfigured by the contradiction and obscurity which we have
noticed in Condorcet's Essay. Condorcet says that he will begin by
examining the case in which the event producing the right neces-
sarily happens in a certain length of time, as for example, when
the right accrues on every succession to the property ; and then he
will consider the case in which the event does not necessarily hap-
pen, as, for example, when the right accrues on a sale of the pro-
perty, or on a particular kind of succession. He then gives three
methods for the first case, and in direct contradiction to what he
has said, it will be found that only his first method applies to the
case in which the event producing the right necessarily happens.
729. We will give the results of the second of Condorcet's
methods, though not in his manner.
Let us suppose for simplicity that the sum to be paid if
the event happens is one pound ; let c represent the present worth
of one pound due at the end of a year ; let x be the probability
that the event will happen in the course of one year. Then xc
represents the value of that part of the right which arises from the
first year, x(^ the value of that part which arises from the second
year, xc^ the value of that part which arises from the third year,
and so on. Thus the value of the whole right is
CONDORCET. 397
a? (c 4- c^ + c' + . . .), that is :j —
xc
c
The question now arises what is the value of xl Suppose that
during m + n past years the event hapjoened 771 times and did not
7)1
happen n times ; we mio^ht reasonably take for x, so that the
rr > O -^771+71
C 711/
whole value of the rio^ht would be -z . Condorcet how-
\ — c m-\-7i
ever prefers to employ Bayes's Theorem, and so he makes the
whole value of the risfht
1
.
x'^ii-xy-^^^dx
1 — c
/,
that is
x""' (1 - xy dx
m+ 1 c
m + 7i-\- 2 1 — c *
Moreover Condorcet supposes that at the present moment the
event has just happened on which the right depends, so that he
adds unity to the result and obtains for the value of the whole right
m + 1 c
1 +
7Jl + 71 -^ 2 1 — C *
730. The investigation of the preceding Article goes over the
same ground as that on page 680 of the volume which contains the
memoir, but is we hope more intelligible. We proceed to make
two remarks.
First. It is clear that Condorcet is quite wrong in giving this
method as applicable to the first case, namely that in which the
event must happen in a certain length of years. The method is
quite inapplicable to such an example as he mentions, namely
when the right would accrue on the next succession to the property,
that is, on the death of the present holder ; for the probability of
such an event would not be constant from year to year for ever as
this method assumes. The method would be applicable to the
example of the second case in which the right is to accrue upon
a sale, for that might without absurdity be supposed as likely to
happen in one year as in another for ever.
398 CONDORCET.
Secondly. We see no advantage in applying Bayes's Theorem.
Condorcet is very fond of it; and throughout this memoir as well
as in his other writings on the subject indulges to excess in signs
of integration. In the above example if m and n are very large
numbers no practical change is made in the result by using Bayes's
Theorem ; if m + w is a small number our knowledge of the past
would be insufficient to justify any confidence in our anticipations
of the future.
731. From what we have said it may be expected that when
Condorcet comes to his second case he should be obscure, and this
is the fact. He gives on his page 685 the modifications which his
three methods now require. The second method is really un-
altered, for we merely suppose that observation gives m and n in-
stead of m and n. The modification of the third method seems
unsound ; the modification of the first method is divided into two
parts, of which only the former appears intelligible.
But we leave these to students of the original memoir.
732. We may add that on pages 687 — 690 Condorcet gives an
investigation of the total value arising from two different rights.
It is difficult to see any use whatever in this investigation, as the
natural method would be to calculate each separately. Some idea
of the unpractical character of the result may be gathered from the
fact that we have to calculate a fraction the numerator and deno-
minator of which involve n + n + 7i' + n" — 2 successive integra-
tions. This complexity arises from an extravagant extension and
abuse of Bayes's Theorem.
733. The fourth part of Condorcet's memoir is intitled Re-
flexions SUV la methode de determiner la Prohahilite des Mnemens
futurs, d'apres I' Observation des evenemens passes. The fourth and
fifth parts appeared in the Hist de V A cad.... Paris, for 1783 ; they
occupy pages 539 — 559. This volume was published in 1786,
that is after Condorcet's Fssai which is referred to on page 54? 1.
734. Suppose that in m -f n trials an event has happened m
times and failed n times ; required the probability that in the next
CONDORCET. 399
p + q trials it will happen p times and fail q times. The required
probability is
j^ + q ff'*'{i-^r''i^
''
as we have already remarked in Art. 704.
Condorcet quotes this result ; he thinks however that better
formulae may be given, and he proposes two. But these seem
quite arbitrary, and we do not perceive any reason for preferrino-
them to the usual formula. We will indicate these formulae pro-
posed by Condorcet.
I. Let t = 7n+ 71 + 2) + 2' ^^^ P^"^
3?, ~r ^o I "^Q ~r • • • I '^t
U = -^ 2 3 .
t
then the proposed formula is
\p + q j • ' ' ^"'"^ (^ ~ ^^y^' ^^1 ^^2 • • • ^^t
L^ Li jj[..,u'^ (1 - uy dx^ dx^ .,.dx
The limits of each integration are to be and 1.
II. Suppose an event to have happened n times in succession,
required the probability that it will hap|)en p times more in suc-
cession.
_ X^ "p Xr, X^ -p X^^ -f- X^ 3/j ~t" X^ i~ • • • I Xf^
XjQXi U ^— X^ ;:: ;;; • t . •
^23 n
let V be an expression similar to u but extended to n +^:> factors ;
then Condorcet proposes for the required probability the formula
I I I • • I C/ U/tX'j Cf/Xn • • • ^Xf^ip
III ...u dx^ dx,^ . . . dx^
The limits of each integration are to be and 1.
Condorcet proposes some other formulae for certain cases ; tliey
400 CONDORCET.
are as arbitrary as those which we have ah*eady given, and not
fully intelligible ; see his pages 550 — 553.
735. The fifth part of Condorcet's memoir is entitled Sur la
prohahilite desfaits extraordinaires.
Suppose that p is the probability of an event in itself; let t
denote the probability of the truth of a certain witness. This wit-
ness asserts that the event has taken place ; required the proba-
bility that the event did take place, and that it did not. The
required probabilities are
Pt and (1 -P) (1 -
jyt+{\-p){\-t) "^ pt^(l-p][\-t)-
Condorcet gives these formulae with very little explanation.
The application of these formulae is not free from difficulty.
Suppose for example a trustworthy witness asserts that one ticket
of a lottery of 10000 tickets was drawn, and that the number of
the ticket drawn was 297. Here if we put p = we obtain
such a very small value of the truth of the witness's statement that
we lose our confidence in the formula. See Laplace Theorie...des
Proh. pages 446 — 451. De Morgan, Cambridge Philosophical
Transactions, Vol. ix. page 119.
736. Condorcet makes remarks on two points, namely the
mode of estimating p and the mode of estimating t He recurs to
the former point in the sixth part of his memoir, and we shall give
an extract which will shew the view he advocated in his fifth part,
and the view which he advocated in his sixth part.
With respect to the second point Condorcet's chief remark is
that the probability of a witness is not the same for all facts. If
we estimate it at u for a simple fact, then we should estimate it at
v^ for a compound fact consisting of two simple facts, and so on.
One witness however may be as capable of observing a compound
fact consisting of two or more simple facts as another is of observ-
ing a simple fact.
737. The sixth part of Condorcet's memoir is entitled Appli-
CONDOBCET. 401
cation des joTincipes de Varticle 2^^^^^cede}it a quelqves questions de
critique. It is published in the Hist, de I' Acad. ... Paris for 1784;
it occupies pages 454 — 468.
738. In this part Condorcet begins by adverting to some
remarks which he had made in his fifth part as to the mode of
estimating the value of what we denoted by ^ in Article 735. He
savs,
J'ai observe en meme-temps qu'il ne falloit pas dans ce cas entendre,
par la probabilite propre d'un fait, le rap^Dort du nombre des combi-
naisons ou il a lieu, avec le nombre total des combinaisons. Par ex-
emple, si d'un jeu de dix cartes on en a tire une, et qu'un temoin me
dise que c'est telle carte en particulier, la probal)ilite propre de ce fait,
qu'il s'agit de comparer avec la i^robabilite qui nait du temoignage, n'est
pas la probabilite de tirer cette carte, qui seroit yr j iiiais la probabilite
d'amener cette carte plutot que telle autre carte determinee en parti-
culier; et comma toutes ces probabilites sont egales, la probabilite
propre est ici -^ .
Cette distinction etoit necessaire, et elle suffit pour expliquer la
contrariete d' opinions entre deux classes de philosophes. Les uns ne
peuvent se persuader que les memes temoignages puissent produire,
pour un fait extraordinaire, une probabilite egale a celle qu'ils produi-
sent pour un fait ordinaire; et que, par exemple, si je crois un homme
de bon sens qui me dit qu'une femme est accoucliee d'un gargon, je
dusse le croire egalement s'il me disoit qu'elle est accoucliee de douze.
Les autres au contraire sont convaincus que les temoignages conser-
rent toute leur force, pour les faits extraordinaires et tres-peu proba-
bles, et ils sont frapp6s de cette observation, que si on tire une loterie
de 100000 billets, et qu'un homme, digne de foi, dise que le numero
256, par exemple, a eu le premier lot, personne ne doutera de son tem-
oignage, quoiqu'il y ait 99999 a parier centre 1 que cet evenement
n'est pas arrive.
Or, au moyen de 1' observation precedente, on voit que dans le second
cas la probabilite propre du fait etant -^ , le temoignage conserve toute
sa force, au lieu que dans le premier, cette probabilite etant tres-petite,
reduit presque a rien celle du temoignage.
J'ai propose ensuite de prendre, pour la probabilite propre du fait,
2G
-102 CONDOR CET.
le rapport clu noinbre de combinaisons qui donnent ce fait, ou un fait
semblable an nombre total des combinaisons.
Ainsi, par exemj^le, dans le cas on on tire une carte d'nn jeu de
dix cartes, le nombre des combinaisons ou Ton tire une carte determin6e
quelconque est un ; celui des combinaisons ou Ton tire une autre carte
-a-
determinee est aussi un ; done ^^ exprimera la probabilite propre.
Si on me dit qu'on a tire deux fois de suite la meme carte, alors on
trouvera qu'il n'y a que dix combinaisons qui donnent deux fois une meme
carte, et quatre-vingt-dix qui donnent deux cartes difFerentes : la proba-
bilite projDre du fait n'est done que ~, et celle du temoignage com-
mence a devenir plus foible.
Mais je crois devoir abaudonner cette maniere de considerer la
question, 1" parce qu'elle me paroit trop bypotlietique ; 2'^ parce que
souvent cette comparaison d'evenemens semblables seroit difficile a faire,
ou, ce qui est encore pis, ne se feroit que d'apres des suppositions arbi-
traires ; 3° parce qu'en I'appliquant a des exemples, elle conduit a des
resultats trop eloignes de ceux que donneroit la raison commune.
J'en ai done clierclie une autre, et il m'a paru plus exact de
prendre, pour probabilite jDropre d'un evenement, le rapport de la
probabilite de cet evenement prise dans le sens ordinaire, avec la pro-
babilite moyenne de tons les autres evenemens.
739. Thus we see that Condorcet abandons the suggestion
which he made in the fifth part of his memoir and offers another.
It does not seem that the new suggestion escapes any of the objec-
tions which Condorcet himself advances ao^ainst the old suofpfestion,
as will appear by the analysis we shall now give of Condorcet's
examples.
7-iO. Suppose there are ten cards and it is asserted that a
specified card has been drawn tAvice running; we proceed to estimate
the j^'^^ohahilite projwe of the event. There are 9 other ways in
which the same card can be drawn twice, and the ordinary proba-
. . 1
bility of each drawing is r-rr ; there are 45 ways in which two dif-
ferent cards are obtained in two drawings, and the ordinary proba-
2
bility of each drawing is zr^ • Hence the mean probability of all
the other events is
CONDORCET. 403
If '2 11 99
54r^Ioo + ^^10o|'^^^*^^5400-
I-Ience according to Condorcet's own words the lovohahilite p^opre
1 99 .54
should be — — - -h- . , that is — . But he himself says that the
prohaUlite projjve is —r^, so that he takes ^-ttt -^ \ ^'^^ + tttt,
lo3 100 [o400 lOOJ
1 99
and not — -r -^ ^'. .. ,. . That is, as is so frequently the case with
100 o400 ^ *^
Condorcet, his own words do not express his own meaning.
Again sujDpose that there are ten cards and it is asserted that a
specified card has been drawn thrice running ; we proceed to esti-
mate the prohahilite propre of the event. Here the mean proba-
bility of all the other events is
6 ^^ 3 9 ) , , . 999
120 X ~~ + 90 X — -r + ——A , that is
219 Y ^ ^ 1000 1000 ^ lOOOJ ' 219000 '
219
Condorcet says that the jyrohabilite propre is , so that he
1 I 999 1 \ ■
1000 • 1219000 "^ lOOOJ •
741. Condorcet now proceeds to apply these results in the
following words :
Ainsi siipposons, par exemple, que la probabilite du temoignage soit
99
r— -, c'est-a-dire, que le temoin ne se trompe ou ne veuille tromper
qu'une fois sur cent, on aura, d'apres son temoignage, la probabilite
99 9900 , \. . . 1^. • ^ 1 T T.-rf' ^^^^
IT— ^ OU qu on a tire une carte determmee ; la probabilite
^ .... , 9540
qu'on a tire deux fois la meme carte ; et la probabilite n-Q7rQ?| <1^^ on
I'a tiree trois fois.
We find some difficulties in these numbers.
Let p denote the prohahilite propre and t the probability of
the testimony ; then the formula to be applied is, we presume,
^ In the first case it seems that Condorcet
i^^+(i-p)(i-0'
26—2
40 i CONDORCET.
supposes p = 1, that is lie takes apparently the j^rohahilite j^'i^ojwe
to be 177: -=- TT -^ 9 X r-r k which agrees indeed with his own ivords
but not with his practice which we have exhibited in Art. 740 ; if
1
we follow that practice we shall have P = ^^
54
In the second case we have p = zry^ , and with this value the
54 . .
formula gives -^ which is approximately "981 8.
219
In the third case we have p — ^^^, , and with this value the
^ 1218
OAQ
formula gives -— ^ which however is very nearly '9560 instead of
840
•9540 as Condorcet states.
742. Condorcet's next example seems very arbitrary and ob-
scure. His words are,
Supposons encore que robservation ait constate que, sur vingt mil-
lions d'hommes, un seul ait vecu 120 ans, et que la plus longue vie
ait ete de 130 ; qu'un homme me dise que quelqu'un vient de mourir a
120 ans, et que je cherclie la probabilite propre de cet eveneraent : je
regarderai d'abord comme iin fait unique, celui de vivre plus de 130
ans, fait que je suppose n'etre pas arrive; j'aurai done 131 faits dif-
ferens, dont celui de moui'ir a 120 ans est un seul. La probabilite de
celui-ci sera ^^^^^, o-, ; la probabihte moyenne des 130 autres sera
20000131 ' ^ ''
20000130 , , , ,.,.^. . , , 130
2000 0131 X 130 ^ ^"^' ^"^ probabdite propre cherchee sera ^00002^00 '
1
ou environ
15384
743. Condorcet's next example seems also arbitrary. His
words are,
Cette methode s'appliquera egalement aux dvcnemens indetermines.
Ainsi, en continuant le meme exemple, si le temoin a dit seulement
que Ton a deux fois amenc la meme carte, sans la nommer, alors ces dix
cvenemens, ayant cliacun la probabilite y— - , -— exprimera leur pro-
CONDORCET. 405
. . 2
babilite rooyenne; — r- exprimera de meine celle des 45 aiitras evene-
mens ayaut cliacun la probabilite y— : ainsi la probabilite propre de
I'evenemeiit sera - .
o
Condorcet himself observes that it may appear singular that
the result in this case is less than that which was obtained in
Ai't. 74;0 ; so that a man is less trustworthy when he merely says
that he has seen the same card drawn twice, than when he tells us
in addition what card it was that he saw drawn twice. Condorcet
tries to explain this apparent singularity; but not with any ob-
vious success.
The singularity however seems entirely to arise from Con-
dorcet 's own arbitrary choice ; the rule which he himself lays do^\ai
requires him to estimate la prohabilite moyenne de tons les autres
evenemens, and he estimates this mean probability differently in
the two cases, and apparently without sufficient reason for the dif-
ference.
744. Condorcet's next example is as follows : We are told that
a person with two dice has five times successively thrown higher
than 10 ; find the prohabilite lyropre. With two dice the number
thrown may be 2, 3, ... up to 12 ; the respective probabilities are
86' 36' 36' 36' 36' 36' 36' 36' 36' 36' 36*
_, , , 1 c , . 11 X 12 X 13 X 14 X 15 ,, ^ .
The whole number ol events is r^ , that is
L?
3003 ; and of these only 6 belong to the proposed combination.
1
Since the probability of these 6 throws is :r^ their mean proba-
bility is -^ -^ . The mean probability of the other throws will
u X J-^
11^ . 2997
he ^gc)- X 12^ * ^^^^^ ^^^® prohahiliie propre is g >< ir + 2997 *
It is obvious that all this is very arbitrary. Wlien Condorcet
says there are 6 throws belonging to the proposed combination he
means that all the throws may be 12, or all 11, or four 12 and one
11, or three 12 and two 11, . . . And he says the mean probability is
40G CONDORCET.
But if we consider tlie different orders in which these
6x 12^*
throws can occur we may say that the whole number is 2^ and the
1 / 1 2 \^ 1
mean probabihty ^ ( 35 + 35 j ^ ^^^^^ ^^ 2^2" '
Again let us admit that there are 8003 cases in all, and that of
these only 6 belong to the proposed combination. The other
2997 cases form two species, namely those in which every throw is
below 11, and those in which some throws are below 11 and the
ir
others above 10 ; when Condorcet takes -—^ — -^ as the mean
probability, he forgets this division of species and only con-
siders the first species. He should take ^ [ 1 — ^-^1 instead
ir
of
2997 X 12' •
7-i5. Suppose two classes of events A and B; let the pro-
bability of an A he a and the probability of a i> be ^ ; let there
be m events A and n events B. The ]^'t^obabilite projore of an
assigned event of the class B will be, according to Condorcet's
practice,
h ^1 . • (m + n— 1) h
- ""-- ■■ " ^ , that IS ; -: —, .
ma 4- {ii — l)u -. ma + {^ni + Zr — 'I)
m -\- n—1
21)
If m and n be equal and very large this becomes ^ . If
a -p ou
we suppose h extremely small and consequently a very nearly
unity we obtain 2h as an approximate value.
716. Condorcet proceeds to apply his doctrine to the credi-
bility of two statements in the History of Home. He says,
Je vais maintenant essay er de faire a nne question de critique
rapplication des principes que je viens d'etablir. Newton paroit etre
le premier qui ait eu I'idee d'appliquer le calcul des probabilites a la
critique des faits. II propose, dans son ouvrage sur la clironologie,
d'employer la connoissance de la durce moyenne des generations et des
regncs, telle que I'experience nous la donue, soit pour fixer d'une
manicre du moins approchee, des points de clironologie fort incertains,
CONDORCET. 407
soit pour juger dii plus on clii moins de coiifiance que meritent les
differens systemes imagines pour concilier entr'elles des ^poques qui
paroissent se contredire.
Condorcet names Freret as having opposed this apphcation of
the Theory of Probabihty, and Yoltaire as having supported it ; but
he gives no references.
747. According to some historians the whole duration of the
reigns of the seven kings of Rome was 257 years. Condorcet pro-
poses to examine the credibility of this statement. He assumes
that in an elective monarchy we may suppose that a king at the
date of his election will be between 30 years old and 60 years old.
He adopts De Moivre's hypothesis respecting human mortality ;
this hypothesis, as Condorcet uses it, amounts to assuming that
the number of people at any e230ch who are y years old is
h (90 — ?/), where h is some constant, and that of these Iz die every
year.
Let n denote the greatest number of years which the youngest
elected king can live, m the greatest number of years which the
oldest elected king can live ; then the probability that a single
reign will last just r years is the coefficient of ^ in the expan-
sion of
ill - m -\-X)x(X-x)- .t"^^ + rr"^"
A few words will be necessary to shew how this formula can be
verified. It follows from our hypothesis that the number of per-
sons from whom the king must be elected is
h [n + (?i - 1) + (?i - 2) + . . . + m],
that is Iz — ^— [n — m 4- 1). And if r be less than m + 1 the num-
ber of persons who die in the r*'^ year will be I: {n — m + 1) ; if r be
between m 4- 1 and n+1, both inclusive, the number who die in
the r^^ year will be k {n — r + 1) ; if r be greater than n + 1 the
number who die in the r"' year will be zero. Now the coefficient
of ic*" in the expansion of
1-x (1 - -^j'
408 CONDORCET.
will be found to be n — m + 1 if r is less than m + l, and if r is
greater than n + 1, and in other cases to be w - r + 1.
748, Hence the probability that the duration of seven reigns
will amount to just 257 years is the coefficient of ic^" in the expan-
sion of the seventh power of
{n - m + 1) a^ (1 - x) -^^ x"""^
(1 — x) — ^ — (n - m + 1)
Now Condorcet takes n = 60 and m = SO; and he says that the
value of the required coefficient is '000792, which we will assume
he has calculated correctly.
Thus he has obtained the probability in the ordinary sense,
which he denotes by P; he requires the j)rohahilite projyre. He
considers there are 414 events possible, as the reigns may have
any duration in years between 7 and 420. Thus the mean proba-
.1 -P
bility of all the other events is , ; and so the prohahilite p^opre
413P , 1
1 ^ 412P ' ^i^^^^^^^S-
IS
749. Condorcet says that other historians assign 140 years in-
stead of 257 years for the duration of the reigns of the kings.
He says the ordinary probability of this is '008887, which we
may denote by Q. He then makes the prohahilite propre to be
which IS more than - .
He seems here to take 413, and not 414, as the whole number
of events.
750. Condorcet then proceeds to compare three events, namely
that of 257 years' duration, that of 140 years' duration, and what
he calls wi autre dvenement mdetermine quelconque qui auroit pu
avoir lieu. He makes the prohahilites jyrojn-es to be respectively
411P 411^ 1-P-Q
410 (P+ Q) + i' 410 (p+ Q) + 1 ""'"'^ n^pToy+i'
3 37 10
which are approximately — , , '-— , -— .
•^ 50 oO 50
COXDORCET. 409
Here again he seems to take 413 as the whole number of
events.
He proceeds to combine these probabihties with probabilities
arising from testimony borne to the first or second event,
751. Condorcet considers another statement which he finds in
Roman History, namely that the augur Accius Nsevius cut a stone
with a razor. Condorcet takes rv/^rir^rvrv ^s the ordinaiy proba-
bility, and then by Art. 745 makes the prohahilite ijropre to be
2
1000000 *
752. We have spent a long space on Condorcet's memoir, on
account of the reputation of the author ; but we fear that the
reader will conclude that we have given to it far more attention
than it deserves. It seems to us to be on the whole excessively
arbitrary, altogether unpractical, and in parts very obscure,
753. We have in various plaices expressed so decidedly our
opinion as to the obscurity and inutility of Condorcet's investiga-
tions that it will be just to notice the opinions which other writers
have formed.
Gouraud devotes pages 89 — 101? of his work to Condorcet, and
the following defects are noticed : Un style embarrasse, denue de
justesse et de coloris, une philosophie souvent obscure ou bizarre,
une anatyse que les meilleurs juges ont trouvee confuse. With this
drawback Condorcet is praised in terms of such extravagant eulogy,
that we are tempted to apply to Gouraud the reflexion which Du-
gald Stewart makes in reference to Voltaire, who he says " is so
lavish and undistinguishing in his praise of Locke, as almost to
justify a doubt whether he had ever read the book Avhich he extols
so highly." Stewart's Works, edited hy Hamilton, Vol. i. j)age 220.
Galloway speaks of Condorcet's Essay as '' a work of gi'eat in-
genuity, and abounding with interesting remarks on subjects of
the highest importance to humanity." Ai'ticle Prohahilitij in the
Encyclopcedia Britan nica.
Laplace in his brief sketch of the history of the subject does
not name Condorcet ; he refers however to the kind of questions
410 CONDOECET.
which Condorcet considers and says, Tant de passions, d'interets
divers et de circonstances compliquent les questions relatives a
ces objets, qu'elles sont presque toujours insolubles. Theorie...des
Froh. page cxxxviii.
Poisson names Condorcet expressly; with respect to his Prelimi-
nary Discourse, he says, ... ou sont developpees avec soin les con-
siderations propres a montrer I'utilite de ce genre de recherches.
And after referring to some of Laplace's investigations Poisson
adds, ... il est juste de dire que c'est a Condorcet quest due I'idee
ingenieuse de faire dependre la solution, du princijDe de Bayes, en
considerant successivement la culpabilite et I'innocence de I'accuse,
comme une cause inconnue du jugement prononce, qui est alors le
fait observe, duquel il s'agit de deduire la probabilite de cette
cause. Recherches sur la Proh. . . . page 2.
We have already referred to John Stuart Mill, see Art. QGo.
One sentence of his may perhaps not have been specially aimed
at Condorcet, but it may well be so applied. Mr Mill says, " It is
obvious, too, that even when the probabilities are derived from ob-
servation and experiment, a very slight improvement in the data,
by better observations, or by taking into fuller consideration the
special circumstances of the case, is of more use than the most
elaborate application of the calculus to probabilities founded on the
data in their jDrevious state of inferiority." Logic, Vol. ii. page 65.
Condorcet seems really to have fancied that valuable results could
be obtained from any data, however imperfect, by using formulae
with an adequate supply of signs of integration.
CHAPTER XVIII.
TREMBLEY.
75^. We have now to examine a series of memoirs by
Trembley. He was born at Geneva in 1749, and died in 1811.
The first memoir is entitled Disquisitio Elementaris circa Cal-
culinn Prohahilium.
This memoir is published in the Commentationes Societatis
Regice Scientiarum Gottingensis, Yol. Xll. The volume is for the
years 1793 and 1791^ ; and the date of publication is 1796. The
memoir occupies pages 99 — 136 of the mathematical portion of
the volume.
755. The memoir begitis thus :
Plurimae extant hie et ilUc sparsae meditationes analyticae circa cal-
culum Probabilium, quas hie recensere non est animus. Quae cum
plerumque quaestiones j)ai^iculares spectarent, summi Geometrae la
Place et la Grange hanc theoriam generalius tractare sunt aggressi,
auxilia derivantes ex intimis calculi integralium visceribus, et eximios
quidem fructus inde perceperunt. Cum autem tota Probabilium theoria
principiis simplicibus et obviis sit innixa, quae nihil aliud fere requirunt
quam doctrinam combinationum, et pleraeque difficultates in enume-
randis et distinguendis casibus versentur, e re visum est easdem quaes-
tiones generaliores methodo elementari tractare, sine uUo alieno auxilio.
Cujus tentaminis primum sj^ecimen hae paginae complectuntur, continent
quippe solutiones elementares Problematum generaliorum quae vir
illustrissimus la Grange soluta dedit in Commentariis Academiae Regiae
Berolinensis pro anno 1775. Si haec Geometris non displicuerint, alias
deinde ejusdem generis cUlucidationes, deo juvante ipsis proponam.
756. The intention expressed at the end of this paragTaph was
412 TREMBLE Y.
carried into effect in a memoir in the next volume of the Gottin-
gen Commentationes. The present memoir discusses nine problems,
most of which are to be found in De Moivre's Doctrine of Chances.
To this work Trembley accordingly often refers, and his references
obviously shew that he used the second edition of De Moivre's
work ; we shall change these references into the corresponding
references to the third edition.
In this and other memoirs Trembley proposes to give elemen-
tary investigations of theorems which had been previously treated
by more difficult methods ; but as we shall see he frequently leaves
his results really undemonstrated.
7o7. The first problem is, to find the chance that an event
shall happen exactly h times in a trials, the chance of its haj)peniug
in a single trial being p. Trembley obtains the well known result,
a
p^ (1 — i^Y ' ^® ^^^^^ ^li® modern method ; see Art. 257.
a
-h
758. The second problem is to find the chance that the event
shall happen at least h times. Trembley gives and demonstrates
independently both the formulae to which we have already drawn
attention ; see Art. 172. He says, longum et taediosum foret has
formulas inter se comparare a priori; but as we have seen in
Art. 174 the comparison of the formulae is not really difficult.
759. The third problem consists of an application of the second
problem to the Problem of Poiyits, in the case of tw^o players ; the
fourth problem is that of Points in the case of three players ; and
the fifth problem is that of Points in the case of four players. The
results coincide with those of De Moivre; see Art. 267.
760. Trembley's next three problems are on the Duration of
Play. He begins with De Moivre's Problem LXV, which in effect
supposes one of the players to have an unlimited capital ; see
Arts. 807, 309. Trembley gives De Moivre's second mode of
solution, but his investigation is unsatisfactory ; for after havino-
found in succession the first six terms of the series in brackets, he
says Perspicua nunc est lex progressionis, and accordingly writes
down the general term of the series. Trembley thus leaves the
main difficulty quite untouched.
TREMBLEY. 413
7(31. Trembley's seventh problem is De Moivre's Problem LXiv,
and he gives a result equivalent to that on De Moivre's page 207;
see Art. 806. But here again after investigating a few terms the
main difficulty is left untouched mth the words Perspicua nunc
est lex progressionis. Trembley says, Eodem redit solutio Cel.
la Grange, licet eaedem formulae non prodeant. This seems to
imply that Lagrange's formulae take a dilterent shape. Trembley
.probably refers to Lagrange's second solution which is the most
completely worked out ; see Art. 583,
Trembley adds in a Scholium that by the aid of this problem
we can solve that which is LXVII. in De Moivre ; finishing with
these words, in secunda enim formula fieri debet c =]p — 1, which
appear to be quite erroneous.
762. Trembley's eighth problem is the second in Lagrange's
memoir ; see Art. 580 : the chance of one event is p and of an-
other q, find the chance that in a given number of trials the first
shall happen at least h times and the second at least c times.
Trembley puts Lagrange's solution in a more elementary form, so
as to avoid the Theory of Finite Differences.
763. Trembley's ninth problem is the last in Lagrange's me-
moir ; see Art. 587. Trembley gives a good solution.
76-t. The next memoir is entitled De Prohahilttate Causarum
ah effectihus oriunda.
This memoir is published in the Comm. Soc. Reg....GoU.
Yol. XIII. The volume is for the years 1795 — 1798 ; the date of
publication is 1799. The memoir occupies pages 64 — 119 of the
mathematical portion of the volume.
765. The memoir begins thus :
Hanc materiam pertractarunt eximii Geometrae, ac potissimum Cel.
la Place in Commentariis Academiae Parisinensis. Cum autem in
hiijusce generis Problematibus solvendis sublimior et ardua analysis
fuerit adliibita, easdem qiiaestiones metliodo elementari ac idoneo usii
doctrinae serierum aggredi operae pretium diixi. Qua ratione haec altera
pars calculi Probabihum ad theoriam combinationum reduceretur, sicut
et primam reduxi in dissertatione ad Kegiam Societateui transmissa.
41i TREMBLE Y.
Primarias quaestiones hie breviter attingere couabor, methodo diluci-
dandae imprimis intentiis.
^QQ. The first problem is the following. A bag contains an
infinite number of white balls and black balls in an unknown
ratio ; p white balls and q black have been drawn out in ^ + ^
drawings ; what is the chance that m + n new drawings will give
m white and w black balls ?
The known result is
\m -f- n ^ '
m It
that is,
1 x^ {1 -xydx
■^
I m + n \)yi-\- p \n-{-q \p -\- q-\-l
\'m\n \p \q\'m-\-p-\-7i+q-\-l
Trembley refers to the memoir which w^e have cited in
Art. 551, where this result had been given by Laplace ; see also
Art. 704.
Trembley obtains the result by ordinary Algebra ; the investi-
gations are only approximate, the error being however inappreci-
able when the number of balls is infinite.
If each ball is replaced after being drawn we can obtain an
exact solution of the problem by ordinary Algebra, as we shall see
when we examine a memoir by Prevost and Lhuilier ; and of course
if the number of the balls is supposed infinite it will be indifferent
whether we replace each ball or not, so that we obtain indirectly
an exact elementary demonstration of the important result which
Trembley establishes approximately.
767- We proceed to another problem discussed by Trem-
bley. A bag is known to contain a very large number of balls
which are white or black, the ratio being unknown. In p-\-q
drawings p white balls and q black have been drawn. Required
the probability that the ratio of the white to the black lies between
zero and an assigned fraction. This question Trembley proceeds
to consider at great length ; he supposes p) and q very large and
obtains approximate results.
If the assigned fraction above referred to be denoted by
TREMELEY. 415
— ^^- 6, lie obtains as the numerator of the required probability,
approximately
\p + <t ) \p + q ) L pq + {p + qf S'
\ p \q
The denominator would be ' ,, .
Trembley refers to two places in which Laplace had given this
result; they are the Hist de T Acad.... Par is for 1778, page 270,
and for 1783 page 445. In the Theorie...des Frob. Laplace does
not reproduce the general formula ; he confines himself to suppos-
.7) X
ing —^ — —0 = -- see pao^e 379 of the work.
Trembley's methods are laborious, and like many other at-
tempts to bring high mathematical investigations into more
elementary forms, would probably cost a student more trouble
than if he were to set to work to enlarge his mathematical know-
ledge and then study the original methods.
7G8. Trembley follows Laplace in a numerical application
relating to the births of boys and girls at Vitteaux in Bourgogne.
Laplace first gave this in the Hist, de V A cad.... Paris for 1783,
page 448; it is in the Theorie . . . des Proh. page 380. It appears
that at Vitteaux in five years 212 girls were born to 203 boys.
It is curious that Laplace gives no information in the latter work
of a more recent date than he gave in the Hist, de V Acad.... Paris
for 1783 ; it would have been interesting to know if the anomaly
still continued in the births at Vitteaux.
769. We may observe that Laplace treats the problem of
births as analogous to that of drawing black and white balls from a
bag. So he arrives at this result ; if we draw 212 black balls to 203
white balls out of a bag, the chance is about '67 that the black
balls in the bag are more numerous than the white. It is not
very easy to express this result in words relating to births ; Laplace
says in the Hist, de V Acad.... Par is, la difference "670198 sera la
•ilO TREMBLE Y.
probability qua Viteaux, la 2:)ossibilite des naissances des filles est
superieure h celle des naissances des gardens; in the Theorie...
des F7vh. he says, la superiorite de la facilite des naissances des
filles, est done indiquee par ces observations, avec une probabilite
egale k '67. These phrases seem much better adapted to the idea
to be expressed than Trembley's, Probabilitas numerum puellarum
superaturum esse numerum puerorum erit = •67141.
770. Trembley now takes the following problem. From a
basf containing; white balls and black balls in a larg^e number but
in an unknown ratio j^ white balls and q black have been drawn ;
required the chance that if 2a more drawings are made the white
balls shall not exceed the black. This problem leads to a series
of which the sum cannot be found exactly. Trembley gives some
investigations respecting the series which seem of no use, and of
which he himself makes no application ; these are on his pages
103 — 105. On his page 106 he gives a rough approximate value
of the sum. He says, Similem seriem refert Gel. la Place. This
refers to the Hist de V Acad.... Paris for 1778, page 280. But the
word similem must not be taken too strictly, for Laplace's approxi-
mate result is not the same as Trembley's.
Laplace applies his result to estimate the probability that more
boys than girls will be born in a given year. This is not repeated
in the Theorie... des Proh., but is in fact included in what is there
given, pages 397 — 401, which first appeared in the Hist, de
r Acad.... Paris for 1783, page 458.
771. Trembley now takes another of Laplace's problems,
namely that discussed by Laplace in the Memoires . . . par divers
So.vans, Vol. vi. page 633.
Two players, whose respective skills are unknown, play on the
condition that he who first gains 7i games over his adversary shall
take the whole stake ; at a certain stage when A wants f games
and B wants h games they agree to leave off playing : required
to know how the stake should be divided. Suppose it were given
that the skill of ^ is a? and that of jB is 1 — x. Then we know
by Art. 172 that B ought to have the fraction <j) (x) of the stake,
where
TREMBLEY. 417
. / N /I \m (-, ^ ^ m(m — 1) x^
m (m — 1) (m — 2) x^
+ ^
where m =f+ 7i — 1.
Now if X represents ^'s skill the probability that in 2n —f— h
games A would win 7i —f and B would win n — li is ic""-^ (1 — x)""'^,
disregarding a numerical coefficient which we do not want.
Hence if A wins n —f games and B wins n — h, which is now
the observed event, we infer that the chance that A's skill is x is
x""-^ (1 - x)''-"" dx
f
J a
x^-f (1 _ xf-'' dx
Therefore the fraction of the stake to which B is entitled is
<f> {x) x''-' (1 - a?)"-' dx
L
x""-^ (1 - xy-"" dx
All this involves only Laplace's ordinary theory. Now the
following is Trembley's method. Consider ^ (x) ; the first term
is (1 — xy ; this represents the chance that B will win m games
running on the supposition that his skill is 1 — x. If we do not
know his skill a ^7^iori we must substitute instead of (1 — a?)"* the
chance that B will win m games running, computed from the
observed fact that he has won 7i — h games to ^'s n —f games.
This chance is, by Art, 7Q6,
Ui+f-l\2fi-f-h + l
' ''"^ ^—j^r^r- = ^^ say.
I — h [2n '^
Again consider the term rax (1 - xf'"^ in ix). This represents
the chance that B will win m - 1 games out of m, on the suppo-
sition that his skill is \-x. If we do not know his skill a jpriori
w^e must substitute instead of this the chance that B will win
27
418 TREMBLEY
m — 1 games out of m, deduced from the observed fact that he has
won n — h games to ^'s n —/games. This chance is, by Art. 760,
m (n -/+ 1) j^
It is needless to go farther, as the principle is clear. The final
result is that the fraction of the stake to which B is entitled is
[ ^-^ ^w+/-l 1.2 n-\-f-ln+f-2
(/+ 7, - 1) ... (A + 1) {n -/+ 1) {n -/+ 2)...(n-l)
/-I (^+/_l)(,^+/_2)...(n + l)
This process is the most interesting in Trembley's memoir.
Laplace does not reproduce this problem in the Theorie . . . des
Prob.
772. Trembley gives some remarks to shew the connexion
between his own methods and Laplace's. These amount in fact
to illustrations of the use of the Integral Calculus in the summa-
tion of series.
For example he gives the result which we may write thus :
j) + l lp + 2'^ 1.2 p + 3 1.2.3 p + 4<'^"'
p + q + 1
==! X^{1- txydx = -^ f'x^ (1 - X^dx.
Jo *" J
773. Trembley remarks that problems in Probability consist
of two parts ; first the formulae must be exhibited and then modes
of approximate calculation found. He proposes to give one ex-
ample from Laplace.
Observation indicates that the ratio of the number of boys
born to the number of girls born is greater at London than at
Paris.
Laplace says : Cette difference semble indiquer a Londres une
plus grande facilite pour la naissance des gardens, il s'agit de deter-
miner combien cela est probable. See Hist de V Acad. .,, Paris
TREMBLEY. 419
for 1778, page 304, for 17S3, page 419; and Theorie . . . des Proh.
page 381.
Trembley says,
Supponit Cel. la Place nates esse Parisiis intra certnm tempus, ^)
puA-os q puellas, Londini autem intra aliud temporis spatiiim p' pueros
q puellas, et quaerit Probabilitatem, causam quae Parisiis producit
pueros esse efficaciorem quam Londini. E supra dictis sequitur hanc
Probabilitatem rejDraesentari per formulam
X'
{l-xyx'P'([-xy'dxdx'
y (1 - xf x'' (1 - x'Y dxdx'
Trembley tben gives the limits of the integrations ; in the
numerator for x from a^' = to ic' = x, and then for x from a? =
to x = l\ in the denominator both integrations are between
and 1.
Trembley considers the numerator. He expands x'^ (1 — x'Y in
powers of x and integrates from a?' = to x = x. Then he expands
x^ {1 — xY and integrates from a; = to a? = 1 ; he obtains a result
which he transforms into another more convenient shape, which
he might have obtained at once and saved a page if he had not
expanded x^ (1 — xY- Then he uses an algebraical theorem in
order to effect another transformation ; this theorem he does not
demonstrate generally, but infers it from examining the first three
cases of it ; see his page 113.
We will demonstrate his final result, by another method. We
have
jx [L x)ax-x ^^'^i lp' + 2^ 1.2 p' + S J
Multiply by x^ (1 - xY and integrate from x = to a; = 1 ;
thus we obtain by the aid of known formula
[q \p+p +1 ( 1 ^'1 p +y + ^
p+p'+q + ^ I^TTi ~ r y + 2 ]r+/T7T3
q' jq' - 1) 1 (P + P+^)(P + P+^)
"^ 1.2 y + 3 (p+2^' + 2 + 3)(P+/ + 2 + "^)
27—2
420 TREiMBLEY.
This result as we have said Trembley obtains, though he goes
through more steps to reach it.
Suppose however that before effecting the integration with
respect to x we use the following theorem
1 4 X , ^'(^'-1) orJ^ q'{q'-V){q'-^) x^ ,
/ + 1 1/ + 2'^1.2 y + 3 1.2.3 _p' + 4
= (^ ~ ''^' liTTT+T ^ (/ + 2+1) (/ + 2') i^^
(P' + 2' + 1) (/ + 2 ) (/ + 2' - 1) (1 - •'^)
^_ 2'(2'-l )(2'-2) ^ , '
(/ + 2+1) {P + 2') (/ + 2' - 1) (P +2-2) (l-.^)^ .
Then by integrating with respect to x, we obtain
\qj\-q | j9+p' + l f 1 9^' ^+y + g + g +^
y)4j/+£+</+2 Ip'+^'+l (/^'■+^'+l)(/+^') ^ + 2
q{q~l) (7^+7y+g+g'+2)(^+/+g+g+l)
It is in fact the identity of these two results of the final inte-
gration which Trembley assumes from observing its truth when
q = 1, or 2, or 3.
With regard to the theorem we have given above we may
remark that it may be obtained by examining the coefficient of a?*"
on the two sides ; the identity of these coefficients may be estab-
lished as an example of the theory of partial fractions.
774. Trembley then proceeds to an approximate summation
of the series ; his method is most laborious, and it would not repay
the trouble of verification. He says at the end, Series haec, quae
similis est seriei quam refert Cel. la Place ... He gives no refer-
ence, but he i^robably has in view the Hist, de VAcad Paris
for 1778, page 310.
775. We have next to consider a memoir entitled Recherches
SUV une question relative au calcid des prohahilites. This memoir is
published in the volume for 1794 and l79o of the Memoir es de
TREMBLEY. 421
r Acad.... Berlin; the date of publication is 1799: tlie memoir
occupies pages 69 — 108 of tlie mathematical portion of the volume.
The problem discussed is that which we have noticed in Art. 44:8.
776. Trembley refers in the course of his memoir to what had
been done by De Moivre, Laplace and Euler. He says,
L'analyse dont M. Euler fait usage dans ce. Memoire est tres-inge-
nieuse et digne de ce grand geometre, mais comme elle est un peu
iudirecte et qu'il ne seroit pas aise de I'appliquer au probleme general
dont celui-ci n'est qu'un cas particulier, j'ai entrepris de traiter la chose
directement d'apres la doctrine des combinaisons, et de donner a la
question toute I'etendue dont elle est susceptible.
777. The problem in the degree of generality which Trembley
gives to it had already engaged the attention of De Moivre ; see
ilrt. 293. De Moivre begins with the simpler case in his Pro-
blem XXXIX, and then briefly indicates how the more general
question in his Problem XLI. is to be treated. Trembley takes the
contrary order, beginning Vvdth the general question and then
deducing the simpler case.
When he has obtained the results of his problem Trembley
modifies them so as to obtain the results of the problem discussed
by Laplace and Euler. This he does very briefly in the manner
we have indicated in Aii. 453.
778. Trembley gives a numerical example. Suppose that a
lottery consists of 90 tickets, and that 5 are drawn at each time ;
then he obtains 74102 as the approximate value of the probability
that all the numbers mil have been drawn in 100 drawings.
Euler had obtained the result -7419 in the work which we have
cited in Art. 456.
779. Trembley's memoir adds little to what had been given
before. In fact the only novelty which it contains is the investi-
gation of the probability that n-1 kinds of faces at least should
come up, or that n-2 kinds of faces at least, or n - 3, and so on.
The result is analogous to that which had been given by Euler and
which we have quoted in Ai^t. 458. Nor do Trembley's methods
present any thing of importance ; they are in fact such as would
naturally occur to a reader of De Moivre's book if he wished to
422 TREMBLEY.
reverse the order which De Moivre has taken. Trembley does not
supply general demonstrations ; he begins with a simple case, then
he proceeds to another which is a little more complex, and when
the law which governs the general result seems obvious he enun-
ciates it, leaving to his readers to convince themselves that the law
is universally true.
780. Trembley notices the subject of the summation of a cer-
tain series which we have considered in Art. 460. Trembley says,
M. Euler remarque que dans ce cas la somme de la suite qui donne
la probabilite, pent s'exprimer par des produits. Cela pent se de-
montrer par le calcul integral, par la methode suivante qui est
fort simple. But in what follows in the memoir, there is no use of
the Integral Calculus, and the demonstration seems quite unsatis-
factory. The result is verified when a? = 1, 2, 3, or 4 and then is
assumed to be universally true. And these verifications them-
selves are unsatisfactory; for in each case r is put successively
equal to 1, 2, 8, 4, and the law which appears to hold is assumed
to hold universally.
Trembley also proposes to demonstrate that the sum of the
series is zero, if ti be greater than rx. The demonstration how-
ever is of the same unsatisfactory character, and there is this ad-
ditional defect. Trembley supposes successively that n = r (a? + 1),
7i = r{x + 2), n = 7^ {x+S), and so on. But besides these cases ?i
may have any value between rx and r (x + l), or between r {x+1)
and r {x+2), and so on. Thus, in fact, Trembley makes a most
imperfect examination of the possible cases.
781. Trembley deduces from his result a formula suitable for
approximate numerical calculation, for the case in which n and x
are large, and r small ; his formula agrees with one given by La-
place in the Hist de V Acad.,.. Paris 1783, as he himself observes.
Trembley obtains his formula by repeated use of an approximation
which he establishes by ordinary Algebraical expansion, namely
('-3'=-(-S)-
Trembley follows Laplace in the numerical example which
we have noticed in Art. 455. Trembley moreover finds that in
TREMBLE Y. 423
about 86927 drawings there is an even chance that all the tickets
except one will have been drawn ; and he j^i'oceeds nearly to the
end of the calculation for the case in which all the tickets except
two are required to be drawn.
782. The next memoir is entitled Becherches sur la mortalite
cle la petite verole.
This memoir is published in the Memoir es de VAcad....Be7'lin
for 1796 ; the date of publication is 1799 : the memoir occupies
pages 17 — 38 of the mathematical portion of the volume.
783. This memoir is closely connected with one by Daniel
Bernoulli ; see Art. 398. Its object may be described as twofold;
first, it solves the problem on the hypotheses of Daniel Bernoulli
by common Algebra without the Integral Calculus ; secondly, it
examines how far those hypotheses are verified by facts. The
memoir is interesting and must have been valuable in a practical
point of view at the date of publication.
784. Let m and n have the same signification as in Daniel
Bernoulli's memoir ; see Art. 402 : that is, suppose that every year
small-pox attacks 1 in n of those who have not had the disease,
and that 1 in m of those who are attacked dies.
Let a^ denote a given number of births, and suppose that
a^, a^, a^, ... denote the number of those who are alive at the end
of 1, 2, 3, ... years : then Trembley shews that the number of per-
sons alive at the beginning of the x^^ year who have not had the
small-pox is
i-i+i(i-ir
m 711 V 'nJ
For let h^ denote the number alive at the beginning of the a^"'
year who have not had the small-pox, and ^^^^ the number at the
beginning of the {x + 1)*^ year. Then in the x^^' year small-pox
attacks — persons ; thus h^ (l j would be alive at the begin-
ning of the next year without having had the small-pox if none of
them died by other diseases. We must therefore find how many of
42tt TREMBLEY.
these h^fl 1 die of other diseases, and subtract. Now the total
number who die of other diseases during the x^^ year is
_ A
h
these die out of the number a^ ~ , HencO; by proportion, the
number who die out of &^ f 1 — - ] is
a^ — a,
mn
K \' ""~W-
Therefore 5,^, = 5, 1 1 — —
n Mill)/ ^ K\
a^ — a^^,
'^' n n) h \-- --+1 r^nl
%
mn
Ka,Jl-\
O^x-^-
mn
We can thus estabHsh our result by induction; for we may
shew in the manner just given that
3.^ "-(^-^-
1- —
mn
and then universally that
m tn V nj
785. We may put our result in the form
, ma.
J. = '
i4.(^,_i)(i^ir
TKEMBLEY. 4:2 O
Now there is nothing to hinder us from supposing the intervals
of time to be much shorter than a year ; thus n may be a large
number, and then
(1 j = e'' nearly.
The result thus agrees with that given by Daniel Bernoulli, see
Art. 402 : for the intervals in his theory may be much shorter than
a year.
786. Hitherto we have used Daniel Bernoulli's hypotheses ;
Trembley however proceeds to a more general hypothesis. He
supposes that m and 7i are not constant, but vary from year to
year ; so that we may take m^ and oi^ to denote their values for the
x^^ year. There is no difficulty in working this hypothesis by
Trembley's method ; the results are of course more complicated
than those obtained on Daniel Bernoulli's simpler hypotheses.
787. Trembley then compares the results he obtains on his
general hypothesis with a table which had been furnished by ob-
servations at Berlin during the years 1758 — 1774. The comparison
is effected by a rude process of approximation. The conclusions he
arrives at are that 7i is very nearly constant for all ages, its value
being somewhat less than 6 ; but m varies considerably, for it be-
gins by being equal to 6, and mounts up to 120 at the eleventh
year of age, then diminishes to 60 at the nineteenth year of
age, and mounts up again to 133 at the twenty-fifth year of age,
and then diminishes.
Trembley also compares the results he obtains on his general
hypothesis with another table which had been furnished by obser-
vations at the Hague. It must be confessed that the values of m
and n deduced from this set of observations differ very much from
those deduced from the former set, especially the values of m.
The observations at Berlin were nearly five times as numerous as
those at the Hague, so that they deserved more confidence.
788. In the volume for 1804 of the Memoires de VAcad...,
Berlin, which was published in 1807, there is a note by Trem-
bley himself on the memoir which we have just examined.
This note is entitled Eclaircissement relatif au Memoire sur la
42G TREMBLEY.
mortalite....(i'C.; it occurs on pages 80 — 82 of the mathematical
portion of the vokime.
Trembley corrects some misprints in the memoir, and he says :
Au reste, je dois avertir que la metliode d' approximation que j'ai
donn^e dans ce memoire comme un essai, en attendant que des obser-
vations plus detaillees nous missent en etat de proceder avec plus de
regularite, que cette methode, dis-je, ne vaut absolument rien, et je dois
des excuses au public pour la lui avoir presentee.
He then shews how a more accurate calculation may be made ;
and he says that he has found that the values of n instead of
remaining nearly constant really varied enormously.
789. The next memoir is entitled Essai sur la maniere de
trouver le teime general des series r^currentes.
This memoir is published in the volume for 1797 of the Me-
moires de V Acad.... Berlin ; the date of publication is 1800, The
pages 97 — 105 of the memoir are devoted to the solution of a pro-
blem which had been solved by Laplace in Vol. vii. of the
Me moires... par divers Savans ; Trembley refers to Laplace.
The problem is as follows : Suppose a solid having n equal
faces numbered 1, 2, 3 ...jy, required the probability that in the
course of n throws the faces will appear in the order 1, 2, 8, ...p.
This problem is very nearly the same as that of De Moivre on
the run of luck ; see Art. 325. Instead of the equation
'^«+i =Un+ 0-- Un_p) ha^,
we shall now have
^^«+i = '^^n + (1 — Wn_") «^' ; and a=-.
V
Trembley solves the problem in his usual incomplete manner ;
he discusses in succession the cases in which p = 2, 3, 4 ; and then
he asssumes that the law which holds in these cases will hold
generally.
790. The next memoir is entitled Ohservations sur les calculs
relatifs a la dur^e des mariages et au nornhre des dpoux suhsistans.
This memoir is published in the volume for 1799 — 1800 of
the Memoir es de T Acad... Berlin ; the date of publication is 1803;
the memoir occupies pages 110 — 130 of the mathematical portion
of the volume.
TREMBLEY. 427
791. The memoir refers to that of Daniel Bernoulli on the
same subject which we have noticed in Art. 412. Trembley ob-
tains results agreeing with those of Daniel Bernoulli so far as the
latter was rigorous in his investigations ; but Trembley urges ob-
jections against some of the results obtained by the use of the
infinitesimal calculus, and which were only presented as aiDproxi-
mate by Daniel Bernoulli.
792. As is usual with Trembley, the formula which occur
are not demonstrated, but only obtained by induction from some
simple cases. Thus he spends three pages in arriving at the re-
sult which we have given in Art. 410 from Daniel Bernoulli ; he
examines in succession the five most simple cases, for which
m = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and then infers the general formula by analogy.
793. . For another example of his formulae we take the follow-
ing question. Suppose n men marry n women at the same time ;
if w out of the 2n die^ required the chance that m marriages are
dissolved.
[^
We may take m pairs out of n in j ways. In each
7?2
n — in
of the m pairs only one person must die ; this can happen in 2'"
ways. Thus the whole number of cases favourable to the result
is , = — . But the whole number of cases is the whole
\m
n — m
number of ways in which 77i persons out of 2n may die ; that is
\2n ^ ^
. Hence the required chance is
in
2n — 7n
2'" [^ I 2?i — m
2 II
n — in
Trembley spends two pages on this problem, and then does
not demonstrate the result.
794. Trembley makes some api^lications of his formulae to the
subject of annuities for widows. He refers to a work by Karstens,
entitled Theorie von Wittwencassen, Halle, 1784; and also names
Tetens. On the other hand, he names Michelsen as a writer who
428 TREMBLE Y.
had represented the calculations of mathematicians on such sub-
jects as destitute of foundation.
Trembley intimates his intention of continuing his investi-
gations in another memoir, which I presume never appeared.
795. The next memoir is entitled Observations sur la metJiode
de prendre les milieux entre les observations.
This memoir is published in the volume for 1801 of the
Memoir es de T Acad. ... Berlin ; the date of publication of the
volume is 1804 : the memoir occupies pages 29 — 58 of the mathe-
matical portion of the volume.
796. The memoir commences thus :
La maniere la plus avantagense de prendre les milieux entre les
observations a ete detaillee par de grands geometres. M. Daniel Ber-
noidli, M. Lambert, M. de la Place, M. de la Grange s'en sont occupes.
Le dernier a donne la-dessus un tres-beau memoire dans le Tome v. des
Memoires de Turin. II a employe pour cela le calcul integral. Mon
dessein dans ce memoire est de montrer comment on peut parvenir aux
niemes resultats par un simple usage de la doctrine des combinaisons.
797. The preceding extract shews the object of the memoir.
We observe however that although Lagrange does employ the
Integral Calculus, yet it is only in the latter part of his memoir,
on wdiich Trembley does not touch ; see Arts. 570 — 575. In the
other portions of his memoir, Lagrange uses the Differential Cal-
culus ; but it was quite unnecessary for him to do so ; see
Art. 564.
Trembley's memoir appears to be of no value whatever. The
method is laborious, obscure, and imperfect, while Lagrange's is
simple, clear, and decisive. Trembley begins with De Moivre's
problem, quoting from him ; see Art. 149. He considers De
Moivre's demonstration indirect and gives another. Trembley's
demonstration occupies eight pages, and a reader would probably
find it necessary to fill up many parts with more detail, if he were
scrupulous about exactness.
After discussing De Moivre's problem in this manner, Trem-
bley proceeds to inflict similar treatment on Lagrange's problems.
We may remark that Trembley copies a formula from La-
TREMBLEY. 4*29
grange with all tlie misprints or errors which it involves; see
Art. 567.
798. The last memoir by Trembley is entitled Observations
sur le calcul cVun Jeu de hasard.
This memoir is published in the volume for 1802 of the
Memoir es de V Acad. ... Berlin ; the date of publication is 180-i :
the memoir occupies pages 86 — 102 of the mathematical portion
of the volume.
799. The game considered is that of Her, which gave rise to
a dispute between Nicolas Bernoulli and others ; see Art. 187.
Trembley refers to the dispute.
Trembley investigates fully the chance of Paul for every case
that can occur, and more briefly the chance of Peter. He states
his conclusion thus :
...M. de Montmort et ses amis concluoient de la centre Nicolas
Bernoulli, que ce cas 6toit insoluble, car disoient-ils, si Paul sait que
Pierre se tient au huit, il cliangera an sept, mais Pierre venant k savoir
que Paul change au sept, changera au huit, ce qui fait un cercle vicieux.
Mais il resulte seulement de la que chacun sera perjDetuellement dans
I'incertitude sur la maniere de jouer de son adversaire; des lors il con-
viendra a Paul de changer au sept dans un coup donne, mais il ne
pourroit suivre constamment ce sjsteme plusieurs coups de suite. II
conviendra de meme a Pierre de changer au huit dans un coup donn6,
sans pouvoir le faire plusieurs coups de suite, ce qui s'accorde avec les
conclusions de M. Nicolas Bernoulli contre celles de M. de Montmort.
800. It is hardly correct to say that the conclusion here
obtained agrees with that of Nicolas Bernoulli against that of
Montmort. The opponents of Nicolas Bernoulli seem only to
have asserted that it was impossible to say on which rule Paul
should uniformly act, and this Trembley allows.
801. In Trembley's investigation of the chance of Peter, he
considers this chance at the epoch before Paul has made his choice
ivhether he will exchange or not. But this is of little value for
Peter himself ; Peter would want to know how to act under cer-
tain circumstances, and before he acted he would know whether
Paul retained the card he obtained at first or compelled an ex-
480 TREMBLEY.
change. Hence Trembley's investigation of Peter's chance differs
from the method which we have exemplified in Art. 189.
802. Trembley makes an attemjDt to solve the problem of
Her for three players ; but his solution is quite unsound. Sup-
pose there are three players, Paul, James, and Peter. Trembley
considers that the chances of Paul and James are in the propor-
tion of the chance of the first and second players when there are
only two players ; and he denotes these chances by x and y. He
takes aj to ?/ as 8496 to 8079 ; but these numbers are of no con-
sequence for our purpose. He supposes that the chances of James
and Peter are also in the same proportion. This would not be
quite accurate, because when James is estimating his chance with
respect to Peter he would have some knowledge of Paul's card ;
whereas in the case of Paul and James, the former had no know-
ledge of any other card than his own to guide him in retaining or
exchanging.
But this is only a minute point. Trembley's error is in the
next step. He considers that is the chance that Paul will
x + y
beat James, and that —^ — is the chance that Peter will beat
x-\-y
James ; he infers that -. — ^-^ is the chance that both Paul and
{x-^yf
Peter will beat James, so that James will be thrown out at the
first trial. This is false: the game is so constructed that the
players are nearly on the same footing, so that - is very nearly
o
the chance that a given player will be excluded at the first trial.
1
Trembley's solution would give - as the chance that James will
be excluded ii x=y) whereas -^ should then be the value.
X 11
The error arises from the fact that and — '- do not
x-\- y ^ + y
here represent independent chances ; of course if Paul has a higher
card than James, this alone affords presumption that James will
rather have a card inferior to that of Peter than superior. This
error at the beginning vitiates Trembley's solution.
TREMBLE Y. 431
803. As a subsidiary part of his solution Trembley gives
a tedious numerical investigation which might be easily spared.
He wishes to shew that supposing James to have a higher card
than both Peter and Paul, it is an even chance whether Peter
or Paul is excluded. He might have proceeded thus, which will
be easily intelligible to a person who reads the description of the
game in Montmort, pages 278, 279 :
Let n denote the number of James's card.
I. Suppose n — r and n — s the other two cards ; where r and
s are positive integers and different. Then either Paul or Peter
may have the lower of the two n — r and n — s\ that is, there are
as many cases favourable to one as the other.
II. Peter's card may also be n\ then Paul's must be 1, or
2, or 3, ... or ?i — 1. Here are n — 1 cases favourable to Peter.
III. Peter and Paul may both have a card with the same
mark n — r\ this will give n — 1 cases favourable to Paul.
Thus II. and III. balance.
CHAPTER XIX.
MISCELLANEOUS INVESTIGATIONS
Between the Years 1780 and 1800.
804. The present Chapter will contain notices of various
contributions to our subject wliicli were made between the years
1750 and 1780.
805. We have first to mention two memoirs by Prevost, en-
titled, Sur les principes de la Theorie des gains fortuits.
The first memoir is in the volume for 1780 of the Nouveaux
Memoires .., Berlin ; the date of publication is 1782: the memoir
occupies pages 430 — 472. The second memoir is in the volume
for 1781 ; the date of publication is 1783 : the memoir occupies
pages 463 — 472. Prevost professes to criticise the account of the
elementary principles of the subject given by James Bernoulli,
Huygens, and De Moivre. It does not seem that the memoirs
present anything of value or importance ; see Art. 103.
806. We have next to notice a memoir by Borda, entitled
Memoir e sur les Elections an Scrutin.
This is in the Hist....de V Acad.... Paris for 1781 ; the date of
publication is 1784 : the memoir occupies pages 657 — QQo.
This memoir is not connected with Probability, but we notice
it because the subject is considered at great length by Condorcet,
who refers to Borda's view ; see Art. 719.
BORDA. 433
Borda observes that the ordinary mode of election is liable to
error. Suppose, for example, that there are 21 voters, out of
whom 8 vote for A, 7 for B, and 6 for (7; then A is elected. But
it is possible that the 7 who voted for B and the 6 who voted
for C may agree in considering A as the worst of the three can-
didates, although they differ about the merits of B and G. In such
a case there are 8 voters for A and 13 against him out of the
21 voters ; and so Borda considers that A ought not to be elected.
In fact in this case if there were only A and B as candidates, or
only A and C as candidates, A would lose ; he gains because he
is opposed by two men who are both better than himself.
Borda suggests that each voter should arrange the candidates
in what he thinks the order of merit. Then in collecting the
results w^e may assign to a candidate a marks for each lowest
place, a + h marks for each next ^Dlace, a + 2b marks for each next
place, and so on if there are more than three candidates. Suppose
for example that there are three candidates, and that one of them
is first in the lists of 6 voters, second in the lists of 10 voters, and
third in the lists of 5 voters ; then his aggregate merit is ex-
pressed by 6 {a + 2h) + 10 {a + h) + oa, that is by 21a + 225. It
is indifferent what proportion w^e establish between a and h, be-
cause in the aggregate merit of each candidate the coefficient of a
will be the whole number of voters.
Condorcet objects to Borda's method, and he gives the follow-
ing example. Let there be three candidates. A, B, and C\ and
suppose 81 voters. Suppose that the order ABC is adopted by
30 voters, the order A CB by 1, the order CAB by 10, the order
BAG hy 29, the order BGA by 10, and the order GBA by 1. In
this case B is to be elected on Borda's method, for his aggTegate
merit is ex^Dressed by 81a + 1095, while that of ^ is expressed
by 81a + 1015, and that of G by 81a + 335. Condorcet decides
that A ought to be elected ; for the proposition A is better than B
is affirmed by 30 + 1 + 10 voters, w^hile the proposition B is better
than A is affirmed by 29 + 10 + 1 voters, so that A has the ad-
vantage over B in the ratio of 41 to 40.
Thus suppose a voter to adopt the order ABG; then Condorcet
considers him to affirm with equal emphasis the three propositions
A is better than B, B is better than C, A is better than 0; but
28
43i MALFATTI.
Borda considers him to affirm the first two with equal emphasis,
and the last with double emphasis. See Condorcet's Discours
Preliminaire, page CLXXVii, Laplace, Theorie . . . des Froh. page 274.
807. We have next to notice a memoir by Malfatti, entitled
Esame Critico di un Prohlema di pjvhahilita del Sig. Baniele
Bernoulli, e soluzione d'un cdtro Prohlema analogo al Bermdliano.
Del Sig. Gio: Francesco Malfatti Professore di Matematica nell'
Universita di Ferrara.
This memoir is published in the Memorie di Matematica e
Fisica delta Societa Italiana, Tomo i. 1782 ; the memoir occupies
pages 768 — 824. The problem is that which we have noticed in
Art. 416. Malfatti considers the solution of the problem about
the balls to be erroneous, and that this problem is essentially
different from that about the fluids which Daniel Bernoulli used
to illustrate the former ; see Art. 420. Malfatti restricts himself
to the case of two urns.
Malfatti in fact says that the problem ought to be solved by
an exact comparison of the numbers of the various cases which
can arise, and not by the use of such equations as we have given
in Art. 417, which are only probably true ; this of course is quite
correct, but it does not invalidate Daniel Bernoulli's process for
its own object.
Let us take a single case. SujDpose that originally there are two
white balls in A and two black balls in B ; required the probable
state of the urn A after x of Daniel Bernoulli's operations have
been performed. Let u^ denote the probability that there are
two black balls in A ; v^ the probability that there is one black
ball and one white one, and therefore 1-u^-v^ the probability
that there are two white balls.
808. We will first give a Lemma of Malfatti's. Suppose there
tiren-p white balls in A, and therefore p black balls ; then there
are n —p black balls in B and p white balls. Let one of Daniel
Bernoulli's operations be performed, and let us find the number
of cases in which each possible event can happen. There are w^
cases altogether, for any ball can be taken from A and any ball
from B. Now there are three possible events ; for after the opera-
tion A may contain n—p-^\ white balls, or n—p, or n—p — \.
MALFATTI. 435
For the first event a black ball must be taken from A and a white
ball from B ; the number of cases is p\ For the second event a
black ball must be taken from A and a black one from B, or else
a white one from A and a white one from B ; the number of cases
is 2p{7i—j)). For the third event a white ball must be taken
from A and a black ball from B; the number of cases is
{n —]pf-
It is obvious that
as should be the case.
809. Now returning to the problem in Art. 807 it will be
easy to form the follov/ing equations :
1
1
Integrating these equations and determining the constant by
the condition that ^^^ = 1, we obtain
2 f (- 1)-) 1 j (_ 1)-)
Daniel Bernoulli's general result for the probable number of
white balls in A after x trials if there were 7i originally would be
Thus supposing x is infinite Daniel Bernoulli finds that the
71/
probable number is ^ . This is not inconsistent with our result ;
2 1
for w^e have when x is infinite Vy, = -^y ^^ = t^ > ^iid therefore
o u
1
\ — Vy, — u^—-, so that the case of one white ball and one black
ball is the most probable.
810. Malfatti advances an objection against Daniel Bernoulli's
obtain
28—2
result which seems of no weight. Daniel Bernoulli obtains as
436 MALFATTI.
we see ^ for the probable number of white balls in A after an
infinite number of operations. Now Malfatti makes Daniel Ber-
noulli's statement imply conversely that it will require an infinite
71/
number of trials before the result ^ will probably be reached.
But Daniel Bernoulli himself does not state or imply this con-
verse, so that Malfatti is merely criticising a misapprehension of
his own.
811. Malfatti himself gives a result equivalent to our value
of u^ in Art. 809 ; he does not obtain it in the way we use, but
by induction founded on examination of successive cases, and not
demonstrated generally.
812. The problem which Malfatti proposes to solve and which
he considers analogous to Daniel Bernoulli's is the following.
Let r be zero or any given integer not greater than n : required
to determine the probability that in x operations the event will
never occur of having just n — r white balls in A. This he treats
in a most laborious way ; he supposes r = 2, 3, 4, 5 in succession,
and obtains the results. He extracts by inspection certain laws
from these results which he assumes will hold for all the other
values of r between 6 and n inclusive. The cases r — 0, and r = 1,
require special treatment.
Thus the results are not demonstrated, though perhaps little
doubt of their exactness would remain in the mind of a student.
The patience and acuteness which must have been required to
extract the laws will secure high admiration for Malfatti.
813. We will give one specimen of the results which Malfatti
obtains, though we shall adopt an exact method instead of his in-
duction from particular cases.
Required the probability that in x trials the number ?i — 2 of
white balls will never occur in A. Let (/> {x, n) represent the whole
number of favourable cases in x trials which end with 7i white balls
in ^ ; let (ic, n — 1) be the whole number of favourable cases
which end with n — 1 white balls in A. There is no other class of
MALFATTI. 437
favourable cases ; by favourable cases we mean cases of non-occur-
rence o{ n — 2 white balls.
By aid of the Lemma in Art. 808 the following equations are
immediately established,
</) (ic + 1, ??) = (f) (x, n - 1),
<f> (x-\-l, n — l) — '}f<j> {x, n) + 2 (?2 — 1) ^ (x, n — 1).
By aid of the first the second becomes
<f)[x+l,n-l)= n^cf) {x - 1, n - 1) + 2 {n -1) (f) (x, n - 1).
Thus denoting (^ (x, n — 1) by u^ we have
«x-+i = i^u^_^ + 2 (?i - 1) u^.
This shews that ii^ is of the form Aa^ + B/S'^ where a and /3 are
the roots of the quadratic
From the first of the above equations we see that </) (x + 1, n)
is of the same /or??i as ^ {x, n — 1); thus finally we have
</) (ic, w) + </) (x, n - 1) = arj." + h/S",
Avhere a and h are constants. The required probability is found by
dividing by the whole number of cases, that is by ?i^* Thus we
obtain
n
We must determine the constants a and h by special examina-
tion of the first and second operations. After the first oj^eration
we must have m - 1 white balls and one black ball in A ; all the
cases are favourable ; this will give
aa + h^ = n^.
Similarly we get
for tlie second operation must either give n white balls in A, or
n-1, or 71-2; and the first and second cases are favourable.
Thus a and b become known, and the problem is completely
solved.
438 BICQUILLEY.
814. We will briefly indicate the steps for the solution of the
problem in which we require the probability that n — S white balls
shall never occur in A.
Let (j) {oc, n), </> {x, n — 1), (/) [x, n — 2) represent the number of
favourable cases in x trials, where the final number of white balls
in A is 01, n — 1, n— 2, respectively.
Then we have the following equations
(f> (x + 1, n) =(j) (x, n — V),
(f){x+l,n-l)= ?i'</) (x, n) + 2{n-l) ^ {x, ?j - 1) + 4(/) {x, n - 2),
<j>{x^l,n-2) = (n-rf<^{x, n- 1) + 4 {ii - 2) ^ i^x, 7i-2).
If we denote </> (x, n — 2) by u^ we shall arrive by elimination at
the equation
w^+3 ~ {Qn - 10) u^^^ + (Sti' - 16?i + 12) ii^^^ + W (?i - 2) u^ = 0.
Then it will be seen that <f>(x, n — V) and (x, n) will be ex-
pressions of the same form as </> (x, n — 2). Thus the whole num-
ber of favourable cases will be aa""' + h^'' + 07""', where a, h, c are
arbitrary constants, and a, ft 7 are the roots of
z' - {6n - 10) z'' + (Sn' - 16?i + 12) z + W (n-2) = 0.
815. A work on our subject was published by Bicquilley, en-
titled Die Calcul des Prohabilites. Par C. F. de Bicquilley, Garde-
du-Corps du Roi. 1783.
This work is of small octavo size, and contains a preface of
three pages, the Privilege du Roi, and a table of contents ; then
164 pages of text with a plate.
According to the Catalogues of Booksellers there is a second
edition published in 1805 which I have not seen.
816. The author's object is stated in the following sentence
from the Preface :
La theorie des Prohabilites ebaucliee par des Geometres celebres m'a
paru susceptible d'etre approfondee, et de faire j)artie de renseignement
^lementaire : j'ai pense qu'un traite ne seroit point indigne d'etre offert
au public, qui pourroit enriclier de nouvelles verites cette matiere inte-
ressante, et la mettre a la portee du plus grand nombre des lecteurs.
BICQUILLEY. 439
The choice of matter seems rather unsuitable for an elementary
work on the Theory of Probability.
817. Pages 1 — 15 contain the definitions and fundamental
principles. Pages 15 — 25 contain an account of Figurate numbers.
Passes 26 — 39 contain various theorems which we should now
describe as examples of the Theory of Combinations. Pages 40 — 80
contain a number of theorems which amount to little more than
easy developments of one fundamental theorem, namely that which
we have given in Art. 281, supposing ^ = 0.
818. Pages 81 — 110 may be said to amount to the following
theorem and its consequences : if the chance of an event at a
single trial be ^ the chance that it will occur m times and fail n
m + 7i
times in m-{-7i trials is i^'" 0- ~PT'
m n
Here we may notice one problem which is of interest. Sup-
pose that at every trial we must have either an event P alone, oi
an event Q alone, or both P and Q, or neither P nor Q, Let p
denote the chance of P alone, q the chance of Q alone, t the
chance of both P and Q : then 1 — ^ — ^ — ^ is the chance of nei-
ther P nor Q ; we will denote this by tc. Various problems may
then be projDOsed ; Bicquilley considers the following : required
the chance that in fi trials P will happen exactly m times, and Q
exactly n times.
I. Suppose P and Q do not happen together in any case.
Then we have P happening m times, Q happening 7i times, and
neither P nor Q happening (m — m — n times. The corresponding
chance is
I m 1 n fi — 771 — n
f^q^^W
m - n
II. Suppose that P and Q happen together once. Then we
have also P happening m — 1 times, Q happening ?i — 1 times, and
neither P nor Q happening /i, - m - /i + 1 times. The correspond-
ing chance is
m — 1 71 — 1 ^6 — 1)1 — u-r^
4i0 BICQUILLEY.
III. Suppose that P and Q happen together tivice. Tlie cor-
responding chance is
r" ..w._f? _n_5 42,.u.-m-n + 2
[2 I m - 2 I ?i-2 I ^ - 9?? - ?2 + 2
And so on.
819. As another example of the hind of problem noticed in
the preceding Article, we may require the cliance that in \l trials P
and Q shall each happen at least once. The required chance is
1 _ (1 _^; _ ^)^ _ (1 _ ^ _ Q/^ + (1 -^ - 5^ - ty.
See also Algehra, Chapter LVI.
820. Pages 111 — 133 contain the solution of some examples.
Two of them are borrowed from Buffon, namely those which we
have noticed in Art. 649, and in the beginning of Art. 650.
One of Bicquilley's examples may be given. Suppose p and q
to denote respectively the chances of the happening and failing of
an event in a single trial. A pla3^er lays a wager of a to & that the
event will happen ; if the event does not happen he repeats the
wager, making the stakes ra to rh ; if the event fails again he
repeats the wager, making the stakes r'^a to r^5 ; and so on. If the
player is allowed to do this for a series of n games, required his
advantage or disadvantage.
The player's disadvantage is
This is easily shewn. For qa ~])h is obviously the player's dis-
advantage at the first trial. Suppose the event fails at the first
trial, of which the chance is q ; then the wager is renewed ; and
the disadvantage for that trial is qar — ph\ Similarly (f is the
chance that the event will fail twice in succession ; then the wager
is renewed, and the disadvantage is qar^—pbr^. And so on. If
then qa is greater than ph the disadvantage is j)ositive and in-
creases with the number of games.
Bicquilley takes the particular case in which a = 1, and
5 + 1 .
^ = — -J — ; his solution is less simple than that which we have
ENCYCLOPEDIE Ml^THODIQUE. 44?1
given. The object of the problem is to shew to a gambler, by an
example, that if a wager is really unfavourable to him he suffers
still more by increasing his stake while the same proportion is
maintained between his stake and that of his adversary.
821. Pages 134 — 149 relate to the evaluation of probability
from experience or observation. If an event has happened m
times and failed n times the book directs us to take — - — as its
m-\- n
chance in a single trial.
822. Pages 150 — 164 relate to the evaluation of probability
from testimony. Bicquilley adopts the method which we have
exhibited in Art. 91. Another of his peculiarities is the following.
Suppose from our own experience, independent of testimony, we
assign the probability P to an event, and suppose that a witness
whose probability is 2^ offers his evidence to the event, Bicquilley
takes for the resulting probability P+ (1 — P) Pp, and not as we
might have expected from him P + (1 — P) ^. He says that the
reliance which we place on a witness is proportional to our own
previous estimate of the probability of the event to which he
testifies.
823. We will now notice the matter bearing on our subject
which is contained in the Encyclopedie Methodique; the mathema-
tical portion of this work forms three quarto volumes which are
dated respectively 1784, 1785, 1789.
Absent This article is partly due to Condorcet : he applies
the Theory of Probability to determine when a man has been ab-
sent long enough to justify the division of his property among his
heirs, and also to determine the portions which ought to be assigned
to the different claimants.
Assurances. This article contains nothing remarkable.
ProhoMlite. The article from the original Encyclopedie is re-
peated : see Art. 467. This is followed by another article under
the same title, which professes to give the general principles of
the subject. The article has not Condorcet's signature formally
attached to it ; but its last sentence shews that he was the author.
It may be described as an outline of Condorcet's own writings on
442 ENCYCLOPEDIE METHODIQUE.
the subject, but from its brevity it would be far less intelligible
than even those writings.
Substitutions. Condorcet maintains that a State has the autho-
rity to change the laws of succession to property ; but when such
changes are made the rights which existed under the old laws
should be valued and compensation made for them. In this article
Condorcet professes to estimate the amount of compensation. The
formulae however are printed in such an obscure and repulsive
manner that it would be very difficult to determine whether they
are correct ; and certainly the attempt to examine them would be
a waste of time and labour.
824. It should be observed that in the Encydopedie Metlio-
dique various threats are uttered which are never carried into
execution. Thus in the article Assurances we are referred to
Evenemens and to Societe ; and in the article Prohabilite we are
referred to Verite and to Votans. Any person who is acquainted
with Condorcet's writings will consider it fortunate that no articles
are to be found under the titles here named.
825. The only important article connected with our subject
in the Encydopedie Metliodique is that under the title Milieu,
which we will now proceed to notice. The article is by John
Bernoulli, the same person, we presume, whom we have noticed
in Arts. 598 and 624.
The article gives an account of two memoirs which it asserts
had not then been printed. The article says :
Le premier memoire dont je me propose de doiiner I'extrait, est un
petit ecrit latin de M. Daniel Bernoulli, qu'il me communiqua, en
1769, et qu'il gardoit depuis long-tems parmi ses manuscrits dans le
dessein sans doute de I'ctendre davantage. II a pour titre : Dijudicatio
niaxime j^'^ohahilis plurium ohservationimi discrepmitiu^n ; atque verisi-
niillima inductio inde formanda.
The title is the same as that of the memoir which we have
noticed in Art. 424 ; but this article Milieu gives an account of
the memoir which does not correspond with what we find in the
Acta Acad..,.Petrop., so we conclude that Daniel Bernoulli modi-
fied his memoir before publishing it.
ENCYCLOPEDIE METHODIQUE. 443
The following is the method given in the article Milieu. Let
the numerical results of discordant observations be set off as
abscissae from a fixed point ; draw ordinates to represent the pro-
babilities of the various observations ; trace a curve through the
extremities of these ordinates and take the abscissa of the centre
of gravity of the area of the curve as the correct value of the
element sought. The probabilities are to be represented by the
ordinates of a certain semi-ellipse or semicircle. The article says
that to determine analytically the centre of the semicircle would
be very difficult, because we arrive at an equation which is almost
unmanageable ; accordingly a method of approximation is pro-
posed. First take for the centre the point corresponding to the
mean of all the observations; and determine the centre of gravity
of the area corresponding to the observations ; take this point
as a new centre of a semicircle, and repeat the operation ; and
so on, until the centre of gravity obtained corresponds with
the centre of the respective semicircle. The magnitude of the
radius of the semicircle must be assigned arbitrarily by the cal-
culator.
This is ingenious, but of course there is no evidence that w^e
thus obtain a result which is specially trustworthy.
The other memoir which is noticed, in this article Milieu is
that by Lagrange, published in the Miscellanea Taurinensia ; see
Art. boQ. It is strange that the memoirs by Daniel Bernoulli
and Lagrange should be asserted to be unprinted in 1785, when
Daniel Bernoulli had published a memoir with the same title in
the Acta Acad....Petrop. for 1777, and Lagrange's memoir was
published in the Miscellanea Taurinensia for 1770 — 1773. The
date of publication of the last volume is not given, but that it
was prior to 1777 w^e may infer from a memoir by Euler; see
Art. 447.
826. We will now notice the portions of the Encyclopedie
Methodique which relate to games of chance. The three volumes
which we have mentioned in Ai't. 817 contain articles on various
games ; they do not give mathematical investigations, with a slight
exception in the case of Bassette : see Art. 467. The commence-
ment of the article Breland is amusing: il se joue a tant de
444? ENCYCLOPEDIE METHODIQUE.
jjersonnes que Von veut: mais il n^est beau, c'est-d-dire, tres-ridneux,
qiid trois ou cinq.
There is however a distmct work on games, entitled Biction-
naire des Jeuoc, faisant suite au Tome III. des Mathematiques.
1792. The Avertissement begins thus : Comme il y a, dit Mon-
tesquieu, une infinite de choses sages qui sont menees d'une
mani^re trbs-folle, il y a aussi des folies qui sont conduites d'une
maniere tr^s-sage. The work contains 316 pages of text and
16 plates. There are no mathematical investigations, but in three
cases the numerical values of the chances are given. One of these
cases is the game of Trente et quarante ; but the results given are
inaccurate, as Poisson shewed in the memoir which we have cited
in Art. 358. The other two cases in which the results are given
are the games Krahs and Passe-dix.
The copy of the Encyclopedie MHliodique which belongs to the
Cambridge University Library includes another work on games
which is wanting in other copies that I have examined. This is
entitled Dictionnaire des Jeux Mathematiques.... Kn. Yii. The
advertisement states that after the publication of the Dictionary
of Games in 1792 many of the subscribers requested that this
treatise should be enlarged and made more complete. The pre-
sent Dictionary is divided into two parts ; first, the Dictionnaire
des Jeux Mathematiques, which occupies 212 pages ; secondly, a
Dictionnaire de Jeux familiers, which is unfinished, for it extends
only from A to Gi^ammairien, occupying 80 pages.
The Dictionnaire des Jeux Mathematiques does not contain
any thing new or important in the calculation of chances. The
investigations which are given are chiefly taken from Montmort,
in some cases with a reference to him, but more often without.
Under the title Joueur we have the names of some writers on the
subject, and we find a very faint commendation of Montmort to
whose work the Dictionary is largely indebted ;
Plusieiirs aiiteurs se sont exerces sur I'analyse des jeux ; on en a im
traite elementaire de Huygens ; on en a un phis profoiid de Moivre ;
on a des morceaiix tres-savans de Bernoulli sin- cette matiere. II y a
un analyse des jeux de hasard par Montmaur, qui n'est pas sans m6rite.
The game oi Draughts obtains 16 images, and the game of Chess
d'anieres. 445
73 pages. Under the title Cartes {jeu de) we have the problem
which we noticed in Art. 533, omitting however the part which
is false.
Under the title Wliish ou Wisth we have 8 pages, beginning
thus :
Jeu de cartes mi-parti de hasard et de science. II a ete invente par
les Anglais, et continue depuis long terns d'etre en vogue dans la
Grand-Bretagne.
C'est de tons les jeux de cartes le plus judicieux dans ses principes,
le plus convenable a la societe, le plus difficile, le plus interessant, le
plus piquant, et celui qui est combine avec le plus d'art.
The article quotes some of the results obtained by De Moivre
in his calculations of the chances of this game : it also refers to
Hoyle's work, which it says was translated into French in 1770.
With respect to the Dictionnaire de Jeux familiers we need
only say that it comprises descriptions of the most trifling games
which serve for the amusement of children ; it begins with Taime
mon amant par A, and it includes Colin-Maillard.
827. We next advert to a memoir by DAnieres, entitled
Reflexions sur les Jeux de hazard.
This memoir is published in the volume of the Kouveaux
Memoires de V Acad.... Berlin for 1784; the date of publication is
1786 ; the memoir occupies pages 391 — 398 of the volume.
The memoir is not mathematical ; it alludes to the fact that
games of hazard are prohibited by governments, and shews that
there are different kinds of such games, namely, those in which a
man may ruin his fortune, and those which cannot produce more
than a trifling loss in any case.
There is a memoir by the same author, entitled Sur les Paris,
in the volume of the Kouveaux Memoires de V Acad.... Berlin for
1786 ; the date of publication is 1788 : the memoir occupies
pages 273^-278 of the volume.
This memoir is intended as a supplement to the former by the
same author, and is also quite unconnected with the mathematical
Theory of Probability.
828. We have now to notice a curious work, entitled On the
446 WARING.
Princijdes of translating Algebraic quantities into probable rela-
tions and annuities, (Ssc. By E. Waring, M.B. Lucasian Professor
of Mathematics at Cambridge, and Fellow of the Royal Societies
of London, Bononia and Gottingen, Caynbridge, Printed by J. Arch-
deacon, Printer to the University ; For J. Kicholson, Bookseller y in
Cambridge. 1792.
This is an octavo pamphlet. Besides the leaf on which the
title is printed there are 59 pages of text, and then a page with
a few corrigenda. The work is excessively scarce ; for the use
of a copy I am indebted to the authorities of Queens' College,
Cambridge.
829. The author and the printer seem to have combined their
efforts in order to render the work as obscure and repulsive as
possible ; and they have attained a fair measure of success. The
title is singularly inaccurate ; it is absurd to pretend to translate
algebraical quantities into probable relations or into annuities.
What Waring means is that algebraical identities may be trans-
lated so as to afford propositions in the Theory of Probabilities or
in the Theory of Annuities.
830. Waring begins with a Lemma. He proposes to sum the
series
1 + 2^-' r + 3^-^ r" + 4?-^r^ + S^'V* + . . . in infinitum.
The sum will be
A^-Br-\- Cr^ + Dr' + ... +y*-^
ii-ry
The coefficients A, B, C ... are independent of r ; they must
be determined by multiplying up and equating coefficients. Thus
B = 2''-''-z,
G = 3*-^ - z2'-^ + ^ ^^~ -^^ ,
j^_,z-x ^ ^.-1 , g (^ - 1) 9.-1 z{z-l) (g-2)
U-^ -Z6 + ^ Z ^-^ .
Proceeding in this way we shall find that in the numerator of
the fraction which represents the sum the last term is r""^ ; that
WARING. 447
is there is no power of r higher than this power, and the coefficient
of this power is unity. Waring refers to another work by himself
for the demonstration ; the student will see that it may be deduced
from the elementary theorem in Finite Differences respecting the
value of A"a;*^, when n is not less than m.
Waring does not apply his Lemma until he comes to the
part of the work which relates to Annuities, which forms his
pages 27 — 59.
831. Waring now proceeds to his propositions in the Theory
of Probabilities ; one of his examples will suffice to indicate his
method.
It is identically true that ^ — ^^^ — = — — -^ . Suppose -^
to represent the chance of the happening of an assigned event in
N — a
one trial, and therefore — :^ — the chance of its failing : then the
identity shews that the chance of the happening of the event in
the first trial and its failing in the second trial is equal to the dif-
ference between the chance of the happening of the event once
and the chance of its happening twice in succession.
882. There is nothing of any importance in the work respect-
ing the Theory of Probability until we come to page 19. Here
Waring says,
Let the chances of the events A and B happening be respectively
and J ; then the chance of the event A happening r times
a + h a + b
more than B in r trials will be
in r -f- 2 trials will be
or
a'
{a + by '
■l+..-^li
in r + 4 trials will be
or
{a + by\ {a+bf
ah r (r + 3) a%-
{a-vby\ (« + 6/ 2 (a + 6)
and in general it will be
448 WARING.
a"- f ah r (r + 3) a%' r (r + 4) (r + 5) a'6'
{a + by i {^tT+Vf "^ 2 {a + by ^ "~ [3 (^^«
+ H — ^ ^^-^ n / TT^ + m infinitum >•
\l_ (a + by'' j
This may be deduced from the subsequent arithmetical theorem, viz.
2m{2m-l) (2m -2)... (2m -s) (2m- 2)(2m ~ S)...(2m - s - 1)
— - f. ,
+ 1 [s
r (r + 3) (2m - 4) (2y?i - 5) . . . (27;t - g - 2)
1
^(^+4)(r + 5) (2m-6)...(2m-s-3)
+ 's-2
+ ...
+
T (r + s + 2) (r + s + 3) . . . (r + 25 + 1)
+ 1
(r + 27??.) (r + 2y?z, - 1) ... (r + 2y?i - s)
s+1
Waring's words, "^ happening r times more than B" are
scarcely adequate to convey his meaning. We see from the for-
mula he gives that he really means to take the problem of the
Duration of Play in the case where B has a capital r and A has un-
limited capital. See Art. 309.
Waring gives no hint as to the demonstration of his arith-
metical theorem. We may demonstrate it thus : take the formula
in Art. 584, suppose a = l+^, ^ = 1, ^ = ^; we shall find that
Thus we get
^- (i+zy'^' {1 + zy'''^ 2 (i+^r
^ (^ + 4) (^ + 5) z
U3 (1 + z)
t+G
+ [4 {1 + zy^''^""
Multiply both sides by (1 + z^"^' : thus
WARING. 449
(1 + ^)'""^ = (1 + ZY' + ^^ (1 + ^)"^"-'+ i^t^ ^2 (1 + ^)2n-4
If we exjDand the various 230wers oil+ z and equate the coeffi-
cients of z' we shall obtain the arithmetical theorem with t in
place of r.
But it is not obvious how Waring intended to deduce the
theorem on the Duration of Play from this arithmetical theorem. If
we put - for z we obtain
^ a
{a + hf'^' = a'{a + hf' + ta' {a + by''-' ah + H^A a' (a + 1)'"-* a'l/
+ ^ (^ + ^) (^ + ^) a} (a + Z.)^"-^ a^Z.^ + . . .
and it was perhaps from this result that Waring considered that
the theorem on the Duration of Play might be deduced ; but it
seems difficult to render the process rigidly strict.
833. Waring gives another problem on the Duration of Play ;
see his page 20.
If it be required to find the chance of ^'s succeeding n times as
oft as ^'s precisely : in ?i + 1 trials it will be found
in 2n + 2 trials it will be found
P^n{n + \)^^^^,r.Q;
in 3/1 + 3 it will be
^ n {n + 1) (?>n + 1) a'"6'
V ■• ^ ■/.. . Z,\3n + 3 •
2 {a + by
Waring does not give the investigation ; as usual with him
until we make the investigation we do not feel quite certain of
the meaning of his problem.
The first of his three examples is obvious.
29
450 WARING.
In the second example we observe that the event may occur m
the first % + 1 trials, and the chance of this is P ; or the event may
have failed in the first n + 1 trials and yet may occur if we proceed
to « + 1 more trials. This second case may occur in the following
ways : B may hajDpen twice in the first n+1 trials, or twice in
the second w + 1 trials ; while A happens in the remaining 2)i
trials. Thus we obtain
2 {n + 1) n ^'V
2n+2 )
2 [a^hf
which must be added to P to give the chance in the second ex-
ami^le.
In the third example we observe that the event may occur in
the first 2n + 2 trials, and the chance of this is Q ; or the event
may have failed in the first 2n-\-2 trials, and yet may occur if we
proceed to w + 1 more trials. This second case may occur in the
following ways :
Jj may happen three times in the fii^st n + 1 trials, or three
times in the second n+1 trials, or three times in the last n + 1
trials ; while A happens in the remaining S?i trials.
Or B may happen twice in the first n + 1 trials and once in the
second n + 1 trials, or once in the second n + 1 trials and twice in
the third n + 1 trials ; while A happens in the remaining 3/^ trials.
Thus we obtain
:^ {n + l)nin-l) ^ ^ {n + 1)' nl a'^'P
371+3 )
[3 2 ) {a + by
wliich must be added to Q to give the chance in the third ex-
ample.
834. * The following specimen may be given of Waring's imper-
fect enunciations ; see his page 21 :
Let a, h, c, d, &c. be the respective chances of the happening of
a, /5, y, 8, &c. : in one trial, and
(ax'^ + hx^ + cxy + doc^ + &c.)" = a^x'"^ + . . . + Nx^^ + &c.;
then will iV be the chance of the happening of tt in ti trials.
Nothing is said as to what ir means. The student will see that
the only meaning which can be given to the enunciation is to
WARixa 451
suppose that a, h, c, d, ... are the chances that the numbers
®> A 7j ^> • • • respectively will occur in one trial ; and then N is the
chance that in n trials the sum of the numbers will be tt.
835. "Waring gives on his page 22 the theorem which we
now sometimes call by the name of Yanclermonde. The theorem
is that
(a + Z>) (a + Z»-l) ... (a + Z'-w+ 1)
= a (a — 1) .,. [a — n+l)
-f wa (a — 1) . .. (a — n 4- 2) J
+
+ ^^(^-1)... {l-n+l).
From this he deduces a corollary which we will give in our
own notation. Let <f> {x, y) denote the sum of the products that
can be made from the numbers 1. 2, 3, ... x, taken y together.
Then will
Li
S — 1
- (f) ill — 1, ?l — 5)
= ; — • <h (n — r — \, n — s)
I r \n — r ^ ^
+ ^, ^ -<l>{n-r-%n-s-\)<i>[r,l)
r+1 n — r — L
+ ..,^ - ^^(n-r-3,?i-5-2)0(r+l, 2)
r + 2 [
-r-2
n — r
+ — TTTT^ ^i>{n-r-i,n-s-9)4>{r+%'i)
+
It must be observed that 5 is to be less than n, and r less than
s ; and the terms on the right-hand side are to continue until we
arrive at a term of the form ^ {x, 0), and this must be replaced
by unity.
29—2
452 Waring.
This result is obtained by equating the coefficients of the term
^s-rj^r -^^ ^-j^g ^^Q members of Vandermonde's identity.
The result is enunciated and printed so badly in Warings
work that some difficulty arose in settling what the result was and
how it had been obtained.
836. I do not enter on that part of Waring's work which relates
to annuities. I am informed by Professor De Morgan that the late
Francis Baily mentions in a letter the following as the interesting
parts of the work : — the series 8 — mS' -\ ^-^ S" — ...., the
Problem III, and the observations on assurances payable imme-
diately at death.
837. Another work by Waring requires a short notice ; it is
entitled A^i essay on the jirinciples of human knowledge. Cam-
bridge 1794. This is an octavo volume ; it contains the title-leaf,
then 240 pages, then 3 pages of Addenda, and a page containing
Corrige7ida.
838. This work contains on pages 35 — 40 a few common theo-
rems of probability ; the first two pages of the Addenda briefly
notice the problem discussed by De Moivre and others about a
series of letters being in their proper places ; see Art. 281, and De
Moivre Prob. xxxv. Waring remarks that if the number of
letters is infinite the chance that they will occur all in their right
places is infinitesimal. He gives page 49 of his work as that on
which this remark bears, but it would seem that 49 is a misprint
for 41.
839. Two extracts may be given from this book.
I know that some mathematicians of the first class have endeavoured
to demonstrate the degree of probabihty of an event's happening 7^ times
from its having happened m preceding times; and consequently that
such an event will probably take place ; but, alas, the problem far ex-
ceeds the extent of human understanding : who can determine the time
when the sun will probably cease to run its present course ? Page 35.
...I have myself wrote on most subjects in pure matliematics, and in
ANCILLON. 453
these books inserted nearly all tlie inventions of the moderns with
which I was acquainted.
In my prefaces I have given an history of the inventions of the dif-
ferent writers, and ascribed them to their respective authors ; and like-
wise some account of my own. To every one of these sciences I have
been able to make some additions, and in the whole, if I am not mis-
taken in enumerating them, somewhere between three and four hundred
new propositions of one kind or other, considerably more than have
been given by any English writer ; and in novelty and diiEculty not
inferior ; I wish I could subjoin in utility : many more might have
been added, but I never could hear of any reader in England out of
Cambridge, who took the pains to read and understand what I have
written. Page 115.
Waring proceeds to console himself under this neglect in Eng-
land by the honour conferred on him by D'Alembert, Euler and
Le Grange.
Dugald Stewart makes a remark relating to Waring; see his
Works edited hy Hamilton, Vol. IV, page 218.
840. A memoir by Ancillon, entitled Doutes sur les bases du
calcul des probabiliUs, was pviblished in the volume for 1794 and
1795 of the Memoires de F Acad.... Berlin; the memoir occupies
pages 3 — 32 of the part of the volume which is devoted to specu-
lative philosophy.
The memoir contains no mathematical investigations ; its ob-
ject is to throw doubts on the possibility of constructing a Theory
of Probability, and it is of very little value. The author seems to
have determined that no Theory of Probability coidd be con-
structed without giving any attention to the Theory which had
been constructed. He names Moses Mendelsohn and Garve as
having already examined the question of the admissibility of such
a Theory.
841. There are three memoirs wTitten by Pre vest and Lhuilier
in conjunction and published in the volume for 1796 of the
Memoires de VAcad... .Berlin. The date of pubhcation is 1799.
842. The first memoir is entitled Sur les Prohahilites ; it was
read Nov. 12, 1795. It occupies pages 117— 14^2 of the mathe-
matical portion of the volume.
4oJ< PREVOST AND LHUILIER.
843. The memoir is devoted to the following problem. An
urn contains m balls some of which are white and the rest black,
but the number of each is unknown. Suppose that p white balls
and q black balls have been drawn and not replaced ; required the
probability that out of the next r + s drawings r shall give white
balls and s black balls.
The possible hypotheses as to the original state of the urn are,
that there were q black balls, or g + 1 black balls, or q-\-2, ...
or m — p. Now form the probability of these various hypotheses
according to the usual principles. Let
P^— (qn — q — n -^V) {m — q — n) to p factors,
§„= (g' 4- ^ — 1) C*/ + w — 2) to q factors ;
then the probability of the /i*'^ hypothesis is
P
where S denotes the sum of all such products as P„^„. Now if
this hypothesis were certainly true the chance of drawing r white
balls and s black balls in the next r-\-s drawings would be
'^n'^n
where
Bn= {m — q — p — n + 1) {m — q—p — n) to r factors,
^n = (^ — 1) (« — 2) to 5 factors,
iV= number of combinations oi m—p— q things r + 5 at a time.
Thus the whole required probability is the sum of all the
terms of which the type is
We have first to find 2. The method of induction is adopted
in the original memoir ; we may however readily obtain X by the
aid of the binomial theorem : see Algebra, Chapter L. Thus we
shall find
[p_\q_ [ m + 1
[p + q + 1 \m — p — q
PREVOST AND LHUILIER. 455
Now PnJ^n differs from P^ only in having p + r instead of p ;
and QnS,^ difiers from Q^ only in having q-\-s instead of q^. There-
fore the sum of all the terms of the form P„ QnP^n^n is
\p + r\q + s I ??i + 1
p-{-q + r-\-s-\-l \ni — p — q — r — s
in — p — q
And .Y= ' ^
r -\- s m — p — q — r — s
Thus finally the required probability is
\r -\- s ' p + r \ q -{■ s \p -\- q + 1
\IL\1 [rVL \l)-\-q-\-r + s-\-l '
844. Let us supf)Ose that r and 5 vary while their sum r + 5
remains constant ; then we can a^^ply the preceding general
result to ?' + 5 + l different cases; namely the case in which all
the r + s drawings are to give white balls, or all but one, or all but
two, and so on, down to the case in which none are white. The
sum of these probabilities ought to he unitif, which is a test of the
accuracy of the result. This verification is given in the original
memoir, by the aid of a theorem which is proved by induction.
No new theorem however is required, for we have only to apply
again the formula by which we found S in the preceding Ai'ticle.
The variable 2')art of the result of the preceding Article is
}:)-{- r \q + s
that is the product of the following two expressions,
(r + 1) (r 4- 2) p) factors,
(5 + 1) (5 + 2) q factors.
The sum of such products then is to be found supposing r + 5
constant ; and this is
p-\-q + l r +
Hence the required result, unity, is obtained by multiplying
this expression by the constant part of the result in the preceding-
Article.
45 G PEEVOST AND LHUILIER.
This result had been noticed by Condorcet ; see page 189 of
the Essai... de l' Analyse...
845. Out of the r + s + 1 cases considered in the preceding
Article, suppose we ask which has the greatest probability ? This
question is answered in the memoir approximately thus. A quan-
tity when approaching its maximum value varies slowly ; thus we
have to find when the result at the end of Article 843 remains
nearly unchanged if we put r — 1 for r and s + 1 for s. This
leads to
p + r (7 + 5 + 1 ,
= z. — , nearly ;
therefore - = — ~- nearly.
r s ■\-l ^
T 7)
Thus if r and s are laro^e we have - = - nearly.
s <i ^
846. It will be observed that the expression at the end of
Art. 843 is independent of m the number of balls originally con-
tained in the urn ; the memoir notices this and draws attention
to the fact that this is not the case if each ball is replaced in the
urn after it has been drawn. It is stated that another memoir
will be given, which will consider this form of the problem when
the number of balls is supposed infinite ; but it does not seem that
this intention was carried into effect.
847. It will be instructive to make the comparison between
the two problems which we may pi'esume would have formed the
substance of the projected memoir. Suppose that j:> white balls
have been drawn and q black balls, and not replaced; and suppose
the whole number of balls to be infinite : then by Art. 704 the pro-
bability that the next r + s drawings will give r white balls and s
black balls is
and on effectinf]^ the intecjration we obtain the same result as in
PREVOST AND LHUILIER. 457
Art. 843. The coincidence of the results obtained on the two dif-
ferent hypotheses is remarkable.
848. Suppose that r = 1 and 5 = in the result of Art. 843 ;
we thus obtain
p-hl
Again suppose ?^ = 2 and 5 = 0; we thus obtain
The factor -^ is, as we have just seen, the probability
of drawing another white ball after drawing p white balls and
p + 2
q black balls ; the factor — expresses in like manner the
^ 7^ + ^ + 3 ^
probability of drawing another white ball after drawing^ + 1 white
balls and q black balls : thus the formula makes the probability
of drawing two white balls in succession equal to the product of
the probability of drawing the first into the probability of drawing
the second, as should be the case. This property of the formula
holds generally.
849. The memoir which we have now examined contains the
first discussion of the problem to which it relates, namely, the
problem in which the balls are not replaced. A particular case of
the problem is considered by Bishop Terrot in the Transactions of
the Royal Society of Edinburgh, Vol. xx.
850. The other two memoirs to which we have referred in
Art. 841 are less distinctly mathematical, and they are accordingly
printed in the portion of the volume which is devoted to speculative
philosophy. The second memoir occupies pages 3 — 24, and the
third memoir pages 25 — 41. A note relating to a passage of the
third memoir, by the authors of the memoir, is given in the volume
for 1797 of the Memoires de V Acad.... Berlin, page 152.
851. The second memoir is entitled 8ur Vart d'estimer la
prohabilite des causes par les effets. It consists of two sections.
The first section discusses the general principle by which the
458 PREVOST AND LHUILIER.
probabilities of causes are estimated. The principle is quoted as
given by Laplace in the Memoires . . .par divers Savans, Yol. VI. :
Si un evenement pent etre produit par un nombre n de causes
differentes, les probabilites de I'existence de ces causes prises de
I'evdnement, sont entre elles comme les probabilites de I'evene-
ment prises de ces causes. The memoir considers it useful and
necessary to demonstrate this principle ; and accordingly deduces
it from a simple hypothesis on which it is conceived that the whole
subject rests. Some remarks made by Condorcet are criticised ;
and it is asserted that our persuasion of the constancy of the laws
of nature is not of the same kind as that which is represented by
a fraction in the Theory of Probability. See Dugald Stewart's
Works edited hy Hamilton, Yol. i. pages 421, 616.
The second section of the memoir applies Laplace's principle
to some easy examples of the following kind. A die has a certain
number of faces ; the markings on these faces are not known, but
it is observed that out of ^ + ^ throws p have given ace and q
not-ace. Find the probability that there is a certain number of
faces marked ace. Also find the probability that in p' + q' more
throws there will bej/ aces and q not-aces.
It is shewn that the result in the last case is
where 2 denotes a summation taken with respect to m from m = 1
to m = n', and 7i is the whole number of faces. This is the result
if the aces and not-aces are to come in a prescribed order \ if they
I // + q
are not we must multiply by — ;- — r- .
^ *^ *^ p \q
The memoir states without demonstration what the approxi-
mate result is when n is supposed very great ; namely, for the
case in which the order is prescribed.
Li L^ \p + q+p + </' + ! '
852. The third memoir is entitled Remarques siir Vutilite et
Vetendue dii 2)7'inci2)e par lequel on estime la p^i'ohahilite des causes.
This memoir also relates to the principle which we have quoted
PREVOST AND LHUILIER. 459
in Art. 851 from Laplace. The memoir is divided into four
sections.
853. The first section is on the lUility of the principle. It is
asserted that before the epoch when this principle was laid down
many errors had occurred in the waiters on Probability.
The following paragraph is given :
Dans I'appreciation de la valeur dii temoignage de deux tenioias
simultanes, il paroit que, jusqu'a Lambert, on n'a point use d'un autre
artifice, que de prendre le comjDlement de la formule employee pour le
temoignage successif. On suivoit ^ cet egard la trace de I'appreciation
des argumens conspirans, telle que I'avoit faite Jac. Bernoulli. Si I'on
avoit connu la vraie methode de I'estimation des causes, on n'auroit pas
manque d' examiner avant tout si ce cas s'y rapportoit ; et Ton auroit vu
que I'accord entre les temoins est un evenement posterieur k la cause
quelconque qui a determine les depositions : en sorte qu'il s'agit ici
d'estimer la cause par I'efiet. On seroit ainsi retorabe tout naturelle-
ment et sans effort dans la methode que Lambert a trouvee par un
effet de cette sagacite rare qui caracterisoit son genie.
854. The authors of the memoir illustrate this section by
quoting from a French translation, published in Paris in 1786, of
a w^ork by Haygarth on the small-pox. Haygarth obtained from a
mathematical friend the following remark. Assuming that out
of tAventy persons exjDosed to the contagion of the small-jDox
only one escapes, then, however violent the small-pox mav
be in a town if an infant has not taken the disease we may
infer that it is 19 to 1 that he has not been exposed to the
contagion ; if two in a family have escaped the probability that
both have not been exposed to the contagion is more than 400 to 1 ;
if three it is more than 8000 to 1.
With respect to this statement the memoir says that M. de la
Roche the French translator has shewn that it is ^ATong by a judi-
cious discussion. The end of the translator's note is quoted ; the
chief part of this quotation is the following sentence :
Si Ton a observe que sur vingt persounes qui pontent a une table de
pharaon il y en a dix-neuf qui se ruinent, on ne pourra pas en deduire
qu'il y a un a parier centre dix-neuf que tout homme dont la foi-tune
4 GO HAYGAETH.
n est pas derangee, n'a pas ponte au pliaraon, ni qu'il y ait dix-neuf a
parier centre un, que cet liomme est un joueur.
This would be absurd, M. de la Roche says, and he asserts that
the reasoning given by Haygarth's friend is equally absurd. We
may remark that there must be some mistake in this note ; he has
put 19 to 1 for 1 to 19, and vice versa. And it is difficult to see how
Prevost and Lhuilier can commend this note ; for M. de la Roche
argues that the reasoning of Haygarth's friend is entirely absurd,
while they only find it slightly inaccurate. For Prevost and
Lhuilier proceed to calculate the chances according to Laplace's
prmciple ; and they nnd them to be ^ , — — - , — — - , which, as
they say, are nearly the same as the results obtained by Hay-
garth's friend.
855. The second section is on the extent of the principle. The
memoir asserts that we have a conviction of the constancy of the
laws of nature, and that we rely on this constancy in our applica-
tion of the Theory of Probability ; and thus we reason in a vicious
circle if we pretend to apply the principle to questions respecting
the constancy of such laws.
856. The third section is devoted to the comparison of some
results of the Theory of Probability with common sense notions.
In the formula at the end of Art. 843 suppose 5 = 0; the for-
mula reduces to
{p+ 1) (jP + 2) ... (p + r)
(p+2+2) (;? + $ + 3) ... (^ + g + r + l) '
it is this result of which particular cases are considered in the
third section. The cases are such as according to the memoir lead
to conclusions coincident with the notions of common sense ; in
one case however this is not immediately obvious, and the memoir
says, Ceci donne I'explication d'une esp(^ce de paradoxe remarque
(sans I'expliquer) par M. De La Place ; and a reference is given to
Ecoles no7miaIes, Qimie cahier. We will give this case. Nothing is
known d, priori respecting a certain die ; it is observed on trial that
in five throws ace occurs twice and not-ace three times ; find the
probability that the next four throws will all give ace. Here
PREYOST AND LHUILIER. 461
3,4.5.6 1
p= 2, q=S, r =4 ; the above result becomes ^ o^~n a > that is — .
If we knew a priori that the die had as many faces ace as not-ace
we should have -^^ , that is ^5 ' ^^^' ^^^^ required chance. The para-
dox is that q- is o-reater than — ; ; while the fact that we have had
14 lb
only two aces out of five throws suggests that we ought to have a
smaller chance for obtaining four consecutive aces, than we should
have if we knew that the die had the same number of faces ace as
not-ace. We need not give the explanation of the paradox, as it
will be found in connexion with a similar example in Laplace,
Theorie...des Proh. page cvi.
857. The fourth section gives some mathematical develop-
ments. The following is the substance. Suppose n dice, each
having r faces ; and let the number of faces which are marked ace
be m, m\ m"\ . . . respectively. If a die is taken at random, the
probability of throwing ace is
on -\-m -^-m + ...
nr
If an ace has been thrown the probability of throwing ace again
on a second trial with the same die is
m^ + m" + m"" + . . .
r [in -{■ m -\- m + ...)
The first probability is the greater; for
{m + m 4- m" + ...y is greater than n [m^ + m'"^ + m"'^ + ...).
The memoir demonstrates this simple inequality.
858. Prevost and Lhuilier are also the authors of a memoir
entitled Me mo ire sur ^application du Calcid des prohahilites a la
valeur du temoignage.
This memoir is published in the volume for 1797 of the Me-
moires de V Acad.... Berlin; the date of publication is 1800: the
memoir occupies pages 120 — 151 of the portion of the volume
devoted to speculative philosophy.
The memoir begins thus :
Le but de ce memoire est plutot de reconnoitre I'etat actuel de cette
theorie, que d'y rien aj outer de nouveau.
462 PREVOST AND LHUILIER.
The memoir first notices tlie criticism given in Lambert's Orga-
non of James Bernoulli's formula winch we have already given in
Art. 122.
It then passes on to the theory of concurrent testimony now
commonly received. Suppose a witness to speak truth m times and
falsehood n times out oi m + n times ; let m and ?i' have similar
meanings for a second witness. Then if they agree in an assertion
the probability of its truth is -, r •
mm ■\-n7i
The ordinary theory of traditional testimony is also given.
Using the same notation as before if one witness reports a state-
ment from the report of another the probability of its truth is
mm' + nn
J\ 5
{m + m') {71 + n)
for the statement is true if they both tell the truth or if they both
tell a falsehood. If there be two witnesses in succession each of
whom reverses the statement he ought to give, the result is true ;
that is a double falsehood gives a truth. It is stated that this con-
sequence was first indicated in 1794 by Prevost.
The hypothesis of Craig is noticed ; see Art. 91.
The only new point in the memoir is an hypothesis which is
proposed relating to traditional testimony, and which is admitted
to be arbitrary, but of which the consequences are examined. The
hypothesis is that no testimony founded on falsehood can give the
truth. The meaning of this hypothesis is best seen by an example:
suppose the two witnesses precisely alike, then instead of taking
2 I 2
071 "t" n
-7 rr as the probability of the truth in the case above considered
{m -\-n)
m^
we should take rj : that is we reject the term n^ in the
[m + n) **
numerator which arises from the agreement of the witnesses in a
falsehood.
rrn J 1 ^^ 1 ^nm -\-n^ , , . ,
Ihus we take 7 V2 ^'^^ -, \¥ to represent respectively
[in + n) {in + ^) ^ ^ -^
the probabilities of the truth and falsehood of the statement on
which the witnesses agree.
Suppose now that there is a second pair of witnesses inde-
pendent of the former, of the same character, and that the same
MATTHEW YOUNG. 463
statement is also affirmed by this pair. Then the memoir combines
the two pairs by the ordinary rule for concurrent testimony, and so
takes for the probability arising from the two pairs
m^ -f i^nm + iff '
Then the question is asked for what ratio of m to n this expres-
sion is equal to , so that the force of the two pairs of wit-
m -^ n ^
nesses may be equal to that of a single witness. The approximate
value of — is said to be 4*86^ so that is about -^ .
n m-\- n b
859. In Vol. VII. of the Transactions of the Royal Irish
Academy there is a memoir by the Rev. Matthew Young, D.D.
S.F.T.c.D. and M.R.I.A., entitled On the force of Testimony in esta-
hlishing Facts contrai^y to Analogy. The date of publication of
the volume is 1800 ; the memoir was read February 3rd, 1798 : it
occupies pages 79 — 118 of the volume.
The memoir is rather metaphysical than mathematical. Dr
Young may be said to adopt the modern method of estimating the
force of the testimony of concurrent witnesses ; in this method,
supposing the witnesses of equal credibility, we obtain a formula
coincidino^ with that in Art. 667. Dr Younof condemns as erroneous
the method which we noticed in Art. 91 ; he calls it "Dr Halley's
mode," but gives no authority for this designation. Dr Young
criticises two rules given by Waring on the subject ; in the first of
the two cases however it would not be difficult to explain and
defend Waring's rule.
CHAPTER XX.
LAPLACE.
860. Laplace was born in 1749, and died in 1827. He wrote
elaborate memoirs on our subject, which he afterwards embodied
in his great work the Theorie analytique des ProhabiliUs, and on
the whole the Theory of Probability is more indebted to him than
to any other mathematician. We shall give in the first place a
brief account of Laplace's memoirs, and then consider more fully
the work in which they are reproduced.
861. Two memoirs by Laplace on our subject are contained in
the Memoir es...pa7^ divers Savans, Vol. vi. 1774. A brief notice
of the memoirs is given in pages 17 — 19 of the preface to the
volume which concludes thus :
Ces deux Memoires de M. de la Place, ont ete choisis parmi un
tres-grand nombre qu'il a presentes depuis trois ans, a I'Academie, oii il
remplit actuellement une place de Geometre. Cette Compagnie qui s'est
empressee de recorapenser ses travaux et ses talens, n'avoit encore vu
personne aussi jeune, lui presenter en si peu de temps, tant de Memoires
importans, et sur des matieres si diverses et si difficiles.
862. The first memoir is entitled Memoir e sur les suites re-
ciirro-recurrentes et sur leurs usages dans la theorie des hasards. It
occupies pages 353 — 371 of the volume.
A recurring series is connected with the solution of an equation
in Finite Differences where there is one independent variable ; see
Art. 318. A recurro-recurrent series is similarly connected with
the solution of an equation in Finite Differences where there are
two independent variables. Laplace here first introduces the term
LAPLACE. 4G5
and the subject itself; we shall not give any account of his investi-
gations, but confine ourselves to the part of his memoir which
relates to the Theory of Probability.
863. Laplace considers three problems in our subject. The
first is the problem of the Duration of Play, supposing two players
of unequal skill and unequal capital ; Laplace, however, rather
shews how the j)i"oblem may be solved than actually solves it. He
begins with the case of equal skill and equal caj^ital, and then
passes on to the case of unequal skill. He proceeds so far as to
obtain an equation in Finite Differences with one independent
variable which would present no difficulty in solving. He does
not actually discuss the case of unequal capital, but intimates that
there will be no obstacle except the length of the process.
The problem is solved completely in the Theorie...des Proh.
pages 225—238 ; see Art. 588.
8GL The next problem is that connected with a lottery which
appears in the Theorie...des Proh. pages 191 — 201. The mode of
solution is nearly the same in the two places, but it is easier to
follow in the Theorie...des Proh. The memoir does not contain
any of the approximate calculation which forms a large part of the
diiicussion in the Theorie,..des Proh. ^Ye have already given the
history of the problem; see Arts. -11:8, 775.
865. The third problem is the following : Out of a heap of
counters a number is taken at random ; find the chances that this
number will be odd or even respectively. Laplace obtains what we
should now call the ordinary results ; his method however is more
elaborate than is necessary, for he uses Finite Differences : in the
Tlieorie...des Proh. page 201, he gives a more simj^le solution.
We have already sjDoken of the problem in Art. 350.
866. The next memoir is entitled Memoire sur la Prohahilite
des causes par les echiemens ; it occupies pages 621 — QoQ of the
volume cited in Art. 861.
The memoir commences thus :
La Theorie des hasarda est une dcs parties les plus curieuses et les
30
4G6 LAPLACE.
plus del'cates de I'analyse, par la finesse dcs comblnaisons qu'elle exige
et par la difficulte de les soumettre au calcul ; celui qui paroit I'avoir
traitee avec le pins de succcs estM. Moivre, dans un excellent Oiivrage
qui a pour titre, Theory of Chances ; nous devons a cet habile Geometre
les premieres rocherches que Ton ait faites sur Fintegration des equa-
tions differencielles aux differences finies ; ...
867. Laplace then refers to Lagrange's researches on the
theory of equations in Finite Differences, and also to two of his
own memoirs, namely that which we have just examined, and one
wdiich was about to appear in the volume of the Academy for
1773. But his present object, he says, is very different, and is
thus stated :
...je me propose de determiner la probabilite des causes par les
evenemens, maticre neuve a bicn des egards et qui merite d'autant plus
d'etre cultivee que c'est principalement sous ce point de vue que la
science des hasards pent etre utile dans la vie civile.
868. This memoir is remarkable in the history of the subject,
as being the first which distinctly enunciated the principle for
estimating the probabilities of the causes by which an observed
event may have been produced. Bayes must have had a notion of
the principle, and Laplace refers to him in the Theorie...des Proh.
page cxxxvii. though Bayes is not named in the memoir. See
Arts. 539, 696.
869. Laplace states the general principle which he assumes in
the follow^ing words :
Si un evenement peut etre produit par un nombre n de causes dif-
ferentes, les probabilites de I'existence de ces causes prises de I'evene-
ment, sent entre elles comme les probabilites de I'evenement prises de
ces causes, et la probabilite de I'existence de cliacune d'elles, est egale
a la probabilite de I'evenement prise de cette cause, divisee par la somme
de toutes les probabilites de Tevenement prises de chacune de ces
causes.
870. Laplace first takes tlie standard problem in this part of
our subject : Suppose that an urn contains an infinite number of
white tickets and black tickets in an unknown ratio ; ^ + </ tickets
LAPLACE. 467
are drawn of which p are white and q are black : required the pro-
bability of drawing m white tickets and n black tickets in the next
m + n drawings.
Laplace gives for the required probability
/,
a^^'" (1 _ xY'-'' clx
j x" (1 -xydx
'^
so that of course the m white tickets and n black tickets are sup-
posed to be draT^^l in an assigned order ; see Arts. ^0^, 76G, 843.
Laplace effects the integration, and approximates by the aid of a
formula which he takes from Euler, and which we usually call
Stirling's Theorem.
The problem here considered is not explicitly reproduced in the
Theorie. . .des Proh., though it is involved in the Chapter which forms
pages 363—401.
871. After discussing this problem Laplace says,
La solution de ce Probleme donne une methode directe pour deter-
miner la probabilite des evenemens futurs d'apres ceux qui sont deja
arrives ; mais cette matiere etant fort etendue, je me bornerai ici a
donner une demonstration assez singuliere du theoreme suivant.
On peut suppose)' les nomhres p e^ q tellement grands, qiuil devienne
aussi ajJjirochant que Von voudra de la certitude, que le rapport du
nomhre de billets blancs au nomhre total des billets renfermes dans
Vurne, est compris e^itre les deux limites — w, et — 1- w, to pouvant
p + qp-fq-^
etre suj^j^ose moindre quaucune grandeur donnee.
The probability of the ratio lying between the specified limits is
x^{l -xydx
[
[ x^ (1 - xy dx
^
where the inteoral in the numerator is to be taken between the
limits — w and — V «. Laplace by a rude process of
^ + ^ p-\-q
30—2
4G8 LAPLACE.
approximation arrives at tlie conclusion that this probability does
not differ much from unity.
872. Laplace proceeds to the Problem of Points. He quotes
the second formula which we have given in Art. 172 ; he says that
it is now demonstrated in several works. He also refers to his
own memoir in the volume of the Academy for 1773 ; he adds
the followinof statement :
...on y trouvera pareillement line solution generale du Problcme
des partis dans le cas de trois ou d'un plus grand nombre de joueurs,
probleme qui n'a eucore ete resolu par personno, que je sache, bien que
les Geomutres qui ont travaille sui* ces matieres en aient desire la
solution.
Laplace is wrong in this statement, for De Moivre had solved
the problem ; see Art. 582.
873. Let X denote the skill of the player A, and 1—x the skill
of the player B ; suppose that A wants f games in order to win
the match, and that B wants h games : then, if they agree to leave
off and divide the stakes, the share of B will be a certain quan-
tity which we may denote by (j) {x,f, h). Suppose the skill of each
2)layer unhioiun; let 7i be the whole number of games which A or
B ought to win in order to entitle him to the stake. Then Laplace
says that it follows from the general principle which we have given
in Art. 869, that the share of B is
I ic"'-^ (1 - x)""-^ (f) (x, f, h) clx
J
1
x""'^ {y - xY^ dx
The formula depends on the fact that A must already have
won n —f games, and B have won n — li games. See Art. 771.
874. Laplace now proceeds to the question of the mean to be
taken of the results of observations. He introduces the subject
thus :
On peut, au moyen de la Theorie precedente, parvenir a la solution
du Problcme qui consiste \ determiner le miUeu que Ton doit prendre
LAPLACE. 469
entre plusieurs observations donnees d'un meme phenomene. II j a
deux ans que j'en donnai uue a 1' Academic, a la suite du Memoire sur
les Series recurrorecurrentes, imi^rime dans ce volume ; mais le peu
d'usage dont elle pouvoit etre, me la fit supprimer lors de Timpression.
J'ai appris depuis par le Journal astronomique de M, Jean Bernoulli,
que M". Daniel Bernoulli et la Grange se sont occupes du meme pro-
bleme dans deux Memoires manuscrits qui ne sont point venus a ma
connoissance. Cette annonce jointe a I'utilite de la matiere, a reveille
mes idees sur cet objet ; et quoique je ne doute point que ces deux
illustres Geometres ne Taient traite beaucoup plus heureusement que
raoi, je vais cependant exposer ici les reflexions qu'il m'a fait naitre,
persuade que les differentes manieres dont on pent I'envisager j^roduiront
une methode moins hypothetiqiie et plus sure pour determiner le milieu
que Ton doit prendre entre plusieurs observations.
875. Laplace then enunciates his problem thus :
Determiner le milieu que I'on doit prendre entre trois observations
donnees d'un meme phenomene. *
Laplace supposes positive and negative errors to be equally
likely, and he takes for the probability that an error lies between
X and x+ dx the expression — e~^^^ dx\ for this he offers some rea-
sons, which however are very slight. He restricts himself as his
enunciation states, to three observations. Thus the investigation
cannot be said to have any practical value.
876. Laplace says that by the mean which ought to be taken
of several observations, two things may be understood. We may
understand such a value that it is equally likely that the true
value is above or below it ; this he says we may call the milieu
de probdbilite. Or we may understand such a value that the sum
of the errors, each multiplied by its probability, is a minimum ;
this he says we may call the milieu derrein\ or the milieu astro-
nomique, as being that which astronomers ought to adopt. The
errors are here supposed to be all taken positively.
It might have been expected from Laplace's words that these
two notions of a mean value w^ould lead to different results ; he
shews however that they lead to the same result. In both cases
the mean value corresponds to the point at which the ordinate to
470 LAPLACE.
a certain curve of probability bisects the area of the curve. See
Theorie...des Froh. page 335.
Laplace does not notice another sense of the word mean,
namely an average of all the values ; in this case the mean would
correspond to the abscissa of the centre of gravity of the area of
a certain curve. See Art. 485.
877. Laplace now proceeds to the subject which is considered
in Chapter VIL of the Theorie...des Froh., namely the influence
produced by the want of perfect symmetry in coins or dice on the
chances of repetitions of events. The present memoir and the
Chapter in the Theorie...des Froh. give different illustrations of
the subject.
The first case in the memoir is that of the Fetershurg Fro-
hlem, though Laplace does not give it any name. Suppose the
chance for head to be — ^ — , and therefore the chance for tail
to be — ^^ — ; suppose there are to be x trials, and that 2 crowns
are to be received if head appears at the first trial, 4 crowns if
head does not appear until the second trial, and so on. Then the
expectation is
If the chance for head is — ^ — , and therefore the chance for
tail is —^~ , we must change the sign of in- in the expression for
the expectation. If we do not know which is the more likelv to
appear, head or tail, we may take half the sum of the two expres-
sions for the expectation. This gives
If we expand, and reject powers of ot higher than -cj^, we obtain
LAPLACE. . 471
If we suppose that tis may have any value between and c we
may multiply the last expression by d-us and integrate from to c.
See Art. 529.
878. As another example Laplace considers the following
question. A undertakes to throw a given face with a common die
in n throws : required his chance.
/5\"
If the die be perfectly symmetrical the chance is 1 — i -j ; but
if the die be not perfectly symmetrical this result must be
modified. Laplace gives the investigation : the principle is the
same as in another example which Laplace also gives, and to which
we will confine ourselves. Instead of a common die with six faces
we will suppose a triangular prism which can only fall on one of its
three rectangular faces : required the probability that in n throws
it will fall on an assigned face. Let the chance of its falling on the
three faces be — ^ — , — ^ — and — - — respectively, so that
'UJ ■\- "UJ ■\- 'US =0.
Then if we are quite ignorant which of the three chances belongs
to the assigned face, we must suppose in succession that each of
them does, and take one-third of the sum of the results. Thus we
obtain one-third of the following sum,
{
If we reject powers of ■or, tzr', and -ot" beyond the square we get
approximately
«?« n (n _ I) 9"-2
3'' 1 2 ' • 3'^ '^ +tu- +-57 ;.
Suppose we know nothing about ct, ot', and ot", except that
each must lie between — c and + c ; we wish to find what we may
call the average value of ot^ -|- tn-'^ -h ts-''^
We may suppose that we require the mean value of x^ + 1^ -|- z^,
472 LAPLACE.
subject to the conditions that x -\- y -{- z = 0, and that x, 7/, and z
must each lie between — c and + c.
The result is
J oJ -c
"c rc-x
2 dxdij
0.
Laplace works out this result, giving the reasons for the steps
briefly. Geometrical considerations will furnish the result very
readily. We may consider x -^-y ■\-z = ^ to be the equation to a
plane, and we have to take all points in this plane lying within
a certain regular hexagon. The projection of this hexagon on the
plane of {x, y) will be a hexagon, four of whose sides are equal to
c, and the other two sides to c\/2. The result of the integration
is - cl Thus the chance is
b
2" n {n - 1) 2'^
-3
3'^ 1.2
)n+2
^ 9
DC .
879. It easily follows from Laplace's process that if we sup-
pose a coin to be not perfectly symmetrical, but do not know
whether it is more likely to give head or tail, then the chance of
two heads in two throws or the chance of two tails in two throws
is rather more than - : it is in fact equal to such an expression as
instead of being equal to ^ x ^ . Laplace after adverting to this
case says,
Cette aberration de la Thcorie ordinaire, qui n'a encore ete observee
par personne, que je sache, m'a paru digne de Fatten tion des Geometres,
et il me semble que Ton ne pent trop y avoir 6gard, lorsqu'on applique
le calcul des probabilites, aux difTcrens objets de la vie civile.
880. Scarcely any of the present memoir is reproduced by
Laplace in his Theorie...des Proh. Nearly all that we have no-
ticed in our account of the memoir u]) to Art. 876 inclusive is
LAPLACE. 473
indeed superseded by Laplace's later researches; but what we
have given from Art. 877 inclusive might have appeared in
Chapter VIL of the Theorie...des Prob.
881. Laplace's next memoir on our subject is in the Memoires
...par divei^s Savans... 177 S', the date of publication is 1776. The
memoir is entitled Recherclies sur ^integration des Equations dif-
ferentielles aux differences Jinies, et sur leur usage dans la theorie
des hasards, &c.
The portion on the theory of chances occupies pages 113 — 163.
Laplace begins with some general observations. He refers to the
subject wdiich he had already discussed, which we have noticed
in Art. 877. He says that the advantage arising from the w^ant
of symmetry is on the side of the player Avho bets that head
will not arrive in two throws : this follow^s from Art. 879 ; for to
bet that head will not arrive in two throws is to bet that both
throws will give tail.
882. The first problem he solves is that of odd and even; see
Art. 865.
The next problem is an example of Compound Interest, and
has nothing connected with probability.
The next problem is as follows. A solid has p equal faces,
which are numbered 1, 2,...^:?: required the probability that in
the course of n throws the faces will occur in the order ], 2,...^.
This j)roblem is nearly the same as that about a run of events
Avhich w^e have reproduced from De Moivre in Art. 325 : instead
of the equation there given we have
^'n+i = ^n + (1 - ^n^i-p) «"; whcre a = - .
883. The next problem is thus enunciated :
Je suppose un nombre n de joueiirs (1), (2), (3), ... (?/), jouant de
cette maniere ; (1) joue avec (2), et s'il gagne il gagne la partie ; s'il ne
perd ni gagne, il continue de jouer avec (2), jusqu'a ce que I'un des
deux gagne. Que si (1) perd, (2) joue avec (3) ; s'il le gagne, il gagne la
partie ; s'il ne perd ni gagne, il continue de jouer avec (3) ; mais s'il
perd, (3) joue avec (4), et ainsi de suite jusqu'a ce que I'un des joueurs
ait vaincu celui qui le suit; c'est-a-dire que (1) soit vainqueur de (2),
47^ LAPLACE.
ou (2) de (3), ou (3) de (4), ... on (n-1) de (71), ou (n) de (1). Be plus,
la probabilite d'lin quelconque des joueurs, pour gagner I'autre =^, et
celle de ne gagner ni perdre =^. Cela pose, il faut determiner la pro-
babilite que Tun de ces joueurs gagnera la partie au coup x.
This problem is rather difficult; it is not reproduced in the
Theorie...des Proh. The following is the general result: Let v^
denote the chance that any assigned player will win. the match
at the ic*^^ trial ; then
n n {n — 1") 1 n [n — 1) {n — 2) 1
'^x o ^x-\ "T -j 4> q^ ^X-2 ' -j 9 O 03 ^X-^ I • • •
1
syii ^x—n'
884^. Laplace next takes the Problem of Points in the case
of two players, and then the same problem in the case of three
players ; see Art. 872. Laplace solves the problem by Finite Differ-
ences. At the beginning of the volume which contains the memoir
some errata are corrected, and there is also another solution indi-
cated of the Pr^^blem of Points for three players; this solution
depends on the expansion of a multinomial exj^ression, and is
in fact identical with that which had been given by De Moivre.
Laplace's next problem may be considered an extension of the
Problem of Points; it is reproduced in the Theorie...des Proh.
page 214, beginning with the words Concevons encore.
885. The next two problems are on the Duration of Play; in
the first case the capitals being equal, and in the second case
unequal; see Art. 8G3. The solutions are carried further than in
the former memoir, but they are still much inferior to those
which were subsequently given in the TIieor{e...des Proh.
886. The next problem is an extension of the problem of
Duration of Play with equal capitals.
It is supposed that at every game there is the chance ^? for
A, the chance q for J3, and the chance r that neither wins; each
player has m crowns originally, and the loser in any game gives
a crown to the winner : required the probability that the play
will be finished in x games. This problem is not reproduced in
the Theorie...des Proh.
LAPLACE. 475
887. The present memoir may be regarded as a collection of
examples in the theory of Finite Differences ; the methods ex-
emplified have however since been superseded by that of Gene-
rating Functions, which again may be considered to have now
given w^ay to the Calculus of Operations. The problems involve
only questions in direct probability ; none of them involve what
are called questions in inverse probability, that is, questions
respecting the probability of causes as deduced from observed
events.
888. In the same volume as the memoir we have just ana-
lysed there is a memoir by Laplace entitled, Menioire sur Tincli'
naison moyenne des orbites des cometes ; sur la figure de la Terre,
et sur les Fonctions. The part of the memoir devoted to the mean
inclination of the orbits of comets occupies pages 503 — 524 of the
volume.
In these pages Laplace discusses the problem which was started
by Daniel Bernoulli ; see Art. 395. Laplace's result agrees wdth
that which he afterwards obtained in the Theorie...des Proh.
pages 253 — 260, but the method is quite different ; both methods
are extremely laborious.
Laplace gives a numerical example ; he finds that supposing
12 comets or planets the chance is "339 that the mean inclination
of the planes of the orbits to a fixed plane will lie betw^een
45° — 7^" and 45", and of course the chance is the same that the
mean inclination wiJl lie between 45"^ and 45^ + 7^°.
889. The volume with which w^e have been eno^aofed in Arti-
cles 881 — 888 is remarkable in connexion with Physical Astronomy.
Historians of this subject usually record its triumphs, but omit its
temporary failures. In the present volume Lagrange affects to
shew that the secular acceleration of the Moon's motion cannot be
explained by the ordinary theory of gravitation ; and Laplace
affects to shew that the inequalities in the motions of Jupiter and
Saturn cannot be attributed to the mutual action of these planets :
see pages 47, 213 of the volume. Laplace lived to correct both his'
rival's error and his own, by two of his greatest contributions to
Physical Astronomy.
476 LAPLACE.
890. Laplace's next memoir on our subject is entitled Me-
vioire sur les Prohahilites ; it is contained in the volume for 1778
of the Histoire de l Acad.... Paris: the date of publication of the
volume is 1781. The memoir occupies pages 227 — 382.
In the notice of the memoir which is given in the introductory
part of the volume the names of Bayes and Price are mentioned.
Laplace does not allude to them in the memoir. See Art. 540.
891. Laplace begins with remarks, similar to those which we
have already noticed, respecting the chances connected with the
tossing of a coin which is not quite symmetrical; see Arts. 877, 881.
He solves the simple problem of Duration of Play in the way we
have given in Art. 107. Thus let p denote A's skill, and 1 —p de-
note ^'s skill. Suppose A to start with m stakes, and B to start
with n — m stakes : then ^'s chance of winning all ^'s stakes is
P^-ii-pY '
1 1
Laplace puts for p in succession - (1 + a) and « (1 ~ ^)> ^^^
takes half the sum. Thus he obtains for ^'s chance
|{(l + a)"-+(l-a)"-"j{(l+ar-(l-ar}
(1 + ay - (1 - a)" '
which he transforms into
1 ln_a=)™ (! + «)""'"'- (!-«)"
-2m
2 2^ ^ (l+a)"-(l-a)''
oil
The expression for ^'s chance becomes — when a vanishes ;
Laplace proposes to shew that the expression increases as a in-
creases, if 2m be less than ??. The factor (1 — a^)"" obviously dimin-
ishes as a increases. Laplace says that if 2m is less than n it is
clear that the fraction
(I + ay -{I -ay
LAPLACE. 477
also diminishes as a increases. We will demonstrate tliis.
Put r for w — 2m, and denote the fraction by u ; then
idu^ (1 + cr' + (1 - ay (1 + ay-' + (1 - cy-'
uda '' {l+OLy-{l-ay ^ (l + a)"-(l-a)" *
Thus
where 2; = :j . We have to shew that this expression is nega-
tive : this we shall do by shewino^ that -~. — :i — "^ increases as
successive integral values are ascribed to r. We have
(r + 1) (3^+1) r{z'-'+l)
z'^' - 1 z'-\
_ (r + 1) (/' -l)-r (z^' - 1) (z^-' + 1) ^
{z""^' - 1) {z' - 1) '
thus we must shew that z^"" — 1 is greater than r {z'^^^ — z""^).
Expand by the exponential theorem ; then we find we have to
shew that
{2ry is gi-eater than r | (r + 1)^ - (r - 1)^ I ,
where ^ is any positive integer ; that is, we must shew that
2i>-i ,J'-i is greater than ^r"'' 4- i^ (/^ ~ ^H/> - ^) ^,^-3 _^ ^^^
But this is obvious, for r is supposed greater than unity, and
the two members would be equal if all the exponents of r on the
right hand side of the inequality were^ — 1.
We observe that r must be supposed not less than 2 ; if r = 1
we have s'^'" — 1 = 7- (s*^^ — s*^^).
We have assumed that r and n are integers, and this limitation
is necessary. For return to the expression
(1 + a)' - (1 - a)'
(1 + a)" -{\-a)
n J
478 LAPLACE.
and put for a in succession and 1 ; then we have to compare - with
71
2 . v . n , X
^ ; that is, we have to compare t- with — . Now consider — ; the
differential coefficient with respect to x is ^^ — ; so that -^
increases as x changes from to , — - , and then diminishes.
* log 2 '
Laplace treats the same question in the Theorie...des Proh.
page 406 ; there also the difficulty is dismissed with the words il
est facile de voir. In the memoir prefixed to the fourth volume of
Bowditch's Translation of the Mecanique Celeste, page 62, we read :
Dr Bowditch himself was accustomed to remark, " Whenever I meet
in La Place with the words ' Thus it plainly appears' I am sure that
hours, and perhaps days of hard study will alone enable me to discover
how it plainly appears."
892. The pages 240 — 258 of the memoir contain the im-
portant but difficult investigation which is reproduced in the
Theorie...des Proh. pages 262 — 272. Laplace gives in the memoir
a reference to those investigations by Lagrange which we have
noticed in Art. 570 ; the reference however is omitted in the
Theorie...des Proh.
893. Laplace now proceeds to the subject which he had con-
sidered in a former memoir, namely, the probability of causes as
deduced from events; see Art. 868. Laplace repeats the general
principle which he had already enunciated in his former memoir;
see Art. 869. He then takes the problem which we have noticed
in Art. 870, enunciating it however with respect to the births of
boys and girls, instead of the drawings of white and black balls.
See Art. 770.
894. Laplace is now led to consider the approximate evalu-
ation of definite integrals, and he gives the method which is repro-
duced almost identically in pages 88 — 90 of the Theorie.,.des Proh.
He applies it to the example x^(l—xydx, and thus demon-
strates the theorem he had already given ; see Art. 871 : the pre-
sent demonstration is much superior to the former.
LAPLACE. 479
895. There is one proposition given here which is not repro-
duced in the Theorie...des Proh., but which is worthy of notice.
Suppose we require the value of \ydx where y = x^ {\ — oc-y,
the integral being taken between assigned limits.
Put 2^— ^ ^^^ 2' ~ ' ^^^^ ^^^
a "a
1 r7x
Then, by integrating by parts,
lydx= \uzdy = c,?/^ — a lydz (1),
f 7 f dz y dz [ d [ dz\ ,
so that
/y^x = «^.-a>|+./j;yi (.J)^.. (2).
Now y vanishes with x. Laplace shews that the value of
\ydx when the lower limit is zero and the upper limit is any
value of X less than , is less than cyz and is fjreater than
1 + /A ^ *
dz
ayz — o?yz — -; so that we can test the closeness of the approxi-
mation. This proposition depends on the following considera-
dz . . . 1
tions : -^ is positive so long as x is less than , and there-
fore \ydx is less than c.yz by (1); and — [^ -f) is also jDositive,
r dz
so that \ydx is greater than o.yz — (^yz -^ by (2). For we have
a? (1 — cr)
z =
l-(l+yu)a;'
and this can be put in the form
480 LAPLACE.
Lb X Lb
^ = -7^-^.+ . -7-- +
dz
Hence we see that z and -^ both increase with x so long
as X is less than : this establishes the required proposition.
See also Art. 767.
896. Laplace then takes the following problem. In 26 years
it was observed in Paris that 251527 boys were born and 241945
girls : required the probability that the j^ossibility of the birth
of a boy is greater than -^ . The probability is found to differ
from unity by less than a fraction having for its numerator 1*1521
and for its denominator the seventh power of a million.
This problem is reproduced in the Theorie...des Pi^oh. pages
877 — 380, the data being the numbers of births during 40 years
instead of during 26 years.
897. Taking the same data as in the preceding Article, La-
place investigates the probability that in a given year the number
of boys born shall not exceed the number of girls born. He
1
finds the probability to be a little less .than ^—^ . The
result of a similar calculation from data furnished by observations
in London is a little less than t^^tzti . In pa<?es 397 — 401 of the
12410 ^ °
Theorie...des Prob. we have a more difficult problem, namely to
find the probability that during a century the annual births of
boys shall never be less than that of girls. The treatment of
the simpler problem in the memoir differs from that of the
more difficult problem in the Theorie...des Froh. In the memoir
Laplace obtains an equation in Finite Differences
hence he deduces
%m= constant -f ?/,„.^,„_, |l - A^^,„_2 + A {z,,,_^i^z^,,_^
LAPLACE. 481
which as he says is analogous to the corresponding theorem in
the Integral Calculus given in Art. 895 ; and, as in that Article, he
shews that in the problem he is discussing the exact result lies
between two approximate results. See also Art. 770.
898. The memoir contains on page 287 a brief indication of a
problem which is elaborately treated in pages 369 — 376 of the
TJi eo rie . . . cles P) 'ob.
899. Laplace now developes another form of his method of
approximation to the value of definite integrals. Suppose we
require lydx; let Y be the maximum value of ?/ within the
range of the integration. Assume ?/ = Ye~^\ and thus change
li/dx into an integi'al with respect to t. The investigation is
reproduced in the Theor{e...des Frob. pages 101 — 103.
n 00
Laplace determines the value of / e~^'dt. He does this by
taking the double integral / e'^^^-^^'^dsdu, and equating the
results which are obtained by considering the integrations in
different orders.
900. Laplace also considers the case in which instead of as-
suming y = Fe"*^^, we may assume y = Ye~^. Something similar is
given in the TJieorie...des Proh. pages 93 — 95.
Some formulae occur in the memoir which are not reproduced
in the Theorie...des Proh., and which are quite wrong: we will
point out the error. Laplace says on pages 298, 299 of the
memoir :
, , , , . -iff d.c dz
Considerons presentement la double integrale 1 1 ■- —3, prise
;y (1 -z -x^'Y
depuis a: = jusqu'a £c = l, et depiiis z = ^ jusqu'a ^=1; en faisant
X , „ , , . [ dz [ dx
,=x, elle se cnano;era dans ce.le-ci /-— / — , ces
(l-z')^ Jj{l-z')J{l-x")i
integrales etant prises depuis x' -0 et ;^ - 0, ju^-qu'a x' —1 et z=l,
31
482 LAPLACE.
Then, as ,,., "" .,, = ^ , Laplace infers that
r r dxch _'TT f' dx
Bat this is wrono^ ; for the limits of x are and 7 , and
° (1 - £y
not and 1, as Laplace says ; and so the process fails.
Laplace makes the same mistake again immediately after-
wards ; he puts -jj^ -^ — z\ and thus deduces
I
dxdz [^ dx [^ dz
J„ (1 _ ^^ _ ^^)i J, (1 _ x^)k!, (1 _ ^-)t •
But the upper limit for z should be -j-Fx — ~T\ > ^^^ ^^^ ^ ^^
'Y ( X X j
Laplace assumes ; and so the process fails.
901. -Laplace applies his method to evaluate approximately
I a?^ (1 — xY dx ; and he finds an opportunity for demonstrating
•J
Stirling's Theorem. See Art. 333.
902. Laplace discusses in pages 304 — 313 of the memoir the
following problem. Observation shews that the ratio of the num-
ber of births of boys to that of girls is sensibly greater at London
than at Paris ; this seems to indicate a greater facility for the birth
of a boy at London than at Paris : required to determine the
amount of probability. See Art. 773.
Let w be the probability of the birth of a boy at Paris, p the
number of births of boys observed there, and q the number of births
of girls ; let z^ — ic be the possibility of the birth of a boy at Lon-
don, p the number of births of boys observed there, and q the
number of births of girls. If P denote the probability that the
birth of a boy is less possible at London than at Paris, we have
{U (1 _ uy {u - xY (1-U + xY du dx
P =
\ie (1 - uY {u - xY (1 - M + xY die dx
LAPLACE. 483
Laplace says that the integral in the numerator is to be taken
from ic = to u = x, and from a? = to ic = 1, and that the integral
in the denominator is to be taken for all possible values of x and ii.
Thus putting u — x = s the denominator becomes
[ [ u'' (1 - u)' s^' (1 - sY du ds.
•J {^ ■J Q
Laplace's statement of the limits for the numerator is wrong ;
we should integrate for x from to u, and then for u from to 1.
There is also another mistake. Laplace has the equation
V_ £_ ,JP_ l__ = n
X l-X'^X-x l-X-^x
He finds correctly that when a? = this gives
X =
jy+p
He says that when jr = 1 it gives X = l, which is wrong.
Laplace however really uses the right limits of integration in
his work. His solution is very obscure ; it is put in a much clearer
form in a subsequent memoir which we shall presently notice ; see
Art. 909. He uses the following values,
p = 251527, q = 24.1945,
;/= 737629, ^' = 698958,
and he obtains in the present memoir
410458 '
he obtains in the subsequent memoir
1
P =
410178*
The problem is also solved in the Theorie . . . des Proh. pages
381 — 384 ; the method there is different and free from the mis-
takes which occur in the memoir. Laplace there uses values of p
and q derived from longer observations, namely
. ^ = 393386, ^=377555;
31—2
484 LAPLACE.
he retains the same vakies oip and q as before, and he obtains
1
P =
328269 •
It will be seen that the new values of p and q make - a little
larger than the old values ; hence it is natural that P should be
increased.
903. Laplace gives in the memoir some important investiga-
tions on the probability of future events as deduced from ob-
served events; these are reproduced in the Theorie . . . des Proh.
pages 394—396.
904. Laplace devotes the last ten pages of his memoir to
the theory of errors ; he says that after his memoir in the sixth
volume of the Memoires...par divers Savans the subject had been
considered by Lagrange, Daniel Bernoulli and Euler. Since, how-
ever, their principles differed from his own he is induced to resume
the investigation, and to present his results in such a manner as to
leave no doubt of their exactness. Accordingly he gives, with
some extension, the same theory as before ; see Art. 874. The
theory does not seem, however, to have any great value.
905. The present memoir deserves to be regarded as very im-
portant in the history of the subject. The method of approxima-
tion to the values of definite integrals, which is here expounded,
must be esteemed a great contribution to mathematics in general
and to our special department in particular. The applications
made to the problems respecting births shew the power of the
method and its peculiar value in the- theory of probability.
906. Laplace's next memoir on our subject is entitled Memoir e
sur les Suites; it is published in the volume for 1779 of the
Histoire de l' A cad... Paris; the date of publication is 1782. The
memoir occupies pages 207 — 809 of the volume.
This memoir contains the theory of Generating Functions.
With the exception of pages 269 — 286 the whole memoir is
reproduced almost identically in the T}ieorie..,des Proh.; it forms
pages 9 — 80 of the work. The pages which are not reproduced
LAPLACE. 4S5
relate to tlie solution of partial differential equations of the
second order, and have no connexion with our subject.
The formulae which occur at the top of pages 18 and 19 of
the Theorie...des Proh. are stated in the memoir to agree with
those which had been given in Newton's Methodus differentialis ;
this reference is omitted in the TJieorie...des Proh.
907. Laplace's next memoir on our subject is entitled ^itr les
approximations des Formides qui sont fonctions de tres-grands nom-
hres; it is published in the volume for 1782 of the Histoire de
V Acad... Paris: the date of publication is 1785. The memoir
occupies pages 1 — 88 of the volume.
Laplace refers at the commencement to the evaluation of
the middle coefficient of a binomial raised to a high power by
the aid of Stirling's Theorem ; Laplace considers this to be one
of the most ingenious discoveries which had been made in the
theory of Series. His object in the memoir is to effect similar
transformations for other functions involving large numbers, in
order that it might be practicable to calculate the numerical
values of such functions.
The memoir is reproduced without any important change
in the T]ieorie...des Proh., in which it occupies pages 88 — 171-.
See Arts. 89-i, 899.
A mistake occurs at the beginning of page 29 of the memoir,
and extends its influence to the end of page 30. Suppose that a
function of two independent variables, 6 and 6', is to be exjDanded
in powers of these variables: we may denote the terms of the
second degree by Md^ + 2N96'+ P6"^ : Laplace's mistake amounts
to omitting the term 2X66'. The mistake does not occur in the
corresponding passage on page 108 of the Tlieorie...des Proh.
908. Laplace's next memoii* is the continuation of the pre-
ceding; it is entitled, Suite du Memoire sur les approximations
des Formides qui sont fonctions de tres-grands Komhres; it is pub-
lished in the volume for 1783 of the Histoire de V Acad... Paris:
the date of publication is 1786. The memoir occupies pages
423 — 467 of the volume.
909. Laplace gives here some matter which is reproduced in
the Theorie.., des Proh. pages 363—365, 394—396. Pages 440—444
486 LAPLACE.
of the memoir are not reproduced in the Theorie , . .des Proh.;
they depend partly on those pages of the memoir of 1782 which
are erroneous, as we saw in Art. 907.
Laplace in this memoir applies his formulae of approxima-
tion to the solution of questions in probability. See Arts. 767, 769.
He takes the problem which we have noticed in Art. 896, and
arrives at a result practically coincident with the former. He takes
the problem which we have noticed in Art. 902, gives a much
better investigation, and arrives at a result practically coincident
with the former. He solves the problem about the births during a
century to which we have referred in Art. 897, using the smaller
values of j9 and q which we have given in Art. 902; he finds
the required probability to be "664. In the Theorie...des Proh.
page 401 he uses the larger values of j) and q which we have
given in Art. 902, and obtains for the required probability "782.
910. This memoir also contains a calculation respecting a
lottery which is reproduced in the Theo7'ie...des Proh. page 195.
See Arts. 455, 864.
Laplace suggests on page 433 of the memoir that it would
be useful to form a table of the value of \e~^'dt for successive
limits of the integration : such a table we now possess.
911. In the same volume there is another memoir by La-
place which is entitled, Sur les naissances, les mcwiages et les
marts d Paris.... This memoir occupies pages 693 — 702 of the
volume.
The following problem is solved. Suppose we know for a
large country like France the number of births in a year ; and
suppose that for a certain district we know both the population
and the number of births. If we assume that the ratio of the
population to the number of births in a year is the same for the
whole country as it is for the district, we can determine the popu-
lation of the whole country. Laplace investigates the probability
that the error in the result will not exceed an assiofned amount.
He concludes from his result that the district ouo'ht to contain
not less than a million of people in order to obtain a sufficient
accuracy in the number of the population of France.
LAPLACE. 487
The problem is reproduced in tlie Theorie...des Proh. pages
391 — 39-i. The necessary observations were made by the Frencb
government at Laplace's request ; the population of the district
selected was a little more than two millions.
The solutions of the problem in the memoir and in the
Theorie. . .des Proh. are substantially the same.
912. In the Lecons de Mathematiques donnees a Tecole normale,
en 1795, par M. Laplace, we have one le^on devoted to the subject
of probabilities. The legons are given in the Journal de VEcole
Poly technique y vii^ et viii® cahiers, 1812; but we may infer from
page 164 that there had been an earlier publication. The lecon
on probabilities occupies pages 140 — 172. It is a popular state-
ment of some of the results which had been obtained in the
subject, and was expanded by Laplace into the Introduction
which appeared with the second edition of the Theorie.,. des Proh.,
as he himself states at the beginning of the Introduction.
913. With the exception of the unimportant matter noticed
in the preceding Ai'ticle, Laplace seems to have left the Theory
of Probability untouched for more than twenty-five'^years. His
attention was probably fully engaged in embodying his own re-
searches and those of other astronomers in his Mecanique Celeste,
the first four volumes of which appeared between 1798 and 1805.
914. Laplace's next memoir connected with the Theory of
Probability is entitled Memoire sur les approximations des for-
mules qui sont fonctions de tres-grands nomhres, et sur leur ap-
plication aux prohoMlites. This memoir is published in the
Memoires...de VInstitut for 1809; the date of publication is 1810 ;
the memoir occupies pages 353 — 415 of the volume, and a supj^le-
ment occupies pages 559 — oQo.
915. The first subject which is discussed is the problem re-
lating to the inclination of the orbits of the planets and comets
which is given in the Theorie... des Proh. pages 253 — 261; see
also Art. 888. The mode of discussion is nearly the same. [There
is however some difference in the jDrocess relating to i\iQ planets,
for in the memoir Laplace takes two right angles as the extreme
488 LAPLACE.
angle instead of one right angle whicli he takes in the Tlieorle...
des Prob. Laplace's words are, on page 362 of the memoir :
Si Ton fait varier les inclinaisons depuis zero jiisqu'a la demi-cir-
conference, on fait disparoitre la consideration des mouvemens retro-
grades j car le mouvement direct se change ^en retrograde, quand I'incli-
naison surpasse un angle droit.
Laplace obtains in the memoir the same numerical result as on
page 258 of the Theorie...des Proh. ; but in the latter place the
fact of the motions being all in the same direction is expressly
used, while in the former place Laplace implies that this fact still
remains to be considered.
The calculation for the comets, which follows some investiga-
tions noticed in the next Article, does not materially differ from
the corresponding calculation in the Theorie . . .des Proh.; 97 is
taken as the number of comets in the memoir, and 100 in the
Theorie . . . des Proh.
916. Laplace gives an investigation the object of which is
the approximate calculation of a formula which occurs in the
solution of the problem noticed in the preceding Article. The
formula is the series for Zl'^s', so far as the terms consist of
positive quantities raised to the power which i denotes. A large
part of the memoir bears on this subject, which is also treated
very fully in the Theorie... des Proh. pages 165 — 171, 475 — 482.
This memoir contains much that is not reproduced in the
Theorie... des Proh., being in fact superseded by better methods.
We may remark that Laplace gives two methods for finding the
value of I fe~'^^'' cos htdt, but he does not notice the simplest
''
method, which would be to differentiate e-^^^ cos htdt four times
-J
with respect to h, or twice with respect to c ; see pages 368 — 370
of the memoir.
917. In pages 383 — 389 of the memoir we have an important
investigation resembling that given in pages 329 — 332 of the
TJieorie...des Proh., which amounts to finding the probability that
a linear function of a large number of errors shall have a certain
LAPLACE. 489
value, the law of facility of a single error being any what-
ever.
Pages 390 — 397 of the memoir are spent in demonstrat-
ing the formula marked [q] which occurs at the top of page 170
of the Theorie...des Prob. The remaining pages of the memoir
amount to demonstrating the formula marked fp) on page 168 of
the Theor{e...des Proh., which is again discussed in pages 475 — 482
of the Theorie...des Prob. The methods of the memoir are very
laborious and inferior to those of the Th^orie...des Prob.
918. The supplement to the memoir consists of the matter
Avhich is reproduced in pages 333 — 335 and 340 — 342 of the
TJieorie...des Prob. In his supplement Laplace refers to his
memoir of 1778; see Art. 901: the reference is not preserved
in the Theorie...des Prob. He names Daniel Bernoulli, Euler,
and Gauss; in the corresponding passage on page 335 of the
Theorie...des Prob., he simply says, des geomUres celebres.
919. Laplace's next memoir is entitled, Me moire sur les Inte-
grates Definies, et leur ajyj^Ucatiori aux Probabilites, et specialement
a la recherche dii milieu quil faut choisir entre les residtats des
observations. This memoir is published in the Memoires ...de
rinstitut for 1810; the date of publication is 1811 : the memoir
occupies pages 279 — 347 of the volume.
920. Laplace refers to his former memoirs on Generating
Functions and on Approximations ; he speaks of the approaching
publication of his work on Probabilities. In his former memoirs
he had obtained the values of some definite integrals by the
passage from real to imaginary values ; but he implies that such a
method should be considered one of invention rather than of
demonstration. Laplace says that Poisson had demonstrated several
of these results in the Bidletiii de la Societe Philoinatique for March
1811 ; Laplace now proposes to give direct investigations.
921. The first investigation is^that which is reproduced in
pages 482 — 484 of the Theorie...des Prob. Then follow those
which are reproduced in pages 97 — 99 of the Theorie...des Prob.
Next we have the problem of the Duration of Play, when the
490 LAPLACE.
players are of equal skill and one of them has an infinite capital ;
there is an approximate calculation which is reproduced in pages
235—238 of the Theorie...des Proh. Next we have the problem
about balls and the long dissertation on some integrals which we
find reproduced in pages 287 — 298 of the Theorie...des Proh.
Lastly we have the theory of errors substantially coincident with so
much of the same theory as we find in pages 314 — 328 and
340—342 of the Theorie...des Proh.
922. A theorem may be taken from page 327 of the memoir,
which is not reproduced in the Theorie...des Proh.
To shew that if ^|r (x) always decreases as x increases between
and 1 we shall have
I i/r [x) dx greater than S I x'^^jr (a?) dx.
Jo •'o
It is sufficient to shew that
x^ I i/r [x) dx is greater than S j x^yjr (x) dx,
or that 2x I -v^^ (x) dx is greater than 2x^ -^ {x)y
r X
or that I '^ (x) dx is greater than x -v/r (x),
"J
1 , r \ ' , i 1 I / \ d^ (x)
or that Y l*^) ^^ greater than y \F) + ^ — j — ?
but this is obviously true, for ^ is negative.
The result stated on page 321 of the Theorie...des Proh., that
k" . 1 .
under a certain condition -^ is less than - , is an example of this
theorem.
923. In the Connaissance des Terns for 1813, which is dated
July 1811, there is an article by Laplace on pages 213 — 223,
entitled, Du milieu qiiilfaut choisir entre les residtats d'tin grand
nomhre d'ohservations. The article contains the matter which is
reproduced in pages 322 — 329 of the Theorie...des Proh. Laplace
speaks of his work as soon about to appear.
LAPLACE. 491
924. In the Connaissance des Terns for 1815, which is dated
November 1812, there is an article on pages 215 — 221 relating to
Laplace's Theo7ne...des Proh. The article begins with an extract
from the work itself, containing Laplace's account of its object
and contents. After this follow some remarks on what is known
as Laplace's nebular hypothesis respecting the formation of the
solar system. Reference is made to the inference drawn by Michell
from the group of the Pleiades ; see Art. 619.
925. In the Connaissance des Terns for 1816, which is dated
November 1813, there is an article by Laplace, on pages 213 — 220,
entitled, Sur les Cometes.
Out of a hundred comets which had been observed not one had
been ascertained to move in an hyperbola; Laplace proposes to
shew by the Theory of Probability that this result might have
been expected, for the probability is very great that a comet would
move either in an ellipse or parabola or in an hyperbola of so
great a transverse axis that it would be undistinguishable from a
parabola.
The solution of the problem proposed is very difficult, from
the deficiency of verbal explanation. We will indicate the steps.
Laplace supposes that ?• denotes the radius of the sphere of
the sun's activity, so that r represents a very great length, which
may be a hundred thousand times as large as the radius of the
earth's orbit. Let V denote the velocity of the comet at the
instant wdien it enters the sphere of the sun's activity, so that r
is the comet's radius vector at that instant. Let a be the semi-
axis major of the orbit which the comet proceeds to describe, e
its excentricity, D its perihelion distance, ■sr the angle which the
direction of V makes with the radius r. Take the mass of the
sun for the unit of mass, and the mean distance of the sun from
the earth as the unit of distance; then we have the well-known
formulse ;
a r
r V sin OT = Va (1 — e ),
I) = a{l-e).
492 LAPLACE.
From these equations by eliminating a and e we have
sin^ OT =
r
7F
and from this we deduce
Now if we suppose that when the comet enters the sphere of
the sun's activity all directions of motion which tend inwards
are equally probable, we find that the chance that the direction
will make an angle with the radius vector lying between zero
and OT is 1 — cos 'sr. The values of the perihelion distance which
correspond to these limiting directions are and D. Laplace
then proceeds thus;
...en supposant done toutes les valeurs de D egalement possibles, on
a pour la probabilite que la distance peiihelie sera comprise entre zero
et D,
rV
yf'^(-?)--}
II faut multiplier cette valeur par dV ; en I'integrant ensuite dans
des limites determinees, et divisant I'integrale j^ar la plus grande valeur
de V, valeur que nous designerons par U ; on aura la probabihte que la
valeur de V sera comprise dans ces limites. Cela pose, la plus petite
valeur de V est celle qui rend nulle la quantite renfermee sous le radical
precedent ; ce qui donne
J2I)
rV =
A
1.*
r
It would seem that the above extract is neither clear nor
correct ; not clear for the real question is left uncertain ; not
correct in what relates to U. We will proceed in the ordinary way,
and not as Laplace does. Let 'yjr ( V) stand for
rV
.y/fp(l+f)-2Z)};
LAPLACE. 493
then we have found that supposing all directions of projection
equally probable, if a comet starts with the velocity V the chance
is >/r ( F) that its perihelion distance will lie between and D.
Now suppose we assume as a fact that the perihelion distance
does lie between and D, but that we do not know the initial
velocity: required the probability that such initial velocity lies
between assigned limits. This is a question in inverse probability ;
and the answer is that the chance is
dV
ff{V)
fylr{V)dV
where the integral in the numerator is to be taken between the
assigned limits ; and the integral in the denominator between the
extreme admissible values of V.
Laplace finds the value of l'^{V)dV; for this pmpose he
assumes
For the assigned limits of V he takes ^ and —
The value of \^|r{V)dV between these limits he finds to be ap-
proximately
2r ir sjr '
the other terms involve higher powers of r in the denominator,
and so are neglected.
The above expression is the numerator of the chance which
we require. For the denominator we may suppose that the upper
limit of the velocity is infinite, so that i will now be infinite.
Hence we have for the required chance
■{ it -2) si IB _ ^ \ ^ (tt - 2) V27>
2r ir^/r) ' 2r '
494 LAPLACE,
that is,
i (tt — 2)\lr'
If for example we supposed ^' = 2, we should have the extreme
velocity which would allow the orbit to be an ellipse.
1 2
In the equation - = -— V^ suppose a = — 100 ; then
^^, r + 200 ,, .., r + 200
^=T()or' '^'''' ^=-100--
If we use this value of i we obtain the chance that the orbit
shall be either an ellipse or a parabola or an hyperbola with
transverse axis greater than a hundred times the radius of the
earth's orbit. The chance that the orbit is an hyperbola with a
smaller transverse axis will be
V2^
i (tt — 2) ^r '
Laplace obtains this result by his process.
Laplace supposes D = 2, r = 100000 ; and the value of i to be
that just given: he finds the chance to be about v^^tt •
Laplace then says that his analysis supposes that all values of
I) between and 2 are equally probable for such comets as can
be perceived; but observation shews that the comets for which
the perihelion distance is greater than 1 are far less numerous
than those for which it lies between and 1. He proceeds to
consider how this will modify his result.
926. In the Connaissance des Terns for 1818, which is dated
1815, there are two articles by Laplace on pages 361 — 381 ; the
first is entitled, Sur VajypUcation du Calcid des Prohabilites a la
Pkilosophie naturelle; the second is entitled, Sur le Calcul des
Prohabilites, applique a la Philosophie naturelle. The matter is
reproduced in the first Supplement to the Theorie...des Proh.
pages 1 — 25, except two pages, namely, 376, 377: these contain
an application of the formulge of probability to determine from
observations the length of a seconds' pendulum.
LAPLACE. 495
927. In the Connaissance des Terns for 1820, which is dated
1818, there is an article by Laplace on pages 422 — 440, entitled,
Ajyplication dii Calcul des ProhahiUtes, aux ojje rations geodesiqiies:
it is reproduced in the second Supplement to the Theorie...des
Proh. pages 1 — 25.
928. In the Connaissance des Terns for 1822, which is dated
1820, there is an article by Laplace on pages 346 — 348, entitled,
Application dii Calcul des ProhahiUtes aux operations geodesiqnes
de la meridienne de France: it is reproduced in the third Supple-
ment to the Theorie . . ,des Proh. pages 1 — 7.
929. We have now to speak of the great work of Laplace which
is entitled, Theorie analytique des ProhahiUtes, This was published
in 1812, in quarto. There is a dedication to Napoleon-le-Grand ;
then follow 445 pages of text, and afterwards a table of contents
which occupies pages 446 — 464 : on another page a few errata
are noticed.
The second edition is dated 1814, and the third edition is
dated 1820.
The second edition contains an introduction of cvi. pages ; then
the text paged from 3 to 484 inclusive ; then a table of contents
which occujiies pages 485 — 506 : then two pages of errata are
given.
The pages 9 — 444 of the first edition luere not reprinted for
the second or third edition ; a few pages Avere cancelled and re-
placed, apparently on account of errata.
The third edition has an introduction of CXLII. pages ; and
then the remainder as in the second edition. There are, however;,
four supplements to the work which appeared subsequently to the
first edition. The exact dates of issue of these supplements do not
seem to be given ; but the first and second supplements were
probably published between 1812 and 1820, the third in 1820,
and the fourth after 1820. Copies of the third edition generally
have the first three supplements, but not the fourth.
930. Since the bulk of the text of Laplace's work ivas not
reprinted for the editions which appeared during his life time.
496 LAPLACE.
a reference to the page of the work will in general suffice for
any of these editions : accordingly we shall adopt this mode of
reference.
An edition of the works of Laplace was published in France
at the national expense. The seventh volume consists of the
Theorie...des Proh.; it is dated 1847. This volume is a reprint of
the third edition. The title, advertisement, introduction, and
table of contents occupy cxcv. pages ; the text occupies 532
pages, and the four supplements occupy pages 533 — 691.
It will be found that in the text a page n of the editions pub-
lished by Laplace himself will correspond nearly to the page ^ + tt;
of the national edition : thus our references will be easily available
for the national edition. We do not think that the national
edition is so good as it ought to have been ; we found, for example,
that in the second supplement the misprints of the original were
generally reproduced.
931. We shall now proceed to analyse the work. We take the
third edition, and we shall notice the places in which the introduc-
tion differs from the introduction to the second edition.
The dedication was not continued after the first edition, so that
it may be interesting to reproduce it here.
A Napoleon-le-Grand. Sire, La bienveillance avec laquelle Yotre
Majeste a daigne accueillir rhommage de mon Traite de Mecanique
Celeste, m'a inspire le desir de Lui dedier cet Ouvrage sur le Calcul des
Prohabilites. Ce calcul delicat s'etend anx questions les plus impor-
taiites de la vie, qui ne sout en effet, pour la plupart, que des j^roblemes
de probabilite. 11 doit, sous ce rapport, interesser Yotre Majeste dont
le genie sait si bien apprecier et si dignement encourager tout ce qui
peut contribuer au progres des lumieres, et de la prosperite publique.
J'ose La supplier d'agreer ce nouvel hommage dicte par la plus vive
reconnaissance, et par les sentimens profonds d'adiniration et de respect,
avec lesquels je suis, Sire, de Votre Majeste, Le tres-liumble et tres-
obeissant serviteur et fidele sujet, Laplace.
Laplace has been censured for suppressing this dedication after
the fall of Napoleon ; I do not concur in this censure. The dedi-
cation appears to me to be mere adulation ; and it would have
LAPLACE. 497
been almost a satire to have repeated it when the tyrant of Europe
had become the mock sovereign of Elba or the exile of St Helena :
the fault was in the original publication, and not in the final sup-
pression.
932. We have said that some pages of the original impression
were cancelled, and others substituted ; the following are the pages :
25, 26, 27, 28, 37, 38, 147, 148, 303, 304, 359, 360, 391, 392; we
note them because a student of the first edition will find some
embarrassing errata in them.
933. The introduction to the Theorie...des Proh. was pub-
lished separately in octavo under the title of Essai pkilosophique
sur les Prohahilites; we shall however refer to the introduction
by the pages of the third edition of the Theorie...des P7'ob.
934. On pages I — xvi. of the introduction we have some gene-
ral remarks on Probability, and a statement of the first principles
of the mathematical theory ; the language is simple and the
illustrations are clear, but there is hardly enough space allotted to
the subject to constitute a good elementary exposition for be-
ginners.
935. On pages xvi — xxxvii. we have a section entitled Des
mModes analytiques dii Calcul des Probahilites ; it is principally
devoted to an account of the Theory of Generating Functions, the
account being given in words with a very sparing use of symbols.
This section may be regarded as a complete waste of space ; it
would not be intelligible to a reader unless he were able to master
the mathematical theory delivered in its appropriate symbolical
language, and in that case the section would be entirely super-
fluous.
This section differs in the two editions ; Laplace probably
thought he improved in his treatment of the difficult task he had
undertaken, namely to explain abstruse mathematical processes in
ordinary language. We will notice two of the changes. Laplace
gives on pages xxiiL and xxiv. some account of De Moivre's
treatment of Recurring Series; this account is transferred fi'om page
CI. of the second edition of the introduction : a student however
32
498 LAPLACE.
who wished to understand the treatment would have to consult
the original work, namely De Moivre's Miscellanea Analytical
pages 28 — 83. Also some slight historical reference to Wallis and
others is introduced on pages xxxv— xxxvn. ; this is merely an
abridgement of the pages 3 — 8 of the Theorie . . .des Proh.
936. We have next some brief remarks on games, and then
some reference to the unknown inequalities which may exist in
chances supposed to be equal, such as would arise from a want of
symmetry in a coin or die ; see Arts. 877, 881, 891.
937. We have next a section on the laws of probability, which
result from an indefinite multiplication of events ; that is the
section is devoted to the consideration of James Bernoulli's theorem
and its consequences. Some reflexions here seem aimed at the
fallen emperor to whom the first edition of the work was dedicated ;
we give two sentences from page XLiii.
Voyez au contraire, dans quel abime de mallieurs, les peuples ont
ete souvent precipites par I'ambition et par la perfidie de leurs chefs.
Toutes les fois qu'une grande puissance enivree de I'amonr des conquetes,
aspire h la dominatiou universelle; le sentiment de I'mdependance pro-
duit entre les nations menacees, une coalition dont elle devient presque
toiijours la victinie.
The section under consideration occurs in the second edition,
but it occupies a different position there, Laplace having made
some changes in the arrangement of the matter in the third
edition.
We may notice at the end of this section an example of the
absurdity of attempting to force mathematical expressions into
unmathematical language. Laplace gives a description of a certain
probability in these words :
La theorie des fonctions generatrices donne une expression tres
simple de cette probabilite, que Ton obtient en integrant le produit de
la differentielle de la quantite dont le resultat deduit d'un grand nombre
d' observations s'ecarte de la verite, par une coustante moindre que
I'unite, dependante de la nature du probleriie, et elevee a une puissance
dont I'exposant est le rapport du carre de cet ccart, au nombre des
observations. L'integrale prise entre des limites donnces, et divisee
LAPLACE. 499
par la meme integrale etendue a rinfini positif et negatif, exprimera la
probabilite que I'ecart de la veiite, est compris entre ces limites.
A student familiar with the Theorie...des Proh. itself might
not find it easy to say what formula Lajolace has in view ; it must
be that which is given on page 309 and elsewhere, namely
dre 4A".
7 "
/J TT
Other examples of the same absurdity will be found on page LL
of the introduction, and on page 5 of the first supplement.
938. A section occupies pages XLix — LXX. entitled Applica'
tion du Calcul des Probahilites, d la Pliilosophie naturelle. Tbe
principle which is here brought forward is simple ; we will take
one example which is discussed in the Theorie . . .des Prob. If a
large number of observations be taken of the height of a barometer
at nine in the morning and at four in the afternoon, it is found
that the average in the former case is higher than in the latter ;
are we to ascribe this to chance or to a constant cause ? The
theory of probabilities shews that if the number of observations be
large enough the existence of a constant cause is very strongly in-
dicated. Laplace intimates that in this way he had been induced
to undertake some of his researches in Physical Astronomy, be-
cause the theory of probabilities shewed irresistibly that there
were constant causes in operation.
Thus the section contains in reality a short summary of La-
place's contributions to Physical Astronomy ; and it is a memor-
able record of the triumphs of mathematical science and human
genius. The list comprises — the explanation of the irregularity
in the motion of the moon arising from the sj)heroidal figure of the
earth — the secular equation of the moon — the long inequalities of
Jupiter and Saturn — the laws connecting the motions of the
satellites of Jupiter — the theory of the tides. See Gouraud,
page 115 ; he adds to the list — the tem23erature of the earth shewn
'to be constant for two thousand years : it does not appear that
Laplace himself here notices this result.
939. Li the second edition of the Theorie ...des Proh.
32—2
500 LAPLACE.
Laplace did not include the secular acceleration of the moon and
the theory of the tides in the list of his labours suggested by the
Theory of Probability. Also pages Li— LVL of the introduction
seem to have been introduced into the third edition, and taken
from the first supplement.
Laplace does not give references in his Theorie...des Proh., so
we cannot say whether he published all the calculations respecting
probability which he intimates that he made; they would how-
ever, we may presume, be of the same kind as that relating to
the barometer which is given in page 350 of the Theorie...desFroh.,
and so would involve no novelty of principle.
Laplace alludes on page Liv. to some calculations relating to
the masses of Jupiter and Saturn; the calculations are given in
the first supplement. Laplace arrived at the result that it was
1000000 to 1 that the error in the estimation of the mass of
Jupiter could not exceed — of the whole mass. Nevertheless it
1
has since been recognised that the error was as large as — ; see
Poisson, Recherches sur la Proh..., page 816.
9-iO. Laplace devotes a page to the Application dii Calcul
des Prohabilites aux Sciences morales; he makes here some inter-
esting remarks on the opposing tendencies to change and to con-
servatism.
9-tl. The next section is entitled, De la Prohahilite des
temoignages; this section occupies pages Lxxi — Lxxxii : it is an
arithmetical reproduction of some of the algebraical investigations
of Chapter XL of the Theorie...des Proh. One of Laplace's discus-
sions has been criticised by John Stuart Mill in his Logic; see
Vol. 11. page 172 of the fifth edition. The subject is that to which
we have alluded in Art. 735. Laplace makes some observations
on miracles, and notices with disapprobation the language of
Racine, Pascal and Locke. He examines with some detail a
famous argument by Pascal which he introduces thus :
Ici se presente naturellement la discussion d'un argument fameux
de Pascal, que Craig, mathematicieii anglais, a reproduit sous une forme
LAPLACE. 501
geomtStriqiie. Des t^moiiis attestent qu'ils tieunent de la Divinite meme,
qu'en se conformant k telle chose, on jouira, non pas d'une ou de deux,
mais d'une infinite de vies heureuses. Quelque faible que soit la proba-
bilite des temoignages, pourvu quelle ne soit pas infiniment petite; 11
est clair que I'avantage de ceux qui se conforment a la chose prescrite,
est infini, puisqu'il est le produit de cette probabilite par un bien
infiDi; on ne doit done point balancer a se procurer cet avantage.
See also the Athenceum for Jan. 14tli, 1865, page oo.
942. The next section is entitled, Des clioix et des decisions
des assemhUes; it occupies four pages: results are stated re-
specting voting on subjects and for candidates which are obtained
at the end of Chapter ii. of the Theorie...des Proh.
The next section is entitled, De la probabilite des Jugemens
des tiibunaux; it occupies five pages: results are stated which
are obtained in the first supplement to the Theo7'ie...des Prob.
This section is nearly all new in the third edition of the
Theorie. . . des Prob.
The next section is entitled, Des Tables de mortalite, et des
durees moyennes de la vie, des mariages et des associations quel-
conques; it occupies six pages : results are stated which are ob-
tained in Chapter VIIL of the Theorie... des Prob.
The next section is entitled, Des benefices des etablissemens qui
dependent de la probabilite des evenemens; it occupies five pages.
This section relates to insurances : results are given which are ob-
tained in Chapter ix. of the Theorie... des Prob.
943. The next section is entitled, Des illusions dans Vesti-
mation des Probabilites ; this important section occupies pages
cii — cxxviii: in the second edition of the Theorie... des Prob. the
corresponding section occupied little more than seven pages.
The illusions which Laplace notices are of various kinds. One
of the principal amounts to imagining that past events influence
future events when they are really unconnected. This is illus-
trated from the example of lotteries, and by some remarks on
page CIV. relating to the birth of a son, which are new in the
third edition. Another illusion is the notion of a kind of fatality
which gamblers often adopt.
Laplace considers that one of the great advantages of the
502 LAPLACE.
theory of probabilities is that it teaches us to mistrust our first
impressions; this is ilkistratecl by the example which we have
noticed in Art. 85G, and by the case of the Chevaher de Mere:
see Art. 10. Laplace makes on his page cviii. some remarks re-
specting the excess of the births of boys over the births of girls;
these remarks are new in the third edition.
Laplace places in the list of illusions an application of the
Theory of Probability to the summation of series, which was
made by Leibnitz and Daniel BernoulK. They estimated the
infinite series
1-1+1-1 + .. .
as equal to ^ ; because if we take an even number of terms we
Jit
obtain 0, and if we take an odd number of terms we obtain 1,
and they assumed it to be equally probable that an infinite
number of terms is odd or even. See Dugald Stewarfs Works
edited hy Hamilton, Vol. IV. page 204.
Laplace makes some remarks on the apparent verification
which occasionally happens of predictions or of dreams; and justly
remarks that persons who attach importance to such coincidences
generally lose sight of the number of cases in which such antici-
pations of the future are falsified by the event. He says,
Ainsi, le pliilosophe de Tantiqiiite, auqiiel on montrait dans un
temple, pour exalter la puissance du dieu qu'on y adorait, les ex voto
de tons cenx qui apres I'avoir invoqiie, s'etaient sauves du naufi^age, fit
une remarque conforme au calcul des prohabilites, en observant qu'il
ne voyait point inscrits, les noms de ceux qui, malgre cette invocation,
avaient peri.
944. A long discussion on what Laplace calls Psycliologie
occupies pages cxiii — cxxviii of the present section. There is
much about the sensorium, and from the close of the discussion it
would appear that Laplace fancied all mental phenomena ought
to be explained by applying the laws of Dynamics to the vibra-
tions of the sensorium. Indeed we are told on page cxxiv. that
faith is a modification of the sensorium, and an extract from
Pascal is used in a manner that its author would scarcely have
approved.
LAPLACE. 503
94^5. The next section is entitled, Des divers moi/ens d'ap-
l^rocher de la certitude; it occupies six pages. Laplace says,
L'inductioii, Tanalogie, des hypotheses fondees siir les faits et recti-
fiees sans cesse par de nouvelles observations, un tact heureux donne
par la nature et fortifie par des comparaisons nonibreuses de ses indi-
cations avec I'experience; tels sont les priucipaux moyens de parvenir
a la verite.
A paragraph beginning on page cxxix. with the words Kous
jugeons is new in the third edition, and so are the last four lines
of page cxxxii. Laplace cites Bacon as having made a strange
abuse of induction to demonstrate the immobility of the earth.
Laplace says of Bacon,
II a donne pour la recherche de la verite, le precepte et non I'ex-
emple. Mais en insistant avec toute la force de la raison et de I'elo-
quence, sur la necessite d'abandonner les subtilites insignifiantes de
I'ecole, pour se livrer aux observations et aux experiences, et en indi-
quant la vraie niethode de s'elever aux causes general es des phenomenes;
ce grand philosophe a contribue aux progres immenses que I'esprit
humain a faits dans le beau siecle ou il a terniine sa carriere.
Some of Laplace's remarks on Analogy are quoted with ap-
probation by Dugald Stewart; see his Works edited hy Hamilton^
Vol. IV. page 290.
946. The last section of the introduction is entitled. Notice
historique sur le Calcid des Prohabilites ; this is brief but very
good. The passage extending from the middle of page cxxxix.
to the end of page CXLI. is new in the third edition; it relates
principally to Laplace's development in his first supplement of
his theory of errors. Laplace closes this passage with a reference
to the humble origin of the subject he had so much advanced; he
says it is remarkable that a science which began with the consi-
deration of games should have raised itself to the most important
objects of human knowledge.
A brief sketch of the plan of the Theorie...des Proh., which
appeared on the last page of the introduction in the second edi-
tion, is not repeated in the third edition.
947. The words in which at the end of the introduction La-
50^ LAPLACE.
place sums up the claims of the Theory of Probability well deserve
to be reproduced here:
On voit par cet Essai, que la tlieorie des i^robaLilites n'est an fond,
que le bon sens reduit au calcul : elle fait apprecier avec exactitude,
ce que les esprits justes sentent par une sorte d'instinct, sans qu'ils
puissent souvent s'en rendre compte. Si Ton considere les methodes
analytiques auxquelles cette theorie a donne naissance, la verite des
principes qui lui servent de base, la logique fine et delicate qu'exige
leur emploi dans la solution des problemes, les etablissemens d'utilite
publique qui s'appuient sur elle, et I'extension qu'elle a reque et qu'elle
pent recevoir encore, par son application aux questions les plus impor-
tantes de la Philosophie naturelle et des sciences morales; si Ton ob-
serve ensuite, que dans les clioses memes qui ne peuvent etre soumises
au calcul, elle donne les aperqus les plus surs qui puissent nous guider
dans nos jugemens, et qu'elle apprend a se garantir des illusions qui
souvent nous egarent; on verra qu'il n'est point de science plus digne
de nos meditations, et qu'il soit plus utile de faire entrer dans le systeme
de r instruction publique.
948. We now leave the introduction and pass to the Theorie...
des Proh. itself Laplace divides this into two books. Livre I. is
entitled Du Calcul des Fonctions Gene'ratrices: this occupies pages
1 — 177 ; Livre ii. is entitled Theoi^e generate des Prohahiliies;
this occupies pages 179 — 461. Then follow Additions on pages
462—484.
949. The title which Laplace gives to his Livre I. does not
adequately indicate its contents. The subject of generating func-
tions, strictly so called, forms only the first part of the book ; the
second part is devoted to the consideration of the approximate
calculation of various expressions which occur in the Theory of
Probability.
950. The first part of Livre i. is almost a reprint of the me-
moir of 1779 in which it originally appeared ; see Art. 906. This
part begins with a few introductory remarks on pages 3 — 8 ; these
pages 3 — 8 of the third edition do not quite agree with the pages
1 — 8 of the first edition, but there is nothing of consequence pecu-
liar to the first edition. Laplace draws attention to the importance
of notation in mathematics; and he illustrates the point by the
LAPLACE. 505
advantage of the notation for denoting powers, which leads him
to speak of Descartes and Wallis.
Laplace points out that Leibnitz made a remarkable use of the
notation of powers as applied to differentials ; this use we might
describe in modern terms as an example of the separation of the
symbols of operation and quantity. Lagrange followed up this
analogy of powers and differentials ; his memoir inserted in the
volume for 1772 of the memoirs of the Academy of Berlin is cha-
racterised by Laplace as one of the finest applications ever made of
the method of inductions.
951. The first Chapter of the first part oi Livre I. is entitled
Des Fonctions generati^ices, ct une variable; it occupies pages 9 — 49.
The method of generating functions has lost much of its value
since the cultivation of the Calculus of Operations by Professor
Boole and others ; partly on this account, and partly because the
method is sufficiently illustrated in works on the Theory of Finite
Differences, we shall not explain it here.
Pasres 39 — 49 contain various formulae of what we now call the
Calculus of Operations ; these formulse cannot be said to be cle-
monstrated by Laplace ; he is content to rely mainly on analogy.
LagTange had led the way here ; see the preceding Article.
One of the formulae may be reproduced ; see Laplace's page 41.
If we write Taylor's theorem symbolically we obtain
Ay.= v/^^-Vj/.,
where A indicates the difference in y^ arising from a difference h in
X. Then
Laplace transforms this into the following result,
2
/ hd_
The following is his method :
/d_ Y nh£/ hd_ h dY
W^"^ -l)y. = e ^.^'^•^ Ve2 ci^ _ ^'2 dx) y^^
506 LAPLACE.
Now let ^ ( -7- j denote any term arising from the development of
I g2 dx Q~ 2dxj
Then ,(^)....^^=,(^),,,
and the term on the right hand may be supposed to have arisen
/ hd_ _IlAY
Ve2 dx_
from the development of \e^ ^^^ — e ^ ^^J y^^'^- Thus the formula
2
is considered to be established.
We ought to observe that Laplace does not express the formula
quite in the way which we adopt. His mode of writing Taylor's
Theorem is
and then he would write
Ay,=\e "- -1).
He gives verbal directions as to the way in which the symbols
are to be treated, which of course make his formulae really iden-
tical with those which we express somewhat differently. We may
notice that Laplace uses c for the base of the Napierian logarithms,
which we denote by e.
If in the formula we put h = l and change x into a? — - we
obtain
/ 1 £, 1 d\'
2
which Laplace obtains on his page 45 by another process.
952. The second Chapter of the first part of Livre L is entitled
Des fonctions generatrices a deux variables: it occupies pages
50—87.
Laplace applies the theory of generating functions to solve
equations in Finite Differences with two independent variables.
He gives on his pages 63 — (j^> a strange process for integrating the
following equation in Finite Differences,
LAPLACE. 507
We might suppose that z^,^ is the coefficient of fr' in the ex-
pansion of a function of t and r ; then it would easily follow that
this function must be of the form
^[t)^'^ (t)
nab \'
Tti C
\Tt T t J
where </> (t) is an arbitrary function of t, and yjr (r) an arbitrary
function of r.
Laplace, however, proceeds thus. He puts
1 a h ^
-c = 0,
Tt T t
and he calls this the equation generatrice of the given equation in
Finite Differences. He takes u to denote the function of t and t
which when expanded in powers of t and r has z^, y for the co-
u
efficient of fi^. Then in the expansion of -^-^ the coefficient of
^V^willbe^,,,.
Laplace then transforms —^ thus. By the equation generatrice
we have
1 T
' i-6
T
therefore,
u \T h h)
c + ah + a f h
(I _ ,)^
Develope the second member according to powers of 5 ;
thus
u
f~r
,-'l(H'-''M"-'-^'-M"-^-]
,ar-2
, _ X (c + ah) a""'^ x(x — l), , ,,2 ^'
X l^'+-^"J + 1.2 (^ + ^^) 7l ^
T Vt y
508 LAPLACE.
Multiply the two series together. Let
Fj = yld' + a; (c + al) a"'^,
J- ■ ^ 1 . ^
Tr_ y(y-i)C y-2)„ .
Then
^^=4^f--^y+F.f--^rv...-^^.
.T / VT
T \T J \T J
But the equation
gives
1 «j 5
7 --c =
CT T C
1
1 , c + a6 '
T
therefore
Now we pass from the generating functions to the coefficients,
and we pick out the coefficients of ^V° on both sides. This gives
z^y on the left-hand side, and on the right-hand side a series
which we shall now proceed to express.
Let A apply to x, and indicate a Finite Difference produced
by the change of x into ic + 1 ; and let 8 similarly apply to ?/, and
indicate a Finite Difference produced by the change of 7/ into
2/+1.
LAPLACE. 509
Now [ ^] ^^[1 ■"-) J hence in u( h) the coefficient
of fr^ will be h't'' (-jiA > provided we suppose that ?/ is made zero
after the operation denoted by 8'' has been performed on -^ .
Similarly in w (^ - aj the coefficient of fr' wiU be oTA' (^/] ,
provided we suppose that x is made zero after the operation de-
noted by A'" has been performed on -^ .
In this way we obtain
+ ^ V A (^] + — ^ F A'^ (^]
IT K f ( X A
+ • • • + 7 : 7T- r y^y. A I — ^
Thus we see that in order to obtain z^^y we must know
^0, 1 > ^0, 2' • • • ^P ^^ ^0, V > ^nd we must know z^^^, ^2, c • • ^p to z^^ „ .
Now we have to observe that this process as given by Laplace
cannot be said to be demonstrative or even intelligible. His
method of connecting the two independent variables by the equation
generatrice without explanation is most strange.
But the student who is acquainted with the modern methods
of the Calculus of Operations will be able to translate Laplace's
process into a more familiar language.
Let E denote the change of x into x + 1, and F the change of
7/ into ?/ + 1 : then the fundamental equation we have to integrate
will be written
{EF- aF- bE- c) z,^, = 0,
or for abbreviation
EF-aF-bE-c = 0,
Then E'^F^ will be expanded in the way Laplace expands
and his result obtained from E^'F^z^^^. Thus we rely on the
foundations on which the Calculus of Operations is based.
510 LAPLACE.
We may notice tliat we have changed Laplace's notation in
order to avoid the dashes which are difficult in printing. La-
place uses X where we use y, t! where we use r, and 'A where we
use 8.
953. Laplace takes another equation in Finite Differences.
The equation we will denote thus
A"^,„+^A»-a^,.,+ J A-^ax, + ... = 0.
Here A belongs to x of which the difference is unity; and S
belongs to y of which the difference is a.
Laplace says that the equation generatrice is
e-r*K'-r(i-)4.&-r&-r--=»-
He supposes that this equation is solved, and thus decomposed
into the following n equations :
t a\ W
t a V TV '
where q, q^, q^}"* ^^^ the n roots of the equation
Then, using the first root
u
u u f^ q
^' x.r'u.
<i\ 1
Then passing from the generating functions to the coefficients,
that is equating the coefficients of ^V°, we obtain
LAPLACE. 511
The second member may be put in tlie form
Denote the quantity [ — —Vz^^y by the arbitrary function
</) (?/). Thus
This value of Zx,y will then satisfy the equation in Finite Dif-
ferences.
Each of the n roots q, q^, q^, ... gives rise to a similar ex-
pression ; and the sum of the 7i particular values thus obtained for
Zx y will furnish the general value, involving n arbitrary functions.
The student will as before be able to translate this process
into the language of the Calculus of Operations.
Laplace continues thus : Suppose a indefinitely small, and
equal to dy. Then
as we may see by taking logarithms. Thus we shall obtain
This is the complete integral of the equation
Laplace next gives some formulae of what we now call the Cal-
culus of Operations, in the case of two independent variables ; see
his pages 68 — 70.
954. In his pages 70 — 80 Laplace offers some remarks on the
transition from the finite to the indefinitely small ; his object is to
shew that the process will furnish rigorous demonstrations. He
illustrates by referring to the problem of vibrating strings, and
this leads him to notice a famous question, namely that of the ad-
missibility of discontinuous functions in the solution of partial dif-
512 LAPLACE.
ferential equations; he concludes that such functions are ad-
missible under certain conditions. Professor Boole reofards the
argument as unsound ; see his Finite Differences, Chapter x.
955. Laplace closes the Chapter with some general considera-
tions respecting generating functions. The only point to which we
need draw attention is that there is an important error in page 82 ;
Laplace gives an incomplete form as the solution of an equation in
Finite Differences ; the complete form will be found on page 5 of
the fourth supplement. We shall see the influence of the error
hereafter in Arts. 974, 980, 984.
956. We now arrive at the second part of Livre i., this is
nearly a reprint of the memoir for 1782; the method of approxi-
mation had however been already given in the memoir for 1778.
See Arts. 894, 899, 907, 921.
The first chapter of the second part of Livre I. is entitled Be
Tintegixttion jjar approximation, des differe^itielles qui renferment
des facteurs Sieves a de grandes puissances; this Chapter occupies
pages 88—109.
957. The method of approximation which Laplace gives is of
great value : we will explain it. Suppose we require the value of
\ydx taken between two values of x which include a value for
which y is a maximum. Assume y — Fe-^^, where F denotes this
maximum value of y. Then
jydx=YJe-<^^dt.
Let y = (j) {x) ; suppose a the value of x which makes y have
the value Y : assume x= a+ 6.
Thus (^(a + (9)= Ye-'';
Y
therefore f = log -7-7 ^r .
(p {a-^ o)
From this equation we may expand ^ in a series of ascending
powers of 6, and then by reversion of series we may obtain 6 in a
series of ascending powers of t. Suppose that thus we have
LAPLACE. 513
then J = J = ^, + 2i?,^ + 353^+...;
[ydx = YJe-^' {B^ + 2B,t + SBf + ...) dt.
Such is the method of Laplace. It will be practically advan-
tageous in the cases where B^, B^, B^, ... form a rapidly converging
series; and it is to such cases that we shall have to apply it, when
we give some examples of it from Laplace's next Chapter. In
these examples there will be no difficulty in calculating the terms
B^, B^, B^, ..., so far as we shall require them. An investigation of
the general values of these coefficients as far as B^ inclusive will be
found in De Morgan's Differential and hitegral Calculus, page 602.
If we suppose that the limits of x are such as to make the cor-
responding values of y zero, the limits of t will be — co and + oo .
Now if r be odd I e-^'fdt vanishes, and if r be even it is equal to
^ —00
(^_1)(^_3)... 3.1
Thus we have
i^
3 5 3
ydx= Ys/ir\B^-]r-^B^-^-i^ B^-^.,.\.
Besides the transformation y = Ye~^^ Laplace also takes cases
in which the exponent of e instead of being — f has other values.
Thus on his page 88 the exponent is — t, and on his page 93
it is — f'' ; in the first of these cases Y is not supposed to be a
maximum value of y.
958. Some definite integrals are given on pages 95 — 101, in
connexion with which it may be useful to supply a few references.
The formula marked {T) on page 95 occurs in Laplace's memoir
of 1782, page 17.
COS rx e** ^ dx = -^r- e ia" .
Jo 2«
this was given by Laplace in the Memoires...de llnstitut for
1810, page 290 ; see also Tables dlntegrales Definies, 1858, by
D. Bierens de Haan, page 376.
S3
514 LAPLACE.
/,
dx-=^ ^
^ ^
see D. Bierens de Haan, page 268.
where a is supposed positive ; these seem due to Laplace ; see
D. Bierens de Haan, page 282, TMorie...desProh., pages 99—134.
We may remark that these two results, together with
/■
J
sin ax dx it ,^ „•.
1 -i- X X Z
are referred by D. F. Gregory, in his Examples ofthe.,.Diffe7'ential
and Integral Calcidus, to Laplace's memoir of 1782 ; but they are
not explicitly given there : with respect to the last result see
D. Bierens de Haan, page 293.
959. Since the integral le~^' dt occurs in the expressions of
Art. 957, Laplace is led to make some observations on modes of
approximating to the value of this integral. He gives the follow-
ing series which present no difficulty :
/,
t' 1 t' 1 t'
e-'V< = T-3+^g-^^ + ...;
j;>.,.„,-..(..K.jiS!.,5^*...)>
In the memoir of 1782 the second of these three expressions
does not occur.
Laplace also gives a development of I e'^"^ dt into the form of
J T
a continued fraction, which he takes from his MScanique Celeste,
Livy^e x. See also De Morgan's Differential and Integral Calculus,
page 591, for this and some similar developments.
LAPLACE. 515
9 GO. Laplace extends the method of approximation given in
Art. 957 to the case of double integrals. The following is substan-
tially his process. Suppose we require \\ydxdx' taken between
such limits of x and x as make y vanish. Let Y denote the
maximum value of y, and suppose that a and a are the correspond-
ing values of x and x. Assume ,
y=Ye-''-^\
X = a + 6, x = a -\- 6'.
Y
Substitute these values of x and x in the function log — and
expand it in powers of 6 and 6' ; then since Y is by hypothesis the
maximum value of y the coefficients of 6 and 6' will vanish in this
expansion : hence we may write the result thus
that is J/ (" (9 + ^ ^'V j^(p-^\ d" =e^ t'\
Since we have made only one assumption respecting the inde-
pendent variables t and t' w^e are at liberty to make another ; we
will assume
and therefore 6' /(p-^\^t'.
Now by the ordinary theory for the transformation of double
integrals we have
\ydxdx = jj ^ ,
, T-K , 1 r dt dt' dt dt'
where x> stands lor -7-, ^7^, — -,^, -77: .
du do do do
Thus far the process is exact. For an approximation we may
suppose M, N, P to be functions of a and a only ; then we have
2r da" ' tY dada" 2Y da"'
O
3—2
516 LAPLACE.
Then we sliall find that
n //DiT A72N 1 /{d'^Yd'Y fd'Y\\
And the limits of t and t' will be — (X) and + co ; thus finally
we have approximately
I \y dx dx —
/{d'Y d'Y
y \dd' da!'
2irY^
( d'Y
jda da I
See Art. 907.
961. The second Chapter of the second part of Livre l. is
entitled De ^integration par approximation, des Equations lineaires
aux differences finies et infiniment petites : this Chapter occupies
pages 110 — 125.
This Chapter exemplifies the process of solving linear differential
equations by the aid of definite integrals. Laplace seems to be
the first who drew attention to this subject : it is now fully dis-
cussed in works on differential equations. See Boole's Differential
Equations.
962. The third Chapter of the second part of Livre L is
entitled App)lication des m^thodes prdc^dentes, a V ap>proximation
de diverses fonctions de tres-grands nonibi^es: this Chapter oc-
cupies pages 126 — 177.
The first example is the following. Suppose we have to in-
tegrate the equation in Finite Differences,
Assume y^— ix'ipdx, where ^ is a function of x at present
undetermined, and the limits of the integration are also unde-
termined.
Let By stand for x" ; then -~^ = sx^~'^. Hence the proposed
equation becomes
LAPLACE, 0I7
that is, by integrating by parts,
= [xhy<f>] +j |(1 -^) ^-^ (#)j Bi/dx.
Wliere by [xBi/^] we mean that xhy^ is to be taken between
limits.
Assume </> such that
and take the limits of integration such that [^ % </>] = ; then
our proposed equation is satisfied.
From (1 — cc) (^ — y- (x(^) = 0, we obtain
where ^ is a constant. Then xBi/ (f> will vanish when x= and
also when cc = 00 . Thus, finally
/•CO"
x^e'^dx.
Now we proceed to put this integral in the form of a series.
The maximum value of ic*e~* is easily found to be that which
corresponds to a; = 5. Assume, according to Art. 957,
23* e"* = s'e~^e~^\
8.
and put x—s-\-Q\ thus
Take the logarithms of both sides ; thus
Hence by reversion of series we get
3 9 V2s
518 LAPLACE.
therefore dx^dQ^ di V25 1 1 + — r— + -^
\ 3V25 65
The limits of t corresponding to the limits and go of a; will
be — 00 and + 00 . Therefore
/-«> /"» ( ^t ^ \
Jo J -00 I 8V2s 65 J
By integration we obtain
y.
==As'^^e-'\^'27r \l+ Y^+ ...\ .
Laplace says we may determine the value of the factor
very simply thus.
7? O
Denote it by 1 ■] H -7 + ... so that
•^ s s
7/, = As'^'^e-W2^h + j + ~ + ...\
Substitute this value in the equation
thus
' ly^^ _, r B C ] , B ,
therefore
n.?+f+...){;-H)-('n)_^}
8 S
B B-2G
--^ + — ^j— + ...
And
~ 126'^ "^12s^^ ••'
Thus
f, B G \ ( 1 1 I ^ , B-20
s ' ^^ ' J 12s' ' 12/ s' ' s
3
LAPLACE. 519
Hence, equating coefficients,
^ ~ 12 ' 288 '
The value of A in the expression for y^ must be determined
by some particular value of ?/g. Suppose that when s = yx we
have 2/^= Y.
Then Y^A\ x^e'^dx^
J a
thus A =
Y
/•OO
Hence
Vs- p i^+ 12s'^288/"^*"'i*
I x^ e ax
^
The original equation can be very easily integrated; and we
obtain
y,^ rOL6 + l)0+2) ...5.
Hence, by equating the two values of y^,
(/i + 1) (/I +2) ...s =
•^
a;'^ e"'" cfa?
It will be observed that 5 — /z is assumed to be a positive
integer, but there is nothing to require that 5 itself should be an
integer.
963. One remark must be made on the process which we have
just given. Let (s) denote
*■ "T T(r>_'ooo^2'"
will be denoted by <f>{—s).
Now Laplace does not shew that
520 LAPLACE.
although he assumes the truth of this on his page 134). It may
be shewn by adopting the usual mode of proving Stirling's Theo-
rem. For by using Euler's theorem for summation, given in
Art. 334, it will appear that
where t (^) = 9^ " ^l73 + '
26^ 3.4/ ' 5.Qs' '
the coefficients being the well-known numhers of Bernoidli.
Thus 'i/r(5)+i/r(-5)=0;
therefore e^^'^ x e^^"^ = e' ^1,
that is </) (5) <^ (— 5) = 1.
964. Laplace, after investigating a formula sometimes de-
duces another from it by passing from real to imaginary quantities.
This method cannot be considered demonstrative ; and indeed
Laplace himself admits that it may be employed to discover new
formulae, but that the results thus obtained should be confirmed
by direct demonstration. See his pages 87 and 471; also Art. 920.
Thus as a specimen of his results we may quote one which he
gives on his page 134.
Let Q = cos CT
(^^ + ^r
then
/<00
('00 •
J
A memoir by Cauchy on Definite Integrals is published in the
Journal de VEcole Folytechnique, 28^ Cahier ; this memoir was
presented to the Academy of Sciences, Jan. 2nd, 1815, but not
printed until 1841. The memoir discusses very fully the results
given by Laplace in the Chapter we are now considering. Cauchy
says, page 148,
...je suis parvenu a qiielques resultats nouveaux, ainsi qii'a la
demonstration directe de plusieurs formules, que M. Laplace a deduites
LAPLACE. 521
du passage du r^el a rimaginaire, dans le 3"^® chapitre du Calcul d'^s
P^'ohahilites, et qu'il vient de confirmer par des metliodes rigoureuses
dans quelques additions faites a cet ouvrage.
The additions to which Cauchy refers occupy pages 464 — 484
of the Theorie...des Froh., and first appeared in the second edi-
tion, which is dated 1814.
965. An important application which Laplace makes of his
method of approximation is to evaluate the coefficients of the
terms in the expansion of a high power of a certain polynomial.
Let the polynomial consist of 2n + l terms and be denoted
by
111 1
-^ + -iFT + -1F2 + — + - + 1 + «+••• + «""' + «*""' + «" ;
a a a ^ a
and suppose the polynomial raised to the power s.
First, let it be required to find the coefficient of the term
independent of a.
Substitute e^^^^ for a ; then we require the term which is
independent of 6 when
{
l + 2cos^ + 2cos2^+ ... + 2cos?i^y
is expanded and arranged according to cosines of multiples of 0.
This term will be found by integrating the above expression with
respect to 6 from to tt, and dividing by tt. Sum the series of
cosines by the usual formula ; then the required term
. 2w + l^
t n^ 1 sm — 71 — u
ir\ J
TT j„ J • 1 /I
sm ^ o
2
de
2 C^' /sin m(l)
"ttJo Vsin^
where (f)=^-9, and 7n = 2n + 1.
Now the expression ( . ^ j vanishes when
TT 27r Stt
= — or — or —
^ m m m
522 LAPLACE.
and between each of these values it will be found that the ex-
pression is numerically a maximum, and it is also a maximum when
(j) = 0. Thus we may calculate by Art. 957 the value of the integral
'sm 7nd)\^ . . . . TT
— : — ~ d6 when the limits are consecutive multiples of — .
^ sni (p J ^ m
sm Tyicri
The equation which determines the maxima values of — ^ — ,-
sm<p
is
m, cos mcf) sin (/> — cos <j) sin mcf)
!•
sin^ (j)
0.
It will be found that this is satisfied when <^ = ; the situation
of the other values of cf) will be more easily discovered by putting
the equation in the form
tan m(j) — m tan (^ = :
now we see that the next solution will lie between m(b = -— and
»">73" 7 77" 077"
m^— — , and then the next between m(p = -r- and m<^ = -^,
and so on.
We proceed then to find
''sin mcf)\
IT
'711
sm
JJ
d(f>.
The maximum value of the function which is to be integrated
occurs when 4> = 0, and is therefore m* ; assume
— 77i*e~^',
/sin m(f)^ *
V sin (/) ,
j = m*e~'';
take logarithms, thus we obtain
LAPLACE. 523
Therefore approximately
d<t> V6
dt ~^ls{m'-l)}'
The limits of ^ will be and x . Hence approximately
2 r^ /sin 7?2(f)\* ,^ 2 w'' ^/6 r -t^ j.
m' V6 (2w + 1)' \/3
Laplace next considers the value of the integral with respect
to <h between the limits — and — , and then the value between
^ m m
the limits — • and ^ — , and so on ; he shews that when 5 is a very
771 m
large number these definite integrals diminish rapidly, and may
be neglected in comparison with the value obtained for the limits
and — . This result depends on the fact that the successive
m
Sm 'ITZCD
numerical maxima values of — -. — r^ diminish rapidly ; as we shall
sm ^
now shew. At a numerical maximum we have
sin vi(f) m cos m(f) m m
sin ^ cos ^ cos V(l + ^^'^ tan^ </>) VCcos'^ ^ + m"^ sin^ 0) '
this is less than ^ — r , that is less than . . . — , and therefore
sm (p sm (p 9
a for^tiori less than — — , that is less than ^ — r .
•^ 2 <j) 2 incp
Hence at the second maximum —. — j- is less than - -— ,
sm 2 5
that is less than ^ , and therefore the ratio of the second nume-
o
524< LAPLACE.
rical maximum value of ( —. — ~] to the first is less than f J) .
Similarly the ratio of the third numerical maximum value to the
first is less than f^j . And so on.
Next suppose that we require the coefficient of a in the
expansion of
[4 + -4i + -^2 +... + - + 1 + « + •••+«""'+«""' + ^4'-
[a a a a )
The coefficient of a'" in this expansion will be the same as the
coefficient of a"*" ; denote the coefficient of a"" by A^.. Pat e^^
for a and suppose the expression to be arranged according to
cosines of the multiples of 6 ; then 2A^ cos r6 will be the term
corresponding to A^ (a*" + a"*"). If we multiply the expression by
cos W, and integrate between the limits and tt, all the terms
will vanish except that for which r is equal to I; so that the
integral reduces to 2Ai j cos^ Wd6. Hence
cos WdO.
1
We put; as before, m — 2n + 1, and (f> = ^0; thus we have
As before assume
/sin m4i\^
c
sin md>Y „ _,,
sm
V
then </) = .. , \ — TyT , approximately.
Hence the intoOTal becomes
to'
2 "^'^'5 f^-,^^^ 2?^y6 ^,
TT
Vis K- 1)1 J" ^"V(«K-i)}
LAPLACE. 525
As before we take and oo for the limits of t, and thus
neglect all that part of the integral with respect to which is not
TT
included between the limits and — . Hence by Art. 958 we
m
have finally
2 77ZV6 Vtt -,-J^ (2/z + l)V3 -^-^,
;; sj[s {m' - 1)} 2 ^ ' ""^ ^/[n {n + 1) 2s7r}
Suppose now that we require the sum of the coefficients, from
that of a-^ to that of o} both inclusive ; we must find the sum of
2^j+2^z.i+2^i_2+... + 2^^ + ^,:
this is best effected by the aid of Euler's Theorem ; see Art. 384.
We have approximately
ri 11
r? 1 1
therefore ^^ u^ = I u^dx + « ^^a; + « ^o >
therefore 2^^^^ Ug; — u^ = 2 I ujix + u^,
J
Hence the required result is
We may observe that Laplace demonstrates Euler's Tlieorem
in the manner which is now usual in elementary works, that is by
the aid of the Calculus of Operations.
966. Laplace gives on his page 158 the formula
00
/.
1
x^ ^ e^ dx
He demonstrates this in his own way ; it is sufficient to obseiTe
that it may be obtained by putting x for sx in the integral in the
numerator of the left-hand side.
526 LAPLACE.
Hence he deduces
/• 00
I x^^ e-^ (e-^ - 1)" dx
^n - ^ -_o
6-*
:&-^ e~^ dx
Laplace calculates tlie approximate value of this expression,
supposing { very large. He assumes that the result which he
obtains will hold when the sign of { is changed ; so that he obtains
an approximate expression for AV; see page 159 of his work.
He gives a demonstration in the additions; see page 474 of the
Tkeorie...des Proh. The demonstration involves much use of the
symbol \/(- !)• Cauchy gives a demonstration on page 247 of the
memoir cited in Art. 964. Laplace gives another formula for
AV on his page 163 ; he arrives at it by the aid of integrals with
imaginary limits, and then confirms his result by a demon-
stration.
967. Laplace says, on his page 165, that in the theory of
chances we often require to consider in the expression for AV only
those terms in which the quantity raised to the power t is positive;
and accordingly he proceeds to give suitable approximate formulae
for such cases. Then he passes on to consider specially the ap-
proximate value of the" expression
Tl [71 — 1 )
(n-\-r sJnY - n (ii + r V?i - 2)^ + (n + r ^Jn- iy - ... ,
where the series is to extend only so long as the quantities raised
to the power yu, are positive, and />t is an integer a little greater or
a little less than n. See Arts. 916, 917.
The methods are of the kind already noticed ; that is they are
not demonstrative, but rest on a free use of the symbol a/ (— 1).
A point should be noticed with respect to Laplace's page 171.
He has to establish a certain formula; but the whole difficulty of
the process is passed over with the words determinant convenable-
ment la constante arhitraire. Laplace's formula is established by
Cauchy ; see page 240 of the memoir cited in Art. 964.
968. In conclusion we may observe that this Chapter contains
many important results, but it is to be regretted that the demon-
LAPLACE. 527
strations are very imperfect. The memoir of Cauchy to which we
have referred, is very laborious and difficult, so that this portion
of the Theorie...des Proh. remains in an unsatisfactory state.
969. We now arrive at Livre ii, which is entitled TMorie
Generate des Prohahilites.
It will be understood that when we speak of any Chapter in
Laplace's work without further specification, we always mean a
Chapter of Livre IL
The first Chapter is entitled Principes generaux de cette TMorie.
This occupies pages 179 — 188 ; it gives a brief statement, with
exemplification, of the first principles of the subject.
970. The second Chapter is entitled De la ProbcibiliU des
^venemens composes d'Svenemens simples dont les possihiliUs respec-
tives sont donnees. This occupies pages 189 — 27-i ; it contains the
solution of several problems in direct probability ; we will notice
them in order.
971. The first problem is one connected with a lottery ; see
Arts. 291, 44^8, 4<d5, 775, 864, 910.
The present discussion adds to what Laplace had formerly
given an approximate calculation. The French lottery was com-
posed of 90 numbers, 5 of which were drawn at a time. Laplace
shews that it is about an even chance that in 86 drawingfs all
the numbers will appear. This approximate calculation is an
example of the formula for AV given by Laplace on page 159 of
his work ; see Art. 966.
We may remark that Laplace also makes use of a rougher ap-
proximation originally given by De Moivre ; see Art. 292.
972. On his page 201 Laplace takes the problem of odd and
even; see Arts. 350, 865, 882.
Laplace adds the following problem. Suppose that an urn con-
tains X white balls, and the same number of black balls ; an even
number of balls is to be drawn out : required the probability that
as many white balls as black balls will be drawn out.
The whole number of cases is found to be 2"^"^ — 1, and the
528 LAPLACE.
whole number of favourable cases to be -^= 1 ; the required
X \x
probability therefore is the latter number divided by the former.
973, The next problem is the Problem of Points. Laplace
treats this very fully under its various modifications ; the dis-
cussion occupies his pages 203 — 217. See Arts. 872, 884.
We will exhibit in substance, Laplace's mode of investigation.
Two players A and B want respectively x and y points of winning
a set of games ; their chances of winning a single game are jp and
q resj^ectively, w^here the sum of "p and q is unity ; the stake is to
belong to the player who first makes up his set : determine the
probabilities in favour of each player.
Let </) {x^ y) denote ^'s probability. Then his chance of win-
ning the next game is p, and if he wins it his probability becomes
</) (a? — 1, y) ; and q is his chance of losing this game, and if he loses
it his probability becomes ^{x, y — 1) : thus
^ {x, y) =p ^ {x -1, y) -\- q (\> {x, y -1) (1).
Suppose that </> [x, y) is the coefficient of fr^ in the develop-
ment according to powers of t and r of a certain function u of
these variables. From (1) we shall obtain
u-t<i>(x, 0)f-t^{0,y) T^+^(0, 0)
==u(pt + qT)-pttcl>(x,0)f-qTtcl^{0,7j)T' (2),
where ^ cj) (x, 0) f denotes a summation with respect to x from
X = inclusive to x= oo ; and X (/> (0, y) r'" denotes a summation
with respect to y from ?/ = inclusive to y= cc . In order to shew
that (2) is true we have to observe two facts.
First, the coefficient of any such term as Tr", where neither m
nor n is less than unity, is the same on both sides of (2) by virtue
of (1).
Secondly, on the left-hand side of (2) such terms as Tt", where
m or 7i is less than unity, cancel each other ; and so also do such
terms on the right-hand side of (2).
Thus (2) is fully established. From (2) we obtain
u — ,
1 —j)f — qr
LAPLACE. 529
wc may write this result thus,
Avhere i^(^) and /(r) are functions of t and r respectively, which
are at present undetermined. By supposing that the term in /(t)
vv'hich is independent of t is included in F{t), we may write the
result thus,
„ = %IO±ltM (4)_
1 — pt — qr
Thus either (3) or (4) may be taken as the general solution of
the equation (1) in Finite Differences; and this general solution
involves two arbitrary functions which must be determined by
sjDecial considerations. We proceed to determine these functions
in the present case, taking the form (4) which will be the most
convenient.
Now A loses if B first makes up his set, so that <^ {x, 0) =
for every value of x from unity upwards, and (/> (0, 0) does not
occur, that is it may also be considered zero. But from (4) it
follows that (j) (x, 0) is the coefficient of f in the development
of ^^^ ; therefore v (t) = 0.
Again, A wins if he first makes up his set, so that cj) (0, y) = 1
for every value of i/ from unity upwards. But from (4) it follows
that (j) (0, y) is the coefficient of t^ in the development of r-^
so that
Tyjr (t) _ T
qr
therefore
Thus finally
1-
qr 1
-t'
T^fr (t)
t(1.
1-
•
- T
■t(1-
qr)
{l-T){l-pt-qT)
Now <^{x,y) is the coefficient of fr' in the development of w.
First expand according to powers of t ; thus we obtain for the
34
530 LAPLACE.
«.
p T
coefficient of f the expression _ J^ .^ _ y . Then expand
this expression according to powers of r, and we finally obtain for
the coefficient of fj^
This is therefore the probability in favour of A ; and that in
favour of JB may be obtained by interchanging p with q and x
with ?/.
The result is identical with the second of the two formuloe
which we have given in Art. 172.
97*i. The investigation just given is in substance Laplace's ;
he takes the particular case in which p = -^ and q = ^', but this
makes no difference in principle. But there is one important
difference. At the stage where we have
F{t) +/(t)
u =
1 —pt — qr
Laplace puts
fir)
u =
1 —jyi — qr
This is an error, it arises from a false formula given by Laplace
on his page 82; see Art. 955. Laplace's error amounts to neg-
lectinsc the considerations involved in the second of the facts on
which equation (2) of the preceding Article depends : this kind
of neglect has been not uncommon with those who have used or
expounded the method of Generating Functions.
975. We will continue the discussion of the Problem of Points,
and suppose that there are more than two players. Let the first
player want x^ i^oints, the second x^ points, the third x^ points,
and so on. Let their respective chances of winning a single game
^^ 1\' 2\> 1\^ • ' • Let cj) (x^, x^, x^, . . .) denote the probability in
favour of the first player. Then, as in Art. 973, we obtain the
equation
LAPLACE. 531
Suppose that cj) {x^, x^, x^, ...) is the coefficient of ?f/i t^'^^ts^'s ...
in the development of a function u of these variables. Laplace
then proceeds thus. From (1) he passes to
?^ = w(M+M + M+---) (2)'
and then he deduces
i=M+M+M + O^)-
Hence
therefore
, ^1 (^1 + 1)
1.2
(M + M+--0'
cc, (a?, + 1) (x, + 2) , , . .
+
Now the coefficient of t^t^^^t^^... in — ^ is ^ (a^^, ajg, cCg, ...)•
Let 7i:w;:)^*i i^"* t^^ . . . denote any term of the right-hand member
of the last equation. Then the coefficient of t^ t,^2 t^a ... in this
term will be hp^i <f> (0, x^—m, x^—7i,...). But cj) (0, x^— m, x^—n,...)
is equal to unity, for if the first player wants no points he is en-
titled to the stake. Moreover we must reject all the values of
<f> if), x^ — m, x^ — n, ...) in which m is equal to or greater than x^^
in which n is equal to or greater than x^, and so on; for these
terms in fact do not exist, that is must be considered to be zero.
Hence finally
^ (a?j, OJg, a-g, . . .) =2\^' |l + a?, {p^ +793 + . . .)
* !■
34^—2
532 LAPLACE.
provided we reject all terms in wliich the power of p^ surpasses
x^ — 1, in which the power oi p^ surpasses x^ — 1, and so on.
Now on this process of Laplace's we remark : ' .
First, the equation (2) is not true ; as in Art. 973 we ought to
allow for terms in which one or more of the variables x^,x^,x^,...
is zero ; and therefore additional terms ought to be placed in each
member of equation (2) of the present Article, like those in equa-
tion (2) of Article 973.
Secondly, Laplace's treatment of his equation (3) is unintel-
ligible, as we have already remarked in a similar case ; see
Art. 952. By making use of the Calculus of Operations we might
however translate Laplace's process into another free from ob-
jection.
976. At this stage we shall find it convenient to introduce an
account of the fourth Supplement to the Theorie.,.des Prohahilites.
This supplement contains 28 pages. Laplace begins with a few
remarks on Generating Functions; he gives the correct formula
for the solution of an equation in Finite Differences for which he
had formerly given an incorrect formula: see Art. 955. He does
not refer to the Theorie...des Froh. nor take any notice of the
discrepancy of the two formulae. He says, on page 4 of the Sup-
plement,
Un des principaux avantages de cette maniere d'integrer les equa-
tions aux differences partielles, consiste en ce que I'analyse algebrique
fournissant divers moyens pour developper les fonctions, on peut choisir
celui qui convient le mieux a la question proposee. La solution des
]>roblemes suivans, par le Comte de Lai^lace, mon fils, et les considera-
tions qu'il y a jointes, repandront un nouveau jour sur le calcul des
fonctions generatrices.
We have therefore to ascribe all the rest of the fourth Sup-
plement to Laplace's son.
977. The main part of the fourth Supplement consists of the
solution of problems which may be considered as generalisations of
the Problem of Points. There are three of these problems ; we
will enunciate them.
LAPLACE. 533
I. A player A draws a ball from an urn containing white
balls and black balls ; his chance of drawing a white ball is p,
and his chance of drawing a black ball is q : after the ball has
been drawn it is replaced. Then a second player B draws a ball
from a second urn contairing white balls and black balls; his
chance of drawing a white ball is p, and his chance of drawing
a black ball is q : after the ball has been drawn it is replaced.
The two players continue thus to draw alternately a ball, each
from his own urn, and to replace the ball after it has been
drawn. If a player draws a white ball he counts a point ; if he
draws a black ball he counts nothing. Suppose that A wants x
points, and B wants x points to complete an assigned set, required
the probabilities in favour of each player.
II. Suppose A draws from an urn in which there are balls
of three kinds ; for a ball of the first kind he counts two points, for
a ball of the second kind he counts one point, and for a ball of the
third kind he counts no point: let his chances he p>,p)^, and q for
the three cases.
Similarly let B draw from a second urn containing similar
balls ; let^', j9j', and q be his chances for the three cases. Then,
as before, we require the probabilities for each player of his
making up an assigned set of points before his adversary makes
up an assigned set.
III. An urn contains a known number of black balls, and a
known number of white balls ; a ball is drawn and not replaced ;
then another ball, and so on : required the probability that a
given number of white balls will be drawn before another given
number of black balls.
These three problems are solved by the method of Generating
Functions used carefully and accurately ; that is, the terms which
are required to make the equations true are given, and not
omitted. See Art. 97^. After the problems are solved generally
particular cases are deduced.
The student of the fourth Supplement will have to bear in
mind that in the first problem p + q = l and p?' + 2=1* ^^^ ^^
the second problem p +p)^ + ^ = 1, p' +p^ -\- q =1,
534 LAPLACE.
978. After the solutions of these problems we have a few
pages headed Remarque sw les fonctions generatrices ; and this is
the part of the fourth Supplement with which we are chiefly
interested. It is here observed that in a case like that of our
Art. 975; the equation (2) is not an accurate deduction from equa-
tion (1) ; for additional terms ought to be added to each side, in
the manner of our Art. 973.
There is however a mistake at the top of page 24 of the fourth
Supplement : instead of adding a function of t, two functions must
be added, one of t and the other of t'.
The fourth Supplement then proceeds thus, on its page 24 :
Faute d' avoir egard a ces fonctions, on j^eut tomber dans des
erreurs graves, en se servant de ce moyen pour integrer les equations
aux differences partielles. Par cette meme raison, la marche suivie dans
la solution des problemes des n"^^ 8 et 10 du second livre de la Theorie
analytique des Probabilites n'est nullement rigoureuse, et semble impliquer
contradiction, en ce qu'elle etablit une liaison entre les variables qui
sont et doivent etre toujours independantes. Sans entrer dans les
considerations particulieres qui ont pu la faire reussir ici, et qu'il est
aise de saisir, nous allons faire voir que la metliode d'integration ex-
posee au commencement de ce Supplement s'applique egalement a ces
questions, et les resout avec non moins de simplicite.
The problem referred to as contained in No. 8 of the
TMorie...des Proh. is that which we have given in Art. 975;
the problem referred to as contained in No. 10 of the Theorie... des
Proh. is that which we shall notice in Art. 980. The fourth
Supplement gives solutions of these problems by the accurate use
of Generating Functions, in the manner of our Art. 973.
Thus as Laplace himself attached the fourth Supplement to
his work, we may conclude that he admitted the solutions in
question to be unsound. We consider that they are unsound, and
in fact unintelligible, as they are presented by Laplace ; but on
the other hand, we believe that they may be readily translated
into the language of the Calculus of Operations, and thus become
clear and satisfactory. See Art. 952.
979. We return from the fourth Supplement to the
Theorie... des Proh. itself. Laplace's next problem is that which
LAPLACE. 535
is connected with the game which is called Treize or Rencontre ;
see Arts. 162, 280, 286, 430, Q±Q.
Laplace devotes his pages 217 — 225 to this problem ; he gives
the solution, and then applies his method of approximation in
order to obtain numerical results when very high numbers are
involved.
980. Laplace takes next on his pages 225 — 238 the problem
of the Duration of Play. The results were enunciated by De
Moivre and demonstrated by Lagrange ; Laplace has made great
use of Lagrange's memoir on the subject ; see Arts. 311, 583,
588, 863, 885, 921. We may observe that before Laplace gives
his analytical solution he says, Ce probleme pent etre resolu
avec facilite par le precede suivant qui est en quelque sorte,
mecanique ; the process which he gives is due to De Moivre ;
it occurs on page 203 of the Doctrine of Chances. See also
Art. 303. In the course of the investigation, Laplace gives a
process of the kind we have already noticed, which is criticised in
the fourth Supplement ; see Art. 978.
981. Laplace takes next on his pages 238 — 2-17 the problem
which we have called Waldegrave's problem ; see Arts. 210, 249,
295, 348.
There are n-\-l players C^, G^, ... (7„^j. First C^ and Cg play
together ; the loser deposits a shilling in a common stock, and the
winner plays with C^ ; the loser again deposits a shilling, and the
winner plays with C^\ the process is continued until some one
player has beaten in succession all the rest, the turn of C^ coming
on again after that of (7„^j. The winner is to take all the money
in the common stock.
Laplace determines the probability that the play will terminate
precisely at the x^^'^ game, and also the probability that it will
terminate at or before the ic^'* game. He also determines the
probability that the r^^ player will win the money j)recisely at the
x^^ game ; that is to say, he exhibits a complex algebraical func-
tion of a variable t which must be expanded in powers of x
and the coefficient of t'' taken. He then deduces a general ex-
pression for the advantage of the r*^ player.
The part of the solution which is new in Laplace's discussion
536 LAPLACE.
is that which determines the probability that the r^^ player will-
win the money precisely at the x^^ game ; Nicolas Bernoulli had
confined himself to the probability which each player has of
winning the money on the whole.
982. We will give, after Laplace, the investigation of the
probability that the play will terminate precisely at the x^^
game.
Let z^ denote this probability. In order that the play may
terminate at the x^^ game, the player who enters into play at the
{x — n-\-Vf^ game must win this game and the n — 1 following
games.
Suppose that the winner of the money starts with a player
who has won only one game ; let P denote the probability of this
P .
event ; then — will be the corresponding probability that the
play will terminate at the x^^ game. But the probability that the
play will terminate at the {x — iy^ game, that is z^_^, is equal
P . .
to ^Tpi . For it is necessary to this end that a player who has
already won one game just before the {x — n + Vf^ game should
win this game and the n — ^ following games j and the probabilities
of these component events being respectively P and ^^^^i , the
. P
probability of the compound event is ^^^ . Thus
P 1
— V •
and therefore ^ z^_^ is the probability that the play will terminate
Li
at the fl?*^ game, relative to this case.
Next suppose that the winner of the money starts with a player
who has won two games ; let P' denote the probability of this
P'
event ; then -^ will be the corresponding probability that the play
P'
will terminate at the x^"^ game. And -^^ = z^_^ : for in order that
the play should terminate at the (ic— 2)"* game it is necessary that
a player who has already won two games just before the (a; — 72+ 1)"'
LAPLACE. 537
game should win this, game and the n — 2 following games. Thus
F' 1
and therefore ^ z^_^ is the probability that the play will terminate
at the ic*^ sfame relative to this case.
By proceeding thus, and collecting all the partial probabilities
we obtain
1 1 )_ 1 n\
Suppose that z^ is the coefficient of f in the expansion accord-
ing to powers of ^ of a certain function u of this variable. Then
from (1) we have, as in Art. 937,
F(t)
u =
111 1
-*• 2 " 92 '' 2^ * " 2'*"'^
where -F (^) is a function of t which is at present undetermined.
Now if (1) were true for x = n SiS well as for higher values of
n, the function F(t) would be of the degree n — 1. But (1) does
not hold when x — n, for in forming (1) the player who wins the
money was supposed to start against an opponent who had won
one game at least ; so that in (1) we cannot suppose x to be less
than n-\-l. Hence the function F [t) will be of the degree n,
and we may put
a^ + ait + ctf + . • . + a.f'
u =
111 1
Now the play cannot terminate before the ?i*'' game, and the pro-
bability of its terminating at the n^^ game is ^^^ ; therefore a^
vanishes for values of x less than n, and a,, = — — • . Thus
538 LxlPLACE.
The coefficient of f in the expansion of u in powers of t gives
the probabiHty that the play will terminate at the x^^ game.
The probability that the play will terminate at or before the
x^^ game will be the sum of the coefficients of f and of the inferior
jDOwers of t in the expansion of u, which will be equal to the co-
u
efficient of f in the expansion of- ; that is, it will be the co-
efficient of f in the ex^Dansion of
1 f (2 - t)
This expression is equal to
1 r(2-o f f f r \
¥ {l-tf \ T (1 - "^ 2'^' (1 - tf 2^''(l-/)-^'^ ""J '
The T^^ term of this development is
(- 1)*--^ (2 - 1) r
9r/i,
r+l >
that is
( 1) l^™-! (^1
ty^^ ^rn ^^ _ ^y^lj •
The expansion in powers of t of this r* term may now be
readily effected ; the coefficient of f will be
f 1 \ic-\-r — rii \ \x -\-r — rii — 1
(- ) I 2^^ \x-rn \r ~ W' \x-rn-\ [T j '
/ 2y-i \x -\-r — rn — 1
that is ^-TTri— , {x — rn + 2r).
^"^"^ x — rn\r ^ ^
The final result is that the probability that the play will termi-
nate at or before the x^^ game, is represented by as many terms
of the following series as there are units in the integer next
below - :
n
1 2 3~2^ ^ - o;i + uj — . . .
LAPLACE. 539
The sum of the coefficients of every power of t up to infinity
in the expansion of u will represent the probability that the play
will terminate if there be no limit assigned to the number of games.
But the sum of these coefficients will be equal to the value of i6
when t is made equal to unity ; and this value of u is unity. Hence
we infer that the probability of the termination of the play may
be made as near to unity as we please by allowing a sufficient
number of games.
983. In Laplace's own solution no notice is taken of the fact
that equation (1) does not hold for x = n. Professor De Morgan
remarks in a note to Art. 52 of the Theory of Probabilities in the
EnciJclopcBdia Metropolitana,
Laplace (p. 240) has omitted all allusion to this circumstance ; and
the omission is highly characteristic of his method of writing. ISTo one
was more sure of giving the result of an analytical process correctly, and
no one ever took so little care to point out the various small considera-
tions on which correctness depends. His Theorie cles Probabilites is by
very much the most difficult mathematical work we have ever met
with, and prmcipally from this circumstance : the Mecanique Celeste has
its full share of the same sort of difficulty; but the analysis is less intri-
cate.
984. We may observe that as Laplace continues his discussion
of Waldegrave's problem he arrives at the following equation in
Finite Differences,
1
i/r, X yr-\ , x-1 "f" ~e)n U i\ x-n ^ j
in integrating this, although his final result is correct, his process is
unsatisfactory, because it depends upon an error we have already
indicated. See Art. 955.
r
985. Laplace's next problem is that relating to a run of
events which was discussed by De Moivre and Condorcet ; see
Arts. 325, G77 : this problem occupies Laplace's pages 247 — 253.
Let 2^ denote the chance of the happening of the event in a
single trial ; let </> {x) denote the probability that in x trials the
540 LAPLACE.
event will happen i times in succession. Then from equation (1)
of Art. 678 by changing the notation we have
^ (x) ^p'+p'-' (1 -p) cj, (x-i) -\-p'-' (1 -p) ct>{x-i-^ 1) + ...
,..+p{l-p)c^{x-2) + (l^p)<t>(x-l) (1).
Laplace takes z^ to denote the probability that the run will
finish at the x^^ trial, and not before ; then he obtains
^x = (1 p) 1^.-1 + P^^, +P\-, + . . . + p"' ^x- j (2).
"VVe may deduce (2) thus ; it is obvious that
z^ = (f>{x)-(f){x-l);
hence in (1) change x into x — 1 and subtract, and we ob-
tain (2).
Laplace proceeds nearly thus. If the run is first completed
at the x^^ trial the (x—iy^ trial must have been unfavourable, and
the following i trials favourable. Laplace then makes ^ distinct
cases.
I. The (x — i— \y^ trial unfavourable.
IL The {x-i-iy^ favourable; and the (a;-f-2y^ un-
favourable.
Ill The [x-i- \y^ and the {x - i- 2)"^ favourable, and the
{x — {— 3) ''^ unfavou rable.
IV. The {^x-i-Vf\ the {x-i-2f\ and the {x-i-Zf
favourable; and the (a;— ^ — 4)^^ unfavourable.
And so on.
Let us take one of these cases, say IV. Let P^ denote the
probability of this case existing ; then will
For in this case a run of 3 has been obtained, and if this be
followed by a run of /— 3, of which the chance is p^'"^, we obtain
a run of i ending at the [x — 4)*^ trial.
Now the part of z^ which arises from this case IV. is FJ(\. —p) j/\
for we require an unfavourable result at the {x — if^ trial, of
LAPIACE. 541
which the chance is 1—p, and then a run of t. Thus the part
of z^ is
'X
Z
^(1-i^)/^ or^/(l-^;)^,_,.
We have said that Laplace adopts nearly the method we have
given ; but he is rather obscure. In the method we have given
P^ denotes the probability of the following compound event : no
run of i before the (ic — /— 4)^^ trial, the (a?— ^— 4)^^ trial un-
favourable, and then the next three trials favourable. Similarly
our Pg would denote the probability of the following compound
event; no run of i before the (a? — ^ — 2)^^ trial, the {x—i—Tf^
trial unfavourable, and the next trial favourable. Laplace says,
Nommons P' la probability qu'il n'arrivera pas au coup x — i—%
Now Laplace does not formally say that there is to be no run of
i before the {x — i— 2)^^ trial ; but this must be understood. Then
his P agrees with our Pj if we omit the last of the three clauses
which form our account of the probability represented by Pg ; so
that in fact pP' with Laplace denotes the same as F^ with us.
Laplace gives the integral of the equation (2), and finally ob-
tains the same result as we have exhibited in Art. 325.
986. Laplace then proceeds to find the probability that one
of two players should have a run of i successes before the other ;
this investigation adds nothing to what Condorcet had given, but
is more commodious in form. Laplace's result on his page 250
will be found on examination to d^^t^o, with what we have griven
in Art. 680, after Condorc3t.
Laplace then supplies some new matter, in which he considers
the expectation of each player supposing that after failiug he
deposits a franc, and that the sum of the deposits is taken by him
who first has a run of i successes.
987. Laplace's next problem is the following. An urn con-
tains 71 + 1 balls marked respectively 0, 1, ... w ; a ball is drawn
and replaced : required the probability that after i drawings the
sum of the numbers drawn will be s. This problem and applica-
tions of it occupy pages 253 — 261. See Arts. 888, 915.
The problem is due to De Moivre ; see Arts. 149, 364. La-
place's solution of the problem is very laborious. We will pass to
542 LAPLACE.
the application which Laphxce makes of the result to the subject
of the planes of motion of the planets.
By proceeding as in Art. 148, we find that the probability that
after i drawings the sum of the numbers drawn will be s is the
coefficient of x^ in the expansion of
— ^ (1 - ic^^y (1 - xY\
Thus we obtain for the required probability
1 { \i+s-l i U*+s-n-2
[n-^Vf Mi-l \s 1 [i:il Lf^i^^ij^l
i[i-\) h' + g-2;2~3
1.2 ^-l 5-2^
If the balls are marked respectively 0, Q, 2^, 8^, ,.,nd, this
expression gives the probability that after i drawings the sum of
the numbers drawn will be sQ.
Now suppose to become indefinitely small, and n and 5 to
become indefinitely great. The above expression becomes ulti-
mately
i-\ \\nl \\n 1 ^ 1.2 \n j '" n
s 1
Let - be denoted by x, and - by dx, so that we obtain
n " ' n
this expression may be regarded as the conclusion of the follow-
ing problem. The numerical result at a single trial must lie
between and 1, and all fractional values are equally probable :
determine the probability that after { trials the sum of the results
obtained will lie between x and x + dx^ where dx is indefinitely
small.
Hence if we require the probability that after i trials the sum
of the results obtained will lie between x^ and x^, we m